This document has been updated as of 6/16/2010.  A new abbreviated Table of Contents is listed before the Title page and prefaces. The original table of contents has been updated and moved to page lxxxvii. Both tables have hyperlinks to the specific text in the document.

 

Notes for Electronic Edition.

 

Please report any errors to Louis Sorenson:    louis@letsreadgreek.com. This document is an updated version of the Word document produced by Ted Hildebrant of Gordon Collage, Wenham MA.  Changes to Dr. Hildebrant’s edition are as follows:

·       Greek text changed to Cardo font and converted into Unicode and embedded.

·       Hebrew text change to Ezra Sil font and converted into Unicode and embedded.

·       Document changed to 8.5 x 14 inches to allow for text and font changes without changing the pagination.

·       Header with page numbers added, so printed page number matches the actual page number. Word’s Goto page functions now work for the index Roman numeral pages and the numbered pages.

·       Numerous typographical errors were corrected.

·       Many of the above changes are for the purpose of changing the document into a web format.

·       Section Breaks between Division Chapters

·       Replaced the original Table of Contents with a Microsoft Word generated Table of Contents and moved if from pp. xxi-lxii to pp. lxxxvii ff.  This was done in order to leave the page numbering of the preface the same (except for the Table of Contents page numbering).  There are a few extra headings which were in the running text but not in Robertson’s original outline. The TOC now has links to the various sections.

·       Fixed MS Word’s Hebrew so that it can be cut and pasted into a text document and keep the correct word order (Replaced the 202B (left-to-right) character with a 202C character after each Hebrew string of words).

·       Chapter Titles added to every right-side page.

 

Yet to Do:

·       Divide indexes into separate columns. Currently the flow is as a single column for the whole page.

·       Put footnotes in consecutive order (on separate lines)

·       Remove page number and Chapter / Book Title from 1st line of every page, as they are now part of the header

·       Put all headers on a separate line.

·       Create a paragraph version and remove the carriage returns and hyphenation at the end of most lines.

·       Add hyperlinked bookmarks (page numbers) at the start of every page (for html edition)

·       Convert into HTML

·       Add links to the Additional notes in the main body of the text

 

 


 

 

 

 

 

 

Quick-View Table of Contents

(In MS Word, Control+Click on page number to go to section.)


Notes for Electronic Edition.................................................................................................................. i

Quick-View Table of Contents.............................................................................................................. ii

PREFACE............................................................................................................................... vii

PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION............................................................................................... xv

PREFACE TO THIRD EDITION................................................................................................. xvii

LIST OF WORKS MOST OFTEN REFERRED TO.......................................................................... lxiii

ADDITIONAL BIBLIOGRAPHY FOR THIRD EDITION................................................................ lxxxv

Table of Contents (Detailed)............................................................................................. lxxxvii

PART I:   INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................... - 1 -

CHAPTER I:  NEW MATERIAL.................................................................................................... 3

CHAPTER II:  THE HISTORICAL METHOD.................................................................................. 31

CHAPTER III:   THE ΚΟΙΝΗ................................................................................................... 49

CHAPTER IV:   THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH........................................... 76

PART II ACCIDENCE............................................................................................................. 142

CHAPTER V:   WORD–FORMATION........................................................................................ 143

CHAPTER VI:  ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS...................................................................... 177

CHAPTER VII:   THE DECLENSIONS (ΚΛΙΣΕΙΣ)....................................................................... 246

CHAPTER VIII:   CONJUGATION OF THE VERB ( ῬΗΜΑ)......................................................... 303

PART III    SYNTAX................................................................................................................ 378

CHAPTER IX:   THE MEANING OF SYNTAX (ΣΥΝ ΤΑΞΙΣ)....................................................... 379

CHAPTER X:   THE SENTENCE................................................................................................ 390

CHAPTER XI:   THE CASES (ΠΤΩΣΕΙΣ).................................................................................. 446

CHAPTER XII:   ADVERBS (  ἘΠΙΡΡΗΜΑΤΑ)........................................................................ 544

CHAPTER XIII:   PREPOSITIONS (ΠΡΟΘΕΣΕΙΣ)..................................................................... 553

CHAPTER XIV:  ADJECTIVES ( ἘΠΙΘΕΤΑ)............................................................................. 650

CHAPTER XV:   PRONOUNS ( ἈΝΤΩΝΥΜΙΑΙ)...................................................................... 676

CHAPTER XVI:   THE ARTICLE (ΤΟ   ἌΡΘΡΟΝ).................................................................... 754

CHAPTER XVII:   VOICE (ΔΙΑΘΕΣΙΣ, Genus).......................................................................... 797

CHAPTER XVIII:   TENSE (ΧΡΟΝΟΣ).................................................................................... 821

CHAPTER XIX:  MODE (ἜΓΚΛΙΣΙΣ)...................................................................................... 911

CHAPTER XX:  VERBAL NOUNS (ὈΝΟΜΑΤΑ ΤΟΥ ῬΗΜΑΤΟΣ)...................................... 1050

CHAPTER XXI:   PARTICLES (ΑΙ  ΠΑΡΑΘΗΚΑΙ)................................................................... 1142

CHAPTER XXII:   FIGURES OF SPEECH (ΓΟΡΓΙΕΙΑ  ΣΧΗΜΑΤΑ).......................................... 1194

ADDITIONAL NOTES...................................................................................................................... 1209

INDEX OF SUBJECTS....................................................................................................................... 1223

INDEX OF GREEK WORDS............................................................................................................... 1249

INDEX OF QUOTATIONS................................................................................................................. 1291

ADDENDA TO THE SECOND EDITION............................................................................................... 1377

ADDENDA TO THE THIRD EDITION.................................................................................................. 1385

INDEX TO ADDENDA TO SECOND AND............................................................................................ 1433

ΤHIRD EDITIONS............................................................................................................................ 1433

INDEX OF GREEK WORDS IN THE ADDENDA..................................................................................... 1439

INDEX OF QUOTATIONS IN THE ADDENDA........................................................................... 1443

 


 

GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW

TESTAMENT IN THE LIGHT OF

HISTORICAL RESEARCH

 

 

 

 

BY

A. T. ROBERTSON, M.A., D.D., LL.D., LITT.D.

Professor of Interpretation of the New Testament in the

Southern Baptist Theological Seminary

Louisville, Ky.

 

 

 

 

 

Digitized by Ted Hildebrandt at Gordon College, Wenham, MA

March 2006

 

Hebrew and Greek Transformed into Unicode

and additional formatting and corrections

(Greek: Cardo; Hebrew Ezra SIL)

by Louis Sorenson, Minneapolis, MN

October 2009

 

 

Ἔχομεν δὲ τὸν θησαυρὸν τοῦτον ἐν ὁστρακίνοις σκεύσειν,

ἵνα ἡ ὑπεβολὴ τῆς δυνάμεως ᾗ του θεοῦ καὶ μὴ ἐξ ἡμῶν.

— 2 COR. 4:7

 

 

 

 

 

THIRD EDITION

HODDER & STOUGHTON

LONDON : : : MCMXIX (1919)

 


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

COPYRIGHT, 1914, BY

GEORGE H. DORAN COMPANY

SECOND EDITION, REVISED AND ENLARGED

COPYRIGHT, 1915, BY

GEORGE H. DORAN COMPANY

THIRD EDITION, REVISED AND ENLARGED

COPYRIGHT, 1919, BY

GEORGE H. DORAN COMPANY

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Composition, Electrotyping, and Presswork:

THE UNIVERSITY PRESS, CAMBRIDGE, U. S. A.

 


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

TO

 

THE MEMORY OF

 

 

John A. Broadus

 

SCHOLAR     TEACHER        PREACHER

 

 

 

Preface
Preface to 2nd Edition

Preface to 3rd Edition

Table of Contents

 


 


                                      PREFACE

 

          IT is with mingled feelings of gratitude and regret that I let

this book go to the public. I am grateful for God's sustaining

grace through so many years of intense work and am fully con-

scious of the inevitable imperfections that still remain. For a

dozen years this Grammar has been the chief task of my life. I

have given to it sedulously what time was mine outside of my

teaching. But it was twenty-six years ago that my great prede-

cessor in the chair of New Testament Interpretation proposed to

his young assistant that they together get out a revised edition

of Winer. The manifest demand for a new grammar of the New

Testament is voiced by Thayer, the translator of the American

edition of Winer's Grammar, in his article on "Language of the

New Testament" in Hastings' Dictionary of the Bible.

          I actually began the work and prepared the sheets for the first

hundred pages, but I soon became convinced that it was not

possible to revise Winer's Grammar as it ought to be done without

making a new grammar on a new plan. So much progress

had been made in comparative philology and historical grammar

since Winer wrote his great book that it seemed useless to go on

with it. Then Dr. Broadus said to me that he was out of it by

reason of his age, and that it was my task. He reluctantly gave

it up and pressed me to go on. From that day it was in my

thoughts and plans and I was gathering material for the great

undertaking. If Schmiedel had pushed through his work, I

might have stopped. By the time that Dr. James Hope Moulton

announced his new grammar, I was too deep into the enterprise

to draw back. And so I have held to the titanic task somehow

till the end has come. There were many discouragements and I

was often tempted to give it up at all costs. No one who has

not done similar work can understand the amount of research,

the mass of detail and the reflection required in a book of this

nature. The mere physical effort of writing was a joy of expres-

sion in comparison with the rest. The title of Cauer's brilliant

book, Grammatica Militans (now in the third edition), aptly

describes the spirit of the grammarian who to-day attacks the

                                            vii


 

viii   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

problems of the language of the New Testament in the light of

historical research.

          From one point of view a grammar of the Greek New Testa-

ment is an impossible task, if one has to be a specialist in the

whole Greek language, in Latin, in Sanskrit, in Hebrew and the

other Semitic tongues, in Church History, in the Talmud, in

English, in psychology, in exegesis.1 I certainly lay no claim to

omniscience. I am a linguist by profession and by love also, but

I am not a specialist in the Semitic tongues, though I have a

working knowledge of Hebrew and Aramaic, but not of Syriac

and Arabic.  The Coptic and the Sanskrit I can use. The Latin

and the Greek, the French and German and Anglo-Saxon com-

plete my modest linguistic equipment. I have, besides, a smat-

tering of Assyrian, Dutch, Gothic and Italian.

          I have explained how I inherited the task of this Grammar

from Broadus: He was a disciple of Gessner Harrison, of the

University of Virginia, who was the first scholar in America to

make use of Bopp's Vergleichende Grammatik. Broadus' views

of grammar were thus for long considered queer by the students

who came to him trained in the traditional grammars and unused

to the historical method; but he held to his position to the end.

          This Grammar aims to keep in touch at salient points with the

results of comparative philology and historical grammar as the

true linguistic science. In theory one should be allowed to as-

sume all this in a grammar of the Greek N. T., but in fact that

cannot be done unless the book is confined in use to a few tech-

nical scholars. I have tried not to inject too much of general

grammar into the work, but one hardly knows what is best when

the demands are so varied. So many men now get no Greek

except in the theological seminary that one has to interpret for

them the language of modern philology. I have simply sought

in a modest way to keep the Greek of the N. T. out in the middle

of the linguistic stream as far as it is proper to do so. In actual

class use some teachers will skip certain chapters.

          Alfred Gudemann,2 of Munich, says of American classical

scholars: "Not a single contribution marking genuine progress,

no work on an extensive scale, opening up a new perspective or

breaking entirely new ground, nothing, in fact, of the slightest

scientific value can be placed to their credit." That is a serious

charge, to be sure, but then originality is a relative matter. The

 

            1 Cf. Dr. James Moffatt's remarks in The Expositor, Oct., 1910, p. 383 f.

            2 The Cl. Rev., .June, 1909, p. 116.

 


 

                                          PREFACE                                     ix

 

true scholar is only too glad to stand upon the shoulders of his

predecessors and give full credit at every turn. Who could make

any progress in human knowledge but for the ceaseless toil of

those1 who have gone before? Prof. Paul Shorey,2 of the Uni-

versity of Chicago, has a sharp answer to Prof. Gudemann. He 

speaks of "the need of rescuing scholarship itself from the

German yoke." He does not mean "German pedantry and

superfluous accuracy in insignificant research — but . . . in all

seriousness from German inaccuracy." He continues about "the

disease of German scholarship" that "insists on 'sweat-boxing'

the evidence and straining after 'vigorous and rigorous' demon-

stration of things that do not admit of proof." There probably

are German scholars guilty of this grammatical vice (are Amer-

ican and British scholars wholly free?). But I wish to record my

conviction that my own work, such as it is, would have been im-

possible but for the painstaking and scientific investigation of the

Germans at every turn. The republic of letters is cosmopolitan.

In common with all modern linguists I have leaned upon Brug-

mann and Delbrtick as masters in linguistic learning.

          I cannot here recite my indebtedness to all the scholars whose

books and writings have helped me. But, besides Broadus, I

must mention Gildersleeve as the American Hellenist whose wit

and wisdom have helped me over many a hard place. Gilder-

sleeve has spent much of his life in puncturing grammatical

bubbles blown by other grammarians. He exercises a sort of

grammatical censorship. "At least whole grammars have been

constructed about one emptiness."3 It is possible to be "grammar

mad," to use The Independent's phrase.4 It is easy to scout all

grammar and say: "Grammar to the Wolves."5 Browning sings

in A Grammarian's Funeral:

                   "He settled Hoti's business — let it be!

                                Properly based Oun

                    Gave us the doctrine of the enclitic De,

                         Dead from the waist down."

 

            1 F. H. Colson, in an article entitled "The Grammatical Chapters in Quin-

tilian," I, 4–8 (The Cl. Quarterly, Jan., 1914, p. 33), says: "The five chapters

which Quintilian devotes to ‘Grammatica’ are in many ways the most valuable

discussion of the subject which we possess," though he divides "grammatica"

into "grammar" and "literature," and (p. 37) "the whole of this chapter is

largely directed to meet the objection that grammar is ‘tenuis et jejuna.’"

            2 The Cl. Weekly, May 27, 1911, p. 229.

            3 Gildersleeve, Am. Jour. of Philol., July, 1909, p. 229.       4 1911,         717.

            5 Article by F. A. W. Henderson, Blackwood for May, 1906.

 


x        A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

Perhaps those who pity the grammarian do not know that he

finds joy in his task and is sustained by the conviction that his

work is necessary. Prof. C. F. Smith (The Classical Weekly,

1912, p. 150) tells of the joy of the professor of Greek at Bonn

when he received a copy of the first volume of Gildersleeve's

Syntax of Classical Greek. The professor brought it to the Semi-

nar and "clasped and hugged it as though it were a most precious

darling (Liebling)." Dr. A. M. Fairbairn1 once said: "No man

can be a theologian who is not a philologian. He who is no

grammarian is no divine." Let Alexander McLaren serve as a

good illustration of that dictum. His matchless discourses are

the fruit of the most exact scholarship and spiritual enthusiasm.

I venture to quote another defence of the study of Greek which

will, I trust, yet come back to its true place in modern education.

Prof. G. A. Williams, of Kalamazoo College, says2: "Greek yet

remains the very best means we have for plowing up and wrink-

ling the human brain and developing its gray matter, and wrinkles

and gray matter are still the most valuable assets a student can

set down on the credit side of his ledger."

          Dr. J. H. Moulton has shown that it is possible to make gram-

mar interesting, as Gildersleeve had done before him. Moulton

protests3 against the notion that grammar is dull: "And yet there

is no subject which can be made more interesting than grammar,

a science which deals not with dead rocks or mindless vegetables,

but with the ever changing expression of human thought." I

wish to acknowledge here my very great indebtedness to Dr.

Moulton for his brilliant use of the Egyptian papyri in proof of

the fact that the New Testament was written in the vernacular

κοινή. Deissmann is the pioneer in this field and is still the

leader in it. It is hard to overestimate the debt of modern New

Testament scholarship to his work. Dr. D. S. Margoliouth, it is

true, is rather pessimistic as to the value of the papyri: "Not one

per cent. of those which are deciphered and edited with so much

care tell us anything worth knowing."4 Certainly that is too

 

            1 Address before the Baptist Theological College at Glasgow, reported in

The British Weekly, April 26, 1906.

            2 The Cl. Weekly, April 16, 1910.

            3 London Quarterly Review, 1908, p. 214. Moulton and Deissmann also

disprove the pessimism of Hatch (Essays in Biblical Greek, p. 1): "The lan-

guage of the New Testament, on the other hand, has not yet attracted the

special attention of any considerable scholar. There is no good lexicon.

There is no good philological commentary. There is no adequate grammar."

            4 The Expositor, Jan., 1912, p. 73.


 

                                        PREFACE                              xi

 

gloomy a statement. Apart from the linguistic value of the

papyri and the ostraca which has been demonstrated, these

letters and receipts have interest as human documents. They

give us real glimpses of the actual life of the common people in

the first Christian centuries, their joys and their sorrows, the

little things that go so far to make life what it is for us all. But

the student of the Greek New Testament finds a joy all his own

in seeing so many words in common use that were hitherto found

almost or quite alone in the New Testament or LXX. But the

grammar of the N. T. has also had a flood of light thrown on it

from the papyri, ostraca and inscriptions as a result of the work

of Deissmann; Mayser, Milligan, Moulton, Radermacher, Thumb,

Volker, Wilcken and others. I have gratefully availed myself of

the work of these scholars and have worked in this rich field for

other pertinent illustrations of the New Testament idiom. The

material is almost exhaustless and the temptation was constant

to use too much of it. I have not thought it best to use so much

of it in proportion as Radermacher has done, for the case is now

proven and what Moulton and Radermacher did does not have

to be repeated. As large as my book is, the space is precious for

the New Testament itself. But I have used the new material

freely. The book has grown so that in terror I often hold

back. It is a long step from Winer, three generations ago, to

the present time. We shall never go back again to that stand-

point. Winer was himself a great emancipator in the gram-

matical field. But the battles that he fought are now ancient

history.

          It is proper to state that the purpose of this Grammar is not

that of the author's Short Grammar which is now in use in various

modern languages of America and Europe. That book has its

own place. The present volume is designed for advanced stu-

dents in theological schools, for the use of teachers, for scholarly

pastors who wish a comprehensive grammar of the Greek New

Testament on the desk for constant use, for all who make a

thorough study of the New Testament or who are interested in

the study of language, and for libraries. If new editions come,

as I hope, I shall endeavour to make improvements and correc-

tions. Errata are sure to exist in a book of this nature.  Occa-

sionally (cf. Accusative with Infinitive) the same subject is

treated more than once for the purpose of fulness at special

points. Some repetition is necessary in teaching. Some needless

repetition can be eliminated later. I may explain also that the

 


xii   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

works used by me in the Bodleian Library and the British Mu-

seum had the citations copied twice with double opportunity for

errors of reference, but I have guarded that point to the best of

my ability. I have been careful to give credit in detail to the

many works consulted.

          But, after all is said, I am reluctant to let my book slip away

from my hands. There is so much yet to learn. I had hoped

that Mayser's Syntax der griechischen Papyri could have ap-

peared so that I could have used it, but he sorrowfully writes me

that illness has held him back. Neither Helbing nor Thackeray

has finished his Syntax of the LXX. The N. T. Vocabulary of

Moulton and Milligan, though announced, has not yet appeared.

Deissmann's Lexicon is still in the future. Thumb's revision of

Brugmann's Griechische Grammatik appeared after my book had

gone to the press.1 I could use it only here and there. The same

thing is true of Debrunner's revision of Blass' Grammatik des

neatest. Griechisch. New light will continue to be turned on the

Greek Of the N. T.  Prof. J. Rendel Harris (The Expository Times,

Nov., 1913, p. 54 f.) points out, what had not been recently no-

ticed, that Prof. Masson, in his first edition of Winer in 1859,

p. vii, had said:  "The diction of the New Testament is the plain

and unaffected Hellenic of the Apostolic Age, as employed by

Greek-speaking Christians when discoursing on religious sub-

jects . . . Apart from the Hebraisms — the number of which

has, for the most part, been grossly exaggerated — the New

Testament may be considered as exhibiting the only genuine

fac-simile of the colloquial diction employed by unsophisticated

Grecian gentlemen of the first century, who spoke without

pedantry — as ἰδιῶται and not as σοφισταί." The papyri have

simply confirmed the insight of Masson in 1859 and of Lightfoot

in 1863 (Moulton, Prol., p. 242). One's mind lingers with fas-

cination over the words of the New Testament as they meet

him in unexpected contexts in the papyri, as when ἀρετή (cf.

1 Pet. 2 : 9) occurs in the sense of 'Thy Excellency,' ἔχω παρα-

σχεῖν τῇ σῇ ἀρετῇ, 0. P. 1131, 11 f. (v/A.D.), or when ὑπερῷον (Ac.

1:13) is used of a pigeon-house, τὸν ὑπερῷον τόπον τῆς ὑπαρχούσης

αὐτῷ ἐν Μουχινὺρ οἰκίας, 0. P. 1127, 5-7 (A.D. 183). But the book

must now go forth to do its part in the elucidation of the New

 

            1 Prof. E. H. Sturtevant (Cl. Weekly, Jan. 24, 1914, p. 103) criticises Thumb

because he retains in his revision of Brugmann's book the distinction between

accidence and syntax, and so is "not abreast of the best scholarship of the

day." But for the N.T. the distinction is certainly useful.

 


                                     PREFACE                                     xiii

 

Testament, the treasure of the ages.1 I indulge the hope that

the toil has not been all in vain. Marcus Dods (Later Letters,

p. 248) says:, "I admire the grammarians who are content to

add one solid stone to the permanent temple of knowledge in-

stead of twittering round it like so many swallows and only

attracting attention to themselves." I make no complaint of the

labour of the long years, for I have had my reward in a more

intimate knowledge of the words of Jesus and of his reporters

and interpreters.  Τὰ ῥήματα ἃ ἐγὼ λελάληκα ὑμῖν πνεῦμά ἐστιν καὶ

ζωή ἐστιν (Jo. 6:63).

          I must record my grateful appreciation of the sympathy and

help received from many friends all over the world as I have

plodded on through the years. My colleagues in the Seminary

Faculty have placed me under many obligations in making it

possible for me to devote myself to my task and in rendering

substantial help. In particular Pres. E. Y. Mullins and Prof.

J. R. Sampey have been active in the endowment of the plates.

Prof. Sampey also kindly read the proof of the Aramaic and

Hebrew words. Prof. W. 0. Carver graciously read the proof of

the entire book and made many valuable suggestions. Dr. S.

Angus, of Edinburgh, read the manuscript in the first rough

draft and was exceedingly helpful in his comments and sympa-

thy. Prof. W. H  P. Hatch, of the General Episcopal Theological

Seminary, New York, read the manuscript for the publishers and

part of the proof and exhibited sympathetic insight that is greatly

appreciated. Prof. J. S. Riggs, of the Auburn Theological Semi-

nary, read the proof till his health gave way, and was gracious in

his enthusiasm for the enterprise. Prof. Walter Petersen, Ph.D.,

of Bethany College, Lindsborg, Kansas, read all the proof and

freely gave his linguistic attainments to the improvement of the

book. Last, but not least in this list, Mr. H. Scott, of Birken-

head, England, read the book in galley proof, and in the Accidence

verified all the references with minute care and loving interest,

and all through the book contributed freely from his wealth of

knowledge of detail concerning the Greek N. T. The references

in Syntax were verified by a dozen of my students whose labour

of love is greatly appreciated. Pres. J. W. Shepherd, of Rio

Janeiro, Brazil, and Prof. G. W. Taylor, of Pineville, La., had

verified the Scripture references in the MS., which were again

verified in proof. The Index of Quotations has been prepared by

 

          1 Brilliant use of the new knowledge is made by Dr. James Moffatt's New

Testament (A New Translation, 1913).

 


xiv    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

Rev. W. H. Davis, of Richmond College, Va.; the Index of Greek

Words by Rev. S. L. Watson, Tutor of N. T. Greek for this ses-

sion in the Seminary. All this work has been done for me

freely and gladly. The mere recital of it humbles me very much.

Without this expert aid in so many directions the book could

not have been produced at all. I must add, however, that all

errors should be attributed to me. I have done the best that I

could with my almost impossible task. I have had to put on an

old man's glasses during the reading of the proof.

          I must add also my sincere appreciation of the kind words

of Prof. Edwin Mayser of Stuttgart, Oberlehrer H. Stocks of

Cottbus, Pres. D. G. Whittinghill of Rome, Prof. Caspar Rene

Gregory of Leipzig, the late Prof. E. Nestle of Maulbronn, Prof.

James Stalker of Aberdeen, Prof. Giovanni Luzzi of Florence,

Prof. J. G. Machen of Princeton, Profs. G. A. Johnston Ross and

Jas. E. Frame of Union Seminary, and many others who have

cheered me in my years of toil. For sheer joy in the thing Prof.

C. M. Cobern of Allegheny College, Penn., and Mr. Dan Craw-

ford, the author of Thinking Black, have read a large part of the

proof.

          I gladly record my gratitude to Mr. G. W. Norton, Misses

Lucie and Mattie Norton, Mr. R. A. Peter (who gave in memory

of his father and mother, Dr. and Mrs. Arthur Peter), Rev. R.

N. Lynch, Rev. R. J. Burdette, Mr. F. H. Goodridge, and others

who have generously contributed to the endowment of the plates

so that the book can be sold at a reasonable price. I am in-

debted to Mr. K. B. Grahn for kindly co-operation. I am deeply

grateful also to the Board of Trustees of the Seminary for making

provision for completing the payment for the plates.

          It is a pleasure to add that Mr. Doran has shown genuine

enthusiasm in the enterprise, and that Mr. Linsenbarth of the

University Press, Cambridge, has taken the utmost pains in the

final proofreading.

          I should say that the text of Westcott and Hort is followed

in all essentials. Use is made also of the Greek Testaments of

Nestle, Souter, and Von Soden whose untimely death is so re-

cent an event. In the chapter on Orthography and Phonetics

more constant use is made, for obvious reasons, of variations

in the manuscripts than in the rest of the book. It is now four

hundred years since Cardinal Francisco Ximenes de Cisneros

had printed the Greek New Testament under the auspices of

the University of Alcahi or Complutum, near Madrid, though it

 


                PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION            xv

 

was not circulated till 1522. Erasmus got his edition into circu-

lation in 1516. "The Complutensian edition of 1514 was the first

of more than a thousand editions of the New Testament in Greek"

(E. J. Goodspeed, The Biblical World, March, 1914, p. 166). It

thus comes to pass that the appearance of my Grammar marks

the four hundredth anniversary of the first printed Greek New

Testament, and the book takes its place in the long line of aids

to the study of the "Book of Humanity." The Freer Gospels

and the Karidethi Gospels show how much we have to expect

in the way of discovery of manuscripts of the New Testament.

I think with pleasure of the preacher or teacher who under

the inspiration of this Grammar may turn afresh to his Greek

New Testament and there find things new and old, the vital

message all electric with power for the new age. That will be

my joy so long as the book shall find use and service at the hands

of the ministers of Jesus Christ.

                                                                        A. T. ROBERTSON.

LOUISVILLE, KY., 1914.

 

 


 

           PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION

 

          THE second edition has been called for so soon that I did not

have the opportunity for rest that I desired before preparing for

it. But I have gone steadily through the book with eager eyes.

The result is that some five hundred changes have been made in

the text here and there, all for the improvement of the book in

one way or another, besides the Addenda at the end of the book.

Most of the changes are small details, but they are all worth

making. The Addenda are as few as possible because of the great

size of the volume. I have been more than gratified at the kindly

reception accorded the book all over the world in spite of the

distraction of the dreadful war. Many scholars have offered

helpful criticisms for which I am deeply grateful. In particular

I wish to mention Prof. C. M. Cobern, Allegheny College, Mead-

ville, Penn.; Prof. D. F. Estes, Colgate University, Hamilton,

N. Y.; Prof. Basil L. Gildersleeve, The Johns Hopkins Univer-

sity, Baltimore; Prof. E. J. Goodspeed, the University of Chicago;

Prof. D. A. Hayes, Garrett Biblical Institute, Evanston, Ill.;

Prof. James Moffatt, Mansfield College, Oxford, England; Prof.

 


xvi     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

C. W. Peppler, Trinity College, Durham, N. C.; Prof. W. Peter-

sen, Bethany College, Lindsborg; Kansas; Mr. William Pitfield,

Manchester, England; Rev. Dr. Alfred Plummer, Bideford, Eng-

land; Mr. H. Scott, Birkenhead, England; Prof. James Stalker,

United Free Church College, Aberdeen, Scotland; Dr. Gross

Alexander, Nashville, Tenn. I hope that future editions may

make it possible to improve the book still further. Various minor

repetitions have been removed, though more still remain than is

necessary. But the book is at least made more intelligible there-

by. The numerous cross-references help also.

          In the Neutestamentliche Studien (1914) in honour of the seven-

tieth birthday of Dr. Georg Heinrici of the University of Leipzig

there is a paper by Heinrich Schlosser "Zur Geschichte der bib-

lischen Philologie." He tells the story of "the first grammar of

the New Testament Greek" (1655). It is by Georg Pasor and is

entitled Grammatica Graeca Sacra Novi Testamenti Domini nostri

Jesu Christi. His son, Matthias Pasor, Professor of Theology at

Groningen, found his father's manuscript and let it lie for eighteen

years because many held grammatical study to be puerile or

pedantic and the book would have few readers. Finally he pub-

lished it in 1655, since he held grammar to be "clavis scientiarum

omnisque soliclae eruditionis basis  ac fundamentum." He was

cheered by Melanchthon's "fine word": "Theologia vera est

grammatica quaedam divinae vocis." It is only 260 years since

1655.

          New books continue to come out that throw light on the lan-

guage of the New Testament. Part I (through a) of Moulton

and Milligan's Vocabulary of the Greek Testament Illustrated from

the Papyri and Other Non-literary Sources (1914) is now a rich

treasure in the hands of students. Sharp's Epictetus and the New

Testament (1914) is a very helpful monograph full of suggestions.

A note from Dr. Albert Thumb announces that he is at work on

a revision of his Hellenismus. So the good work goes on.

                                                                           A. T. ROBERTSON.

AUGUST, 1915.

 


                      PREFACE TO THIRD EDITION          xvii


          PREFACE TO THIRD EDITION

 

          MY grammar has had to live and do its work in spite of the Great

War, but the time for the Third Edition has come. In a letter Dr.

Alfred Plummer says: "That so technical and expensive a volume

should be already in a third edition in the fifth year of the war is

indeed triumphant evidence of the value of the book. Scientific

grammar is appreciated more widely than one would antecedently

have ventured to expect." These few years have allowed time for

a thorough verification of the multitudinous references. This

enormous task has been done as a labor of love by Mr. H. Scott,

of Birkenhead, England, whose patient skill has placed all users

of the book under a debt of gratitude that can never be paid. He

had already put his invaluable services at my disposal, but now

his leisure permitted him to employ his really wonderful statistical

knowledge of the Greek New Testament for the benefit of stu-

dents. These extremely useful tables are found in the Addenda to

this Edition. I am sure that all New Testament students will

appreciate and profit greatly from these tables.

          A brilliant student of mine, Rev. W. H. Davis, has found some

striking illustrations in the papyri that appear in the Addenda, be-

sides a number from my own readings. Dr. Davis is at work on

the lexical aspects of the papyri and the inscriptions. If his studies

lead him on to prepare a New Testament lexicon, the world will

be the better for such an outcome.

          Mr. J. F. Springer, of New York City, has also made some

valuable contributions which appear in the Addenda. I am in-

debted also to Prof. Robert Law, of Knox College, Toronto, for

errata.

          I have watched with eagerness for criticisms of the book and

have done my best to turn them to the improvement of the gram-

mar. It is gratifying to know that ministers are using it in their

studies as one of the regular tools in the shop. In the classroom

only selected portions can be covered; but the preacher can use it

every day (as many do) in his reading and study of the Greek

New Testament. There are many ministers who read the Greek

New Testament through once a year, some of it every day, be-

sides the solid, critical study of a Gospel or Epistle with commen-

tary, lexicon and grammar. This is the work that pays one a

hundredfold in his preaching. My own reward for the long years

of devotion to this grammar is found in the satisfaction that

 


xviii   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

scholarly ministers are using the book for their own enrichment.

I have been gratified to learn of laymen who use the book regularly.

          Besides the correction of infelicities and errata that could be

found here and there and the Addenda at the end of the volume

I have inserted a detailed Table of Contents which will greatly

aid one in finding topics in the various chapters. The minute

subdivisions with page references will supplement the various

Indices to great advantage. The Index of Greek words, large as

it is, was still incomplete. It has been doubled in this edition by

Mr. Scott's assistance. The Additional Bibliography records the

most important recent contributions.

          Death has been busy with New Testament linguists. Dr. Gross

Alexander, of Nashville, has been claimed by death. Dr. George

Heinrici, of Leipzig, is dead. Dr. Albert Thumb, of Marburg, has

likewise passed on. Dr. H. B. Swete, of Cambridge, and Principal

James Denney, of Glasgow, have also joined the great majority.

These are irreparable losses, but there are others and even greater

ones. Dr. Caspar Rene Gregory, of Leipzig, though seventy years

old, volunteered for the army and was killed in battle in France.

With his death perished the hope of a new and revised edition of

Tischendorf's Novum Testamentum Graece for many years to come.

A younger man must now take hold of this problem and make

available for students the new textual knowledge.

          Dr. James Hope Moulton fell a victim in April, 1917, in the

Mediterranean Sea, to the German submarine. He was placed in

a boat, but after several days succumbed to the exposure and

cold. It was he who first applied in detail Deissmann's discovery

that the New Testament was written in the current κοινή as seen

in the Egyptian papyri. He had planned three volumes on the

New Testament grammar. Volume I (the Prolegomena) appeared

in 1906 (Third Ed., 1908). He had nearly finished Volume II

(Accidence), but had done nothing on Syntax, the most important

of all. His death is an unspeakable calamity, but his work

will live, for his Prolegomena preserves his interpretation of the

New Testament language. The Accidence will appear in due time

(is already in press). Prof. George Milligan, of Glasgow, has

completed the publication of the Vocabulary of the New Testa-

ment.

          The workers die, but the work goes on. It is pleasant to think

that Greek is renewing its grip upon the world. Professors Stuart

and Tewksbury are preparing a grammar and lexicon for Chinese

students of the New Testament. Japan will do likewise. Prof.

 


                       PREFACE TO THIRD EDITION                   xix

 

H. P. Houghton, of Waynesburg College, Pennsylvania, is con-

fident that Greek can be saved for the college and the university,

for "it is the basis of true culture" (The Classical Weekly, Dec. 11,

1916, p. 67). There is nothing like the Greek New Testament to

rejuvenate the world, which came out of the Dark Ages with the

Greek Testament in its hand. Erasmus wrote in the Preface to

his Greek Testament about his own thrill of delight: "These

holy pages will summon up the living image of His mind. They

will give you Christ Himself, talking, healing, dying, rising, the

whole Christ in a word; they will give Him to you in an intimacy

so close that He would be less visible to you if He stood before

your eyes." The Greek New Testament is the New Testament.

All else is translation. Jesus speaks to us out of every page of the

Greek. Many of his ipsissima verba are here preserved for us, for

our Lord often spoke in Greek. To get these words of Jesus it is

worth while to plow through any grammar and to keep on to the

end.

          At the age of sixteen John Brown, of Haddington, startled a

bookseller by asking for a copy of the Greek Testament. He was

barefooted and clad in ragged homespun clothes. He was a shep-

herd boy from the hills of Scotland. "What would you do with

that book?" a professor scornfully asked. "I'll try to read

it," the lad replied, and proceeded to read off a passage in the

Gospel of John. He went off in triumph with the coveted prize,

but the story spread that he was a wizard and had learned Greek

by the black art. He was actually arraigned for witchcraft, but

in 1746 the elders and deacons at Abernethy gave him a vote of

acquittal, though the minister would not sign it. His letter of

defence, Sir W. Robertson Nicoll says (The British Weekly, Oct. 3,

1918), "deserves to be reckoned among the memorable letters of

the world." John Brown became a divinity student and finally

professor of divinity. In the chapel at Mansfield College, Oxford,

Brown's figure ranks with those of Doddridge, Fry, Chalmers,

Vinet, Schleiermacher. He had taught himself Greek while herd-

ing his sheep, and he did it without a grammar. Surely young

John Brown of Haddington should forever put to shame those

theological students and busy pastors who neglect the Greek

Testament, though teacher, grammar, lexicon are at their dis-

posal.

          In Current Opinion for January, 1919, page 18, in an article

called "Europe's Ideas of Wilson the Man," one notes a pertinent

sentence: "President Wilson once told a member of the diplo-

 


xx    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

matic corps in Washington, who repeated it later in Paris, that if

he were going to college all over again he would pay more atten-

tion to the Greek language, and literature, which American uni-

versities, on the whole, neglect." So the scholar-statesman feels.

So the preacher ought to feel.

                                                                       A. T. ROBERTSON.

 


                    The original table of contents were on pages xxi-lxii (pref. 21-62). That table has been moved because the 42 pages in the original table of contents was extended to 46 pages (on legal paper) by including the additional subpoints in the outline which were not included in the original ouline on pages xii-lxiii in the original book. Because the page numbering of the original outline does not match up to the generated MS Word page numbering, the pages xxi to lxii have been moved to after page lxxxvi, that is, after the last page of the Additional Bibliography for the Third Edition.

 

 

The updated table of contents starts on page lxxxvii.



 

 

LIST OF WORKS MOST OFTEN REFERRED TO

 

          I HAD prepared an exhaustive analytic bibliography of the per-

tinent literature, but it was so long that, on the advice of several

friends, I have substituted an alphabetical list of the main works

mentioned in the book. The editions of Greek authors, the pa-

pyri and the inscriptions will be found in the Index of Quota-

tions. Look there for them. For full histories of grammatical

discussion one may turn to Sandys, A History of Classical Scholar-

ship, vols. I–III (1906-1908); Gudemann, Grundriss der Geschichte

der klassischen Philologie (2. Aufl., 1909); and Hubner, Grund-

riss zu Vorlesungen uber die griechische Syntax (1883). By no

means all the works consulted and referred to in the Grammar

are given below. Only the most important can be mentioned.

Hundreds that were consulted are not alluded to in the Gram-

mar. But the following list represents fairly well the works that

have contributed most to the making of my book. The chief

journals quoted are also mentioned here.

 

ABBOTT, E. A., Clue. A Guide through Greek to Hebrew (1904).

______, Johannine Grammar (1906).

_______, Johannine Vocabulary (1905).

Am. J. Ph., The American Journal of Philology (Baltimore).

ALEXANDER, W. J., Participial Periphrases in Attic Orators (Am.

          J. Ph., IV, pp. 291-309).

ALLEN, H. F., The Infinitive in Polybius compared with the In-

          finitive in Biblical Greek (1907).

Am. J. of Sem. L. and Lit., The American Journal of Semitic,

          Languages and Literature (Chicago).

Am. J. of Theol., The American Journal of Theology (Chicago).

ANGUS, S., Modern Methods in New Testament Philology (Har-

          vard Theol. Rev., Oct., 1909).

________. The Κοινή, the Language of the New Testament (Princ.

          Theol. Rev., Jan., 1910).

ANZ, H., Subsidia ad cognoscendum Graecorum sermonem vul-

          garem e Pentateuchi versione Alexandrina repetita (Diss.

          phil. Hal., XII, 1894, pp. 259-387).

 

                                                 lxiii


lxiv    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

APOSTOLIDES, Essai sur l'Hellenisme Egyptien et ses rapports

          avec l'Hellenisme classique et l'Hellenisme moderne (1898).

________, Du grec alexandrin et des rapports avec le grec ancien et le

          grec moderne (1892).

Archiv fur Papyrusforschung und verwandte Gebiete (Leipzig).

ARNAUD, Essai sur le caractere de la langue grec du N. T. (1899).

ARNOLD and CONWAY, The Restored Pronunciation of Greek and

          Latin (1885).

AUDOIN, E., De la declinaison dans les langues indo-europeennes

          (1898).

BABBITT, The Use of Μή in Questions (Harvard Studies in Class.

          Phil., 1901).

BACON, ROGER, Oxford Greek Grammar. Edited by Nolan and

          Hirsch (1902).

BAMBERG, Hauptregeln der griechischen Syntax (1890).

BARON, Le Pronom Relatif et la Conjonctive en Grec (1892).

BARRY, W., The Holy Latin Tongue (Dublin Rev., April, 1906);

          Our Latin Bible (ib., July).

BAUMLEIN, Untersuchungen uber die griech. Modi und die Par-

          tikeln κέν und ἄν (1846).

________, Untersuch. uber griech. Partikeln (1861).

BEKKER, Anecdota Graeca. 3 Bde. (1814-1821).

BE.NARD, Formes verbales en grec d'apres le texte d'Herodote

          (1890).

BERDOLT, Der Konsekutivsatz in der ahem griech. Lit. (1896).

BERNHARDY, G., Wissenschaftliche Syntax der griechischen

          Sprache (1829).

Bibl. Ec. Bibliotheque de l'ecole des hautes Etudes (Paris).

Bibl. Gr. V., Bibliotheque grecque vulgaire (Paris).

Bibl. S., The Bibliotheca Sacra (Oberlin).

Bibl. W., The Biblical World (Chicago).

BIRKE, De Particularum μή et οὐ Usu Polybiano Dionysiaeo Dio-

          doreo Straboniano (1897).

BIRKLEIN, F., Entwickelungsgeschichte des substantivierten In-

          finitivs (1882).

BLASS, F., Acta Apostolorum (1895).

_________, Die griech. Beredsamkeit von Alex. bis auf August. (1865).

________, Die Rhythmen der asianischen und romischen Kunstprosa

          (1905).

________, Die rhythm. Kompos. d. Hebr.-Briefes (Theol. Stud. und

          Krit., 1902, pp. 420-461).

________, Evangelium sec. Lukam (1897).


       LIST OF WORKS MOST OFTEN REFERRED TO                 lxv

 

BLASS, F., Grammatik d. neut. Griech. 2. Aufl. (1902).

________, Hermeneutik and Kritik (1892).

________, Philology of the Gospels (1898).

________, Pronunciation of Ancient Greek (translation by Purton in

          1890 of 3. Aufl. of Uber die Aussprache des Griech. 1888).

BLASS-DEBRUNNER, Grammatik d. neut. Griech. 4. Aufl. (1913).

BLASS-THACKERAY, Grammar of New Testament Greek. 2d ed.

          (1905).

BLOOMFIELD, Study of Greek Accent (A. J. Ph., 1883).

BOHMER, J., Das biblische "im Namen" (1898).

BOISACQ, Les dialectes doriens (1891).

_________, Dictionnaire etymol. de la langue grecque (1907 ff.).

BOLLING, The Participle in Hesiod (Cath. Univ. Bulletin, 1897).

BONHOFFER, A., Epiktet und das N. T. (1911).

BOPP, Vergleichende Grammatik (1857).

Br. W., The British Weekly (London).

BROADUS, JOHN A., Comm. on Matt. (1886).

BROCKELMANN, C., Grunclriss der vergleichenden Grammatik der

          semitischen Sprachen (1907).

BRUGMANN, K., Elements of Comparative Grammar of the Indo-

          Germanic Languages (translation by Wright, 1895).

________, Griechische Grammatik. 3. Aufl. (1900), the ed. quoted.

          Vierte vermehrte Aufl. of A. Thumb (1913).

_________, Grundriss der vergl. Gr. d. indog. Sprachen. 2. Aufl., Bde.

          I, II (1897-1913).

__________, Kurze vergleichende Grammatik der indogermanischen

          Sprachen (1904).

BUCK, C. D., Introduction to the Study of the Greek Dialects

          (1910).

BULTMANN, R., Der Stil der paulinischen Predigt und die kynisch-

          stoische Diatribe (1910).

BURESCH,  Γέγοναν und anderes Vulgdrgriechisch (Rhein. Mus.

          f. Phil., 1891, pp. 193-232).

BURKITT, F. C., Syriac Forms of N. T. Proper Name 1912).

BURROWS, R. M., Discoveries in Crete (1907).

BURTON, E. D., Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the N. T.

          Gk. 3d ed. (1909).

BURTON-ZWAAN, Syntax d. Wijzen etijden in h. Gr. N. T. (1906).

BUTCHER, S. H., Some Aspects of the Greek Genius (1893).

_________, Harvard Lectures on Greek Subjects (1904).

BUTTMANN, A., Grammatik d. neut. Sprachgebrauchs (1859).

BUTTMANN-THAYER, A Grammar of the N. T. Greek (1880).


 

lxvi    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

BYWATER, J., The Erasinian Pronunciation of Greek and its Pre-

          cursors (1908).

Byz. Z., Byzantinische Zeitschrift (Leipzig).

Cambr. Ph. J., Cambridge Philological Journal.

Cath. Univ. Bull., Catholic University Bulletin.

CAUER, Grammatica Militans. 3d ed. (1912).

CHANDLER, H., A Practical Introduction to Greek Accentuation.

          2d ed. (1881).

CHASE, F. H., The Credibility of the Acts (1902).

CHRIST, W., Geschichte der griech. Literatur bis auf die Zeit Jus-

          tinians. 4. Aufl. (1905). 5. Aufl. (1913).

CHURTON, The Influence of the Septuagint upon the Progress of

          Christianity (1861),

CLAFLIN, EDITH, Syntax of Boeotian Dialect Inscriptions (1905).

CLASSEN, J., De Grammaticae Graecae Primordiis (1829).

Cl. Ph., Classical Philology (Chicago).

Cl. Q., Classical Quarterly (London).

Cl. Rev., Classical Review (London).

Cl. W., Classical Weekly (New York).

CLYDE, J., Greek Syntax (1876).

COMPERNASS, De Sermone Gr. Volg. Pisidiae Phrygiaeque men-

          dionalis (1895).

CONYBEARE and STOCK Selections from the LXX. A Gram-

          matical Introduction (1905).

COURTOZ, Les Prefixes en Grec, en Latin et en Francais (1894).

CREMER, H., Biblico-Theological Lexicon of N. T. Greek (1892).

          Urwick's translation.

_________, Bibl.-theol. Worterbuch d. neut. Gracitat. 9. Aufl. (1902)

          Cremer-Kogel, neue Aufl. (1912).

CRONERT, W., Memoria Graeca Herculanensis (1903).

_________, Questiones Herculanenses (1898).

CRUM, W. E., Coptic Ostraca from the Collections of the Egypt

          Exploration Fund, the Cairo Museum and others (1902).

CURTIUS, G., Greek Etymology. 2 vols. (1886).

_________, Studien zur griech. and lat. Grammatik (1868-1878).

DALMAN, G., Grammatik des judisch-palastinischen Aramaisch

          (1894).

_________, Worte Jesu (1902).

_________, The Words of Jesus (1902). Translation by D. M. Kay.

DAWES, E. S., Pronunciation of the Gk. Aspirates (1894).

D. B., Dictionary of the Bible (Hastings, 1898-1904).

D. C. G., Dictionary of Christ and the Gospels (Hastings, 1906).


         LIST OF WORKS MOST OFTEN REFERRED TO            lxvii

 

DEISSMANN, A., Bible Studies (1901). Tr. by A. Grieve; cf. Bibel-

          studien (1895) and Neue Bibelstudien (1897).

________, Biblische Gracitat etc. (Theol. Rundschau, Okt. 1912).

________, Die Hellenisierung des semitischen Monotheismus (N.

          Jahrb. f. d. kl. Alt., 1903).

________, Die neut. Formel "in Christo" (1892).

________, Die Sprache d. griech. Bibel (Theol. Rundschau, 1906,

          No. 116).

________, Die Urgeschichte des Christentums im Lichte der Sprach-

          forschung (Intern. Woch., 30. Okt. 1909).

________, Hellenistisches Griechisch (Herzog-Hauck's Realencyc., VII,

          1899).

_________, Licht vom Osten (1908).

_________, Light from the Ancient East (1910). Tr. by Stachan.

_________, New Light on the N. T. (1907). Tr. by Strachan.

_________, Papyri (Encyc. Bibl., III, 1902).

_________, St. Paul in the Light of Social and Religious History (1912).

DELBRIYCE, B., Ablativ Localis Instrumentalis (1867).

_________, Grundriss der vergl. Gramm. d. indog. Spracheh. Syntax.

          Bde. III-V (1893, 1897, 1900).

_________, Introduction to the Study of Language (1882). Einleitung

          in das Sprachstudium. 4. Aufl. (1904). 5. Aufl. (1913).

_________, Syntaktische Forschungen. 5 Bde. (1871-1888).

DICK, Der schriftstellerische Plural bei Paulus (1900).1

DICKEY, S., New Points of View for the Study of the Greek of the

          N. T. (Princeton Theol. Rev., Oct., 1903).

DIEL, De enuntiatis finalibus apud graecarum rerum scriptores

          posterioris aetatis (1894).

DIETERICH, K., Untersuchungen zur Geschichte der Sprache von

          der hellen. Zeit bis zum 10. Jahrh. n. Chr. (1898).

DONALDSON, J. W., The New Cratylus (1859).

DRAEGER, Hist. Syntax d. lat. Sprache (1878-1881).

          Dubl. Rev., The Dublin Review (Dublin).

DURR, Sprachliche Untersuchungen (1899).

DYROFF, A., Geschichte des Pronomen Reflexivum (1892, 1893).

EARLE, M. L., Classical Papers (1912).

EBELING, H., Griechisch-deutsches Worterbuch zum N. T. (1913).

ECKINGER, Die Orthographie lateinischer Wirter in griech. In-

          schriften (1893).

E. G. T., Expositor's Greek Testament.

Encyc. Bibl., Encyclopaedia Biblica.

Encyc. Brit., Encyclopaedia Britannica. 11th ed. (1910).


lxviii   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

ENGEL, E., Die Aussprache des Griechischen (1887).

ERNAULT, Du Parfait en Grec et en Latin (1886).

EVANS, A. J., Cretan Pictographs and Pre-Phoenician Script

          (1895).

________, Further Researches (1898).

Exp., The Expositor (London).

Expos. T., The Expository Times (Edinburgh).

FARNELL, L. R., Greek Conditional and Relative Sentences (1892).

FARRAR, F. W., Greek Syntax (1876).

FICK-BECHTEL, Die griechischen Personennamen. 2.1Aufl. (1894).

FIELD, F., Otium NorVicense. Pars Tertia (1881).

FLENSBERG, Uber Ursprung und Bildung des Pron. αὐτός (1893).

FOWLER, The Negatives of the Indo-European Languages (1896).

FOY, K., Lautsystem der griech. Vulgarsprache (1879).

FRANKEL, Griechische Denominativa (1906).

FRENZEL, Die Entwickr des relativen Satzbaues im Griech. (1889).

________, Die Entwick. der Satze mit πρίν (1896).

FUCHS, A., Die Temporalsatze mit den Konjunktionen "bis" und

          "so lang als" (1902).

FUHRER, De Particulae ὡς cum Participiis et Praepos. punctae

          Usu Thucydideo (1889).

GALLOWAY, W. F., On the Use of Μή with the Participle in Clas-

          sical Greek (1897). 

GEDDES, A Compendious Greek Grammar (1888).

GELDART, The Modern Greek Language in Its Relation to An-

          cient Greek (1870).

GERSDORF, C. G., Beitrage zur Sprachcharakteristik der Schrift-

          steller des N. T. (1816).

GESENIUS-KATITZSCH, Hebrew Grammar.

GEYER, M., Observationes epigraphicae de praepositionum graec.

          forma et usu (1880).

GILDERSLEEVE, B. L., Editions of Pindar and Justin Martyr.

________, Latin Grammar. Many editions since 1867.

________, Notes on Stahl's Syntax of the Greek Verb (1910).

________, Numerous articles in the American Journal of Philology.

GILDERSLEEVE and MILLER, Syntax of Classical Greek. Part I

          (1900), Part II (1911).

Gildersleeve Studies. Volume in honour of Prof. Gildersleeve of

          Johns Hopkins (1902).

GILES, P., A Short Manual of Comparative Philology. 2d ed.

          (1901).

________, The Greek Language (Encyc. Britannica, 1910).


          LIST OF WORKS MOST OFTEN REFERRED TO         lxix

 

GILES-HERTEL, Vergl. Grammatik (1896). Tr. of Giles' Manual.

GOETZELER, L., De Polybii elocutione (1887).

________, Einfluss d. Dion. Hal. auf d. Sprachgebrauch 1891).

GOODSPEED, E. J., Did Alexandria Influence the Nautical Lan-

          guage of St. Luke? (The Expositor, VIII, 1903, pp. 130-141).

GOODWIN, W. W., Greek Grammar. Various editions.

________, Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the Greek Verb. Rev.

          Ed. (1890).

GRANIT, De Inf. et Part. in Inscr. Dial. Graec. Questiones Synt.

          (1892).

GREEN, Μή for οὐ before Lucian (Studies in Honour of B. Gil-

          dersleeve, 1902).

GREEN, B., Notes on Greek and Latin Syntax (1897).

GREEN, S. G., Handbook to the Grammar of the Greek N. T.

          Rev. Ed. (1904).

GREGORY, C. R., Canon and Text of the N. T. (1907).

________, Die griech. Handschriften d. N. T. (1908).

________, Nov. Test. Graece, ed. Tischendorf. Bd. III, Prolegomena

          (1884-1894).

________, Textkritik d. N. T. 3 Bde. (1900-1909).

GRIMM-THAYER, A Greek-English Lexicon of the N. T. (1887).

GRUNEWALD, L., Der freie formeihafte Inf. d. Limitation im

          Griech. (1888).

GUDEMANN, A., Grundriss der -Geschichte d. Klass: Philologie.

          2. Aufl. (1909).

GUILLEMARD, W. H., Hebraisms in the Greek Testament (1879).

GUNTHER, R., Die Prapos. in d. griech. Dialektinschriften (Indog.

          Forsch., 1906).

HADLEY and ALLEN, Greek Grammar (1895).

HADLEY, JAMES, Essays Philological and Critical (1873).

__________, Language of the N. T. (vol. II, Hackett and Abbott's ed. of

          Smith's B. D., 1898).

HAHNE, Zur sprachlichen Asthetik d. Griechischen (1896).

HALE, W. G., The Anticipatory Subj. in Gk. and Lat. (Stud. Cl.

          Phil., 1895).

_________, The Cum Constructions (Studies in Class. 1887).

_________, The Origin of Subj. and Opt. Conditions in Gk. and Lat.

          (Harvard Studies in Class. Philol., 1901).

HAMILTON, The Negative Compounds in Greek (1899).

HAMMER, De τέ Particulae Usu Herodoteo Thucydideo Xeno-

          phonteo (1904).

HAMMERSCHMIDT, Uber die Grundb. von Konjunktiv and Optativ.


lxx   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

HARNACK, A., Luke the Physician (1907).

________, The Acts of the Apostles (1909).

HARRIS, J. RENDEL, Side-Lights on N. T. Research (1908).

HARRISON, GESSNER, A Treatise on the Philology of Greek Prepo-

          sitions (1858).

HARRISON, Miss JANE, Prol. to the Study of Greek Religion (1903).

HARSING, C., De Optativi in Chartis Aegyptiis Usu. Diss. Bonn

          (1910).

HARTEL, Abriss der Gr. d. horn. und herod. Dial. (1888).

HARTUNG, J. A., Lehre von den Partikeln der griech. Spr., I, II

          (1832-1833).

HATCH, E., Essays in Bibl. Greek (1892).

HATCH, W. H. P., Some Illustrations of N. T. Usage from Greek

          Inscriptions of Asia Minor (Journ. of Bibl. Lit., 1908, pp.

          134-146).

HATZIDAKIS, G. N., Einleitung in die neugriechische Grammatik

          (1892).

HAVERS, W., Untersuch. zur Kasussyntax der indog. Sprachen

          (1911).

HAWKINS, J. C., Horae Synopticae. 2d ed. (1909).

HEINE, G., Synonymik des neutest. Griechisch (1898).

HEINRICI, K. F., Der literarische Charakter der neutest. Schriften

          (1908).

HEIMULLER, W., Im Narnen Jesu (1902).

HELBING, R., Die Prapos. bei Herodot und andern Historikern

          (1904).

_________, Grammatik der Septuaginta. Laut- und Wortlehre (1907).

_________, Uber den Gebrauch des echten und soziativen Dativs bei

          Herodot.

HENRY, Precis de grammaire du grec et du latin. 5th ed. (1894).

          Elliott's tr. of 11st ed. (1890).

Hermes, Zeitschrift fur klassische Philologie.

HESSELING, D. C., De Koine en de oude dialekten van Griechen-

          land (1906).

HICKS, E. L., St. Paul and Hellenism (Studia Biblica et Eccl.,

          1896).

_________, Traces of Greek Philosophy and Roman Law in the N. T.

          (1896).

__________, Use of Political Terms in the N. T. (Class. Rev., March

          and April, 1887).

HICKS, E. L., and HILL, G. F., A Manual of Greek Historical In-

          scriptions (1901).


LIST OF WORKS MOST OFTEN REFERRED TO   lxxi

 

HIRT, H., Handbuch der griech. Laut- und Formenlehre (1902).

          2. Aufl. (1912).

HOBART, W. K., The Medical Language of Luke (1882).

HOFFMANN, F., Neutestamentliche Bibelstudien. '5 Bde. (1903).

          Uber die Entwick. des Begriffs der Grammatik bei den

          Alten (1891).

HOFFMANN, O., Das Prdsens der indog. Grundsprache (1889).

________, Die griechischen Dialekte, I–III (1891-1898).

________, Die Makedonen, ihre Sprache und ihr Volkstum (1906).

________, Geschichte d. griech. Sprache (1911).

HOGARTH, D. G., Philip and Alexander (1897).

HOLL, K., Das Fortleben der Volkssprachen in nachchristlicher

          Zeit (Hermes, 1908, 43, pp. 243 ff.).

HOOLE, C. H., The Classical Element in the N. T. (1888).

HORT, F. J. A., Notes on Orthography (pp. 141-173, vol. II of the

          N. T. in the Original Greek, 1882).

HOWES, The Use of Μή with the Participle (Harv. St. in Cl. Ph.,

          1901).

HATCH and REDPATH, Concordance to the LXX (1897).

HUBNER, E., Grundriss zu Vorlesungen uber die griech. Syntax

          (1883).

HUBSCHMANN, Zur Kasuslehre (1875).

HUMPHREYS, M. W., The Problems of Greek (Congress of Arts

          and Sciences, 1904, vol. III, pp. 171 ff.).

Indog. Forsch., Indogermanische Forschungen (Stratiburg).

IMMER, J., Hermeneutics of the N. T. Tr. by A. H. Newman

          (1877).

Intern. Woch., Internationale Wochenschrift.

JACOBSTHAL, H. K., Der Gebrauch der Tempora und Modi in

          den kretischen Dialektinschriften (1906).

JACQUIER, E., Histoire des Livres du N. T. Tomes I–IV. Ch. ii,

          Tome I, Langue du N. T.

J. kl. Ph., Jahrbuch fur klass. Philologie (Leipzig).

JANNARIS, A. N., A Historical Greek Grammar (1897).

________, On the True Meaning of the Κοινή (Class. Rev., 1903, pp.

          93 ff.).

JEBB, R. C., Attic Orators. 2d ed. (1893).

_________,  Introduction to the Iliad and the Odyssey (1892).

_________, On the Relation of Classical to Modern Greek (Appendix

          to Vincent and Dickson's Handbook to Mod. Gk., 1887).

JELF, W. E., A Grammar of the Greek Language. 2 vols.

          (1866).


lxxii  A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

JOHANNESSOHN, M., Der Gebrauch der Kasus uncl der Praposi-

          tionen in der Septuaginta. Teil I (1910).

JOLLY, Ein Kapitel d. vergl. Syntax. Der Konjunktiv und Op-

          tativ.

________, Geschichte des lnfinitivs im Indog. (1873).

JOY, On the Syntax of Some Prepositions in the Greek Dialects

          (1905).

J. of Phil., The Journal of Philology (London).

J. B. L., The Journal of Biblical Literature (Boston).

J. H. S., The Journal Of Hellenic Studies (London).

J. T. S., The Journal of Theological Studies (London).

JULICHER, A., Introduction to the N. T. Tr. by Ward (1904).

KAERST, J., Geschichte des hellenistischen Zeitalters (1901).

KAIBEL, Stil und Text der  Ἀθηναίων Πολιτεία.

KALKER, F., Questioned de elocutione Polybiana (1880).

KALLENBERG, Stud. uber den griech. Artikel (1891).

KAUTZSCH, E., Grammatik d. bibl. Aram. (1884).

KENNEDY, H. A. A., Recent Research in the Language of the

          N. T. (The Expos. T., xii, 1901).

_________, Sources of N. T. Greek (1895).

_________, St Paul and the Mystery Religions (1913).

KENYON, F. G., Evidence of the Papyri for Textual Criticism of

          the N. T. (1905).

_________, Handbook to the Textual Crit. of the N. T. 2d ed. (1912).

_________, Palaeography of the Greek Papyri (1899).         

_________, Papyri (Hastings' D. B., extra vol., 1904).

KING and COOKSON, The Principles of Sound and Inflexion as

          Illustrated in the Greek and Latin Languages (1888).

KRAUSS, S., Griechische and lateinische Lehnworter in Talmud,

          Midrasch und Targum. I (1898), II (1899).

KREBS, F., Die Prapositionen bei Polybius (1882. Schanz' Bei-

          trage).

_________, Die Prapositionsadrerbien in der spateren hist. Gracitat.

          Tl. I (1889).

_________, Zur Rektion der Kasus in der spateren hist. Gracit. (1887–

          1890).

KRENKEL, Josephus und Lukas (1894).

KRETSCHMER, P., Die Einl. in die Geschichte der griech. Sprache

          (1906).

_________, Die Entstehung der Κοινή (Sitz. ber. d. Wien. Akad., 1900).

_________, Die griech. Vaseninschriften ihrer Sprache nach untersucht

          (1894).


        LIST OF WORKS MOST OFTEN REFERRED TO      lxxiii

 

KRUMBACHER, K., Beitrage zu einer Geschichte der griech.

          Sprache (Kuhn's Zeitschr., 1885, pp. 481-545).

_________, Das Problem d. neugriech. Schriftsprache (1902).

_________, Das Programm des neuen Thesaurus d. griech. Spr. (1909).

_________, Die griech. Lit. des Mittelalters (Kultur d. Gegenwart,

          T1. I, Abt. viii, 1905).

KUHNER-BLASS, Ausfuhrliche Grammatik d.griech. Sprache.

          3. Aufl. of Kuhner. Teil I, Bde. I, II (1890, 1892).

KUHNER-GERTH, Ausf. Gramm. d. griech. Spr. 3.  Aufl. of Kuhner.

          TI. II, Bde. I, II (1898, 1904).

KUHRING, G., De praepositionum Graecarum in chartis Aegyp-

          tiacis (1906).

KUPFF, Der Gebr. d. Opt. bei Diod. Sic. (1903).

K. Z., Kuhn's Zeitschrift fur vergl. Sprachforschung (Berlin).

LAFOSCADE, Infl. du Lat. sur le Grec (Biol. de l'Ecole des hautes

          Et., 1892, pp. 83-158).

LAGARDE, P. DE, Septuagintastudien. I (1891).

LAKE, K., The Text of the N. T. 4th ed. (1908).

LAMBERT, Etude sur le dialecte eolien (1903).

LANG, A., Homer and His Age (1906).

LAQUEUR, Questiones epigraphicae et papyrologicae selectae

          (1904).

LA ROCHE, Beitrage zur griech. Gr. (1883).

________, Das Augment des griech. Verbums (1882).

LAUGHLIN, T. C., The Solecisms of the Apocalypse (1902).

LAUTENSACH, Verbalflexion der attischen Inschriften (1887).

LEFEVRE, Race and Language (1909).

LELL, Der Absolut-Akk. im Griech. bis zu Aristoteles (1892).

LEUTNER, W. G., The Article in Theocritus (1907).

LIDDELL and SCOTT, Greek-English Lexicon. 8th, ed. (1882).

LIETZMANN, H., Die klass. Philologic und das N. T. (N. Jahrb.

          f. kl. Alt., 1908, Bd. 21).

_________, Griechische Papyri ausgewahlt und erklart. 2. Aufl. (1910).

LIGHTFOOT, TRENCH, ELLICOTT, The Revision of the N. T. (1873).

LIPSIUS, K. H. A., Grammatische Untersuchungdn uber die bibl.

          Gracitat (1863).

LIVINGSTON, The Greek Genius and Its Meaning to Us (1912).

LOBECK, C. A., Phrynichi ecloga nominum et verborum Atticorum

          (1820).

LOCK, W., The Bible and Christian Life (1905).

LOISY, A., Histoire critique du texte et des versions de la Bible

          (1892).


lxxiv   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT'

 

LOTTICH, B., De sermone vulgari Atticorum (1881).

LUTZ, Die Kasus-Adverbien bei att. Rednern (1891).

MADVIG, Bemerk. uber einige Punkte des Griech. (1848).

__________, Syntax of the Greek Language (1880).

MAHAFFY, J. P., A Survey of Greek Civilization (1897).

_________, Greek Life and Thought (1896).

_________, Progress of Hellenism in Alexander's Empire (1905).

_________, The Greek World under Roman Sway (1890).

_________, What Have the Greeks Done for Civilization? (1909).

MARGOLIOUTH, D. S., Language of the O. T. (Hastings' D. B.).

MARGOLIS, The Particle in O. T. Gk. (Am. J. of Sem. Lang. and

          Lit., July, 1909).

MARSHALL, J. T., The Aramaic Gospel (The Expositor, ser. IV,

          ii, iii, iv, vi, viii; The Expos. Times, iv, 260).

MARTI, K., Kurzgef. Gr. d. bibl. aram. Spr. (1911).

MAYSER, E., Grammatik der griech. Papyri aus der Ptolemaerzeit.

          Laut- and Wortlehre (1906).

MEILLET, A., Introduction a l'etude comparative des langues indo-

          europeennes (1908). 4th ed. (1915).

_________, L'aoriste en lat. (Revue de Phil., 1897, p. 81 f.).

_________, Notes d'Etymologie Grecque (1896).

MEISTER, R., Beitrage zur Lautlehre d. LXX (1909).

__________, Der syntakt. Gebrauch d. Genitivs in den kret. Dialekt-

          inschriften (Indog. Forsch., XVIII, pp. 133-204).

__________, Die griech. Dialekte. 2 Bde. (1882-1889).

__________, Prol. zu einer Gramm. d. LXX (1907).

MEISTERHANS-SCHWYZER, Gramm. d. attischen Inschriften. 3.

          Aufl. (1900) of Meisterhans.

MERRIAM, A. C., Temporal Coincidence of the Aor. Part. with the

          Principal Verb (Proc. Am. Phil. Assoc., 1877).

MEYER, A., Jesu Muttersprache (1896).

MEYER, G., Griech. Grammatik. 3. Aufl. (1896).

MEYER, L., Griech. Aoriste (1879).

__________, Vergl. Gr. d. griech. and lat. Spr. 2 Bde. 2. Aufl. (1882-

          1884).

MEYER-LUBKE, Gramm. d. roman. Spr. 3 Bde. (1890-1899).

MIDDLETON, Analogy in Syntax (1892).

__________, The Doctrine of the Greek Article (1855).

MILDEN, The Limitations of the Predicate Position in Greek.

MILLER, C. W. E., The Limitation of the Imperative in the Attic

          Orators (Am. J. ph., 1892, pp. 399-436).

MILLIGAN, G., Selections from the Greek Papyri (1910).


 

               LIST OF WORKS MOST OFTEN REFERED TO            lxxv

 

MILLIGAN, G., The Greek Papyri with Special Reference to their

          Value for N. T. Study (1912).

________, The N. T. Documents (1913).

MITSOTAKIS, Praktische Gr. d. neugriech. Schrift- und Umgangs-

          sprache (1891).

MITTEIs und WILCKEN, Grundztige und Chrestoinathie der Papy-

          ruskunde. 2 Bde. (1912).

MOFFATT, J., The New Testament. A New Translation (1913).

MOMMSEN, T., Beitrage zur Lehre der griech. Prapositionen

          (1886-1895).

________, Die Prap. σύν and μετά bei den nachhom. Epikern (1879).

MONRO, D. B., Homeric Grammar (1882). 2d el. (1891). First

          ed. used.

MOULTON, J. H., A Grammar of N. T. Greek. Vol. I, Prolego-

          mena (1906). 3d ed. (1908).

_________, Characteristics of N. T. Greek (The Expositor, 1904).

_________, Einleitung in die Sprache des N. T. (1911).

_________, Grammatical Notes from the Papyri (The Expositor, 1901,

          pp. 271-282; 1903, pp. 104-121, 423-439. The Classical Re-

          view, 1901, pp. 31-37, 434-441; 1904, pp. 106-112, 151-155).

_________, Introduction to N. T. Greek (1895). 2d ed: (1904).

_________, Language of Christ (Hastings' One-vol. 1 B., 1909).

_________, N. T. Greek in the Light of Modern Discovery (Cambr.

          Bibl. Essays, 1909, pp. 461-505).

__________, The Science of Language (1903).

MOULTON, W. F., and GEDEN, A. S., A Concordance to the Greek

          Testament (1897).

MOULTON and MILLIGAN, Lexical Notes from the Papyri (The

          Expos., 1908--).

__________, The Vocabulary of the N. T. Illustrated from the Papyri

          and other Non-Literary Sources. Part I (1914), II, III.

MOZLEY, F. W., Notes on the Bibl. Use of the Present and Aorist

          Imperative (Journ. of Theol. Stud., 1903, iv, pp. 279-282).

MULLACH, F., Grammatik d. griech. Vulgarsprache (1856).

MULLER, H. C., Hist. Gramm. d. hellen. Sprache (1891).

MULLER, I., Handbuch d. klass. Altertumswissenshaft (1885-).

MULLER, MAX, Three Lectures on the Science of Language (1891).

MURRAY, G., A History of Ancient Greek Lit. (1897).

MUTZBAUER, C., Die Grundbedeutung des Konjunktivs und Op-

          tativs und ihre Entwick. im Griech. (1908).

_________, Die Grundlagen der griech. Tempuslehre kind des horn.

          Tempusgebrauchs. I (1893), II (1909).


lxxvi  A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

NACHMANSON, E., Beitrage zur Kenntnis der altgriech. Volks-

          sprache (1910).

________, Epigraphisch-grammatische Bemerkungen (Eranos 11,

          1912).

________, Laute und Formen der magnetischen Inschriften (1903).

NAGELI, T., Der Wortschatz des Apostels Paulus. αε (1905).

NAVARRE, Etude sur les particules grecques (R. E. A., vii, pp.

          116-130).

NESTLE, E., Einfuhrung in das griech. N. T. 2. Aufl. (1899).

          Introd. to the Textual Crit. of the N. T. (Tr. 1901).

________, Novum Testamentum Graece. 8th ed. (1910).

________, Septuagint (Hastings' D. B., 1902).

________, Septuaginta-Studien. I-V (1886-1907).

________, Zum neutest. Griechisch (Z. N. W., vii, 1906).

NEUBAUER, Studia Biblica (1885).

N. k. Z., Neue kirchliche Zeitschrift (Leipzig).

N. Jahrb. kl. Alt., Neue Jahrbucher fur das klass. Altertum

          (Leipzig).

NILSSON, Kausalsatze im Griech. bis Aristoteles. I., Die Poesie.

NORDEN, E., Die antike Kunstprosa. 2. Aufl. (1909).

OERTEL, H., Lectures on the Study of Language (1902).

OGDEN, De infinitivi finalis vel consecutivi constr. apud priscos

          poetas Graecos (1913).

PALEY, Greek Particles and their Combinations (1881).

PALLIS, A., A Few Notes on the Gospel (1903).

_________,   Ἡ Νέα Διαθήκη (1902). The N. T. (Gospels) in modern

          Greek vernacular.

PATER, W., The Renaissance (1904).

PAUL, H., Principles of the History of Language (1888). Tr.

PETERSEN, W., Greek Diminutives in —ιον (1910).

PFEIFAUF, Der Artikel vor Personen- und Gotternamen bei Thuk.

          und Herod. (1908).

PFISTER, Die parataktische Darstellungsform in der volkstum-

          lichen Erzahlung (Woch. f. klass. Phil., 1911, pp. 809-813).

Ph. W., Philologische Wochenschrift.

Ph. Z., Philologus: Zeitschrift f. d. kl. Alt. (Gottingen).

POSTGATE, J. P., Contrasts of Οὐ and Μή (Cambr. Phil. Jour., 1886).

PRELLWITZ, Etym. WOrterbuch d. griech. Sprache (1893). 2d ed.

          (1905).

PREUSCHEN, E., Vollstandiges griechisch-deutsches HandwOrter-

          buch zu den Schriften d. N. T. und d. iibrigen urchristlichen

          Literatur (1908).


    LIST OF WORKS MOST OFTEN REFERRED TO           lxxvii

 

Pr. Rev., The Princeton Review (Princeton).

PSICHARI, J., Essai sur le grec de la Septante (Rev. des etudes

          juives, April, 1908).

_______, Essais de grammaire historique neo-grecque (1886-1889).

RADERMACHER, L., Neut. Grammatik. Das Griechisch des N. T.

          im Zusammenhang mit der Volkssprache (1911).

RAMSAY, W. M., Cities and Bishoprics of Phrygia. 2 vols. (1895,

          1897).

_________, St. Paul the Traveller (1896).

R. E., Herzog-Hauck's Realencyclopalie.

R. E. Gr., Revue des etudes grecques (Paris).

REFFEL, Uber den Sprachgebr. D. Agathias.

REIK, Der Opt. bei Polyb. and Philo (1907).

REINACH, S., Pap. grecs et demotiques (1905).

REINHOLD, H., De graecitate Patrum (1898).

REISART, Zur Attraktion der Relativsiitze in der griech. Prosa.

REITZENSTEIN, Geschichte d. griech. Etym. (1897).

RENAUD, The Distributed Emphasis of the Pers. Pronoun (1884).

Rev. and Exp., The Review and Expositor (Louisville).

Rev. d. Ling., Revue de Linguistique de la Phil. comparee (Paris).

Rev. d. Ph., Revue de Philologie (Paris).

Rev. of Th. & Ph., Review of' Theology and Philosophy (Edin-

          burgh).

Rh. M., Rheinisches Museum (Bonn).

RIDGEWAY, W., The Early Age of Greece. Vol. I (1901).

RIEMANN and GOELZER, Grammaire Comparee du Grec et du

          Latin. I (1897), II (1901).

RIES, Was ist Syntax? (1894).

ROBERTS, A Short Proof that Greek was the Language of Jesus

          (1893).

ROBERTS-GARDNER, Introduction to Greek Epigraphy (1883).

ROBERTSON, A. T. A Short Grammar of the Greek N. T. (1908).

          3d ed. (1912).

________, Syllabus on N. T. Greek Syntax (1900).

ROBERTSON-BONACCORSI, Breve grammatica del Nuovo Testa-

          mento greco (1910).

ROBERTSON-GROSHEIDE, Beknopte Grammatica op het Grieksche

          Nieuwe Testament (1912).

ROBERTSON-MONTET, Grammaire du grec du N. T. (1911).

ROBERTSON-STOCKS, Kurzgefasste Grammatik des neut. Griechisch

          (1911).

ROSE, A., Christian Greece and Living Greek (1898).


lxxviii   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

ROSSBERG, C., De prapos. graecarum in chartis aegyptiis ptolem,

          aetatis usu (1909).

ROUFFIAC, J., Recherches sur les caracteres du grec dans le N. T.

          d'apres les inscriptions de Priene (1911).

RUTHERFORD, W. G., A Chapter in the History of Annotation

          (1905).

_________, The New Phrynichus (1881).

RUGER, Prap. bei Joh. Antiochenus (1896).

_________, Prap. bei Pausanias (1889).

SANDAY, W., The Criticism of the Fourth Gospel (1905).

SANDYS, J. E., A History of Classical Scholarship. I-III (1906-

          1908).

SAYCE, A. H., Introduction to the Science of Language (1880).

_________, Language (Encyc. Brit., 11th ed., 1910).

_________, Principles of Comparative Philology (1875).

SCHAEFER, Das Partizip des Aor. bei d. Tragikern (1894).

SCHAFF, P., A Companion to the Greek N. T. and Engl. Vers.

          3d ed. (1889).

SCHANZ, M., Beitrage zur histor. Syntax d. griech. Sprache

          (1882—).

SCHILLING, D., Comm. exeg.-philol. in Hebraism. d. N. T. (1886).

SCHIRLITZ, S. C., Anleitung zur Kenntnis d. neut. Grundsprache

          (1863).

SCHLACHTER, Statist. Unters. uber den Gebr. der Temp. und

          Modi bei einzelnen griech. Schriftst. (1908).

SCHLAGETER, J., Der Wortschatz d. ausserhalb Attikas gefunde-

          nen Inschriften (1912).

__________, Zur Laut- und Formenlehre d. auss. Att. gef. attischen Inschr.

          (1908).

SCHLEICHER, A., Compendium d. vergl. Gr. d. indog. Sprachen.

          4. Aufl. (1876).

SCHMID, J., Uber den gnomischen Aor. des Griech. (1894).

SCHMID, W., Der Atticismus in semen Hauptvertretern. 4 Bde.

          (1887-1897).

SCHMIDT, De Articulo in nominibus propiis apud Att. scriptores

          (1890).

SCHMIDT, W., De Flavii Josephi elocutione (1894).

SCHMITT, P., Uber den Ursprung des Substantivsatzes mit Rela-

          tivpartikeln im Griech. (1889).

SCHOEMANN, Die Lehre von den Redet. nach den Alten (1862).

SCHROEDER, Uber die form. Untersch. d. Redet. im Griech. und

          Lat. (1874).


        LIST OF WORKS MOST OFTEN REFERRED TO          lxxix

 

SCHUERER, A., A History of the Jew. P. in the Time of Jesus

          Christ. 5 vols. (1898). Tr. by Macpherson.

SCHULZE, Der schriftsteller. Charakter und Wert des Petrus, Judas 

          und Jakobus (1802).

SCHULZE, W., Graeca, Latina (1901).

SCHWAB, 0., Hist. Syntax der griech. Komparative in d. klass.

          Lit. Heft I (1893), II (1894), III (1895).

SCHWEIZER, E., Bericht uber die Forschungen auf dem Gebiet der

          griech. Sprachw. mit Ausschluss der Koine und der Dialekte

          in den Jahren 1890-1903 (Bursian's Jahresbericht, cxx, 1904,

          pp. 1-152).

________, Die griech. Sprache in Zeit d. Hellen. (N. Jahrb. f. kl. Alt.,

          1901, vii, viii).

________, Grammatik der pergamen. Inschriften (1898).

________, Neugriech. Syntax und altgriech. (N. Jahrb. f. kl. Alt., 1908,

          pp. 498-507).

SCHWYZER (SCHWEIZER), E., Die Weltsprachen des Altertums

          (1902).

SCOMP, H. A., The Case Absolute in the N. T. (Bibl. Sacra, April,

          1902).

SEYMOUR, T. D., Homeric Language and Verse (1902).

_________, Life in the Homeric Age (1907).

_________, The Use of the Gk. Aor. Part. (Trans. Am. Phil. Assoc., XII,

          1881, pp. 88 ff.).

S. H., Sanday and Headlam on Romans.

SHARP, G., Remarks on the Definitive Article in the Greek of the

          N. T. (1803).

SHEFFIELD, A. D., Grammar and Thinking (1912).

SIMCOX, W. H., The Language of the N. T. (1890).

_________, The Writers of the N. T.

SIMONSON, A., A Greek Grammar. 2 vols. (1903, 1908).

SMITH, R. H., The Theory of Conditional Sentences in Greek and

          Latin (1894).

SMYTH, H. W., The Sounds and Inflexions of Greek Dialects. I,

          Ionic (1894).

SODEN, H. VON, Die Schriften des N. T. in ihrer altesten erreich-

          baren Textgestalt. Teil I, Untersuch. (1902-1910); Teil II,

          Text und Apparat (1913).

_________, Griechisches N. T. Text mit kurzem Apparat (1913).

SOLMSEN, F., Beitrage zur griech. Wortforschung (1909).

_________, Inscriptiones graecae selectae (1905).

_________, Untersuch. zur griech. Laut- und Verslehre (1901).


lxxx     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

SOPHOCLES, E. A., Greek Lexicon of the Roman and Byzantine

          Period (1888).

SOUTER, A., Novum Testamentum Graece (1910). The Revisers'

          Text with a New Apparatus Criticus.

SPIEKER, The Gen. Abs. in the Attic Orators (Am. J. of Ph., VI,

          pp. 310-343).

St. B., Standard Bible Dictionary (Ed. by M. W. Jacobus, 1909).

STAHL, J. M., Kritisch-historische Syntax des griech. Verbums

          der Mass. Zeit. (1907).

STAURAC, Uber den Gebr. d. Gen. bei Herodot.

STEINTHAL, H., Geschichte der Sprachwiss. bei den Griech. und

          Romern. 2. Aufl. (1890-1891).

__________, Introduction to the Psychology and Science of Language

          (1900).

STERENBOURG, The Use of the Cond. Sentence in the Alex. Ver-

          sion of the Pentateuch (1908).

STERRETT, J. R. S., Homer's Iliad with Grammar (1907).

STOCKS, H., Das neutestamentliche Griechisch im Lichte der mo-

          dernen Sprachforschung (Neue kirchliche Zeitschrift, XXIV.

          Jahrgang, 633-700).

STRACK, H. L., Grammatik des bibl. Aram. 4. Aufl. (1905).

STRONG, LOGEMAN and WHEELER, Introduction to the Study of

          the History of Lang. (1891).

STURM, J., Geschichtl. Entwick. der Konstrukt. mit πρίν (1882).

STURTEVANT, Studies in Greek Noun Formation (Labial Termi-

          nations, I, 1910; II, 1911; III and IV, 1913).

SUSEMIHL, Gesch. der griech. Lit. in der Alexandrinerzeit. I (1891),

          II (1892).

SUTTERLIN, Gesch. der Verba denom. in Altgriech. (1891).

SWEET, History of Language (1900).

SWETE, H. B., Introduction to the O. T. in Greek (1900) . 2 Ed.,' 14.

________, The Apocalypse of St. John (1906).

________, The 0. T. in Greek according to the Septuagint (1887).

          3 vols.

SZUCZURAT, De Inf. Horn. Usu (1902).

TELFY, Chron. und Topogr. der griech. Ausspr. nach d. Zeugnisse

          der Inschr. (1893).

THACKERAY, H. ST., A Grammar of the 0. T. in Greek. Vol. I,

          Introduction, Orthography and Accidence (1909).

_________, Relation of St. Paul to Contemporary Thought (1900).

THAYER, J. H., Greek-English Lexicon of the N. T. (1887).

_________, Language of the N. T. (Hastings' D. B., 1900).


     LIST OF WORKS MOST OFTEN REFERRED TO   lxxxi

 

THEIMER, A., Beitrage zur Kenntnis des Sprachgebr. im N. T.

          (1896).

Th. L.-Z., Theologische Literaturzeitung (Leipzig).

Th. R., Theologische Rundschau (Tubingen).

Th. St. u. Kr., Theol. Studien und Kritiken (Gotha).

THIEME, G., Die Inschr. von Magnesia am Maander und das

          N. T. (1906).

THOLUCK, Beitrage zur Spracherklarung des N. T.

THOMPSON, E. M., Handbook of Greek and Latin Palaeography

          (1893). New ed. (1913).

THOMPSON, F. E., A Syntax of Attic Greek. New ed. (1907).

THOMSON, J. E. H., The Language of Palestine during the Time

          of Our Lord (Temple Bible Dict.).

THOMSON, P., The Greek Tenses in the N. T. (1895).

THOUVENIN, P., Les Negations dans lc N. T. (Revue de Philologic,

          1894).

THUMB, A., Die Forsch. uber die hellen. Spr. in den Jahren

          1902-1904 (Arch. f. Pap. 3, pp. 443-473).

_________, Die griech. Sprache im Zeitalter des Hellenismus (1901).

_________, Die sprachgesch. Steil. des bibl. Griech. (Theol. Rund., 1902).

_________, Handbuch der griech. Dial. (1909).

_________, Handbuch d. neugriech. Volkssprache. 2. Aufl. (1910).

_________, Handbuch des Sanskrits. I, Grammatik (1905).

_________, Unters. uber d. Sp. Asper im Griech. (1889).

THUMB-ANGUS, Handbook of the Modern Greek Vernacular

          (1912).

TISCH., Novum Testamentum Graece, by C. Tischendorf. Edi-

          tio octava critica major. 2 vols. (1869-1872).

TRENCH, R. C., Synonyms of the N. T. 11th ed. (1890). Deutsche

          Ausgabe von Werner (1907).

TSOUNTAS and MANATT, The Mycenaean Age (1897).

TUCKER, T. G., Introduction to the Natural History of Language

          (1908).

VANDACLE, L'Optatif Grec (1897).

VEITCH, W., Greek Verbs, Irregular and Defective. 2d ed. (1871).

VIERECK, P., Die griech. Papyruskunde (1899-1905). 34. Jahr-

          gang 1906. III. Abt. (1907).

_________, Die Papyrusliteratur in den 70 Jahren bis 1898 (1900).

          27. Jahrgang 1899. III. Abt.

_________, Sermo Graecus quo senatus populusque Romanus (1888).

VIERKE, De μή Particulae cum Indicativo Conjunctae Usu An-

          tiquiore (1876).


lxxxii   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

VINCENT and DICKSON, A Handbook to Modern Greek (1887).

VITEAU, J., Essai sur la syntax des voix dans le grec du N. T.,

          (Rev. de Phil., 1894).

________, Etude sur le grec du N. T. I, Le Verbe (1893); II, Le Suje,

          (1896).

VOGEL, H., Zur Charakteristik des Lukas nach Sprache und Stil

          (1899).

VOGRINZ, Grammatik d. hom. Dial. (1889).

VOLKER, F., Papyrorum graecorum syntaxis specimen (1900).

________, Syntax d. griech. Papyri. I, Der Artikel (1903).

VOTAW, C. W., The Use of the Infinitive in Bibl. Greek (1896).

WACKERNAGEL, J., Das Dehnungsgesetz der griech. Komposita

          (1889).

_________, Die hellenistische Gemeinsprache. (Die Kult. d. Gegenwart,

          Tl. I, Abt. viii, 1905, pp. 98-305).

__________, Die Sprache des Plut. etc. Teile I, II (1895-1896).

WAGNER, R., Questiones de epigrammatis graecis ex lapidibus

          collectis grammaticae (1883).

WALCH, Observationes in Matt. ex graecis inscriptionibus (1779).

WALKER, D., Elementary Greek Syntax (1897).

WARFIELD, B. B., An Introduction to the Textual Criticism of

          the N. T. New ed. (1914).

WARREN, WINIFRED, A Study of Conjunctional Temporal Clauses

          in Thucyd. (1897).

WEBER, P., Entwick. der Absichtssatze. Heft I (1884), Heft II

          (1885).

WECKLEIN, Curae epigraphicae ad grammaticam graecam et ad

          poetas scenicos pertinentes (1869).

WEISS, B., Der Gebr. des Artikels bei den Gottesnamen (Th.

          Stu. u. Krit., 1911, pp. 319-392).

__________, Textkritik (1894 ff.).

WEISS, J., Beitrage zur paulinischen Rhetorik (1897).

WELLHAUSEN, J., Einl. in die drei ersten Evangelien (1905).

          2. Ausg. (1911).

WENDLAND, P., Christentum und Hellenismus (1907).

__________, Hellen.-rom. Kultur. 3. Aufl. (1912).

WESSELEY, C., Die lat. Elemente in d. Gracitat d. dgypt. Pap.

          (Wien. Stud., xxiv, 1902).

__________, Lit. der Papyruskunde (Stud. zur Palaogr. und Pap. I,

          1901, pp. 17-20; II, 1902, pp. 43-52).

__________, Proleg. ad papyrorum graecorum novam collectionem eden-

          dam (1883).


     LIST OF WORKS MOST OFTEN REFERRED TO    lxxxiii

 

WESTCOTT, B. F., Language of the N. T. (Smith's B. D.).

W. H., WESTCOTT and HORT'S Edition of the N. T. in the Original

          Greek. Numerous eds.

_________, The N. T. in the Original Greek. Introduction and Appen-

          dix (1882).

WEYMOUTH, On the Rendering into English of the Greek Aorist

          and Perfect (1894).

WHEELER, B. I., The Whence and the Whither of the Modern

          Science of Language (1905).

WHIBLEY, L., Companion to Greek Studies (1905). 2d ed. (1906).

WHITNEY, S. W., The Revisers' Greek Text. 2 vols. (1892).

WHITNEY, W. D., A Sanskrit Grammar (1891). 4th ed. (1913).

__________, Language and the Study of Language (1867).

__________, Life and Growth of Language (1875).

WILAMOWITZ-MOLLENDORFF, U. VON, Die griech. Literatur des

          Altertums (Die Kult. d. Gegenw., 1907, TI. I, Abt. viii, pp.

          3-238. 3. Aufl. 1912).

__________, Uber die Entstehung der griech. Schriftsprachen (Verf.

          deutscher Phil. and Schulm., 1879, pp. 36-41).

WILCKEN, U., Die Forschungen fiber die hellen. Spr. in den

          Jahren 1902-1904 (Archiv f. Pap., 1906, pp. 443-473).

WILHELM, A., Beitrage zur griech. Inschriftenkunde (1909).

WILHELMUS, De Modo Irreali qui Vocatur (1881).

WILKE, Neutestamentliche Rhetorik (1843).

WILLIAMS, C. B., The Participle in the Book of Acts (1908).

WILSON, A. J., Emphasis in the N. T. (Jour. of Th. Stud., VIII,

          pp. 75 ff.).

WINER, G. B., De verborum cum praep. compos. in N. T. Usu

          (1834-1843).

_________, Gramm. d. neut. Sprachidioms (1822). 7: Aufl. von Lflne-

          mann (1867).

WINER-MASSON, A Grammar of the N. T. Gk. (1859).

WINER-MOULTON, A Treatise of the Grammar of N. T. Gk. 3d

          ed. (1882). Various eds.

WINER-SCHMIEDEL, Winer's Grammatik des neutest. Sprach-

          idioms. 8. Aufl. (1894-).

WINER-THAYER, A Grammar of the Idiom of the N. T. (1869).

          Various eds.

WITKOWSKI, ST., Bericht uber die Lit. zur Koine aus den Jakiren

          1898-1902 (Bursian's Jahrb. CXX, 1904, pp. 153-256).

__________, Bericht uber die Lit. zur Koine aus den Jahren 1903-1906

          (Jahresber. f. Alt., 1912, III. Bd., 159).


lxxxiv   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

WITKOWSKI, ST., Epistulae privatae graecae (1906).

__________, Prodromus grammaticae papyrorum graecarum aetatis

          Lagidarum (1897).

Woch. f. Icl. Ph., Wochenschrift fur klassische Philologie.

WRIGHT, J., A Comparative Grammar of the Greek Language

          (1912).

WUNDT, Volkerpsychologie. 2. Aufi. (1904). 3. Aufl. (1911 f.).

YOUNG, Language of Christ (Hastings' D. C. G.).

ZAHN, TH., Einl. in das N. T. Bd. I (190G), II (1907).

__________, On the Language of Palestine. Vol. I, pp. 1-72. Introduc-

          tion to the N. T. Tr. by Jacobus (1909).

ZARNCKE, E., Die Entstehung der griech. Literatursprachen

          (1890).

ZEITLIN, The Acc. with Inf. and Some Kindred Constrs. in Eng-

          lish (1908).

ZEZSCHWITZ, Profangrac. und bibl. Sprachg. (1859).

ZIEMER, Vergl. Syntax der indog. Kompar. (1884).

Z. N.-T. W., Zeitschrift fur neut. Wissenschaft (Giessen).


 


 

                   ADDITIONAL BIBLIOGRAPHY FOR THIRD EDITION

 

BALLY, Le Langage et la Vie (1913).

BLOMFIELD, An Introduction to the Study of Language (1914).

BRUGMANN, Lehre von den Wortformen and ihren Gebrauch.

          III. Teil. 2. Lieferung (1917).

BUCK, Studies in Greek Noun-formation (Classical Philology, 1917

          and 1918).

COBERN, The New Archaeological Discoveries in their Bearing on

          the New Testament and Early Christian Literature. 2d ed.

          (1918).

DAWKINS, Modern Greek in Asia Minor (1916).

DEFERRARI, Lucian's Atticism. The Morphology of the Verb

          (1916).

DURHAM, The Vocabulary of Menander in Relation to the Koine

          1915).

DUTTON, Studies in Greek Prepositional Phrases: διά,  ἀπό,   ἐκ,  εἰς,

            ἐν (1916).

EAKIN, The Greek Article in First and Second Century Papyri

          (Am. J. of Phil., No. 147, 1916, pp. 333-340).

HEMPL, Early Cyprian Greek (Trans. Am. Phil. Assoc., 1916,

          pp. 229-248).

HERWERDEN, VAN, Lexicon Graecum Suppletorium et Dialecti-

          cum. 2d ed. (1910).

HOUGHTON, Saving Greek in the College (The Cl. Weekly, Dec. 11,

          1916).

KAERST, Geschichte des Hellenismus. 2d ed. (1917).

LIVINGSTONE, A Defense of Classical Education (1916).

MAIDHOF, Zur Begriffbestimmung der Koine besonders auf Grund

          des Attizisten Moiris (1912).

MAIGNIEN, Le Futur Grec (1912).

MEILLET, De Quelques Faits Grammaticaux (Revue des Etudes

          Grecques, July, 1916).

MILLER, C. W. E., Note on the Use of the Article before the Geni-

          tive of the Father's Name in Greek Papyri (Am. J. of Phil.,

          July, 1916, pp. 341-348).

MILLIGAN, Greek Papyri (The Expositor, March, 1918).

 

                                          lxxxv


 

lxxxvi   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

MOULTON, J. H., From Egyptian Rubbish Heaps (1916).

________, The Christian Religion in the Sutdy and the Street (1918).

PETERSON, W., Origin of the Indo-Eur. Nominal Stem-suffixes

          (Am. J. of Phil., April and July, 1916).

__________, Syncretism in the Eur. Dative (Am. J. of Phil., Jan.,

          1918).

ROBINSON, Some Inverted Commas (The Expositor, March, 1916).

SANDYS, A Short History of Classical Scholarship (1915).

SLATEN, Qualitative Nouns in the Pauline Epistles and Their

          Translation in the Revised Version (1918).

SMITH, General Relative Clauses in Greek (The Review, May–

          June, 1917).

SMYTH, A Greek Grammar for Schools and Colleges (1916).

SONNENSCHEIN, The Ind. in Rel. Clauses (The Cl. Review, May–

          June, 1918).

STURTEVANT, Linguistic Change (1918).

TOD, Progress in Greek Epigraphy for 1914-1915 (The Journal of

          Hellenic Studies, Jan., 1916).

WACKERNAGEL, Ueber die Geschichte der Griechischen Sprache

          (1913).
__________, Sprachliche Untersuchungen zu Homer (Glotta, 7. 161

          319).

WEST, Value of the Classics (1917).




 

Table of Contents (Detailed)

 

(This TOC was generated by MS Word – there are some additional headings and subheading included in addition to the original TOC which omitted some outlne items.  Note: AT Robertson’s outline is not of a uniform pattern. Some chapters use the format I..A..1..a..α..i.   Other chapters use I..a..α.  Others are yet different. The outline in this document matches that of the MS Word headers and styles contained in the printed text of this document. All the original book’s TOC items are present, plus a few more.--Louis Sorenson.)

Notes for Electronic Edition.................................................................................................................. i

Quick-View Table of Contents.............................................................................................................. ii

PREFACE............................................................................................................................................................ vii

PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION.................................................................................................................. xv

PREFACE TO THIRD EDITION................................................................................................................... xvii

LIST OF WORKS MOST OFTEN REFERRED TO.................................................................................... lxiii

ADDITIONAL BIBLIOGRAPHY FOR THIRD EDITION...................................................................... lxxxv

Table of Contents (Detailed)................................................................................................................. lxxxvii

PART I:   INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................... - 1 -

CHAPTER I:  NEW MATERIAL........................................................................................................... 3

The Ideal Grammar?.................................................................................................................... 3

I.        The Pre-Winer Period.......................................................................................................... 3

II. The Service of Winer................................................................................................................ 4

(a)         WINER'S INCONSISTENCIES.............................................................................. 4

(b) WINER EPOCH-MAKING........................................................................................... 4

(b)         SCHMIEDEL.......................................................................................................... 4

(c)         BUTTMANN........................................................................................................... 5

(d)         BLASS..................................................................................................................... 5

II.       The Modern Period............................................................................................................. 5

(a)         DEISSMANN.......................................................................................................... 5

(b)         THUMB................................................................................................................... 6

(c)         MOULTON............................................................................................................. 6

(d)         OTHER CONTRIBUTIONS.................................................................................... 6

(e)         RICHNESS OF MATERIAL................................................................................... 7

IV. The New Grammatical Equipment for N. T. Study...................................................................... 8

(a)         COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY............................................................................. 8

1.      The Linguistic Revolution...................................................................................... 8

2. A Sketch of Greek Grammatical History................................................................... 8

3. The Discovery of Sanskrit. It.................................................................................... 10

4. From Bopp to Brugmann.......................................................................................... 10

(b) ADVANCE IN GENERAL GREEK GRAMMAR...................................................... 12

(c) CRITICAL EDITIONS OF GREEK AUTHORS......................................................... 13

(d) WORKS ON INDIVIDUAL WRITERS...................................................................... 13

(e) THE GREEK INSCRIPTIONS.................................................................................... 14

(f) FULLER KNOWLEDGE OF THE DIALECTS.......................................................... 16

(g) THE PAPYRI AND OSTRACA.................................................................................. 17

(h) THE BYZANTINE AND THE MODERN GREEK.................................................... 21

(i) THE HEBREW AND ARAMAIC................................................................................ 24

1. The Old View............................................................................................................ 24

2. A Change with Kennedy........................................................................................... 25

3. Deissmann's Revolt................................................................................................... 25

4. The Language of Jesus.............................................................................................. 26

(j) GRAMMATICAL COMMENTARIES........................................................................ 29

V. The New Point of View........................................................................................................... 30

CHAPTER II:  THE HISTORICAL METHOD.............................................................................................. 31

I. Language as History................................................................................................................ 31

(a) COMBINING THE VARIOUS ELEMENTS.............................................................. 31

(b) PRACTICAL GRAMMAR A COMPROMISE........................................................... 32

II. Language as a Living Organism............................................................................................... 33

(a) THE ORIGIN OF LANGUAGE................................................................................... 33

(b) EVOLUTION IN LANGUAGE................................................................................... 34

(c) CHANGE CHIEFLY IN THE VERNACULAR.......................................................... 34

III. Greek not an Isolated Language............................................................................................. 36

(a) THE IMPORTANCE OF COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR.......................................... 36

(b) THE COMMON BOND IN LANGUAGE................................................................... 37

(c) THE ORIGINAL INDO-GERMANIC SPEECH.......................................................... 38

(d) GREEK AS A " DIALECT" OF THE INDO-GERMANIC SPEECH......................... 39

IV. Looking at the Greek Language as a Whole............................................................................. 40

(a) DESCRIPTIVE HISTORICAL GRAMMAR............................................................... 41

(b) UNITY OE THE GREEK LANGUAGE...................................................................... 41

(c) PERIODS OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE.................................................................. 43

(d) MODERN GREEK IN PARTICULAR........................................................................ 44

V. The Greek Point of View......................................................................................................... 46

CHAPTER III:   THE ΚΟΙΝΗ............................................................................................................... 49

I. The Term Κοινή..................................................................................................................... 49

II. The Origin of the Κοινή......................................................................................................... 51

(a) TRIUMPH OF THE ATTIC......................................................................................... 51

(b) FATE OF THE OTHER DIALECTS........................................................................... 52

(c) PARTIAL KOINES...................................................................................................... 53

(d) EFFECTS OF ALEXANDER'S CAMPAIGNS........................................................... 53

(e) THE MARCH TOWARD UNIVERSALISM.............................................................. 54

III. The Spread of the Κοινή....................................................................................................... 54

(a) A WORLD-SPEECH................................................................................................... 54

(b) VERNACULAR AND LITERARY............................................................................. 56

1. Vernacular................................................................................................................. 56

2. Literary...................................................................................................................... 57

(c) THE ATTICISTIC REACTION................................................................................... 58

IV. The Characteristics of the Vernacular Kοινή........................................................................... 60

(a) VERNACULAR ATTIC THE BASE........................................................................... 60

(b) THE OTHER DIALECTS IN THE Κοινή................................................................... 62

(c) NON—DIALECTICAL CHANGES............................................................................ 64

(d) NEW WORDS, NEW FORMS OR NEW MEANINGS TO OLD WORDS............... 65

(e) PROVINCIAL INFLUENCES..................................................................................... 66

(f) THE PERSONAL EQUATION.................................................................................... 69

(g) RESUME..................................................................................................................... 71

Phonetics and Orthography........................................................................................... 71

Vocabulary.................................................................................................................... 72

Word-Formation........................................................................................................... 72

Accidence...................................................................................................................... 72

Syntax............................................................................................................................ 73

V. The Adaptability of the Κοινή to the Roman World.................................................................. 74

CHAPTER IV:   THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH....................................................... 76

I. The New Testament Chiefly in the Vernacular Κοινή................................................................. 76

(a) NOT A BIBLICAL GREEK......................................................................................... 76

(b) PROOF THAT N. T. GREEK IS IN THE VERNACULAR Κοινή............................. 79

II. Literary Elements in the New Testament Greek........................................................................ 83

III. The Semitic Influence............................................................................................................ 88

(a) THE TRADITION........................................................................................................ 88

(b) THE VIEW OF DEISSMANN AND MOULTON...................................................... 89

(c) LITTLE DIRECT HEBREW INFLUENCE................................................................. 94

(d) A DEEPER IMPRESS BY THE LXX......................................................................... 96

(e) ARAMAISMS........................................................................................................... 102

(f) VARYING RESULTS................................................................................................ 106

IV. Latinisms and Other Foreign Words...................................................................................... 108

V. The Christian Addition.......................................................................................................... 112

VI. Individual Peculiarities......................................................................................................... 116

(a) MARK....................................................................................................................... 118

(b) MATTHEW............................................................................................................... 119

(c) LUKE......................................................................................................................... 120

(d) JAMES...................................................................................................................... 123

(e) JUDE.......................................................................................................................... 124

(f) PETER........................................................................................................................ 125

(h) WRITER OF HEBREWS.......................................................................................... 132

(i) JOHN.......................................................................................................................... 133

VII. N. T. Greek Illustrated by the Modern Greek Vernacular........................................................ 137

PART II ACCIDENCE..................................................................................................................................... 142

CHAPTER V:   WORD–FORMATION........................................................................................... 143

I. Etymology............................................................................................................................ 143

II. Roots.................................................................................................................................. 144

III. Words with Formative Suffixes............................................................................................. 146

(a) VERBS....................................................................................................................... 146

1. Primary or Primitive Verbs.................................................................................... 146

2. Secondary or Derivative Verbs............................................................................... 147

(b) SUBSTANTIVES...................................................................................................... 150

1. Primary or Primitive Substantives......................................................................... 150

2. Secondary or Derivative Substantives.................................................................... 151

(α) Those from verbs.............................................................................................. 151

(β) Those from substantives................................................................................... 154

(γ) Those from adjectives...................................................................................... 156

(c) ADJECTIVES............................................................................................................ 157

1. Primary or Primitive Adjectives............................................................................ 157

2. Secondary or Derivative Adjectives....................................................................... 158

(α) Those from verbs.............................................................................................. 158

(β) Those from substantives................................................................................... 158

(γ) Those from adjectives...................................................................................... 159

(δ) Those from adverbs.......................................................................................... 160

(d) THE ADVERB.......................................................................................................... 160

IV. Words Formed by Composition (Composita).......................................................................... 160

(a) KINDS OF COMPOUND WORDS IN GREEK:....................................................... 161

(b) INSEPARABLE PREFIXES...................................................................................... 161

(c) AGGLUTINATIVE COMPOUNDS.......................................................................... 163

1. Verbs....................................................................................................................... 163

2. Substantives............................................................................................................ 165

3. Adjectives............................................................................................................... 168

4. Adverbs................................................................................................................... 169

V. Personal Names Abbreviated or Hypocoristic......................................................................... 171

VI. The History of Words.......................................................................................................... 173

VII. The Kinship of Greek Words................................................................................................ 174

VIII. Contrasts in Greek Words or Synonyms............................................................................... 175

CHAPTER VI:  ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS.................................................................................. 177

I. The Uncertainty of the Evidence............................................................................................. 177

(a) THE ANCIENT LITERARY SPELLING.................................................................. 177

(b) THE DIALECT-COLOURED VERNACULAR........................................................ 178

(c) THE UNCIALS.......................................................................................................... 179

(d) THE PAPYRI............................................................................................................. 181

II. Vowel-Changes.................................................................................................................... 181

(a) THE CHANGES (INTERCHANGES) WITH α........................................................ 182

α and ε......................................................................................................................... 182

ε and α......................................................................................................................... 184

α and η......................................................................................................................... 184

α and ο........................................................................................................................ 184

α and ω........................................................................................................................ 185

α and αι....................................................................................................................... 185

α and αυ...................................................................................................................... 185

αι and ε........................................................................................................................ 186

(b) THE CHANGES WITH ε.......................................................................................... 187

ε and ει......................................................................................................................... 187

ε and η......................................................................................................................... 187

ε and ι.......................................................................................................................... 188

ε and o......................................................................................................................... 189

ἐάν and ἄν................................................................................................................... 190

(c) THE CHANGES WITH η.......................................................................................... 191

η and ι.......................................................................................................................... 191

η and ει........................................................................................................................ 192

ηι and ει....................................................................................................................... 193

η and ......................................................................................................................... 194

η and υ......................................................................................................................... 195

(d) THE CHANGES WITH ι........................................................................................... 195

ι and ει......................................................................................................................... 195

εἰ for ι.......................................................................................................................... 197

ι. and ο......................................................................................................................... 198

ι and οι........................................................................................................................ 198

ι and υ.......................................................................................................................... 198

(e) THE CHANGES WITH ο.......................................................................................... 199

o and ου....................................................................................................................... 199

o and υ......................................................................................................................... 200

o and ω........................................................................................................................ 200

ω and ο........................................................................................................................ 201

(f) THE CHANGES WITH υ.......................................................................................... 201

υ and ευ....................................................................................................................... 201

υ and ου...................................................................................................................... 202

(g) THE CHANGES WITH ω......................................................................................... 202

ω and ου...................................................................................................................... 202

ω and ωϋ..................................................................................................................... 203

(h) CONTRACTION AND SYNCOPE........................................................................... 203

(i) DIPHTHONGS AND DIAERESIS............................................................................. 204

(j) APHAERESIS AND PROTHETIC VOWELS........................................................... 205

(k) ELISION.................................................................................................................... 206

(l) CRASIS...................................................................................................................... 208

III. Consonant-Changes............................................................................................................ 209

(a) ORIGIN AND CHARACTER OF THE CONSONANTS.......................................... 209

(b) THE INSERTION OF CONSONANTS..................................................................... 210

(c) THE OMISSION OF CONSONANTS....................................................................... 210

(d) SINGLE OR DOUBLE CONSONANTS................................................................... 211

Doubling of the Aspirate............................................................................................ 215

(e) ASSIMILATION OF CONSONANTS...................................................................... 215

(f) INTERCHANGE AND CHANGING VALUE OF CONSONANTS.......................... 217

(g) ASPIRATION OF CONSONANTS........................................................................... 219

(h) VARIABLE FINAL CONSONANTS........................................................................ 219

(i) METATHESIS........................................................................................................... 221

IV. Breathings.......................................................................................................................... 221

(a) ORIGIN OF THE ASPIRATE.................................................................................... 221

(b) INCREASING DE-ASPIRATION (Psilosis)............................................................. 222

(c) VARIATIONS IN THE MSS. (Aspiration and Psilosis)........................................... 223

(d) TRANSLITERATED SEMITIC WORDS................................................................. 225

(e) THE USE OF BREATHINGS WITH ρ AND ρρ...................................................... 225

(f) THE QUESTION OF Αὑτοῦ...................................................................................... 226

V. Accent................................................................................................................................ 226

(a) THE AGE OF GREEK ACCENT.............................................................................. 226

(b) SIGNIFICANCE OF ACCENT IN THE Κοινή......................................................... 228

(c) SIGNS OF ACCENT................................................................................................. 229

(d) LATER DEVELOPMENTS IN ACCENT................................................................. 229

(e) N.T. PECULIARITIES............................................................................................... 230

1. Shortening Stem-Vowels........................................................................................ 230

2. Separate Words....................................................................................................... 231

3. Difference in Sense................................................................................................. 232

4. Enclitics (and Proclitics)........................................................................................ 233

5. Proper Names.......................................................................................................... 235

6. Foreign Words........................................................................................................ 235

VI. Pronunciation in the Κοινή.................................................................................................. 236

VII. Punctuation....................................................................................................................... 241

(a) THE PARAGRAPH................................................................................................... 241

(b) SENTENCES............................................................................................................. 242

(c) WORDS..................................................................................................................... 243

(d) THE EDITOR'S PREROGATIVE............................................................................. 244

CHAPTER VII:   THE DECLENSIONS (ΚΛΙΣΕΙΣ)................................................................................... 246

I. THE SUBSTANTIVE (TO ὌNOMA)...................................................................................... 246

1. History of the Declensions......................................................................................... 246

2. The Number of the Cases (πτώσεις)......................................................................... 247

(a) THE HISTORY OF THE FORMS OF THE CASES............................................. 247

(b) THE BLENDING OF CASE—ENDINGS............................................................. 249

(c) ORIGIN OF CASE, SUFFIXES............................................................................. 250

3. Number (ἀριθμός) in Substantives............................................................................ 251

4. Gender (γένος) in Substantives................................................................................. 252

(a) VARIATIONS IN GENDER.................................................................................. 252

(b) INTERPRETATION OF THE LXX...................................................................... 254

(c) VARIATIONS IN GENDER DUE TO HETEROCLISIS AND METAPLASM.... 254

5. The First or α Declension........................................................................................... 254

(a) THE DORIC GENITIVE—ABLATIVE SINGULAR α........................................ 254

(b) THE ATTIC GENITIVE-ABLATIVE................................................................... 255

(c) Vocative in —α of masc. nouns in -της................................................................ 256

(d) WORDS IN –ρα AND PARTICIPLES IN —υῖα.................................................. 256

(e) THE OPPOSITE TENDENCY TO (d).................................................................. 256

(f) DOUBLE DECLENSION...................................................................................... 257

(g) HETEROCLISIS (ἑτερόκλισις) AND METAPLASM (μεταπληασμός)........... 257

(h) INDECLINABLE SUBSTANTIVES..................................................................... 259

6. The Second or o Declension....................................................................................... 259

(a) THE SO-CALLED ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION.......................................... 260

(b) CONTRACTION................................................................................................... 260

(c) THE VOCATIVE................................................................................................... 261

(d) HETEROCLISIS AND METAPLASM................................................................. 261

(e) THE MIXED DECLENSION................................................................................ 263

(f) PROPER NAMES.................................................................................................. 263

7. The Third Declension................................................................................................. 263

(a) THE NOMINATIVE AS VOCATIVE................................................................... 264

(b) THE ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR......................................................................... 264

(c) THE ACCUSATIVE PLURAL.............................................................................. 265

(e) THE GENITIVE-ABLATIVE FORMS................................................................. 268

(f) CONTRACTION.................................................................................................... 268

(g) PROPER NAMES................................................................................................. 268

(h) HETEROCLISIS AND METAPLASM................................................................. 269

8. Indeclinable Words..................................................................................................... 269

II. THE ADJECTIVE (  ὌΝΟΜΑ   ἚΠΙΘΕΤΟΝ)...................................................................... 270

1. The Origin of the Adjective........................................................................................ 270

2. Inflection of Adjectives.............................................................................................. 271

(a) ADJECTIVES WITH ONE TERMINATION........................................................ 271

(b) ADJECTIVES WITH TWO TERMINATIONS.................................................... 272

(c) ADJECTIVES WITH THREE TERMINATIONS................................................. 273

(d) THE ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR......................................................................... 274

(e) CONTRACTION IN ADJECTIVES...................................................................... 274

(f) INDECLINABLE ADJECTIVES........................................................................... 275

3. Comparison of Adjectives.......................................................................................... 276

(a) THE POSITIVE (θετικὸν ὄνομα OR ὄνομα ἁπλοῦν)....................................... 276

(b) THE COMPARATIVE (συγκριτικὸν ὄνομα)..................................................... 276

(c) THE SUPERLATIVE (ὑπερθετικὸν ὄνομα)....................................................... 278

III. NUMERALS (  ἈΡΙΘΜΟΙ)................................................................................................... 281

1. The Origin of Numerals.............................................................................................. 281

2. Variety among Numerals............................................................................................ 281

(a) DIFFERENT FUNCTIONS................................................................................... 281

(b) THE CARDINALS (ὀνόματα ἀριθμητικά)......................................................... 281

(c) THE ORDINALS (ὀνόματα τακτικά).................................................................. 283

(d) DISTRIBUTIVES IN THE N. T............................................................................ 284

(e) NUMERAL ADVERBS......................................................................................... 284

IV. PRONOUNS (  ἈΝΤΩΝΥΜΙΑΙ).......................................................................................... 284

1. Idea of Pronouns......................................................................................................... 284

2. Antiquity of Pronouns................................................................................................. 285

3. Pronominal Roots....................................................................................................... 285

4. Classification.............................................................................................................. 286

(a) THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS............................................................................ 286

(b) THE INTENSIVE PRONOUN.............................................................................. 287

(c) REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.................................................................................... 287

(d) POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS (κτητικαὶ ἀντωνυμίαι)........................................... 288

(e) DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS (δεικτικαὶ ἀντωνυμίαι)............................... 289

(f) RELATIVE PRONOUNS (ἀναφορικαὶ ἀντωνυμίαι)......................................... 290

(g) INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.......................................................................... 291

(h) INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.................................................................................... 292

(i) DISTRIBUTIVE AND RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS............................................. 292

V. ADVERBS ( ἘΠΙΡΡΗΜΑΤΑ)............................................................................................... 293

1. Neglect of Adverbs..................................................................................................... 293

2. Formation of the Adverb............................................................................................ 294

(a) FIXED CASES....................................................................................................... 294

(1) The Accusative.................................................................................................. 294

(2) The Ablative...................................................................................................... 295

(3) The Genitive...................................................................................................... 295

(4) The Locative...................................................................................................... 295

(5) The Instrumental............................................................................................... 295

(6) The Dative......................................................................................................... 296

(b) SUFFIXES............................................................................................................. 296

(c) COMPOUND ADVERBS...................................................................................... 296

(d) ANALOGY............................................................................................................ 297

(e) THE COMPARISON OF ADVERBS.................................................................... 297

3. Adverbial Stems.......................................................................................................... 297

(a) SUBSTANTIVES.................................................................................................. 298

(b) ADJECTIVES........................................................................................................ 298

(c) NUMERALS.......................................................................................................... 298

(d) PRONOUNS.......................................................................................................... 298

(e) VERBS................................................................................................................... 298

4. Use of Adverbs............................................................................................................ 299

(a) ADVERBS OF MANNER..................................................................................... 299

(b) ADVERBS OF PLACE......................................................................................... 299

(c) ADVERBS OF TIME............................................................................................ 300

5. Scope of Adverbs........................................................................................................ 300

(a) RELATION BETWEEN ADVERBS AND PREPOSITIONS............................... 301

(b) ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS..................................................................... 301

(c) ADVERBS AND INTENSIVE PARTICLES......................................................... 302

(d) ADVERBS AND INTERJECTIONS..................................................................... 302

CHAPTER VIII:   CONJUGATION OF THE VERB ( ῬΗΜΑ)..................................................................... 303

I. Difficulty of the Subject......................................................................................................... 303

II. Nature of the Verb............................................................................................................... 303

(a) VERB AND NOUN................................................................................................... 303

(b) MEANING OF THE VERB....................................................................................... 304

(c) PURE AND HYBRID VERBS.................................................................................. 304

III. The Building of the Verb...................................................................................................... 305

IV. The Survival of --μι Verbs.................................................................................................... 306

(a) A CROSS DIVISION................................................................................................. 306

(b) THE OLDEST VERBS.............................................................................................. 306

(c) GRADUAL DISAPPEARANCE............................................................................... 306

(d) N. T. USAGE AS TO --μι VERBS............................................................................ 307

1.  The Second Aorists (active and middle)............................................................... 307

Βαίνω..................................................................................................................... 307

Γινώσκω................................................................................................................. 308

Δίδωμι..................................................................................................................... 308

Ἵημι......................................................................................................................... 309

Ἵστημι..................................................................................................................... 310

Ὀνίνημι.................................................................................................................. 310

Τίθημι..................................................................................................................... 310

Φημί......................................................................................................................... 310

2. Some —μι Presents................................................................................................. 311

Δείκ-νυ-μι............................................................................................................... 311

Δίδωμι..................................................................................................................... 311

Δύναμαι.................................................................................................................. 312

Εἰμί.......................................................................................................................... 312

Εἶμι.......................................................................................................................... 313

Ἐπίσταμαι............................................................................................................. 314

Ζεύγνυμι................................................................................................................ 314

Ζώννυμι................................................................................................................. 314

Ἧμαι....................................................................................................................... 314

Ἵημι......................................................................................................................... 314

Ἵστημι..................................................................................................................... 315

Κεῖμα...................................................................................................................... 316

Κρέμαμαι................................................................................................................ 316

Μίγνυμι.................................................................................................................. 317

Ὄλλυμι.................................................................................................................. 317

Ὄμνυμι.................................................................................................................. 317

Πίμπλημι................................................................................................................ 317

Πίμπρημι................................................................................................................ 318

Ῥήγνυμι.................................................................................................................. 318

Σβέννυμι................................................................................................................ 318

Στρώννυμι.............................................................................................................. 318

Τίθημι..................................................................................................................... 318

Φημί......................................................................................................................... 319

Χρή......................................................................................................................... 319

3. Some —μι Perfects................................................................................................. 319

θνήσκω................................................................................................................... 319

Οἶδα........................................................................................................................ 319

Ἵστημι..................................................................................................................... 319

V. The Modes (ἐγκλίσεις)........................................................................................................ 320

(a) THE NUMBER OF THE MOODS OR MODES (Modi).......................................... 320

(b) THE DISTINCTIONS BETWEEN THE MOODS.................................................... 321

(c) THE INDICATIVE (ὁριστικὴ ἔγκλισις).................................................................. 322

(d) THE SUBJUNCTIVE (ὑποτακτική)........................................................................ 323

(e) THE OPTATIVE (εὐκτική)....................................................................................... 325

(f) THE IMPERATIVE (προστακτική)......................................................................... 327

1. The Non-Thematic Stem......................................................................................... 327

2. The Thematic Stem................................................................................................. 327

3. The Suffix –θι......................................................................................................... 328

4. The Suffix –τω........................................................................................................ 328

5. The Old Injunctive Mood........................................................................................ 328

6. Forms in –σαι......................................................................................................... 329

7. The Form in —σον (λῦσον).................................................................................. 329

8. First Person............................................................................................................. 329

9. Prohibitions............................................................................................................. 330

10. Perfect Imperative................................................................................................. 330

11. Periphrastic Presents............................................................................................. 330

12. Circumlocutions.................................................................................................... 330

VI. The Voices (διαθέσεις)........................................................................................................ 330

(a) TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE....................................................................... 330

(b) THE NAMES OF THE VOICES............................................................................... 331

(c) THE RELATIVE AGE OF THE VOICES................................................................. 332

(d) THE SO-CALLED "DEPONENT " VERBS............................................................. 332

(e) THE PASSIVE SUPPLANTING THE MIDDLE...................................................... 333

(f) THE PERSONAL ENDINGS..................................................................................... 335

(g) CROSS-DIVISIONS.................................................................................................. 335

(h) THE ACTIVE ENDINGS.......................................................................................... 335

(i) THE MIDDLE ENDINGS.......................................................................................... 339

(j) PASSIVE ENDINGS.................................................................................................. 340

(k) CONTRACT VERBS................................................................................................ 341

Verbs in –αω............................................................................................................... 341

Verbs in -εω................................................................................................................ 342

Verbs in –οω............................................................................................................... 342

VII. The Tenses (χρόνοι).......................................................................................................... 343

(a) THE TERM TENSE.................................................................................................. 343

(b) CONFUSION IN NAMES......................................................................................... 344

(c) THE VERB-ROOT.................................................................................................... 344

(d) THE AORIST TENSE (ἀόριστος χρόνος).............................................................. 345

(e) THE PRESENT TENSE (ὁ ἐνεστὼς χρόνος).......................................................... 350

1. The Root Class........................................................................................................ 350

2. The Non-Thematic Reduplicated Present............................................................... 350

3. The Non-Thematic Present with —να— and —νυ—........................................... 351

4. The Simple Thematic Present................................................................................. 351

5. The Reduplicated Thematic Present....................................................................... 351

6. The Thematic Present with a Suffix....................................................................... 351

(a) The ι class.......................................................................................................... 351

(β) The ν class........................................................................................................ 352

(γ) The σκ class...................................................................................................... 352

(δ) The τ class......................................................................................................... 352

(ε) The θ class......................................................................................................... 353

(f) THE FUTURE TENSE (ὁ μέλλων χρόνος)............................................................. 353

(g) THE PERFECT TENSES (τέλειοι χρόνοι).............................................................. 357

1. The Name................................................................................................................ 357

2. The Original Perfect. The....................................................................................... 357

3. The κ Perfect........................................................................................................... 358

4. The Aspirated Perfects............................................................................................ 359

5. Middle and Passive Forms...................................................................................... 359

6. The Decay of the Perfect Forms............................................................................. 359

7. The Perfect in the Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative............................................ 360

8. The Perfect Indicative............................................................................................. 360

9. Σ in Perfect Middle and Passive and Aorist Passive............................................. 362

(h) REDUPLICATION (διπλασιασμός or ἀναδίπλωσις).......................................... 362

1. Primitive................................................................................................................. 362

2. Both Nouns and Verbs............................................................................................ 362

3. In Three Tenses in Verbs........................................................................................ 362

4. Three Methods in Reduplication............................................................................ 363

5. Reduplication in the Perfect................................................................................... 363

(i) AUGMENT (αὔξησις).............................................................................................. 365

1. The Origin of Augment........................................................................................... 365

2. Where Found........................................................................................................... 365

3. The Purpose of Augment........................................................................................ 365

4. The Syllabic Augment (αὔξησις συλλαβική)...................................................... 365

5. The Temporal Augment (αὔξησις χρονκή).......................................................... 366

6. Compound Verbs (παρασύνθετα)........................................................................ 367

7. Double Augment..................................................................................................... 367

VIII. The Infinitive (ἡ ἀπαρέμφατος ἔγκλισις).......................................................................... 368

1. No Terminology at First............................................................................................. 368

2. Fixed Case-Forms....................................................................................................... 368

3. With Voice and Tense................................................................................................. 369

4. No Personal Endings................................................................................................... 370

5. Dative and Locative in Form...................................................................................... 370

6. The Presence of the Article........................................................................................ 371

7. The Disappearance of the Infinitive........................................................................... 371

8. Some N. T. Forms....................................................................................................... 371

IX. The Participle  (ἡ μετοχή).................................................................................................... 371

1. The Name.................................................................................................................... 371

2. Verbal Adjectives....................................................................................................... 372

3. True Participles........................................................................................................... 373

4. In Periphrastic Use...................................................................................................... 374

PART III    SYNTAX....................................................................................................................................... 378

CHAPTER IX:   THE MEANING OF SYNTAX (ΣΥΝΤΑΞΙΣ).................................................................... 379

I. Backwardness in the Study of Syntax...................................................................................... 379

II. New Testament Limitations.................................................................................................. 381

III. Recent Advance by Delbruck................................................................................................ 383

IV. The Province of Syntax........................................................................................................ 384

(a) THE WORD SYNTAX (σύνταξις).......................................................................... 384

(b) SCOPE OF SYNTAX................................................................................................ 385

(c) CONSTRUCTION OF WORDS AND CLAUSES.................................................... 385

(d) HISTORICAL SYNTAX........................................................................................... 386

(e) IRREGULARITIES.................................................................................................... 386

V. The Method of this Grammar................................................................................................ 387

(a) PRINCIPLES, NOT RULES...................................................................................... 387

(b) THE ORIGINAL SIGNIFICANCE............................................................................ 387

(c) FORM AND FUNCTION.......................................................................................... 387

(d) DEVELOPMENT...................................................................................................... 388

(e) CONTEXT................................................................................................................. 388

(f) TRANSLATION........................................................................................................ 389

(g) LIMITS OF SYNTAX............................................................................................... 389

CHAPTER X:   THE SENTENCE............................................................................................................ 390

I. The Sentence and Syntax....................................................................................................... 390

II. The Sentence Defined........................................................................................................... 390

(a) COMPLEX CONCEPTION....................................................................................... 390

(b) TWO ESSENTIAL PARTS....................................................................................... 390

(c) ONE-MEMBERED SENTENCE.............................................................................. 391

(d) ELLIPTICAL SENTENCE........................................................................................ 391

(e) ONLY PREDICATE.................................................................................................. 391

(f) ONLY SUBJECT....................................................................................................... 393

(g) VERB NOT THE ONLY PREDICATE..................................................................... 394

(h) COPULA NOT NECESSARY................................................................................... 395

(i) THE TWO RADIATING FOCI OF THE SENTENCE.............................................. 396

(j) VARIETIES OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE............................................................. 397

III. The Expansion of the Subject............................................................................................... 397

(a) IDEA-WORDS AND FORM-WORDS..................................................................... 397

(b) CONCORD AND GOVERNMENT.......................................................................... 397

(c) THE GROUP AROUND THE SUBJECT.................................................................. 398

1.Subordinate Clause.................................................................................................. 398

2. With the Article...................................................................................................... 398

3. The Adverb.............................................................................................................. 398

4. The Adjective.......................................................................................................... 398

5. The Substantive....................................................................................................... 398

(a) By an oblique case,............................................................................................ 398

(β) Apposition......................................................................................................... 398

IV. The Expansion of the Predicate............................................................................................ 400

(a) PREDICATE IN WIDER SENSE.............................................................................. 400

(b) THE INFINITIVE AND THE PARTICIPLE............................................................. 400

(c) THE RELATION BETWEEN THE PREDICATE AND SUBSTANTIVES............. 400

(d) THE PRONOUN........................................................................................................ 400

(e) ADJECTIVES............................................................................................................ 401

(f) THE ADVERB........................................................................................................... 401

(g) PREPOSITIONS........................................................................................................ 401

(h) NEGATIVE PARTICLES οὐ AND μή...................................................................... 401

(i) SUBORDINATE CLAUSES...................................................................................... 401

(j) APPOSITION WITH THE PREDICATE AND LOOSER AMPLIFICATIONS........ 401

V. Subordinate Centres in the Sentence...................................................................................... 402

VI. Concord in Person............................................................................................................... 402

VII. Concord in Number............................................................................................................ 403

(a) SUBJECT AND PREDICATE................................................................................... 403

1. Two Conflicting Principles..................................................................................... 403

2. Neuter Plural and Singular Verb............................................................................ 403

3. Collective Substantives.......................................................................................... 404

4. The Pindaric Construction...................................................................................... 404

5. Singular Verb with First Subject............................................................................ 405

6. The Literary Plural.................................................................................................. 406

(b) SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE......................................................................... 407

(c) REPRESENTATIVE SINGULAR............................................................................. 408

(d) IDIOMATIC PLURAL IN NOUNS........................................................................... 408

(e) IDIOMATIC SINGULAR IN NOUNS....................................................................... 409

(f) SPECIAL INSTANCES............................................................................................. 409

VIII. Concord in Gender............................................................................................................ 410

(a) FLUCTUATIONS IN GENDER................................................................................ 410

(b) THE NEUTER SINGULAR...................................................................................... 411

(C) EXPLANATORY ὅ ἐστιν AND τοῦ’ ἔστιν............................................................. 411

(d) THE PARTICIPLE.................................................................................................... 412

(e) ADJECTIVES............................................................................................................ 412

IX. Concord in Case.................................................................................................................. 413

(a) ADJECTIVES............................................................................................................ 413

(b) PARTICIPLES........................................................................................................... 413

(c) THE BOOK OF REVELATION................................................................................ 413

(d) OTHER PECULIARITIES IN APPOSITION............................................................ 416

(e) THE ABSOLUTE USE OF THE CASES (nominative, genitive, abla-.................... 416

tive and accusative)........................................................................................................ 416

X. Position of Words in the Sentence......................................................................................... 417

(a) FREEDOM FROM RULES....................................................................................... 417

(b)  PREDICATE OFTEN FIRST................................................................................... 417

(c) EMPHASIS................................................................................................................ 417

(d) THE MINOR WORDS IN A SENTENCE................................................................ 418

(e) EUPHONY AND RHYTHM..................................................................................... 419

(f) PROLEPSIS............................................................................................................... 423

(g) HYSTERON PROTERON......................................................................................... 423

(h) HYPERBATON......................................................................................................... 423

(i) POSTPOSITIVES....................................................................................................... 424

(j) FLUCTUATING WORDS......................................................................................... 424

(k) THE ORDER OF CLAUSES IN COMPOUND SENTENCES................................. 425

XI. Compound Sentences.......................................................................................................... 425

(a) TWO KINDS OF SENTENCES................................................................................ 425

(b) TWO KINDS OF COMPOUND SENTENCES......................................................... 426

(c) PARATACTIC SENTENCES.................................................................................... 426

(d) HYPOTACTIC SENTENCES................................................................................... 426

XII. Connection in Sentences..................................................................................................... 427

(a) SINGLE WORDS...................................................................................................... 427

(b) CLAUSES.................................................................................................................. 428

1. Paratactic Sentences............................................................................................... 428

2. Hypotactic Sentences.............................................................................................. 429

3. The Infinitive and Participle as Connectives......................................................... 431

(c) TWO KINDS OF STYLE.......................................................................................... 432

(d) THE PARENTHESIS (παρένθεσις)........................................................................ 433

(e) ANACOLUTHON..................................................................................................... 435

1. The Suspended Subject........................................................................................... 436

2. Digression............................................................................................................... 437

3. The Participle in Anacolutha.................................................................................. 439

4. Asyndeton Due to Absence of δέ and ἀλλά........................................................... 440

(f) ORATIO VARIATA................................................................................................... 440

1. Distinction from Anacoluthon................................................................................ 440

2. Heterogeneous Structure......................................................................................... 441

3. Participles in Oratio Variata................................................................................... 442

4. Exchange of Direct and Indirect Discourse............................................................ 442

(g) CONNECTION BETWEEN SEPARATE SENTENCES.......................................... 443

(h) CONNECTION BETWEEN PARAGRAPHS........................................................... 444

XIII. Forecast........................................................................................................................... 444

CHAPTER XI:   THE CASES (ΠΤΩΣΕΙΣ).............................................................................................. 446

I. History of the Interpretation of the Greek Cases...................................................................... 446

(a) CONFUSION............................................................................................................. 446

(b) BOPP'S CONTRIBUTION........................................................................................ 446

(c) MODERN USAGE.................................................................................................... 447

(d) GREEN'S CLASSIFICATION................................................................................... 447

(e) SYNCRETISM OF THE CASES............................................................................... 448

(f) FREEDOM IN USE OF CASE.................................................................................. 448

II. The Purpose of the Cases...................................................................................................... 449

(a) ARISTOTLE'S USAGE............................................................................................. 449

(b) WORD-RELATIONS................................................................................................ 449

III. The Encroachment of Prepositions on the Cases.................................................................... 450

(a) THE REASON........................................................................................................... 450

(b) NO "GOVERNING" OF CASES............................................................................... 450

(c) NOT USED INDIFFERENTLY................................................................................. 450

(d) ORIGINAL USE WITH LOCAL CASES.................................................................. 451

(e) INCREASING USE OF PREPOSITIONS................................................................. 451

(f) DISTINCTION PRESERVED IN THE N. T.............................................................. 452

IV. The Distinctive Idea of Each of the Cases.............................................................................. 453

(a) FUNDAMENTAL IDEA........................................................................................... 453

(b) CASES NOT USED FOR ONE ANOTHER............................................................. 454

(c) VITALITY OF CASE-IDEA...................................................................................... 454

(d) THE HISTORICAL DEVELOPMENT OF THE CASES.......................................... 454

(e) THE METHOD OF THIS GRAMMAR.................................................................... 456

V. The Nominative (πτῶσις ὀρθή, εὐθεῖα, ὀνομαστική)......................................................... 456

(a) NOT THE OLDEST CASE........................................................................................ 456

(b) REASON FOR THE CASE....................................................................................... 457

(C) PREDICATE NOMINATIVE................................................................................... 457

(d) SOMETIMES UNALTERED.................................................................................... 458

(e) THE NOMINATIVE ABSOLUTE............................................................................ 459

(f) THE PARENTHETIC NOMINATIVE....................................................................... 460

(g) IN EXCLAMATIONS............................................................................................... 461

(h) USED AS VOCATIVE.............................................................................................. 461

VI. The Vocative (πτῶσις κλητική).......................................................................................... 461

(a) NATURE OF THE VOCATIVE................................................................................ 461

(b) VARIOUS DEVICES................................................................................................ 462

(c) USE OF WITH THE VOCATIVE......................................................................... 463

(d) ADJECTIVES USED WITH THE VOCATIVE........................................................ 464

(e) APPOSITION TO THE VOCATIVE......................................................................... 464

(f) VOCATIVE IN PREDICATE.................................................................................... 464

(g) THE ARTICLE WITH THE VOCATIVE................................................................. 465

VII. The Accusative (ἡ αἰτιατικὴ πτῶσις)................................................................................. 466

(a) THE NAME............................................................................................................... 466

(b) AGE AND HISTORY................................................................................................ 466

(c) THE MEANING OF THE ACCUSATIVE................................................................ 467

(d) WITH VERBS OF MOTION..................................................................................... 468

(e) EXTENT OF SPACE................................................................................................. 469

(f) EXTENT OF TIME.................................................................................................... 469

(g) WITH TRANSITIVE VERBS................................................................................... 471

(h) THE COGNATE ACCUSATIVE.............................................................................. 477

(i) DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE.......................................................................................... 479

(j) WITH PASSIVE VERBS........................................................................................... 484

(k) THE ADVERBIAL ACCUSATIVE.......................................................................... 486

(1) THE ACCUSATIVE BY ANTIPTOSIS.................................................................... 488

(m) THE ACCUSATIVE BY INVERSE ATTRACTION............................................... 488

(n) THE ACCUSATIVE WITH THE INFINITIVE......................................................... 489

(o) THE ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE............................................................................ 490

(p) THE ACCUSATIVE WITH PREPOSITIONS........................................................... 491

VIII. The Genitive (True) Case (ἡ γενικὴ πρῶσις)....................................................................... 491

(a) TWO CASES WITH ONE FORM............................................................................. 491

(b) NAME INCORRECT................................................................................................ 492

(c) THE SPECIFYING CASE......................................................................................... 493

(d) THE LOCAL USE..................................................................................................... 494

(e) THE TEMPORAL USE............................................................................................. 495

(f) WITH SUBSTANTIVES............................................................................................ 495

1. The Possessive7 Genitive....................................................................................... 495

2. Attributive Genitive................................................................................................ 496

3. The Predicate Genitive........................................................................................... 497

4. Apposition or Definition......................................................................................... 498

5. The Subjective Genitive......................................................................................... 499

6. The Objective Genitive........................................................................................... 499

7. Genitive of Relationship......................................................................................... 501

8. Partitive Genitive.................................................................................................... 502

9. The Position of the Genitive................................................................................... 502

10. Concatenation of Genitives.................................................................................. 503

(g) THE GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES................................................................. 503

(h) THE GENITIVE WITH ADVERBS AND PREPOSITIONS..................................... 505

(i) THE GENITIVE WITH VERBS................................................................................ 505

1. Very Common......................................................................................................... 506

2. Fading Distinction from Accusative...................................................................... 506

4. Verbs of Emotion.................................................................................................... 508

5. Verbs of Sharing, Partaking and Filling................................................................. 509

6. Verbs of Ruling....................................................................................................... 510

7. Verbs of Buying, Selling, Being Worthy of........................................................... 510

8. Verbs of Accusing and Condemning...................................................................... 511

9. Genitive Due to Prepositions in Composition........................................................ 511

10. Attraction of the Relative..................................................................................... 512

(j) THE GENITIVE OF THE INFINITIVE..................................................................... 512

(k) THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE................................................................................... 512

IX. The Ablative ("Ablatival Genitive") Case (ἡ ἀφαιρετικὴ πτῶσις)............................................ 514

(a) THE NAME............................................................................................................... 514

(b) THE MEANING........................................................................................................ 514

(c) RARE WITH SUBSTANTIVES................................................................................ 514

(d) THE ABLATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES.................................................................... 515

(e) THE ABLATIVE WITH PREPOSITIONS................................................................ 516

(f) THE ABLATIVE WITH VERBS............................................................................... 517

1. Verbs of Departure and Removal........................................................................... 518

2. Verbs of Ceasing, Abstaining................................................................................. 518

3. Verbs of Missing, Lacking, Despairing.................................................................. 518

4. Verbs of Differing, Excelling................................................................................. 519

5. Verbs of Asking and Hearing................................................................................. 519

6. Verbs with the Partitive Idea.................................................................................. 519

7. Attraction of the Relative....................................................................................... 519

X. The Locative (" Locatival Dative ") Case (ἡ τοπικὴ πτῶσις).................................................... 520

(a) THE NAME LOCATIVE........................................................................................... 520

(b) THE SIGNIFICANCE OF THE LOCATIVE............................................................. 520

(c) PLACE....................................................................................................................... 521

(d) TIME......................................................................................................................... 522

(e) LOCATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES............................................................................ 523

(f) LOCATIVE WITH VERBS....................................................................................... 523

(g) THE LOCATIVE WITH SUBSTANTIVES.............................................................. 524

(h) THE LOCATIVE WITH PREPOSITIONS................................................................ 524

(i) THE PREGNANT CONSTRUCTION OF THE LOCATIVE.................................... 525

XI. The Instrumental (" Instrumental Dative ") Case (ἡ χρηστικὴ πτῶσις).................................... 525

(a) THE TERM INSTRUMENTAL................................................................................ 525

(b) SYNCRETISTIC?...................................................................................................... 526

(c) PLACE....................................................................................................................... 526

(d) TIME......................................................................................................................... 527

(e) THE ASSOCIATIVE IDEA....................................................................................... 528

(f) WITH WORDS OF LIKENESS AND IDENTITY.................................................... 530

(g) MANNER.................................................................................................................. 530

(h) DEGREE OF DIFFERENCE..................................................................................... 532

(i) CAUSE....................................................................................................................... 532

(j) MEANS...................................................................................................................... 532

(k) WITH PREPOSITIONS............................................................................................. 534

XII. The Dative (True) Case (ἡ δοτικὴ πτῶσις)........................................................................... 535

(a) SYNCRETISM.......................................................................................................... 535

(b) THE DECAY OF THE DATIVE............................................................................... 535

(c) THE IDEA OF THE DATIVE................................................................................... 536

(d) THE DATIVE WITH SUBSTANTIVES................................................................... 536

(e) WITH ADJECTIVES................................................................................................. 537

(f) WITH ADVERBS AND PREPOSITIONS................................................................. 537

(g) WITH VERBS........................................................................................................... 538

1. Indirect Object........................................................................................................ 538

2. Dativus Commodi vel Incommodi......................................................................... 538

3. Direct Object........................................................................................................... 539

4. The Dative with Intransitive Verbs........................................................................ 541

5. Possession............................................................................................................... 541

6. Infinitive as Final Dative........................................................................................ 541

7. The Dative of the Agent.......................................................................................... 542

8. The Dative because of the Preposition................................................................... 542

(h) AMBIGUOUS EXAMPLES...................................................................................... 543

CHAPTER XII:   ADVERBS (  ἘΠΙΡΡΗΜΑΤΑ).................................................................................... 544

I. Special Difficulties................................................................................................................. 544

(a) NATURE OF THE ADVERB.................................................................................... 544

(b) THE NARROWER SENSE OF ADVERB................................................................ 544

II. Adverbs with Verbs............................................................................................................... 545

(a) COMMONEST USE.................................................................................................. 545

(b) N. T. USAGE............................................................................................................. 545

(c) PREDICATIVE USES WITH γίνομαι AND εἰμί..................................................... 545

(d) WITH   Ἔχω............................................................................................................. 546

(e) WITH PARTICIPLES................................................................................................ 546

(f) LOOSE RELATION TO THE VERB........................................................................ 546

III. Adverbs Used with Other Adverbs......................................................................................... 546

IV. Adverbs with Adjectives....................................................................................................... 546

V. Adverbs with Substantives..................................................................................................... 547

VI. Adverbs Treated as Substantives........................................................................................... 547

VII. The Pregnant Use of Adverbs.............................................................................................. 548

VIII. Adverbs as Marks of Style.................................................................................................. 548

IX. The Adverb Distinguished from the Adjective......................................................................... 549

(a) DIFFERENT MEANING........................................................................................... 549

(b) DIFFERENCE IN GREEK AND ENGLISH IDIOM................................................. 549

X. Adverbial Phrases................................................................................................................. 550

(a) INCIPIENT ADVERBS............................................................................................. 550

(b) PREPOSITIONAL PHRASES................................................................................... 550

(c) PARTICIPLES........................................................................................................... 551

(d) THE VERB USED ADVERBIALLY........................................................................ 551

CHAPTER XIII:   PREPOSITIONS (ΠΡΟΘΕΣΕΙΣ)................................................................................. 553

I. The Name............................................................................................................................ 553

(a) SOME POSTPOSITIVE............................................................................................ 553

(b) NOT ORIGINALLY USED WITH VERBS.............................................................. 553

(c) EXPLANATION........................................................................................................ 553

II. The Origin of Prepositions..................................................................................................... 554

(a) ORIGINALLY ADVERBS........................................................................................ 554

(b) REASON FOR USE OF PREPOSITIONS................................................................ 554

(c) VARYING HISTORY................................................................................................ 555

III. Growth in the Use of Prepositions........................................................................................ 555

(a) ONCE NO PREPOSITIONS...................................................................................... 555

(b) THE PREPOSITIONS STILL USED AS ADVERBS IN HOMER........................... 555

(c) DECREASING USE AS ADVERBS AFTER HOMER............................................ 555

(d) SEMITIC INFLUENCE IN N. T................................................................................ 556

(e) IN MODERN GREEK............................................................................................... 557

IV. Prepositions in Composition with Verbs................................................................................ 557

(a) NOT THE MAIN FUNCTION................................................................................... 557

(b) PREPOSITION ALONE............................................................................................ 558

(c) INCREASING USE................................................................................................... 558

(d) REPETITION AFTER VERB.................................................................................... 559

(e) DIFFERENT PREPOSITION AFTER VERB............................................................ 560

(f) SECOND PREPOSITION NOT NECESSARY......................................................... 562

(g) EFFECT OF PREPOSITION ON MEANING OF THE VERB................................. 562

(h) DROPPING THE PREPOSITION WITH SECOND VERB...................................... 563

(i) INTENSIVE OR PERFECTIVE................................................................................. 563

(j) DOUBLE COMPOUNDS.......................................................................................... 565

V. Repetition and Variation of Prepositions................................................................................ 565

(a) SAME PREPOSITION WITH DIFFERENT CASES................................................ 565

(b) REPETITION WITH SEVERAL NOUNS................................................................ 566

(c) REPETITION WITH THE RELATIVE..................................................................... 566

(d) CONDENSATION BY VARIATION........................................................................ 567

VI. The Functions of Prepositions with Cases.............................................................................. 567

(a) THE CASE BEFORE PREPOSITIONS..................................................................... 567

(b) NOTION OF DIMENSION....................................................................................... 567

(C) ORIGINAL FORCE OF THE CASE......................................................................... 567

(d) THE GROUND-MEANING OF THE PREPOSITION.............................................. 568

(e) THE OBLIQUE CASES ALONE WITH PREPOSITIONS....................................... 568

(f) ORIGINAL FREEDOM............................................................................................. 568

(g) NO ADEQUATE DIVISION BY CASES.................................................................. 569

(h) SITUATION IN THE N. T......................................................................................... 569

1. Those with One Case.............................................................................................. 570

2. Those with Two Cases............................................................................................ 570

3. Those with Three Cases.......................................................................................... 570

4. Possibly Four with ἐπί............................................................................................ 570

(i) EACH PREPOSITION IN A CASE............................................................................ 570

VII. Proper Prepositions in the N. T............................................................................................ 571

(a) Ἀνά............................................................................................................................ 571

(b) Ἀντί........................................................................................................................... 572

(c)  Ἀπό.......................................................................................................................... 574

1. Original Significance.............................................................................................. 575

2. Meaning 'Back.'....................................................................................................... 576

3. "Translation-Hebraism" in φοβεῖσθαι ἀπό.......................................................... 577

4. Comparison with ἐκ................................................................................................ 577

5. Comparison with παρά.......................................................................................... 578

6. Compared with ὑπό................................................................................................ 579

(d) Διά............................................................................................................................. 580

1. The Root-Idea.......................................................................................................... 580

2. 'By Twos' or 'Between.'........................................................................................... 580

3. 'Passing Between' or 'Through.'.............................................................................. 581

4. 'Because of.'............................................................................................................ 583

(e)  Ἐν............................................................................................................................. 584

1. Old Use of ἐν with Accusative or Locative............................................................ 584

2.  Ἐν Older than εἰς................................................................................................... 585

3. Place........................................................................................................................ 586

4. Expressions of Time............................................................................................... 586

5. 'Among.'.................................................................................................................. 587

6. 'In the Case of,' ‘in the Person of’ or simply 'in.'................................................... 587

7. As a Dative?............................................................................................................ 588

8. Accompanying Circumstance................................................................................. 588

9. 'Amounting to,' ‘Occasion,’ ‘Sphere.’.................................................................... 589

10. Instrumental Use of ἐν.......................................................................................... 589

(f) Εἰς.............................................................................................................................. 591

1. Original Static Use.................................................................................................. 591

2. With Verbs of Motion............................................................................................. 593

3. With Expressions of Time...................................................................................... 594

4. Like a Dative........................................................................................................... 594

5. Aim or Purpose....................................................................................................... 594

6. Predicative Use....................................................................................................... 595

7. Compared with ἐπί, παρά and πρός..................................................................... 596

(g)  Ἐκ (ἐξ)..................................................................................................................... 596

1. Meaning.................................................................................................................. 596

2. In Composition........................................................................................................ 596

3. Place........................................................................................................................ 597

4. Time........................................................................................................................ 597

5. Separation............................................................................................................... 597

6. Origin or Source...................................................................................................... 598

7. Cause or Occasion................................................................................................... 598

8. The Partitive Use of ἐκ........................................................................................... 599

9.  Ἐκ and ἐν............................................................................................................... 599

(h)  Ἐπί........................................................................................................................... 600

1. Ground-Meaning..................................................................................................... 600

2. In Composition in the N. T..................................................................................... 600

3. Frequency in N. T................................................................................................... 600

4. With the Accusative................................................................................................ 601

5. With the Genitive.................................................................................................... 602

6. With the Locative................................................................................................... 604

7. The True Dative...................................................................................................... 605

(i) Κατά.......................................................................................................................... 605

1. Root-Meaning......................................................................................................... 605

2. Distributive Sense................................................................................................... 606

3. κατά in Composition.............................................................................................. 606

4. With the Ablative.................................................................................................... 606

5. With the Genitive.................................................................................................... 607

6. With the Accusative................................................................................................ 607

(j) Μετά.......................................................................................................................... 609

1. The Root-Meaning.................................................................................................. 609

2. In Composition........................................................................................................ 609

3. Compared with σύν................................................................................................ 609

4. Loss of the Locative Use........................................................................................ 610

5. With the Genitive.................................................................................................... 610

6. With the Accusative................................................................................................ 612

(k) Παρά......................................................................................................................... 612

1. Significance............................................................................................................ 612

2. Compared with πρός.............................................................................................. 613

3. In Composition........................................................................................................ 613

4. With the Locative................................................................................................... 614

5. With the Ablative.................................................................................................... 614

6. With the Accusative................................................................................................ 615

(l) Περί............................................................................................................................ 616

1. The Root-Meaning.................................................................................................. 617

2. In Composition........................................................................................................ 617

3. Originally Four Cases Used.................................................................................... 617

4. With the Ablative.................................................................................................... 617

5. With the Genitive.................................................................................................... 618

6. With the Accusative................................................................................................ 619

(m) Πρό.......................................................................................................................... 620

1. The Original Meaning............................................................................................. 620

2. In Composition........................................................................................................ 620

3. The Cases Used with πρό....................................................................................... 621

4. Place........................................................................................................................ 621

5. Time........................................................................................................................ 621

6. Superiority.............................................................................................................. 622

(n) Πρός.......................................................................................................................... 622

1. The Meaning........................................................................................................... 622

2. In Composition........................................................................................................ 623

3. Originally with Five Cases..................................................................................... 623

4. The Ablative............................................................................................................ 623

5. With the Locative................................................................................................... 624

6. With the Accusative................................................................................................ 624

(o) Σύν............................................................................................................................ 626

1. The Meaning........................................................................................................... 626

2. History..................................................................................................................... 627

3. In Composition........................................................................................................ 627

4. N. T. Usage.............................................................................................................. 628

(p)  Ὑπέρ........................................................................................................................ 628

1. The Meaning........................................................................................................... 629

2. In Composition........................................................................................................ 629

3. With Genitive?........................................................................................................ 629

4. With Ablative.......................................................................................................... 630

5. The Accusative with ὑπέρ...................................................................................... 632

(q)  Ὑπό......................................................................................................................... 633

1. The Original Meaning............................................................................................. 633

2. In Composition........................................................................................................ 633

3. The Cases Once Used with ὑπό............................................................................. 634

4. With the Accusative................................................................................................ 635

5. With the Ablative.................................................................................................... 635

VIII. The "Adverbial" Prepositions.............................................................................................. 636

1.   Ἅμα........................................................................................................................... 638

2.  Ἄνευ........................................................................................................................... 638

3.  Ἄντικρυς................................................................................................................... 638

4.  Ἀντίπερα................................................................................................................... 638

5.  Ἀπέναντι................................................................................................................... 639

6.  Ἄτερ........................................................................................................................... 639

7.  Ἄχρι(ς)...................................................................................................................... 639

8.  Ἐγγύς........................................................................................................................ 639

9.  Ἐκτός......................................................................................................................... 640

10.  Ἔμπροσθεν............................................................................................................ 640

11.  Ἔναντι..................................................................................................................... 640

12.   Ἐναντίον................................................................................................................ 640

13.  Ἕνεκα...................................................................................................................... 641

14.  Ἐντός....................................................................................................................... 641

15.  Ἐνώπιον................................................................................................................. 641

16.  Ἔξω......................................................................................................................... 642

17.  Ἔξωθεν................................................................................................................... 642

18.  Ἐπ-άνω................................................................................................................... 642

19.  Ἐπέκεινα................................................................................................................. 642

20.   Ἔσω....................................................................................................................... 642

21.   Ἕως........................................................................................................................ 643

22. Κατέναντι................................................................................................................. 643

23. Κατενώπιον............................................................................................................. 644

24. Κυκλόθεν................................................................................................................. 644

25. Κύκλῳ...................................................................................................................... 644

26. Μέσον....................................................................................................................... 644

27. Μεταξύ..................................................................................................................... 645

28. Μέχρι........................................................................................................................ 645

29.   Ὄπισθεν................................................................................................................ 645

30.   Ὀπίσω................................................................................................................... 645

31.  Ὀψέ.......................................................................................................................... 645

32. Παρα-πλήσιον........................................................................................................ 646

33. Παρ-εκτός................................................................................................................ 646

34. Πέραν....................................................................................................................... 646

35.  Πλήν, Doric πλάν................................................................................................... 646

36. Πλησίον, Doric πλατίον......................................................................................... 646

37.   Ὑπερ-άνω.............................................................................................................. 646

38.   Ὑπερ-έκεινα.......................................................................................................... 647

39.   Ὑπερ-εκ-περισσοῦ............................................................................................... 647

40.  Ὑπο-κάτω.............................................................................................................. 647

41. Χάριν........................................................................................................................ 647

42. Χωρίς....................................................................................................................... 647

IX. Compound Prepositions....................................................................................................... 648

X. Prepositional Circumlocutions............................................................................................... 648

(a) Μέσον....................................................................................................................... 648

(bὌνομα.................................................................................................................... 649

(c) Πρόσωπον............................................................................................................... 649

(d) Στόμα........................................................................................................................ 649

(e) Χείρ........................................................................................................................... 649

CHAPTER XIV:  ADJECTIVES ( ἘΠΙΘΕΤΑ)................................................................................ 650

I. Origin of Adjectives............................................................................................................... 650

II. The Adjectival or Appositional Use of the Substantive............................................................. 651

III. The Adjective as Substantive................................................................................................ 652

(a) ANY GENDER.......................................................................................................... 652

(b) WITH MASCULINE ADJECTIVES......................................................................... 652

(c) WITH FEMININE ADJECTIVES............................................................................. 652

(d) WITH THE NEUTER................................................................................................ 653

IV. Agreement of Adjectives with Substantives........................................................................... 654

(a) IN NUMBER............................................................................................................. 654

(b) IN GENDER.............................................................................................................. 655

(c) IN CASE.................................................................................................................... 655

(d) Two or MORE ADJECTIVES................................................................................... 655

V. The Attributive Adjective....................................................................................................... 655

VI. The Predicate Adjective....................................................................................................... 656

VII. Adjective Rather than Adverb.............................................................................................. 657

VIII. The Personal Construction................................................................................................. 657

IX. Adjectives Used with Cases.................................................................................................. 658

X. Adjectives with the Infinitive and Clauses............................................................................... 658

XI. The Adjective as Adverb....................................................................................................... 659

XII. The Positive Adjective......................................................................................................... 659

(a) RELATIVE CONTRAST........................................................................................... 659

(b) USED AS COMPARATIVE OR SUPERLATIVE.................................................... 660

(c) WITH PREPOSITIONS............................................................................................. 661

(d) COMPARISON IMPLIED BY ............................................................................... 661

(e) IN ABSOLUTE SENSE............................................................................................. 661

XIII. The Comparative Adjective (συγκριτικὸν ὄνομα)............................................................... 662

(a) CONTRAST OR DUALITY...................................................................................... 662

(b) DEGREE.................................................................................................................... 663

(c) WITHOUT SUFFIXES.............................................................................................. 663

(d) DOUBLE COMPARISON......................................................................................... 663

(e) WITHOUT OBJECT OF COMPARISON................................................................. 664

(f) FOLLOWED BY ..................................................................................................... 666

(g) FOLLOWED BY THE ABLATIVE.......................................................................... 666

(h) FOLLOWED BY PREPOSITIONS........................................................................... 667

(i) THE COMPARATIVE DISPLACING THE SUPERLATIVE................................... 667

XIV. The Superlative Adjective (ὑπερθετικὸν ὄνομα)................................................................. 669

(a) THE SUPERLATIVE VANISHING.......................................................................... 669

(b) A FEW TRUE SUPERLATIVES IN THE N. T........................................................ 669

(c) THE ELATIVE SUPERLATIVE............................................................................... 670

(d) NO DOUBLE SUPERLATIVES............................................................................... 670

(e) FOLLOWED BY ABLATIVE................................................................................... 670

(f) No “HEBRAISTIC” SUPERLATIVE........................................................................ 671

XV. Numerals........................................................................................................................... 671

(a) Εἷς AND Πρῶτος..................................................................................................... 671

(b) THE SIMPLIFICATION OF THE “ TEENS.”.......................................................... 672

(d) THE DISTRIBUTIVES.............................................................................................. 673

(e) THE CARDINAL Ἑπτά............................................................................................ 673

(f) SUBSTANTIVE NOT EXPRESSED......................................................................... 674

(g) ADVERBS WITH NUMERALS............................................................................... 674

(h) Εἷς AS INDEFINITE ARTICLE................................................................................ 674

(i) Εἷς= Τις..................................................................................................................... 675

(j) THE DISTRIBUTIVE USE OF Εἷς............................................................................ 675

CHAPTER XV:   PRONOUNS ( ἈΝΤΩΝΥΜΙΑΙ).......................................................................... 676

I. Personal Pronouns (πρωτότυποι ἢ προσωπικαὶ ἀντωνυμίαι)........................................... 676

(a) THE NOMINATIVE.................................................................................................. 676

1. The First Person, ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς............................................................................ 677

2. The Second Person, σύ and ὑμεῖς.......................................................................... 678

3. The Third Person..................................................................................................... 679

(b) THE OBLIQUE CASES OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.................................. 680

1. Originally Reflexive............................................................................................... 680

2. Αὐτοῦ...................................................................................................................... 681

3. Genitive for Possession.......................................................................................... 681

4. Enclitic Forms......................................................................................................... 681

(c) THE FREQUENCY OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS......................................... 682

(d) REDUNDANT........................................................................................................... 683

(e) ACCORDING TO SENSE......................................................................................... 683

(f) REPETITION OF THE SUBSTANTIVE................................................................... 684

II. The Possessive Pronouns (κτητικαὶ ἀντωνυμίαι).................................................................. 684

(a) JUST THE ARTICLE................................................................................................ 684

(b) ONLY FOR FIRST AND SECOND PERSONS........................................................ 684

(c) EMPHASIS, WHEN USED....................................................................................... 684

(d) WITH THE ARTICLE............................................................................................... 685

(e) POSSESSIVE AND GENITIVE TOGETHER........................................................... 685

(f) OBJECTIVE USE...................................................................................................... 685

(g) INSTEAD OF REFLEXIVE...................................................................................... 685

III. The Intensive and Identical Pronoun (σύντονος ἀντωνυμία)................................................. 685

(a) THE NOMINATIVE USE OF Αὐτός........................................................................ 685

(b) VARYING DEGREES OF EMPHASIS.................................................................... 686

(c) Αὐτός WITH Οὗτος................................................................................................. 686

(d) Αὐτός ALMOST DEMONSTRATIVE..................................................................... 686

(e) IN THE OBLIQUE CASES....................................................................................... 686

(f)  Αὐτός SIDE BY SIDE WITH THE REFLEXIVE.................................................... 687

(g)  Ὁ Αὐτός.................................................................................................................. 687

IV. The Reflexive Pronoun (ἀντανακλαστικὴ ἀντωνυμία)........................................................ 687

(a) DISTINCTIVE USE................................................................................................... 687

(b) THE ABSENCE OF THE REFLEXIVE FROM THE NOMINATIVE..................... 688

(c) THE INDIRECT REFLEXIVE.................................................................................. 688

(d) IN THE SINGULAR.................................................................................................. 688

(e) IN THE PLURAL...................................................................................................... 689

(f) ARTICLE WITH........................................................................................................ 690

(g) REFLEXIVE IN THE RECIPROCAL SENSE.......................................................... 690

(h) REFLEXIVE WITH MIDDLE VOICE...................................................................... 690

(i) THE USE OF   Ἴδιος................................................................................................. 691

V. The Reciprocal Pronoun (ἡ ἀμοιβαία ἀντωνυμία)................................................................ 692

VI. Demonstrative Pronouns (δεικτικαὶ ἀντωνυμίαι)................................................................ 693

(a) NATURE................................................................................................................... 693

(b) DIFFERENT SHADES OF MEANING.................................................................... 693

(c)   , , τό................................................................................................................... 693

(d)   Ὅς.......................................................................................................................... 695

(e)  Ὅδε.......................................................................................................................... 696

(f) Οὗτος........................................................................................................................ 697

1. The Purely Deictic.................................................................................................. 697

2. The Contemptuous Use of οὗτος........................................................................... 697

3. The Anaphoric Use................................................................................................. 697

4. In Apposition........................................................................................................... 698

5. Use of the Article.................................................................................................... 700

6. Article Absent......................................................................................................... 701

7.  Οὗτος in Contrast with ἐκεῖνος............................................................................ 702

8. As Antecedent of the Relative Pronoun................................................................. 703

9. Gender and Number of οὗτος................................................................................. 704

10. The Adverbial Uses of τοῦτο and ταῦτα............................................................. 704

11. The Phrase τοῦτ’ ἔστιν......................................................................................... 705

12. In Combination with Other Pronouns................................................................... 705

13. Ellipsis of  οὗτος.................................................................................................. 705

14. Shift in Reference................................................................................................. 706

(g)  Ἐκεῖνος.................................................................................................................... 706

1. The Purely Deictic.................................................................................................. 707

2. The Contemptuous Use (cf. οὗτος)........................................................................ 707

3. The Anaphoric......................................................................................................... 707

4. The Remote Object (Contrast)................................................................................ 707

5. Emphasis................................................................................................................. 708

6. With Apposition...................................................................................................... 708

7. Article with Nouns except when Predicate............................................................ 708

8. As Antecedent to Relative...................................................................................... 708

9. Gender and Number................................................................................................ 708

10. Independent Use.................................................................................................... 709

(h) Αὐτός........................................................................................................................ 709

(i) THE CORRELATIVE DEMONSTRATIVES............................................................ 709

VII. Relative Pronouns (’αναφορικαὶ ἀντωνυμίαι).................................................................... 710

(a) LIST IN THE N. T..................................................................................................... 710

(b) THE NAME "RELATIVE."....................................................................................... 711

(c) A BOND BETWEEN CLAUSES.............................................................................. 711

(d)   Ὅς.......................................................................................................................... 711

1. In Homer................................................................................................................. 711

2. Comparison with Other Relatives.......................................................................... 711

3. With Any Person..................................................................................................... 712

4. Gender..................................................................................................................... 712

5. Number.................................................................................................................... 714

6. Case......................................................................................................................... 714

(α) Absence of attraction normal........................................................................... 714

(β) Cognate accusative........................................................................................... 715

(γ) Attraction to the case of the antecedent........................................................... 715

(δ) Inverse attraction.............................................................................................. 717

(ε) Incorporation..................................................................................................... 718

(1) The simplest form......................................................................................... 718

(2)[Change of Case]............................................................................................ 719

(3) [Attraction of Relative to Antecedent]......................................................... 719

7. Absence of Antecedent........................................................................................... 719

8. Prepositions with the Antecedent and Relative...................................................... 721

9. Relative Phrases...................................................................................................... 721

10. Pleonastic Antecedent........................................................................................... 722

11. The Repetition of ὅς............................................................................................. 723

12. A Consecutive Idea............................................................................................... 724

13. Causal.................................................................................................................... 724

14. In Direct Questions............................................................................................... 725

15. In Indirect Questions............................................................................................. 725

16. The Idiom οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅς................................................................................... 726

(e)   Ὅστις..................................................................................................................... 726

1. Varied Uses............................................................................................................. 726

2. The Distinction between ὅς and ὅστις................................................................... 726

3. The Indefinite Use................................................................................................... 727

4. The Definite Examples........................................................................................... 727

5. Value of ὅς?............................................................................................................ 728

6. Case......................................................................................................................... 728

7. Number.................................................................................................................... 729

8. Gender..................................................................................................................... 729

9. Direct Questions..................................................................................................... 729

10. Indirect Questions................................................................................................. 730

(f) Οἷος........................................................................................................................... 731

1. Relation to ὅς.......................................................................................................... 731

2. Incorporation........................................................................................................... 731

3. Indirect Question..................................................................................................... 731

4. Number.................................................................................................................... 731

5. Οἷόν τέ ἐστιν.......................................................................................................... 732

(g)   Ὁποῖος................................................................................................................... 732

1. Qualitative............................................................................................................... 732

2. Double Office.......................................................................................................... 732

3. Correlative.............................................................................................................. 732

(h)   Ὅσος...................................................................................................................... 732

1. Quantitative............................................................................................................. 732

2. Antecedent.............................................................................................................. 732

3. Attraction................................................................................................................ 732

4. Incorporation........................................................................................................... 733

5. Repetition................................................................................................................ 733

6. With ἄν................................................................................................................... 733

7. Indirect Questions................................................................................................... 733

8. In Comparison......................................................................................................... 733

9. Adverbial................................................................................................................. 733

(i)   Ἡλίκος.................................................................................................................... 733

(j)  AS RELATIVE..................................................................................................... 734

VIII. Interrogative Pronouns (ἀντωνυμίαι ἐρωτητικαί)............................................................. 735

(a) Τίς............................................................................................................................. 735

1. Substantival or Adjectival...................................................................................... 735

2. The Absence of Gender........................................................................................... 735

3. Τίς=ποῖος.............................................................................................................. 735

4. Indeclinable τί......................................................................................................... 736

5. Predicate Use of τί with τοῦτο............................................................................... 736

6. In Alternative Questions......................................................................................... 736

7. The Double Interrogative........................................................................................ 737

8. As Relative.............................................................................................................. 737

9. Adverbial Use......................................................................................................... 738

10. With Prepositions................................................................................................. 739

11. With Particles....................................................................................................... 739

12. As Exclamation..................................................................................................... 739

13. Indirect Questions................................................................................................. 739

14. Τίς or τίς............................................................................................................... 739

(b) Ποῖος........................................................................................................................ 740

1. Qualitative............................................................................................................... 740

2. Non-qualitative....................................................................................................... 740

3. In Indirect Questions............................................................................................... 740

(c) Πόσος....................................................................................................................... 740

1. Less Frequent than ποῖος....................................................................................... 740

2. Meaning.................................................................................................................. 740

3. In Indirect Questions............................................................................................... 741

4. The Exclamatory Use.............................................................................................. 741

(d) Πηλίκος.................................................................................................................... 741

1. Rare......................................................................................................................... 741

2. Indirect Questions................................................................................................... 741

(e) Ποταπός................................................................................................................... 741

(f) Πότερος..................................................................................................................... 741

IX. Indefinite Pronouns (ἀντωνυμίαι ἀόριστοι)........................................................................ 741

(a) Τὶς............................................................................................................................. 741

1. The Accent.............................................................................................................. 741

2. Relation to τίς......................................................................................................... 741

3.  Τις as Substantive................................................................................................. 742

4. With Numerals = 'About.'....................................................................................... 742

5. With Substantives................................................................................................... 742

6. With Adjectives...................................................................................................... 743

7. As Predicate............................................................................................................ 743

8. The Position of τις.................................................................................................. 743

9. As Antecedent......................................................................................................... 743

10. Alternative............................................................................................................ 743

11. The Negative Forms οὔ τις, μή τις....................................................................... 743

12. Indeclinable τι....................................................................................................... 744

(b) Εἷς = Τις................................................................................................................... 744

(c) Πᾶς =‘any one’ no matter who,................................................................................ 744

(d)  Ὁ Δεῖνα................................................................................................................... 744

X. Alternative or Distributive Pronouns (ἀντωνυμίαι δατηρίαι).................................................. 744

(a)  Ἀμφότεροι................................................................................................................ 744

(b)  Ἕκαστος................................................................................................................. 745

1. Without Substantive............................................................................................... 745

2. With Substantive..................................................................................................... 745

3. With  εἷς.................................................................................................................. 746

4. With Genitive.......................................................................................................... 746

5. Partitive Apposition................................................................................................ 746

6. Rare in Plural.......................................................................................................... 746

7. Repetition................................................................................................................ 746

(c)  Ἄλλος...................................................................................................................... 746

1. Used absolutely = ‘An-other,’ ‘One Other.’........................................................... 746

2. For Two................................................................................................................... 746

3. As Adjective............................................................................................................ 747

4. With the Article...................................................................................................... 747

5. The Use of ἄλλος ἄλλο = 'One One Thing, One Another.'................................... 747

6. In Contrast for 'Some — Others.'........................................................................... 747

7. Ellipsis of ἄλλος.................................................................................................... 747

8. The Use of ἄλλος and ἕτερος Together................................................................. 747

9.  ἄλλος =’Different.’............................................................................................... 747

10. Ἀλλότριος............................................................................................................ 748

(d)  Ἕτερος..................................................................................................................... 748

1. Absolutely............................................................................................................... 748

2. With Article............................................................................................................ 748

3. Second of Pair......................................................................................................... 748

4. =’Different.’............................................................................................................ 748

5. =’Another’ of Three or More.................................................................................. 749

6. In Contrast............................................................................................................... 749

(e) OTHER ANTITHETIC PRONOUNS........................................................................ 750

XI. Negative Pronouns (ἀντωνυμίαι ἀρνητικαί)....................................................................... 750

(a) Οὐδείς....................................................................................................................... 750

1. History..................................................................................................................... 750

2. Οὐθείς.................................................................................................................... 750

3. Gender..................................................................................................................... 751

4. Οὐδὲ εἷς.................................................................................................................. 751

5. Εἷς οὐ.................................................................................................................. 751

(b) Μηδείς...................................................................................................................... 751

(c) Οὔτις AND Μήτις.................................................................................................... 751

(d) WITH Πᾶς................................................................................................................ 752

1. Οὐ πᾶς................................................................................................................... 752

2. Οὐπᾶς................................................................................................................ 752

3. Μή πᾶς.............................................................................................................. 752

4. Οὐ μή--πᾶν............................................................................................................ 753

5. Πᾶς οὐ............................................................................................................... 753

6. Πᾶς μή............................................................................................................... 753

7. Πᾶς οὐ μή.......................................................................................................... 753

8. Οὐ πάντες......................................................................................................... 753

9. Πάντες οὐ............................................................................................................... 753

CHAPTER XVI:   THE ARTICLE (ΤΟ   ἌΡΘΡΟΝ)...................................................................... 754

I. Other Uses of , ἡ τό............................................................................................................ 754

II. Origin and Development of the Article................................................................................... 754

(a) A GREEK CONTRIBUTION.................................................................................... 754

(b) DERIVED FROM THE DEMONSTRATIVE........................................................... 755

III. Significance of the Article.................................................................................................... 755

IV. The Method Employed by the Article.................................................................................... 756

(a) INDIVIDUALS FROM INDIVIDUALS.................................................................... 756

(b) CLASSES FROM OTHER CLASSES...................................................................... 757

(c) QUALITIES FROM OTHER QUALITIES................................................................ 758

V. Varied Usages of the Article.................................................................................................. 758

(a) WITH SUBSTANTIVES........................................................................................... 758

1. Context.................................................................................................................... 758

2. Gender of the Article.............................................................................................. 759

3. With Proper Names................................................................................................. 759

4. Second Mention (Anaphoric)................................................................................. 762

(b) WITH ADJECTIVES................................................................................................. 762

1. The Resumptive Article.......................................................................................... 762

2. With the Adjective Alone....................................................................................... 762

3. The Article not Necessary with the Adjective....................................................... 763

4. With Numerals........................................................................................................ 764

(c) WITH PARTICIPLES................................................................................................ 764

(d) WITH THE INFINITIVE........................................................................................... 765

(e) WITH ADVERBS...................................................................................................... 765

(f) WITH PREPOSITIONAL PHRASES........................................................................ 766

(g) WITH SINGLE WORDS OR WHOLE SENTENCES.............................................. 766

(h) WITH GENITIVE ALONE........................................................................................ 767

(i) NOUNS IN THE PREDICATE.................................................................................. 767

(j) DISTRIBUTIVE......................................................................................................... 769

(k) NOMINATIVE WITH THE ARTICLE =VOCATIVE.............................................. 769

(l) As THE EQUIVALENT OF A POSSESSIVE PRONOUN........................................ 769

(m) WITH POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.......................................................................... 770

(n) WITH Αὐτός............................................................................................................. 770

(o) WITH DEMONSTRATIVES.................................................................................... 770

(p) WITH   Ὅλος, Πᾶς Ἅπας)................................................................................. 771

(q) WITH Πολύς............................................................................................................ 774

(r)   ἌκροςἭμισυςἜσχατοςΜέσος.................................................................. 775

(s) WITH   Ἄλλος AND   Ἕτερος................................................................................. 775

(t) Μόνος........................................................................................................................ 776

VI. Position with Attributives..................................................................................................... 776

(a) WITH ADJECTIVES................................................................................................. 776

1. The Normal Position of the Adjective.................................................................... 776

2. The Other Construction (Repetition of the Article)............................................... 776

3. Article Repeated Several Times............................................................................. 777

4. One Article with Several Adjectives...................................................................... 777

5. With Anarthrous Substantives................................................................................ 777

6. With Participles...................................................................................................... 777

(b) WITH GENITIVES.................................................................................................... 779

1. The Position between the Article and the Substantive........................................... 779

2. Genitive after the Substantive without Repetition of the Article.......................... 779

3. Repetition of Article with Genitive........................................................................ 780

4. The Article Only with Genitive.............................................................................. 780

5. Article Absent with Both........................................................................................ 780

6. The Correlation of the Article................................................................................ 780

(c) WITH ADJUNCTS OR ADVERBS. In..................................................................... 782

1. Between the Article and the Noun.......................................................................... 782

2. Article Repeated..................................................................................................... 782

3. Only with Adjunct................................................................................................... 782

4. Only with the Noun................................................................................................. 782

5. When Several Adjuncts Occur................................................................................ 783

6. Phrases of Verbal Origin........................................................................................ 784

7. Exegetical Questions.............................................................................................. 784

8. Anarthrous Attributives.......................................................................................... 784

(d) SEVERAL ATTRIBUTIVES WITH Καί.................................................................. 785

1. Several Epithets Applied to the Same Person or Thing......................................... 785

2. When to be Distinguished....................................................................................... 786

3. Groups Treated as One............................................................................................ 787

4. Point of View.......................................................................................................... 787

5. Difference in Number............................................................................................. 788

6. Difference in Gender.............................................................................................. 788

7. With Disjunctive Particle....................................................................................... 789

VII. Position with Predicates..................................................................................................... 789

VIII. The Absence of the Article................................................................................................. 790

(a) WITH PROPER NAMES.......................................................................................... 791

(b) WITH GENITIVES.................................................................................................... 791

(c) PREPOSITIONAL PHRASES................................................................................... 791

(d) WITH BOTH PREPOSITION AND GENITIVE....................................................... 792

(e) TITLES OF BOOKS OR SECTIONS........................................................................ 793

(f) WORDS IN PAIRS.................................................................................................... 793

(g) ORDINAL NUMERALS........................................................................................... 793

(h) IN THE PREDICATE................................................................................................ 794

(i) ABSTRACT WORDS................................................................................................ 794

(j) QUALITATIVE FORCE............................................................................................ 794

(k) ONLY OBJECT OF KIND........................................................................................ 794

IX. The Indefinite Article........................................................................................................... 796

CHAPTER XVII:   VOICE (ΔΙΑΘΕΣΙΣ, Genus)............................................................................. 797

I. Point of View........................................................................................................................ 797

(a) DISTINCTION BETWEEN VOICE AND TRANSITIVENESS............................... 797

(b) MEANING OF VOICE.............................................................................................. 798

(c) NAMES OF THE VOICES........................................................................................ 798

(d) HISTORY OF THE VOICES..................................................................................... 798

(e) HELP FROM THE SANSKRIT................................................................................. 798

(f) DEFECTIVE VERBS................................................................................................. 799

II. The Active Voice (διάθεσις ἐνεργετική)................................................................................ 799

(a) MEANING OF THE ACTIVE VOICE...................................................................... 799

(b) EITHER TRANSITIVE OR INTRANSITIVE........................................................... 799

(c) EFFECT OF PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION.................................................. 800

(d) DIFFERENT TENSES VARY................................................................................... 800

(e) THE ACTIVE AS CAUSATIVE............................................................................... 801

(f) ACTIVE WITH REFLEXIVES.................................................................................. 802

(g) IMPERSONAL ACTIVE........................................................................................... 802

(h) INFINITIVES............................................................................................................. 802

(i) ACTIVE VERBS AS PASSIVES OF OTHER VERBS............................................. 802

III. The Middle Voice (διάθεσις μέση)....................................................................................... 803

(a) ORIGIN OF THE MIDDLE....................................................................................... 803

(b) MEANING OF THE MIDDLE.................................................................................. 803

(c) OFTEN DIFFERENCE FROM ACTIVE ACUTE..................................................... 804

(d) THE USE OF THE MIDDLE NOT OBLIGATORY................................................. 804

(e) EITHER TRANSITIVE OR INTRANSITIVE........................................................... 806

(f) DIRECT MIDDLE..................................................................................................... 806

(g) CAUSATIVE OR PERMISSIVE MIDDLE............................................................... 808

(h) INDIRECT MIDDLE................................................................................................. 809

(i) RECIPROCAL MIDDLE........................................................................................... 810

(j) REDUNDANT MIDDLE........................................................................................... 811

(k) DYNAMIC (DEPONENT) MIDDLE........................................................................ 811

(l) MIDDLE FUTURE, THOUGH ACTIVE PRESENT................................................. 813

(m) THE MIDDLE RETREATING IN THE N. T........................................................... 814

IV. The Passive Voice (διάθεσις παθητική)............................................................................... 814

(a) ORIGIN OF THE PASSIVE...................................................................................... 814

(b) SIGNIFICANCE OF THE PASSIVE......................................................................... 815

(c) WITH INTRANSITIVE OR TRANSITIVE VERBS................................................. 815

(d) THE PASSIVE USUALLY INTRANSITIVE............................................................ 816

(e) AORIST PASSIVE.................................................................................................... 816

(f) FUTURE PASSIVE.................................................................................................... 818

(g) THE AGENT WITH THE PASSIVE VOICE............................................................ 820

(h) IMPERSONAL CONSTRUCTION........................................................................... 820

CHAPTER XVIII:   TENSE (ΧΡΟΝΟΣ)........................................................................................ 821

I. Complexity of the Subject...................................................................................................... 821

1. THE DIFFICULTY OF COMPARING GREEK TENSES WITH GERMANIC TENSES.            821

2. BAD INFLUENCE OF THE LATIN ON GREEK GRAMMARIANS....................... 822

3. ABSENCE OF HEBREW INFLUENCE..................................................................... 822

4. GRADUAL GROWTH OF THE GREEK TENSES.................................................... 822

5. "AKTIONSART" OF THE VERB-STEM................................................................... 823

6. THE THREE KINDS OF ACTION EXPRESSED IN TERMS OF............................. 824

TENSE............................................................................................................................. 824

7. TIME ELEMENT IN TENSE...................................................................................... 824

8.  FAULTY NOMENCLATURE OF THE TENSES..................................................... 825

9. THE ANALYTIC TENDENCY (Periphrasis)............................................................ 826

10. THE EFFECT OF PREPOSITIONS ON THE VERB............................................... 826

11.  “AKTIONSART” WITH EACH TENSE................................................................. 828

12. INTERCHANGE OF TENSES.................................................................................. 829

II. Punctiliar Action................................................................................................................... 830

1. THE AORIST (ἀόριστος).......................................................................................... 831

(a) Aktionsart in the Aorist......................................................................................... 831

(α) Constative Aorist.............................................................................................. 831

(β) Ingressive Aorist............................................................................................... 834

(γ) Effective Aorist................................................................................................ 834

(b) Aorist Indicative.................................................................................................... 835

(α) The Narrative or Historical Tense.................................................................... 835

(β) The Gnomic Aorist........................................................................................... 836

(γ) Relation to the Imperfect.................................................................................. 837

(δ)  Relation to the Past Perfect............................................................................. 840

(ε) Relation to the Present...................................................................................... 841

(ζ) Relation to Present Perfect............................................................................... 843

(η) Epistolary Aorist............................................................................................... 845

(θ) Relation to the Future....................................................................................... 846

(ι) Aorist in Wishes................................................................................................ 847

(κ) Variations in the Use of Tenses........................................................................ 847

(λ) Translation of the Aorist into English.............................................................. 847

(c) The Aorist Subjunctive and Optative.................................................................... 848

(α) No Time Element in the Subjunctive and Optative......................................... 848

(β) Frequency of Aorist Subjunctive...................................................................... 848

(γ) Aktionsart......................................................................................................... 850

(δ) Aorist Subjunctive in Prohibitions................................................................... 851

(ε) Aorist Subjunctive with οὐ μή.......................................................................... 854

(ζ) Aorist Optative.................................................................................................. 854

(d) The Aorist Imperative........................................................................................... 855

(e) The Aorist Infinitive.............................................................................................. 856

(f) The Aorist Participle............................................................................................. 858

(α) Aktionsart......................................................................................................... 858

(β)   and the Aorist Participle............................................................................ 859

(γ) Antecedent Action............................................................................................ 860

(δ) But Simultaneous Action is Common also...................................................... 860

(ε)  Subsequent Action not Expressed by the Aorist Participle............................. 861

(ζ) Aorist Participle in Indirect Discourse (Complementary Participle).............. 864

2. PUNCTILIAR (AORISTIC) PRESENT (ὁ ἐνεστὼς χρόνος).................................... 864

(a) The Specific Present.............................................................................................. 865

(b) The Gnomic Present.............................................................................................. 866

(c) The Historical Present........................................................................................... 866

(d) The Futuristic Present........................................................................................... 869

3. THE PUNCTILIAR (AORISTIC) FUTURE (ὁ μέλλων χρόνος).............................. 870

(a) Punctiliar or Durative............................................................................................ 870

(b) The Modal Aspect of the Future........................................................................... 872

(α) Merely Futuristic.............................................................................................. 873

(β)  The Volitive Future......................................................................................... 874

(γ) Deliberative Future........................................................................................... 875

(c) The Future in the Moods....................................................................................... 876

(α) The Indicative................................................................................................... 876

(β) The Subjunctive and Optative.......................................................................... 876

(γ) The Infinitive.................................................................................................... 876

(δ) The Participle.................................................................................................... 877

(d) The Periphrastic Substitutes for the Future.......................................................... 878

III. Durative (Linear) Action....................................................................................................... 879

1. INDICATIVE............................................................................................................... 879

(a) The Present (ὁ ἐνεστώς) for Present Time........................................................... 879

(α) The Descriptive Present.................................................................................... 879

(β) The Progressive Present................................................................................... 879

(γ) The Iterative or Customary Present.................................................................. 880

(δ) The Inchoative or Conative Present.................................................................. 880

(ε) The Historical Present....................................................................................... 880

(ζ) The Deliberative Present................................................................................... 880

(η) The Periphrastic Present................................................................................... 880

(θ) Presents as Perfects........................................................................................... 881

(ι) Perfects as Presents............................................................................................ 881

(κ) Futuristic Presents.  T....................................................................................... 881

(b) The Imperfect for Past Time (ὁ παρατατικός)................................................... 882

(α) Doubtful Imperfects.......................................................................................... 882

(β) The Descriptive Tense in Narrative................................................................. 883

(γ)  The Iterative (Customary) Imperfect.............................................................. 884

(δ)  The Progressive Imperfect............................................................................... 884

(ε) The Inchoative or Conative Imperfect.............................................................. 885

(ζ)  The "Negative" Imperfect................................................................................ 885

(η) The "Potential" Imperfect................................................................................. 885

(θ)  In Indirect Discourse........................................................................................ 887

(ι) The Periphrastic Imperfect................................................................................ 887

(κ) Past Perfects as Imperfects............................................................................... 888

(c) The Future for Future Time.................................................................................. 888

(α) The Three Kinds of Action in the Future (futuristic, volitive, deliberative).. 889

(β) The Periphrastic Future.................................................................................... 889

2. SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE............................................................................. 889

3. IMPERATIVE............................................................................................................. 890

4. INFINITIVE................................................................................................................. 890

5. PARTICIPLE............................................................................................................... 891

(a) The Time of the Present Participle Relative......................................................... 891

(b) Futuristic............................................................................................................... 891

(c) Descriptive............................................................................................................ 891

(d) Conative................................................................................................................ 892

(e) Antecedent Time................................................................................................... 892

(f) Indirect Discourse.................................................................................................. 892

(g) With the Article.................................................................................................... 892

(h) Past Action Still in Progress................................................................................. 892

(i) "Subsequent" Action.............................................................................................. 892

(j) No Durative Future Participles.............................................................................. 892

IV. Perfected State of the Action (ὁ τέλειος ἢ συντελικός)......................................................... 892

1. THE IDEA OF THE PERFECT................................................................................... 892

(a) The Present Perfect............................................................................................... 892

(b) The Intensive Perfect............................................................................................ 893

(c) The Extensive Perfect........................................................................................... 893

(d) Idea of Time in the Tense..................................................................................... 894

2. THE INDICATIVE...................................................................................................... 894

(a) The Present Perfect (ὁ ἐνεσὼς συντελικὸς ἢ παρακείμενος)........................... 894

(α) The Intensive Present Perfect........................................................................... 894

(β) The extensive Present Perfect = a completed state.......................................... 895

(γ) The Present Perfect of Broken Continuity....................................................... 896

(δ) The Dramatic Historical Present Perfect.......................................................... 896

(ε) The Gnomic Present Perfect.............................................................................. 897

(ζ) The Perfect in Indirect Discourse..................................................................... 897

(η) Futuristic Present Perfect.................................................................................. 898

(θ) The "Aoristic" Present Perfect.......................................................................... 898

(ι) The Periphrastic Perfect.................................................................................... 902

(κ) Present as Perfect.............................................................................................. 903

(b) The last Perfect (ὁ ὑπερσυντελικός).................................................................. 903

(α) The Double Idea................................................................................................ 903

(β) A Luxury in, Greek........................................................................................... 903

(γ)  The Intensive Past Perfect............................................................................... 904

(δ) The Extensive Past Perfect............................................................................... 904

(ε) The Past Perfect of Broken Continuity2 (• • • > • • •)....................................... 905

(ζ)  Past Perfect in Conditional Sentences............................................................. 906

(η) The Periphrastic Past Perfect............................................................................ 906

(θ) Special Use of ἐκείμην..................................................................................... 906

(c) The Future Perfect  (ὁ μέλλων συντελικός)....................................................... 906

3. THE SUBIUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE..................................................................... 907

4. THE IMPERATIVE..................................................................................................... 908

5. THE INFINITIVE........................................................................................................ 908

(a) Indirect Discourse................................................................................................. 908

(b) Perfect Infinitive not in Indirect Discourse.......................................................... 909

(α) Subject or Object Infinitive.............................................................................. 909

(β) With Prepositions............................................................................................. 909

6. THE PARTICIPLE...................................................................................................... 909

(a) The Meaning.......................................................................................................... 909

(b) The Time of the Tense.......................................................................................... 909

(c) The Perfect Tense Occurs with Various Uses of the Participle........................... 910

(d) The Periphrastic Participle................................................................................... 910

CHAPTER XIX:  MODE (ἜΓΚΛΙΣΙΣ)........................................................................................... 911

Introductory............................................................................................................................ 911

A. INDEPENDENT OR PARATACTIC SENTENCES (ΠΑΡΑΤΑΚΤΙΚΑ  ἈΞΙΩΜΑΤΑ)...................... 914

I. The Indicative Mode (λόγος ἀποφαντικός or ἡ ὁριστικὴ ἔγκλισις)..................... 914

1. MEANING OF THE INDICATIVE MODE............................................................ 914

2. KINDS OF SENTENCES USING THE INDICATIVE........................................... 915

(a) Either Declarative or Interrogative................................................................... 915

(b) Positive and Negative....................................................................................... 917

3. SPECIAL USES OF THE INDICATIVE................................................................. 918

(a) Past Tenses........................................................................................................ 918

(α) For Courtesy................................................................................................. 918

(β) Present Necessity, Obligation, Possibility, Propriety in Tenses of he Past. 919

(γ) The Apodosis of Conditions of the Second Class........................................ 921

(δ) Impossible Wishes........................................................................................ 923

(b) The Present........................................................................................................ 923

(c) The Future......................................................................................................... 924

II. The Subjunctive Mode (ἡ ὑποτακτικὴ ἔγκλισις).................................................... 924

1. RELATIONS TO OTHER MODES........................................................................ 924

(a) The Aorist Subjunctive and the Future Indicative............................................ 924

(b) The Subjunctive and the Imperative................................................................. 925

(c) The Subjunctive and the Optative..................................................................... 925

2. ORIGINAL SIGNIFICANCE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE......................................... 926

3. THREEFOLD USAGE............................................................................................ 928

(a) Futuristic........................................................................................................... 928

(b) Volitive.............................................................................................................. 930

(c) Deliberative....................................................................................................... 934

III. The Optative Mode (ἡ εὐκτικὴ ἔγκλισις)................................................................ 935

1. HISTORY OF THE OPTATIVE............................................................................. 935

2. SIGNIFICANCE...................................................................................................... 936

3. THE THREE USES................................................................................................. 937

(a) Futuristic or Potential....................................................................................... 937

(b) Volitive.............................................................................................................. 939

(c) Deliberative....................................................................................................... 940

IV. The Imperative (ἡ προστατικὴ ἔγκλισις)............................................................... 941

1. ORIGIN OF THE IMPERATIVE............................................................................ 941

2. MEANING OF THE IMPERATIVE....................................................................... 941

3. DISAPPEARANCE OF THE IMPERATIVE FORMS........................................... 941

4. ALTERNATIVES FOR THE IMPERATIVE.......................................................... 942

(a) The Future Indicative........................................................................................ 942

(b) The Subjunctive................................................................................................ 943

(c) The Optative...................................................................................................... 943

(d) The Infinitive..................................................................................................... 943

(e) The Participle.................................................................................................... 944

5. USES OF THE IMPERATIVE................................................................................ 946

(a) Command or Exhortation.................................................................................. 946

(b) Prohibition......................................................................................................... 947

(c) Entreaty............................................................................................................. 947

(d) Permission......................................................................................................... 948

(e) Concession or Condition................................................................................... 948

(f) In Asyndeton...................................................................................................... 949

(g) In Subordinate Clauses...................................................................................... 949

(h) The Tenses......................................................................................................... 950

(i) In Indirect Discourse.......................................................................................... 950

B. DEPENDENT OR HYPOTACTIC SENTENCES (ΥΠΟΤΑΚΤΙΚΑ ἈΞΙΩΜΑΤΑ)............................ 950

Introductory..................................................................................................................... 950

(a) Use of Modes in Subordinate Sentences............................................................... 950

(b) The Use of Conjunctions in Subordinate Clauses................................................ 951

(c) Logical Varieties of Subordinate Clauses............................................................ 952

1. RELATIVE SENTENCES........................................................................................... 953

(a) Relative Sentences Originally Paratactic............................................................. 953

(b) Most Subordinate Clauses Relative in Origin...................................................... 953

(c) Relative Clauses Usually Adjectival.................................................................... 954

(d) Modes in Relative Sentences................................................................................ 955

(e) Definite and Indefinite Relative Sentences.......................................................... 956

(f) The Use of ἄν in Relative Clauses........................................................................ 957

(g) Special Uses of Relative Clauses.......................................................................... 960

(h) Negatives in Relative Clauses.............................................................................. 962

2. CAUSAL SENTENCES.............................................................................................. 962

(a) Paratactic Causal Sentences.................................................................................. 962

(b) With Subordinating Conjunctions........................................................................ 963

(d) Διὰ τό and the Infinitive....................................................................................... 966

(e) The Participle........................................................................................................ 966

3. COMPARATIVE CLAUSES...................................................................................... 966

(a) The Relative ὅσος................................................................................................. 966

(b) Relative ὅς with κατά........................................................................................... 967

(c) Καθότι in a Comparative Sense........................................................................... 967

(d)   Ὡς  and its Compounds..................................................................................... 967

4. LOCAL CLAUSES..................................................................................................... 969

5. TEMPORAL CLAUSES............................................................................................. 970

(a) Kin to Relative Clauses in Origin and Idiom........................................................ 970

(b) Conjunctions Meaning ‘When.'............................................................................ 971

(c) The Group Meaning 'Until' ('While').................................................................... 974

(d) Some Nominal and Prepositional Phrases............................................................ 977

(e) The Temporal Use of the Infinitive...................................................................... 978

(f) Temporal Use of the Participle............................................................................. 979

6. FINAL AND CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES.................................................................. 980

(a) Kinship.................................................................................................................. 980

(b) Origin in Parataxis................................................................................................ 980

(c) Pure Final Clauses................................................................................................. 981

(αἽνα.................................................................................................................. 981

(β)   Ὅπως............................................................................................................ 985

(γὩς................................................................................................................... 987

(δ) Μή, μή ποτε, μή πως....................................................................................... 987

(ε) Relative Clauses................................................................................................ 989

(ζ)  The Infinitive.................................................................................................... 989

(η) The Participle.................................................................................................... 991

(d) Sub-Final Clauses................................................................................................. 991

(α)   Ἵνα................................................................................................................. 991

(β)   Ὅπως............................................................................................................ 994

(γ) Μή, μή πως, μή ποτε....................................................................................... 995

(δ) The Relative Clause.......................................................................................... 996

(ε) The Infinitive..................................................................................................... 996

(ζ) Εἰ and ὅτι........................................................................................................... 997

(e) Consecutive Clauses.............................................................................................. 997

(α)   Ἵνα................................................................................................................. 997

(β)   Ὥστε.............................................................................................................. 999

(γ)   Ὡς................................................................................................................ 1000

(δ)   Ὅτι............................................................................................................... 1001

(ε) The Relative..................................................................................................... 1001

(ζ) The Infinitive................................................................................................... 1001

7. WISHES.................................................................................................................... 1003

8. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES................................................................................. 1004

(a) Two Types........................................................................................................... 1004

(b) Four Classes........................................................................................................ 1007

(α) Determined as Fulfilled.................................................................................. 1007

(β)  Determined as Unfulfilled............................................................................. 1012

(γ) Undetermined, but with Prospect of Determination...................................... 1016

(δ)  Remote Prospect of Determination............................................................... 1020

(c) Special Points...................................................................................................... 1022

(α ) Mixed Conditions.......................................................................................... 1022

(β)  Implied Conditions........................................................................................ 1022

(γ) Elliptical Conditions....................................................................................... 1023

(δ) Concessive Clauses......................................................................................... 1026

(ε) Other Particles with εἰ and ἐάν....................................................................... 1027

9. INDIRECT DISCOURSE (Oratio Obliqua).............................................................. 1027

(a) Recitative   Ὅτε in Oratio Recta........................................................................ 1027

(b) Change of Person in Indirect Discourse............................................................. 1028

(c) Change of Tense in Indirect Discourse............................................................... 1029

(d) Change of Mode in Indirect Discourse............................................................... 1030

(e) The Limits of Indirect Discourse........................................................................ 1031

(f) Declarative Clauses (Indirect Assertions)......................................................... 1032

(αὍτι and the Indicative.................................................................................. 1032

(β) The Infinitive.................................................................................................. 1036

(γ) The Participle.................................................................................................. 1040

(δ) Καὶ ἐγένετο.................................................................................................... 1042

(g) Indirect Questions............................................................................................... 1043

(α) Tense............................................................................................................... 1043

(β) Mode............................................................................................................... 1043

(γ) Interrogative Pronouns and Conjunctions Used............................................. 1044

(δ)  The Article with Indirect Questions.............................................................. 1045

(h) Indirect Command............................................................................................... 1046

(α) Deliberative Question..................................................................................... 1046

(β) The Conjunctions ἵνα and ὅπως.................................................................... 1046

(γ) The Infinitive.................................................................................................. 1046

(i) Mixture................................................................................................................. 1047

(j) The Subordinate Clause....................................................................................... 1048

10. SERIES OF SUBORDINATE CLAUSES............................................................... 1048

CHAPTER XX:  VERBAL NOUNS (ὈΝΟΜΑΤΑ ΤΟΥ ῬΗΜΑΤΟΣ)........................................ 1050

I. Kinship............................................................................................................................... 1050

II. The Infinitive (ἡ ἀπαρέμφατος ἔγκλισις or ἀπαρέμφατον ῥῆμα).................................... 1051

1. ORIGIN..................................................................................................................... 1051

2. DEVELOPMENT...................................................................................................... 1052

(a)      The Prehistoric Period..................................................................................... 1052

(b) The Earliest Historic Period............................................................................... 1052

(c) The Classic Period from Pindar on..................................................................... 1054

(d) The Κοινή Period................................................................................................ 1054

(e) The Later Period.................................................................................................. 1056

3. SIGNIFICANCE........................................................................................................ 1056

4. SUBSTANTIVAL ASPECTS OF THE INFINITIVE................................................ 1058

(a) Case (Subject or Object Infinitive)..................................................................... 1058

(b) The Articular Infinitive....................................................................................... 1062

(c) Prepositions......................................................................................................... 1068

Ἀντὶ τοῦ................................................................................................................ 1070

Διά......................................................................................................................... 1070

Εἰς τὸ..................................................................................................................... 1071

Ἐν τῷ.................................................................................................................... 1072

Ἕνεκεν τοῦ.......................................................................................................... 1073

Ἐκ του.................................................................................................................. 1073

Ἔως τοῦ............................................................................................................... 1074

Μετὰ τό................................................................................................................. 1074

Πρὸ τοῦ................................................................................................................ 1074

Πρὸς τό................................................................................................................. 1075

(d) The Infinitive with Substantives......................................................................... 1075

(e) The Infinitive with Adjectives............................................................................ 1076

(f) The Infinitive with Verbs.................................................................................... 1077

(g) The Appositional Infinitive................................................................................. 1078

5. VERBAL ASPECTS OF THE INFINITIVE.............................................................. 1079

(a) Voice.................................................................................................................... 1079

(b) Tense................................................................................................................... 1080

(c) Cases with the Infinitive..................................................................................... 1082

(d) The Infinitive in Indirect Discourse.................................................................... 1082

(e) Personal Construction with the Infinitive........................................................... 1085

(f) Epexegetical Infinitive........................................................................................ 1086

(g) Purpose................................................................................................................ 1087

(h) Result................................................................................................................... 1089

(i) Cause.................................................................................................................... 1091

(j) Time..................................................................................................................... 1091

(k) The Absolute Infinitive....................................................................................... 1092

(l) Negatives.............................................................................................................. 1093

(m)   Ἄν with the Infinitive...................................................................................... 1095

III. The Participle (ἡ μετοχή)................................................................................................... 1095

1. THE VERBALS IN –τος AND –τέος....................................................................... 1095

2. HISTORY OF THE PARTICIPLE............................................................................ 1098

(a) The Sanskrit Participle........................................................................................ 1098

(b) Homer's Time...................................................................................................... 1098

(c) The Attic Period.................................................................................................. 1098

(d) The Κοινή........................................................................................................... 1099

(e) Modern Greek...................................................................................................... 1099

3. SIGNIFICANCE OF THE PARTICIPLE.................................................................. 1100

(a) Originally an Adjective....................................................................................... 1100

(b) The Addition of the Verbal Functions................................................................ 1101

(c) The Double Aspect of the Participle................................................................... 1101

(d) Relation between Participle and Infinitive......................................................... 1101

(e) Method of Treating the Participle....................................................................... 1103

4. ADJECTIVAL ASPECTS OF THE PARTICIPLE.................................................... 1104

(a) Declension........................................................................................................... 1104

(b) Attributive Participle.......................................................................................... 1105

(α) Anarthrous...................................................................................................... 1105

(β) Articular.......................................................................................................... 1106

(c) Predicate Participle............................................................................................. 1108

(d) The Participle as a Substantive........................................................................... 1108

(e) The Participle as an Adverb................................................................................ 1109

5. VERBAL ASPECTS OF THE PARTICIPLE............................................................ 1110

(a) Voice.................................................................................................................... 1110

(b) Tense................................................................................................................... 1111

(α) Timelessness of the Participle........................................................................ 1111

(β) The Aorist....................................................................................................... 1112

(γ)  The Present.................................................................................................... 1115

(δ) The Perfect...................................................................................................... 1116

(ε) The Future........................................................................................................ 1118

(c) Cases.................................................................................................................... 1119

(d) The Supplementary Participle............................................................................ 1119

(α) The Periphrastic Construction........................................................................ 1119

(β) A Diminution of the Complementary Participle............................................ 1120

(γ) Verbs of Emotion............................................................................................ 1121

(δ) Indirect Discourse........................................................................................... 1122

(e) The Circumstantial Participle or Participial Clauses......................................... 1124

(α) The General Theory........................................................................................ 1124

(β) Varieties of the Circumstantial Participle..................................................... 1125

Time.................................................................................................................. 1125

Manner.............................................................................................................. 1127

Means................................................................................................................ 1128

Cause................................................................................................................. 1128

Purpose.............................................................................................................. 1128

Condition........................................................................................................... 1129

Concession........................................................................................................ 1129

(γ) The Absolute Participle in Subordinate Clauses............................................ 1130

Nominative Absolute........................................................................................ 1130

Accusative Absolute ........................................................................................ 1130

Genitive Absolute............................................................................................. 1131

(f) The Independent Participle in a Sentence........................................................... 1132

(g) Co-ordination between Participles..................................................................... 1135

(h) Οὐ and μή with the Participle............................................................................ 1136

(i) Other Particles with the Participle...................................................................... 1139

CHAPTER XXI:   PARTICLES (ΑΙ  ΠΑΡΑΘΗΚΑΙ)..................................................................... 1142

I. Scope................................................................................................................................. 1142

II. Intensive or Emphatic Particles............................................................................................ 1144

1. LIMITATIONS.......................................................................................................... 1144

2. THE N. T. ILLUSTRATIONS................................................................................... 1147

(a) Γέ......................................................................................................................... 1147

(b) Δή......................................................................................................................... 1149

(c) Εἶ μήν, νή and ναί............................................................................................... 1150

(d) Μέν...................................................................................................................... 1150

(e) Πέρ...................................................................................................................... 1153

(f) Τοί....................................................................................................................... 1154

III. Negative Particles (στερητικαὶ παραθῆκαι)...................................................................... 1155

1. THE OBJECTIVE Οὐ AND ITS COMPOUNDS..................................................... 1155

(a) Origin................................................................................................................... 1155

(b) History................................................................................................................. 1156

(c) Meaning............................................................................................................... 1156

(d) Uses..................................................................................................................... 1156

(i) The Indicative.................................................................................................. 1157

(α) Independent Sentences................................................................................ 1157

(β) Subordinate Clauses................................................................................... 1158

(ii) The Subjunctive.............................................................................................. 1160

(iii) The Optative.................................................................................................. 1161

(iv) The Imperative............................................................................................... 1161

(v) The Infinitive................................................................................................... 1162

(vi) The Participle................................................................................................. 1162

(vii) With Nouns................................................................................................... 1163

(e) Καὶ Οὐ................................................................................................................ 1164

(f) Redundant or Pleonastic Οὐ............................................................................... 1164

(g) Repetition of  Οὐ................................................................................................ 1164

(h) The Intensifying Compound Negative................................................................ 1164

(i) The Disjunctive Negative.................................................................................... 1165

2. THE SUBJECTIVE NEGATIVE Μή AND ITS COMPOUNDS.............................. 1166

(a) The History of Μή............................................................................................... 1166

(b) Significance of Μή............................................................................................. 1167

(c) Uses of Μή.......................................................................................................... 1168

(i) The Indicative.................................................................................................. 1168

(ii) The Subjunctive.............................................................................................. 1169

(iii) The Optative.................................................................................................. 1170

(iv) The Imperative............................................................................................... 1170

(v) The Infinitive................................................................................................... 1170

(vi) The Participle................................................................................................. 1172

(vii) Nouns............................................................................................................ 1172

(d) The Intensifying Compounds with Μή............................................................... 1172

(e) Καὶ μή................................................................................................................. 1173

(f) Disjunctive Use of Μή........................................................................................ 1173

3. COMBINATION OF THE TWO NEGATIVES........................................................ 1173

(a) Μὴ οὐ.................................................................................................................. 1173

(b) Οὐ μή.................................................................................................................. 1174

IV. Interrogative Particles (ἐπερωτηκαὶ παραθῆκαι).............................................................. 1175

1. SINGLE QUESTIONS.............................................................................................. 1175

(a) Direct Questions.................................................................................................. 1175

(i) No Particle at all.............................................................................................. 1175

(ii) The Use of Negative Particles........................................................................ 1175

(iii) Other Particles............................................................................................... 1176

(iv ) Interrogative Pronouns.................................................................................. 1176

(v) Interrogative Conjunctions............................................................................. 1176

(b) Indirect Questions.  Here.................................................................................... 1176

(i) Pronouns........................................................................................................... 1176

(ii) Conjunctions................................................................................................... 1177

2. DOUBLE QUESTIONS............................................................................................ 1177

(i) Direct.................................................................................................................... 1177

(ii) Indirect................................................................................................................ 1177

V. Conjunctions (σύνδεσμοι).................................................................................................. 1177

1. PARATACTIC2 CONJUNCTIONS (σύνδεσμοι παρατακτικοί)........................... 1177

(a) Copulative........................................................................................................... 1177

(i) Τέ..................................................................................................................... 1178

(ii) Καί.................................................................................................................. 1179

The Adjunctive Use (‘Also’)............................................................................ 1180

The Ascensive Use (‘Even’)............................................................................. 1181

The Mere Connective (‘And’).......................................................................... 1181

(iii) Δέ................................................................................................................... 1183

(iv)  Ἀλλά............................................................................................................. 1185

(b) Adversative......................................................................................................... 1186

(i) δέ...................................................................................................................... 1186

(ii)  Ἀλλά.............................................................................................................. 1186

(iii) Πλήν.............................................................................................................. 1187

(iv) Μέντοι........................................................................................................... 1188

(v)   Ὅμως........................................................................................................... 1188

(vi) Εἰ μή............................................................................................................... 1188

(c) Disjunctives......................................................................................................... 1188

(i)  .................................................................................................................... 1188

(ii) Εἴτε--εἴτε (ἐάντεἐάντε)............................................................................... 1189

(iii) Οὔτε--οὔτε  (μήτεμήτε)............................................................................. 1189

(d) Inferential Conjunctions..................................................................................... 1189

(i)   Ἄρα................................................................................................................ 1189

(ii) Γάρ.................................................................................................................. 1190

(iii) Οὖν................................................................................................................ 1191

2. HYPOTACTIC CONJUNCTIONS (σύνδεσμοι ὑποτακτικοί)............................... 1192

VI.  Interjecitions.................................................................................................................... 1193

CHAPTER XXII:   FIGURES OF SPEECH (ΓΟΡΓΙΕΙΑ  ΣΧΗΜΑΤΑ).......................................... 1194

I. Rhetorical, not Grammatical................................................................................................ 1194

II. Style in the N. T.................................................................................................................. 1194

III. Figures of Idea or Thought (σχήματα διανοίας)................................................................. 1198

V. Figures of Expression (σχήματα λέξεως)............................................................................. 1199

(a) PARALLELS AND CONTRASTS (Parallelismus membrorum)........................... 1199

(b) CONTRASTS IN WORDS...................................................................................... 1200

(c) CONTRACTION AND EXPANSION..................................................................... 1201

(d) METAPHORS AND SIMILAR TROPES............................................................... 1206

ADDITIONAL NOTES................................................................................................................. 1209

1. Καθαρίζω or καθερίζω (p. 183)............................................................................ 1209

2. Prothetic Vowels in the N. T. (p. 206)...................................................................... 1209

3. Elision (p. 208)......................................................................................................... 1210

4. Παρρησία (p. 212)................................................................................................... 1210

5. Assimilation of ἐν μέσῳ (p. 216)............................................................................. 1210

6. Rules for Assimilation of Consonants (p. 216)........................................................ 1210

7. Metathesis (p. 221)................................................................................................... 1210

8. Enclitics and Proclitics (p. 233 f.)............................................................................ 1211

9. Βουστροφηδόν (p. 243)........................................................................................... 1211

10. Perfect of ὁράω (p. 364)........................................................................................ 1211

11. Augment in the Past Perfect (p. 366)..................................................................... 1211

12. List of Important Verbs.......................................................................................... 1212

13. Ablaut...................................................................................................................... 1220

INDEX OF SUBJECTS................................................................................................................. 1223

A.......................................................................................................................................... 1223

B.......................................................................................................................................... 1227

C.......................................................................................................................................... 1227

D.......................................................................................................................................... 1229

F........................................................................................................................................... 1231

G.......................................................................................................................................... 1232

L........................................................................................................................................... 1236

P........................................................................................................................................... 1239

T........................................................................................................................................... 1246

V.......................................................................................................................................... 1247

W......................................................................................................................................... 1248

INDEX OF GREEK WORDS........................................................................................................ 1249

A.......................................................................................................................................... 1249

Ε.......................................................................................................................................... 1258

Η......................................................................................................................................... 1265

Κ.......................................................................................................................................... 1268

Λ.......................................................................................................................................... 1271

N......................................................................................................................................... 1274

Π.......................................................................................................................................... 1278

Σ.......................................................................................................................................... 1283

Τ.......................................................................................................................................... 1285

Υ.......................................................................................................................................... 1287

Φ.......................................................................................................................................... 1288

INDEX OF QUOTATIONS........................................................................................................... 1291

(a) NEW TESTAMENT.............................................................................................................. 1291

Matthew........................................................................................................................ 1291

Luke............................................................................................................................... 1306

Romans.......................................................................................................................... 1333

1 Corinthians................................................................................................................. 1337

2 Corinthians................................................................................................................. 1341

Ephesians...................................................................................................................... 1345

Philippians.................................................................................................................... 1346

Colossians..................................................................................................................... 1347

1 Thessalonians............................................................................................................. 1348

2 Thessalonians............................................................................................................. 1349

1 Timothy...................................................................................................................... 1349

2 Timothy...................................................................................................................... 1350

Philemon....................................................................................................................... 1351

Hebrews......................................................................................................................... 1351

James............................................................................................................................. 1354

1 Peter........................................................................................................................... 1355

2 Peter.................................................................................................................................. 1356

Revelation..................................................................................................................... 1358

(b) OLD TESTAMENT............................................................................................................... 1361

Genesis      Exodus......................................................................................................... 1361

Deuteronomy................................................................................................................. 1362

Joshua............................................................................................................................ 1362

Judges............................................................................................................................ 1362

Ruth............................................................................................................................... 1362

1 Samuel (1 Kings)....................................................................................................... 1362

Nehemiah...................................................................................................................... 1363

Esther............................................................................................................................ 1363

Job................................................................................................................................. 1363

Isaiah............................................................................................................................. 1363

Psalms........................................................................................................................... 1363

Jeremiah........................................................................................................................ 1364

Ezekiel........................................................................................................................... 1364

APOCRYPHA.......................................................................................................................... 1364

1 Esdras......................................................................................................................... 1364

2 Esdras......................................................................................................................... 1364

Baruch........................................................................................................................... 1365

Tobit.............................................................................................................................. 1365

Judith............................................................................................................................. 1365

4 Maccabees.................................................................................................................. 1365

1 Maccabees.................................................................................................................. 1365

2 Maccabees.................................................................................................................. 1365

TESTAMENT OF THE TWELVE PATRIARCHS............................................................................... 1365

Reuben........................................................................................................................... 1365

Levi............................................................................................................................... 1365

Judah............................................................................................................................. 1365

(c) INSCRIPTIONS................................................................................................................... 1366

(d) PAPYRI AND OSTRACA....................................................................................................... 1367

(e) GREEK LITERATURE........................................................................................................... 1372

(f) LATIN............................................................................................................................. 1376

ADDENDA TO THE SECOND EDITION..................................................................................... 1377

ADDENDA TO THE THIRD EDITION......................................................................................... 1385

INDEX TO ADDENDA TO SECOND AND.................................................................................. 1433

ΤHIRD EDITIONS....................................................................................................................... 1433

INDEX OF GREEK WORDS IN THE ADDENDA........................................................................ 1439

INDEX OF QUOTATIONS IN THE ADDENDA........................................................................... 1443

(a) NEW TESTAMENT.............................................................................................................. 1443

Matthew........................................................................................................................ 1443

Mark.............................................................................................................................. 1444

Luke............................................................................................................................... 1445

Acts............................................................................................................................... 1447

Romans.......................................................................................................................... 1448

2 Corinthians................................................................................................................. 1449

Galatians....................................................................................................................... 1449

2 Thessalonians............................................................................................................. 1450

1 Timothy...................................................................................................................... 1450

2 Timothy...................................................................................................................... 1450

Titus.............................................................................................................................. 1450

(b) OLD TESTAMENT AND APOCRYPHA..................................................................................... 1451

Genesis.......................................................................................................................... 1451

Exodus........................................................................................................................... 1451

Leviticus........................................................................................................................ 1451

Numbers........................................................................................................................ 1451

Deuteronomy................................................................................................................. 1451

Nehemiah...................................................................................................................... 1452

Esther............................................................................................................................ 1452

Psalms........................................................................................................................... 1452

Proverbs........................................................................................................................ 1452

Isaiah............................................................................................................................. 1452

Jeremiah........................................................................................................................ 1452

Ezekiel........................................................................................................................... 1452

(d) INDEX OF PAPYRI IN THE ADDENDA.................................................................................... 1452

(e) INDEX OF GREEK LITERATURE IN THE ADDENDA.................................................................. 1453

i. CLASSICAL.............................................................................................................. 1453

ii. KOINH...................................................................................................................... 1454


 

Page 1.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PART I:   INTRODUCTION

 


Page 2. This page intentionally left blank.



CHAPTER I:  NEW MATERIAL

 

          The Ideal Grammar?

           Perhaps the ideal grammar of the New

Testament Greek may never be written. It is a supremely diffi-

cult task to interpret accurately the forms of human speech, for

they have life and change with the years. But few themes have

possessed greater charm for the best furnished scholars of the

world than the study of language.1

          The language of the N. T. has a special interest by reason of

the message that it bears. Every word and phrase calls for

minute investigation where so much is at stake. It is the task

and the duty of the N. T. student to apply the results of linguistic

research to the Greek of the N. T. But, strange to say, this has

not been adequately done.2

          New Testament study has made remarkable progress in the

sphere of criticism, history and interpretation, but has lagged

behind in this department. A brief survey of the literary history

of the subject shows it.

I.                The Pre-Winer Period.

          It was Winer who in 1822 made a

new epoch in N. T. grammatical study by his Neutestamentliches

Sprachidiom. It is hardly possible for the student of the present

day to enter into sympathy with the inanities and sinuosities

that characterized the previous treatises on the N. T. idiom.

Not alone in the controversy between the Purists and Hebraists

was this true, but writers like Storr, by a secret system of quid

pro quo, cut the Gordian knot of grammatical difficulty by ex-

plaining one term as used for another, one preposition for an-

other, one case for another, etc. As a university tutor Winer

 

            1 See J. Classen, De Gr. Graecae Primordiis, 1829, p. 1, who says: "Inter

humani ingenii inventa, quae diuturna consuetudine quasi naturae iura adepta

cunt, nullum fere magis invaluit et pervulgatum est, quam grammaticae ratio

et usus."

            2 "And despite the enormous advance since the days of Winer toward a

rational and unitary conception of the N. T. language, we still labour to-day

under the remains of the old conceptions." Samuel Dickey, Prince. Theol.

Rev., Oct., 1903, "New Points of View."

 

                                              3


4        A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

combated "this absurd system of interpretation," and not

without success in spite of receiving some sneers. He had the

temerity to insist on this order of interpretation: grammatical,

historical, theological. He adhered to his task and lived to see

"an enlightened philology, as deduced and taught by Herrmann

and his school," triumph over the previous "unbridled license."1

               II. The Service of Winer.

(a) WINER'S INCONSISTENCIES.

          It must be said, however, that

great as was the service of Winer to this science, he did not at all

points carry out consistently his own principles, for he often ex-

plained one tense as used for another. He was not able to rise

entirely above the point of view of his time nor to make persist-

ent application of the philosophical grammar. It is to be borne

in mind also that the great science of comparative philology had

not revolutionized linguistic study when Winer first wrote. In a

true sense he was a pathfinder.

          (b) WINER EPOCH-MAKING.

          --WINER IN ENGLISH. But none the

less his work has been the epoch-making one for N. T. study.

After his death Dr. Gottlieb Lunemann revised and improved the

Neutestamentliches Sprachidiom. Translations of Winer's Gram-

matik into English were first made by Prof. Masson of Edin-

burgh, then by Prof. Thayer of Harvard (revision of Masson),

and finally by Prof. W. F. Moulton of Cambridge, who added

excellent footnotes, especially concerning points in modern Greek.

The various editions of Winer-Thayer and Winer-Moulton have

served nearly two generations of English and American scholars.

(b) SCHMIEDEL.

          But now at last Prof. Schmiedel of Zurich is

thoroughly revising Winer's Grammatik, but it is proceeding

slowly and does not radically change Winer's method, though

use is made of much of the modern knowledge.2 Deissmann,3

indeed, expresses disappointment in this regard concerning

Schmiedel's work as being far "too much Winer and too little

Schmiedel." But Deissmann concedes that Schmiedel's work

"marks a characteristic and decisive turning-point in N. T.

philology."

 

            1 See Pref. to the sixth and last ed. by Winer himself as translated by Dr.

J. H. Thayer in the seventh and enlarged ed. of 1869.

            2 Winer's Gr. des neutest. Sprachid. 8. Aufl. neu bearbeitet von Dr. Paul

Wilhelm Schmiedel, 1894—.

            3 Die sprachl. Erforsch. der griech. Bibel, 1898, p. 20. He adds, "Der

alte Winer war seiner Zeit ein Protest des philologischen Gewissens gegen

die Willkur eines anmassenden Empiricismus." Cf. also Exp., Jan., 1908,

p. 63.


NEW MATERIAL  5

 

(c)  BUTTMANN.

          Buttmann's Grammatik des neutestamentlichen

Sprachgebrauchs had appeared in 1859 and was translated by

Thayer as Buttmann's Grammar of N.T. Greek (1873), an able work.

(d) BLASS.

          It is not till the Grammatik des neutestamentlichen

Griechisch by Prof. Blass in 1896 that any other adequate gram-

mar appears in this field. And Blass departs a little from tradi-

tional methods and points of view. He represents a transition

towards a new era. The translation by H. St. John Thackeray

has been of good service in the English-speaking world.1

II.              The Modern Period.

          It is just in the last decade that

it  has become possible to make a real advance in New Testa-

ment grammatical study. The discovery and investigation that

have characterized every department of knowledge have borne

rich fruit here also.

(a) DEISSMANN.

          Deissmann2 sees rightly the immensity of the

task imposed upon the N. T. grammarian by the very richness of

the new discoveries. He likewise properly condemns the too fre-

quent isolation of the N. T. Greek from the so-called "profane

Greek."3 Deissmann has justly pointed out that the terms "pro-

fane" and "biblical" do not stand in linguistic contrast, but

rather "classical" and "biblical." Even here he insists on the

practical identity of biblical with the contemporary later Greek

of the popular style.4

          It was in 1895 that Deissmann published his Bibelstudien, and

his Neue Bibelstudien followed in 1897. The new era has now

fairly begun. In 1901 the English translation of both volumes

by Grieve appeared as Bible Studies. In 1907 came the Philol-

 

            1 First ed. 1898, second ed. 1905, as Blass' Gr. of N. T. Gk. A revision

of the work of Blass (the 4th German edition) by Dr. A. Debrunner has ap-

peared as these pages are going through the press.

            2 Die sprachl. Erforsch. der griech. Bibel, 1898, p. 5: "Durch neue Erkennt-

nisse befruchtet steht die griechische Philologie gegenwartig im Zeichen einer

vielverheissenden Renaissance, die fordert von der sprachliehen Erforschung

der griechischen Bibel, dass sie in engste, Fuhlung trete mit der historischen

Erforschung der griechischen Sprache."

            3 Ib., p. 7. Like, for instance, Zerschwitz, Profangrac. und bibl. Sprachg.,

1859.

            4 Die Spr. der griech. Bibel, Theol. 1898, pp. 463-472. He aptly

says: "Nicht die Profangracitat ist der sprachgeschichtliche Gegensatz zur

‘biblischen,’ sondern das classische Griechisch. Die neueren Funde zur Ge-

sehrehte der griechischen Sprache zeigen, dass die Eigentumlichkeiten des

‘biblischen’ Formen- und Wortschatzes (bei den original-griechischen Schrif-

ten auch der Syntax) im grossen und ganzen Eigentumlichkeiten des spateren

und zwar zumeist des unliterarischen Griechisch uberhaupt sind."


6       A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

ogy of the Bible. His Licht vom Osten (1908) was his next most

important work (Light from the Ancient East, 1910, translated

by Strachan). See Bibliography for full list of his books. The

contribution of Deissmann is largely in the field of lexicography.

(b) THUMB.

          It was in 1901 that A. Thumb published his great

book on the κοινή, Die griechische Sprache im Zeitalter des Hel-

lenismus, which has done so much to give the true picture of the

κοινή. He had already in 1895 produced his Handbuch der neu-

griechischen Volkssprache. In 1912 the second enlarged edition

was issued in English by S. Angus, as Handbook of Modern

Greek Vernacular. This hook at once took front place for the

study of the modern Greek by English students. It is the only

book in English that confines itself to the vernacular.

(c)  MOULTON.

          In 1895, J. H. Moulton, son of W. F. Moulton,

the translator of Winer, produced his Introduction to N. T.

Greek, in a noble linguistic succession. In 1901 he began to pub-

lish in The Classical Review and in The Expositor, "Grammatical

Notes from the Papyri," which attracted instant attention by

their freshness and pertinency. In 1906 appeared his now famous

Prolegomena, vol. I, of A Grammar of N. T. Greek, which

reached the third edition by 1908. With great ability Moulton

took the cue from Deissmann and used the papyri for grammatical

purposes. He demonstrated that the Greek of the N. T. is in

the main just the vernacular κοινή of the papyri. In 1911 the

Prolegomena appeared in German as Einleitung in die Sprache des

Neuen Testaments.

(d) OTHER CONTRIBUTIONS.

          It is not possible to mention here

all the names of the workers in the field of N. T. grammar (see

Bibliography). The old standpoint is still found in the books of

Hatch, Essays in Biblical Greek (1889); Hoole, The Classical Ele-

ment in the N. T. (1888); Simcox, The Language of the N. T.

(1890); Schaff, A Companion to the Greek Testament and English

Version (1889); Viteau, Ètude sur le grec du N. T. — Le Verbe

(1893); Le Sujet (1896). The same thing is true of Abbott's Jo-

hannine Vocabulary (1905) and Johannine Grammar (1906); Bur-

ton's Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the N. T. Greek (1888,

third ed. 1909) is yet a genuine contribution. In Kennedy's

Sources of N. T. Greek (1895) we see a distinct transition toward

the new era of N. T. grammar. In 1911 Radermacher's Neu-

testamentliche Grammatik is in fact more a grammar of the κοινή  

than of the N. T., as it is designed to be an Einleitung. The au-

thor's Short Grammar of the Greek N. T. (1908) gives the new


                                      NEW MATERIAL                                  7

 

knowledge in a succinct form. The Italian translation (1910) by

Bonaccorsi has additional notes by the translator. Stocks (1911)

made numerous additions to the Laut- und Formenlehre of the

German edition. Grosheide in the Dutch translation (1912) has

made a revision of the whole book. The French edition (1911)

by Montet is mainly just a translation. The fourth enlarged edi-

tion in English appeared in 1916. Many special treatises of

great value have appeared (see Bibliography), by men like Angus,

Buttmann, Heinrici, Thieme, Vogel, Votaw, J. Weiss, Wellhausen.

(e)  RICHNESS OF MATERIAL.

          Now indeed it is the extent of

the material demanding examination that causes embarrassment.

And only thirty years ago K. Krumbacher1 lamented that it was

not possible to give "a comprehensive presentation of the Greek

language" because of the many points on which work must be

done beforehand. But we have come far in the meantime. The

task is now possible, though gigantic and well-nigh insurmount-

able. But it is not for us moderns to boast because of the material

that has come to our hand. We need first to use it. Dieterich2

has well said that the general truth that progress is from error to

truth "finds its confirmation also in the history of the develop-

ment that the Greek language has received in the last two thou-

sand years." By the induction of a wider range of facts we can

eliminate errors arising from false generalizations. But this is a

slow process that calls for patience. Dionysius Thrax,3 one of the

Alexandrian fathers of the old Greek grammar (circa 100 B.C.),

said:  Γραμματική ἐστιν ἐμπειρία τῶν παρὰ ποιηταῖς τε καὶ συγγγρα-

φεῦσιν ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ λεγομένων. Andrew Lang4 indeed is a dis-

ciple of Dionysius Thrax in one respect, for he contends that

students are taught too much grammar and too little language.

They know the grammars and not the tongue. A bare outline

can be given of the sources of the new material for such gram-

matical study.

 

            1 Beitr. zu einer Geseh. der griech. Spr., Kuhn's Zeits. far vergl. Sprach-

forsch., 1882, p. 484: "Fine zusammenhangende Darstellung des Entwick-

lungsganges der griechischen Sprache ist gegenwartig nicht moglich. Auf

allzu vielen Punkten eines langen und viel verschlungenen Weges gebricht

es an den Vorarbeiten, welche fur ein solches Unternehmen unerlasslich Sind."

            2 Unters. zur Gesch. der griech. Spr. von der hell. Zeit bis zum 10. Jahrh.

n. Chr., 1898, p. x.

            3 As quoted in Bekker, Anec. Graeca (1816), vol. II, p. 629. Dionysius

Thrax mentions six μέρη in grammar: ἀνάγνωσις, ἐξήγησις, γλωσσῶν τε καὶ ἱστο-

ριῶν πρόχειρος ὑπόδοσις, ἐτυμολογίας εὕρησις, ἀναλογίας ἐκλογισμός, κρίσις ποι-

ημάτων. A generous allowance truly!    4 Morning Post, Lond., May 5,1905.


8      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

               IV. The New Grammatical Equipment for N. T. Study.

(a) COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY.

          We must consider the great ad-

vance in comparative philology. The next chapter will deal

somewhat at length with various phases of the historical method

of linguistic study.

1.     The Linguistic Revolution.

          A revolution has been wrought

in the study of language. It must be confessed that grammatical

investigation has not always been conducted on the inductive

principle nor according to the historical method. Too often the

rule has been drawn from a limited range of facts. What is

afterwards found to conflict with a rule is called an "exception."

Soon the exceptions equal or surpass the rule. Unfortunately the

ancients did not have the benefit of our distinctions of "regular"

and "irregular." Metaphysical speculation with lofty superi-

ority to the facts is sometimes charged upon grammarians.1

"Grammar and logic do not coincide."2 Comparative grammar

is merely the historical method applied to several languages to

gether instead of only one.3

          2. A Sketch of Greek Grammatical History. The Greek has

had its own history, but it is related to the history of kindred

tongues. "From the days of Plato's Kratylus downward . . . the

Greek disputed as to whether language originated by convention

(νόμῳ) or by nature (φύσει)."4  Indeed formal Greek grammar

was the comparison with the Latin and began "with Dionysius  

Thrax, who utilized the philological lucubrations of Aristotle and

the Alexandrian critics for the sake of teaching Greek to the sons

of the aristocratic contemporaries of Pompey at Rome."5 His

Greek grammar is still in existence in Bekker's Anecdota,6 and is

the cause of much grotesque etymology since.7

          This period of grammatical activity came after the great crea-

tive period of Greek literature was over, and in Alexandria, not

 

            1 So Dr. John H. Kerr, sometime Prof. of N. T. in the Pac. Theol. Sem.

in conversation with me.     2 Paul, Prin. of the Hist. of Lang., 1888, p. 18.

            3 Ib., pp. 1 ff. So Oertel, Lect. on the Study of Lang., 1901, p. 42,

"Comparative grammar in Schleicher's sense is in its essence nothing but

historical grammar by the comparative method."

            4 Sayce, Prin. of Comp. Philol., 1875, p. 259 f.

            5 Ib., p. 261.                  6 Op. cit., pp. 629-643.

            7 See Sayce, Intr. to the Sci. of Lang., 1880, vol. I, p. 19 f.; Dionysius

Thrax's τέχνη γραμματική was developed into a system by Apollonius Dysco-

lus (ii/A.D.) and his son Herodian. Dionysius Thrax was born B.C. 166. Dys-

colus wrote a systematic Gk. Syntax of accentuation in 20 books (known to

us only in epitome) about 200 A.D.


                                  NEW MATERIAL                                          9

 

in Athens.1 Rhetoric was scientifically developed by Aristotle

long before there was a scientific syntax. Aristotle perfected log-

ical analysis of style before there was historical grammar.2 With

Aristotle ὁ γραμματικός was one that busied himself with the let-

ters (γράμματα). He was not ἀγράμματος; ἡ γραμματική then had

to do with the letters and was exegetical.3 Plato does not treat

grammar, though the substantive and the adjective are distin-

guished, but only dialectics, metaphysics, logic.4 The Stoic gram-

marians, who succeeded Plato and Aristotle, treated language from

the logical standpoint and accented its psychological side.5 So

the Alexandrian grammarians made γραμματική more like κριτική.

They got hold of the right idea, though they did not attain the

true historical method.6

          Comparative grammar was not wholly unknown indeed to the

ancients, for the Roman grammarians since Varro made a com-

parison between Greek and Latin words.7 The Roman writers

on grammar defined it as the "scientia recte loquendi et scri-

bendi,"8 and hence came nearer to the truth than did the Alex-

andrian writers with their Stoic philosophy and exegesis. It has

indeed been a hard struggle to reach the light in grammar.9 But

Roger Bacon in this "blooming time" saw that it was necessary

for the knowledge of both Greek and Latin to compare them.10

And Bernhardy in 1829 saw that there was needed a grammatico-

historical discussion of syntax because of the "distrust of the

union of philosophy with grammar."11 We needed "the view-

 

            1 See Jebb in Whibley's Comp. to Gk. Stud., 1905, p. 147 f.

            2 See Steinthal, Gesch. der Sprachw. bei den Griech. und Rom., 2. TI.,

1891, p. 179.

            3 F. Hoffmann, Uber die Entwickelung des Begriffs der Gr. bei den Alten,

1891, p. 1.

            4 Ib., p. 144. The early Gk. grammarians were "ohne richtiges historisches

Bewusstsein" (Steinthal, Gesch. der Sprachw. etc., 1. Tl., 1863, p. 39). Even

in Plato's Kratylus we do not see "das Gauze in seiner Ganzheit" (p. 40).

            5 Ib., p. 277 f. For a good discussion of Dion. Thr. see Jannaris, Hist.

Gk. Gr., p. 34 f.

            6 See Kretschmer, Einl. in die Gesch. der griech. Spr., 1896, p. 1.

            7 See Kretschmer, op. cit., p. 4.

            8  F. Blass, Hermen. und Krit., 1892, p. 157 f.

Steinthal, Gesch. etc., 2. Tl., 1891, p. 1, calls this time of struggle "ihre

Blutezeit."

            10 Roger Bacon, Oxford Gk. Gr., edited by Nolan and Hirsch, 1902, p. 27:

"Et in hac comparatione Grammaticae Graecae ad Latinam non solum est

necessitas propter intelligendam Grammaticam Graecam, sed omnino necqs-

sarium est ad intelligentiam Latinae Grammaticae."

            11 Wissenseh. Synt, der griech. Spr., 1829, pp. 7, 12.


10        A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

point of the historical Syntax." Humboldt is quoted by Oertel1

as saying: "Linguistic science, as I understand it, must be based

upon facts alone, and this collection must be neither one-sided

nor incomplete." So Bopp conceived also: "A grammar in the

higher scientific sense of the word must be both history and

natural science." This is not an unreasonable demand, for it is

made of every other department of science.2

          3. The Discovery of Sanskrit. It is a transcendent fact which

has revolutionized grammatical research. The discovery of San-

skrit by Sir William Jones is what did it. In 1786 he wrote thus3:

"The Sanskrit language, whatever may be its antiquity, is of

wonderful structure; more perfect than the Greek, more copious

than the Latin, and more exquisitely refined than either; yet

bearing to both of them a stronger affinity, both in the roots of

verbs and the forms of grammar, than could have been produced

by accident; so strong that no philologer could examine all the

three without believing them to have sprung from some common

source which no longer exists. There is a similar reason, though

not so forcible, for supposing that both the Gothic and the Celtic,

though blended with a different idiom, had the same origin with

the Sanskrit." He saw then the significance of his own discovery,

though not all of it, for the Teutonic tongues, the Lithuanian

and Slav group of languages, the Iranian, Italic, Armenian and

Albanian belong to the same Aryan, Indo-Germanic or Indo-

European family as it is variously called.

          4. From Bopp to Brugmann. But Bopp4 is the real founder of

comparative philology. Before Bopp's day "in all grammars the

mass of ‘irregular’ words was at least as great as that of the

‘regular’ ones, and a rule without exception actually excited

suspicion."5 Pott's great work laid the foundation of scientific

phonetics.6 Other great names in this new science are W. von

 

            1 Lect. on the Study of Lang., 1901, p. 47.

            2 See C. Herrmann, Philos. Gr., 1858, p. 422: "Die Natur der philoso-

phischen Grammatik war von Anfang an bestimmt worden als die eine

Grenzwissenschaft zwischen Philosophie and Philologie." But it is a more

objective task now.

            3 Cf. Benfey, Gesch. der Sprachw., p. 348. "This brilliant discovery, de-

clared in 1786, practically lies at the root of all linguistic science." J. H.

Moulton, Sci. of Lang., 1903, p. 4.

            4 See his Vergl. Gr., 1857. He began publication on the subject in

1816.

            5 Delbruck, Intr. to the Study of Lang., 1882, p. 25.

            6 Etym. Forsch. auf dem Gebiet der indoger. Spr., 1833-1830.


                                  NEW MATERIAL                                  11

 

Humboldt,1 Jacob Grimm,2 Schlegel,3 Schleicher,4 Max Muller,5

Curtius,6 Verner,7 Whitney,8 L. Meyer.9

          But in recent years two men, K. Brugmann and B. Delbruck,

have organized the previous knowledge into a great monumental

work, Grundriss der vergleichenden Grammatik der indogerma-

nischen Sprachen.10 This achievement is as yet the high-water-

mark in comparative grammar. Brugmann has issued a briefer

and cheaper edition giving the main results.11 Delbruck has also a

brief treatise on Greek syntax in the light of comparative gram-

mar,12 while Brugmann has applied comparative philology to the

Laut- and Formenlehre of Greek grammar.13 In the Grundriss

Brugmann has Bde. I, II, while Delbruck treats syntax in Bde.

III-V. In the new edition Brugmann has also that part of the

syntax which is treated in Vol. III and IV of the first edi-

tion. The best discussion of comparative grammar for begin-

ners is the second edition of P. Giles's Manual.14 Hatzidakis

successfully undertakes to apply comparative grammar to the

modern Greek.15 Riemann and Goelzer have made an exhaustive

comparison of the Greek and Latin languages.16 There are, in-

deed, many interesting discussions of the history and principles

growing out of all this linguistic development, such as the works

 

            1 Always mentioned by Bopp with reverence.

            2 Deutsche Gr., 1822. Author of Grimm's law of the interchange of let-

ters. Next to Bopp in influence.

            3 Indische Bibl.

            4 Vergl. Gr. der indoger. Spr., 1876, marks the next great advance.

            5 Lect. on the Sci. of Lang., 1866. He did much to popularize this study.

            6 His most enduring work is his Prin. of Gk. Etym., vols. I, II, fifth ed.,

1886.

            7 The discovery of Verner's law, a variation from Grimm's law, according

to which  p, t and k, pass into b, d and g, instead of f, th and h when not im-

mediately followed by the word-accent.

            8 Life and Growth of Lang., 1875; Sans. Gr., 1892, etc.

            9 Vergl. Gr., 1865.

            10 Bd. I-V, 1st ed. 1886-1900; 2d ed. 1897—; cf. also Giles-Hertel, Vergl.

Gr., 1896.

            11 Kurze vergl. Gr., 1902-1904.

            12 Die Grundl. der griech. Synt., 1879.

            13 Griech. Gr., 1900, 3. Aufl.; 4. Aufl., 1913, by Thumb. See also G. Meyer,

Griech. Gr., 3. verm. Aufl., 1896.

            14 A Short Man. of Comp. Philol., 1901.

            15 Einl. in die neugr. Gr., 1892.

            16 Gr. comparee du Grec et du Lat.: Syntaxe, 1897; Phonetique et Etude

de Formes, 1901. Cf. also King and Cookson's Prin. of Sound and Inflexion

as illustrated in the Gk. and Lat. Lang., 1888.


12     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

of Jolly,1 Delbruck,2 Sweet,3 Paul,4 Oertel,5 Moulton,6 Whit-

ney,7 Max Muller,8 Sayce.9  It is impossible to write a grammar

of the Greek N. T. without taking into consideration this new

conception of language. No language lives to itself, and least of

all the Greek of the N. T. in the heart of the world-empire.10  It

is not necessary to say that until recently use of this science had

not been made by N. T. grammars.11

          (b) ADVANCE IN GENERAL GREEK GRAMMAR. There has been

great advance in the study of general Greek grammar. The

foundations laid by Crosby and Ktihner, Kruger, Curtius, Butt-

mann, Madvig, Jelf and others have been well built upon by

Hadley, Goodwin, Gildersleeve, Gerth, Blass, Brugmann, G.

Meyer, Schanz, Hirt, Jannaris, etc. To the classical student this

catalogue of names12 is full of significance. The work of Kuhner

has been thoroughly revised and improved in four massive vol-

umcs by Blass13 and Gerth,14 furnishing a magnificent apparatus

for the advanced student. Hirt's handbook15 gives the modern

knowledge in briefer form, a compendium of comparative gram-

mar, while G. Meyer16 and Brugmann17 are professedly on the

 

            1 Schulgr. und Sprachw., 1874.

            2 Intr. to the Study of Lang., 1882; 5th Germ. ed. 1908. Uber die

Resultate der vergl. Synt., 1872. Cf. Wheeler, The Whence and Whither of

the Mod. Sci. of Lang., 1905; Henry, Précis de gr. du grec et du latin, 5th

ed., 1894.                                 3 The Hist. of Lang., 1899.

            4 Prin. of the Hist. of Lang., 1888; 4th Germ. ed. 1909.

            5 Lect. on the Study of Lang., 1901.      6 The Sci. of Lang., 1903.

            7 Lang. and the Study of Lang., 1867.

            8 Three Lect. on the Sci. of Lang., 1891.                 9 Prin. of Comp. Philol., 1875.

            10 By "die historische Sprachforschung" the Gk. tongue is shown to be a

member of the Indo-Germanic family; thus is gained "der sprachgeschicht-

liche Gesichtspunkt," and then is gained " ein wesentlich richtiges Verstand-

nis . . . fur den Entwicklungsgang der Sprache." Brugmann, Griech. Gr.,

1885, p. 4. Cf. p. 3 in third ed., 1901.

            11 See J. H. Moulton's Prol. to the N. T. Gk. Gr., 1906, and A. T. Robert-

son's N. T. Syll., 1900, and Short Gr. of the Gk. N. T., 1908.

            12 The late G. N. Hatzidakis contemplated a thesaurus of the Gk. language,.

but his death cut it short.

            13 Ausfuhrl. Gr. der griech. Spr. von Dr. Raphael Kuhner, 1. Tl.: Elemen-,

tar- und Formenlehre, Bd. I, II. Besorgt von Dr. Friedrich Blass, 1890, 1892.

            14 Ib., 2. Tl. Satzlehre, Bd. I, II. Besorgt von Dr. Bernhard Gerth, 1898,

1904.

            15 Handb. der griech. Laut- und Formenlehre, 1902, 1. Aufl.; 2. Aufl., 1912.

            16 Griech. Gr., 3. Aufl., 1896.

            17 Ib., 1900; 4. Aufl., 1913, by Thumb; 3d ed. quoted in this book. A

now (1912) Wright has given in English a Comp. Gr. of the Gk. Lang.


                                  NEW MATERIAL                                 13

 

basis of comparative philology. Jannarisl is the first fairly suc-

cessful attempt to present in one volume the survey of the prog-

ress of the language as a whole. Schanz2 makes a much more

ambitious undertaking and endeavours in a large number of mono-

graphs to furnish material for a future historical grammar. Gil-

dersleeve3 has issued only two volumes of his work, while the

grammars of Hadley-Allen and Goodwin are too well known to

call for remark. New grammars, like F. E. Thompson's (1907,

new ed.) and Simonson's (2 vols., 1903, 1908), continue to appear.

          (c) CRITICAL EDITIONS OF GREEK AUTHORS. The Greek authors

in general have received minute and exhaustive investigation. The

modern editions of Greek writers are well-nigh ideal. Careful

and critical historical notes give the student all needed, sometimes

too much, aid for the illumination of the text. The thing most

lacking is the reading of the authors and, one may add, the study

of the modern Greek. Butcher4 well says "Greek literature is

the one entirely original literature of Europe." Homer, Aris-

totle, Plato, not to say AEschylus, Sophocles and Euripides are

still the modern masters of the intellect. Translations are better

than nothing, but can never equal the original. The Greek lan-

guage remains the most perfect organ of human speech and

largely because "they were talkers, whereas we are readers."5

They studied diligently how to talk.6

          (d) WORKS ON INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. In nothing has the ten-

dency to specialize been carried further than in Greek grammatical

research. The language of Homer, Thucydides, Herodotus, the

tragic poets, the comic writers, have all called for minute investi-

 

            1 An Hist. Gk. Gr., chiefly of the Att. Dial., 1897. Cf. also Wackernagel,

Die griech. Spr. (pp. 291-318), Tl. I, Abt. VIII, Kultur der Gegenw.

            2 Beitr. zur histor. Synt. der griech. Spr., Tl. I. Cf. also Hubner, Grundr.

zur Vorlesung tiber die griech. Synt., 1883. A good bibliography. Krum-

bacher, Beitr. zu einer Gesch. der griech. Spr., Kuhn's Zeitschr. etc., 1885,

pp. 481-545.

            3 Synt. of Class. Gk., 1900, 1911.

            4 Harv. Lect. on Gk. Subj., 1904, p. 129. See also Butcher, Some Aspects

of the Gk. Genius, 1893, p. 2: "Greece, first smitten with the passion for

truth, had the courage to put faith in reason, and, in following its guidance,

to take no account of consequences." So p. 1: "To see things as they really

are, to discern their meanings and adjust their relations was with them an

instinct and a passion."                                                 5 Ib.,  p. 203.

            6 See Bernhardy, Griech. Lit., TI. I, II, 1856; Christ, Gesch. der griech.

Lit. bis auf die Zeit Justinians, 4. revid. Aufl., 1905; 5. Aufl., 1908 ff. Par-

nell, Gk. Lyric Poetry, 1891, etc. A. Croiset and M. Croiset, An Abr. Hist.

of Gk. Lit., transl. by Heffelbower, 1904.


14      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

gation,1 and those of interest to N. T. students are the mono-

graphs on Polybius, Josephus, Plutarch, etc. The concordances

of Plato, Aristotle, etc., are valuable. The Apostolic Fathers,

Greek Christian Apologists and the Apocryphal writings illus-

trate the tendencies of N. T. speech. Cf. Reinhold, De Graec.

Patr. Apost. (1898). The universities of America and Europe

which give the Ph.D. degree have produced a great number of

monographs on minute points like the use of the preposition in

Herodotus, etc. These all supply data of value and many of

them have been used in this grammar. Dr. Mahaffy,2 indeed, is

impatient of too much specialism, and sometimes in linguistic

study the specialist has missed the larger and true conception of

the whole.

          (e) THE GREEK INSCRIPTIONS. The Greek inscriptions speak

with the voice of authority concerning various epochs of the lan-

guage. Once we had to depend entirely on books for our knowl-

edge of the Greek tongue. There is still much obscurity, but it

is no longer possible to think of Homer as the father of Greek

nor to consider 1000 B.C. as the beginning of Greek culture. The

two chief names in epigraphical studies are those of August

Boeckh (Corpus Inscriptionum Graecarum) and Theodor Momm-

sen (Corpus Inscriptionum Latinarum). For a careful review of

"the Nature of the New Texts" now at our service in the in-

scriptions see Deissmann, Light, etc., pp. 10-20. See W. H. P.

Hatch's article (Jour. of Bibl. Lit., 1908, pp. 134-146, Part 2)

on "Some Illustrations of N. T. Usage from Greek Inscriptions

of Asia Minor." Cf. also Thieme, Die Inschriften von Magnesia

am Maander and das Neue Test. (1906), and Rouffiac, Recherches

sur les Caracteres du Grec dans le N. T. d'apres les Inscriptions

de Priene (1911). Deissmann, op. cit., p. 18, thinks that ἀγά[πη]ν

is rightly restored in a pagan inscription in Pisidia of the imperial

period. For the Christian inscriptions see Deissmann, op. cit.,

p. 19. Schliemann3  has not only restored the story of Troy to

the reader of the historic past, but he has revealed a great civi-

 

            1 Cf., for instance, Die Spr. des Plut. etc., T1. I, II, 1895, 1896; Krebs, Die

Prapositionen bei Polybius, 1881; Goetzeler, Einfl. des Dion. Hal. auf die

Sprachgesch. etc., 1891; Schmidt, De Flavii Josephi eloc. observ. crit., 1894;

Kaelker, Quest. de Eloc. Polyb. etc.

            2 "A herd of specialists is rising up, each master of his own subject, but

absolutely ignorant and careless of all that is going on around him in kindred

studies." Survey of Gk. Civilization, 1897, p. 3.

            3 Mycenae and Tiryns, 1878.


                                 NEW MATERIAL                               15

 

lization at Mycenae.1 Homer stands at the close of a long ante-

cedent history of linguistic progress, and once again scholars are

admitting the date 850 or even 1000 B.C. for his poems as well as

their essential unity, thus abandoning Wolff's hypothesis.2 They

have been driven to this by the abundant linguistic testimony

from the inscriptions from many parts of Greece. So vast is this

material that numerous grammatical discussions have been made

concerning the inscriptions, as those by Roehl,3 Kretschmer,4

Lautensach,5 Rang,6 Meisterhans,7 Schweizer,8 Viteau,9 Wagner,10

Nachmanson,11 etc.

          These inscriptions are not sporadic nor local, but are found in

Egypt, in Crete, in Asia Minor, the various isles of the sea,12 in

Italy, in Greece, in Macedonia, etc. Indeed Apostolides13 seems

to show that the Greeks were in Egypt long before Alexander

the Great founded Alexandria. The discoveries of Dr. A. J.

 

            1 See also Tsountas and Manatt, The Mycenaean Age, 1897.

            2 Ridgeway (Early Age of Greece, vol. I, 1901, p. 635) says that the methods

applied to dissection of the Iliad and the Odyssey would pick to pieces the

Paradise Lost and The Antiquary. "The linguistic attack upon their age

may be said to have at last definitely failed." (T. W. Allen, Cl. Rev., May,

1906, p. 193.) Lang, Homer and Hiss Age (1906), advocates strongly the

unity of the Homeric poems.                             3 Inscr. Graecae Antiq., 1882.

            4 Die griech. Vaseninschr. und ihre Spr., 1894.

            5 Verbalfl. der att. Inschr., 1887.                        6 Antiquites hellen., 1842.

            7 Gr. der att. Inschr., 3. Aufl. von E. Schwyzer, 1900.

            8 Gr. der perg. Inschr., 1898.

            9 La decl. dans les inscr. att. de l'Empire, 1895.

            10 Quest. de epigram. Graecis, 1883.

            11 Laute und Formen der magn. Inschr., 1903; cf. also Solmsen, Inscr.

Graecae ad illustr. Dial. sel.; Audollent, Defix. Tabellae, 1904; Michel, Rec.

d'inscr. Graec., 1883; Dittenberger, Or. Graeci Inscr. Sel., 1903-1905; Roberts-

Gardner, Intr. to Gk. Epigr., 1888. See Bibliography. Cf. especially the

various volumes of the Corpus Inscr. Graecarum.

            12 As, for example, Paton and Hicks, The Inscr. of Cos, 1891; Kern, Die

Inschr. von Magn., 1900; Gartingen, Inschr. von Priene, 1906; Gartingen

and Paton, Inscr. Maris Aegaei, 1903; Letronne, Rec. des inscr. lat. et grec.

de 1'Egypte, 1842. As early as 1779 Walch made use of the inscriptions for

the N. T. Gk. in his Observationes in Matt. ex graecis inscriptionibus. Cf.

also the works of E. L. Hicks, Lightfoot; Ramsay.

            13 Essai sur l'Hellenisme Egypt., 1908, p. vi. He says: "Les decouvertes

recentes des archeologues ont dissipe ces illusions. Des ruines de Naucratis,

de Daphne, de Gurob, et de l'Illahoun (pour ne citer que les localites dans

lesquelles les recherches ont donne le plus de resultats) est sortie toute une

nouvelle Grece; une Grece anterieure aux Ramses . . .; et, si les recherches se

continuent, on ne tardera pas, nous en sommes convaincus, acquerir la

certitude que les Grecs sont aussi anciens en Egypte qu'en Grece meme."


16       A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

Evans in Crete have pushed back the known examples of Greek

a thousand years or more. The linear script of Knossos, Crete,

may be some primitive form of Greek 500 years before the first

dated example of Phoenician writing. The civilization of the

Hellenic race was very old when Homer wrote, — how old no

one dares say.1  For specimens of the use of the inscriptions see

Buck's Introduction to the Study of the Greek Dialects (Gram-

mar, Selected Inscriptions, Glossary), 1910.

          (f) FULLER KNOWLEDGE OF THE DIALECTS. The new knowledge

of the other dialects makes it possible to form a juster judgment

of the relative position of the Attic. There has been much confu-

sion on this subject and concerning the relation of the various

Greek races. It now seems clear that the Pelasgians, Achaeans,

Dorians were successively dominant in Greece.2 Pelasgian ap-

pears to be the name for the various pre-Achaean tribes, and it

was the Pelasgian tribe that made Mycenae glorious.3 Homer

sings the glories of the Achaeans who displaced the Pelasgians,

while "the people who play a great part in later times — Dorians,

AEolians, Ionians — are to Homer little more than names."4

The Pelasgian belonged to the bronze age, the Achaean to the

iron age.5 The Pelasgians may have been Slavs and kin to the

Etruscans of Italy. The Achans were possibly Celts from

northern Europe.6 The old Ionic was the base of the old Attic.7

This old Ionic-Attic was the archaic Greek tongue, and the

choruses in the Attic poets partly represent artificial literary

Doric. There was not a sharp division8 between the early dia-

lects owing to the successive waves of population sweeping over

the country. There were numerous minor subdivisions in the

dialects (as the Arcadian, Boeotian, Northwest, Thessalian, etc.)

due to the mountain ranges, the peninsulas, the islands, etc.,

and other causes into which we cannot enter. For a skilful at-

tempt at grouping and relating the dialects to each other see

Thumb's Handbuch, p. 54 f. The matter cannot be elaborated

here (see ch. III). But the point needs to be emphasized that

 

            1 A. J. Evans, Ann. Rep. of the Smiths. Inst., p. 436.

            2 See Ridgeway, The Early Age of Greece, vol. I, p. 84.

            3 Ib., p. 293. For the contribution of the dialects to the κοινή see ch. III.

            4 Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., 1901, p. 526.                 5 Ib., p. 406.

            6 Ridgeway, op. cit., vol. I, p. 337.                                 7 Ib., pp. 666-670.

            8 Hoffmann, Die griech. Dial., Bd. I, p. 7. A more recent treatment of the

dialects is Thumb's Handb. der griech. Dial. (1909), which makes use of all

the recent discoveries from the inscriptions. On the mixing of the dialects

see Thumb, p. 61 f.


                                    NEW MATERIAL                                    17

 

the literary dialects by no means represent the linguistic history

of Greece itself and still less that of the islands and other colonies

(cf. Buck's Greek Dialects, p. 1). The blending of these dialects

into the κοινή) was not complete as we shall see.1  "Of dialects the

purest Hellenic is Dorian, preserved in religious odes, — pure be-

cause they kept aloof from their subjects. The next is the AEolic,

preserved in lyric odes of the Lesbian school. The earliest to be

embodied in literature was Ionic, preserved in epic poems. The

most perfect is Attic, the language of drama, philosophy and

oratory. This arose out of the Ionic by introducing some of

the strength of Doric-AEolic forms without sacrificing the sweet

smoothness of Ionic."2 In general concerning the Greek dialects

one may consult the works of Meister,3 Ridgeway,4 Hoffmann,5

Thumb,6 Buck,7 Boisacq,8 Pezzi,9 etc.

          (g) THE PAPYRI AND OSTRACA. Thiersch in 1841 had pointed

out the value of the papyri for the study of the LXX in his De

Pentateuchi versione Alexandrina, but nobody thought it worth

while to study the masses of papyri in London, Paris and Ber-

lin for the N. T. language. Farrar (Messages of the Books, 1884,

p. 151) noted the similarity of phrase between Paul's correspon-

dence and the papyri in the Brit. Mus. "N. T. philology is at

present undergoing thorough reconstruction; and probably all the

workers concerned, both on the continent and in English-speaking

countries, are by this time agreed that the starting-point for the

philological investigations must be the language of the non-literary

papyri, ostraca, and inscriptions" (Deissmann, Light, etc., p. 55).

The κοινή is now rich in material for the study of the vernacular

or popular speech as opposed to the book language. This distinc-

tion belongs to all languages which have a literature and to all

periods of the language. It is particularly true of the modern

 

            1 See Dieterich, Die Κοινή and die heut. kleinasiat. Mundarten-Unters. zur

Gesch. etc., pp. 271-310. Cf. Chabert, Hist. sommaire des et. d'epigr. grecque,

1906.

            2 MS. Notes on Gk. Gr. by H. H. Harris, late Prof. of Gk. at Richmond

College.

            3 Griech. Dial., Bd. I, 1882, Bd. II, 1889; cf. Hicks, Man. of Gk. Hist.

Inscr., 1888.                                                                             4 Op. cit.

            5 Op. cit. and Bd. II, 1893, Bd. III, 1898. See also various volumes of the

Samml. der griech. Dial.-Inschr.

            6 Handb. der griech. Dial., 1909.                                                7 Gk. Dialects.

            8 Les dialectes Doriens, 1891; cf. also H. W. Smyth, The Gk. Dial. (Ionic

only), 1894.

            9 Lingua Greca Antica, 1888. Cf. Lambert, Et. stir le dial. Cohen, 1903.


18      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

Greek to-day as it was true in the early period. The Athenian

newspapers as a rule affect the καθαρεύουσα. Occasionally a

writer like Aristophanes would on purpose write in the language

of the street. It is not therefore a peculiarity of the κοινή that

the vernacular Greek prevailed then. It always prevails. But

the καθαρεύουσα has secured a more disastrous supremacy over

the δημοτική than in any other language. And we are now

able to estimate the vernacular κοινή, since the great papyri

discoveries of Flinders-Petrie, Grenfell and Hunt and others.

We had already the excellent discussions of Mullach,1 Niebuhr,2

Blass,3 Foy4 and Lottich.5  But in the last fifteen years or so a

decided impetus has been given to this phase of Greek grammatical

research. It is in truth a new study, the attention now paid to

the vernacular, as Moulton points out in his Prolegomena (p. 22).

"I will go further and say that if we could only recover letters

that ordinary people wrote to each other without being literary,

we should have the greatest possible help for the understanding

of the language of the N. T. generally" (Bishop Lightfoot, 1863,

as quoted in Moulton's Prol., 2d and 3d ed., p. 242). If Lightfoot

only lived now! Cf. Masson's Preface to Winer (1859).

          The most abundant source of new light for the vernacular κοινή  

is found in the papyri collections, many volumes of which have

already been published (see Index of Quots. for fuller list), while

more are yet to be issued. Indeed, Prof. W. N. Stearns6 com-

plains: "There would seem to be a plethora of such material

already as evidenced by such collections as the Berlinische Ur-

kunde and the Rainier Papyri." But the earnest student of the

Greek tongue can only rejoice at the "extraordinary and in part

unexpected wealth of material from the contemporary and the

later languages."7 See the publications of Drs. Grenfell and Hunt,8

 

            1 Gr. der griech. Vulgarspr., 1856.

            2 Uber das Agyp.-Griech., Kl. Schr., II, p. 197 f.

            3 Die griech. Beredsamkeit von Alex. bis auf Aug., 1865.

            4 Lauts. der griech. Vulgarspr., 1879.

            5 De Serm. vulg. Att., 1881.

            6 Am. Jour. of Theol., Jan., 1906, p. 134.

            7 Samuel Dickey, New Points of View for the Study of the Gk. of the N. T.

(Prince. Theol. Rev., Oct., 1903).

            8 Oxyrhyn. Pap., vols. I–XII, 1898-1916; Faytim Pap., 1900; Tebtunis

Pap., 1902 (Univ. of Cal. Publ., pts. I, II, 1907); Hibeh Pap., pt. I, 1906; vol.

IV, Oxyrhyn. Pap., pp. 265-271, 1904; Grenfell and Hunt, The Hibeh Pap.,

1906, pt. I. In general, for the bibliography of the papyri see Hohlwein,

La papyrol. grec., bibliog. raisonnee, 1905.


                                     NEW MATERIAL                                   19

 

Mahaffy,1 Goodspeed,2 the Berlinische Urkunde,3 Papyri in the

British Museum,4 the Turin Papyri,5 the Leyden Papyri,6 the

Geneva Papyri,7 Lord Amherst's collection (Paris, 1865), etc. For

general discussions of the papyri see the writings of Wilcken,8

Kenyon,9 Hartel,10 Haberlin,11 Viereck,12 Deissmann,13 de Ricci,14

Wessely.15  A great and increasing literature is thus coming into

existence on this subject. Excellent handbooks of convenient

size are those by H. Lietzmann, Greek Papyri (1905), and by

G. Milligan, Greek Papyri (1910). For a good discussion of the

papyri and the literature on the subject see Deissmann, Light,

etc., pp. 20-41. The grammatical material in the papyri has not

been exhausted. There are a number of excellent workers in the

field such as Mayser,16 St. Witkowski,17 Deissmann,18 Moulton,19

H. A. A. Kennedy,20 Jannaris,21 Kenyon,22 Voelker,23 Thumb.24

 

            1 Flinders-Petrie Pap., 1891, 1892, 1893.

            2 Gk. Pap. from the Cairo Mus., 1902, 1903.

            3 Griech. Urik., 1895, 1898, 1903, 1907, etc.

            4 F. G. Kenyon, Cat. of Gk. Pap. in the B. M., 1893; Evid. of the Pap. for

Text. Crit. of the N. T., 1905; B. M. Pap., vol. I, 1893, vol. II, 1898.

            5 Peyron, 1826, 1827.

            6 Zauber Pap., 1885; Leeman's Pap. Graeci, 1843.

            7 J. Nicole, 1896, 1900; cf. Wessely's Corpus Pap., 1895.

            8 Griech. Papyrusurk., 1897; Archly fur Papyrusforsch. und verve. Gebiete,

1900—.

            9 Palaeog. of Gk. Pap., 1899; art. Papyri in Hast. D. B. (ext. vol.).

            10 Uber die griech. Pap.

            11 Griech. Pap., Centralbl. fiir Bibliothekswesen, 14. 1 f.

            12 Ber. uber die altere Pap.-Lit., Jahresb. uber d. Fortschr. etc., 1898, 1899.

            13 Art. Papyri in Encyc. Bibl.

            14 Bul. papyrologique in Rev. des Rt. grecques since 1901.

            15 Papyrus-Samml. since 1883. Cf. also Cronert, Mem. Graec. Hercul.,

1903; Reinach, Pap. grecs et &mot. etc., 1905.

            16 Gr. der griech. Pap., Tl. I, Laut- und Wortl., 1906.

            17 Prodromus Gr. Pap. Grace. aetatis Lagidarum, 26. Bd. der Abhandl.

der Phil. class. der Acad. zu Krakau, 1897, pp. 196-260.

            18 B. S., 1901; Light, etc.; art. Hell. Griech. in Hauck's Realencyc.; art.

Papyrus in Encyc. Bibl., etc.

            19 Gr. Notes from the Pap., Cl. Rev., 1901; Notes on the Pap., Exp.,

April, 1901, Feb., 1903; Characteristics of N. T. Gk., Exp., March to Dec.,

1904; Prol. to Gr. of N. T. Gk., 1908, 3d ed., etc.

            20 Sources of N. T. Gk., 1895; Recent Res. in the Lang. of the N. T., Exp.

Times, May, July, Sept., 1901.

            21 Hist. Gk. Gr., 1897; The Term κοινή, Cl. Rev., March, 1903.

            22 Art. Papyri in Hast. D. B.

            23 Syntax der griech. Pap., Tl. I, 1903.

            24 Die Forsch. uber die hell. Spr. in d. Jahr. 1896-1901, Archiv far Papyrus-

forsch., 1903, pp. 396-426; Die Forsch. uber die hell. Spr. in d. Jahr. 1902-4,


20      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

These are all helpful, but Cronert1 is right in urging that we

need a comprehensive discussion of the syntax of the Ptolemaic

papyri in order to set forth properly the relation of the papyri

both to the N. T. Greek and to the older Attic. This will require

time, for the mass of material is very great and is constantly

growing.2 But enough already is clear for us to see the general

bearing of the whole on the problem of the N. T. It is just here

that the papyri have special interest and value. They give the

language of business and life. The N. T. writers were partly

ἀγράμματοι, but what they wrote has become the chief Book of

Mankind.3 Hear Deissmann4 again, for he it is who has done

most to blaze the way here: "The papyrus-leaf is alive; one sees

autographs, individual peculiarities of penmanship — in a word,

men; manifold glimpses are given into inmost nooks and crannies

of personal life in which history has no eyes and historians no

glasses . . . It may seem a paradox, but it can safely be affirmed

that the unliterary papyri are more important in these respects

than the literary." Some of the papyri contain literary works,

fragments of Greek classics, portions of the LXX or of the N. T.,

though the great mass of them are non-literary documents, let-

ters and business papers. Cf. also Deissmann, Light, etc., p. 29.

Unusual interest attaches to the fragments containing the Logia

of Jesus, some of which are new, dating from the second or third

centuries A.D. and showing a Gnostic tinge.5 It is no longer pos-

sible to say, what even Friedrich Blass6 did in 1894, that the N. T.

Greek "is to be regarded something by itself and following laws

of its own." That view is doomed in the presence of the papyri.

Hatch7 in particular laboured under this error. The N. T. Greek

 

Archiv fur Pap., 111. 4; also Jahresb. fiber die Fortschr. des Class., 1906;

Diegriech. Papyrusurk., 1899-1905, pp. 36-40; Die griech. Spr. etc., 1901.

            1 Archiv fur Pap.-Forsch., 1900, p. 215.

            2 “Zum ersten Mal gewinnen wir reale Vorstellungen von dem Zustand

und der Entwickelung der handschriftlichen Lebenslieferung im Altertum

selbst. Neue wichtige Probleme sind damit der Philologie gestellt." N.

Wilcken, Die griech. Papyrusurk., 1897, p. 7. Mayser's Tl. II will supply

this need when it appears.

            3 See Deissmann, Die sprachl. Erforsch. der griech. Bibel, 1898, p. 27.

            4 Art. Papyri in Encyc. Bibl.

            5 See Λόγια  Ἰησοῦ, Sayings of Jesus, by Grenfell and Hunt, 1897. New

Sayings of Jesus, by Grenfell and Hunt, 1904. See also two books by Dr. C.

Taylor, The Oxyrhyn. Logia, 1899; The Oxyrhyn. Sayings of Jesus, 1905;

Lock and Sanday, Two Lect. on the Sayings of Jesus, 1897.

            6 Theol. Literaturzeit., 1894, p. 338.

            7 Essays in Bibl. Gk., 1892, p. 11 f. The earliest dated papyrus is now


                                  NEW MATERIAL                                 21

 

will no longer be despised as inferior or unclassical. It will be

seen to be a vital part of the great current of the Greek language.

For the formal discussion of the bearing of the papyri on the N. T.

Greek see chapter IV. A word should be said concerning the

reason why the papyri are nearly all found in Egypt.1 It is due

to the dryness of the climate there. Elsewhere the brittle material

soon perished, though it has on the whole a natural toughness.

The earliest known use of the papyri in Egypt is about 3400 B.C.

More exactly, the reign of Assa in the fifth dynasty is put at

3360 B.C. This piece of writing is an account-sheet belonging

to this reign (Deissmann, Light from A. E., p. 22). The oldest

specimen of the Greek papyri goes back to "the regnal year of

Alexander AEgus, the son of Alexander the Great. That would

make it the oldest Greek papyrus document yet discovered"

(Deissmann, Light, etc., p. 29). The discoveries go on as far as

the seventh century A.D., well into the Byzantine period. The

plant still grows in Egypt and it was once the well-nigh universal

writing material. As waste paper it was used to wrap the mum-

mies. Thus it has come to be preserved. The rubbish-heaps at

Faram and Oxyrhynchus are full of these papyri scraps.

          Mention should be made also of the ostraca, or pieces of pot-

tery, which contain numerous examples of the vernacular κοινή.

For a very interesting sketch of the ostraca see Deissmann, Light,

etc. (pp. 41-53). Crum and Wilcken have done the chief work on

the ostraca. They are all non-literary and occur in old Egyptian,

Arabic, Aramaic, Coptic, Greek and Latin. "Prof. Wilcken, in

his Griechische Ostraka,2 has printed the texts of over sixteen

hundred of the inscribed potsherds on which the commonest re-

ceipts and orders of Ptolemaic and Roman Egypt were written."3

It was the material used by the poorer classes.

          (h) THE BYZANTINE AND THE MODERN GREEK. The Byzantine

and modern Greek has at last received adequate'' recognition.

 

P. Eleph. 1 (311 n.c.), not P. Hibeh, as Thackeray has it in his Gr. of the 0. T.

in Gk., p. 56. This was true in 1907; cf. Moulton, Cl. Rev., March, 1910, p. 53.

            1 The practical limitation of the papyri to Egypt (and Herculaneum) has

its disadvantages; cf. Angus, The Κοινή, The Lang. of the N. T. (Prince.

Theol. Rev., Jan., 1910, p. 80).

            2 Griech. Ostraka aus Agypten and Nubien, Bd. I, H, 1899; cf. also Crum,

Coptic Ostraca, 2 vols. (1899); cf. Hilprecht, S. S. Times, 1902, p. 560. "In

many Coptic letters that are written on potsherds the writers beg their cor-

respondents to excuse their having to use an ostrakon for want of papyrus"

(Deissmann, Exp. Times, 1906, Oct., p. 15).

            3 E. J. Goodspeed, Am. Jour. of Theol., Jan., 1906, p. 102.


22     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

The student of the N. T. idiom has much to learn from the new

books on this subject. The scorn bestowed on the κοινή by the

intense classicists was intensified by the modern Greek, which

was long regarded as a nondescript jumble of Greek, Albanian,

Turkish, Italian, etc. Indeed the modern Greeks themselves

have not always shown proper appreciation of the dignity of the

modern vernacular, as is shown, for instance, in the recent up-

heaval at Athens by the University students over the translation

of the Gospels into the Greek vernacular (δημοτική) of to-day,

though the N. T. was manifestly written in the vernacular of its

day. "While the later Greeks, however, could no longer write

classically, they retained a keen sense for the beauties of the

classical language."1 Just as the "popular Latin finally sup-

pressed the Latin of elegant literature,"2 so the vernacular κοινή  

lived on through the Roman and Byzantine periods and survives

to-day as the modern Greek. There is unity in the present-day

Greek and historical continuity with the past. Dr. Rose is pos-

sibly extreme in saying: "There is more difference between the

Greek of Herodotus and the Greek of Xenophon than there is

between the Greek of the latter and the Greek of to-day."3 And

certainly Prof. Dickey4 is right in affirming "that the Greek of

N. T. stands in the centre of the development of which classical

and modern Greek may be called extremes, and that of the two

it is nearer to the second in character than the first. The inter-

pretation of the N. T. has almost entirely been in the sole light

of the ancient, i. e. the Attic Greek, and, therefore, to that ex-

tent has been unscientific and often inaccurate." Hatzidakis5

indeed complained that the whole subject had been treated with

 

            1 Dr. Achilles Rose, Chris. Greece and Living Gk., 1898, p. 7.

            2 R. C. Jebb, On the Rela. of Mod. to Class. Gk., in V. and D.'s Handb.:

to Mod. Gk., 1887, p. 287. "In other words, the Bible was cast into spoken

Latin, familiar to every rank of society though not countenanced in the

schoolroom; and thus it foreshadowed the revolution of ages whereby the

Roman tongue expanded into what we may label as Romance." W. Barry,

"Our Latin Bible," in Dublin Rev., July, 1906, p. 4; cf. also art. on The

Holy Latin Tongue, in April number.

            3 Chris. Greece and Living Greek, p. 253.

            4 New Points of View for the Study of N. T. Gk. (Prince. Theol.

Oct., 1903). See also S. Angus, Mod. Methods in N. T. Philol. (Harv. Theol.

Rev., Oct., 1911, p. 499): "That the progress of philology has thus broken

down the wall of partition of the N. T. and removed its erstwhile isolation

a great service to the right understanding of the book's contents."

            5 Einl. in die neugr. Gr., 1892, p. ix; cf. also H. C. Muller, Hist. Gr. de

hell. Spr., 1891.


                                 NEW MATERIAL                                  23

 

unworthy "dilettanteism" and not without ground for the com-

plaint. He himself did much by his great work to put the study

of modern Greek on a scientific basis,1 but he has not worked

alone in this important field. Another native Greek, Prof. Sopho-

cles, has produced a Greek Lexicon of the Roman and Byzantine

Periods in which there is an excellent discussion for that time2 of

the κοινή, the Byzantine and the modern Greek. Other scholars

have developed special phases of the problem, as Krumbacher,3

who has enriched our knowledge of the Byzantine4 or Middle

Ages Greek. Dieterich5 also has done fine work in this period of

Greek, as has Thumb.6  Worthy of mention also is the work of

G. Meyer,7 Geldart8 and Preste1,9 though the latter have not

produced books of great value. See also Meyer-Lithke's gram-

mar,10 Jannaris' Historical Greek Grammar and the writings of

Psichari.11  In general great progress has been made and it is now

possible to view the development of the N. T. idiom in the

light of the modern Greek. The apparent drift in the vernacular

 

            1 "Und wenn es mir gelingt, die wissenschaftliche Welt von ihrer wohl-

berechtigten Zuruckhaltung abzubringen und ihr nachzuweisen, dass das

Mittel- und Neugriechische ein vielversprechendes unkultivirtes Gebiet der

Wissenschaft ist, woraus man viel, sehr viel bezuglich der Sprachwissenschaft

uberhaupt wie des Altgriechischen speciell lernen kann, so ist mein Zweck

vollkommen erreicht." Ib., p. x.

            2 1870. One of the pressing needs is a lexicon of the papyri also. See

Contopoulos, Lex. of Mod. Gk., 1868, and others.

            3 Das Problem der neugr. Schriftspr., 1903. "Heute bedarf das Studien-

gebiet der byzantinischen und neugricchischen Philologie keine Apologie," p. 3.

In his hands the middle Gk. (Byzantine) is shown to be a rich field for the

student both of philology and literature; cf. also Gesch. der byzant. Lit.,

p. 20.

            4 Gesch. der byzant. Lit. etc.; cf. also his Byz. Zeitschr. and his Beitr.

zu einer Gesch. der griech. Spr., Kuhn's Zeitschr., 1885.

Unters. zur Gesch. d. griech. Spr. etc., 1898; Gesch. der byz. und neugr.

Lit., 1902.

            5 Handb. d. neugr. Volkspr., 1895; Thumb-Angus, Handb. of Mod. Gk. Ver-

nac., 1912; Die neugr. Sprachforsch. in d. Jahr. 1890 u. 1891 (Anz. fur indoger.

Spr., I, 1892; VI, 1896, and IX, 1898); Die griech. Spr. im Zeitalter des

Hellen., 1901; Die sprachgesch. Stellung des bibl. Griechisch, Theol. Runds.,

March, 1902.

            7 Neugr. Stud., 1894.

            8 The Mod. Gk. Lang. in its Rela. to Anc. Gk., 1870. On the Orig. and

Devel. of the Mod. Gk. Lang., Jour. of Philol., 1869.

            9 Zur Entwickelungsgesch. der griech. Spr.

            10 Gr. der romanischen Spr.

            11 Essais de Gr. hist. Neogrecque, 1886; cf. also Boltz Die hell. Spr. der

Gegenw., 1882.


24      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

κοινή of the N. T., like  ἵνα in the non-final clause, is too common

for remark in the modern Greek. Indeed the N. T. had a pre-

dominant influence on the later Greek as the chief literature of

the period, and especially as Christianity won the victory over

heathenism. The Byzantine Greek is in subject-matter largely

ecclesiastical. The sermons and treatises of the Greek Christian

Fathers constitute a large and valuable literature and amply il-

lustrate the language of the time.1 The modern Greek is in all

essential points the same as the Byzantine Greek of 1000 A.D.

In forty years2 we have seen a revolution in the study of the

modern Greek. But as late as 1887 Vincent and Dickson3 could

say: "By many it is believed that a corrupt patois of Turkish

and Italian is now spoken in Greece; and few even among pro-

fessed scholars are aware how small the difference is between the

Greek of the N. T. and the Greek of a contemporary Athenian

newspaper." The new Greek speech was developed not out of

the Byzantine literary language, but out of the Hellenistic popular

speech.4

          (i) THE HEBREW AND ARAMAIC. Less that is new has come

from the Hebrew and Aramaic field of research. Still real ad-

vance has been made here also. The most startling result is the

decrease of emphasis upon Hebraisms in the N. T. style. In

chapter IV, iii the Semitic influence on the N. T. language is dis-

cussed. Here the literary history is sketched.

          1. The Old View. It was only in 1879 that Guillemard5 issued

his Hebraisms in the Greek Testament, in which he said in the

Preface: "I earnestly disavow any claim to an exhaustive exhibi-

tion of all the Hebraisms, or all the deviations from classical

phraseology contained in the Greek Testament; of which I have

gathered together and put forward only a few specimens, in the

hope of stimulating others to fuller and more exact research."

Even in 1889, Dr. Edwin Hatch6 says: "Biblical Greek is thus a

 

            1 See the Migne Lib. and the new Ben Royal Lib. ed.

            2 Dieterich, op. cit., p. 10.

            3 Handb. to Mod. Gk., p. 3. See also Horae Hellenicae, by Stuart Blackie,

1874, p. 115: "Byzantine Gk. was classical Gk. from beginning to end, wit''

only such insignificant changes as the altered circumstances, combined with

the law of its original genius, naturally produced." Cf. Rangabe, Gr. Abre-

gee du grec actuel; Γεννάδιος, Γραμματικὴ τῆς  Ἑλλενικῆς Γλώσσης.

            4 Dieterich, op. cit., p. 5.

            5 See also A. Miller, Semit. Lehnw. in alteren Griech., Bezzenb. Beitr.

1878, I, pp. 273 ff.; S. Krauss, Griech. und lat. Lehnw. im Tal., 1898, 1899.

            6 Essays in Bibl. Gk., p. 11.


                                      NEW MATERIAL                                 25

 

language by itself. What we have to find out in studying it is

what meaning certain Greek words conveyed to a Semitic mind."

Again he says1: "The great majority of N. T. words are words

which, though for the most part common to biblical and to con-

temporary secular Greek, express in their biblical use the concep-

tions of a Semitic race, and which must consequently be examined

by the light of the cognate documents which form the LXX."

And W. H. Simcox2 says: "Thus it is that there came to exist a

Hellenistic dialect, having real though variable differences from

the Common or Hellenic."

          2. A Change with Kennedy. But a turn comes when H. A. A.

Kennedy3 says: "But while the writer began with a complete,

though provisional, acceptance of Hatch's conclusions, the far-

ther the inquiry was pushed, the more decidedly was he com-

pelled to doubt those conclusions, and finally to seek to establish

the connection between the language of the LXX and that of

the N. T. on a totally different basis." He finds that common

bond in "the colloquial Greek of the time."4

          3. Deissmann's Revolt. The full revolt against the theory of a

Semitic or biblical Greek is seen in the writings of Deissmann,5

who says6: "The theory indicated is a great power in exegesis,

and that it possesses a certain plausibility is not to be denied.

It is edifying, and what is more, is convenient. But it is absurd.

It mechanizes the marvellous variety of the linguistic elements

of the Greek Bible and cannot be established either by the psy-

chology of language or by history." There is here some of the

zeal of new discovery, but it is true. The old view of Hatch is

dead and gone. The "clamant need of a lexicon to the LXX"

is emphasized by Deissmann7 himself. Prof. H. B. Swete of

Cambridge has laid all biblical students under lasting obligation

 

            1 Ib., p. 34. See also p. 9: "Biblical Gk. belongs not only to a later period

of the history of the language than classical Gk., but also to a different coun-

try." On page 14 we read: "It is a true paradox that while, historically as

well as philologically, the Gk. (LXX) is a translation of the Hebrew, philo-

logically, though not historically, the Hebrew may be regarded as a trans-

lation of the Gk."

            2 The Lang. of the N. T., 1890, p. 15. Note the date, as late as 1890.

Sources of N. T. Gk., 1895, p. v.                                               4 Ib., p. 146.

            5 Die sprachl. Erforsch. der griech. Bibel, 1898; B. S., 1901; Hell. Griech.,

Hauck's Realencyc., New Light (1907), etc.                   6 B. S., p. 65.

            7 Ib., p. 73. Schleusner, 1821, is hopelessly inadequate and out of date.

Hatch and Redpath have issued in six parts (two volumes) a splendid con-

cordance to the LXX and other Gk. versions of the 0. T., 1892-1896, 1900.


26      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

to him by his contribution to the study of the Septuagint, con-

sisting of an edition of the LXX1 with brief critical apparatus

and a general discussion2 of the Septuagint. Brooke and McLean

are publishing an edition of the Septuagint with exhaustive crit-

ical apparatus.3 Students of the LXX now rejoice in Helbing's Gr.

der Septuaginta: Laut- u. Formenlehre (1907) and Thackeray's

Gr. of the 0. T. in Greek, vol. I (1909). Conybeare and Stock's  

Selections from the Septuagint (1905) has the old standpoint.

Other modern workers in this department are Nestle,4 Lagarde,5

Hartung,6 Ralf's,7 Susemihl,8 Apostolides.9

          4. The Language of Jesus. Another point of special interest in

this connection, which may be discussed as well now as later, is

the new light concerning the Aramaic as the language habitually

spoken by Jesus. This matter has been in much confusion and

the scholars are not at one even now. Roberts10 maintains that

Greek, not Hebrew, was "the language of the common public

intercourse in Palestine in the days of Christ and His apostles."

By Hebrew he means Aramaic. In The Expositor (1st series, vols.

VI, VII) Roberts argued also that Christ usually spoke Greek.

He was replied to (vol. VII) by Sanday. Lightfoot (on Gal. 4:6)

holds that Jesus said  Ἀββά ὁ πατήρ thus, Mark not having trans-

lated it. Thomson, "The Language of Palestine" (Temple Bible

Dict.), argues strongly that Christ spoke Greek, not Aramaic.

Neubauer11 contends that there was spoken besides at Jerusalem

and in Judea a modernized Hebrew, and comments12 on "how

 

            1 The O.T. in Gk. according to the LXX, vols. I–III, 1887-1894. He does

not give an edited text, but follows one MS. at a time with critical apparatus

in footnotes.

            2 An Intr. to the 0. T. in Gk., 1900; 2d ed., 1914.

            3 The Larger Camb. LXX, 1906—.

            4 Ed. of the LXX with Crit. Apparatus, 1880-1887; Sept.-Stud., 1886-

1896; Urtext and ubersetz. der Bibel, 1897. Nestle died in 1913.

            5 Sept.-Stud., 1891-1892.                      6 Ib., 1886.                    7 Ib., 1904.

            8 Gesch. der griech. Lit. in der Alexandrinzeit, Bd. I, II, 1891, 1892.

            9 Du grec Alexandrin et de ses rapports avec le grec ancien et le grec mo-

derne, 1892. Cf. among the older discussions, Sturz, De dial. Maced. et

Alexan., 1808; Lipsius, Gr. Unters. fiber die bibl. Grac., 1853; Churton, The

Infl. of the LXX upon the Prog. of Chris., 1861. See also Anz, Subs. ad

cognos. Graec. serm. vulg. e Pent. vers. Alexan., 1894.

            10 Disc. on the Gosp., pt. I, On the Lang. Employed by Our Lord and His

Apost., 1864, p. 316; A Short Proof that Greek was the Language of Jesus

(1893).

            11 On the Dial. of Palestine in the Time of Ch., Stud. Bibl., 1885.

            12 Stud. Bibl., p. 54.


                                 NEW MATERIAL                                   27

 

little the Jews knew Greek." A. Meyer1 urges that the vernacular

of Jesus was Aramaic and shows what bearing this fact has on

the interpretation of the Gospels. A. Julicher2 indeed says: "To

suppose, however (as, e.g. G. B. Winer supposes, because of

Mk. 7:34; Jo. 7: 25; 12:20) that Jesus used the Greek language

is quite out of the question." But Young, vol. II, Dictionary of

Christ and the Gospels (Hastings), article "Language of Christ,"

admits that Christ used both, though usually he spoke Aramaic.

So Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 8. But Dalman3 has done more

than any one in showing the great importance of the Aramaic for

the interpretation of the words of Jesus. He denies the use of a

modernized Hebrew in Jerusalem and urges that proper names

like Βηθεσδά, בֵּית חֶזְדָּא, are Aramaic (but see J. Rendel Harris,

Side Lights on the N. T., p. 71 f.). Dalman further urges that

"Aramaic was the mother tongue of the Galileans."4  J. T.

Marshall5 makes out a plausible case for the idea of a primitive

Aramaic Gospel before our Mark, and this would make it more

probable that Jesus spoke Aramaic. E. A. Abbott6 also attempts

to reproduce the original Aramaic of the words of Jesus from the

Greek. But Prof. Mahaffy7 can still say: "And so from the very

beginning, though we may believe that in Galilee and among His

intimates our Lord spoke Aramaic, and though we know that

some of His last words upon the cross were in that language, yet

His public teaching, His discussions with the Pharisees, His talk

 

            1 Jesu Mutterspr.: das galilaische Aram. in seiner Bedeut. fur die Erkl. der

Reden Jesu and der Evang. uberhaupt, 1896. So Deissmann (Light, etc.,

p. 57) says that Jesus "did not speak Gk. when He went about His public

work," and, p. 1, "Jesus preaches in his Aramaic mother-tongue."

            2 Art. Hellenism in Encyc. Bibl. Canon Foakes-Jackson (Interp., July, 1907,

p. 392) says: "The Jews of high birth or with a reputation for sanctity are

said to have refused to learn any language but their own, and thus we have

the strange circumstance in Roman Palestine of the lower orders speaking

two languages and their leaders only one."

            3 The Words of Jesus considered in the Light of the post-Bibl. Jewish

Writings and the Aram. Lang., 1902. Cf. also Pfannkuche (Clark's Bibl.

Cab.).

            4 Ib., p. 10.

            5 Exp., ser. IV, VI, VIII. See also Brockelmann, Syrische Gr., 1904;

Schwally, Idioticon des christl.-palestinischen Aramäisch, 1893; Riggs, Man.

of the Chaldean Lang., 1866; Wilson, Intr. Syriac Meth. and Man., 1891;

Strack, Gr. des bibl. Aramaischen.

            6 Clue, A Guide through Gk. to Heb., 1904.

            7 The Prog. of Hellen. in Alexan. Emp., 1905, p. 130 f. Hadley (Ess. Phil.

and Crit., p. 413) reaches the conclusion that Jesus spoke both Gk. and Aram.


28      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

with Pontius Pilate, were certainly carried on mainly in the

Greek." Zahn (Intr. to the N. T.) labours needlessly to show

that Hebrew was no longer the language of Palestine, but he does

not prove that Aramaic was everywhere spoken, nor that Jesus

always spoke Aramaic. Wellhausen (Einl. in die drei erst. Evang.)

is prejudiced in favour of the Aramaic theory. It may be admitted

at once that Aramaic was known to the majority of the Jews in

Palestine, particularly in Judea. Cf. Ac. 1:19:  τῇ διαλέκτῳ αὐτῶν

Ἁκελδαμάχ; 22:2, ἀκούσαντες ὅτι τῇ  Ἐβραΐδι διαλέκτῳ προσε-

φώνει αὐτοῖς μᾶλλον παρέσχον ἡσυχίαν. There is no doubt which

language is the vernacular in Jerusalem. Cf. also 26:14. Jo-

sephus confirms Luke on this point (War, V, 6. 3), for the people

of Jerusalem cried out τῇ πατρίῳ γλώσσῃ, and Josephus also acted

intermediary for Titus, τῇ πατρίῳ γλώσσῃ (War, VI, 2. 1). See

also 2 Macc. 7: 8, 21. Josephus wrote his War first in Aramaic

and then in Greek. The testimony of Papias that Matthew

wrote his λόγια in Aramaic bears on the question because of the

tradition that Mark was the interpreter of Peter. The brogue

that Peter revealed (Mt. 26:73) was probably due to his Gali-

lean accent of Aramaic. Aramaic was one of the languages for

the inscription on the cross (Jo. 19:20). It is clear therefore that

the Hellenizing work of Jason and Menelaus and Antiochus

Epiphanes received a set-back in Palestine. The reaction kept

Greek from becoming the one language of the country. Even in

Lycaonia the people kept their vernacular though they under-

stood Greek (Ac. 14:11). On the other hand Peter clearly spoke

in Greek on the Day of Pentecost, and no mention is made of

Greek as one of the peculiar "tongues," on that occasion. It

is clear that Paul was understood in Jerusalem when he spoke

Greek (Ac. 22:2). Jesus Himself laboured chiefly in Galilee

where were many gentiles and much commerce and travel. He

taught in Decapolis, a Greek region. He preached also in the

regions of Tyre and Sidon (Phoenicia), where Greek was neces-

sary, and he held converse with a Greek (Syro-Phcenician)

woman. Near Caesarea-Philippi (a Greek region), after the

Transfiguration, Jesus spoke to the people at the foot of the

mountain. At the time of the Sermon on the Mount Jesus ad-

dressed people from Decapolis and Perea (largely Hellenized), be-

sides the mixed multitudes from Galilee, Jerusalem and Judea

(Mt. 4:25). Luke (6:17) adds that crowds came also from Tyre

and Sidon, and Mark (3:8) gives "from Iduma." It is hardly pos-

sible that these crowds understood Aramaic. The fact that Mark


                                    NEW MATERIAL                                29

 

twice (5:41; 7:34) uses Aramaic quotations from the words of

Jesus does not prove that He always spoke in that tongue nor

that He did so only on these occasions. In Mk. 14:36,  Ἀββά ὁ

πατήρ, it is possible that Jesus may have used both words as

Paul did (Ro. 8:15). In the quotation from Ps. 22:1, spoken

on the cross, Mt. 27:46 gives the Hebrew, while Mk. 15:34

has an Aramaic adaptation. There is no reason to doubt that

Jesus knew Hebrew also. But Thomson (Temple Bible, Lang. of

Palestine) proves that Matthew gives the quotations made by

Christ in the words of the LXX, while his own quotations are

usually from the Hebrew. It is clear, therefore, that Jesus spoke

both Aramaic and Greek according to the demands of the occa-

sion and read the Hebrew as well as the Septuagint, if we may

argue from the 0. T. quotations in the Gospels which are partly

like the Hebrew text and partly like the LXX.1  In Lu. 4:17 it

is not clear whether it was the Hebrew text or the LXX that was

read in the synagogue at Nazareth.2 One surely needs no argu-

ment to see the possibility that a people may be bilingual when

he remembers the Welsh, Scotch, Irish, Bretons of the present

day.3 The people in Jerusalem understood either Greek or Ara-

maic (Ac. 22:2).

          (j) GRAMMATICAL COMMENTARIES. A word must be said Con-

cerning the new type of commentaries which accent the gram-

matical side of exegesis. This is, to be sure, the result of the

emphasis upon scientific grammar. The commentary must have

other elements besides the grammatical. Even the historical

element when added does not exhaust what is required. There

still remains the apprehension of the soul of the author to which

historical grammar is only an introduction. But distinct credit

is to be given to those commentators who have lifted this kind

of exegesis out of the merely homiletic vein. Among the older

writers are to be mentioned Meyer, Ellicott, Godet, Broadus,

Hackett, Lightfoot and Westcott, while among the more recent

commentators stand out most of the writers in the International

 

            1 See C. Taylor, The Gospel in the Law, 1869; Boehl, Alttestamentl. Cit.

im N. T., 1878; Toy, Quota. in the N. T., 1884; Huhn, Die alttestamentl.

Cit. etc., 1900; Gregory, Canon and Text of the N. T., 1907, p. 394.

            2 On the Gk. in the Tal. see art. Greek in Jew. Encyc.; Krauss, Griech.

and lat. Lehnw. im Tal.; Schurler, Jew. Hist., div. II, vol. I, p. 29 f.

            3 See Zahn, Einl. in das N. T., ch. 11. On the bilingual character of many

of the Palestinian Jews see Schurer, Jew. Peo. in the Time of Ch., div. II,

vol. I, p. 48 f.; Moulton, Prol., p. 7 f.


30       A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

Critical Commentary, Holtzmann's Hand Comm., The Expositor's

Greek Test., Swete, Mayor, G. Milligan, Lietzmann's Handbuch,

Zahn's Kommentar, The Camb. Gk. Test., etc. In works like these,

grammatical remarks of great value are found. There has been

great advance in the N. T. commentaries since Winer's day, when

these comments "were rendered useless by that uncritical empi-

ricism which controlled Greek philology."1

          V. The New Point of View. It will hardly be denied, in view

of the preceding necessarily condensed presentation of the new

material now at hand that new light has been turned upon the

problems of the N. T. Greek. The first effect upon many minds

is to dazzle and to cause confusion. Some will not know how to

assimilate the new facts and to co-ordinate them with old theories

nor be willing to form or adopt new theories as a result of the

fresh phenomena. But it is the inevitable duty of the student in

this department to welcome the new discoveries and to attack

the problems arising therefrom. The new horizon and wider out-

look make possible real progress. It will not be possible to avoid

some mistakes at first. A truer conception of the language is

now offered to us and one that will be found to be richer and more

inspiring.2 Every line of biblical study must respond to the new

discovery in language. "A new Cremer, a new Thayer-Grimm,

a new Winer will give the twentieth century plenty of editing to

keep its scholars busy. New Meyers and Alfords will have fresh

matter from which to interpret the text, and new Spurgeons and

Moodys will, we may hope, be ready to pass the new teaching

on to the people."3 The N. T. Greek is now seen to be not an

abnormal excrescence, but a natural development in the Greek

language; to be, in fact, a not unworthy part of the great stream

of the mighty tongue. It was not outside of the world-language,

but in the very heart of it and influenced considerably the future

of the Greek tongue.

 

            1 Winer, Gr. of the N. T. Idiom, Thayer's transl., p. 7.

            2 "Nun hat man aber die Sprache der heiligen Bucher mit den Papyrus-

denkmalern und den Inschriften der alexandrinischen und romischen Zeit

genau verglichen, und da hat sich die gar manchen Anhanger der alten Dok-

trin verbluffende, in Wahrheit ganz naturliche Tatsache ergeben, dass die

Sprache des N. T. nichts anderes ist als eine fur den literarischen Zweck

leicht temperierte Form des volkstumlich Griechisch." Krumbacher, Das

Prob. der neugr. Schriftspr., 1903, p. 27.

            3 J. H. Moulton, New Lights on Bibl. Gk., Bibl. World, March, 1902.

 

 


 



 

CHAPTER II:  THE HISTORICAL METHOD

 

 

          I. Language as History. The scientific grammar is at bottom

a grammatical history, and not a linguistic law-book. The seat of

authority in language is therefore not the books about language,

but the people who use the language. The majority of well-edu-

cated people determine correct usage (the mos loquendi as Horace

says). Even modern dictionaries merely record from time to

time the changing phenomena of language. Wolff was right

when he conceived of philology as the "biography of a nation."

The life of a people is expressed in the speech which they use.1

We can well agree with Benfey2 that "speech is the truest picture

of the soul of a people, the content of all that which has brought a

people to self-consciousness." However, we must not think that

we can necessarily argue race from language.3 The historical

conception of grammar has had to win its way against the purely

theoretical and speculative notion. Etymology was the work

of the philosophers. The study of the forms, the syntax, the

dialects came later. The work of the Alexandrians was originally

philology, not scientific grammar.4

          (a) COMBINING THE VARIOUS ELEMENTS. It is not indeed easy

to combine properly the various elements in the study of language.

Sayce considers Steinthal too psychological and Schleicher too

physical.5 The historical element must be added to both. Paul6

objects to the phrase "philosophy of language" as suggesting

"metaphysical speculations of which the historical investigation

 

            1 See Oertel, Lect. on the Study of Lang., 1902, p. 9 f.

            2 Kleinere Schr., 1892, 2. Bd., 4. Abt., p. 51.

            3 See Sayce, Prin. of Comp. Philol., 1875, p. 175

            4 See Kretschmer, Einl. in die Gesch. der griech. Spr., 1896, pp. 2, 3.

            5 Prin. of Comp. Philol., p. xvi.

            6 Prin. of the Hist. of Lang., 1888, p. xxi. "The truth is that the science

of which we are thinking is philosophy in the same way as physics or physi-

ology is philosophy, neither more, nor less."

 

                                                      31

 


32       A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

of language needs to take no count." He prefers the term "sci-

ence of principles." The study of language is a true science, a

real philosophy, with a psychical as well as a physical basis. It

is properly related to the historical natural sciences which have

been subject "to the misdirected attempt at excluding them

from the circle of the sciences of culture."1 Language is capable

of almost perfect scientific treatment. Kretschmer2 outlines as

modern advances over ancient grammar the psychological treat-

ment of language, the physiology of sound, the use of the com-

parative method, the historical development of the language, the

recognition of speech as a product of human culture, and not to

be separated from the history of culture, world-history and life

of the peoples. He thinks that no language has yet received such

treatment as this, for present-day handbooks are only "speech-

pictures," not "speech-histories."

          (b) PRACTICAL GRAMMAR A COMPROMISE. Historical practical

grammars have to make a compromise. They can give the whole

view only in outline and show development and interrelation in

part. It is not possible then to write the final grammar of Greek

either ancient or modern. The modern is constantly changing

and we are ever learning more of the old. What was true of

Mistriotes3 and Jannaris4 will be true of the attempts of all.

But none the less the way to study Greek is to look at it as a

history of the speech-development of one of the greatest of peo-

ples. But it is at least possible now to have the right attitude,

thanks to the books already mentioned and others by Bernhardy,5

 

            1 Prin. of the Hist. of Lang., 1888, p. xxvii. See Von Ulrich's Grundl. und

Gesch. der Philol., 1892, p. 22: " Zu der wissenschaftlichen Grammatik gesellt

sich die historische Betrachtung. Sie unterscheidet die Periodisierung der

Satze von deren loser Verknupfung, die wechselnde Bedeutung der Partikeln,

den Gebrauch der Modi und Tempora, die erfahrungsmassig festgestellten

Regeln der Syntax, den Sprachgebrauch der Schriftsteller." On the scientific

study of the Gk. language sketched historically see Wackernagel, Die Kult.

der Gegenw., Tl. I, Abt. 8, pp. 314-316.

            2 Einl. in die Gesch. der griech. Spr., pp. 3-5. He himself here merely

outlines the historical background of the Gk. language.

            3 "Κατὰ ταῦτα λοιπὸν ἡ γραμματολογία δὲν εἶναι οὖτε ἀμιγὴς ἱστορική, οὖτε

ἀμιγὴς αἰσθητικὴ ἐπιστήμη ἀλλὰ μετέχει ἀμφοτέρων."  Ἑλληνικὴ Γραμματολογία, 1894, p. 6.

            4 "As a matter of course, I do not presume to have said the last word on

all or most of these points, seeing that, even in the case of modern Gk., I

cannot be expected to master, in all its details, the entire vocabulary and

grammar of every single Neohellenic dialect." Hist. Gk. Gr., 1897, p. X.

            5 Wissensch. Synt. der griech. Spr., 1829.


                         THE HISTORICAL METHOD                        33

 

Christ,1 Wundt,2 Johannsen,3 Krumbacher,4 Schanz,5 G. Meyer,6

I. Miller,7 Hirt,8 Thumb,9 Dieterich,10 Steinthal.11  The Latin

syntax received historical treatment by Landgraf,12 not to men-

tion English and other modern languages.

               II. Language as a Living Organism.

          (a) THE ORIGIN OF LANGUAGE. Speech is indeed a character-

istic of man and may be considered a divine gift, however slowly

the gift was won and developed by him.13 Sayce is undoubtedly

correct in saying that language is a social creation and the effort

to communicate is the only true solution of the riddle of speech,

whether there was ever a speechless man or not. "Grammar has

grown out of gesture and gesticulation."14 But speech has not

created the capacities which mark the civilized man as higher

than the savage.15 Max Muller remarks that "language forms an

impassable barrier between man and beast." Growls and signs

do not constitute "intellectual symbolism."16 Paul indeed, in op-

position to Lazarus and Steinthal, urges that "every linguistic

creation is always the work of a single individual only."17 The

psychological organisms are in fact the true media of linguistic

 

            1 Gesch. der griech. Lit., 1893.

            2 Volkerpsychol., 1900, 3. Aufl., 1911 f.

            3 Beitr. zur griech. Sprachk., 1890.

            4 Beitr. zu einer Gesch. der griech. Spr., 1885.

            5 Beitr. zur hist. Synt. der griech. Spr., Bd. I–XVII.

            6 Ess. und Stud. zur Sprachgesch. und Volksk., Bd. I, II, 1885, 1893.

            7 Handb. der Altertumswiss. He edits the series (1890—).

            8 Handb. deal griech. Laut- und Formenl. Eine Einfuhr. in das sprach-

wiss. Stud. des Griech., 1902, 2. Aufl., 1912.

            9 Die griech. Spr. im Zeitaltcr des Hellen., 1901.

            10 Untersuch. zur Gesch. der griech. Spr., 1898.

            11 Gesch. der Sprachwiss. bei den Griech. und Rom., Tl. I, II, 1891.

            12 Hist. Gr. der lat. Spr., 1903. Cf. Stolz und Schmalz, Lat. Gr., 4. Aufl.,

1910; Draeger, Hist. Synt. der lat. Spr., Bd. I, II, 1878, 1881; Lindsay, The

Lat. Lang., 1894. In Bd. III of Landgraf's Gr., Golling says (p. 2) that Latin

Grammar as a study is due to the Stoics who did it "in der engsten Verbin-

dung mit der Logik." Cf. origin of Gk. Gr.

            13 See Whitney, Lang. and the Study of Lang., 1868, p. 399.

            14 Sayce, Intr. to the Sci. of Lang., vol. II, p. 301.

            15 Whitney, Darwinism and Lang., Reprint from North Am. Rev., July,

1874.

            16 Three Lect. on the Sci. of Lang., 1891, p. 9. See also The Silesian Horse-

herd: "Language and thought go hand in hand; where there is as yet no

word, there is as yet no idea." Many of the writers on animals do not

accept this doctrine.

            17 Prin. of the Hist. of Lang., p. xliii.


34    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

development. Self-observation and analogy help one to strike a

general average and so make grammar practical as well as scien-

tific.

          (b) EVOLUTION IN LANGUAGE. Growth, then, is to be expected

in a living tongue. Change is inseparable from life. No language

is dead so long as it is undergoing change, and this must be true

in spoken and written usage. It is not the function of the gram-

marian to stop change in language, a thing impossible in itself.

Such change is not usually cataclysmic, but gradual and varied.

"A written language, to serve any practical purpose, must change

with the times, just like a living dialect."1 In general, change

in usage may be compared to change in organic structure in

"greater or lesser fitness."2 The changes by analogy in the

speech of children are very suggestive on this point. The vocab-

ulary of the Greek tongue must therefore continually develop,

for new ideas demand new words and new meanings come to old

words. Likewise inflections vary in response to new movements.

This change brings great wealth and variety. The idea of prog-

ress has seized the modern mind and has been applied to the

study of language as to everything else.

          (c) CHANGE CHIEFLY IN THE VERNACULAR. Linguistic change

occurs chiefly in the vernacular. From the spoken language new

words and new inflections work their way gradually into the

written style, which is essentially conservative, sometimes even

anachronistic and purposely archaic. Much slang is finally ac-

cepted in the literary style. The study of grammar was originally

confined to the artificial book-style. Dionysius Thrax expressly

defined grammar as ἐμπειρία τῶν παρὰ ποιηταῖς τε καὶ συγγραφεῦσιν

ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ λεγομένων. It was with him a concern for the

poets and writers, not "die Sprache des Lebens."3 Grammar

(γραμματική, γράφω), then, was first to write and to understand

what was written; then the scientific interpretation of this litera-

ture; later the study of literary linguistic usage. It is only the

moderns who have learned to investigate the living speech for

its own historical value. Before the discovery of the Greek in-

scriptions the distinction between the vernacular and the literary

style could not be so sharply drawn for the Greek of the classical

 

            1 Paul, Prin. of the Hist. of Lang., p. 481.

            2 Ib., p. 13. Kuhner speaks of "das organische Leben der Sprache" and

of "ein klares, anschauliches und lebensvolles Bild des grossen und kraftig

bluhenden Sprachbaums." Ausfuhrl. Gr. der griech. Spr., 1. Bd., 1890, p.

            3 Kretschmer, Einl. in die Gesch. der griech. Spr., 1896, pp. 3-5.


                          THE HISTORICAL METHOD                          35

 

period, though Aristophanes should have taught us much. We

have moved away from the position of Mure1 who said:  "The

distinction between the language of letters and the vulgar tongue,

so characteristic of modern civilization, is imperceptible or but

little defined in the flourishing age of Greece. Numerous peculi-

arities in her social condition tended to constitute classical ex-

pression in speaking or writing, not, as with us, the privilege of a

few, but a public property in which every Hellene had an equal

interest." The people as a whole were wonderfully well educated,

but the educated classes themselves then, as now with us, used a

spoken as well as a literary style. Jannaris2 is clear on this point:

"But, speaking of Attic Greek, we must not infer that all Athe-

nians and Atticized Greeks wrote and spoke the classical Attic

portrayed in the aforesaid literature, for this Attic is essentially

what it still remains in modern Greek composition: a merely

historical abstraction; that is, an artistic language which nobody

spoke but still everybody understood." We must note therefore

both the vernacular and the literary style and expect constant

change in each, though not in the same degree. Zarncke indeed

still sounds a note of warning against too much attention to the

vernacular; though a needless one.3  In the first century A.D. the

vernacular Greek was in common use all over the world, the char-

acter of which we can now accurately set forth. But this non-

literary language was not necessarily the speech of the illiterate.

Mahaffy4 is very positive on this point. "I said just now that

the Hellenistic world was more cultivated in argument than we

are nowadays. And if you think this is a strange assertion, ex-

amine, I pray you, the intellectual aspects of the Epistles of St.

Paul, the first Christian writer whom we know to have been thor-

oughly educated in this training. Remember that he was a practi-

cal teacher, not likely to commit the fault of speaking over the

heads of his audience, as the phrase is." Hatzidakis5 laments that

the monuments of the Greek since the Alexandrian period are no

longer in the pure actual living speech of the time, but in the ar-

 

            1 A Crit. Hist. of the Lang. and Lit. of Anc. Greece, 1850, vol. I, p. 117.

            2 Op. cit., 1897, p. 3 f.

            3  Die Entst. der griech. Literaturspr., 1890, p. 2: "Denn man liefe Gefahr,

den Charakter der Literaturdenkmaler ganzlich zu zerstoren, indem man,

ihre eigenartige Gestaltung verkennend, sie nach den Normen einer gespro-

chenen Mundart corrigirt." But see Lottich, De Serm. vulg. Att., 1881; and

Apostolides, op. cit.

            4 Prog. of Hellen. in Alex. Emp., 1905, p. 137.

            5  Einleitung, p. 3.


36       A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

tificial Attic of a bygone age. The modern Greek vernacular is

a living tongue, but the modern literary language so proudly

called καθαρεύουσα is artificial and unreal.1 This new conception

of language as life makes it no longer possible to set up the Greek

of any one period as the standard for all time. The English

writer to-day who would use Hooker's style would be affected

and anachronistic. Good English to-day is not what it was two

hundred years ago, even with the help of printing and (part of

the time) dictionaries. What we wish to know is not what

was good Greek at Athens in the days of Pericles, but what was

good Greek in Syria and Palestine in the first century A.D. The

direct evidence for this must be sought among contemporaries,

not from ancestors in a distant land. It is the living Greek that

we desire, not the dead.

               III. Greek not an Isolated Language.

          (a) THE IMPORTANCE OF COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR. Julius

Caesar, who wrote a work on grammar, had in mind Latin and Greek, for

both were in constant use in the Roman world.2 Formal Sanskrit

grammar itself may have resulted from the comparison of San-

skrit with the native dialects of India.3 Hence comparative

grammar seems to lie at the very heart of the science. It cannot

be said, however, that Painini, the great Sanskrit scholar and

grammarian of the fourth century B.C., received any impulse.

from the Greek civilization of Alexander the Great.4 The  work

of Panini is one of the most remarkable in history for subtle orig-

inality, "une histoire naturelle de la langue sanscrite." The

Roman and Greek grammarians attended to the use of words

sentences, while the Sanskrit writers analyzed words into syl-

lables5 and studied the relation of sounds to each other. It is

not possible to state the period when linguistic comparison was

first made. Max Muller in The Science of Language even says:

"From an historical point of view it is not too much to say that

the first Day of Pentecost marks the real beginning of the Science

of language." One must not think that the comparative method

is "more characteristic of the study of language than of other

 

            1 "Eine Literatursprache ist nie eine Art Normalsprache." Schwyzer,

Weltspr. des Altert., 1902, p. 12.

            2 King, Intr. to Comp. Gr., p. 2.

            3 Sayce, Prin. of Comp. Philol., p. 261.

            4 Goblet d'Alviella, Ce que 1'Inde doit a la Grece, 1897, p. 129.

            5 King, op. cit., p. 2 f. "The method of comparative grammar is merely

auxiliary to historical grammar," Wheeler, Whence and Whither of the

Mod. Sci. of Lang., p. 96.


                       THE HISTORICAL METHOD                       37

 

branches of modern inquiry."1  The root idea of the new gram-

mar is the kinship of languages. Chinese grammar is said to be

one of the curiosities of the world, and some other grammatical

works can be regarded in that light. But our fundamental obli-

gation is to the Hindu and Greek grammarians.2

          (b) THE COMMON BOND IN LANGUAGE. Prof. Alfredo Trom-

betti, of Rome, has sought the connecting link in all human

speech.3  It is a gigantic task, but it is doubtless true that all

speech is of ultimate common origin. The remote relationships

are very difficult to trace. As a working hypothesis the compara-

tive grammarians speak of isolating, agglutinative and inflectional

languages. In the isolating tongues like the Chinese, Burmese,

etc., the words have no inflection and the position in the sen-

tence and the tone in pronunciation are relied on for clearness

of meaning. Giles4 points out that modern English and Persian

have nearly returned to the position of Chinese as isolating lan-

guages. Hence it is inferred that the Chinese has already gone

through a history similar to the English and is starting again on

an inflectional career. Agglutinative tongues like the Turkish ex-

press the various grammatical relations by numerous separable

prefixes, infixes and suffixes. Inflectional languages have made

still further development, for while a distinction is made between

the stem and the inflexional endings, the stems and the endings

do not exist apart from each other. There are two great families

in the inflexional group, the Semitic (the Assyrian, the Hebrew,

the Syriac, the Arabic, etc.) and the Indo-Germanic or Indo-Euro-

pean (the Indo-Iranian or Aryan, the Armenian, the Greek, the

Albanian, the Italic, the Celtic, the Germanic and the Balto-

Slavic).5 Ind -European also are Illyrian, Macedonian, Phrygian,

Thracian and the newly-discovered Tocharian. Some of these

groups, like the Italic, the Germanic, the Balto-Slavic, the Indo-

Iranian, embrace a number of separate tongues which show an

inner affinity, but all the groups have a general family likeness.6

 

            1 Whitney, Life and Growth of Lang., 1875—, p. 315.

            2 F. Hoffmann, Uber die Entwickel. des Begriffs der Gr. bei den Alten,

1891, p. 1.       

            3 See his book, The Unity of Origin of Lang. Dr. Allison Drake, Disc. in

Heb., Gaelic, Gothic, Anglo-Sax., Lat., Basque and other Caucasic Lang.,

1908, undertakes to show "fundamental kinship of the Aryan tongues and

of Basque with the Semitic tongues."

            4 Man. of Comp. Philol., 1901, p. 36.

            5 Brugmann, Kurze vergl. Or. der indoger. Spr., 1. Lief., 1902, p. 4.

            6 See Misteli, Characteristik der hauptsachlichsten Typen des Sprach-


38      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

          (c) THE ORIGINAL INDO-GERMANIC SPEECH. It is not claimed

that the original Indo-Germanic speech has been discovered,

though Kretschmer does speak of "die indogermanische Ur-

sprache," but he considers it only a necessary hypothesis and a

useful definition for the early speech-unity before the Indo-Ger-

manic stock separated.1 Brugmann speaks also of the original

and ground-speech (Ur- and Grundsprache) in the prehistoric back-

ground of every member of the Indo-Germanic family.2 The

science of language has as a historic discipline the task of inves-

tigating the collective speech-development of the Indo-Germanic

peoples.3 Since Bopp's day this task is no longer impossible. The

existence of an original Indo-Germanic speech is the working

hypothesis of all modern linguistic study. This demands indeed

a study of the Indo-Germanic people. Horatio Hale4 insists that

language is the only proper basis for the classification of man-

kind. But this test breaks down when Jews and Egyptians speak

Greek after Alexander's conquests or when the Irish and the

American Negro use English. The probable home and wander-

ings of the original Indo-Germanic peoples are well discussed by

Kretschmer.5 It is undeniable that many of the same roots exist

in slightly different forms in all or most of the Indo-Germanic

tongues. They are usually words that refer to the common do-

mestic relations, elementary agriculture, the ordinary articles of

food, the elemental forces, the pronouns and the numerals. In-

flexional languages have two kinds of roots, predicative (nouns

and verbs) and pronominal. Panini found 1706 such roots in

Sanskrit, but Edgren has reduced the number of necessary San-

skrit roots to 587.6 But one must not suppose that these hypo-

thetical roots ever constituted a real language, though there was

an original Indo-Germanic tongue.7

 

baues, 1893. For further literature on comparative grammar see pp. 10 ff.

of this book. There is an English translation of Brugmann's Bde. I and II

called Elements of the Comp. Gr. of the Indo-Ger. Lang., 5 vols., 1886-97.

But his Kurze vergl. Gr. (1902-4) is the handiest edition. Meillet (Intr.

l'Etude Comp. etc., pp. 441-455) has a discriminating discussion of the litera-

ture.

            1 Einl. in die Gesch. der griech. Spr., 1896, pp. 7-9.

            2 Kurze vergl. Gr., 1. Lief., 1902, p. 3.

            3 Ib., p. 27.

            4 Pop. Sci. Rev., Jan., 1888.

            5 Einl. in die Gesch. etc., pp. 7-92.

            6 See Max Muller, Three Lect. on the Sci. of Lang., 1891, p. 29.

            7 Sayce, Prin. of Comp. 1875, p. vi.


                         THE HISTORICAL METHOD                              39

 

               (d) GREEK AS A " DIALECT" OF THE INDO-GERMANIC SPEECH.

Greek then can be regarded as one of the branches of this original

Indo-Germanic speech, just as French is one of the descendants of

the Latin,1 like Spanish, Portuguese, Italian. Compare also the re-

lation of English to the other Teutonic tongues.2 To go further,

the separation of this original Indo-Germanic speech into various

tongues was much like the breaking-up of the original Greek into

dialects and was due to natural causes. Dialectic variety itself

implies previous speech-unity.3 Greek has vital relations with all

the branches of the Indo-Germanic tongues, though in varying

degrees. The Greek shows decided affinity with the Sanskrit, the

Latin and the Celtic4 languages. Part of the early Greek stock

was probably Celtic. The Greek and the Latin flourished side by

side for centuries and had much common history. All the com-

parative grammars and the Greek grammars from this point of

view constantly compare the Greek with the Latin. See especially

the great work of Riemann and Goelzer, Grammaire comparee

du Grec et du Latin.5 On the whole subject of the relation of the

Greek with the various Indo-Germanic languages see the excel-

lent brief discussion of Kretschmer.6 But the hypothesis of an

original Graeco-Italic tongue cannot be considered as proved,

though there are many points of contact between Greek and

Latin.7 But Greek, as the next oldest branch known to us,

shows more kinship with the Sanskrit. Constant use of the San-

skrit must be made by one who wishes to understand the

historical development of the Greek tongue. Such a work as

Whitney's Sanskrit Grammar is very useful for this purpose.

See also J. Wackernagel, Altindische Grammatik. I, Lautlehre

(1896). II, 1, Einleitung zur Wortlehre (1905). So Thumb's

 

            1 See Meyer-Ltibke, Gr. der rom. Spr., 3 Bde., 1890, 1894, 1899.

            2 See Hirt, Handb. der griech. Laut- and Formenl., 2d ed., 1912, p. 13.

Cf. Donaldson, New Crat., p. 112 (Ethn. Affin. of the Anc. Greeks).

            3 Whitney, Lang. and the Study of Lang., 1868, p. 185. See Brugmann,

Griech. Gr., p. 5: "Die griechische, lateinische, indische u.s.w. Grammatik

sind die konstitutiven Teile der indogermanischen Grammatik in gleicher

Weise, wie z. B. die dorische, die ionische u.s.w. Grammatik die griechische

Grammatik ausmachen."

            4 See Holder, Altcelt. Sprachsch., 1891 ff.

            5 Synt., 1897. Phonet. et Et. des Formes Grq. et Lat., 1901.

            6 Einl. in die Cesch. der griech. Spr., pp. 153-170.

            7 Prof. B. L. Gildersleeve, Johns Hopkins Univ., has always taught Greek,

but his Latin Grammar shows his fondness for Latin. See also Henry, A

Short Comp. Gr. of Gk. and Lat., 1890, and A Short Comp. Gr. of Eng. and

Ger., 1893.


40      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

Handbuch des Sanskrit. I, Grammatik (1905). Max Muller1

playfully remarks: "It has often been said that no one can know

anything of the science of language who does not know Sanskrit,  

and that is enough to frighten anybody away from its study."

It is not quite so bad, however. Sanskrit is not the parent stock

of the Greek, but the oldest member of the group. The age of

the Sanskrit makes it invaluable for the study of the later speech-

developments.

          The Greek therefore is not an isolated tongue, but sustains vital

relations with a great family of languages. So important does

Kretschmer consider this aspect of the subject that he devotes

his notable Einleitung in die Geschichte der griechischen Sprache

to the setting forth of "the prehistoric beginnings of the Greek

speech-development."2 This effort is, of necessity, fragmentary

and partly inferential, but most valuable for a scientific treat-

ment of the Greek language. He has a luminous discussion of the

effect of the Thracian and Phrygian stocks upon the Greek when

the language spread over Asia Minor.3

          IV. Looking at the Greek Language as a Whole. We cannot

indeed make an exhaustive study of the entire Greek language in

a book that is professedly concerned only with one epoch of that  

history.  As a matter of fact no such work exists. Jannaris4 in-

deed said that "an ‘historical’ grammar, tracing in a connected

manner the life of the Greek language from classical antiquity to

the present time, has not been written nor even seriously at-

tempted as yet." Jannaris himself felt his limitations when he

faced so gigantic a task and found it necessary to rest his work

upon the classical Attic as the only practical basis.5 But so far

 

            1 Three Lect. on the Sci. of Lang., 1891, p. 72.

            2 P. 5. Prof. Burrows (Disc. in Crete, 1907, pp. 145 ff.) raises the question

whether the Greek race (a blend of northern and southern elements) made

the Gk. language out of a pre-existing Indo-European tongue. Or did the

northerners bring the Gk. with them? Or did they find it already in the

AEgean? It is easier to ask than to answer these questions.

            3 See pp. 171-243.                                 4 Hist. Gk. Gr., 1897, p. v.

            5 Ib., p. xi. Thumb says: "Wir sind noch sehr weit von einer Geschichte

oder historischen Grammatik der griechischen Sprache entfernt; der Ver-

such von Jannaris, so dankenswert er ist, kann doch nur provisorische Gel-

tung beanspruchen, wobei man mehr die gute Absicht and den Fleiss als  das

sprachgeschichtliche Verstandnis des Verfassers loben muss." Die griech.

Spr., etc., 1901, p. 1. Cf. also Krumbacher, Beitr. zu einer Gesch. der griech.

Spr. (1884, p. 4): "Eine zusammenhangende Darstellung des Entwickelungs-

ganges der griechischen Sprache ist gegenwartig nicht moglich." But it is

more possible now than in 1884.


                      THE HISTORICAL METHOD                           41

 

he departed from the pure historical method. But such a gram-

mar will come some day.

          (a) DESCRIPTIVE HISTORICAL GRAMMAR. Meanwhile descriptive

historical grammar is possible and necessary. "Descriptive gram-

mar has to register the grammatical forms and grammatical con-

ditions in use at a given date within a certain community speaking

a common language."1 There is this justification for taking

Attic as the standard for classical study; only the true historical

perspective should be given and Attic should not be taught as

the only real Greek. It is possible and essential then to correlate

the N. T. Greek with all other Greek and to use all Greek to

throw light on the stage of the language under review. If the

Greek itself is not an isolated tongue, no one stage of the lan-

guage can be so regarded. "Wolff2 deprecates the restriction of

grammar to a set of rules abstracted from the writings of a

‘golden’ period, while in reality it should comprise the whole his-

tory of a language and trace its development." H. C. Muller3

indeed thought that the time had not arrived for a grammar of

Greek on the historical plan, because it must rest on a greater

amount of material than is now at hand. But since then a vast

amount of new material has come to light in the form of papyri,

inscriptions and research in the modern Greek. Miller's own

book has added no little to our knowledge of the subject. Mean-

while we can use the historical material for the study of N. T.

Greek.

          (b) UNITY OE THE GREEK LANGUAGE. At the risk of slight repe-

tition it is worth while to emphasize this point. Muller4 is apolo-

getic and eager to show that "the Greek language and literature

is one organic, coherent whole." The dialectical variations, while

confusing to a Certain extent, do not show that the Greek did not

possess original and continuous unity. As early as 1000 B.C. these

dialectical distinctions probably existed and the speech of Homer

is a literary dialect, not the folk-speech.5 The original sources of

 

            1 Paul, Prin. o the Hist. of Lang., 1888, p. 2.

            2 Oertel, Lect. bn the Study of Lang., 1902, p. 27. Thumb (Theol. Litera-

turzeit., 1903, p. 424) expresses the hope that in a future edition of his Gr.

des N. T., Blass may do this for his book:  "Die Sprache des N. T. auf dem

grossen Hintergrund der hellenistischen Sprachentwicklung beschreiben zu

konnen."                                  3 Hist. Gr. der hell. Spr., 1891, p. 14 f.

            4 Ib., p. 16. Op "die griechische Sprache als Einheit" see Thumb's able

discussion in Handb. d. griech. Dial. (pp. 1-12). With all the diversity of

dialects there was essential unity in comparison with other tongues.

            5 Brugmann, Vergl. Gr., 1902, p. 8.


42     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

the Greek speech go back to a far distant time when as one single

language an Asiatic idiom had taken Europe in its circle of in-

fluence.1 The translator of Buttmann's Greek Grammar speaks

of Homer "almost as the work of another language." This was

once a common opinion for all Greek that was not classic Attic.

But Thiersch entitled his great work Griechische Grammatik vor-

zuglich des homerischen Dialekts, not simply because of the worth

of Homer, "but because, on the contrary, a thorough knowledge

of the Homeric dialect is indispensably necessary for those who

desire to comprehend, in their whole depth and compass, the

Grecian tongue and literature."2 But Homer is not the gauge by

which to test Greek; his poems are invaluable testimony to the

early history of one stage of the language. It is a pity that we

know so little of the pre-Homeric history of Greek. "Homer pre-

sents not a starting-point, but a culmination, a complete achieve-

ment, an almost mechanical accomplishment, with scarcely a

hint of origins."3 But whenever Greek began it has persisted as a

linguistic unit till now. It is one language whether we read the

Epic Homer, the Doric Pindar, the Ionic Herodotus, the Attic

Xenophon, the AEolic Sappho, the Atticistic Plutarch, Paul the

exponent of Christ, an inscription in Pergamus, a papyrus letter

in Egypt, Tricoupis or Vlachos in the modern time. None of

these representatives can be regarded as excrescences or imperti-

nences. There have always been uneducated persons, but the

Greek tongue has had a continuous, though checkered, history all

the way. The modern educated Greek has a keen appreciation of

"die Schonheiten der klassischen Sprache."4 Muller5 complained

that "almost no grammarians have treated the Greek language

as a whole," but the works of Krumbacher, Thumb, Dieterich,

Hatzidakis, Psichari, Jannaris, etc., have made it possible to ob-

tain a general survey of the Greek language up to the present

time. Like English,6 Greek has emerged into a new sphere of

unity and consistent growth.

 

            1 Kretschmer, Einl. in die Gesch. der griech. Spr., 1896, p. 6. On the un-

mixed character of the Gk. tongue see Wackernagel, Die griech. Spr., p. 294,

Tl. I, Abt. 8 (Die Kult. der Gegenw.). On the antiquity of Gk. see p. 292 f.

            2 Sandford, Pref. to Thiersch's Gk. Gr., 1830, p. viii.

            3 Miss Harrison, Prol. to the Study of Gk. Rel., 1903, p. vii.

            4 Hatzidakis, Einl. in die neugr. Gr., 1892, p. 4.

            5 Hist. Gr. der hell. Spr., 1891, p. 2.

            6 See John Koch, Eng. Gr., for an admirable bibliography of works on Eng.

(in Ergeb. and Fortschr. der germanist. Wiss. im letzten Vierteljahrh., 1902,

pp. 89-138, 325-437). The Germans have taught us how to study English!


43                  THE HISTORICAL METHOD

 

          (c) PERIODS OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. It will be of service to

present a brief outline of the history of the Greek tongue. And

yet it is not easy to give. See the discussion by Sophocles in his

Greek Lexicon (p. 11f.), inadequate in view of recent discoveries

by Schliemann and Evans. The following is a tentative outline:

The Mycenaean Age, 1500 B.C. to 1000 B.C.; the Age of the Dia-

lects, 1000 B.C. to 300 B.C.; the Age of the Κοινή, 300 B.C. to 330

A.D.; the Byzantine Greek, 330 A.D. to 1453 A.D.; the modern

Greek, 1453 A.D. to the present time. The early stage of the

Byzantine Greek up to 600 A.D.) is really κοινή and the rest is

modern Greek. See a different outline by Jannaris1 and Hadley

and Allen.2 As a matter of fact any division is arbitrary, for

the language has had an unbroken history, though there are

these general epoc is in that history. We can no longer call the

pre-Homeric time mythical as Sophocles does.3  In naming this

the Mycenaean age we do not wish to state positively that the

Mycenaeans were Greeks and spoke Greek. "Of their speech we

have yet to read the first syllable."4 Tsountas5 and Manatt,

however, venture to believe that they were either Greeks or of

the same stock. They use the term "to designate all Greek

peoples who share in the Mycenaean civilization, irrespective of

their habitat."6 Ohnefalsch-Richter (Cont. Rev., Dec., 1912,

p. 862) claims Cyprus as the purveyor of culture to the Creto-

Mycenan age.  He claims that Hellenes lived in Cyprus 1200 to

1000 B.C. The Mycenaean influence was wide-spread and comes

"down to the very dawn of historical Greece."7  That Greek was

known and used widely during the Mycenaean age the researches

of Evans at Knossos, in Crete, make clear.8  The early linear

 

            1 Hist. Gk. Gr., p. xxii. Cf. also Schuckburgh, Greece, 1906, p. 24 f.

Moulton (Prol., p. 184) counts 32 centuries of the Gk. language from 1275

B.C., the date of the mention of the Achmans on an Egyptian monument.

            2 Gk. Gr., 1885, p. 1f. Deissmann indeed would have only three divisions,

the Dialects up to 301 B.C., Middle Period up to 600 A.D., and Mod. Gk. up

to the present time. Hauck's Realencyc., 1889, p. 630. Cf. Muller, Hist.

Gr. der hell. Spr., 189 , pp. 42-62, for another outline.

            3 Gk. Lex., etc., p. 11.

            4 Tsountas and Manatt, The Mycenaean Age, 1897, p. 316.

            5 Ib., p. 335 ff.

            6 Ib., p. 235.

            7 Ib., p. 325. See also Beloch, Griech. Gesch., I., 85: "Auch sonst kann

kein Zweif el sein, dass die mykendische Kultur in Griechenland bis in das

VIII. Jahrhundert geherrscht." Flinders-Petrie (Jour. of Hell. Stud., xii,

204) speaks of 1100 to 800 B.C. as the "age of Mycenaean decadence."

            8 Cretan Pictographs and Pre-Phoenician Script, 1895, p. 362; cf. also


44       A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

writing of the Cretans came from a still earlier pictograph. The

Greek dialects emerge into light from about 1000 B.C. onward and

culminate in the Attic which flourished till the work of Alexander

is done. The Homeric poems prove that Greek was an old language

by 1000 to 800 B.C. The dialects certainly have their roots deep

in the Mycenaean age. Roughly, 300 B.C. is the time when the

Greek has become the universal language of the world, a Welt-

sprache. 330 A.D. is the date when the seat of government was re-

moved from Rome to Constantinople, while A.D. 1453 is the date

when Constantinople was captured by the Turks. With all the

changes in this long history the standards of classicity have not

varied greatly from Homer till now in the written style, while

the Greek vernacular to-day is remarkably like the earliest known

inscriptions of the folk-speech in Greece.1 We know something

of this history for about 3000 years, and it is at least a thousand

years longer. Mahaffy has too poor an idea of modern Greek,

but even he can say: "Even in our miserable modern pigeon-

Greek, which represents no real pronunciation, either ancient or

modern, the lyrics of Sophocles or Aristophanes are unmistakably

lovely."2

          (d) MODERN GREEK IN PARTICULAR. It is important to single out

the modern Greek vernacular3 from the rest of the language for

the obvious reason that it is the abiding witness to the perpetuity

of the vernacular Greek as a living organism. It is a witness

also that is at our service always. The modern Greek popular

speech does not differ materially from the vernacular Byzantine,

and thus connects directly with the vernacular κοινή. Alexandria

was "the great culture-reservoir of the Greek-Oriental world . . .

the repository of the ancient literary treasures."4 With this

 

Jour. of Hell. Stud., xiv, 270-372. See Jannaris, Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 22, for fur-

ther proofs of the antiquity of Gk. as a written tongue. Mosso (Palaces of

Crete, 1907, p. 73 f.) argues that the Mycenaean linear script was used 1900

B.C. Cf. Evans, Further Researches, 1898.

            1 Brugmann, Griech. Gr., p. 13. See also Hatzidakis, Einl. in die neugr.

Gr., 1892, p. 3.

            2 Survey of Gk. Civiliz., 1896, p. 209. Cf. further Mosso, Dawn of Civiliz.

in Crete, 1910; Baike, Kings of Crete, 1910; Firmen, Zeit und Dauer der

kretisch- myken. Kult., 1909.

            3 The modern literary language (καθαρεύουσα) is really more identical with

the ancient classical Gk. But it is identity secured by mummifying the dead.

It is identity of imitation, not identity of life. Cf. Thumb-Angus, Handb. of

Mod. Gk. Vern., Foreword (p. xi f.).

            4 Dieterich, Gesch. der byz. und neugr. Lit., 1902, p. 2.


                    THE HISTORICAL METHOD                          45

 

general position Thumb heartily agrees.1 Hatzidakis2 even says:

"The language generally spoken to-day in the towns differs less

from the common language of Polybius than this last differs from

the language Homer." Since this is true it at first seems odd

that the students at the University of Athens should object so

much to the translation of the N. T. into the modern vernacular.

They forget that the N. T. is itself written in the vernacular

κοινή. But that was so long ago that it is now classic to them.

Certainly in the Gospels, as Wellhausen3 insists, the spoken

Greek became literature. Knowledge of the modern Greek4 helps

the student to escape from "the Procrustean bed of the old

Greek" which he learned as a fixed and dead thing.5 It is prob-

able that Roger Bacon had some Byzantine manual besides the

old Greek grammars.6 "In England, no less than in the rest of

Western Europe, the knowledge of Greek had died away, and

here also, it was only after the conquest of Constantinople that a

change was possible."7 Western Christians had been afraid of

the corruptions of paganism if they knew Greek, and of Moham-

medanism if they knew Hebrew (being kin to Arabic!). But at

last a change has come in favour of the modern Greek. Boltz in-

deed has advocated modern Greek as the common language for

the scholars of the World since Latin is so little spoken.8 There is

indeed need of a new world-speech, as Greek was in the N. T.

times, but there is no language that can now justly make such a

claim. English comes nearer to it than any other. This need

has given rise to the artificial tongues like Volaptik and Espe-

 

            1 "Die heutige griechische Volkssprache ist die nattirliche Fortsetzung der

alten Κοινή." Die neugr. Spr., 1892, p. 8. See Heilmeier's book on the Ro-

maic Gk. (1834), who first saw this connection between the mod. vern. and

the vern. κοινή.

            2 Transl. by J. H. Moulton in Gr. of N. T. Gk., 1906 and 1908, p. 30, from

Rev. des Et. Grq., 1903, p. 220. Cf. Krumbacher, Das Prob. der neugr.

Scluiftspr., 1902.                                  3 Einl. in die drei ersten Evang., 1905, p. 9.

            4 See Ruger, Prap. bei Joh. Antiochenus, 1896, p. 7.

            5 Thumb, Handb. der neugr. Volkspr., 1895, p. x.

            6 Roger Bacon's Gk. Gr., edited by Nolan and Hirsch, 1902, p. lx f.

            7 Ib., p. xlii.

            8 Hell. die internat. Gelehrtenspr. der Zukunft, 1888. Likewise A. Rose:

"Die griechische Sprache . . . hat . . . eine glanzende Zukunft vor sich."

Die Griechen and ihre Spr., 1890, p. 4. He pleads for it as a "Weltsprache,"

p. 271. But Schwyzer pointedly says: "Die Rolle einer Weltsprache wird

das Griechische nicht wieder spielen." Weltspr. des Altert., 1902, p. 38. Cf.

also A. Bolt; Die hell. Spr. der Gegenw., 1882, and Gk. the Gen. Lang. of

the Future for Scholars.


46     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

ranto,1 the latter having some promise in it. But the modern

Greek vernacular has more merit than was once conceded to it.

The idioms and pronunciation of the present-day vernacular are

often seen in the manuscripts of the N. T. and other Greek docu-

ments and much earlier in inscriptions representing one or an-

other of the early dialects. The persistence of early English forms

is easily observed in the vernacular in parts of America or Eng-

land. In the same way the late Latin vernacular is to be compared

with the early Latin vernacular, not with the Latin of elegant

literature. "Speaking generally, we may say that the Greek of a

well-written newspaper [the literary language] is now, as a rule,

far more classical than the Hellenistic of the N. T., but decidedly

less classical than the Greek of Plutarch."2 What the rela-

tion between the N. T. Greek and the modern Greek is will be

shown in the next chapter. It should be noted here that the

N. T. Greek had a strong moulding influence on the Byzantine,

and so on the modern Greek because of the use of the Greek New

Testament all over the world, due to the spread of Christianity

throughout the Roman Empire.3 The great Christian preachers

did not indeed use a peculiar ecclesiastical Greek, but the N. T.

did tend to emphasize the type of κοινή in which it was writter

"The diction of the N. T. had a direct influence in moulding

the Greek ordinarily used by Christians in the succeeding cen-

turies."4 Compare the effect of the King James Version on the

English language and of Luther's translation of the Bible on

German.

          V. The Greek Point of View. It sounds like a truism to

insist that the Greek idiom must be explained from the Greek

point of view. But none the less the caution is not superfluous.

Trained linguists may forget it and so commit a grammatical

vice. Even Winer5 will be found saying, for instance:  "Appel-

latives which, as expressing definite objects, should naturally

 

            1 Cf. J. C. O'Connor, Esperanto Text-book, and Eng.-Esper. Dict.

            2 Jebb, On the Rela. of Mod. to Class. Gk., in Vincent ands Dickson's

Handb. to Mod. Gk., 1887, p. 294. Blass actually says: "Der Sprachge-

brauch des Neuen Testaments, der vielfaltig vom Neugriechischen her eine

viel bessere Beleuchtung empfangt als aus der alten klassischen Literatur."

Kuhner's Ausf. Gr. etc., 1890, p. 25. Blass also says (ib., p. 26) that "eine

wissenschaftliche neugriechische Grammatik fehlt." But Hatzidakis and

others have written since.

            3 See Reinhold, De Graecitate Patrum, 1898.

            4 Jebb, ib., p. 290.

            5 Gr. of the N. T. Gk., Moulton's transl., 1877, p. 147.


                    THE HISTORICAL METHOD                       47

 

have the article, are in certain cases used without it." That

"should" has the wrong attitude toward Greek. The appel-

lative in Greek does not need to have the article in order to be

definite. So when Winer often admits that one tense is used

"for" another, he is really thinking of German and how it would

be expressed in German. Each tongue has its own history and

genius. Parallel idioms may or may not exist in a group of lan-

guages. Sanskrit and Latin, for instance, have no article. It is

not possible to parallel the Hebrew tenses, for example, with the

Greek, nor, indeed, can it be done as between Greek and English.

The English translation of a Greek aorist may have to be in the

past perfect or the present perfect to suit the English usage, but

that proves nothing as to how a Greek regarded the aorist tense.

We must assume in a language that a good writer knew how to

use his own tongue and said what he meant to say. Good Greek

may be very poor English, as when Luke uses ἐν τῷ εἰσαγαγεῖν τοὺς

γονεῖς τὸ παιδίον  Ἰησοῦν (Lu. 2:27). A literal translation of this

neat Greek idiom makes barbarous English. The Greeks simply

did not look at this clause as we do. "One of the commonest and

gravest errors in studying the grammar of foreign languages is

to make a half-conjectural translation, and then reason back

from our own language to the meaning of the original; or to ex-

plain some idiom of the original by the formally different idiom

which is our substantial equivalent."1 Broadus was the greatest

teacher of language that I have known and he has said nothing

truer than this.  After all, an educated Greek knew what he

meant better than we do. It is indeed a great and difficult task

that is demanded of the Greek grammarian who to-day under-

takes to present a living picture of the orderly development of

the Greek tongue "zu einem schonert and grorren Ganzen” and

also show "in the most beautiful light the flower of the Greek

spirit and life.”2 Deissmann3 feels strongly on the subject of the  

neglect of the literary development of Primitive Christianity, "a

 

            1 Broadus, Comm. on Mt., 1886, p. 316. See also Gerber, Die Spr. als

Kunst, 1. Bd., 18'1, p. 321: "Der ganze Charakter dieser oder jener Sprache

ist der Abdruck der Natur des Landes, wo sie gesprochen wird. Die griechi-

sche Sprache ist der griechische Himmel selbst mit seiner tiefdunklen Blaue,

die sick in dem sanft wogenden agaischen Meere spiegelt."

            2 Kuhner, Aus Gr. der griech. Spr., 1834, p. iv. How much more so

now!

            3 Expos. Time , Dec., 1906, p. 103. Cf. also F. Overbeck, Hist. Zeitschr.,

neue Folge, 1882, p. 429 ff.


48      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

subject which has not yet been recognized by many persons in its

full importance. Huge as is the library of books that have been

written on the origin of the N. T. and of its separate parts, the

N. T. has not often been studied by historians of literature; that

is to say, as a branch of the history of ancient literature."



 

 

 

CHAPTER III:   THE ΚΟΙΝΗ

 

          The Greek of the N. T. has many streams that flow into it.

But this fact is not a peculiarity of this phase of the language.

The κοινή itself has this characteristic in a marked degree. If

one needs further examples, he can recall how composite English

is, not only combining various branches of the Teutonic group,

but also incorporating much of the old Celtic of Britain and re-

ceiving a tremendous impress from the Norman-French (and so

Latin), not to mention the indirect literary influence of Latin and

Greek. The early Greek itself was subject to non-Greek influ-

ence as other Indo-Germanic tongues were, and in particular from

the side of the Thracians and Phrygians in the East,1 and in the

West and North the Italic, Celtic and Germanic pressure was

strong.2

          I. The Term Κοινή. The word κοινή, sc. διάλεκτος, means

simply common language or dialect common to all, a world-

speech (Weltsprache). Unfortunately there is not yet uniformity

in the use of a term to describe the Greek that prevailed over

Alexander's empire and became the world-tongue. Kuhner-

Blass3 speak of ‘ἡ κοινή oder ἑλληνικὴ διάλεκτος." So also Schmie-

del4 follows Winer exactly. But Hellenic language is properly

only Greek language, as Hellenic culture5 is Greek culture. Jan-

naris6 suggests Panhellenic or new Attic for the universal Greek,

 

            1 Kretschmer, Einl. in die Gesch. der griech. Spr., 1896, pp. 171-243. But

the true Phrygians were kin to the Greeks. See Percy Gardner, New Ch.

of Gk. Hist., p. 84.

            2 Kretschmer, op. cit., pp. 153-170, 244-282.

            3 Griech. Gr., Bd. I, p. 22.                                 4 W.-Sch., N. T. Gr., p. 17.

            5 Mahaffy, Prog. of Hellen. in Alex. Emp., p. 3. Mahaffy does use Hel-

lenism like Droysen in his Hist. of Hellenism, as corresponding to Hellen-

istic, but he does so under protest (p. 3 f.). He wishes indeed that he had

coined the word "Hellenicism." But Hogarth (Philip and Alexander, p. 277)

had already used "Hellenisticism," saying: "Hellenisticism grew out of Hel-

lenism."

            6 Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 6.

 

                                                49


50      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

the Greek par excellence as to common usage. Hellenistic Greek

would answer in so far as it is Greek spoken also by Hellenists

differing from Hellenes or pure Greeks. Krumbacher applies Hel-

lenistic to the vernacular and κοινή to the "conventional literary

language" of the time,1 but this is wholly arbitrary. Krumbacher

terms the Hellenistic "ein verschwommenes Idiom." Hatzida-

kis and Schwyzer include in the κοινή both the literary and the

spoken language of the Hellenistic time. This is the view adopted

in this grammar. Deissmann dislikes the term Hellenistic Greek

because it was so long used for the supposedly peculiar biblical

Greek, though the term itself has a wide significance.2 He also

strongly disapproves the terms "vulgar Greek," "bad Greek,"

"graecitas fatiscens," in contrast with the "classic Greek."

Deissmann moreover objects to the word κοινή because it is used

either for the vernacular, the literary style or for all the Greek

of the time including the Atticistic revival. So he proposes

"Hellenistic world-speech."3 But this is too cumbersome. It is

indeed the world-speech of the Alexandrian and Roman period

that is meant by the term κοινή.  There is on the other hand the

literary speech of the orators, historians, philosophers, poets, the

public documents preserved in the inscriptions (some even Atti-

cistic); on the other hand we have the popular writings in the

LXX, the N. T., the Apostolic Fathers, the papyri (as a rule)

and the ostraca. The term is thus sufficient by itself to express

the Greek in common use over the world, both oral and literary,

as Schweizer4 uses it following Hatzidakis. Thumb5 identifies

κοινή and Hellenistic Greek and applies it to both vernacular and

written style, though he would not regard the Atticists as proper

producers of the κοινή.  Moulton6 uses the term κοινή for both

spoken and literary κοινή.  The doctors thus disagree very widely.

On the whole it seems best to use the term κοινή (or Hellenistic

Greek) both for the vernacular and literary κοινή, excluding the

Atticistic revival, which was a conscious effort to write not κοινή

 

            1 Munchener Sitzungsber., 1886, p. 435.

            2 Art. Hell. Griech., Hauck's Realencyc., p. 629.

            3 Ib., p. 630.

            4 Gr. der perg. Inschr., p. 19 f.               5 Die griech. Spr. etc., p. 9.

            6 Prol., p. 23. It is not necessary to discuss here the use of "Hellenistic"

Gk. as "Jewish-Gk." (see "Semitic Influence" in ch. IV), for it is absurd.

The notion that the κοινή is Macedonian Gk. is quite beside the mark, for

Mac. Gk. is too barbarous. The theory of an Alexandrian dialect is obsolete.

Du Canges, in his Glossarium called Hell. Gk. "corruptissima lingua," and

Niebuhr (Uber das Agyp.-Griech., Kl. Schr., p. 197) calls it "jargon."


                                THE KOINH                                       51

 

but old Attic.1 At last then the Greek world has speech-unity,

whatever was true of the beginning of the Greek language.2

               II. The Origin of the Κοινή.

          (a) TRIUMPH OF THE ATTIC. This is what happened. Even

in Asiatic Ionia the Attic influence was felt. The Attic ver-

nacular, sister to the Ionic vernacular, was greatly influenced

by the speech of soldiers and merchants from all the Greek

world. Attic became the standard language of the Greek world

in the fifth and the fourth centuries B.C. "The dialect of Athens,

the so-called Attic— one of the Ionic group--prevailed over all

other sister dialects, and eventually absorbed them. It was the

Attic, because Athens, particularly after the Persian wars, rose

to absolute dominion over all the other Greek communities, and

finally became the metropolis of all Greek races."3 This is

rather an overstatement, but there is much truth in it. This

classic literary Attic is did more and more lose touch with the ver-

nacular. "It is one of our misfortunes, whatever be its practical

convenience, that we are taught Attic as the standard Greek, and

all other forms and dialects as deviations from it . . . when many

grammarians come to characterize the later Greek of the Middle

Ages or of to-day, or even that of the Alexandrian or N. T.

periods, no adjective is strong enough to condemn this ‘verdor-

benes, veruneinigtes Attisch'" (S. Dickey, Princeton Rev., Oct.,

1903). The literary Attic was allied to the literary Ionic; but

even in this crowning development of Greek speech no hard and

fast lines are drawn, for the artificial Doric choruses are used in

tragedy and the vernacular in comedy.4 There was loss as well

as gain as the Attic was more extensively used, just as is true

 

            1 Blass indeed contrasts the literature of the Alex. and Rom. periods on

this principle, but wrongly, for it is type, not time, that marks the difference.

"If then the literature of the Alexandrian period must be called Hellenistic,

that of the Roman period must be termed Atticistic. But the popular lan-

guage had gone its own way." Gr. of the N. T. Gk., 1898 and 1905, p. 2. On

the Gk. of Alexandria and its spread over the world see Wackernagel, Die

Kult. der Gegenw., Tl. I, Abt. 8, p. 304 f.

            2 See Kretschmer, Einl., p. 410. Dieterich: "Das Sprachgebiet der κοινή

bildet eben ein Ganzes and kann nur im Zusamrnenhang betrachtet werden."

Unters., p. xvi.

            3 Jannaris, Hist. Gk. Gr., 1897, p. 3 f. On the superiority of the Attic see

Wackernagel, Die Kult. der Gegenw., Tl. I, Abt. 8, p. 299.

            4 Rutherford, Zur Gesch. des Atticismus, Jahrb. fur class. Phil., suppl.

xiii, 1884, pp. 360, 399. So Audoin says: " Ce n'est point arbitrairement que

les ecrivains grecs ont employe tel ou tel dialecte." Et. sommaire des Dial,

Grecs. Litt., 1891, p. 4.


52      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

of modern English. "The orators Demosthenes and AEschines

may be counted in the new Attic, where other leading representa-

tives in literature are Menander, Philemon and the other writers

of the New Comedy."1 As the literary Attic lived on in the literary

κοινή, so the vernacular Attic survived with many changes in the

vernacular κοινή.  We are at last in possession of enough of the

old Attic inscriptions and the κοινή inscriptions and the papyri to

make this clear. The march of the Greek language has been

steadily forward on this Attic vernacular base even to this pres-

ent day.2 In a sense, therefore, the κοινή became another dialect

(AEolic, Doric, Ionic, Attic, κοινή) . Cf. Kretschmer, Die Ent-

stehung der κοινή, pp. 1-37. But the κοινή was far more than a

dialect. Kretschmer holds, it is fair to say, that the κοινή is "eine

merkwurdige Mischung verschiedenster Dialecte" (op. cit., p. 6).

He puts all the dialects into the melting-pot in almost equal pro-

portions. Wilamowitz-Mollendorff considers the Ionic as the

chief influence in the κοινή, while W. Schmidt denies all Doric

and Ionic elements. Schwyzer rightly sees that the dialectical

influences varied in different places, though the vernacular Attic

was the common base.

          (b) FATE OF THE OTHER DIALECTS. The triumph of the Attic was

not complete, though in Ionia, at the end of the third century B.C.,

inscriptions in Attic are found, showing that in Asia Minor pure

Ionic had about vanished. In the first century B.C. the Attic

appears in inscriptions in Boeotia, but as late as the second cen-

tury A.D. Ionic inscriptions are found in Asia Minor. Ionic first

went down, followed by the AEllie. The Doric made a very stub-

born resistance. It was only natural that the agricultural com-

munities should hold out longest. See Thumb, Hellen., p. 28 f.

Even to-day the Zaconian patois of modern Greek vernacular

 

            1 Simonson, Gk. Gr., Accidence, 1903, p. 6. He has a good discussion of

the dialects, pp. 221-265.

            2 Riemann and Goelzer well say: "Quant au dialecte attique, grace aux

grands ecrivains qui l'illustrerent, grace a la preponderance politique et com-

merciale d'Athenes, grace aussi a son caractere de dialecte intermediaire entre

l'ionien et les dialectes en a, il se repandit de bonne heure, hors de son domaine

primitif, continua a s'etendre meme apres la chute de l'empire politique

d'Athenes et finit par embrasser tout le monde sur le nom de langue com-

mune (κοινὴ διάλεκτος)" (Phonetique, p. 16). And yet the common people

understood Homer also as late as Xenophon. Cf. Xenophon, Com. 3, 5,

καὶ νῦν δυναίμην ἂν  Ἰλιάδα ὅλην καὶ  Ὀδύσσειαν ἀπὸ στόματος εἰπεῖν. Cf. Lottich,

De Serm. vulg. Attic., 1881. On the "Growth of the Attic Dialect" fee

Rutherford, New Phrynichus, pp. 1-31.


                                   THE KOINH                                       53

 

has preserved the old Laconic Doric "whose broad α holds its

ground still in the speech of a race impervious to literature and

proudly conservative of a language that was always abnormal to

an extreme."1 It is not surprising that the Northwest Greek,

because of the city leagues, became a kind of Achaean-Dorian

κοινή2 and held on till almost the beginning of the Christian era

before it was merged into the κοινή of the whole Graeco-Roman

world.3 There are undoubtedly instances of the remains of the

Northwest Greek and of the other dialects in the κοινή and so in

the N. T. The Ionic, so near to the Attic and having flourished

over the coast of Asia Minor, would naturally have considerable

influence on the Greek world-speech. The proof of this will ap-

pear in the discussion of the κοινή where remains of all the main

dialects are naturally found, especially in the vernacular.4

          (c) PARTIAL KOINES. The standardizing of the Attic is the

real basis. The κοινή was not a sudden creation. There were

quasi-koines before Alexander's day. These were Strabo's alli-

ance of Ionic-Attic, Doric-AEolic (Thumb, Handb., p. 49). It is

therefore to be remembered that there were "various forms of

κοινή" before the κοινή which commenced with the conquests of

Alexander (Buck, Gk. Dialects, pp. 154-161), as Doric κοινή, Ionic

κοινή, Attic κοινή, Northwest κοινή. Hybrid forms are not un-

common, such as the Doric future with Attic ου as in ποιησοῦντι

(cf. Buck, p. 166). There was besides a revival here and there of

local dialects during the Roman times.

          (d) EFFECTS OF ALEXANDER'S CAMPAIGNS. But for the conquests

of Alexander there might have been no κοινή in the sense of a

world-speech. The other Greek koines were partial, this alone

was a world-speech because Alexander united Greek and Persian,

east and west, into one common world-empire. He respected the

 

            1 Moulton, Prol., p. 32.                         2 Ib., p. 37.

            3 Radermacher (NT. Gr., p. 1) puts it clearly: "Es genugt zu sagen, dass die

κοινή starksten Zusammenhang mit dem Attischen, in zweiter Linie mit dem

Ionischen, verrat. In der altesten Periode des Hellenismus zeigt sich daneben

geringer Einfluss arderer Dialekte, des Dorischen and Aolischen."

            4 “Il est a peine besoin de repeter que ces caracteres s'effacenta, mesure

que l'on descend vers l'ere chretienne. Sous Finfluence sans cesse grandis-

sante de l’atticisime, il s'etablit une sorte d'uniformite." Boisacq, Les Dial.

Dor., 1891, p. 204. "The Gk. of the N. T. is not, however, mere κοινή. In

vocabulary it is fundamentally Ionic" (John Burnet, Rev. of Theol. and

Phil., Aug., 1906, p. 95). "Fundamentally" is rather strong, but ἀπόστολος,

as ambassador, not mere expedition, εὐλογία, νηστεία, give some colour to the

statement. But what does Prof. Burnet mean by "mere κοινή?


54      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

customs and language of all the conquered nations, but it was in-

evitable that the Greek should become the lingua franca of the

world of Alexander and his successors. In a true sense Alexander

made possible this new epoch in the history of the Greek tongue.

The time of Alexander divides the Greek language into two peri-

ods. "The first period is that of the separate life of the dialects

and the second that of the speech-unity, the common speech or

κοινή" (Kretschmer, Die Entst. d. Κοινή, p. 1).

          (e) THE MARCH TOWARD UNIVERSALISM. The successors of

Alexander could not stop the march toward universalism that had

begun. The success of the Roman Empire was but another proof

of this trend of history. The days of ancient nationalism were

over and the κοινή was but one expression of the glacial move-

ment. The time for the world-speech had come and it was ready

for use.

               III. The Spread of the Κοινή.

          (a) A WORLD-SPEECH. What is called ἡ κοινή was a world-

speech, not merely a general Greek tongue among the Greek

tribes as was true of the Achaean-Dorian and the Attic. It is not

speculation to speak of the κοινή as a world-speech, for the in-

scriptions in the κοινή testify to its spread over Asia, Egypt, Greece,

Italy, Sicily and the isles of the sea, not to mention the papyri.

Marseilles was a great centre of Greek civilization, and even Cy-

rene, though not Carthage, was Grecized.1 The κοινή was in

such general use that the Roman Senate and imperial governors

had the decrees translated into the world-language and scattered

over the empire.2 It is significant that the Greek speech becomes

one instead of many dialects at the very time that the Roman

rule sweeps over the world.3 The language spread by Alexander's

army over the Eastern world persisted after the division of the

kingdom and penetrated all parts of the Roman world, even

Rome itself. Paul wrote to the church at Rome in Greek, and

Marcus Aurelius, the Roman Emperor, wrote his Meditations

(τῶν εἰς  Ἑαυτόν) in Greek. It was the language not only of letters,

but of commerce and every-day life. A common language for all

 

            1 See Churton, Infl. of the LXX Vers., 1861, p. 14.

            2 Viereck, Sermo Graecus quo Senatus Popul. Rom. etc., 1888, p. xi.

            3 See Wilamowitz-Mollendorff: "In demselben Momente, wo die casari-

sche Weltmonarchie alle Strome hellenischer and italischer Kultur in einem

Bette leitet, kommt die griechische Kunst auf alien Gebieten zu der Erkennt-

nis, dass ihre Kreise erftillt sind, das einzige das ihr bleibt, Nachahmung ist."

Uber die Entst. der griech. Schriftspr., Abhandl. deuts. Phil., 1878, p. 40.


                                  THE KOINH                                              55

 

men may indeed be only an ideal norm, but "the whole character

of a common language may be strengthened by the fact of its

transference to an unquestionably foreign linguistic area, as we

may observe in the case of the Greek κοινή."1 The late Latin

became a κοινή for the West as the old Babylonian had been for

the East, this latter the first world-tongue known to us.2 Xeno-

phon with the retreat of the Ten Thousand3 was a forerunner of

the κοινή. Both Xenophon and Aristotle show the wider outlook

of the literary Attic which uses Ionic words very extensively.

There is now the "Gross-Attisch." It already has γίνομαι, ἕνεκεν,

τωσαν, εἶπα and ἤνεγκα, ἐδώκαμεν and ἔδωκαν, βασίλισσα, δεικνύω

σσ, ναός. Already Thucydides and others had borrowed σσ from

the Ionic. It is an easy transition from the vernacular Attic to

the vernacular κοινή after Alexander's time. (Cf. Thumb's Hand-

buch, pp. 373-380, "Entstehung der Κοινή.") On the development

of the κοινή see further Wackernagel, Die Kultur der Gegenwart,

Tl. I, Abt. 8, p. 301 ff.; Moulton, Prol., ch. I, II; Mayser, Gr. d.

griech. Pap., Iap. I. But it was Alexander who made the later

Attic the common language of the world, though certainly he had

no such purpose in view. Fortunately he had been taught by

Aristotle, who himself studied in Athens and knew the Attic of

the time. "He rapidly established Greek as the lingua franca of

the empire, and this it was which gave the chief bond of union

to the many countries of old civilizations, which had hitherto

been isolated. This unity of culture is the remarkable thing in

the history of the world."4 It was really an epoch in the world's

history when the babel of tongues was hushed in the wonderful

language of Greece. The vernaculars of the eastern Roman

provinces remained, though the Greek was universal; so, when

Paul came to Lystra, the people still spoke the Lycaonian speech

 

            1 Paul, Prin. of the Hist. of Lang., p. 496. See also Kaerst, Gesch. d. hel-

lenist. Zeitalt., 101, p. 420: "Die Weiterentwicklung der Geschichte des

Altertums, so weit sie fur unsere eigene Kultur entscheidende Bedeutung er-

langt hat, beruht auf einer fortschreitenden Occidentalisierung; auch das im

Oriente emporgekommene Christentum entfaltet sich nach dem Westen zu

and gelangt hier zu seiner eigentlich weltgeschichtlichen Wirksamkeit."

            2 Schwyzer, Die Weltspr. etc., p. 7.

            3 See Mahaffy, Prog. of Hellen. in Alex. Emp., p. 7; cf. also Rutherford

New Phrynichus, 1881, p. 160 f.; Schweizer, Gr. der perg. Inschr., p. 16.

Moulton (Prol., p. 31) points out that the vase-inscriptions prove the state-

ment of the Const. of Athens, 11. 3, that the Athenians spoke a language com-

pounded of all Greek and barbarian tongues besides.

            4 Mahaffy, Prog. of Hellen., etc., p. 40.


56      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

of their fathers.1 The papyri and the inscriptions prove beyond

controversy that the Greek tongue was practically the same

whether in Egypt, Herculaneum, Pergamum or Magnesia. The

Greeks were the school-teachers of the empire. Greek was

taught in the grammar schools in the West, but Latin was not

taught in the East.

               (b) VERNACULAR AND LITERARY.

          1. Vernacular. The spoken language is never identical with the

literary style, though in the social intercourse of the best edu-

cated people there is less difference than with the uncultured.2

We now know that the old Attic of Athens had a vernacular and

a literary style that differed considerably from each other.3 This

distinction exists from the very start with the κοινή, as is apparent

in Pergamum and elsewhere.4 This vernacular κοινή grows right

out of the vernacular Attic normally and naturally.5 The colo-

nists, merchants and soldiers who mingled all over Alexander's

world did not carry literary Attic, but the language of social and

business intercourse.6 This vernacular κοινή at first differed little

from the vernacular Attic of 300 B.C. and always retained the

bulk of the oral Attic idioms. "Vulgar dialects both of the an-

cient and modern times should be expected to contain far more

archaisms than innovations."7  The vernacular is not a varia-

tion from the literary style, but the literary language is a develop-

ment from the vernacular.8 See Schmid9 for the relation between

the literary and the vernacular κοινή. Hence if the vernacular is

the normal speech of the people, we must look to the inscriptions

and the papyri for the living idiom of the common Greek or κοινή.

The pure Attic as it was spoken in Athens is preserved only in

 

            1 Schwyzer, Weltspr., p. 29.      2 Schweizer, Gr. der perg. etc., p. 22.

            3 See Kretschmer, Die griech. Vaseninschr. and ihre Spr., 1894; and Mei-

sterhans, Gr. der att. Inschr., 1900. Cf. Lottich, De Serm. vulg. Attic., 1881.

            4 Schweizer, Gr., p. 27.

            5 Thumb, Griech. Spr. im Zeitalter etc., p. 208 f. Lottich in his De Serm.

vulg. Attic. shows from the writings of Aristophanes how the Attic vernacular

varied in a number of points from the literary style, as in the frequent use of

diminutives, desiderative verbs, metaphors, etc.

            6 Schweizer, Gr., p. 23.

            7 Geldart, Mod. Gk. Lang. in its Rela. to Anc. Gk., 1870, p. 73. See also

Thumb, Griech. Spr. etc., p. 10, who calls "die κοινή weniger ein Abschluss

als der Anfang einer neuen Entwicklung." On the older Gk. κοινή see

Wackernagel, Die Kult. der Gegenw., Tl. I, Abt. 8, p. 300 f.

            8 Deissmann, Hell. Griech., Hauck's Realencyc., p. 633.

            9 Atticismus, Bd. IV, pp. 577-734. A very important treatment of the

whole question is here given.


                                        THE KOINH                                   57

 

the inscriptions.1 In the Roman Empire the vernacular κοινή

would be understood almost everywhere from Spain to Pontus.

See IV for further remarks on the vernacular

          2. Literary. If the vernacular κοινή was the natural develop-

ment of the vernacular Attic, the literary κοινή was the normal

evolution of the 1iterary Attic. Thumb well says, "Where there

is no development, there is no life."2 "In style and syntax the

literary Common Greek diverges more widely from the collo-

quial."3 This is natural and in harmony with the previous re-

moval of the literary Attic from the language of the people.4 The

growth of the literary κοινή was parallel with that of the popular

κοινή and was, of course, influenced by it. The first prose monu-

ment of literary Attic known to us, according to Schwyzer, is the

Constitution of Athens5 (before 413), falsely ascribed to Xeno-

phon. The forms of the literary κοινή are much like the Attic, as

in Polybius, for instance, but the chief difference is in the vocab-

ulary and meaning of the same words.6 Polybius followed the

general literary spirit of his time, and hence was rich in new

words, abstract nouns, denominative verbs, new adverbs.7  He

and Josephus therefore used Ionic words found in Herodotus and

Hippocrates, like ἔνδεσις, παραφυλακή, not because they consciously

imitated these writers, but because the κοινή, as shown by papyri

and inscriptions, employed them.8 For the same reason Luke and

Josephus9 have similar words, not because of use of one by the

other, but because of common knowledge of literary terms, Luke

also using many common medical terms natural to a physician

of culture. Writers like Polybius aimed to write without pedan-

try and without vulgarism. In a true sense then the literary κοινή

was a "compromise between the vernacular κοινή and the literary

Attic," between "life and school."10 There is indeed no Chinese

 

            1 Hirt, Handb. der griech. Laut- und Formenl., 1902, p. 41.

            2 Griech. Spr., p. 251.                            3 Moulton, Prol., p. 26.

            4 Jannaris, Hist. C-k. Gr., p. 5. Deissmann (New Light on the N. T., 1907,

p. 3 f.) shows that part of Norden's criticism of Paul's Gk. is nothing but

the contrast between literary κοινή and vernacular κοινή; cf. Die ant. Kunstpr.

            5 Schwyzer, Die Weltspr. der Alt., p. 15. See also Christ, Gesch. der

griech. Lit., p. 305. See Die pseudoxenophontische  Ἀθηναίων Πολιτεία, von

E. Kalinka, 1913.

            6 Schweizer, Gr.,  p. 21.                        7 Christ, op. cit., p. 588.

            8 Thumb, Griech. Spr. etc., p. 213. See also Goetzeler, De Polyb. Floc.,

1887, p. 15.

            9 Thumb, ib., p. 225 f. See also Krenkel, Josephus und Lukas, 1894,

pp. 283 ff.                                                                     10 Thumb, ib., p. 8.


58       A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

wall between the literary and the vernacular κοινή, but a constant

inflow from the vernacular to the written style as between prose

and poetry, though Zarncke1 insists on a thorough-going distinc-

tion between them. The literary κοινή would not, of course, use

such dialectical forms as τοὺς πάντες, τοῖς πραγμάτοις, etc., com-

mon in the vernacular κοινή.2  But, as Krumbacher3 well shows,

no literary speech worthy of the name can have an independent

development apart from the vernacular. Besides Polybius and

Josephus, other writers in the literary κοινή were Diodorus, Philo,

Plutarch, though Plutarch indeed is almost an "Anhanger des

Atticismus "4 and Josephus was rather self-conscious in his use of

the literary style.5 The literary κοινή was still affected by the

fact that many of the writers were of "un-Greek or half Greek

descent," Greek being an acquired tongue.6 But the point must

not be overdone, for the literary κοινή "was written by cosmopoli-

tan scholars for readers of the same sort," and it did not make

much difference "whether a book was written at Alexandria or

Pergamum."7 Radermacher8 notes that, while in the oldest

Greek there was no artificiality even in the written prose, yet in

the period of the κοινή all the literary prose shows "eine Kunst-

sprache." He applies this rule to Polybius, to Philo, to the N. T.,

to Epictetus. But certainly it does not hold in the same manner

for each of these.

          (c) THE ATTICISTIC REACTION. Athens was no longer the centre

of Greek civilization. That glory passed to Alexandria, to Per-

garnum, to Antioch, to Ephesus, to Tarsus. But the great crea-

tive epoch of Greek culture was past. Alexandria, the chief seat

of Greek learning, was the home, not of poets, but of critics of

style who found fault with Xenophon and Aristotle, but could

not produce an Anabasis or a Rhetoric. The Atticists wrote, to

be sure, in the κοινή period, but their gaze was always backward

to the pre-κοινή period. The grammarians (Dionysius, Phryni-

 

            1 Zarncke in Griech. Stud., Hermann Lipsius, 1894, p. 121. He considers

the Homeric poetry a reflection of the still older historical prose and the epic

the oldest literary form. See his Die Entst. der griech. Literaturspr., 1896.

Cf. Wilamowitz-Mollendorff, Die Entst. der griech. Schriftspr., Verhandl. d.

Phil., 1878, p. 36 f.                   2 Hatzidakis, Einl. in die neugr. Spr., p. 6.

            3 Das Prob. der neugr. Schriftspr., 1903, p. 6. A valuable treatment of

this point.

            4 Weissenberger, Die Spr. Plut. von Charonea, 1895, pp. 3, 11.

            5 Jos., Ant., XIV, t, 1.

            6 Susemihl, Gesch. der griech. Lit. in der Alexandrienzeit, 1. Bd., 1891, p. 2.

            7 Croiset, An Abr. Hist. of Gk. Lit., 1904, p. 425.                       8 N. T. Gr., p. 2.


                                      THE KOINH                                     59

 

thus, Moeris) set up Thucydides and Plato as the standards for

pure Greek style, while Aratus and Callimachus sought to revive

the style of Homer, and Lucian and Arrian1 even imitated Herod-

otus. When they wished to imitate the past, the problem still

remained which master to follow. The Ionic revival had no great

vogue, but the Attic revival had. Lucian himself took to Attic.

Others of the Atticists were Dionysius of Halicarnassus, Dio

Chrysostom, Aristides, Herodes Atticus, AElian, etc. "They as-

sumed that the limits of the Greek language had been forever

fixed during the Attic period."2 Some of the pedantic declaimers

of the time, like Polemon, were thought to put Demosthenes to

the blush. These purists were opposed to change in language

and sought, to check the departure from the Attic idiom. "The

purists of to-day are like the old Atticists to a hair."3 The Atti-

cists were then archaic and anachronistic. The movement was

rhetorical therefore and not confined either to Alexandria or Per-

gamum. The conflict between the κοινή (vernacular and literary)

and this Atticistic reaction affected both to some extent.4 This

struggle between "archaism and life" is old and survives to-day.5

The Atticists were in fact out of harmony with their time,6  and

not like Dante, who chose the language of his people for his im-

mortal poems. They made the mistake of thinking that by

imitation they could restore the old Attic style. "The effort and

example of these purists, too, though criticized at first, gradually

became a sort of moral dictatorship, and so has been tacitly if

not zealously obeyed by all subsequent scribes down to the pres-

ent time."7 As a result when one compares N. T. Greek,8 one

 

            1 A sharp distinction as a rule must be made between the language of

Arrian and Epict. The Gk. of Epict. as reported by Arrian, his pupil, is a

good representative of the vern. κοινή of an educated man. Arrian's intro-

duction is quite Atticistic, but he aims to reproduce Epictetus' own words as

far as possible.

            2 Sophocles, Lex., p. 6. Athenaeus 15. 2 said:  Εἰ μὴ ἰατροὶ ἦσαν, οὐδὲν ἂν ἦν

τῶν γραμματέων μωρότερον.

            3 Thumb, Griech. Spr. etc., p. 180. On Atticism in the κοινή see Wacker-

nagel, Die Kult. der Gegenw., Tl. I, Abt. 8, p. 309.

            4 Norden, Die griech. Kunstpr. bis Aug., Bd. I, 1898, p. 150.

Thumb, ib., p. 8.

            6 Ib., p. 252 f.                                       7 Jannaris, Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 7.

            8 Moulton, Prol., p. 26. The diction of Aristophanes is interesting as a

specimen of varieties of speech of the time. Cf. Hope, The Lang. of Parody;

a Study in the Diction of Aristophanes (1906). Radermacher (N. T. Gk.,

p. 3) holds that we must even note the "barbarisches Griechisch" of writers

like John Philoponos and Proclos.


60      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

must be careful to note whether it is with the book Greek (κα-

θαρεύουσα) or the vernacular (ὁμιλουμένη). This artificial reac-

tionary movement, however, had little effect upon the vernacular

κοινή as is witnessed by the spoken Greek of to-day. Consequently

it is a negligible quantity in direct influence upon the writers of

the N. T.1 But the Atticists did have a real influence upon the

literary κοινή both as to word-formation2 and syntax.3  With

Dionysius of Halicarnassus beauty was the chief element of style,

and he hoped that the Attic revival would drive out the Asiatic

influence.4 The whole movement was a strong reaction against

what was termed "Asianism" in the language.5  It is not surpris-

ing therefore that the later ecclesiastical literary Greek was largely

under the influence of the Atticists. "Now there was but one

grammar: Attic. It was Attic grammar that every freeman,

whether highly or poorly educated, had learned."6  "This purist

conspiracy" Jannaris calls it. The main thing with the Atticists

was to have something as old as Athens. Strabo said the style

of Diodorus was properly "antique."7

               IV. The Characteristics of the Vernacular Kοινή.

          (a) VERNACULAR ATTIC THE BASE. One must not feel that the

vernacular Greek is unworthy of study. "The fact is that, during

the best days of Greece, the great teacher of Greek was the com-

mon people."8 There was no violent break between the vernacu-

lar Attic and the vernacular κοινή, but the one flowed into the other

as a living stream.9  If the reign of the separated dialects was

over, the power of the one general Greek speech had just begun

on the heels of Alexander's victories. The battle of Chaeronea

broke the spirit of the old Attic culture indeed, but the Athenians

 

            1 Schmid, Der Atticismus etc., Bd. IV, p. 578.               2 Ib., p. 606 f.

            3 Troger, Der Sprachgeb. in der pseudolong. Schr., 1899, Tl. I, p. 61.

            4 Schmid, ib., Bd. I, pp. 17, 25. See Bd. IV, pp. 577-734, for very valu-

able summary of this whole subject.

            5 Norden, Die griech. Kunstpr., 1898. 1. Bd., p. 149. So Blass calls it

"gleichzeitige atticistische Reaction gegen die asianische Beredsamkeit."

Die griech. Beredsamkeit etc. von Alex. bis Aug., 1865, p. 77.

            6 Jannaris, op. cit., p. 11. See also Fritz, Die Briefe des Bischofs Syne-

sius von Kyrene. Ein Beitr. zur Gesch. des Att. im 4. and 5. Jahrh., 1898.

Strabo, 13. 4, 9.

            8 Sophocles, Lex. of Rom. and Byz. Period, p. 11.

            9 Deissmann, Die sprachl. Erforsch. etc., p. 11. Rutherford (New Phryn.,

p. 2) says that "the debased forms and mixed vocabulary of the common 

dialect would have struck the contemporaries of Aristophanes and Plato as

little better than jargon of the Scythian policemen." On the form of the κοινή

see Wackernagel, Kult. etc., Tl. I, Abt. 8, p. 305.


                                           THE KOINH                                    61

 

gathered up the treasures of the past, while Alexander opened the

flood-gates for the change in the language and for its spread over

the world.1 "What, however, was loss to standard Attic was

gain to the ecumenical tongue. The language in which Hellenism

expressed itself was eminently practical, better fitted for life than

for the schools. Only a cosmopolitan speech could comport with

Hellenistic cosmopolitanism. Grammar was simplified, excep-

tions decreased or generalized, flexions dropped or harmonized,

construction of sentences made easier" (Angus, Prince. Rev.,

Jan., 1910, p. 53). The beginning of the development of the ver-

nacular κοινή is not perfectly clear, for we see rather the com-

pleted product.2  But it is in the later Attic that lies behind the

κοινή. The optative was never common in the vernacular Attic

and is a vanishing quantity in the κοινή. The disappearance of

the dual was already coming on and so was the limited use of the

superlative, --τωσαν instead of —ντων, and –σθωσαν instead of –σθων,

γίνομαι, σσ, εἶπα, τίς instead of πότερος, ἕκαστος and not ἑκατερος.3

But while the Attic forms the ground-form4 of the κοινή it must

not be forgotten that the κοινή was resultant of the various forces

and must be judged by its own standards.5 There is not complete

unanimity of opinion concerning the character of the vernacular

κοινή. Steinthal6 indeed called it merely a levelled and debased

Attic, while Wilamowitz7 described it as more properly an Ionic

popular idiom. Kretschmer8 now (wrongly, I think) contends that

the Northwest Greek, Ionic and Boeotian had more influence on

the κοινή than the Attic. The truth seems to be the position of

Thumb,9 that the vernacular κοινή is the result of the mingling with

all dialects uponl the late Attic vernacular as the base. As between

the Doric α and the Ionic η the vernacular κοινή follows the Attic

 

            1 Christ, Gesch. der griech. Lit., 1905, p. 509 f. For "the Attic ground-

character of the κοινή" see Mayser, Gr. der griech. Pap. (1906, p. 1).

            2 Kaibel, Stil and Text der  Ἀθναίων Πολιτεία, p. 37.

            3 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 3. Even in the literary κονή the dual is nearly

gone, as in Polybius and Diodorus Siculus; cf. Schmidt, De Duali Graec. et

Emor. et Reviv., 1893, pp. 22, 25.

            4 Gott. Gel.-Anz., 1895, p. 30 f.; Hatzidakis, Einl. in die neugr. Gr.,

p. 168 f.; Krumbacher, Byz. Lit., p. 789.

            5 "Die Erforschung der κοινή hat lange genug unter dem Gesichtswinkel des

‘Klassicismus’ gestanden." Thumb, Griech. Spr. etc., p. 10.

            6 Gesch. der Sprachw., p. 37f.

            7 Verhandl. der 32. phil. Versamml.; p. 40.

            8 Wochenschr. fur klass. Philol., 1899, p. 3; Die Entst. der κοινή, 1900.

            9 Op. cit., pp. 53-101, 202f.


62     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

usage, and this fact alone is decisive.1 Dieterich2 indeed sums

up several points as belonging to the “Attic κοινή" such as verbs

in –υω instead of –υμι, in –ωσαν instead of –ων, in contract imper-

fects, disuse of the temporal and the syllabic augment in com-

position, disuse of reduplication, —ην instead of --η in acc. sing.

of adjs. in –ής, --ου instead of –ους in gen. sing. of third declen-

sion, –α instead of –ου in proper names, disuse of the Attic de-

clension, –ες for –ας in accusative plural, τόν as relative pronoun,

ἴδιος  as possessive pronoun. But clearly by "Attic κοινή" he means

the resultant Attic, not the Attic as distinct from the other dialects.

          Besides the orthography is Attic (cf. ἵλεως, not ἵλαος) and the

bulk of the inflections and conjugations likewise, as can be seen

by comparison with the Attic inscriptions.3 Schlageter4 sums

the matter up: "The Attic foundation of the κοινή is to-day gen-

erally admitted."

          (b) THE OTHER DIALECTS IN THE Κοινή. But Kretschmer5 is

clearly wrong in saying that the κοινή is neither Attic nor decayed

Attic, but a mixture of the dialects. He compares the mixture

of dialects in the κοινή to that of the high, middle and low Ger-

man. The Attic itself is a κοινή out of Ionic, AEolic and Doric.

The mixed character of the vernacular κοινή is made plain by

Schweizer6 and Dieterich.7 The Ionic shows its influence in the

presence of forms like ἰδίη, σπείρης, εἰδυῖα, --υίης, καθ’ ἕτος (cf.

vetus), ὀστέα, χειλέων, βλαβέων, χρυσέον, --ᾶς, --ᾶδος; absence of the

rough breathing (psilosis or de-aspiration, AEolic also); dropping

of μι in verbs like διδῶ; κιθών (χιτών), τέσσερα, πράσσω for πράττω

(Attic also), etc. Ionic words like μον-όφθαλμος (Herod.) instead

of Attic ἑτερ-όφθαλμος occur. Conybeare and Stock (Sel. from

LXX, p. 48) suggest that Homer was used as a text-book in Alex-

andria and so caused Ionisms like σπείρης in the κοινή. The spread

of the Ionic over the East was to be expected. In Alexander's

army many of the Greek dialects were represented.8 In the Egyp-

tian army of the Ptolemies nearly all the dialects were spoken.9

The Ionians were, besides, part of the Greeks who settled in Alex-

 

            1 Moulton, Prol., p. 33 f.

            2 Unters. zur Gesch. griech. Spr., 1898, p. 258 f.

            3 Meisterhans, Gr. der Att. Inschr.

            4 Der Wortsch. der ausserhalb Attikas gefundenen att. Inschr., 1912.

            5 Wochenschr. fur klass. Phil., 1899, p. xvii.

            6 Gr. der perg. Inschr., p. 201 f.

            7 Unters. zur Gesch. etc., p. 259 f.                                 8 Arrian, II, 20. 5.

            9 Myer, Das Heerwesen der Ptolemaer und Romer in Agypten, 1900.


                                        THE KOINH                                        63

 

andria.1 Besides, even after the triumph of the Attic in Greece

the Ionic had continued to be spoken in large parts of Asia Minor.

The Ionic influence appears in Pergamum also. The mixing of the

Attic with foreign, before all with Ionic, elements, has laid the

foundation for the κοινή.2 The AEolic makes a poor showing,

but can be traced especially in Pergamum, where. Schweizer con-

siders it one of the elements of the language with a large injection

of the Ionic.3  AEolic has the α for η in proper names and forms

in ας.  Boeotian-AEolic uses the ending –οσαν, as εἴχοσαν, so common

in the LXX. Moulton4 points out that this ending is very rare

in the papyri and is found chiefly in the LXX. He calls Boeotian-

AEolic also "the monophthongizing of the diphthongs." In the

Attic and the Ionic the open sound of η prevailed, while in the

Boeotian the closed. In the κοινή the two pronunciations existed

together till the closed triumphed.  Psilosis is also Ionic. The

Doric appears in forms like λαός (λεώς), ναός (νεώς), πιάζω (πιέζω),

ἐσπούδαξα, ἡ λιμός, τό πλοῦτος, ἀλέκτωρ, κλίβαονος (κρίβανος); and in

the pronunciation perhaps β, γ, δ had the Doric softer sound as

in the modern Greek vernacular. But, as Moulton5 argues, the

vernacular κοινή comes to us now only in the written form; and

that was undoubtedly chiefly Attic. The Arcadian dialect possibly

contributes ἀφέωνται, since it has ἀφεώσθη, but this form occurs

in Doric and Ionic also.6 Cf. also the change of gender ἡ λιμός

(Luke) and τὸ πλοῦτος (Paul). The Northwest Greek contrib-

uted forms like ἀρχόντοις, τοὺς λέγοντες, ἦται (ἤμην cf. Messe-

nian and Lesbian also), ἠρώτουν (like Ionic), εἴχοσαν (cf. Boeotian),

λέλυκαν. The accusative plural in —ες is very common in the

papyri, and some N. T. MSS. give τέσσρες for τέσσαρας.7 The

Achaen-Dorian κοινή had resisted in Northwest Greece the

inroads of the common Greek for a century or so. The Mace-

 

            1 H. Anz, Subsidia ad cognoscendum Graec. Serm. vulg. etc., 1894, p. 386.

Mayser, Gr., pp. 9-24, finds numerous Ionic peculiarities in the Ptolemaic

pap. far more than AEolic and Doric. He cites –τωσαν, μαχαίρης, ἔσω, ἕνεκεν,

ὀρέων, γογγύζω, παραθήκη, τέσσερες, ἔκπτωμα, etc. On the Ionic and other non-

Attic elements in the κοινή see Wackernagel, Kult., p. 306 f.

            2 Kaibel, Stil Lnd Text etc., p. 37.                     3 Gr. d. perg. Inschr., p. 202.

            4 Prol., p. 33. The caution of Psichari (Essais de Gr. Hist. Neo-grq., 2eme

ed., 1889, p. cxlix) is to be noted, that the vernacular is not necessarily dia-

lectical, but "des tinee au peuple et venait du peuple." Cf. on AEolic ele-

ments, Mayser, p. 9. He cites ἡ λιμός in the pap.; Λαός is also AEolic.

            5 Prol., p. 34.

            6 Moulton, ib., p. 38, n. 3. For Doric elements in the pap. see Mayser,

Gr., p. 5 f.                    7 W. H., Intr. to the Gk. N. T., App., p. 150.


64       A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

donian Greek, spoken by many of Alexander's soldiers, naturally

had very slight influence on the  κοινή.  We know nothing of the

old Macedonian Greek. Polybius1 says that the Illyrians needed

an interpreter for Macedonian. Sturz2 indeed gives a list of

Macedonian words found in the κοινή, as ἄσπιλος, κοράσιον, παρεμ-

βολή, ῥύμη. But he also includes ἀγγέλλω! The Macedonians

apparently used β instead of φ as βίλιππος, δ=θ as δάνατος, σ=β

as σέρεθρον. Plutarch3 speaks of Alexander and his soldiers

speaking to each other Μακεδονιστί. For full discussion of the

Macedonian dialect see 0. Hoffmann, Die Makedonen, ihre

Sprache und Volkstuni, 1906, pp. 232-255.

          (c) NON—DIALECTICAL CHANGES. It is not always possible to

separate the various peculiarities of the κοινή into dialectical in-

fluences. "Where Macedonian, Spartan, Boeotian, Athenian and

Thessalian were messmates a κοινή was inevitable. Pronounced

dialecticisms which would render unintelligible or ludicrous to

others were dropped" (see Angus, Prince. Theol. Rev., Jan., 1910,

p. 67). The common blood itself went on changing. It was a

living whole and not a mere artificial mingling of various ele-

ments. There is less difference in the syntax of the κοινή and that

of the earlier Greek than in the forms, though the gradual disap-

pearance of the optative, use of ἵνα and finite verb in the non-final

sense rather than the infinitive or even ὅτι, the gradual disuse of

the future part. may be mentioned. It was in the finer shades

of thought that a common vernacular would fail to hold its

own. "Any language which aspires to be a Weltsprache (world-

language), as the Germans say, must sacrifice much of its deli-

cacy, its shades of meaning, expressed by many synonyms and

particles and tenses, which the foreigner in his hurry and without

contact with natives cannot be expected to master."4

 

            1 Polybius, 28. 8, 9.

            2 De Dial. Alexan. etc., 1786, p. 56 f.; see also De Dial. Macedonica et

Alexan., 1808, pp. 37, 42; Maittaire, Graecae Ling. Dial. Sturzii, 1807, p. 184;

Sophocles, Lex. of Rom. and Byz. Period, p. 3. Schweizer, Gr. der perg.

Inschr., p. 27, sees very little in the Macedonian influence.

            3 I, 592 B, 694 C. Kennedy (Sources of N. T. Gk., p. 17) says: "In any

case, the Macedonian type of Greek, whether or not it is admissible to call it

a special dialect, was so far removed from ordinary Attic as to make it cer-

tain that the latter on Macedonian lips must soon and inevitably suffer thor-

ough-going modification."

            4 Mahaffy, Survey of Gk. Civilization, p. 220. Cf. Geldart, Mod. Gk.

Lang. in its Rela. to Anc. Gk., p. 73, for discussion of "the levelling tendency

common to all languages."


65                                  THE KOINH

 

               (d) NEW WORDS, NEW FORMS OR NEW MEANINGS TO OLD WORDS.

 Naturally most change is found either in new words or

in new meanings in old words, just as our English dictionaries must

have new and enlarged editions every ten years or so. This growth

in the vocabulary is inevitable unless the life of a people stops. A

third-century inscription in Thera, for instance, shows συναγωγή

used of a religious meeting, πάροικος (not the Attic μέτοικος) for

stranger, ἀπόστολος and κατήχησις in their old senses like those

Americanisms which preserve Elizabethan English (" fall" for

"autumn," for instance).1 Here are some further examples. It is

hard to be sure that all of these are words that arose in the κοινή,

for we cannot mark off a definite line of cleavage. We mention

ἀγάπη, ἁγιότης, ἁγνότης, ἄθεσμος, ἀθέτησις, ἀλλοτριεπίσκοπος, ἀκατά-

λυτος, ἀκροατήριον, ἀνθρωπάρεσκος, ἀντίλυτρον, ἀνακαινόω (and many

verbs in —οω, --άζω, --ίζω), ἀναγεννάω, βάπτισμα (many words in --μα),

βαπτισμός, βαπτιστής, γρηγορέω (cf. also στήκω), δεισιδαιμονία, δηνάριον,

δικαιοκρισία, ἐλεημοσύνη, ἐκκακέω, ἐκμυκτηρίζω, θειότης, θεόπνευστος, λογία,

κατηχέω, κράβαττος, μαθητεύω, οἰκοδεσπότης, ὀρθρίζω, ὀψάριον, ὀψώνιον,

πρόσκαιρος, ῥομφαία, συμβούλιον, τελώνιον, υἱοθεσία, ὑποπόδιον, φιλαδελ-

φία, ὠτίον, etc. Let these serve merely as examples. For others

see the lists in Deissmann's Bible Studies, Light from the Ancient

East, Moulton and Milligan's "Lexical Notes on the Papyri"

(Expositor, 1908--), Winer-Schmiedel (p. 22), Thayer's Lexicon,

(p. 691 f.), Rutherford's New Phrynichus, and the indices to the

papyri collections. One of the pressing needs is a lexicon of the

papyri and then of the κοινή as a whole. Many of these words

were already in ithe literary κοινή, though they probably came from

the vernacular.2 Some old words received slightly new forms,

like ἀνάθεμα ‘curse’ (ἀνάθημα 'offering'), ἀπάντησις (ἀπάντημα), ἀπο-

στασία (ἀπόστασις), ἀροτριάω (ἀρόω), βασίλισσα (βασίλεια), γενέσια

(γενέθλια), δεκατόω (δεκατεύω), λυχνία (λυχνίον), μισθαποδοδια (μισθο-

δοσία), μονόφθαλμος (ἑτερόφθαλμος), νουθεσία (νουθέτησις), οἰκοδομή (οἰ-

 

 

            1 Hicks, St. Paul. and Hellen., in Stud. Bibl. et Eccl., 1896, p. 5. Mayser

(Gr. d. griech. Pap., pp. 24-35) gives an interesting list of words that were

chiefly "poetical" lin the classic literature, but are common in the papyri.

The poets often use the vernacular. Some of these words are ἀλέκτωρ, βιβρώ-

σκω, δέσμιος, δῶμα, ἐκτινάσσω, ἐντρέπομαι, ἐπαιτέω, ἐπισείω, θάλπω, καταστέλλω,

κοιμάομαι, κόπος, λαοί = people, μέριμνα, νήπιος, οἰκητήριον, περίκειμαι, προσφωνέω,

σκύλλω, στέγη, συναντάω, ὑετός. New forms are given to old words as λιμπάνω,"

from λείπω, etc.  Ramsay (see The Independent, 1913, p. 376) finds ἐμβατεύω

(cf. Col. 2:18) used in the technical sense of entering in on the part of in-

itiates in the sanctuary of Apollos at Claros in an inscription there.

            2 See W.-Sch., p. 19, n. 8.


66           A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

κοδόμησις), ὀνειδισμός (ὄνειδος), ὀπτασία (ὄψις), πανδοχεύς (πανδοκεύς),

παραφρονία (παραφροσύνη), ῥαντίζω (ῥαίνω, cf. βαπτιζω, βάπτω), στήκω

(ἕστηκα), ταμεῖον (ταμιεῖον), τεκνίον (and many diminutives in –ίον

which lose their force), παιδάριον (and many diminutives in –άριον),

φυσιάομαι (φυσάομαι), etc.

          Words (old and new) receive new meanings, as ἀνακλίνω (‘re-

cline at table'). Cf. also ἀναπίπτω, ἀνάκειμαι, ἀντιλέγω) (‘speak

against’), ἀποκριθῆναι (passive not middle, ‘to answer’), δαιμόνιον

(‘evil spirit,’ ‘demon’), δῶμα (‘house-top’),  ἐρωτάω (‘beg’), εὐχαριστέω

(‘thank’), ἐπιστέλλω (‘write a letter’), ὀψάριον (‘fish’), ὀψώνιον

(‘wages’), παρακαλέω (‘entreat’), παρρησία (‘confidence’), περισπάο-

μαι (‘distract’), παιδεύω (‘chastise’), πτῶμα (‘corpse’), συγκρίνω

(‘compare’), σχολή (‘school’), φθάνω (‘come’), χορτάζω (‘nourish’),

χρηματίζω (‘be called’).1 This is all perfectly natural. Only we

are to remember that the difference between the κοινή vocabulary

and the Attic literature is not the true standard. The vernacular

κοινή must be compared with the Attic vernacular as seen in the

inscriptions and to a large extent in a writer like Aristophanes

and the comic poets. Many words common in Aristophanes, ta-

boo to the great Attic writers, reappear in the κοινή.  They were

in the vernacular all the time.2 Moulton3 remarks that the ver-

nacular changed very little from the first century A.D. to the

third. "The papyri show throughout the marks of a real lan-

guage of daily life, unspoilt by the blundering bookishness which

makes the later documents so irritating." It is just in the first

century A.D. that the κοινή comes to its full glory as a world-

language. "The fact remains that in the period which gave birth

to Christianity there was an international language" (Deissmann,

Light from the Ancient East, p. 59). It is not claimed that all the

points as to the origin of the κοινή are now clear. See Hesseling,

De koine en de oude dialekten van Griechenland (1906). But

enough is known to give an intelligible idea of this language

that has played so great a part in the history of man.

          (e) PROVINCIAL INFLUENCES. For all practical purposes the

Greek dialects were fused into one common tongue largely as a

result of Alexander's conquests. The Germanic dialects have

gone farther and farther apart (German, Dutch, Swedish, Nor-

wegian, Danish, English), for no great conqueror has arisen to

 

            1 Schlageter (Wortsch. etc., pp. 59-62) gives a good list of words with

another meaning in the κοινή.

            2 Cf. Kennedy, Sour. of N. T. Gk., pp. 70 f., 147,

            3 Cl. Quar., April, 1908, p. 137,


                                 THE KOINH                                            67

 

bind them into one. The language follows the history of the peo-

ple. But the unification of the Greek was finally so radical that

"the old dialects to-day are merged into the general mass, the

modern folk-language is only a continuation of the united, Hel-

lenistic, common speech."1 So completely did Alexander do his

work that the balance of culture definitely shifted from Athens

to the East, to Pergamum, to Tarsus, to Antioch, to Alexandria.2

This "union of oriental and occidental was attempted in every

city of Western Asia. That is the most remarkable and interest-

ing feature of Hellenistic history in the Greco-Asiatic kingdoms

and cities."3 Prof. Ramsay adds: "In Tarsus the Greek qualities

and powers were used and guided by a society which was, on the

whole, more Asiatic in character." There were thus non-Greek

influences which also entered into the common Greek life and

language in various parts of the empire. Cf. K. Holl, "Das Fort-

leben der Volkssprachen in nachchristlicher Zeit" (Hermes, 1908,

43, p. 240).  These non-Greek influences were especially noticeable

in Pergamum, Tarsus and Alexandria, though perceptible at other

points also. But in the case of Phrygia long before Alexander's

conquest there had been direct contact with the Arcadian and

the AEolic dialects through immigration.4 The Greek inscriptions

in the Hellenistic time were first in the old dialect of Phrygia,

then gliding into the κοινή then finally the pure κοινή.5 Hence the

κοινή won an easy victory in Pergamum, but the door for Phry-

gian influence was also wide open. Thus, though the κοινή rests

on the foundation of the Greek dialects, some non-Greek elements

were intermingled.6 Dieterich7 indeed gives a special list of

peculiarities that belong to the κοινή of Asia Minor, as, for in-

stance, –αν instead of –α in the accus. sing. of 3d decl., proper names

in ᾶς, τίς for ὅστις, ὅστις for ὅς, εἶμαι for εἰμί, use of θέλω rather than

future tense. In the case of Tarsus "a few traces of the Doric

 

            1 Kretschmer, Einl. in die Gesch. etc., p. 417.

            2 Jannaris, Hit. Gk. Gr., p. 6. The multitudinous mod. Gk. patois illus-

trate the κοινή.

            3 W. M. Ramsay, Tarsus, Exp., Mar., 1906, p. 261.

            4 Schweizer, dr. der perg. Inschr., pp. 15 ff.                    5 Ib., p. 25.

            6 Bruns, Die att. Bestrebungen in der griech. Lit., 1896,1p. 12, says: "Statt

ihrer (classische attische Sprache) regiert ein gemeines Kebsweib, das aus

irgend einer phrygischen Spelunke stammt — das ist der hellenistische Stil"!

A slight exaggeration. Cf. Brugmann, Vergl. Gr., p. 9.

            7 Untersuch. zur Gesch. etc., pp. 258 ff. The speech of Asia Minor has in-

deed close affinity with that of Paul and Luke and with all the N. T. writers.

Cf. Thieme, Die Inschr. von Magn. am Maander und das N. T., 1906.


68        A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

dialect may perhaps have lingered" in the κοινή, as Ramsay sug-

gests (Expositor, 1906, p. 31), who also thinks that ναοκόρος for

νεωκόρος in Ac. 19:35 in D may thus be explained.

          But no hard and fast distinction can be drawn, as –αν for --ν

as accusative appears in Egypt also, e.g. in θυγατέραν. Is it proper

to speak of an Alexandrian dialect?  Blass1 says so, agreeing

with Winer-Schmiedel2 (ἣ   Ἀλεξανδρέων διάλεκτος). This is the old

view, but we can hardly give the name dialect to the Egyptian

Greek. Kennedy3 says: "In all probability the language of the

Egyptian capital had no more right to be called a dialect than

the vernacular of any other great centre of population." Schwei-

zer4 likewise refuses to consider the Alexandrian κοινή as a dialect.

Dieterich5 again gives a list of Egyptian peculiarities such as οἱ  

instead of αι, –α instead of —ας in nominatives of third declension,

adjectives in –η instead of —α, ἐσοῦ for σοῦ, καθεῖς for ἕκαστος, im-

perfect and aorist in —α, ἤμην for ἦν, disuse of augment in simple

verbs, indicative instead of the subjunctive. Mayser (Gr. d.

griech. Pap., pp. 35-40) gives a list of "Egyptian words" found in

the Ptolemaic papyri. They are words of the soil, like πάπυρος

itself. But Thumb6 shows that the majority of the so-called

Alexandrian peculiarities were general in the κοινή like ἤλθοσαν,

εἶχαν, γέγοναν, ἑώρακες, etc. "There was indeed a certain un-

wieldiness and capriciousness about their language, which displays

itself especially in harsh and fantastic word-composition." As

examples of their words may be mentioned κατανωτιζόμενος, παρα-

συγγράφειν, φιλανθρωπεῖν, etc. It is to be observed also that the

κοινή was not the vernacular of all the peoples when it was spoken

as a secondary language. In Palestine, for instance, Aramaic was

 

            1 Gr. of N. T. Gk., 1905, p. 3 note.

            2 Gr. des neut. Sprachid., § 3. 1, n. 4.

            3 Sour. of N. T. Gk., 1895, p. 23. Irenaeus (Minucius Pacatus) and De-

metrius Ixion wrote treatises on "the dialect of Alexandria" (Swete, Intr.

to the 0. T. in Gk., p. 289). But they probably did not understand that the

vernacular κοινή, which differed from the literary κοινή, was international

(Thackeray, Gr. of the 0. T. in Gk., vol. I, p. 19). "It is certain that many

forms of this later language were specially characteristic of Alexandria" (ib.).

            4 Gr. der perg. Inschr., p. 27.     5 Unters. zur Gesch. etc., pp. 258 ff.

            6 Die griech. Spr. etc., p. 168 ff. See also Anz, Subs. ad cognos. Graec.

Serm. vulg. etc., 1891, p. 262. "Nec quae Apostolides homo doctus Alexan-

drinus nuperrime protulit omnes caligines propulsaverunt. Certe nemo

jam existet qui cum Sturzio Macedonicam dialectum ibi quaerat, sed altera

e parte neminem puto judicare illam quae vulgo appellatur dialectum Alexan-

drinam solis vindicandam esse Alexandrinis." Cf. Susemihl, Lit. der Alexan-

drinerzeit.


                                         THE KOINH                                      69

 

the usual language of the people who could also, most of them,

speak Greek. Moulton's parallel of the variations in modern

English is not therefore true, unless you include also peoples like

the Welsh, Scotch, Irish, etc.

          But as a whole the vernacular κοινή was a single language with

only natural variations like that in the English of various parts

of the United States or England.1 Thumb perhaps makes too

much of a point out of the use of ἐμός rather than μου in Asia

Minor in its bearing on the authorship of the Gospel of John

where it occurs 41 times, once only in 3 Jo. and Rev. (34 times

elsewhere in the N. T.), though it is interesting to note, as he

does, that the infinitive is still used in Pontus. But there were

non-Greek influences here and there over the empire as Thumb2

well shows. Thumb3 indeed holds that "the Alexandrian popular

speech is only one member of a great speech-development."

          (f) THE PERSONAL EQUATION. In the vernacular κοινή, as in the

literary language, many variations are due to differences in edu-

cation and personal idiosyncrasies. "The colloquial language in

its turn went off into various shades of distinction according to

the refinement of the speaker" (Deissmann, Light from the Ancient

East, p. 59).  The inscriptions on the whole give us a more for-

mal speech, sometimes official decrees, while the papyri furnish a

much wider variety. "The papyri show us the dialect of Greek

Egypt in many forms, — the language of the Government offi-

cial, of the educated private person, of the dwellers in the temples,

of the peasantry in the villages."4 We have numerous examples

of the papyri through both the Ptolemaic and the Roman rule in

Egypt. All sorts of men from the farm to the palace are here

found writing all sorts of documents, a will or a receipt, a love-

 

            1 Sir Jonathan Williams, an Eng. savant, is quoted in the Louisville Cou-

rier-Journal (May 9, 1906) as saying: "I have found in the city of Louisville

a pronunciation and a use of terms which is nearer, to my mind, to Addison

and the English classicists than anything which the counties of England, the

provinces of Australia, or the moors of Scotland can offer." He added that

the purest English known to him is spoken in Edinburgh and Louisville.

These two cities, for geographical reasons, are not provincial.

            2 Griech. Spr. etc., pp. 102-161; Theol. Literaturzeit., 1903, p. 421; cf.

also Moulton, Pro:. p. 40. Moulton sets over against ἐμός the fact that

John's Gospel uses ἵνα rather than the infinitive so often. Much of the

force of such an argument vanishes also under the personal equation.

            3 Griech. Spr. etc., p. 171. Cf. also Zahn, Einleitung in das N. T.,

I, 38.

            4 Kenyon, ext. vol. of Hast. D. B., art. Papyri, p. 355b. See also id.,

Palaeog. of the Gk. Pap., 1899.


70      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

letter or a dun, a memorandum or a census report, a private letter

or a public epistle. "Private letters are our most valuable

sources; and they are all the better for the immense differences

that betray themselves in the education of the writers. The well-

worn epistolary formulae show variety mostly in their spelling;

and their value for the student lies primarily in their remarkable

resemblances to the conventional phraseology which even the N. T.

letter-writers were content to use."1 Deissmann2 has insisted on

a sharp distinction between letters and epistles, the letter being

private and instinct with life, the epistles being written for the

public eye, an open letter, a literary letter. This is a just dis-

tinction. A real letter that has become literature is different

from an epistle written as literature. In the papyri therefore we

find all grades of culture and of illiteracy, as one would to-day if

one rummaged in the rubbish-heaps of our great cities. One need

not be surprised at seeing τὸν μήτρως, τὸν θέσιν, and even worse

blunders. As a sample Jannaris3 gives ἀξειωθεὶς ὑπαιρατῶν γρά-

ματα μεὶ εἰδώτων, for ἐξιωθεὶς ὑπ’ αὐτῶν γράμματα μὴ εἰδότων. Part

of these are crass errors, part are due to identity of sounds in

pronunciation, as ο and ω, ει and η, ει and ι. Witkowski4 properly

insists that we take note of the man and the character of work

in each case.

          It is obvious that by the papyri and the inscriptions we gain a

truer picture of the situation. As a specimen of the vernacular

κοινή of Egypt this letter of the school-boy Theon to his father has

keen interest (see 0. P. 119). It belongs to the second century

A.D. and has a boy's mistakes as well as a boy's spirit. The writ-

ing is uncial.

 

            1 Moulton, Prol., p. 27 f.

            2 B. S., 1901, pp. 3-59. "The distinction holds good, even if we cannot go

all the way with Deissmann in pronouncing all the Pauline writings 'letters'

rather than 'Epistles.'" G. Milligan, Gk. Pap., p. xxxi.

            3 Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 7. Quoted from Griech. Urk., Berlin, 13 2, belonging

to year 289 A.D.

            4 The papyri contain "exempla ex vita deprompta, cum sermo scripto-

rum ut solutae ita poeticae orationis nullo modo veram nobis imaginem ser-

monis illius aetatis praebeat. Etenim sermo, quem apud auctores hellinisticos

deprehendimus, arti, non vitae, debetur." Witkowski Prodr. gr. pap. Graec.,

etc., 1898, p. 197. He urges that in case of variations in forms or syntax one

must inquire "utrum ab alia qua dialecto petita sit an in Aegypto nata, utrum

ab homine Graeco an barbaro formata." Ib., p. 198. He thinks it is necessary

that we have "librum de sermone papyrorum, librum de sermone titulorum,

librum de sermone auctorum poeticae et pedestris orationis illius aetatis,

librum de dialecto Macedonica tractantem." Ib.

 

 


                                THE KOINH                                                71

 

          θέων θέωνι τῷ πατρὶ χαίρειν.

            καλῶς ἐποίησες.  οὐκ ἀπένηχές με μετ’ ἐ-

            σοῦ εἰς πόλιν.  ἡ οὐ θέλις ἀπενέκκειν με-

            τ’ ἐσοῦ εἰς   Ἀλεξανδρίαν οὐ μὴ γράψω σε ἐ-

            πιστολὴν οὔτε λαλῶ σε, οὔτε υἱγένω σε,

            εἶτα. ἂν δὲ ἔλθῃς εἰς  Ἀλεξανδρίαν, οὐ

            μὴ λάβω χεῖραν παρά  (σ)ου οὔτε πάλι χαίρω

            σε λυπόν. ἂμ μὴ θέλῃς ἀπενέκαι μ[ε]

            ταῦτα γε(ί)νετε. καὶ ἡ μήτηρ μου εἶπε  Ἀρ-

            χελάῳ ὅτι ἀναστατοῖ με· ἄρρον αὐτόν.

            καλῶς δὲ ἐποίησες.  δῶρά μοι ἔπεμψε[ς]

            μεγάλα ἀράκια.  πεπλάνηκαν ἡμῶς ἐκε[],

            τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ιβ’ ὅτι ἔπλευσες.  λυπὸν πέμψον εἰ[ς]

            με, παρακαλῶ σε.  ἂμ μὴ πέμψῃς οὐ μὴ φά-

            γω, οὐ μὴ πείνω· ταῦτα. 

                                                ἐρῶσθέ σε εὔχ(ομαι).

  Τῦβι ιηʹ.

On the other side:

                    ἀπόδος θέωνι []πὸ θεωνᾶτος υἱῶ.

 

          Milligan (Greek Papyri, p. xxxii) admits that there may be now

a temptation "to exaggerate the significance of the papyri." But

surely his book has a wonderful human, not to say linguistic, in-

terest. Take this extract from a letter of Hilarion to his wife

Alis (P. Oxy. 744 B.C. 1):  Ἐὰν πολλαπολλῶν τέκῃς, ἐὰν ἦν ἄρσενον,

ἄφες, ἐὰν ἦν θήλεα, ἔκβαλε.

          (g) RESUME. To all intents and purposes the vernacular κοινή

is the later vernacular Attic with normal development under

historical environment created by Alexander's conquests. On

this base then were deposited varied influences from the other

dialects, but not enough to change the essential Attic character

of the language. There is one κοινή everywhere (cf. Thumb, Griech.

Spr., p. 200). The literary κοινή was homogeneous, while the

vernacular κοινή was practically so in spite of local variations

(cf. Angus, The Koine: "The Language of the N. T.," Prince.

Theol. Rev., Jan., 1910, p. 78 f.). In remote districts the language

would be Doric-coloured or Ionic-coloured.

          Phonetics and Orthography. It is in pronunciation that the

most serious differences appear in the κοινή (Moulton, Prol., p. 5).

We do not know certainly how the ancient Attic was pronounced,

though we can approximate it. The modern Greek vernacular

pronunciation is known. The κοινή stands along the path of

progress, precisely where it is hard to tell. But we know enough


72     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

not to insist too strongly on "hair-splitting differences hinging

on forms which for the scribe of our uncials had identical value

phonetically, e.g. οι, η, ῃ, υ, ι=ee in feet, or αι=ε (Angus, op. cit.,

p. 79). Besides itacisms the ι-monophthongizing is to be noticed

and the equalizing of ο and ω. The Attic ττ is σσ except in a few

instances (like ),( ἐλάττων, κρείττων). The tendency is toward de-

aspiration except in a few cases where the reverse is true as a

result of analogy (or a lost digamma). Cf. ἐφ’ ἑλπίδι. Elision is not

so common as in the Attic, but assimilation is carried still further

(cf. ἐμμέσῳ). There is less care for rhythm in general, and the

variable final consonants ν and ς appear constantly before con-

sonants. The use of –ει– for –ιει– in forms like πεῖν, and ταμεῖον

probably comes by analogy. Οὐθείς and μηθείς are the common

forms till 100 B.C. when οὐδείς and μηθείς begin to regain their

ascendency.

          Vocabulary. The words from the town-life (the stage, the mar-

ket-place) come to the front. The vocabulary of Aristophanes is

in point. There was an increase in the number of diminutive

forms. The κοινή was not averse to foreign elements if they were

useful. Xenophon is a good illustration of the preparation for

the κοινή. Cf. Radermacher, N. T. Gr., p. 8.

          Word-Formation. There is the natural dropping of some old

suffixes and the coining of new suffixes, some of which appear in

the modern Greek vernacular. The number of compound words

by juxtaposition is greatly increased, like πληρο-φορέω, χειρό-γραφον.

In particular two prepositions in compounds are frequent, like

συν-αντι-λαμβάνομαι. New meanings are given to old words.

          Accidence. In substantives the Ionic –ρης, not –ρας, is common,

bringing nouns in –ρα into harmony with other nouns of the first

declension (Thackeray, Gr. of the 0. T. in Gk., p. 22). The Attic

second declension disappears. Some feminine nouns in –ος be-

come masculine. The third declension is occasionally assimilated

to the first in forms like νύκραν, θυγατέραν. Contraction is absent

sometimes in forms like ὀρέων. Both χάριν and χάριτα occur.

Adjectives have forms like ἀσφαλῆν, πλήρης indeclinable, πᾶν for

πάντα (cf. μέγαν), δυσί for δυοῖν. The dual, in fact, has disappeared

in all inflections and conjugations. Pronouns show the disap-

pearance of the dual forms like ἑκάτερος and πότερος.  Τίς is used

sometimes like ὅστις, and ὃς ἐάν is more frequent than ὃς ἄν about

A.D. 1. Analogy plays a big part in the language, and this is proof

of life. In the verb there is a general tendency toward simpli-

fication, the two conjugations blending into one (μι verbs going).


                                         THE KOINH                                          73

 

New presents like ἀποκτέννω, ὀπτάνω, are formed. There is con-

fusion in the use of —άω and –έω verbs. We find γίνομαι, γινώσκω.

The increase of the use of first aorist forms like ἔσχα (cf. εἶπον and

εἶπα in the older Greek). This first aorist termination appears

even in the imperfect as in εἶχα. The use of —οσαν (εἴχοσαν, ἔσχο-

σαν) for —ον in the third plural is occasionally noticeable. The

form —αν (δέδωκαν) for —ασι may be due to analogy of this same

first aorist. There is frequent absence of the syllabic augment

in the past perfect, while in compound verbs it is sometimes

doubled like ἀπεκατέστησαν. The temporal augment is often ab-

sent, especially with diphthongs. We have —τωσαν rather than

ντων, —σθωσαν rather than —σθων.

          Syntax. There is in general an absence of many Attic refine-

ments. Simplicity is much more in evidence. This is seen in the

shorter sentences and the paratactic constructions rather than

the more complex hypotactic idioms. The sparing use of parti-

cles is noticeable. There is no effort at rhetorical embellishment.

What is called "Asianism" is the bombastic rhetoric of the arti-

ficial orators. Atticism aims to reproduce the classic idiom. The

vernacular κοινή is utterly free from this vice of Asianism and

Atticism. Thackeray (op. cit., p. 23) notes that "in the breach

of the rules of concord is seen the widest deviation from classical

orthodoxy." This varies a great deal in different writers as the

papyri amply testify. The nominativus pendens is much in evi-

dence. The variations in case, gender and number of substan-

tives, adjectives and verbs are frequent κατὰ σύνεσιν. The neuter

plural is used with either a singular or plural verb. The com-

parative does duty often for the superlative adjective. The

superlative form usually has the elative sense. Πρῶτος is com-

mon (as sometimes in older Greek) when only two are compared.

 Ἑαυτῶν occurs for all three persons. The accusative is regaining

its old ascendency. There is an increase in the use of the accu-

satives with verbs and much freedom in the use of transitive

and intransitive verbs. The growth in the use of prepositions

is very marked both with nouns and in composition, though some

of the old prepositions are disappearing. Few prepositions occur

with more than two cases. Phrases like βλέπω ἀπό show a de-

parture from the old idiom. New adverbial and prepositional

phrases are coming into use. The cases with prepositions are

changing. The instrumental use of ἐν is common. The optative

is disappearing. The future participle is less frequent. The in-

finitive (outside τοῦ, ἐν τῷ, εἰς τό and the inf.) is receding before


74      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

ἵνα, which is extending its use very greatly. There is a wider use

of ὅτι. Everywhere it is the language of life and not of the books.

The N. T. use of expressions like εἰς τὸ ὄνομα, δύο δύο, once cited

as Hebraisms, is finding illustration in the papyri (cf. Deissmann,

Light, etc., p. 123 f.). Μή begins to encroach on οὐ, especially

with infinitives and participles. The periphrastic conjugation is

frequently employed. The non-final use of  ἵνα is quite marked.

Direct discourse is more frequent than indirect. Clearness is

more desired than elegance. It is the language of nature, not of

the schools.

          V. The Adaptability of the Κοινή to the Roman World. It is

worth while to make this point for the benefit of those who may

wonder why the literary Attic could not have retained its suprem-

acy in the Graeco-Roman world. That was impossible. The

very victory of the Greek spirit made necessary a modern com-

mon dialect. Colonial and foreign influences were inevitable and

the old classical culture could not be assimilated by the Jews

and Persians, Syrians, Romans, Ethiopians. "In this way a Pan-

hellenic Greek sprang up, which, while always preserving all its

main features of Attic grammar and vocabulary, adopted many

colonial and foreign elements and moreover began to proceed in a

more analytical spirit and on a simplified grammar."1 The old

literary Attic could not have held its own against the Latin, for

the Romans lamented that they were Hellenized by the Greeks

after conquering them.2 Spenserian English would be an af-

fectation to-day. The tremendous vitality of the Greek is seen

precisely in its power to adjust itself to new conditions even to

the present time. The failure of the Latin to do this not only

made it give way before the Greek, but, after Latin became the

speech of the Western world during the Byzantine period, the ver-

nacular Latin broke up into various separate tongues, the modern

Romance languages. The conclusion is irresistible therefore that

the κοινή possessed wonderful adaptability to the manifold needs

of the Roman world.3 It was the international language. Nor

must one think that it was an ignorant age. What we call the

"Dark Ages" came long afterwards. "Let me further insist that

this civilization was so perfect that, as far as it reached, men were

 

            1 Jannaris, Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 6.

            2 Cf. Sharp, Epictetus and the N. T. (1914), for useful comparison of lan-

guage and thought of Epictetus and the N. T.

            3 Lafoscade, Infl. du Lat. sur le Grec, pp. 83-158, in Biblioth. de 1'Ecole des

hautes et., 1892.


                                         THE KOINH                                         75

 

more cultivated in the strict sense than they ever have been

since. We have discovered new forces in nature; we have made

new inventions; but we have changed in no way the methods of

thinking laid down by the Greeks . . . The Hellenistic world was

more cultivated in argument than we are nowadays."1 Moulton2

cannot refrain from calling attention to the remarkable fact that

the new religion that was to master the world began its career

at the very time when the Mediterranean world had one ruler

and one language. On the whole it was the best language possible

for the Groeco-Roman world of the first century A.D.

 

 

            1 Mahaffy, Prog. of Hellen. in Alex. Ernp., 1905, p. 137. He adds (p. 111):

"The work of Alexandria was a permanent education to the whole Greek-

speaking world; and we know that in due time Pergamum began to do similar

work."

            2 Prol., p. 6. See also Breed, Prep. of the World for Chr., 1904, ch. IX,

The Hellenizing of the Nations, and ch. XI, The Unification of the World.

Jannaris (op. cit., p. 8) indeed puts the LXX, N. T. and many pap. into "the

Levantine group" of the literary language, but this is a wrong assignment

for both the LXX and the N. T.


 


 

CHAPTER IV:   THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH

 

          I. The New Testament Chiefly in the Vernacular Κοινή. Ob-

serve "chiefly," for not quite all the N. T. is wholly in the ver-

nacular κοινή as will be shown.1 But the new point, now obvious

to every one, is just this, that the N. T. is in the normal κοινή of

the period. That is what one would have looked for, when you

come to think of it. And yet that is a recent discovery, for the

Purists held that the N. T. was in pure Attic, while the Hebraists,

explained every peculiarity as a Hebraism. The Purists felt that  

revelation could only come in the "best" Greek, and hence it had

to be in the Attic. This, as we now know, could only have been

true if the N. T. writers had been Atticistic and artificial stylists.

So the Hebraists got the better of the argument and then overdid

it. The most popular language in the N. T. is found in the

Synoptic Gospels. Even Luke preserves the words of Jesus in

colloquial form. The Epistle of James and the Johannine writings

reflect the vernacular style very distinctly. We see this also in

the Epistles of Peter (Second Peter is very colloquial) and Jude.

The colloquial tone is less manifest in Acts, some of Paul's Epistles

and Hebrews. Cf. Deissmann, Light from the Ancient East, p. 63f.

Wellhausen (Einl., p. 9) stresses the fact that in the Gospels the

Greek spoken by the people makes its entry into literature.2

          (a) NOT A BIBLICAL GREEK. As late as 1893 Viteau3 says: "Le

grec du N. T. est une variete du grec hebraisant." Again: "C'est

par le grec des LXX qu'il faudrait expliquer, le plus souvent, le

grec du N. T."4 Viteau is aware of the inscriptions and the pa-

pyri and even says:  "The Greek of the N. T. must be compared

continually with the post-classical Greek in its various branches:

with the Greek of the profane writers, the Greek of the inscrip-

 

            1 Cf. Deissmann, Light, pp. 55, 69.

            2 Cf. Moulton, N. T. Gk. (Camb. Bibl. Ess., pp. 488 ff.) who notes a special

deficiency in Gk. culture in Mark's Gospel and the Apocalypse.

            3 Etude sur le Grec du N. T., Le Verbe, p. liv.                4 Ib., p. lv.

 

                                               76


 THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH      77

 

tions of the Alexandrian and Graeco-Roman periods, the He-

braizing Greek, finally the Christian Greek."1 But he labours

under Hatch's false idea of a distinct biblical Greek of which the

N. T. is a variety; both of these ideas are erroneous. There is no

distinct biblical Greek, and the N. T. is not a variety of the LXX

Greek. Jowett2 over forty years ago said: "There seem to be

reasons for doubting whether any considerable light can be

thrown on the N. T. from inquiry into language." That proph-

ecy is now almost amusing in the light of modern research.

Simcox3 admitted that "the half-Hebraized Greek of the N. T. is

neither a very elegant nor a very expressive language," but he

found consolation in the idea that "it is a many-sided language,

an eminently translatable language." Dr. Hatch4 felt a reaction

against the modern Atticistic attitude toward the N. T. language:

"In almost every lexicon, grammar and commentary the words

and idioms of the N. T. are explained, not indeed exclusively, but

chiefly, by a reference to the words and idioms of Attic historians

and philosophers." In this protest he was partly right, but he

went too far when he insisted that5 "biblical Greek is thus a

language which stands by itself. What we have to find in study-

ing it is what meaning certain Greek words conveyed to a Semitic

mind."

          Dr. Hatch's error arose from his failure to apply the Greek in-

fluence in Palestine to the language of Christianity as he had done

to Christian study. Judea was not an oasis in the desert, but was

merged into the Graeco-Roman world. Rothe6 had spoken "of a

language of the Holy Ghost. For in the Bible it is evident that

the Holy Spirit has been at work, moulding for itself a distinc-

tively religious mode of expression out of the language of the

country." Cremer,7 in quoting the above, says; "We have a very

clear and striking proof of this in N. T. Greek:" Winer8 had in-

deed seen that “the grammatical character of the N. T. language

has a very slight Hebrew colouring,” but exactly how slight he

could not tell. Winer felt that N. T. Greek was "a species of a

species," "a variety of later Greek," in a word, a sort of dialect.

In this he was wrong, but his notion (op. cit., p. 3) that a gram-

mar of the N. T. should thus presuppose a grammar of the later

 

            1 Ib., p.                                                 4 Ess. in Bibl. Gk., 1889, p. 2.

            2 Ess. and Rev., P. 477.                         5 Ib., p. 11.

            3 Lang. of the N. T., 1890, p. 20.                       6 Dogmatik, 1863, p. 238.

            7 Biblico-Theol. Let. of N. T. Gk., 1892, p. iv.

            8 W.-M., 1877, p. 38. Cf. W.-Sch., p. 28.


78      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

Greek or κοινή is quite right, only we have no such grammar even

yet. Winer made little use of the papyri and inscriptions (p. 21

ft. n.). We still sigh for a grammar of the κοινή though Thumb

has related the κοινή to the Greek language as a whole. Kennedy1

contended that there was "some general characteristic" about

the LXX and N. T. books, which distinctly marked them off from

the other Greek books; but "they are both children of the same

parent, namely, the colloquial Greek of the time. This is the secret

of their striking resemblance." Even in the Hastings' Dictionary

Thayer2 contends for the name "Hellenistic Greek" as the proper

term for N. T. Greek. That is better than "biblical" or "Jew-

ish" Greek, etc. But in simple truth we had better just call it

N. T. Greek, or the Greek of the N. T., and let it go at that. It is

the Greek of a group of books on a common theme, as we would

speak of the Greek of the Attic orators, the Platonic Greek, etc.

It is not a peculiar type of Greek except so far as that is due

the historical conditions, the message of Christianity, and the

peculiarities of the writers. Deissmann,3  however, is the man

who has proven from the papyri and inscriptions that the N. T.

Greek is not a separate variety of the Greek language. He denies

that the N. T. is like the LXX Greek, which was "a written Sem-

itic-Greek which no one ever spoke, far less used for literary pur-

poses, either before or after."4 Blass5 at first stood out against

this view and held that "the N. T. books form a special group--

one to be primarily explained by study," but in his Grammar of

N. T. Greek he changed his mind and admitted that "a grammar

of the popular language of that period written on the basis of all

these various authorities and remains" was better than limiting

oneself "to the language of the N. T."6 So Moulton7 concludes:

"The disappearance of that word 'Hebraic' from its prominent

place in our delineation of N. T. language marks a change in our

conceptions of the subject nothing less than revolutionary." The

new knowledge of the κοινή has buried forever the old controversy;

between Purists and Hebraists.8 The men who wrote the N. T.

 

            1 Sour. of N. T. Gk., 1895, p. 146.

            2 Art. Lang. of the N. T., Hast. D. B., 1900.

            3 B. S., 1901; Hell. Griech., Hauck's Realencyc. etc.

            4 B. S., p. 67.                                                    6 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 2.

            5 Theol. Literaturzeit., 1895, p. 487.                  7 Prol., p. 1.

            8 Thumb, Griech. Spr. etc., p. 120. It lasted "solange die biblische

citat als etwas isoliertes betrachtet wurde." Thumb attacks the idea of

N. T. dialect or a peculiar biblical variety of the κοινή, pp. 162-201. For his-

tory of the Purist controversy see W.-Th. § 1, W.-Sch. § 2.


THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH     79

 

were not aloof from the life of their time. "It embodied the

lofty conceptions of the Hebrew and Christian faith in a language

which brought them home to men's business and bosoms."1

Wackernagel understates the matter: "As little as the LXX does

the N. T. need to be isolated linguistically."2

 

          (b) PROOF THAT N. T. GREEK IS IN THE VERNACULAR Κοινή. The

proof is now at hand. We have it in the numerous contemporary

Greek inscriptions already published and in the ever-increasing

volumes of papyri, many of which are also contemporary. As

early, as 1887 a start had already been made in using the inscrip-

tions to explain the N. T. by E. L. Hicks.3 He was followed by

W. M. Ramsay,4 but it is Deissmann who has given us most of

the proof that we now possess, and he has been ably seconded by

J. Hope Moulton. Deissmann5 indeed insists:  "If we are ever in

this matter to reach certainty at all, then it is the inscriptions

and the papyri which will give us the nearest approximation to

the truth." Hear Deissmann6 more at length: "Until the papyri

were discovered there were practically no other contemporary

documents to illustrate that phase of the Greek language which

comes before us in the LXX and N. T. In those writings, broadly,

what we have, both as regards vocabulary and morphology, and

not seldom as regards syntax as well, is the Greek of ordinary

intercourse as spoken in the countries bordering on the Mediter-

ranean, not the artifilcial Greek of the rhetoricians and litterateurs,

strictly bound as it was by technical rules. This language of or-

dinary life, this cosmopolitan Greek, shows unmistakable traces

of a process of development that was still going on, and in many

respects differs from the older dialects as from the classical

 

            1 Thayer, Hast. D.. BL, art. Lang. of the N. T., III, p. 366.

            2 Die griech. Spr. (Die Kult. der Gegenw., Tl. I, Abt. 8), p. 309.

            3 Cl. Rev., 1887.

            4 Exp. Times, vol. X, pp. 9 ff.

            5 B. S., p. 81. Deissmann calls attention also to a booklet by Walch,

Observ. in Matthaeun graecis inscr., 1779. So in 1850, Robinson in the

Pref. to his N. T. Lex. says: "It was, therefore, the spoken language of

common life, and not that of books, with which they became acquainted";

cf. also the works of Schweizer, Nachmanson, Dittenberger, etc.

            6 Encyc. Bibl., art. Papyri. "At the time when the ancient Greek culture

was in conflict with Christianity, the assailants pointed sarcastically at the

boatman's idiom of the N. T., while the defenders, glorying in the taunt,

made this very homeliness their boast. Latin apologists were the first to

make the hopeless attempt to prove that the literary form of the Bible as a

whole, and of the N. T. in particular, was artistically perfect." Deissmann,

Exp. Times, Nov., 1906, p. 59; cf. also Norden, Kunstpr., II, pp. 512 f., 526 f.


80    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

Attic." As Moulton1 puts it, "the Holy Ghost spoke absolutely

in the language of the people."

          The evidence that the N. T. Greek is in the vernacular κοινή is

partly lexical and partly grammatical, though in the nature of

the case chiefly lexical. The evidence is constantly growing. See

Deissmann, Bible Studies, Light from the Ancient East; Moulton

and Milligan's "Lexical Notes on the Papyri" (The Expositor,

1908). We give first some examples of words, previously sup-

posed to be purely "biblical," now shown to be merely popular

Greek because of their presence in the papyri or inscriptions:

ἀγάπη, ἀκατάγνωστος, ἀναζάω, ἀναστατόω, ἀντιλήμπτωρ, ἀλλογενής,

ἀφιλάργυρος, αὐθεντέω, βροχή, ἔναντι, ἐνδιδύσκω, ἐνώπιον, ἐπικατάρατος,

ἐπισυναγωγή, εὐάρεστος, εὐπροσωπέω, ἱερατεύω, ἱματίζω, καταπέτασμα,

καταγγελεύς, κατήγωρ, καθαρίζω, κόκκινος, κυριακός, λειτουργικός, λογεία,

νεόφυτος, ὀφειλή, παραβολεύομαι, περισσεία, πληροφορέω, προσκαρτέρησις,

προσκυνητής, προσευχή, πρωτότοκος, σιτομέτριον, συναντιλαμβάνομαι,

φιλοπρωτεύω, φρεναπάτης, etc. For a lively discussion of these

words see Deissmann (Bible Studies, pp. 198-247; Light, etc., pp.

69-107). The recovery of the inscription on the marble slab that

warned the gentiles from the ἱερόν is very impressive. Μηθένα

ἀλλογονῆ εἰσπορεύεσθαι ἐντὸς τοῦ περὶ τὸ ἱερὸν τρυφάκτου καὶ περιβόλου.

ὃς δ’ ἂν ληφθῇ ἑαυτῶι αἴτιος ἔστιν διὰ τὸ ἐξακολουθεῖν θάνατον. The

words above are no longer biblical ἅπαξ λεγόμενα. But this is

not all. Many words which were thought to have a peculiar

meaning in the LXX or the N. T. have been found in that very

sense in the inscriptions or papyri, such as ἀδελφός in the sense of

‘common brotherhood,' ἀθέτησις, ἀμετανόητος, ἀμφότεροι= πάντες, ἀνα-

στρέφομαι, ἀναφέρω, ἀντίλημψις, ἀπέχω, ἀπόκριμα, ἀποτάσσομαι, ἀρετή,

 ἀρκετός,   Ἀσιάρχης, ἄσημος, ἀπάζομαι, ἄτοπος, βαστάζω, βεβαίωσις,

βιάζομαι, βούλομαι, γένημα, γογγύζω, γραμματεύς, γράφω, δειπνέω, δέον

ἐστί, διαβάλλω, διασείω, δίκαιος, διότι = ὅτι, διχοτομέω, δοκίμιος, δόκι-

μος, δῶμα, ἐάν = ἄν, εἶ μήν, εἶδος, εἰς, ἐκτένεια, ἐκτός, ἐκτινάσσω, ἐν,

ἐνεδρεύω, ἔνοχος, ἐντυγχάνω, ἐπιβαλών ἐπίσκοπος, ἐρωτάω, εὐσχήμων,

ἐπιούσιος, εὐχαριστέω, ἕως, ἡγοῦμαι, ἡλικία, ἡσυχία, θεμέλιον, θεωρέω,

ἴδιος, ἱλαστήριον, ἵλεως, ἱστορέω, καθαρίζω, καθαρός, καινός, κακοπάθεια,

κατά, κατάκριμα, καταντάω, κλίνη, κολάζομαι, κολλάω, κολαφίζω, κόπος,

κοράσιν, κτάομαι, κύριος, λικμάω, λίψ, λούομαι, μενοῦνγε, μαρτυροῦμαι,

μειζότερος, μικρός, μογιλάλος, μονή, ναῦς, νεκροί, νή, νομός, οἰκίας, ὁμο-

λογέω, ὄνομα, ὀψώνιον, παρά, παράδεισος, παραθήκη, παρακύπτω, παρει-

σφέρω, παρεπίδημος, πάρεσις, πάροικος, παροξύνομαι, πατροπαράδοτος,

περισπάω, περιτέμνω, πῆχυς, πλεονεκτέω, πλῆθος, πληροφορέω, πράγμα,

 

                        1 Prol., p. 5.


         THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH             81

 

πράκτωρ, πρεσβύτερος, πρόθεσις, προσέχω, προσκαρτερέω, προφήτης,

σαπρός, σκύλλω, σκόλοψ, σμαράγδινος, σουδάριον, σπεκουλάτωρ, στράσις,

στρατεύομαι, σφραγίζω, σφυρίς, συγγενής, συμβούλιον, συνείδησις, συν-

έχω, συνευδοκέω, συνευωχέομαι, συνίστημι, σῶμα, σωτήρ, τήρησις, τόπος,

υἱός, υἱὸς θεοῦ, υἱοθεσία, ὑποζύγιον, ὑποπόδιον, ὑπόστασις, φάσις, φέρω,

φθάνω, φίλος, φιλοστοργία, φιλοτιμέομαι, χάραγμα, χάρις τῷ θεῷ χρεία,

χρόνος, ψωμίον, ψυχὴν σῶσαι.  This seems like a very long list, but

it will do mere than pages of argument to convince the reader

that the vocabulary of the N. T. is practically the same as that of

the vernacular κοινή in the Roman Empire in the first century

A.D.1 This is not a complete list, for new words will be added

from time to time, and all that are known are not here included.

Besides neither Deissmann nor Moulton has put together such

a single list of words, and Kenyon's in Hastings' D. B. (Papyri)

is very incomplete. After compiling this list of words I turned to

the list in the Hastings' Dictionary of the Bible by Thayer (art.

"Language of the N. T.") where are found some thirty new words

common to the N. T. and the vernacular κοινή, words not com-

mon in the classic Greek. Thayer's list is entirely different save

a half-dozen In his list are comprised such interesting words as

ἀλληγορέω, ἀντοφθαλμέω, ἀποκαραδοκία, δεισιδαιμονία, ἐγχρίω, ἐγγίζω,

ἐπιχορηχέω, εὐδοκέω, εὐκαιρέω, θριαμβεύω, etc.  This list can be

largely increased also by the comparison between words that are

common to the N. T. and the comic poets (Aristophanes, Menan-

der, etc.) who used the language of the people. See Kennedy's

lists in Sources of N. T. Greek (ch. VI). Many of these, as Ken-

nedy shows, are theological terms, like αἰσθητήριον, ἀρραβών, βαπ-

τίζω, εὐχαριστία, κυρία, μυστήριον, φιλαδελφία. The Christians found

in common use in the Roman Empire terms like ἀδελφός, ἐπιφάνεια,

ἐπιφανής, κύριος, λειτουργία, παρουσία, πρεσβύτερος, προγράφω, σωτήρ,

σωτηρία, υἱὸς θεοῦ. They took these words with the new popular

connotation and gave them " the deeper and more spiritual

 

            1 It is not meant, or course, that the bulk of the N. T. words are new as

compared with the old Gk. Far from it. Of the 4829 words in the N. T.

(not including proper names) 3933 belong to older classic language (literary

and vernac.) while 996 are late or foreign words. See Jacquier, Hist. des Livres

du N. T., tome ler, 1006, p. 25. Thayer's Lex. claimed 767 N. T. words,

but Thayer considered 89 as doubtful and 76 as late. Kennedy (Sour. of

N. T. Gk., p. 62) found about 550 "biblical" words. But now Deissmann

admits only about 50, or one per cent. of the 5000 words in the N. T. (Light,

etc., p. 72 f.). Findlay (Exp. Gk. T., 1 Cor., p. 748) gives 5594 Greek

words in the N. T. (whole number), while Viteau (Syntaxe des Prop., p. xxx)

gives 5420.


82     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

sense with which the N. T. writings have made us familiar"

(Milligan, Greek Papyri, p. xxx). They could even find τοῦ  

μεγάλου θεοῦ εὐεργέτου καὶ σωτῆρος (GH 15, ii/B.C.). Cf. Tit. 2:13;

2 Pet. 1:1.1 The papyri often show us how we have misunder-

stood a word. So ἀπογραφή  (Lu. 2:2) is not "taxing," but "en-

rolling" for the census (very common in the papyri). But this

is not all, for the modern Greek vernacular will also augment the

list of N. T. words known to belong to the oral speech. When

this much is done, we are ready to admit the vernacular character

of all the words not known to be otherwise. The N. T. Greek is

like the κοινή also in using many compounded ("sesquipedalian")

words like ἀνεκδιήγητος, ἀνεξεραύνητος, ἀλλοτριεπίσκοπος, ὑπερεντυγ-

χάνω, etc. There is also the same frequency of diminutives, some

of which have lost that significance, as πλοιάριον, ὠτάριον, ὠτίον, etc.

The new meanings to old words are well illustrated in the list

from the papyri, to which may be added ἀνλύω, ἐντροπή, ζωοποιέω,

σχολή, χορτάζω, etc.

          As to the forms we need say less, but the evidence is to the same

effect. The papyri show examples of   Ἀκύλα (and –ου) for geni-

tive, δυῶν and δυσί, ἐγενάμην, ἔλαβα, ἔλεγας, ἔλειψα, ἦλθα, ἠνοίγην,

ἡρπάγην, ἦξα, δέδωκες, οἶδες, ἔγραψες, τιθῶ, σπείρης; the imperative

has only the long forms —τωσαν, —σθωσαν, etc. The various dialects

are represented in the forms retained in the N. T., as the Attic in

βούλει, διδόασι, ἤμελλε, etc.; the Ionic in μαχαιρης, γίνομαι, γινώσκω,

etc.; the Doric in ἀφέωνται, ἤτω, etc.; the AEolic in ἀποκτέννω, 3d

plural in —σαν, etc.; the Northwest Greek in accusative plural in

ες, perfect in —αν (3d plural), confusion of —αω and --εω verbs, etc.;

the Arcadian-Cyprian group in accusative singular in —αν, ἀφέων-

ται (also). It is curious that Thayer in Hastings' D. B., follows

Winer's error in giving ἐδίδοσαν as an example of a form like εἴχοσαν,

for the present stem is δίδο–, and σαν is merely the usual μι ending.

See Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., pp. 4-20.

          Among the syntactical peculiarities of N. T. Greek which are

less numerous, as in the κοινή, the following are worthy of note

and are found in the κοινή: the non-final use of  ἵνα; the frequent

use of the personal pronoun; the decreased use of the possessive

pronouns; disuse of the optative; increased use of ὅτι; disuse of

the future participle; use of participle with εἰμί; article with the

infinitive (especially with ἐν and εἰς); ἄφες and βλέπε with sub-

junctive without conjunction; the absence of the dual; use of

ὄφελον as conjunction; frequency of ἐάν; ὅταν, etc., with indicative;

 

            1 Moulton, Prol., p. 84; Wendland, Hell.-rom. Kult., p. 100.


  THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH      83

 

interchange of ἐάν and ἄν; μή increasing upon οὐ; decreased use of

indirect discourse; εἷς=τις; disuse of some interrogative particles;

use of ἴδιος as possessive pronoun; παρά and ὑπέρ with compara-

tives; disappearance of the superlative; frequency of prepositions;

vivid use of present tense (and perfect); laxer use of particles;

growth of the passive over the middle, etc.

          Various phrases are common both to the N. T. and to the

papyri, like δεξιὰν δίδωμι, ἐν τοῖς = 'in house of,' ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν, εἰς τὸ

διηνεκές, καθὼς γέγραπται, ἐκ συμφώνου, ἑπὶ τὸ αὐτό, κατ’ ὄναρ, κατὰ τὸ

ἔθος, οὐχ ὁ τυχών, παρέχομαι ἐμαυτόν, τὸ αὐτό φρονεῖν. "There is

placed before us in the N. T. neither a specific speech-form nor

a barbaric Jewish-Greek, but a natural phase of the Hellenistic

speech-development."1 Deissmann (Exp. Times, 1906, p. 63)

properly holds the N. T. to be the Book of Humanity because

it "came from the unexhausted forces below, and not from the

feeble, resigned culture of a worn-out upper class." Swete (0. T.

in Gk., pp. 295 ff.) shows how the LXX is influenced by the

vernacular κοινή.  As early as 1843 B. Hase (Wellhausen, Einl.,

p. 14) explained the LXX as "Volkssprache." Thackeray (Gram-

mar, pp. 22 ff.) gives a good summary of "the κοινή basis of LXX

Greek."

          II. Literary Elements in the New Testament Greek. It is true

then, as Blass2 sums it up, that "the language employed in

the N. T. on the whole, such as was spoken in the lower circles

of society, not such as was written in works of literature." The

N. T. writers were not Atticists with the artificial straining after

the antique Attic idiom. But one must not imagine that they

were mere purveyors of slang and vulgarisms. Freudenthal3

speaks of the Hellenistic Jews as "one of those societies without

a mother-tongue which have never attained to any true excel-

lence in literature." And even Mahaffy4 speaks of the Greek

learned by the Jews as "the new and artificial idiom of the trad-

ing classes" which had neither "traditions nor literature nor

those precious associations which give depth and poetry to

words." That is a curious mistake, for it was the Atticistic re-

vival that was artificial. The κοινή had all the memories of a

 

            1 Thumb, Die sprachgesch. Stell. des bibl. Griech., Theol. Runds., 1902,

p. 93. Cf. also Arnaud, Essai sur le caractere de la langue grecque du N. T.,

1899. Viteau (Et. sur le Grec du N. T., 2 vols., 1893, 1896) insists on the dis-

tinction between the lit. and the vernac. elements in the N. T.

            2 Gr. of the N. T. Gk., p. 1.                               3 Hell. Stud., 1875.

            4 Gk. Life and Thought, 1896, p. 530.


84     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

people's life. Instance Robert Burns in Scotland. It is to be

said for Mahaffy, however, that he changed his mind, for he later1

wrote:  "They write a dialect simple and rude in comparison with

Attic Greek; they use forms which shock the purists who examine

for Cambridge scholarships. But did any men ever tell a great

story with more simplicity, with more directness, with more

power? . . . Believe me against all the pedants of the world, the

dialect that tells such a story is no poor language, but the out-

come of a great and a fruitful education." The N. T. uses the

language of the people, but with a dignity, restraint and pathos

far beyond the trivial nonentities in much of the papyri remains.

All the N. T. Greek is not so vernacular as parts of the LXX.2

The papyri often show the literary κοινή and all grades of varia-

tion, while the lengthy and official inscriptions3  "often approx-

imate in style to the literary language." Long before many

words are used in literature they belong to the diction of polite

speech.4 In a word, the N. T. Greek "occupies apparently an in-

termediate position between the vulgarisms of the populace and

the studied style of the litterateurs of the period. It affords a

striking illustration of the divine policy of putting honour on

what man calls common.'"5 It would indeed have been strange

if men like Paul, Luke and the author of Hebrews had shown no

literary affinities at all. Prof. J. C. Robertson (The Classical

Weekly, March 9, 1912, 139) in an article entitled "Reasons

for Teaching the Greek N. T. in Colleges" says:  "Take the par-

able of the Prodigal Son, for instance. In literary excellence this

piece of narrative is unsurpassed. Nothing more simple, more

direct, more forceful can be adduced from among the famous

passages of classical Greek literature. It is a moving tragedy of

 

            1 Prog. of Hellen. in Alex. Emp., 1905, p. 114 f. Cf. Schurer, Jew. Peo.

in Time of Jes. Ch., div. II, vol. I, pp. 11 ff., Hellen. in the Non-Jew. Regions,

Hellen. in the Jew. Regions. He shows how Gk. and Lat. words were common

in the Aram. and how thoroughly Gk. the Jews of the Dispersion were. On

this point see Schurer, Diaspora, in ext. vol. of Hast. D. B. "Greek was the

mother-tongue of the Jews" all over the gentile world. Susemihl holds that

in Alexandria the Jews gave "quite a considerable Hebraic tinge" to the

κοινή, Gesch. der griech. Lit., Bd. II, 1892, p. 602. An excellent discussion

of the literary elements in the Gk. N. T. is to be found in Heinrici's Der lit.

Charakter der neutest. Schr. (1908). He shows also the differences between

Palestinian and Alexandrian Judaism.

            2 Cf. Geldart, Mod. Gk. in its Rela. to Anc. Gk., 1870, p. 180. Cf. also

Kennedy, Sour. of N. T. Gk., p. 65; Frankel, Altert. von Perg., 1890, p. xvii.

            3 Deissmann, B. S., p. 180.                    4 Kennedy, Sour. of N. T. Gk., p. 77.

            5 Thayer, art. Lang. of the N. T., Hast. D. B., III, 36b.


THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH     85

 

reconciliation. Yet its literary excellence is not accidental. The

elements of that excellence can be analyzed." In an age of un-

usual culture one would look for some touch with that culture.

"I contend, therefore, that the peculiar modernness, the high in-

tellectual standard of Christianity as we find it in the N. T., is

caused by its contact with Greek culture."1 In his helpful article

on N. T. Times Buhl2 underrates, as Schurer3 does, the amount

of Greek known in Palestine. It is to be remembered also that

great diversity of culture existed among the writers of the N. T.

Besides, the educated men used much the same vernacular all

over the Roman world and a grade of speech that approached

the literary standard as in English to-day.4 One is not to stress

Paul's language in 1 Cor. 2:1-4 into a denial that he could use

the literary style. It is rather a rejection of the bombastic rhet-

oric that the Corinthians liked and the rhetorical art that was so

common from Thucydides to Chrysostom.5 It is with this com-

parison in mind that Origen (c. Celsus, vii, 59 f.) speaks of Paul's

literary inferiority. It is largely a matter of standpoint. Deiss-

mann6 has done a good service in accenting the difference between

letters and epistles. Personal letters not for the public eye are,

of course, in the vernacular. Cicero's Letters are epistles written

with an eye on posterity. "In letters one does not look for trea-

tises, still less for treatises in rigid uniformity and proportion of

parts."7 There may be several kinds of letters (private, family,

pastoral or congregational, etc.). But when a letter is published

consciously as literature, like Horace's Ars Poetica, for instance,

it becomes a literary letter or epistle. Epistles may be either

genuine or unauthentic. The unauthentic may be either merely

 

            1 Mahaffy, Prog. of Hellen., p. 139.       2 Ext. vol. of Hast. D. B.

            3 Jew. Peo. in Time of Jes. Ch., div. II, vol. I, p. 47 f. He admits a wide

diffusion of a little knowledge of and easy use of Gk. among the educated

classes in Palestine.

            4 Cf. Norden, Ant. Kunstpr., Bd. II, pp. 482 ff., for discussion of literary

elements in N. T. Gk. Deissmann makes "a protest against overestimating

the literary evidence" (Theol. Runds., 1902, pp. 66 ff.; Exp. Times, 1906, p. 9)

and points out how Norden has missed it in contrasting Paul and that ancient

world, merely the contrast between non-literary prose and artistic lit. prose.

            5 Simcox, Lang. of the N. T., p. 15.

            6 B. pp. 16 ff. However, one must not think that the N. T. Epistles al-

ways fall wholly in one or the other category. Ramsay calls attention to the

“new category” in the new conditions, viz., a general letter to a congregation

Let. to the Seven Chur., p. 24).

            7 Ib., p. 11. See also Walter Lock, The Epistles, pp. 114 ff., in The Bible

and Chr. Life, 1905.


86     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

pseudonymous or real forgeries. If we examine the N. T. Letters

or Epistles in the light of this distinction, we shall see that Phile-

mon is a personal letter. The same is true of the Pastoral Epistles;

but Ephesians is more like an epistle from its general nature.

The Thessalonian, Corinthian, Galatian, Colossian, Philippian

writings are all congregational and doctrinal letters. Romans

partakes of the nature of a letter and an epistle. Jacquier, how-

ever (Histoire des Livres du N. T., 1906, tome 1er, p. 66), re-

marks that "The Pauline Epistles are often more discourse than

letter." It will thus be seen that I do not agree with Deissmann

(Bible Studies, p. 3 f.) in calling all the Pauline writings "letters"

as opposed to "epistles." Milligan (Greek Papyri, p. xxxi) like-

wise protests against the sweeping statement of Deissmann.

Deissmann gives a great variety of interesting letters from the

papyri in his Light from the Ancient East, and argues here (pp.

224-234) with passion that even Romans is just "a long let-

ter." "I have no hesitation in maintaining the thesis that all

the letters of Paul are real, non-literary letters." Hebrews is

more like an epistle, as are James, 1 John, 1 Peter, 2 Peter, Jude

while 2 and 3 John are again letters. The Letters to the Seven  

Churches again are epistles. This is a useful distinction and

shows that the N. T. writers knew how to use one of the favourite

literary methods of the Alexandrian period. Dr. Lock concludes:

"Letters have more of historic and literary interest, epistles more

of central teaching and practical guidance."1 That Paul could

use the more literary style is apparent from the address on Mars

Hill, the speech before Agrippa,2 and Ephesians and Romans.

Paul quotes Aratus, Menander and Epimenides and may have

been acquainted with other Greek authors. He seems also to

have understood Stoic philosophy. We cannot tell how extensive

his literary training was. But he had a real Hellenic feeling and

outlook. The introduction to Luke's Gospel and the Acts show

real literary skill. The Epistle to the Hebrews has oratorical flow

and power with traces of Alexandrian culture. Viteau3 reminds

 

            1 Bible and Chr. Life, p. 117. For the history and literature of ancient

letters and epistles see Deissmann, B. S.; Susemihl, Gesch. der griech. Lit.;

Overbeck, Uber die Anf. der patrist. Lit. The oldest known Gk. letter was

written on a lead tablet and belongs to the iv/B.C. and comes from near

Athens. It was discovered by Prof. Wunsch of Giessen. See art. by Dr.

Wilhelm of Athens in Jahresh. des osterreich. archaeol. Inst. (1904, vii, pp.

94 ff.).

            2 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 5.   3 Le Verbe: Synt. des Prop., p. xxx.


 THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH    87

 

us that about 3000 of the 5420 words in the Greek N. T. are

found in ancient Attic writers, while the syntax in general "obeys

the ordinary laws of Greek grammar."1 These and other N. T.

writers, as James, occasionally use classic forms like ἴσμεν, ἴστε,

ἴσασι, ἐξῄεσαν, etc. Konig2 in his discussion of the Style of Scrip-

ture finds ample illustration in the N. T. of the various literary

linguistic devices, though in varying degree. See "Figures of

Speech" (ch. XXII). But the literary element in the N. T. is sub-

ordinate to the practical and is never artificial nor strained. We

have the language of spirit and life. The difference between the

old point of view and the new is well illustrated by Hort's remark

(Notes on Orthography, p. 152 f.) when he speaks of "the popular

Greek in which the N. T. is to a certain extent written." He con-

ceives of it as literary κοινή with some popular elements. The

new and the true view is that the N. T. is written in the popular

κοινή with some literary elements, especially in Luke, Paul, He-

brews and James.

          Josephus is interesting as a background to the N. T. He wrote

his War in Aramaic and secured the help of Greek writers to

translate it, but the Antiquities was composed in Greek, probably

with the aid of similar collaborateurs) for parts of Books XVII-

XIX copy the style of Thucydides and are really Atticistic.3 It

is interesting to take a portion of 1 Maccabees as we have it

translated from the Hebrew original and compare it with the cor-

responding portion of Josephus. The Greek of 1 Macc. is, like

the LXX, translation Greek and intensely Hebraistic, while Jo-

sephus smooths out all the Hebraistic wrinkles and shifts it into

the rolling periods of Thucydides. The N. T. has slight affinities

in vocabulary, besides Josephus, with Philo, Plutarch, Polybius,

Strabo, Diodorus and a few other writers in the literary κοινή.4

          Deissmann (Light from the Ancient East, p. 64) holds that

Paul's "Greek never becomes literary." "It is never disciplined,

say, by the canon of the Atticists, never tuned to the Asian rhythm:

 

            1 W.-M., p. 37. Kennedy indeed (Sour. of N. T. Gk., p. 134) says that

80 per cent. of the N. T. words date from before 322 B.C.

            2 Hast. D. B., ext. vol.

            3 See Thackeray, art. Josephus in ext. vol. of Hast. D. B.; cf. also Schmidt,

De Flavii. Jos. Eloc., 1893. Thumb (Die griech. Spr., p. 125) and Moulton

(Prol., p. 233) accent the fact that Josephus has only one Hebraism, προστί-

θεσθαι with infinitive = הֹסִיף לְ. Cf. also Raab, De Fl. Jos. Eloc. Quest., 1890.

            4 Kennedy, Sour. of N. T. Gk., pp. 50 ff. Hoole, The Class. Elem. in the

N. T., 1888, gives an interesting list of Gk. and Rom. proper names that

occur in the N. T.


88    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

it remains non-literary." But has not Deissmann given a too

special sense to "literary"? If 1 Cor. 13 and 15, Ro. 8 and

Eph. 3 do not rise to literary flavour and nobility of thought and

expression, I confess my ignorance of what literature is.  Har-

nack (Das hohe Lied des Apostels Paulus von der Liebe und seine

religionsgeschichtliche Bedeutung, 1911) speaks of the rhythm, the

poetic form, the real oratory, the literary grace of 1 Cor. 13. The

best literature is not artificial nor pedantic like the work of the

Atticists and Asian stylists. That is a caricature of literature.

We must not forget that Paul was a man of culture as well as a

man of the people. Deissmann (Light, p. 64 f.) does admit the

literary quality of Hebrews. This epistle is more ornate as Origen

saw (Eus., Eccl. Hist., VI, xxv, 11).

          III. The Semitic Influence. This is still the subject of keen

controversy, though not in the same way that the Purists and the

Hebraists debated it. Now the point is whether the N. T. Greek

is wholly in the κοινή or whether there is an appreciable Semitic

colouring in addition. There is something to be said on both

sides of the question.

          (a) THE TRADITION. See I, (a), for proof of the error of this posi-

tion. It is certain that the idea of a special Hebraic Greek for the

N. T. is gone. Schaff1 said that the Greek spoken by the Grecian

Jews "assumed a strongly Hebraizing character," and the N. T.

Greek shared in this "sacred and Hebraizing character." Ac-

cording to Hatch2 " the great majority of N. T. words . . . ex-

press in their biblical use the conceptions of a Semitic race."

Viteau3 calls it "Hebraizing Greek," while Simcox4 speaks of "the

half-Hebraized Greek of the N. T." Reuss5 calls it "the Jewish-

Greek idiom." Hadley6 considered the "Hellenistic dialect,

largely intermixed with Semitic idioms." Westcott7 spoke of

"the Hebraic style more or less pervading the whole N. T." But

Westcott8 admitted that "a philosophical view of the N. T. lan-

guage as a whole is yet to be desired," as Hatch9 lamented that

the N. T. Greek "has not yet attracted the attention of any con-

siderable scholar." That cannot now be said after the work of

Blass, Deissmann, Moulton, Radermacher and others, and was an

overstatement then. And yet the old view of "biblical Greek"

 

            1 Comp. to the Gk. Test., 1885, pp. 22, 25.

            2 Ess. in Bibl. Gk., p. 34.                                   6 Lang. of the N. T., Smith's B. D.

            3 Synt. des Prop., p. xxxvi.                                7 Art. N. T., Smith's B. D.

            4 Lang. of the N. T., p. 20.                                8 Ib.

            5 list. of the N. T., 1885, p. 36.                          9 Ess. in Bibl. Gk., p. 1.


    THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH    89

 

for both N. T. and LXX is still championed by Conybeare and

Stock in their grammar of the Septuagint (Selections from the

Sept., 1905,, p. 22 f.). They insist, against Deissmann, on the

"linguistic unity" of the LXX and of the N. T. as opposed to the

vernacular κοινή.  They admit, of course, that the LXX is far more

Hebraic than the N. T. This sturdy contention for the old view

is interesting, to say the least. Wellhausen (Einl. in die drei ersten

Evangelien) is rather disposed to accent the "Semiticisms" (Ara-

maisms) in the Synoptic Gospels in contrast with the Attic Greek.

Nobody now, claims the N. T. Greek to be Attic in purity. "No

one denies the existence of Semiticisms; opinions are only divided

with reference to the relative proportion of these Semiticisms"

(Deissmann, Light from the Ancient East, p. 65). The old view

is dead beyond recall.

          (b) THE VIEW OF DEISSMANN AND MOULTON. Over against the

old conceptio stands out in sharp outline the view of Deissmann1

who says:  "The linguistic unity of the Greek Bible appears only

against the background of classical, not of contemporary 'pro-

fane' Greek." Note the word "only." Once more2: "The few

Hebraizing expressions in those parts of the N. T. which were in

Greek from the first are but an accidens which does not essentially

alter the fundamental character of its language." The portions

of the Synoptic Gospels which were either in Aramaic or made

use of Aramnic originals he considers on a par with the LXX.

They use translation Greek. No one "ever really spoke as he

may have translated the Logia-collection, blessed — and cramped

— as he was by the timid consciousness of being permitted to

convey the sacred words of the Son of God to the Greeks."3

Thumb4 accepts the view of Deissmann and admits "Hebraisms

in a few cases" only and then principally the meaning of words.

In 1879 Guillemard5 disclaimed any idea of being able to give

"an exhaustive exhibition of all the Hebraisms," but he "put for-

ward only a few specimens"! Moulton6 admits practically no

Hebraisms nor Aramaisms outside of "translation Greek." "Be-

tween these two extremes the N. T. writers lie; and of them all

 

            1 B. S., 1901, p. 66.                                                       2 Ib., p. 177.

            3 Ib., p. 76. "What would we give if we could recover but one papyrus

book with a few leaves containing genuine Aramaic sayings of Jesus! For

those few leaves we would, I think, part willingly with the theological out-

put of a whole century" (Deissmann, Light, p. 57).

            4 Griech. Spr. etc., p. 121.

            5 Hebraisms iii the Gk. Test., Pref.                                 6 Prol., p. 10.


90           A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

we may assert with some confidence that, where translation is

not involved, we shall find hardly any Greek expression used

which would sound strangely to speakers of the κοινή in Gentile

lands." Once more1:  "What we can assert with assurance is that

the papyri have finally destroyed the figment of a N. T. Greek

which in any material respect differed from that spoken by ordi-

nary people in daily life." Moulton2 realizes "the danger of go-

ing too far" in summing up thus the issue of the long strife

over N. T. Hebraisms. According to Moulton (p. 18) the matter

is complicated only in Luke, who, though a gentile, used Aramaic

sources in the opening chapters of the Gospel and Acts.' This new

and revolutionary view as to Semitisms is still challenged by Dal-

man3 who finds many more Aramaisms in the Synoptic Gospels

than Moulton is willing to admit.  Deissmann indeed is not dis-

posed in his later writings to be dogmatic on the subject. "The

last word has not yet been said about the proportion of Semiti-

cisms" (Expositor, Jan., 1908, p. 67). He is undoubtedly right

in the idea that many so-called Semiticisms are really "interna-

tional vulgarisms." Schurer, Theol. Literaturzeitung, 1908, p.

555, criticizes Deissmann (Licht vom Osten, 1908, p. 35) for run-

ning the parallel too close between the N. T. and the unliterary

scriptions. Both the Purists and the Hebraists were wrong.

The old view cannot stand in the light of the papyri and in-

papyri. It is truer of the LXX than of the N. T.

          Many words and idioms heretofore claimed as Hebraisms are

shown to be current in the vernacular κοινή. As specimens4 one

can mention  ἐνώπιον (לִפְנֵי; according to Winer-Liinemann, p. 201,

and "biblical" according to Kennedy, Sources of N. T. Greek,

p. 90) as found in the papyri; πρεσβύτερος in the official sense

occurs in the papyri of Egypt in combinations like πρεσβύτεροι

ἱερεῖς; ἐρωτάω= 'to beg' is in the papyri;  εἷς in sense of πρῶτος also;

 

            1 Prol., p. 18.

            2 Ib., p. 18. He quotes approvingly Deissmann's remark that "Semitisms

which are in common use belong mostly to the technical language of religion"

and they do not alter the scientific description of the language. Moulton

(Interp., July, 1906, p. 380) says: "Suffice it to say that, except so far as the

N. T. writers are quoting baldly literal translations from the LXX, or making

equally literal translations from the Aramaic in which the Lord and His

disciples usually spoke, we have no reason whatever to say that the N. T.

was composed in a Greek distinguishable from that spoken all over the Roman

Empire."

            3 Wds. of Jes., 1902.

            4 See Deissmann (B. S. and Light) and Moulton (Prol.).


          THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH       91

 

προσευχή can no longer be regarded as a word of Jewish formation

for a Jewish place of prayer, since it appears in that sense in a

Ptolemaic inscription in Lower Egypt in the III cent. B.C.; ὄνομα

occurs also in the sense of "person"; expressions like υἱὸς θανάτου

are found in the papyri; βλέπειν ἀπό occurs in a papyrus letter;

εἰς ὄνομα is in inscriptions, ostraca, papyri; δύο δύο is matched in

the papyri by τρία τρία (this idiom has been traced in Greek for

2500 years.); the instrumental use of ἐν as ἐν μαχαίρῃ is common;

the use of ἐν τῷ and the infinitive so common in Luke appears in

the papyri; and even εἰς ἀπάντησιν meets us in the papyri (Tebt.

Pap. 43, II cent. B.c.). Certainly a full list of the words and

phrases that can no longer be called Hebraisms would be very

formidable. Besides, the list grows continually under the re-

searches of Deissmann, Moulton, Mayser, Thumb, Kalker, Wit-

kowski, Milligan and other scholars. The presumption is now

clearly against a Hebraism. The balance of evidence has gone

over to the other side. But after all one has the conviction that

the joy of new discovery has to some extent blurred the vision of

Deissmann and Moulton to the remaining Hebraisms which do

not indeed make Hebraic Greek or a peculiar dialect. But enough

remain to be noticeable and appreciable. Some of these may

vanish, like the rest, before the new knowledge. The LXX,

though "translation Greek," was translated into the vernacular of

Alexandria, and one can but wonder if the LXX did not have some

slight resultant influence upon the Alexandrian κοινή itself. The

Jews were very numerous in Alexandria. "Moreover, it remains

to be considered how far the quasi-Semitic colloquialisms of the

papyri are themselves due to the influence of the large Greek-

speaking Jewish population of the Delta" (Swete, The Apocalypse

of St. John, 1906, p. cxx). Thackeray (Gr. of the O. T. in Gk.,

vol. I, p. 20) Uses the small number of Coptic words in the Greek

papyri against the notion of Hebrew influence on the κοινή in  

Egypt. However, Thackeray (p. 27) notes that the papyri so far

discovered tell us little of the private life of the Jews of Egypt and

of the Greek used by them specifically. The marshes of the Delta

were not favourable for the preservation of the papyri. The

κοινή received other foreign influences we know. The Jews of the

Dispersion spoke the vernacular κοινή everywhere, but they read

the LXX, "a written Semitic Greek which no one ever spoke, far

less used for literary purposes, either before or after."1 And yet

 

            1 Deissmann, B. S., p. 67. See also Angus, N. T. Philol., Harv. Theol.

Rev., July, 1909, p. 453. The LXX, though translation Greek (see above),


92     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

the Hellenistic Jews all over the world could not read continually

the LXX and not to some extent feel the influence of its peculiar

style. No one to-day speaks the English of the King James Ver-

sion, or ever did for that matter, for, though like Shakespeare, it

is the pure Anglo-Saxon, yet, unlike Shakespeare, it reproduces

to a remarkable extent the spirit and language of the Bible. As

Luther's German Bible largely made the German language, so the

King James Version has greatly affected modern English (both

vernacular and literary). The situation is not the same, but there

is enough of truth to justify the comparison. There are fewer

details that preserve the Semitic character, but what does not

disappear is the Hebrew cast of thought in a writer like John, for

instance. No papyrus is as much a parallel to John's Gospel as

the Book of Job, for instance. Westcottl has true insight when

he says of N. T. Greek: "It combines the simple directness of He-

brew thought with the precision of Greek expression. In this way

the subtle delicacy of Greek expression in some sense interprets

Hebrew thought." What is true of John's Gospel is true also of

James. The numerous quotations both from the LXX and the

Hebrew in the N. T. put beyond controversy the constant use of

the 0. T. in Greek on the part of the N. T. writers. Besides,

with the possible exception of Luke and the author of Hebrews,

they all knew and used Aramaic as well as Greek. The point is

that the N. T. writers were open to Semitic influence. How great

that was must be settled by the facts in the case, not by pre-

sumptions  for or against. Dr. George Milligan (Greek Papyri,

p. xxix f.) says: "In the matter of language, we have now abun-

dant proof that the so-called 'peculiarities' of biblical Greek are

due simply to the fact that the writers of the N. T. for the most

part made use of the ordinary colloquial Greek, the κοινή of their

day. This is not to say that we are to disregard altogether the

influence of ‘translation Greek,’ and the consequent presence of

undoubted Hebraisms, both in language and grammar. An over-

tendency to minimize these last is probably the most pertinent

 

is in the vern. κοινή, and thus the N. T. writers had a double point of contact

with the κοινή. Cf. Wackernagel, Theol. Lit., 1908, p. 38; Milligan, Epis. to

the Th., p. lv.

            1 Exp., 1887, p. 241. Thumb (Griech. Spr. etc., p. 132) denies any influ-

ence on the development of the Gk. But Thayer (Hast. D. B., Lang. of the

N. T., III, 40a) is not surprised to find "idioms having a distinctly Hebra-

istic flavour even in native Greek circles." Cf. also Reuss, Hist. of the N. T.,

1884, vol. I, p. 33.


   THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH      93

 

criticism that can be directed against Dr. J. H. Moulton's Pro-

legomena do his Grammar of N. T. Greek." So Dr. Swete

"deprecates the induction which, as it seems to him, is being

somewhat hastily based upon them (the papyri), that the Greek

of the N. T. has been but slightly influenced by the familiarity of

the writers with Hebrew and Aramaic" (Apocalypse of St. John,

p. cxx).

          Von Soden1 sums up the whole matter as follows: "It was

unavoidable but that the primitive Christian writers often used

compulsion with the Greek tongue and offended against its

genius. They wished to bring to expression things which, up

to that time, were foreign to the Greek spirit and only found ex-

pression in Semitic languages. And besides, it is only natural

that the phraseology of the Greek translation of the 0. T., to

which they were habituated from their youth, should uncon-

sciously flow from their pens, and still more, that when their sub-

ject-matter brought them into close contact with the 0. T. or

when they translated from the Aramaic dialect of Palestine, their

Greek should receive a foreign tinge." This by no means makes

a special N. T. dialect or even Jewish-Greek, but it admits a

real, though slight, Semitic influence even where it is not "trans-

lation Greek." This position is more nearly in accord with all

the facts as we now know them. It is pleasing to find Deissmann

(Expositor, Oct., 1907, "Philology of the Greek Bible," p. 292)

rather reacting a bit from the first extreme position. He accents

here strongly the influence of the LXX on the N. T. "It is one

of the most painful deficiencies of biblical study at the present

day that the reading of the LXX has been pushed into the back-

ground, while its exegesis has been scarcely even begun." (Ib.,

p. 293) : "A single hour lovingly devoted to the text of the Sep-

tuagint will further our exegetical knowledge of the Pauline

Epistles more than a whole day spent over a commentary." (Ib.,

p. 294): "This restoration of the Greek Bible to its own epoch is

really the distinctive feature of the work of modern scholarship."

That hits the point. We cordially agree with his remark (Exposi-

tor, Nov., 1907, p. 435) that the Semiticisms of the Greek Bible

do not place the N. T. outside of the scope of Greek philology,

but are merely its birth-marks. In the Dec. (1907) Expositor

(p. 520) Deissmann comments feelingly on the fact that the LXX

"has served the Christian Church of Anatolia in unbroken con-

tinuity down to the present day."

 

            1 Early Chr. Lit., 1906, p. 11 f.


94       A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

          (c) LITTLE DIRECT HEBREW INFLUENCE. The Hebrew was not

a living language any longer. Less than half of the 0. T. quota-

tions1 in the N. T. are from the Hebrew text. It was still read

in most of the synagogues of Palestine and it is possible that a

modernized Hebrew was in use to some extent for literary pur-

poses.2 Perhaps the Hebrew text was consulted by the N. T.

writers who used it much as a modern minister refers to his Greek

Testament. The reading of the Hebrew 0. T. would give one

dignity of style and simplicity of expression. The co-ordination

of clauses so common in the Hebrew is not confined to the Hebrew,

but is certainly in marked contrast with the highly developed sys-

tem of subordinate sentences of the Greek. But this paratactic

construction is partly Hebraic and partly colloquial. The total

absence of extended indirect discourse is a case in point also.

Compare the historical books of the N. T. with Xenophon and

Thucydides. Likewise the frequent use of καί and the sparing

use of particles may be mentioned. The pleonastic use of pro-

nouns like ἣν οὐδεὶς δύναται κλεῖσαι αὐτήν (Rev. 3:8) finds an occa-

sional parallel (Moulton) in the papyri, but none the less its

frequency in the N. T. is due to the Hebrew. The same remark

applies to the effort to express in Greek the Hebrew infinitive ab-

solute by the participle, as βλέποντες βλέψετε (Mt. 13:14), or the

instrumental, as χαρᾷ χαίρει (Jo. 3:29). Both of these construc-

tions are found in the Greek, but with far less frequency. The

use of προστίθημι with an infinitive for repetition, as προσέθετο τρίτον

πέμψαι. (Lu. 20:12) is in evident imitation of the Hebrew

Εἰ= אִם does not mean οὐ as in εἰ δοθήσεται σημεῖον (Mk. 8:12), but

is aposiopesis, the apodosis not being expressed. This use is in

the papyri. Οὐ-πᾶς in the sense of οὐδείς is due to the LXX trans-

lation of לֹא־כֹּל though Moulton (p. 246) has found in the papyri

ἄνευ and χωρίς so used with πᾶς.

          The use of ῥῆμα, in the sense of דָּבָר ‘thing’ is a Hebraism after

the LXX. The classic Greek already has λόγος in this sense. Πρό-

σωπον λαμβάνειν, נָשָׂא פָּנִים is a clear Hebraism. Προσωπολημπτέω

first appears in the N. T. So also is ἀρέσκειν ἐνώπιον< τινος rather than

ἀρέσκειν τινί a Hebraism. Cf. the circumlocutions πρὸ προσώπου τῆς

εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ (Acts 13:24) rather than the simple πρὸ αὐτοῦ.  The

frequent use of the article in address, though occasional in Greek,

 

            1 Swete, Intr. to the 0. T. in Gk., 1900, pp. 381-405.

            2 Schurer, Jew. Peo. in Times of Ch., div. II, vol. I, p. 10. "Hebrew also

continued to be the language of the learned, in which even the legal discus-

sions of the scribes were carried on."


  THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH      95

 

is like the Hebrew and Aramaic vocative. The common use of

ἦν or ἐστί and the participle suits both the Hebrew and the analy-

tic tendency of the κοινή.  Cf. the more frequent use of the instru-

mental ἐν the frequent construction εἶναι εἰς is due to ל in

Hebrew, though in itself not out of harmony with the Greek

genius. It occurs in the papyri.   Ἀπὸ προσώπου= מִפְּנֵי and πρὸ

προσώπου= לִפְנֵיare both Hebraisms. The use of διδόναι in the

sense of τιθέναι, is due to נָתַן having both senses (Thackeray, Gr.

of the 0. T. in Gk., p. 39); cf. Deut. 28:1, δώσει σε ὑπεράνω. So

ἡμέραι takes the flavour of the Hebrew יָמִִים, and εἰρήνη is used in

salutation like שָׁלוֺם. The superfluous pronoun calls for notice

also. The frequency of ἐν τῷ with the infinitive is due to בְּ. So

also υἱός occurs in some Hebraistic senses like בֶּן, but the papyri

have some examples of υἱός for ‘quality,’ ‘characteristic.’  Thack-

eray (p. 42) notes the Hebrew fondness for "physiognomical

expressions" like ὀφθαλμός, πρόσωπον, στόμα, χείρ, πούς, etc. The in-

creased use of ἀνήρ and ἄνθρωπος like אִישׁ rather than τὶς, πᾶς, ἕκαστος

must be observed. The very extensive use of prepositions is ac-

cented by the Hebrew. Καὶ ἐγένετο translates וַיְהִי. The use of

a question to express wish is like the Hebrew idiom (cf. 2 Kgs.

18:33). But these constructions are doubtless due to the LXX

rather than to Hebrew itself. It is not possible to give in clear

outline the influence of the Hebrew Bible on the N. T. apart

from the LXX and the Aramaic, though there was a little of just

that kind. Kennedy1 gives thirteen words common to the LXX

and the N. T. (Thackeray, Gr., pp. 31 ff., gives a list of "Hebra-

isms in Vocabulary") and counts "twenty Hebrew and Aramaic

words which do not occur in the LXX, e.g. ζιζάνιον, μαμωνᾶς, ῥακά,

ὡσαννά." The words in the N. T. known to be Hebrew and not

Aramaic are as follows: ἀβαδδών=אֲבַדּוֺן; ἀλληλουιά=הַלְלוּ־יָהּ; ἀμήν

 = אָמֵן; ἁρμαγεδδών=הַר מְגִדּוֺן; ἁρραβών=עֵרָכוֺן; βάτος=בַּת; βεελζεβούβ

= בַּעַל זְבוּב; βοανηργές= בְנֲי רֶגֶשׁ(cf. Dalman, Words of Jesus, p.

49); βύσσος=בּוּץ (cf. also βύσσινος); ἐβραϊστί from עֵבֶר; ἠλεί=

אֵלִי (MSS. Mt. 27:46); κάμηλος= גָּמָלἰουδΐζω, ἰουδαϊσμός, ἰουδαϊκός,

ἰουδαῖος=יְהוּדָה ; κορβᾶν=קָרְבָּן; κύμινον=כִּמּוֺן; λίβανος=לְבוֺנָה ; μάννα

= מָן; μωρέ= מֹּרֶה ; πάσχα= פֶּסַח (LXX, but same for Aramaic פַּדְהָא);

ῥαββι(εί)=רַבִּי; σαβαώθ= צְבָאוֺת; σάββατον=שַׁבָּת; σατανᾶς=שָׂטָן; σάπ-

φειρος=סַפִּיר; ὡσαννά= הוֺשַׁע נָא(Dalman, Words of Jesus,

p. 222). Some Of these were already in classical Greek (βύσσος,

 

            1 Sour. of the N. T. Gk., p. 110 f. Cf. Gregory, Prol., etc., p. 102 f., for

foreign words in the N. T.


96         A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

λίβανος, σάπφειρος). Of doubtful origin are νάρδος, νίτρον (Jer. 2:22),

συκάμινος. This is a fairly complete list of the Hebrew words in

the N. T. The Aramaic words will be given later. There are to

be added, however, the very numerous Hebrew proper names,

only a few samples of which can be given, as Μαριάμ=מִרְיָם;

Μελχισεκέκ=מַלְכִּי־צֶדֶק; Σαούλ=שָׁאוּל; Σαμουήλ= שְׁמוּאֵל; κτλ.  Deiss-

mann is correct in saying ("Papyri," Encyc. Bibl.) that lexical

Hebraisms "must be subjected to careful revision," but these

remain.

          Certain it is that the bulk of the examples of Hebraisms given

by Guillemard vanish in the light of the papyri and inscriptions.

He feared indeed that his book was "a return to old exploded

methods." It is indeed "exploded" now, for the N. T. is not

"unlike any other Greek, with one single exception, and abso-

lutely unique in its peculiarities."1 There are three ways of giv-

ing these Semitic words: mere transliteration and indeclinable,

transliteration and declinable, Greek endings to Aramaic words.

          (d) A DEEPER IMPRESS BY THE LXX. It is true that the

N. T. at many points has affinities with the LXX, the "single

exception" of Guillemard, but the LXX is not "the basis of the

Christian Greek."2 In his second volume Viteau began to see

that he had been too extreme in his notion that the N. T. was

Hebraized Greek: "The language of the N. T. is not derived from

that of the LXX; it is its sister. It is the same familiar Greek

language which one finds employed in the one or the other. But

the Greek of the LXX has exercised a considerable influence upon

that of the N. T."3 But even in this volume Viteau overestimates

the influence of the LXX on the N. T. Westcott4 had the old

idea that the N. T. language, "both as to its lexicography and

as to its grammar, is based on the language of the LXX." It is

undoubtedly true5 that a very large proportion of the N. T.

 

            1 Hebr. in the N. T., 1879, p. ix f.                      2 Schaff, Comp. to the Gk. Test., p. 23.

            3 Sujet, Compl. et Attr., 1896, p. ii.

            4 Art. N. T., Smith's B. D. Helbing in his Gr. der LXX (1907) promises

to investigate the Hebraisms in the second volume (p. iv). But he already

sees that προστιθέναι occurs in the papyri as well as constructions like ἐξ ὦν

ἐξ αὐτῶν. In general (p. vii) the LXX shows the same tendency as the rest of

the κοινή towards uniformity (the disappearance of the opt., the superl., the

2d aorist, the middle, etc.). Cf. also Sel. from the LXX by C. S. (1905)

with a brief Gr. of the LXX; Deissmann, Die Anf. der Sept.-Gr., Intern.

Wochenschr., Sept. 26, 1908.

            5 Kennedy, Sour. of N. T. Gk., p. 142 f. Cf. Brockelmann, Grundr. der

vergl. Gr. der semit. Spr. (1907).


THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH   97

 

words are found in the LXX, but there are very few words that

are found in the N. T. and the LXX and nowhere else.1 Both

the LXX and the N. T. use the current vocabulary. There are

indeed numerous theological terms that have a new meaning in

the LXX, and so in the N. T., like ἁγιάζειν, ἄφεσις, γέεννα, ἐκκλησία,

κύριος, λόγος, λυτρόω, μονογενής, πνεῦμα, σωτηρία, χριστός, κτλ. (See

longer list in Swete, Introduction to 0. T. in Greek, p. 454.) So

also many N. T. phrases are found in the LXX, like εἰκὼν

θεοῦ, ὀσμὴ εὐωδίας, πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον, λαμβάνειν πρόσωπον,

ἡ διασπορά κτλ. (ib.). The 0. T. apocryphal books also are of

interest on this point. We have a splendid treatment of the

LXX Greek by Thackeray. He shows "the κοινή basis of LXX

Greek," as to vocabulary, orthography, accidence and syntax

(pp. 16-25). He notes σσ, τεσσεράκοντα, finds ν movable before

consonants, ναός, νύκταν, πλήρης indeclinable, ἀσεβῆν, disappearance

of μι-verbs, ἤλθοσαν, ἦλθα, ἀνέβαιναν, ἑώρακαν, ὃς ἐάν, οὐθείς, nomina-

tivus pendens, even in apposition with genitive (cf. Apocalypse),

constructio ad sensum, λέγων and λέγοντες with construction like

ἀπηγγέλη λέγοντες, recitative on, neuter plurals with plural verb,

partial disappearance of the superlative and usually in elative sense,

πρῶτος instead of πρότερος, ἑαυτούς, -ῶν, --οῖς, for all three persons,

disappearance of the optative, great increase of τοῦ and the

infinitive, co-ordination of sentences with καί, genitive absolute

when noun in another case is present, blending of cases, in-

crease of adverbial phrases and prepositions, εἰμί εἰς, interchange

between ἐν and εἰς (increase of εἰς), etc. See also Psichari

(Revue des etudes juives, 1908, pp. 173-208) for a discussion of

the Semitic influence on the N. T. Greek. The use of εἰμί  

occurs occasionally in the papyri, the inscriptions and κοινή

writers, but it is extremely common in the LXX because of the

Hebrew  ל.  In the realm of syntax the LXX is far more Hebra-

istic than the N. T., for it is a translation by Jews who at

many points slavishly follow the Hebrew either from ignorance

of the Hebrew or the Greek, perhaps sometimes a little of both.

B in Judges, Ruth, 2-4 Kings, has ἐγώ εἰμι with indicative, as

ἐγώ εἰμι καθίσομαι (Judges 6: 18).2 BA in Tobit 5:15 have ἔσομαι

διδόναι. B in Eccl. 2:17 has ἐμίσησα σὺν τὴν ζωήν=אֶת־הַחַיִּים.

 

            1 The 150 words out of over (?) 4800 (not counting proper names) in the 

N. T. which Kennedy (Sour. of N. T. Gk., p. 88) gives as "strictly peculiar to

the LXX and N. T." cut a much smaller figure now. New pap. may remove

many from the list that are still left.

            2 Cf. Swete, Intr. to 0. T. in Gk., p. 308.


98     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

Swete1 finds this misunderstanding of אֶת common, in A in Ec-

clesiastes and six times in 3 Kings. It is the characteristic of

Aquila.2 No such barbarisms as these occur in the N. T., though

the "wearisome iteration of the oblique cases of personal pro-

nouns answering to the Hebrew suffixes" finds illustration to

some extent in the N. T. books, and the pleonastic use of the pro-

noun after the Greek relative is due to the fact that the Hebrew

relative is indeclinable.3 The N. T. does not have such a con-

struction as ἤρξατο τοῦ οἰκοδομεῖν (2 Chron. 3:1), though τοῦ εἰσελ-

θεῖν with ἐγένετο (Ac. 10:25) is as awkward an imitation of the

Hebrew infinitive construct. The LXX translators had great

difficulty in rendering the Hebrew tenses into Greek and were

often whimsical about it. It was indeed a difficult matter to put

the two simple Hebrew timeless tenses into the complicated and

highly developed Greek system, and "Vav conversive" added to

the complexity of the problem. Conybeare and Stock, Selections

from the LXX, p. 23, doubt if the LXX Greek always had a

meaning to the translators, as in Num. 9:10; Deut. 33:10.

The LXX Greek is indeed "abnormal Greek,"4 but it can be un-

derstood.  Schurer5 is wrong when he calls it "quite a new lan-

guage, swarming with such strong Hebraisms that a Greek could

not understand it." It is indeed in places "barbarous Greek," but

the people who spoke the vernacular κοινή could and did make it

out. Many of the Hellenistic Jews knew no Hebrew or Ara-

maic but only the κοινή. The Greek proselyte, like the Ethiopian

eunuch, could read it, if he did need a spiritual interpreter. Schu-

rer,6 who credits the Palestinian Jews with very little knowledge

of the current Greek, considers "the ancient anonymous Greek

translation of the Scriptures" to be "the foundation of all Ju-

dae-Hellenistic culture." He is indeed right in contrasting the

hardness of Palestinian Pharisaism with the pliable Hellenistic

Judaism on the soil of Hellenism.7  But the Jews felt the Greek

spirit (even if they could not handle easily oratio obliqua) not

only in the Diaspora, but to a large extent in the cities of Pales-

tine, especially along the coast, in Galilee and in the Decapolis.

 

            1 Intr. to 0. T. in Gk., p. 308.

            2 Use should be made of the transl..of Aquila, Theodotion and Symmachus,

though they are of much less importance. Cf. Swete, p. 457 f.

            3 Swete, ib., p. 307.                               4 Moulton, Prol., p. 13.

            5 Hist. of Jew. Peo. in Time of Ch., div. II, vol. III, p. 163.

            6 Ib., vol. I, p. 47 f., and div. II, vol. III, p. 159.

            7 Ib., p. 157.


   THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH      99

 

On the spread of Greek in Palestine see Milligan, N. T. Documents,

pp. 39 ff. The prohibition,1 about the time of the siege of Jerusa-

lem, against a Jew teaching his son Greek, shows that it had previ-

ously been done. The quotations in the N. T. from the 0. T. show

the use of the LXX more frequently than the Hebrew, sometimes

the text quoted in the Synoptics is more like that of A than B,

sometimes more like Theodotion than the LXX.2 In the Synoptic

Gospels the quotations, with the exception of five in Matthew

which are more like the Hebrew, closely follow the LXX. In

John the LXX is either quoted or a free rendering of the Hebrew

is made. The Acts quotes from the LXX exclusively. The

Catholic Epistles use the LXX. The Epistle to the Hebrews "is

in great part a catena, of quotations from the LXX."3 In Paul's

Epistles more than half of the direct quotations follow the LXX.

Here also the text of A is followed more often than the text of B.

Swete4 even thinks that the literary form of the N. T. would

have been very different but for the LXX. The Apocalypse in-

deed does not formally quote the 0. T., but it is a mass of allu-

sions to the LXX text. It is not certain5 that the LXX was

used in the synagogues of Galilee and Judea, but it is clear that

Peter, James, Matthew and Mark, Jewish writers, quote it, and

that they represent Jesus as using it. In the Hellenistic syna-

gogues of Jerusalem it would certainly be read. It would greatly

facilitate a just conclusion on the general relation of the N. T.

Greek to the LXX Greek if we had a complete grammar and a

dictionary of the LXX, though we are grateful for the luminous

chapter of Swete on the Greek of the Septuagint in his Introduc-

tion to the 0. T. in Greek; to Kennedy for his Sources of N. T.

Greek; to Hatch for his Essays in Biblical Greek; to Deissmann for

his Bible Studies and his Philology of the Greek Bible (1908); to

Helbing for his very useful Grammatik, and especially to Thack-

 

            1 Megilla, I, 8. Cf. Hamburger, Realencyc., art. Griechentum; R. Meister,

Prol. zu einer Gr. der Sept., (Wiener Stud., xxix, 27).

            2 Swete, Intr. to 0. T. in Gk., p. 395. Cf. Deissmann in Exp. Times,

Mar., 1906, p. 254, who points out that Pap. Heid. (cf. Deissmann, Die Sept.

Pap., 1905) "assimilates such passages as are cited in the N. T., or are capa-

ble of a Christian meaning, as far as possible, to their form in the N. T.

text, or to the sphere of Christian thought." Heinrici shows the same thing

to be true of Die Leip. Pap. frag. der Psalmen, 1903.

            3 Swete, Intr., etc., p. 402. All these facts about LXX quotations come

from Swete.

            4 Ib., p. 404. See ib., p. 404 f., for bibliography on N. T. quotations.

            5 Ib., pp. 29 ff.


100    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

eray for vol. I of his Grammar. It is now possible to make in-

telligent and, to a degree, adequate use of the LXX in the study

of N. T. Greek. The completion of Helbing's Syntax and of

Thackeray's Syntax will further enrich N. T. students. The Ox-

ford Concordance of Hatch and Redpath and the larger Cambridge

Septuagint are of great value. Swete1 laments that the N. T.

grammars have only "incidental references to the linguistic char-

acteristics of the Alexandrian version."

          The translation was not done all at once, and not by men of

Jerusalem, but by Jews of Alexandria who knew "the patois of

the Alexandrian streets and markets."2 One doubts,  however,

if these translators spoke this mixture of Egyptian κοινή and

Hebrew. On this point Swete3 differs from most scholars and in-

sists that " the translators write Greek largely as they doubtless

spoke it." They could not shake off the Hebrew spell in trans-

lation. In free Greek like most of the N. T. the Semitic influence

is far less. Mahaffy was quick to see the likeness between the

papyri and the LXX.4 But one must not assume that a N. T.

word necessarily has the same sense that it has either in the LXX

or the κοινή.  The N. T. has ideas of its own, a point to be con-

sidered later. We agree with Swete5 that the LXX is "indispen-

sable to the study of the N. T." Nestle6 justly remarks that the

Greek of the LXX enjoys now a much more favourable judgment

from philologists than some twenty years ago. Conybeare and

Stock (Sel. from the LXX, p. 22) observe that, while the vocabu-

lary of the LXX is that of the market-place of Alexandria, the

syntax is much more under the influence of the Hebrew original.

The LXX does, of course, contain a few books like 4 Maccabees,

written in Greek originally and in the Greek spirit, like Philo's

works. Philo represents the Atticistic revival in Alexandria that

was a real factor with a few. But the "genitivus hebraicus," like

ὁ κριτὴς τῆς ἀδικίας, is paralleled in the papyri and the inscriptions,

though not so often as in the LXX. Cf. Radermacher, N. T.

Greek, p. 19. So also .(p. 21) τοῖς ἐξ ἐριθείας (Ro. 2:8) is like ἐκ  

πλήρους in the papyri and already in the tragic poets. Thumb7

properly takes the side of Deissmann against Viteau's exaggerated

 

            1 Intr., p. 289.                                       3 Ib., p. 299.

            2 BD., p. 9.                                           4 Exp. Times, iii, p. 291.

            5 Intr. to 0. T. in Gk., p. 450 f. Hitzig, of Heidelberg, used to open his

lectures on 0. T. by asking: "Gentlemen, have you a LXX? If not, sell

whatever you have and buy a LXX." Nestle, LXX, in Hast. D. B., p. 438.

            6 LXX, Hast. D. B., p. 451.                   7 Griech. Spr. etc., pp. 128-132.


  THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH   101

 

idea of LXX influence (following Hatch). It is not always easy

to decide what is due to the use of the LXX and what to the

development of the κοινή vernacular. One must have an open

mind to light from either direction. Deissmannl is clearly right

in calling for a scientific investigation of the Hebraisms of the

LXX. Even the LXX and N. T. use of ἀρετή (Is. 42:8, 12; 1

Pet. 2: 9; 2 Pet. 1:3) is paralleled by an inscription in Caria.2

We are not then to think of the Jews or the Christians as ever

using in, speech or literature the peculiar Greek used in the trans-

lation of the Hebrew 0. T., which in itself varied much in this

respect in different parts. The same intense Hebraistic cast

appears in the 0. T. apocryphal books which were originally in

Hebrew and then translated, as Tobit, Ecclesiasticus, 1 Macca-

bees, etc. Contrast with these the Greek of the Wisdom of Solo-

mon, 2 Maccabees and the Prologue to the Greek translation of

Ecclesiasticus, and the difference is at once manifest.3 The Wis-

dom of Solomon is of special interest, for the author, who wrote

in Greek and revealed knowledge of Greek culture, art, science

and philosophy, was yet familiar with the LXX and imitated

some of its Hebraisms, being a Jew himself. Cf. Siegfried, "Book

of Wisdom," Hastings' D. B. It must never be forgotten that

by far the greatest contribution of Alexandrian prose to the

great literature of the world is this very translation of the 0. T."4

The name Christ (Χριστός) is found in the LXX "and so the very

terms Christian and Christianity arose out of the language em-

ployed by the Alexandrian interpreters."5 The only Bible known

to most of the Jews in the world in the first Christian century was

the LXX. The first complete Bible was the Greek Bible. The

LXX was the "first Apostle to the Gentiles" and was freely used

for many centuries by the Christians. Conybeare and Stock (Sel.

from the LXX, p. 24) go so far as to say that the N. T. itself

would not have been but for the LXX. Certainly it would not

 

            1 Hell.-Griech., Hauck's Realencyc., p. 638.

            2 Deissmann, B. S., pp. 95 f., 360 ff. Cf. Gautzschius, Spec. Exercit. Gr.,

1778, p. 23. H. Anz, Subs. ad cognos. Graec. Serm. etc., 1894, p. 385, points

out that poetic words are in the LXX also through the common speech. Cf.

Lipsius, Gr. Unters. Uber die bibl. Grac., 1863, p. vii.

            3 Deissmann, B. S., p. 76 f. He rightly calls attention to the fact that

many of the Ptolemaic pap. are contemporary with the LXX and bristle

with proof that the LXX on the whole is in the vernac. κοινή of Egypt

The Hebraisms came from the Hebrew itself in the act of translating.

            4 Mahaffy, Prog. of Hellen. in Alex. Emp., p. 80.

            5 Churton, Intl. of the LXX Vers., 1861, p. 1.


102    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

have been what it is. "The Bible whose God is Yahweh is the

Bible of one people, the Bible whose God is Κύριος is the Bible of

the world" (Deissmann, Die Hellen. des Semit. Mon., p. 174).

          Thackeray (Grammar of the 0. T. in Greek, pp. 25-55) gives a

careful survey of the "Semitic Element in the LXX Greek." He

admits that the papyri have greatly reduced the number of the

Hebraisms heretofore noted in the LXX. He denies, however

(p. 27), that the Greek of the LXX gives "a true picture of the

language of ordinary intercourse between Jewish residents in

the country." He denies also any influence of the Hebrew on the

vernacular Greek of the Jews in Alexandria outside of the vocabu-

lary of special Jewish words like ἀκροβυστία. He thinks (p. 28)

the Book of Tobit the best representative of the vernacular Greek

of the Jews. There are more transliterations like γειώρας for Ara-

maic גִּיּוֺרָא (Heb. גֵּר) in the later books where the early books had

πάροικος or προσήλυτος. The fact of a translation argues for a

fading of the Hebrew from the thought of the people. In the

early books the translation is better done and "the Hebraic

character of these books consists in the accumulation of a number

of just tolerable Greek phrases, which nearly correspond to what

is normal and idiomatic in Hebrew" (p. 29). But in the later

books the Hebraisms are more numerous and more marked, due

to "a growing reverence for the letter of the Hebrew" (p. 30).

We cannot follow in detail Thackeray's helpful sketch of the

transliterations from the Hebrew, the Hellenized Semitic words,

the use of words of like sound, Hebrew senses in Greek words

like δίδωμι= τίθημι after נָתַן, υἱὸς ἀδικίας, ὀφθαλμός, πρόσωπον, στόμα,

χείρ, the pleonastic pronoun, extensive use of prepositions, καὶ

ἐγένετο, ἐν accompaniment or instrument, etc.

          (e) ARAMAISMS. N. T. grammars have usually blended the

Aramaic with the Hebrew influence. Schmiedell complains that

the Aramaisms have received too little attention. But Dalman2

retorts that Schmiedel himself did not do the matter justice, and

still less did Blass. Moulton3 recognizes the distinction as just

and shows that Aramaisms are found chiefly in Mark and Mat-

thew, but does not point out the exact character of the Aramaisms

in question. We take it as proved that Jesus and the Apostles,

like most of their Jewish contemporaries in Palestine who moved

in public life, spoke both Aramaic and Greek and read Hebrew

 

            1 W.-Sch., Gr., § 2, 1 c. And Dalman (Words of Jesus, p. 18 f.) criticizes

Schmiedel for not distinguishing Aramaisms from Hebraisms.

            2 Words of Jesus, p. 18.                         3 Prol., p. 8.


  THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH    103

 

(cf. Lu. 4 : 17). Even Schurer1 admits that the educated classes

used Greek without difficulty. There is no doubt about the Ara-

maic. Jerome says that all the Jews of his time knew the He-

brew 0. T. The LXX disproves that, but Hebrew was used in

the schools and synagogues of Palestine and was clearly read by

many. The discourses of Jesus do not give the impression that

he grew up in absolute seclusion, though he undoubtedly used the

Aramaic in conversation and public address on many occasions

if not as a rule.2 The Aramaic tongue is very old and its use as a

diplomatic tongue (Is. 36:11) implies perhaps a previous Ara-

maic leadership.3 There was a literary as well as a vernacular

Aramaic. The Aramaic portions of Daniel, Ezra, the Targum of

Onkelos are in the literary Aramaic.4 Dalman5 suggests that

Matthew wrote his Gospel originally in the Judean literary Ara-

maic rather than the Galilean vernacular, but the reason is not

very apparent. Zahn6 doubts the validity of Dalman's distinction

between a Judean and a Galilean Aramaic, but Peter was recog-

nized in Jerusalem by the Galilean pronunciation (Mt. 26: 73).

The Galileans7 had difficulty with the gutturals and שׁ. This

Aramaic is not to be confounded with the later Christian Ara-

maic or Syriac into which the N. T. was translated. The Ara-

maic spoken in Palestine was the West Aramaic,8 not the East

Aramaic (Babylonia). So keenly does Dalman9 feel the differ-

ence between Hebraisms and Aramaisms that he avers that "the

Jewish Aramaic current among the people was considerably freer

from Hebrew influence than the Greek which the Synoptists

write." Not many can go with him in that statement. But he

is right in insisting on a real difference, though, as a matter of

fact, no great point was made about it at the time. With Jo-

sephus ἡ πάτριος γλῶσσα was the Aramaic (B. J. pr. § 1; v. 6, § 3;

 

            1 Hist. of the Jew. Peo. in Time of Ch., div. II, vol. I., p. 48. On the

Gk. of the Mishna see Fiebig, Zeitschr. fur neutest. Wiss., 190S, 4. Heft.

            2 Dalman, Words of Jesus, pp. 9, 11; Ch. I, § IV, (i) 4, for full discussion.

            3 D. S. Margoliouth, Lang. of the 0. T., Hast. D. B.

            4 Dalman, Words of Jesus, p. 80.                                               5 Ib., p. 81.

            5 Einl. in das N. T., I, 1897, p. 19.

            7 See Neubauer, Stud. Bibl., 1885, p. 51.

            8 Meyer, Jesu Mutterspr., 1896, p. 58 f. Some of the Lat. monks actually

thought that Jesus spoke Lat. and that the N. T. was written in that tongue!

But Meyer (ib., p. 63 f.) will not allow that Jesus knew Gk. Chase, on the

other hand, shows that Peter necessarily spoke Gk. on the Day of Pentecost

(Credibility of the Acts, 1902, p. 114).

            9 Words of Jesus, p. 42.


104    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

v. 9, § 2). He wrote his War originally in the native tongue for

τοῖς ἄνω βαρβάροις. John (5:2; 19:13, 17, 20; Rev. 9:11; 16:16)

uses  Ἐβραϊστί in the sense of the Aramaic. So Luke has

 Ἐβραΐς διάλεκτος (Ac. 21:40; 22:2; 26:14). The people under-

stood Paul's Greek, but they gave the more heed when he dropped

into Aramaic. 4 Macc. (12:7; 16:15) likewise employs   Ἐβραΐς

φωνή. The two kinds of Jewish Christians are even called (Ac.

6:1)   Ἑλληνισταί and   Ἐβραῖοι, though  Ἑλληνισταί and Συρισταί

would have been a more exact distinction.1 It is beyond contro-

versy that the gospel message was told largely in Aramaic, which

to some extent withstood the influx of Greek as the vernacular

did in Lycaonia2 (Ac. 14:11). One cannot at this point discuss

the Synoptic problem. It is not certain that Luke, probably a

gentile, knew either Aramaic or Hebrew, though there is a real

Semitic influence on part of the Gospel and Acts, due, Dalman3

holds, to the LXX example and a possible Aramaic or Hebrew

original for the opening chapters of the Gospel, already put in-

to Greek. Mark was probably written in Rome; not Palestine.

Hence the Aramaic original of Mark, Bousset argues, cannot be

considered as proved.4 He rightly insists, as against Wellhausen,5

that the question is not between the classic Greek and Aramaic,

but between the vernacular κοινή and Aramaic. But whatever is

or is not true as to the original language of Mark and of Mat-

thew, the gospel story was first told largely in Aramaic. The

translation of the Aramaic expressions in Mark proves this be-

yond all doubt, as ταλειθά, κούμ by τό κοράσιον, ἔγειρε (Mk. 5:41).

Dalman6 indeed claims that every Semitism in the N. T. should

first be looked upon as an Aramaism unless it is clear that the

Aramaic cannot explain it. The Mishna (Neo-Hebraic) was not

itself unaffected by the Greek, for the Mishna has numerous

 

            1 Dalman, Words of Jesus, p. 7.             2 Schwyzer, Weltspr. etc., p. 27.

            3 Words of Jesus, p. 38. Dalman doubts the Heb. document, but admits

a "wealth of Hebraisms" in Lu. Vogel (Zur Charac. des Lu., p. 32 f.) argues

for a "special source" for these opening chapters. Blass, Philol. of the Gosp.,

p. 195, denies that Luke knew Hebrew.

            4 Theol. Runds., Jan., 1906, pp. 2-4, 35 f.

            5 Einl. in die drei Evang., §§ 2-4.

            6 Words of Jesus, p. 19; cf. also Schaff, Comp. to the Gk. N. T., p. 28. In

1877 Dr. John A. Broadus said in lecture (Sum. of the Leading Peculiarities

of N. T. Gk. Gr., Immer's Hermen., p. 378) that the N. T. Gk. had a "Hebrew

and Aramaic tinge which arises partly from reading Hebrew and chiefly (so

his own correction) from speaking Aramaic." If instead of Hebrew he had 

said LXX, or had added LXX to Hebrew, he would not have missed it far.


THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH     105

 

Greek words and phrases that were current in the Aramaic.1

The Aramaisms of vocabulary that one can certainly admit in the

N. T. are the following words: ἀββά= אַבָּא Ἀκελδαμάχ=חֲקֵל דְּמָא;

all words beginning with βαρ= בַּר like Βαρνάβας; βεεζεβούλ=בְעֵיל,

זְבוּל; Βηθεσδά=בֵּית חֶסְדָּא;  Βηζαθά=בֵּית זַרְתָא; Γαββαθά=

גַּבְּתָא; γέεννα=גֵּא הִנּם; Γολγοθά=גָּלְגָּלְתָּאἐλωΐ ἐλωΐ, λαμὰ σαβαχ-

θανεί (or probably Heb. אֵלִיἠλεί, and the rest Aramaic, Dal-

man, Words of Jesus, p. 53 f.)= אֶלָהִי אֶלָהִי לְמָא שְׁבַקְתַּנִי; ἐφφαθά=

אֶתְפָּתַח; κορβανᾶς=קוּרְבָּנָא; μαμωνᾶς=מָאמוֺנָא; μαρανά, θά=מָרָנָא תָא2;

Μεσσίας=מְשִׁיחָא; πάσχα=פַּסְחָא; φαρισαῖοι=פְּרִישַׁיָא; ῥαββο(ου)νί(εί)=

רִבּוֺנִי; ῥακά=רֵיקָא; σάββατα=שַׁבְּתָא; σατανᾶς=סָעָנָא; σάτον=סָאתָא;

σίκερα=שִׁכְרָא; ταλειθά, κούμ=טְלִיתָא קוּמִי; names of persons like

Κηφᾶς=כֵּיפָא; Ταβειθά=טְבִיתָא, etc.

          Aramaisms of syntax are seen in the following. The expression

γεύεσθαι θανάτου seems to be in imitation of the Aramaic. Well-

hausen (Einl. in die drei Evang., pp. 31 ff.) suggests that εἷς καθ’  εἷς

(Mk. 14: 19) is a hybrid between the Aramaic εἷς εἷς (but this is,

an old Greek idiom) and the vernacular (κοινή) καθ’ εἷς.  He suggests

also that Aramaic meanings are found in such words as σώζειν,

ποινεῖν καρπόν, συμβούλιον ποινεῖν (διδόναι), εἰρήνη, εἰρήνην διδόναι, ὁδὸς

θεοῦ, πλήρωμα, etc. As already explained, apart from the question

of a possible original Aramaic Mark and an original Aramaic

Matthew and Aramaic sources for the early chapters of Luke and

the first twelve chapters of Acts,3 many of the discourses of Christ

were undoubtedly in Aramaic. There was translation then from

this Aramaic spoken (or written) gospel story into the vernacular

κοινή  as we now have it in large portions of the Synoptic Gospels

and possibly part of Acts. The conjectural efforts to restore this

Aramaic original of the words of Jesus are suggestive, but not

always convincing. On the whole subject of Semitic words in

the Ptolemaic papyri see Mayser, Grammatik, pp. 40-42. The

list includes ἀρ(ρ) αβών, βύσσος, κύμινον, λίβανος, συκάμινος, χιτών. It

is not a very long list indeed, but shows that the Orient did have

some little influence on the Greek vocabulary. These words oc-

cur in older Greek writers.

 

            1 Schurer, Hist. of the Jew. Peo., etc., div. II, vol. I, pp. 29-50. Cf. mod.

Yiddish.

            2 Cf. Bickel, Zeitschr. fur Cath. Theol., viii, 43. This would then mean,

"Lord, come." Cf. Rev. 22:20. W. H. give it μαρὰν ἀθά.

            3 See Blass, Philol. of the Gosp., ch. XI; Dalman, Words of Jesus, pp. 17-

78; Wellhausen, Einl. in die drei Evang. (Die aram. Grundl. der Evang., pp.

14-43).


106   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

          (f) VARYING RESULTS. It is natural that different writers

in the N. T. should diverge in the amount of Semitic influ-

ence manifest in their writings. They all used the vernacular

κοινή which in itself may have had a very faint trace of Semitic

influence. But of the nine authors of the N. T. six were prob-

ably Palestinian Jews.1 Now these six writers (Mark, Mat-

thew, James, Peter, Jude, John) are just the very ones who

reveal the Semitic mould of thought. It is often merely the

Hebrew and Aramaic spirit and background. In Mark the

Aramaic influence appears; in Matthew2 the LXX is quoted

along with the Hebrew, and Aramaisms occur also; in James

there is the stately dignity of an 0. T. prophet with Aramaic

touches (cf. his address and letter in Ac. 15) but with many

neat turns of Greek phrase and idiom; Peter's two letters pre-

sent quite a problem and suggest at least an amanuensis in one

case or a different one for each letter (cf. Biggs, Int. and Crit.

Comm.); Jude is very brief, but is not distinctly Hebraic or

Grecian; John in his Gospel is free from minor Semitisms be-

yond the frequent use of καί like  וְ, but the tone of the book is

distinctly that of a noble Jew and the sum total of the impres-

sion from the book is Semitic, while the Apocalypse has minor

Hebraisms and many grammatical idiosyncrasies to be discussed

later, many of which remind one of the LXX. If the absence

of the optative be taken as a test, even when compared with

the vernacular κοινή, Matthew, James and John do not use it

at all, while Mark has it only once and Jude twice. Peter in-

deed has it four times and Hebrews only once, but Luke uses the

optative 28 times and Paul 31. The remaining three writers

(Paul, Luke, author of Hebrews) were not Palestinian Jews.

Paul was a Hellenistic Jew who knew his vernacular κοινή well

and spoke Aramaic and read Hebrew. His Epistles are addressed.

chiefly to gentile Christians and naturally show little Semitic

flavour, for he did not have to translate his ideas from Aramaic

into Greek. In some of his speeches, especially the one delivered

in Aramaic, as reported by Luke in Ac. 22, a trace of the Semitic

point of view is retained. In contrast with Ac. 22 note Paul's

address on the Areopagus in 17. The author of Hebrews makes

abundant use of the LXX but exhibits possible Alexandrian

origin or training, and it is not clear that he knew either

 

            1 Swete, Intr. to the 0. T. in Gk., p. 381.

            2 Dalman (Wds. of Jes., p. 42) thinks that the Heb. of Mt. are due to

the LXX.


THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH    107

 

Hebrew or Aramaic.1 Luke presents something of a problem, for

he seems to have had Aramaic sources in Lu. 1 and 2 (possibly

also Ac. 1-12), while it is uncertain whether he was familiar

with the Aramaic. There seems little evidence that he knew

Hebrew. Blass2 thinks that he may have read his Aramaic

sources or had them translated for him. Curiously enough,

though a gentile and capable of writing almost classic Attic

(Lu. 1:1-4), yet Luke uses Semitisms not common elsewhere

in the N. T. Dalman3 shows that the genuine Hebraisms in

Luke like λόγους in sense of things (9:28 but classical authority

for this exists), διὰ στόματος (1:70) are due to the LXX, not the

Hebrew. The use of ἐν τῷ with the infinitive occurs 34 times in

Luke, 8 in Acts, twice in Mark, thrice in Matthew, 4 in Paul,

4 in Heb.4 See ἐν τῷ ὑποστρέφειν τὸν   Ἰησοῦν (Lu. 8 : 40). Blass

calls this an Aramaism.5 But it is not a peculiarity of the dis-

courses of Jesus, as it is found there only in ἐν τῷ σπείρειν

(common to all the Synoptics, Mk. 4:4; Mt. 13:4; Lu. 8:5),

and in Lu. 10:35; 19:15. Hence the idiom is common6 in Luke

from some other cause. The construction occurs in "classical

historians, in Polybius and in papyri,”7 but is most common in

the LXX, and the parallel is wanting in the spoken Aramaic.

Luke also freely uses καὶ ἐγένετο (almost peculiar to him in the

N. T.), which at once suggests וַיְהִי. He doubtless got this from

the LXX.8 He has three constructions, viz. καὶ ἐγένετο καὶ ἦλθε,

καὶ ἐγένετο ἦλθε and καὶ ἐγένετο ἐλθεῖν. The first two9 are common

in the LXX, while ἐγένετο ἐλθεῖν is due to the Greek vernacular10

as the papyri testify. The superfluous ἀφείς, ἤρξατο, etc., are Ara-

maisms, while εἰμί and the participle is Aramaic, like the Hebrew,

and also in harmony with the analytic vernacular κοινή. Nestle11

 

            1 Biesenthal (Das Trostschreiben des Ap. Paulus an d. Heb., 1878) even

thinks that the Ep. was written in Aram. or Heb.

            2 Philol. of the Gosp., p. 205.

            3 Wds. of Jes., p. 38 f. Cf. also Blass, Philol. of the Gosp., pp. 113 f., 118;

Vogel, Zur Charac. des Lukas, p. 27.                 4 Dalman, Wds. of Jes., p. 33.

            5 Evang. sec. Lucam, p. xxii. But ἐν τῷ with the inf. occurs with great fre-

quency in the LXX, 555 times in the 0. T., Apoc. and N. T. (Votaw, Inf.

in Bib. Gk., p. 20), chiefly in the LXX (455 times, only 55 in the N. T.). It

occurs nearly as often in the LXX as all other prepositions with the infinitive

together.                                                                       6 Dalman, Wds. of Jes., p. 34.

            7 Moulton, Prol., p. 14 (1st ed.).                        8 W.-M., p. 760 note.

            9 Cf. Thackeray, ya       Gr., pp. 50 ff. We have the type ἐγένετο ἦλθε 145

and ἐγένετο καὶ ἦλθε 269 times in the LXX, but ἐγένετο ἐλθεῖν only once (1 Kgs

11:43 B).                                                                      10 Moulton, Prol., p. 17.

            11 Zeitschr. fur neutest. Wiss., 1906, p. 279 f.


108    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

agrees with Blass (p. 131) in taking ὁμολογεῖν ἐν in Mt. 10:32-

Lu. 12:8 as a Syrism.  בְwith הוֺדָה is not in the Hebrew, nor

ὁμολ. ἐν in the LXX, but אוֺדִּי is used with בְ in the Jewish-Ara-

maic and Christian-Syriac. Nestle refers to ὁμολογούντων τῷ ὀνό-

ματι (Heb. 13:15) as a Hebraism, for in such a case the Hebrew

used לְ. The LXX and the Aramaic explain all the Semitisms in

Luke. Dalmanl ventures to call the LXX Hebraisms in Luke

"Septuagint-Graecisms" and thinks that the same thing is true

of the other Synoptists. Certainly it is proper to investigate2 the

words of Jesus from the point of view of the peculiarities of style

in each reporter of them. But, after all is said, the Semitisms in

the N. T. Greek, while real and fairly numerous in bulk, cut a

very small figure in comparison with the entire text. One can

read whole pages in places with little suggestion of Semitic in-

fluence beyond the general impress of the Jewish genius and point

of view.

          IV. Latinisms and Other Foreign Words. Moulton3 considers

it "hardly worth while" to discuss Latin influence on the κοινή of

the N. T. Blass4 describes the Latin element as "clearly trace-

able." Swete5 indeed alleges that the vulgar Greek of the Em-

pire "freely adopted Latin words and some Latin phraseology."

Thumb6 thinks that they are "not noteworthy." In spite of

the conservative character of the Greek language, it yet incor-

porated Latin civil and military terms with freedom. Inas-

much as Judea was a Roman province, some allusion to Roman

customs and some use of Latin military and official terms was to

be expected,7 though certainly not to the extent of Romanizing

or Latinizing the language. Cicero8 himself described Latin as

provincial in comparison with the Greek. Latin words are fairly

common in the Mishna.9 Latin names were early naturalized

into the Greek vernacular and in the N. T. we find such Roman

names as Aquila, Cornelius, Claudia, Clemens, Crescens, Crispus,

Fortunatus, Julia, Junia, Justus, Linus, Lucius, Luke, Mark,

 

            1 Wds. of Jes., p. 41.                             4 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 4.

            2 Ib., p. 72.                                           5 Comm. on Mk., 1898, p. xliv.

            3 Prol., p. 20.                                        6 Griech. Spr. etc., p. 152.

            7 Hoole, Class. Element in the N. T., p. 4.

            8 Pro Archia 10. Cato lamented:  ἀπολοῦσι   Ῥωμαῖοι τὰ πράγματα γραμμάτων

 Ἑλληνικῶν ἀναπλησθέντες (Plut., Cato Maj. 23. 3). Cf. Colin, Rome et la Grêce

de 200 a 146 avant Jesus-Christ (1905).

            9 Schurer, Jew. Peo. in Time of Ch., div. II, vol. I, pp. 43 ff. Krauss

(Griech. und Lehnw. im Tal., TI. I, p. xxi) says: "One speaks of the Lan-

guage of the Romans with the greatest respect as the speech of the soldiers."


  THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH      109

 

Niger, Paul, Priscilla, Publius, Pudens, Rufus, Sergius, Silvanus

(Silas), Tertius, Titus among the Christians themselves (Jewish

and gentile), while Agrippa, Augustus (translated Σεβαστός),

Caesar, Claudius, Gallio, Felix, Festus, Julius, Nero (Text. Rec.),

Pilate, Tertullus are typical Roman names. Note the Roman

cities mentioned in Ac. 28, Caesarea and Tiberias in Palestine.

More than forty Latin names of persons and places occur in

the N. T. The other Latin words, thirty (or thirty-one), are mili-

tary, judicial, monetary or domestic terms. They come into the

N. T. through the vernacular κοινή, none of them appearing in

the LXX and but two in Polybius. "Plutarch uses Latin words

more frequently than Polybius, but for the most part not those

employed in the N. T."1 Jannaris2 observes that "the Roman

administration, notwithstanding its surrendering to Greek culture

and education, did not fail to influence the Greek language."

But in the N. T. only these Latin words are found: ἀσσάριον (as),

δηνάριον (denarius), ἔχω= aestimo (ἔχε με παρῃτημένον, Lu. 14:18),

εὐρακύλων, θριαμβεύειν, κεντυρίων (centurio), κῆνσος (census),  κοδράν-

της (quadrans), κολωνία (colonia), κουστωδία (custodia), λεγιών

(legio), λέντιον, (linteum), λιβερτῖνος (libertinus), λίτρα (libra), μά-

κελλον (macellum), μεμβράνα (membrana), μίλιον (mille), μόδιος

(modius), ξέστης (sextarius), πραιτώριον (praetorium), σικάριος (si-

caries), σιμικίνθιον (semicinctium), σουδάριον (sudarium), σπεκου-

λάτωρ (speculator), αἱ ταβέρναι (taberna), τίτλος (titlus), φελόνης

(paenula), φόρον (forum), φραγέλλιον (flagellum), φραγελλόω (flagello),

χάρτης (? charta), χῶρος (corus). This is at most (31) not a for-

midable list. A few Latin phrases occur like ἐργασίαν δοῦναι (ope-

ram dare), τὸ ἱκανὸν λαμβάνειν (satis accipere), τὸ ἱκανὸν ποιεῖν (satis

facere), συμβούλιον λαμβάνειν (consilium capere). But Deissmann

(Light from the Ancient East, p. 117 f.) notes the use of ἐργάσίαν

δίδωμι, in an Oxyrhynchus papyrus letter of the vulgar type in

2d cent. B.C. and also in an inscription in Caria with a decree of

the Senate. A lead tablet at Amorgus shows κρίνω τὸ δίκαιον (cf.

Lu. 12:57). So συναίρω λόγον (Mt. 18:23 f.) occurs in two pa-

pyri letters of 2d cent. A.D. (Moulton, The Expositor, April, 1901,

p. 274 f.). Thayer3 calls attention also to σὺ ὄψῃ (Mt. 27:4) as

 

            1 Burton, Notes on N. T. Gr., 1904, p. 15.

            2 Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 7.

            3 Lang. of the N. T., Hast. D. B. Cf. also C. Wessely, Die lat. Elem. in

der Grac. der agyp. Papyrusurk., Wien. Stud., 24 (1902). On the whole sub-

ject see L. Lafoscade, Infl. du Lat. sur le Grec, pp. 83-158. Τὸ ἱκανὸν ποιεῖν is 

as old as Polybius (Moulton, Exp., Feb., 1903, p. 115).


110    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

being like videris. So also ὄψεσθε αὐτοί (Ac. 18:15). Grimm1

considers λαμβάνειν in Jo. 5:34, 41 equal to capto (‘to catch at’).

The majority of these instances occur in Mark and Matthew,

Mark using more Latinisms than any other N. T. writer. Too

much, however, cannot be argued from this point.2 There are

besides such adjectives as   Ἡρῳδιανοί, Χριστιανοί, Φιλιππήσιοι, which

are made after the Latin model.

          Blass3 thinks that the syntax shows a greater Latin influence,

but admits that it is difficult to tell the difference between native

development in the Greek and a possible Latin bent. It is in-

deed difficult to speak with decision on this point. Ultimately

Greek and Latin had great influence on each other, but at this

stage the matter is at least too doubtful to appeal to with con-

fidence.4 Paul indeed may have spoken in Latin at Lystra, ac-

cording to Prof. Ramsay.5 Thayer6 indeed gives a longer list of

Latin syntactical influences on N. T. Greek, but not all of them

are certain. The anticipatory position of ἀπό and πρό in expres-

sions of time and place, as πρὸ ἓξ ἡμερῶν (Jo. 12:1), is a possible

Latinism, though only of the secondary sort, since the Doric and

the Ionic use this construction occasionally and the κοινή frequently

(cf. Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 101). Cf. also μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας

ἡμέρας (Ac. 1:5).7 The increased use of the subjunctive rather

than the optative after a past tense of the indicative is a necessary

result of the disappearance of the optative rather than a Latin-

ism. The alleged blending of present perfect and aorist might

         

            1 Gk.-Eng. Lex. of the N. T.

            2 Swete, Comm. on Mk., p. xliii. Cf. Blass, Philol. of the Gosp., p. 211 f.

            3 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 4.

            4 Viereck, Sermo Graecus, 1888, pp. 60, 66. Thumb (Griech. Spr., p. 152)

considers the matter inconclusive, as does Moulton (Prol., p. 21). For the

later Latinisms see Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 13 f. See also W. Schulze, Graeca

Lat., 1891; Schwyzer, Weltspr. des Altert., p. 20. Cf. Sophocles, Lex., pp.

25-30 for Latinisms in Gk.

            5 Exp., Sept., 1905, and March, 1906. "As his father, and possibly also

his grandfather, had possessed the Roman citizenship, the use of Latin speech

and names was an inheritance in the family" (Ramsay, Exp., Aug., 1906,

p. 160). Cf. also Ramsay, Pauline and Othet Studies (1906, p. 65), where

he says it is "certain" that he spoke the Latin language. So holds Alex.

"Souter (Did Paul Speak Latin?, Exp., April, 1911). At Iconium "a certain

affectation of speaking Latin was fashionable." Moulton also thinks that

Paul preached in Lat. at Lystra, since the earliest inscriptions there are Lat.

(Prol., p. 233).

            6 Lang. of the N. T., Hast. D. B.

            7 On this matter of time see Schulze, Graeca Lat., pp. 13 ff.

 


THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH   111

 

be a Latinism, but it is at least doubtful if that is found in the

N. T. The use of ὅτι and ἵνα rather than the infinitive follows

naturally as the infinitive vanishes, but it is parallel to the grow-

ing use of ut with rogo, etc.  Ἀπό and the ablative after φυλάσσειν

may be due to cavere ab or to the general analytic tendency to

express the preposition with the case (cf. the Hebrew also).

Other smaller details are the absence of with the vocative, σύν

as equal to καί, ὅς=καὶ οὗτος (qui = et hic), γαμέω with dative = nu-

bere alicui, infinitive alone with κελεύω. There is no evidence that

the absence of the article in Latin had any influence on the ver-

nacular κοινή, though Schmid1 thinks he sees it in the irregular

use of the article in AElian. It is interesting in this connection

to note the development in the vernacular Latin as represented

in the Old Latin and the Vulgate versions. Unusual cases are

used with many verbs; prepositions are much more frequent; the

indicative with final ut and in indirect questions; common use of

quia and quoniam like quod with verb rather than the accusative

and infinitive; ille, ipse, hic, is, more like the article, as the later

Italian il, Spanish el, French le.2

          Other foreign words had, of course, entered the κοινή or the

earlier Greek, like βουνός (Cyrenaic and Sicilian); ῥέδη (Gallic or

Celtic); ἐγγαρεύω (even AEschylus), γάζα, παράδεισος, σανδάλιον (Per-

sian); χιτών (Oriental); κράβαττος (cf. Latin grabatus), παρεμβολή,

ῥύμη (Macedonian); ἀρραβών, κιννάμωμον, κύμινον, μνᾶ (Phoenician);

βαΐον, βίβλος, βύσσος, σίναΠι, σινδών (Egyptian or Semitic?); ζιζά-

νιον (Arabic?). On the Egyptian words in the Ptolemaic papyri

see Mayser, Grammatik, pp. 35-40; on the Persian words, ib.,

p. 42 f., including γάζα and παράδεισος. Σίναπι is of uncertain origin.

But Greek was known in all parts of the Roman Empire except

parts of North Africa and the extreme west of Europe. There were

great libraries in Alexandria, Pergamum and elsewhere. Schools

were numerous and excellent. But none the less the mass of the

people were βάρβαροι to the real Greeks and inevitably brought

laxities into the vernacular. Cf. Radermacher, N. T. Gr., pp.

9 ff., who gives a good discussion of the Latinisms in κοινή writers.

 

            1 Atticismus etc., p. 64. Cf. Georgi, De Latinismis N. T., iii, Vita, 1733.

            2 On this whole subject see Ronsch, Itala und Vulgata. Das Sprachid. der

urchristl. Itala und der Lath. Vulg. unter Berucks. der ram. Volksspr., 1875,

p. 480 f. Cf. also The Holy Lat. Tongue, W. Barry, in Dublin Rev., April,

1906, and Our Lat. Bible, ib., July, 1906. "The common dialect, spoken

with local differences in every part of Italy, in Gaul, Spain and Africa, saw

its happy moment arrive when Christianity spread over those shores" (Dub-

lin Rev., April, 1906, p. 293).

 


112    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

          V. The Christian Addition. But was there a Christian ad-

dition if there was no separate biblical Greek, not to say a special

Christian Greek? Winer1 admitted "religious technical terms"

in the Christian sense, but thought that "the subject scarcely

lies within the limits of philological inquiry." Blass has nothing

to say on the subject. But even Deissmann2 insisted that "the

language of the early Christians contained a series of religious

terms peculiar to itself, some of which it formed for the first

time," but he added that this enrichment did not extend to the

"syntax." Once more hear Deissmann3: "Christianity, like any

other new movement affecting civilization, must have produced

an effect upon language by the formation of new ideas and the

modification of old ones." Moulton4 sounds a note of warning

when he says that "it does not follow that we must promptly

obliterate every grammatical distinction that proves to have

been unfamiliar to the daily conversation of the first century

Egyptian farmer . . . The N. T. must still be studied largely by

light drawn from itself." Westcott5 indeed thinks the subject

calls for "the most careful handling" in order to avoid Jewish

usage on the one hand and the later ecclesiastical ideas on

the other. This is obviously true. Connect the discussion of the

Semitic influence on the N. T. with this point and recall the

revolutionary effect that Christianity had upon the Greek lan-

guage in the ecclesiastical Greek of the Byzantine period, and

the difficulty will be appreciated. Mahaffy6 does not hesitate to

say that the main cause of the persistence of Greek studies to-day

is due to the fact that the Gospels are written in Greek. "Greek

conquered Jew and Jew conquered Greek and the world inherited

the legacy of their struggle through Roman hands." Under the

influence of Christianity some of the old heathen vocabulary

vanished and the remaining stock "was now considerably re-

duced and modified in a Christian and modern spirit."7 The

 

            1 W.-M., p. 36.

            2 B. S., p. 65 (note).

            3 Encyc. Bib., art. Papyri, p. 3562.

            4 Prol., p. 20. Cf. Thumb, Griech. Spr., p. 182 f.

            5 Smith's D. B., art. N. T.

            6 The Gk. World under Rom. Sway, 1890, p. 389 f. Butcher, Harv. Lect.

on Gk. Subj., 1894, p. 2 f., calls the power of Jew and Gk. on modern life

one of "the mysterious forces of the spirit." "Each entered on a career of

world-wide empire, till at length the principles of Hellenism became those

of civilization itself, and the religion of Judea that of civilized humanity."

            7 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 10 f.

 


    THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH     113

 

N. T. Greek became the standard for ecclesiastical Greek as the

Attic had been for the ancient world.

          Winer1 indeed curtly says: "To attempt to explain such ex-

pressions of the apostolical terminology by quotations from Greek

authors is highly absurd." Rutherford2 almost despairs of un-

derstanding N. T. Greek as well as "classical Greek," since it con-

tains so many alien elements, "but it has at least begun to be

studied from the proper point of view," though he overestimates

the difficulty and the difference when he speaks of "the singular

speech in which the oracles of God are enshrined." On the other

hand3 we must not let the papyri make us swing so far away

from the old "biblical" Greek idea as to imagine that we can

find in the vernacular κοινή all that Christianity has to offer. The

Christian spirit put a new flavour into this vernacular κοινή and

lifted it to a new elevation of thought and dignity of style that

unify and glorify the language. This new and victorious spirit,

which seized the best in Jew and Greek, knew how to use the

Greek language with freedom and power.4 If the beauty of the

N. T. writings is different from the ancient standard, there is

none the less undoubted charm. Matthew Arnold put the Gospels

at the acme of simplicity and winsomeness, and Renan spoke of

Luke's Gospel as the most beautiful book in the world. Norden5

admits that the N. T. style is less exclusive and more universal.

There was indeed a compromise between the old and the new.

The victory of the new brought rhythm (not the technical sort)

and unity as the chief characteristics.6 In Christianity Hellenism

becomes really cosmopolitan.7 If Christianity had merely used

the Greek language and had been entirely alien to Hellenism, the

 

            1 W.-M., p. 36, n. 3.                              2 Epis. to the Rom., p. x f.

            3 Cf. Zerschwitz, Profangriic. and bibl. Sprachg., 1859, p. 4, where he

speaks of "dieses neue geistige Princip an der Sprache." Deissmann (Die

sprachl. Erforsch. der griech. Bibel, p. 8) accents the difference between the

Christian ideas and the Gneco-Rom. heathen words that express them.

            4 Ib., p. 12. Norden (Die griech. Kunstpr., Bd. II, pp. 453 ff.) indeed

thinks that the N. T. wants the "freedom" (Freiheit) and "serenity" (Hei-

terkeit) of the ancient literature. This is true in part of Paul's writing,

where passion rages fiercely, and in Rev. and other apocalyptic passages.

But what can excel Lu. and Jo. in lucidity and beauty? " Heiterkeit

blitheness or repose, and Allgemeinheit — generality or breadth, are the

supreme characteristics of the Hellenic ideal." Walter Pater, The Renais-

sance, 1904, p. 225.

            5 Die griech. Kunstpr., Bd. II, p. 456.

            6 Ib., Bd. I, p. 290.                                            7 Ib., Bd. II, p. 463.

 


114   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

N. T. would not have belonged to Greek literature, but this

sympathy with the best in the world must not be overworked.1

The N. T. language is real Greek, though with the Christian

spirit supreme in it because Christianity seized the Hellenic

spirit and transformed it. W. Christ2 rightly calls attention to

the fact that Christianity brought "a renewal of the human

race," "the moral worth of man and a purer view of God." So

"this ethical new birth of mankind" found expression in the

N. T. The touch of life is what distinguishes the N. T. writings

from the philosophical, historical, religious and ethical writings of

the time.3 In the Synoptic Gospels this quality reaches its height.

"Far above these details is the spirit, the literary conception of

a life to be written without ornament, without reflection, without

the writer's personality."4 This fact constitutes a literary phe-

nomenon amounting almost to a miracle. This vital spirit dis-

closes itself on every page and baffles analysis. It is the essence

of the N. T. language, but "is as pervasive as the atmosphere,"

"as intangible as a perfume."5 If some concentration and

strength are lost, there is great adaptability.6 Thayer7 does not

hesitate to speak of the fitness of N. T. Greek for its providential

office. It is the language of men's business and bosoms. It is

the language of life, not of the study nor the cloister. It is not the

language of a bygone age, but the speech of the men of the time.

"The Book of the people has become, in the course of centuries,

the Book of all mankind" (Deissmann, Light, p. 142). Chris-

tianity "began without any written book at all" except the Old

Testament." There was only the living word — the gospel, but

no Gospels. Instead of the letter was the spirit. The beginning,

in fact, was Jesus Himself" (ib., p. 245). The N. T. is in close

sympathy with both Jew and Greek, in a sense has both languages

to draw on, can reach both the Semitic and the gentile mind,

becomes a bond of union, in a word (as Broadus used to say) it

is better suited to be the vehicle of truth conveyed by Jewish

minds than classical Greek would have been. And a grammarian

must admit that, however necessary and fundamental grammat-

 

            1 Cf. Hatch, Infl. of Hellen. on Christ.

            2 Gesch. der griech. Lit., 1905, p. 912.

            3 Hicks, Gk. Phil. and Rom. Law in the N. T., 1896, p. 12.

            4 Mahaffy, Surv. of Gk. Civiliz., 1897, p. 309.

            5 Thayer, Hast. D. B., art. Lang. of the N. T., p. 40b.

            6 Rodwell, N. T. Gk., 1899, p. 2.

            7 Hast. D. B., ib. Cf. Schaff, Comp. to the Gk. N. T., p. 26.

 


THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH     115

 

ical exegesis is, it forms only the basis for the spiritual exposition

which should follow.

          When one comes to details, he notes that the influence of

Christianity is chiefly lexical, not grammatical.1 But a few points

in syntax are to be observed, as in expressions like ἐν Χριστῷ2; ἐν

Κυρίῳ; πιστεύω3 ἐν with locative, εἰς with accusative, ἐπί with the

locative or the accusative, πιστεύω with the dative, with the accu-

sative or absolutely. As to the lexical element the lists of ἅπαξ

εὐρημένα require severe sifting.4 It is too soon to pass a final verdict,

but in the nature of the case the number would be small. Such

words as ἀντίχριστος, ἑτεροδιδασκαλέω, εὐαγγελιστής, συνσταυρόω, ψευ-

δάδελφος, ψευδαπόστολος, etc., naturally spring out of the Christian

enterprise. The vocabulary of the N. T. Greek is not very ex-

tensive, somewhere near 5600 words, including proper names.5

But the main point to note is the distinctive ideas given to words

already in use, like ἀγάπη, ἁγιάζω, ἅγιος, ἀδελφός, ἀντίτυπος, ἀντιμι-

σθία, ἀπολύτρωσις, ἀπωλεια, ἀπόστολος, ἀποστολή, ἄρτος, βασιλεία, βαπ-

τίζω, βάπτισμα (-μός), γλῶσσα, διάκονος, δικαιόω, εἰρήνη, ἐκκλησία,

ἐκλεκτός, ἐλπίζω, ἐλπίς, ἐπίσκοπος, ἐπιστρέφομαι, ἔργα, εὐαγγελ<λιον, εὐαγ-

γελίζω, ἐξουσία, ζωή, θάνατος, ἱερεύς, καλέω, καταλλαγή, καταλλάσσω,

κηρύσσω, κλητός, κόσμος, κοινωνία, λύτρον, λυτρόω, μετάνοια, ὁδός, πα-

ράκλητος, πίστις, πιστός, πιστεύω, πνεῦμα, πνευματικός, πρεσβύτερος,

πρόσκομμα, σάρξ, σταυρός, συνείδησις, σώζω, σωτήρ, σωτηρία, ταπεινός,

ταπεινοφροσύνη, ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, υἱοθεσία, χάρις, Χρι-

στός, ψυχή, ψυχικός. When one considers the new connotations

that these words bear in the N. T., it is not too much "to say that

in the history of these and such like words lies the history of

Christianity."6 The fact that these and other terms were used

 

            1 Cf. Thumb, griech. Spr., pp. 162-201.

            2 Cf. Deiss., Die neutest. Formel "in Christo Jesu" untersucht, 1892.

            3 Cf. Abb., Joh. Vocab., 1905, pp. 19-80. On the whole question see

Buttmann, Gr. of N. T. Gk., pp. 173 ff.; Moulton, Prol., p. 67 f.

            4 Cf. Deiss., Hell.-Griech., Hauck's Realencyc., p. 636. Not 550 (as Ken-

nedy, Sour. of N. T. Gk., p. 93) bibl. words, but only 50 N. T. formations

(Deissmann, Exp., Jan., 1908; Light, p. 73).

            5 Kennedy, Sour. of N. T. Gk., p. 88. The Eng. of the King James Vers.

(0. T. and N. T.) contains only about 6000 words (Adey, The Eng. of the

King James Vers.). Max Muller (Sci. of Lang., p. 16) says that we use only

about 4000 words in ordinary Eng.

            6 Westcott, Smith's B. D., N. T. Cf. also Hatch, Ess. in Bibl. Gk., p. 11.

"Though Greek words were used they were the symbols of quite other than

Greek ideas." That is, when the distinctively Christian ideas are given.

On the influence of Gk. on other languages see Wack., Die Kult. der Gegenw.,

Tl. I, Abt. 8, pp. 311 ff.

 


116    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

in the popular language of the day gives a sharper point to the

new turn in the gospel message. The deification of the emperor

made Christians sensitive about the words θεός, υἱὸς θεοῦ, θεῖος,

κύριος, κυριακός, σωτήρ, χάραγμα, βασιλεύς, βασιλεία. See the lumi-

nous discussion of Deissmann (Light, pp. 343-384). The papyri

and the inscriptions throw almost a lurid light on these words.

Cf. Κύριος Καῖσαρ and Κύριος  Ἰησοῦς (Martyrium Polycarpi, viii, 2)

with 1 Cor. 12:1-3. The Christians did not shrink from using

these words in spite of the debased ideas due to the emperor-

cult, Mithraism, or other popular superstitions. Indeed, Paul (cf.

Col. 2:1 f.) often took the very words of Gnostic or Mithra cult

and filled them with the riches of Christ. Cf. The Expositor for

April, 1912, "Paul and the Mystery Religions," by H. A. A.

Kennedy. For the stimuli that Christianity derived from popu-

lar notions of law, religion and morality see Deissmann, Light,

pp. 283-290. The mass of the N. T. vocabulary has been trans-

figured. The worshippers of a Caesar would indeed call him

σωτὴρ τοῦ κόσμου or υἱὸς θεοῦ, but the words were empty flattery.

Deissmann1 well shows that a LXX word, for instance, in the

mouth of a citizen of Ephesus, did not mean what it did in the

LXX, as ἀρχιερεύς, διαθήκη, θεός, προφήτης, σωτηρία. Much more is

this true of the N. T. The new message glorified the current κοινή,

took the words from the street and made them bear a new con-

tent, linked heaven with earth in a new sense. In particular the

N. T. writers took and greatly enriched the religious vocabulary

of the LXX.

          VI. Individual Peculiarities. The language of Christianity

was not stereotyped at first and there was more play for indi-

vidualism. If the style is not all of the man, certainly each

writer has his own style. But style varies with the same man also

at different stages of his own development, with varying moods

and when discussing different themes. Style is thus a function

of the subject. All these points of view must be kept in mind

with several of the N. T. writers, as Paul, Luke, Peter and John,

whose writings show marked variations. Simcox2 notes that in

the Thessalonian and Corinthian letters Paul uses ἐν παντί twelve

 

            1 B. S., p. 83. Cf. Schleierm., Hermen., pp. 66 ff., 138 ff., who early called

attention to the Christian element in the N. T. Cf. also Viteau, Le Verbe;

Synt. des Prop., p. xl f.

            2 Writers of the N. T., p. 37. A. Souter (The Exp., 1904, Some Thoughts

on the Study of the Gk. N. T., p. 145) says: "We must take each writer's

grammar by itself."

 


THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH     117

 

times, in the Pastoral Epistles ἐν πᾶσι five (or six) times, while in

Ph. 4:12 he has both. In thus accenting the individuality of the

N. T. writers one must not forget that each writer had access to

the common religious terminology of early Christianity. There was

a common substratum of ideas and expressions that reappear in

them all, though in certain cases there may have been actual use

of documents. But one can never be sure whether Peter had

James, or the author of Hebrews Luke's writings. Peter probably

had some of Paul's letters when he wrote 1 Peter, and 2 Peter

3:15f. expressly refers to them. The grammarian cannot be

expected to settle questions of authorship and genuineness, but he

has a right to call attention to the common facts of linguistic

usage. Immer1 indeed complains that the linguistic peculiarities

of the N. T. writers have been worked more in the interest of

criticism than of exegesis. The modern method of biblical

theology is designed to correct this fault, but there is a work

here for the grammarian also. Winer2 declines to discuss this

question and is horrified at the idea of grammars of each writer

of the N. T.3  Language is rightly viewed from the point of view

of the speaker or writer. The rapid and continued changes in

the individual mind during the mental process of expressing

thought find a parallel in the syntactical relations in the sentence.4

One cannot protest too strongly against the levelling process of

an unsympathetic and unimaginative linguistic method that puts

all the books of the N. T. through the same syntactical mill and

tags this tense as "regular" and that one as "irregular." It is

not too much to say that the characteristic of the Greek litera-

ture of this time was precisely that of individuality (cf. Plutarch's

Lives).5  Viteau6 has a brief discussion of "The Psychological

Character of the Syntax of the N. T.," for, added to all other

things, there is "the influence of the moment." Differences in

 

            1 Hermen. of the N. T., 1877, p. 132. Thayer (Lex. of N. T. Gk., p. 689)

speaks of "the monumental misjudgments committed by some who have

made questions of authorship turn on vocabulary alone."

            2 W.-M., p. 1 f., remands this whole matter to the realm of N. T. rhetoric

(cf. Wilke, 1843, N. T. Rhet.; Schleierm., Hermen.; Gersdorf, Beitr. zur

Sprachchar. d. N. T.), but some discussion is demanded here. Schmiedel

abbreviates Winer's comments.

            3 W.-M., p. 4. He did not live to see Dr. Abbott's two stout volumes,

Joh. Vocab. (1905) and Joh. Gr. (1906).

            4 Cf. Steinthal, Intr. to the Psych. and Sci. of Lang.

            5 Cf. Norden, Die griech. Kunstpr., Bd. I, p. 243. Cf. also Blass, Hermen.

and Krit., p. 206.                                  6 Le Verbe; Synt. des Prop., pp. xli ff.

 


118    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

culture, in environment, in gifts, in temperament inevitably af-

fect style, but this fact is not to be stressed so as to make a new

dialect for each writer.1 In the following discussions some lexical

comments are given besides the grammatical to give a better idea

of the writer's style as a whole.

          (a) MARK. Certainly Blass' theory2 of an original Aramaic

Mark is not proven, but Peter often spoke in Aramaic, and Mark

was bilingual like Peter. For the Aramaisms and Hebraisms of

Mark see previous discussion (Semitic Influence). The idea that

Mark first wrote in Latin need not be seriously discussed. Mat-

thew and Luke have also nearly as many Latinisms as Mark.

It is not in his vocabulary that Mark is most distinctive, for of

the 1270 words in Mark (besides 60 proper names) only 80 are

peculiar to him among the N. T. writers.3 He has 150 in common

with Matthew and Luke alone, while only 15 belong to Mark and

John and nowhere else in the N. T.4  About 40 words belong

only to Mark and the LXX in the Greek Bible, while Mark has

38 (besides proper names) occurring nowhere else in the N. T. or

the LXX; but these are not all real ἅπαξ λεγόμενα, for there are

the papyri! Mark seems fond of diminutives like the vernacular

κοινή in general (θυγάτριον, κοράσιον, κυνάριον, etc.); εἰμί and ἔρχομαι

with the participle are common, as in Luke (cf. 1:6, ἦν . . . ἐκ-

δεδυμένος 1:39, ἦλθεν κηρύσσων); in fact he multiplies pictorial

participles (cf. 14:67, ἰδοῦσα . . . ἐμβλέψασα λέγει); ἄν occurs with

past tenses of the indicative (3:11, ὅταν αὐτὸν ἐθεώρουν); he loves

the double negative (1:44, μηδενὶ μηδὲν εἴπῃς); the article is com-

mon (as in N. T. generally) with the infinitive and sentences

(9:23, τὸ εἰ δύνῃ); broken and parenthetic clauses are frequent

(cf. 7:19, καθαρίζων); at times he is pleonastic (2:20, τότε ἐν

ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ); he uses εὐθύς (W. H. text) 41 times; he is emo-

tional and vivid, as shown by descriptive adjectives, questions

and exclamations (cf. 1:24; 2:7); the intermingling of tenses

(9:33 ff., ἐπηρώτα . . . λέγει. . . εἶπεν) is not due to ignorance of

Greek or to artificiality, as Swete well says, but to "a keen sense

 

            1 As Simcox does in Writers of the N. T., p. 1.

            2 Philol. of the Gosp., pp. 196 ff. Cf. Marshall, Exp., ser. 4, vi, pp. 81 ff.;

Allen, ib., ser. 6, vi, pp..436-443.

            3 Swete, Comm. on Mk., 1898, p. xl. Thayer (Lex. of N. T. Gk., App.,

p. 699) gives 102, but the text of some 32 is in dispute. Hawkins, Hor. Syn.',

p. 200, gives 71. Swete gives interesting lists of Mark's vocabulary from

various points of view. Cf. also Salmond, Mark (Gosp. of), in Hast. D. B.

            4 Swete, Comm. on Mk., p. xliii.  Thieme (Die Inschr. von Magn. am

Maander and das N. T., 1906, p. 4) says: "Die Gruppe der sogenannten Ha-

 


THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH    119

 

of the reality and living interest of the facts; there are 151 his-

toric presents in the W. H. text against 78 in Matthew and 4

in Luke; there is frequent and discriminating use of prepositions

(2:1, 2, 10, 13); the connective is usually καί rather than δέ, sel-

dom οὖν; there is little artistic effect, but much simplicity and great

vividness of detail; the vernacular κοινή is dominant with little

literary influence, though εἶτεν, παιδιόθεν and ὀψία are held so by

Norden.1  Πεπλήρωται (Mk. 1:15) is paralleled by ἐπληρώθη in a

Fayum papyrus and2 συμπόσια συμπόσια, πρασιαὶ πρασιαί by τάγματα

τάγματα in the "Shepherd of Hermas" (Goodspeed, Bibl. World,

1906, p. 311 f.). In general Mark is not to be considered illiterate,

though more Semitic in his culture than Greek. Wellhausen has

noted that D has more Aramaisms in Mark's text than B. But

Mark's Semitisms are not really barbarous Greek, "though

Mark's extremely vernacular language often makes us think so,

until we read the less educated papyri" (Moulton, Camb. Bibl.

Essays, p. 492). Even his fondness for compound (even double

compound) verbs is like the vernacular κοινή. If the influence of

Peter is seen in the Gospel of Mark, it was thoroughly congenial

as to language and temperament.3 He gives an objective picture

of Jesus and a realistic one.

          (b) MATTHEW. The writer quotes both the Hebrew and the

LXX and represents Jesus as doing the same. He has 65 allusions

to the 0. T., 43 of them being verbal quotations. And yet the

book is not intensely Hebraistic. He has the instinct for Hebrew

parallelism and the Hebrew elaboration, and his thought and gen-

eral outlook are Hebraistic, though his language is "colourless Hel-

lenistic of the average type" (Moulton, Camb. Bibl. Essays, p. 484).

We need not enter into the linguistic peculiarities of Q as distinct

from our Greek Matthew if that hypothesis be correct. In Mt. 9:6

we see κλίνη rather than the vulgar κράβαττος of Mark. In 12:14

Matthew has συμβούλιον ἔλαβον for σ. ἐδίδουν of Mark (Moulton,

op. cit., p. 485). He can use paronomasia as in κακοὺς κακῶς ἀπο-

λέσει αὐτούς (21:41). He uses τότε 91 times against 6 in Mark

and 14 in Luke; he has ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν 32 times, while he

 

paxlegomena ist bedenklich zusammengeschrumpft; es handelt sich im Neuen

Testament meistens um ἅπαξ εὑρημένα, nicht ἅπαξ εἰηρμένα."

            1 Die Ant. Kunstpr., Bd. II, p. 488.                    2 Mk. 6:39 f.

            3 Schaff, Comp. to Gk. N. T., p. 51. Cf. on Mark, Schulze, Der schrift-

steller. Charakter and Wert des Marcus (Keil and Tzschirner's Analecta, II,

2, 3). See Hawkins, Hor. Syn.2, pp. 114-153. Blass (Gr. of N. T. Gk., pp.

203, 261, 276, 278, 302) has comments on the narrative style of Mark.

 


120     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

has ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ 4 times (Mk. 14; Lu. 32); he uses ὁ πατὴρ ὁ

οὐράνιος 7 times and ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 13 times; he 12 times

quotes the 0. T. with the formula ἵνα (ὅπως) πληρωθῇ τὸ ῥηθέν or

τότε ἐπληρώθη τὸ ῥηθέν, whereas Luke does not have it at all, Mark

only once and John 7 times; κατ’ ὄναρ occurs 6 times and no-

where else in N. T.; like Luke he uses καὶ ἰδού often (27 times)

and ἰδού after the genitive absolute 11 times; he alone speaks of

ἡ ἁγία πόλις and πόλις τοῦ μεγάλου βασιλέως; like Mark he uses

  Ἰεροσόλυμα always save once (23:37), whereas Luke usually has

  Ἰερουσαλήμ; ὀμνύω ἐν or εἰς, common in Matthew, does not occur

in the other Gospels;  τάφος, not in the other Gospels, is found

6 times; συντέλεια τοῦ αἰῶνος occurs 5 times, and only once more

in the N. T. (Heb.); note the pleonastic use of ἄνθρωπος as ἄνθρω-

πος βασιλεύς; he twice uses εἰς τὸ ὄνομα, but the other Gospels ἐν τῷ

ὀνόματι or ἐπί; the oriental particularity is seen in using προσέρχομαι

51 times while Mark has it only 5 and Luke 10 times; συνάγειν

is used by Matthew 24 times; the vernacular κοινή is manifest in

many ways as in the use of μονόφθαλμος (like Mark), κολλυβισταί.

Thayer in his list (Lexicon, p. 698 f.) gives 137 words occurring

in Matthew alone in the N. T., but 21 are doubtful readings.

Matthew has fewer compound verbs than Mark. Matthew does

not use adverbial πολλά, while Mark has it 9 times. He has δέ

where Mark has καί about 60 times. Matthew has ὅτι after

verbs of saying 38 times, while Mark has it 50 times. Of

the 151 historic presents in Mark only 21 appear in Matthew,

though Matthew has 93 historic presents in all. See Hawkins,

Horae Synopt., p. 144 f. Matthew frequently has aorist when

Mark has imperfect (see Allen, Matthew, p. xx f.). The periphras-

tic tenses are less common in Matthew than in Mark and Luke

(op. cit., p. xxii). Matthew is less fond than Mark of redundant

phrases (op. cit., p. xxvi). The Gospel is largely in the form of

discourses with less narrative element than Mark. The style is

more uniform and less graphic than either Mark or Luke and so

less individual.1

          (c) LUKE. Whether Luke knew Hebrew or Aramaic or both,

cannot be stated with certainty. He did make use of Aramaic

documents or sayings in Lu. 1 and 2, and in the early part of

the Acts. He was also quite familiar with the LXX, as his quo-

 

            1 Cf. Dalman, Wds. of Jes., 1902; Gift, Die Originalspr. des Mt., 1887; See

Hawkins, Hor. Syn.2, pp. 154-173; Allen, Mt., pp. xix–xxxi; Plummer, Mt.,

p. xiii f.; Zahn, Einl. in d. N. T., Bd. II, 1898. On Matthew's style see

Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., pp. 203, 276, 278, 300, 302, 305.

 


THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH   121

 

tations from it show. The Semitic influence in his writings has

already been discussed. "He consciously imitates the Greek

Bible, and in the parts of his narrative which have their scene

in Palestine he feels it congruous to retain the rough diction of

his sources" (Moulton, Camb. Bibl. Essays, p. 479). One thing

is certain about him. He had a good command of the vernacular

κοινή and even attains the literary κοινή in Lu. 1:1-4 and Ac.

1:1-5; 17:16-34. The preface to his Gospel has often been

compared to those of Thucydides and Herodotus, and it does not

suffer by the comparison, for his modesty is an offset to their vain-

glory.1 Selwyn2 thinks that Luke was a Roman citizen, and he

was a fit companion for Paul. He exhibits the spirit of Paul in

his comprehensive sympathy and in his general doctrinal position.3

Renan4 calls Luke's Gospel the most literary of the Gospels. He

writes more like an historian and makes skilful use of his mate-

rials5 and with minute accuracy.6 His pictures in the Gospel have

given him the title of "the painter." Norden indeed thinks that

Luke alone among the N. T. writers received Atticistic influence

(Kunstprosa, II, pp. 485 ff. Cf. Blass, Die Rhythmen der asianischen

und romischen Kunstprosa, p. 42). But we need not go so far.

His versatility is apparent in many ways, but withal he makes

a faithful use of his materials.7 His vocabulary illustrates his

breadth of culture, for he uses 750 (851 counting doubtful readings)

words not occurring elsewhere in the N. T.8 Some of them are

still ἅπαξ λεγόμενα. One special item in his vocabulary is the large

number of medical terms in his writings, as is natural, since he

was a physician.9 His command of nautical phraseology is abun-

 

            1 Schaff, Comp. to Gk. N. T., p. 55. He calls attention to the fact that

the intrs. of Herodotus and Luke are about equal in length. Cf. Blass, Philol.

of the Gosp., pp. 7 ff.

            2 St. Luke the Prophet, 1901, p. 81.

            3 Davidson, Intr. to N. T., ii, p. 17.

            4 Les Evang., pp. 232, 283.

            5 Plummer, Comm. on Luke, 1896, p. xlvii.

            6 Ramsay, St. Paul the Traveller, 1895; Was Christ Born at Bethlehem?;

Chase, Credibility of Acts, 1902.

            7 Vogel (Zur Charak. des Lukas, 1899, p. 19) calls attention Ito differences

in the speeches of Stephen, Peter and Paul in the Acts.

            8 See the lists of Thayer (Lex., pp. 699 ff.), Plummer (Comm., pp. lii

Hawkins (Hon Syn.2, pp. 201-207). Of the 851 some 312 occur in the Gospel

and 478 in the Acts.

            9 Hobart, Medical Lang. of St. Luke, 1882. Many of these occur in the

LXX also, but plenty remain to show his knowledge of the medical phra-

seology of the time.

 


122   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

dantly shown in Ac. 27 and 28.1 The question of a double edi-

tion of the Gospel and Acts does not belong here.2 His language

is that of a man of culture with a cosmopolite tone, who yet knows

how to be popular also (Deissmann, Light, p. 241 f.). He not

only has a rich vocabulary, but also fine command of the κοινή

diction. In particular his style is more like that of Paul and

the writer to the Hebrews. Among matters of detail in Luke one

will note his use of the infinitives with ἐν τῷ (34 times) and of

τοῦ with the infinitive (24 instances); σύν (23 times) is frequent,

though seldom in the other Gospels; καὶ αὐτός (αὐτή) he has 28

times, and often constructions like  αὐτὸς ὁ χρόνος; καὶ ἐγένετο or

ἐγένετο δέ he uses 43 times; he has δὲ καὶ 29 times; he loves πορεύο-

μαι (88 examples); he uses εἰ like an interrogative 19 times; τό

occurs often before a clause, especially an indirect question; he

makes frequent use of καὶ ἰδού; ἱκανός is common with him; ἦν  

with present participle occurs 55 times; the descriptive genitive

is common; πρός with the accusative occurs 296 times with him

and very often in the rest of the N.T.; he is fond of ἐνώπιον; τε (and

τε καί) is almost confined to him in the N.T.; the optative is alone

used by Luke in indirect questions and more often otherwise than

by any other N. T. writer save Paul. This is a literary touch

but not Atticistic. He alone makes any special use of the future

participle; he is fond πᾶς and ἅπας; ὡς in temporal sense is com-

mon in Luke, once in Mark, not in Matthew; a good many ana-

colutha occur in Acts, and the change from direct to indirect

discourse is frequent; the relative is often attracted to the case of

the antecedent and often begins a sentence (Ac. 2:24); ἐπιστάτα  

is used 7 times (peculiar to Luke) rather than κύριε or ῥαββεί; the

syntax is throughout in general that of the κοινή of the time.3

 

            1 Smith, Voy. and Shipw. of St. Paul, 1882.

            2 Blass, Philol. of the Gosp., and Acta, Apostol. Bacon (Story of St. Paul,

1905, p. 156, note) actually urges καὶ ἐγένετο in the "we" sections of Acts as a

"pronounced Septuagintism improbable for a Greek"! Cf. Moulton, Prof,

p. 16 f. On Luke's style see Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., pp. 1, 3, 5, 203, 250 f.,

261, 276, 278, 280, 300, 305.

            3 Cf. Vogel, Zur Charak. des Lukas, pp. 21-37, for criticism of the Syntax of

Luke; Plummer, Comm. on Luke, has many sensible remarks; Wright, Gosp.

ace. to Luke, 1900, p. xi, on Luke's literary habits, and see also Hawkins, Hor.

Syn. 2, pp. 174-193. On relation of Luke to Josephus, cf. Bebb, Luke's

Gosp. in Hast. D. B. On Luke's Hebraisms cf. Moulton, Prol., p. 13 f. Cf.

Norden, Ant. Kunstpr., II, pp. 486 ff., for differences between Luke and Mark

and Matthew. See also Harnack, Lukas der Arzt der Verfasser des dritten

Evang. and der Apostelgesch. (1906). On p. 15 he gives a list of 84 words

 


THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH    123

 

Luke is also fond of ὁ μὲν οὖν (Acts). The historic present is rare

in Luke (4 or 6 times). Luke uses the conjunctions and sub-

ordinate clauses with more literary skill than the other N. T.

writers. He makes choice use of words and idioms. Cf. his report

of Paul's speech on Mars Hill. He accumulates participles, espe-

cially in the Acts, but not without stylistic refinement. In the

Acts he is fond of εἰς when ἐν, would ordinarily be used.

          (d) JAMES. It is at first surprising that one recognized as

such a thorough Jew as James, the brother of our Lord, and who

used Aramaic, should have written in such idiomatic Greek. "In

the skilful use of the Greek language its [Epistle of James] author

is inferior to no N. T. writer."1 There are very few Hebraisms

in the Epistle, though the tone is distinctly Jewish, perhaps the

earliest Christian document in the N. T. But one cannot

think that James wrote the book in Aramaic, for the indications

of translation are not present, as Bishop John Wordsworth once

argued.2 There is not, however, in James studied rhetoric or

keen dialectics. The author of Hebrews, Luke and Paul far

surpass him in formal rhetoric. "The Epistle of James is from

the beginning a little work of literature," "a product of popular

literature" (Deissmann, Light, p. 235). The writer uses asyn-

deton very often and many crisp aphorisms. Just as the

Synoptic Gospels preserve the local colour of the country-

side, so the Epistle of James is best understood in the open air

of the harvest-field (ib., p. 241). The incongruity of such a

smooth piece of Greek as this Epistle being written by a Pales-

tinian Jew like James vanishes when we consider the bilingual

character of the people of Palestine (cf. Moulton, Camb. Biblical

Essays, p. 487). Nevertheless, the author has a Hebrew mould

of thought reminiscent of 0. T. phrases. The atmosphere is

Jewish and "international vulgarisms" do not explain it all.

The pleonasms are just those seen in the LXX, and the book has

the fondness for assonance so common in the 0. T. Cf. Oester-

ley, Exp. Gk. Test., p. 394. He uses many examples that re-

 

peculiar in the N. T. to Luke and Paul. On p. 15 of Luke the Physician

(trans., 1907) Harnack considers the Gk. of Luke's Gospel "excellent." "It

occupies a middle position between the κοινή and Attic Gk. (the language of

literature)." This is not a very exact description, for Harnack here uses

κοινή for vernac. κοινή and Attic was not the language of literature in Luke's

time (save the Atticists), but the literary κοινή).

            1 Thayer, Lang. of N. T., Hast. D. B.

            2 First series of Stud. Bibl., pp. 144 ff. Cf. Mayor, Comm. on James,

pp. ccv ff.

 


124   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

mind one vividly of the parables of Jesus and many of the ideas

and phrases of the Sermon on the Mount are here. There is

also a marked similarity between this Epistle and the speech of

James in Ac. 15 and the letter there given, which was probably

written by him.1 He is fond of repeating the same word or root,

as θρησκός, θρησκεία (1:26 f.)2; his sentences, though short, are

rhythmical3; he is crisp, vivid, energetic; there is little in the

forms or the syntax to mark it off from the current κοινή or

the N. T. representatives of it, though his idiomatic use of the

pronouns is worth mentioning, as is also that of ἄγε as an in-

terjection, the gnomic aorist, the possible nominative μεστή in

apposition with γλῶσσαν (3:8). But it is in the vocabulary

that James shows his individuality, for in this short epistle there

are 73 (9 doubtful) words not appearing elsewhere in the N. T.,

some of which are found in the LXX,4 like παραλλαγή. The

use of συναγωγή (2:2) of a Christian assembly is noteworthy

(cf. ἐκκλησία in 5:14 and ἐπισυναγωγή in Heb. 10:25). He has

many compound words like ἀδιάκριτος, bookish words like ἔμφυτος,

philosophical terms like ὕλη, picturesque words like ὀλολύζω, some

of a technical nature like πηδάλιον, some strictly classical like

ἔοικε, χρή.

          (e) JUDE. It is here assumed against Spitta5 and Biggs6 that

Jude is prior to 2 Peter, the second chapter of which is so much

like Jude. There is not in Jude the epigram of James, but he has

a rugged rotundity of style that is impressive and vigorous, if a

bit harsh. His style is marked by metaphor and the use of trip-

lets. He cannot be said to be "steeped in the language of the

LXX" with Chase,7 but there is a more Hebraistic flavour than

is observed in James, his brother. He has literary affinities with

some of the apocryphal books and with some of Paul's writings.

If he shows a better command of Greek than 2 Peter, yet his

 

            1 See this point well worked out by Mayor, James (Epis. of), Hast. D. B.

Cf. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 279.

            2 Cf. Mayor, Comm., pp. cxcv ff., for exx.

            3 Ib., p. cci f. Mayor, ch. viii, has also a luminous discussion of the "Gram-

mar of St. James," which shows conclusively that he has little that is distinc-

tive in his grammar. Cf. Thayer (Lex., p. 708) for list of words peculiar

to James.

            4 Cf. Mayor, Comm., p. cxci f. On συναγωγή cf. Hort, Judaistic Christian-

ity, p. 150.

            5 Der Zweite Brief des Petrus and der Brief des Judas, 1885.

            6 Comm. on St. Peter and St. Jude, 1901.

            7 Jude (Epis. of), Hast. D. B.

 


THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH   125

 

"Greek is a strong and weighty weapon over which, however, he

has not a ready command."1 Per contra, there is little that is

peculiar in his grammar, for he shows a normal use of the Greek

idiom. The optative occurs twice (πληθυνθείη, verse 2, and ἐπιτιμήσαι,

in 9) and the article is used skilfully with the participle. Cases,

pronouns, tenses, free use of participles, indicate a real mastery

of current Greek. The true superlative occurs in τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ

πίστει. The idiomatic use of ἔβδομος without article is seen in

Jude 14. The adverbial accusative is seen in τὸ δεύτερον 5 and τὸν

ὅμοιον τρόπον 7. For further details see Mayor on "Grammar of

Jude and of Peter" (Comm., pp. xxvi–lv). He has 20 words

(one doubtful) not found elsewhere in the N. T.2  A few of them

like πλανήτης occur in the LXX. Some of them have a stately

ring like κύματα ἄγρια, and a number occur which are found in

writers of the literary κοινή. He uses ἡ κοιινή σωτηρία ("the safety

of the state") in a Christian sense, and so οἱ προγεγραμμένοι ("the

proscribed"). But he has also command of technical Christian

terms like ἅγιοι, κλητοί, πίστις, πνεῦμα, ψυχικός as Paul used them.

The vividness of his style hardly justifies the term "poetic."3

Deissmann (Light, p. 235) considers Jude a literary epistle in

popular style and "cosmopolite" in tone (p. 242), with a certain

degree of artistic expression. The correctness of the Greek is

quite consonant with the authorship of the brother of Jesus, since

Palestine was a bilingual country (Moulton, Camb. Bibl. Essays,

p. 488). Besides, the Epistle has only 25 verses.

          (f) PETER. As Peter was full of impulses and emotions and ap-

parent inconsistencies, the same heritage falls to his Epistles.

The most outstanding difference between 1 Peter and 2 Peter is

in the vocabulary. 1 Peter has 361 words not found in 2 Peter,

while 2 Peter has 231 not in 1 Peter.4 Many in each case are

common words like ἁγιάζω, ἐλπίζω, εὐαγγελίζω, etc., in 1 Peter, and

βασιλεία, ἐπαγγελία, ἐπιγινώσκω, etc., in 2 Peter. 1 Peter has 63

words not in the rest of the N. T., while 2 Peter has 57 (5 doubt-

ful); but of these 120 words only one (ἀπόθεσις) occurs in both.5

This is surely a remarkable situation. But both of them have a

 

            1 Chase, Jude (Epis. of), Hast. D. B.

            2 See Thayer's list (Lex., p. 709). For fresh discussion of the gram. aspects

of Jude and 2 Pet. see Mayor's Comm. (1908). He accepts the genuineness

of Jude, but rejects 2 Peter.

            3 Maier, Der Judasbrief, 1906, p. 169.

            4 Bigg, Comm. on St. Peter and St. Jude, p. 225.

            5 Thayer, Lang. of the N. T., Hast. D. B., p. 42a.

 


126  A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

number of words in common that occur elsewhere also in the

N. T., like ἀναστροφή, ψυχή, etc.1 Both use the plural of abstract

nouns; both have the habit, like James, of repeating words,2

while Jude avoids repetitions; both make idiomatic use of the

article; both make scant use of particles, and there are very few

Hebraisms; both use words only known from the vernacular

κοινή; both use a number of classical words like ἀναγκαστῶς (1

Peter, Plato), πλαστός (Her., Eur., Xen., 2 Peter)3; both use pic-

ture-words4; both seem to know the Apocrypha; both refer to

events in the life of Christ; both show acquaintance with Paul's

Epistles, and use many technical Christian terms. But, on the

other hand, 1 Peter is deeply influenced by the LXX, while 2

Peter shows little use of it; 1 Peter is more stately and ele-

vated without affectation, while 2 Peter has grandeur, though it

is, perhaps, somewhat "grandiose" (Bigg) and uses a number

of rare words like ταρταρόω; 1 Peter makes clear distinctions be-

tween the tenses, prepositions, and uses smooth Greek generally,

while 2 Peter has a certain roughness of style and even apparent

solecisms like βλέμμα (2:8), though it is not "baboo Greek"

(Abbott)5 nor like modern "pigeon English"; 1 Peter shows little

originality and rhetorical power, while 2 Peter, though not so

original as Jude, yet has more individuality than 1 Peter.

Deissmann (Light, p. 235) says: "The Epistles of Peter and

Jude have also quite unreal addresses; the letter-like touches are

purely decorative. Here we have the beginnings of a Christian

literature; the Epistles of Jude and Peter, though still possessing

as a whole many popular features, already endeavour here and

there after a certain degree of artistic expression." It is not for

a grammarian to settle, if anybody can, the controversy about

those two Epistles, but Simcox6 is not far wrong when he says

of 2 Peter that "a superficial student is likelier than a thorough

student to be certain that it is spurious." Spitta,7 Bigg8 and

 

            1 Cf. Zahn, Einl. in d. N. T:, Bd. II, p. 108; B. Weiss, Einl. in d. N. T.,

p. 445.

            2 Bigg, Comm., p. 225 f. Cf. also Schulze, Der schriftsteller. Charakter

und Wert des Petrus, Judas und Jacobus, 1802.

            3 Cf. excellent lists by Chase, Hast. D. B., 1 Peter and 2 Peter. Many of

these words are cleared up by the pap., like δοκίμιον and ἀρετή.

            4 Vincent, Word-Studies, vol. I, p. 621.

            5 Exp., ser. 2, v. III. Chase, Hast. D. B., p. 808a, finds needless difficulty

with παρεισφέρειν (2 Pet. 1:5), for παρά is 'alongside,’ ‘in addition.’

            6 Writers of the N. T., p. 64.

            7 Der Zweite Brief des Petrus.                8 Comm. on St. Peter and Jude.

 


THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH   127

 

Zahn1 among recent writers suggest that in 2 Peter we have Peter's

own composition, while in 1 Peter we have the Greek of an aman-

uensis who either wrote out Peter's ideas, revised them or trans-

lated Peter's Aramaic into Greek. We know that Peter had

interpreters (Mark, for instance), and Josephus used such literary

help and Paul had amanuenses. On the other hand Chase (Hast-

ings' D. B.) and others reject 2 Peter entirely. It is worth men-

tioning that 2 Peter and the Apocalypse, which are the two books

that furnish most of the linguistic anomalies in the N. T., both

have abundant parallels among the less well-educated papyri

writers, and it is of Peter and John that the terms ἀγράμματοι  

and ἰδιῶται are used (Ac. 4:13). As we have a problem con-

cerning 1 Peter and 2 Peter on the linguistic side, so we have

one concerning John's Gospel and Epistles on the one hand and

Revelation on the other. The use of the article in 1 Peter is

quite Thucydidean in 3:3 (Bigg), and eight times he uses the

idiom like τὸν τῆς παροικίας ὑμῶν χρόνον (1:17) and once that

seen in τὸ βούλημα τῶν ἐθνῶν (4:3), the rule in the N. T. The

article is generally absent with the attributive genitive and with

prepositions as εἰς ῥαντισμὸν αἵματος (1:2). There is a refined

accuracy in 1 Peter's use of ὡς (Bigg), cf. 1:19; 2:16, etc. A

distinction is drawn between μή and οὐ with the participle in 1:8.

Once ἵνα occurs with the future indicative (3:1). The absence

of ἄν and the particles ἄρα, γε, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, τε, δή, που, πως is notice-

able. 1 Peter makes idiomatic use of μέν, while 2 Peter does not

have it. 2 Peter uses the "compact" structure of article, attribu-

tive and noun, like 1 Peter (cf. 2 Pet. 2:1, 10, 16, 21), but the

"uncompact" occurs also (cf. 2 Pet. 1:3, 9, 11, 14). In Jude

and 2 Peter the commonest order is the uncompact (Mayor, Jude

and Second Peter, p. xxii). The single article in 2 Pet. 1:1, 11 is

used of two names for the same object. Cf. also Jude 4. The

article with the infinitive does not occur in 2 Peter (nor Jude).

2 Peter has some unusual uses of the infinitive after ἔχω (2 Pet.

1:15) and as result (2 Pet. 3:1 f.). 1 Peter has the article and

future participle once (3:13) ὁ κακώσων. Both 1 Pet. (1 : 2) and

2 Pet. (1:2) have the optative πληθυνθείη (like Jude). 1 Peter

twice (3:14, 17) has εἰ and the optative. See further Mayor on

"Grammar of Jude and 2 Peter" (Comm., pp. xxvi–lv).

          (g) PAUL. There was a Christian terminology apart from

Paul, but many of the terms most familiar to us received their

 

            1 Einl. in d. N. T. Mayor in his Comm. on Jude and 2 Peter (1907) re-

jects 2 Peter partly on linguistic grounds.

 


128   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

interpretation from him. He was a pathfinder, but had inex-

haustible resources for such a task. Resechl has done good ser-

vice in putting together the words of Paul and the words of

Jesus. Paul's rabbinical training and Jewish cast of mind led Far-

rar2 to call him a Haggadist. Simcox3 says that "there is hardly

a line in his writings that a non-Jewish author of his day would

have written." Harnack4 points out that Paul was wholly un-

intelligible to such a Hellenist as Porphyry, but Ramsay5 replies

that Porphyry resented Paul's use of Hellenism in favour of Chris-

tianity. But Hicks6 is certainly right in seeing a Hellenistic side

to Paul, though Pfieiderer7 goes too far in finding in Paul merely

"a Christianized Pharisaism" and a "Christianized Hellenism."

Paul and Seneca have often been compared as to style and ideas,

but a more pertinent linguistic parallel is Arrian's report of the

lectures of Epictetus.  Here we have the vernacular κοινή of an

educated man in the second century A.D. The style of Paul,

like his theology, has challenged the attention of the greatest

minds.8 Farrar9 calls his language "the style of genius, if

not the genius of style." There is no doubt about its indi-

viduality. While in the four groups of his letters each group

has a style and to some extent a vocabulary of its own, yet, as in

Shakespeare's plays, there is the stamp of the same tremendous

mind. These differences of language lead some to doubt the

genuineness of certain of the Pauline Epistles, especially the Pas-

toral Group, but criticism is coming more to the acceptance of

all of them as genuine. Longinus ranks Paul as master of the

dogmatic style (Παῦλος ὁ Ταρσεὺς ὅντινα καὶ πρῶτόν φημι προιστάμενον

 

            1 Der Paulinismus und die Logia Jesu, 1904.

            2 Life and Work of St. Paul, vol. I, p. 638.

            3 Writers of the N. T., p. 27.

            4 Miss. und Ausbr. des Christent., p. 354. Cf. Moffatt's transl., vol. II,

p. 137.

            5 Exp., 1906, p. 263.

            6 St. Paul and Hellen., Stud. Bib., IV, i.

            7 Urchristentum, pp. 174-478.

            8 See Excursus I to vol. I of Farrar's Life of Paul.

            9 Ib., p. 623. On Paul's style cf. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., pp. 1, 5, 251,

276, 279, 281 f., 284 f., 289, 300-305. As to the Pastoral Epistles it has been

pointed out that there is nothing in Paul's vocabulary inconsistent with the

time (James, Genuin. and Author. of the Past. Epis., 1906). It is natural

for one's style to be enriched with age. The Church Quart. Rev. (Jan.,

1907) shows that all the new words in the Past. Epis. come from the LXX,

Aristotle, κοινή writers before or during Paul's time. Cf. Exp. Times, 1907,

p. 245 f.

 


THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH  129

 

δόγματος ἀνυποδείκτου).  Baur1 says that he has "the true ring of

Thucydides." Erasmus (ad Col. 4:16) says: " Tonat, fulgurat,

meras flammas loquitur Paulus." Hausrath2 correctly says that

"it is hard to characterize this individuality in whom Christian

fulness of love, rabbinic keenness of perception and ancient will-

power so wonderfully mingle." It is indeed the most personal3

and the most powerful writing of antiquity. He disclaims classic

elegance and calls himself ἰδιώτης τῷ λόγῳ (2 Cor. 11:6), yet this

was in contrast with the false taste of the Corinthians. But

Deissmann (St. Paul, p. 6) goes too far in making Paul a mere

tentmaker, devoid of culture. He is abrupt, paradoxical, bold,

antithetical, now like a torrent, now like a summer brook. But

it is passion, not ignorance nor carelessness. He was indeed no

Atticist. He used the vernacular κοινή of the time with some

touch of the literary flavour, though his quotation of three

heathen poets does not show an extended acquaintance with Greek

literature.4 The difference between the vernacular and the liter-

ary κοινή is often a vanishing point. Paul's style is unhellenic in

arrangement, but in Ro. 8 and 1 Cor. 13 he reaches the eleva-

tion and dignity of Plato.5 Certainly his ethical teaching has

quite a Hellenic ring, being both philosophical and logical.6

Hatch7 considers Paul to be the foremost representative of the

Hellenic influence on early Christianity. He shows some knowl-

edge of Roman legal terms8 and uses arguments calling for edu-

cated minds of a high order.9  The grammar shows little Semitic

influence. He uses many rhetorical figures such as paronomasia,

paradox, etc., which will be discussed in the chapter on that sub-

 

            1 Paul, vol. II, p. 281. Cf. K. L. Bauer, Philol. Thucyd.-Paul., 1773; also

his Rhet. Paul., 1782. Cf. Tzschirner, Observ. Pauli ap. epist., 1800; La-

sonder, De ling. paul. idiom., 1866.

            2 Der Apost. Paulus, p. 502.

            3 Renan, St. Paul, p. 232. Cf. also Jacquier, Hist. des Livres du N. T.,

tome 1er, 1906, p. 37: "Son grec, nous le verrons, n'est pas le grec litteraire,

mais celui de la conversation." Cf. also pp. 61-70 for discussion of "Langue

de Saint Paul." Cf. also Adams, St. Paul's Vocab. St. Paul as a Former of

Words, 1895.

            4 Cf. Farrar, Exc. III, vol. I of Life of St. Paul.

            5 orden, Die Ant. Kunstpr., Bd. II, 1898, pp. 499, 509.

            6 Hicks, St. Paul and Hellen., 1896, p. 9.

            7 Hibbert Lect. (Infl. of Hellen. on Chris., p. 12).

            8 Ball, St. Paul and the Rom. Law (1901). Cf. Thack., Rela. of St. Paul to

Contemp. Thought (1900). Paul's use of νόμος shows knowledge of the Roman

lex as well the Jewish Torah.

            9 Mahaffy, Surv. of Gk. Civiliz., p. 310.

 


130  A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

ject, some thirty kinds occurring in his writings. Farrar1 sug-

gests that Paul had a teacher of rhetoric in Tarsus. He is noted

for his varied use of the particles and writes with freedom and

accuracy, though his anacolutha are numerous, as in Gal. 2:6-9.

He uses prepositions with great frequency and discrimination.

The genitive is employed by Paul with every variety of applica-

tion. The participle appears with great luxuriance and in all

sorts of ways, as imperative or indicative or genitive absolute, ar-

ticular, anarthrous, etc. He is  Ἐβραῖος ἐξ  Ἐβραιων, but he handles

his Greek with all the freedom of a Hellenist. He thinks in Greek

and it is the vernacular κοινή of a brilliant and well-educated man

in touch with the Greek culture of his time, though remaining

thoroughly Jewish in his mental fibre. The peculiar turns in

Paul's language are not due to Hebraisms, but to the passion of

his nature which occasionally (cf. 2 Cor.) bursts all bounds and

piles parenthesis and anacoluthon on each other in a heap. But

even in a riot of language his thought is clear, and Paul often

draws a fine point on the turn of a word or a tense or a case. To

go into detail with Paul's writings would be largely to give the

grammar of the N. T. In Phil. 2:1 we have a solecism in εἴ τις

σπλάγχνα. His vocabulary is very rich and expressive. Thayer

(Lexicon, pp. 704 ff.) gives 895 (44 doubtful) words that are found

nowhere else in the N. T., 168 of them being in the Pastoral

Epistles. Nageli2 has published the first part of a Pauline lexicon

(from α to ε) which is very helpful and makes use of the papyri

and inscriptions. The most striking thing in this study is the

cosmopolitan character of Paul's vocabulary. There are very

few words which are found only in the Attic writers, like

αἰσχρότης, and no cases of Atticism, though even in the letters α to

ε he finds some 85 that belong to the literary κοινή as shown by

books, papyri and inscriptions, words like ἀθανασία, ἀθετέω, etc. In

some 50 more the meaning corresponds to that of the literary

κοινή, as in ἀναλύω (Ph. 1:23). To these he adds words which

appear in the literary κοινή, papyri and inscriptions after Paul's

time, words like ἁρπαγμός, ἀναζῆν, etc. Then there are words

that, so far as known, occur first in the N. T. in the

Christian sense, like ἐκκλησία. But the vernacular κοινή as set

 

            1 Life of St. Paul, vol. I, p. 630.

            2 Der Wortsch. des Apost. Paulus, 1905. He says (p. 86): "Es uberrascht

uns nicht mehr, dass jeder paulinische Brief eine Reihe von Wortern enthalt,

die den ubrigen unbekannt sind." This is well said. Each letter ought to

have words not in the others.

 


THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH   131

 

forth in the papyri and inscriptions furnishes the ground-work

of his vocabulary, when to this is added the use of the LXX

(including the Apocrypha) as in ἀντιλαμβάνομαι, ἁγιάζω. Espe-

cially noteworthy are some nice Greek points that are wanting

in Paul (as well as in the rest of the N. T.) and in the papyri and

inscriptions, as οἷός τέ εἰμι, αἰσθάνομαι, πάνυ, μάλα, ἕπομαι (seldom in

the inscriptions), etc. Nageli sums up by saying that no one

would think that Paul made direct use of Plato or Demosthenes

and that his diligent use of the LXX explains all his Hebraisms

besides a few Hebrew words like ἀμήν or when he translated He-

brew. His Aramaisms (like ἀββά) are few, as are his Latinisms

(like πραιτώριον). "The Apostle writes in the style natural to a

Greek of Asia Minor adopting the current Greek of the time,

borrowing more or less consciously from the ethical writers of the

time, framing new words or giving a new meaning to old words

. . . His choice of vocabulary is therefore much like that of Epic-

tetus save that his intimate knowledge of the LXX has modified

it."1 Paul's Greek, in a word, "has to do with no school, with no

model, but streams unhindered with overflowing bubbling right

out of the heart, but it is real Greek" (Wilamowitz-Mollendorff,

Die griechische Literatur des Altertums, 2. Aufl., p. 159. Cf. Die

Kultur der Gegenwart, Tl. I, Abt. 8, 1905). Deissmann (Light, p.

234) sees Paul wholly as "a non-literary man of the non-literary

class in the Imperial Age, but prophet-like rising above his class

and surveying the contemporary educated world with the con-

of superior strength."

 

            1  Walter Lock, Jour. of Theol. Stud., 1906, p. 298. Athletic figures are

almost confined to Paul (and Heb.), and Ramsay (Exp., 1906, pp. 283ff.) thinks

Tarsus left this impress on him. A further discussion of Paul's rhetoric will

be found in the chapter on Figures of Speech. Cf. J. Weiss, Beitr. zur paulin.

Rhetorik, 1897; Blass, Die Rhyth. der asian. and rain. Kunstpr., 1905. Deiss.

(Theol. Literaturzeit., 1906, pp. 231 ff.) strongly controverts Blass' idea that

Paul used conscious rhythm. Cf. Howson, Metaph. of St. Paul. On Paul's

Hellen. see Hicks, St. Paul and Hellen. (Stud. Bibl. et Feel., 1896); Curtius,

Paulus in Athens (Gesarnm. Abhandl., 1894, pp. 527 ff.); Ramsay, Cities of

St. Paul (pp. 9, 30-41); Heinrici, Zum Hellen. des Paulus (2 Cor. in Meyer);

Wilamowitz-Moll., Die griech. Lit. des Altert. (p. 157); G. Milligan, Epis. to

the Th. (1908, p. 1v). Paul had a full and free Gk. vocab., thought in Gk.,

wrote in Gk. as easily as in Aramaic. But his chief indebtedness seems to

be to the LXX, the vernac. κοινή and the ethical Stoical writers. Milligan (see

above, pp. lii–lv) has a very discriminating discussion of Paul's vocab. and

style. Garvie (Stud. of Paul and His Gospel, p. 6 f.) opposes the notion that

Paul had a decided Gk. influence.

 


132  A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

          (h) WRITER OF HEBREWS. Bruce1 is certain that the author

was not a disciple of Paul, while Simcox2 is willing to admit that

he may have belonged once to the school of Philo, as Paul did to

that of Gamaliel. Harnack suggests Priscilla as the author. If

Paul had "imperial disregard for niceties of construction," He-

brews shows "a studied rhetorical periodicity."3 Von Soden4

considers that in the N. T. Hebrews is "the best Greek, scarcely

different in any point from that of contemporary writers." This

is the more surprising when one observes the constant quotation

of the LXX. The grammatical peculiarities are few, like the fre-

quent use of παρά in comparison, ἐπεί with apodosis (protasis sup-

pressed), the perfect tense to emphasize the permanence of the

Scripture record which sometimes verges close to the aorist (4:3),

the frequent participles, the varied use of particles, periphrases,

the absence of the harsher kinds of hiatus, the presence of rhythm

more than in any of the N. T. books, and in general the quality

of literary style more than in any other N. T. writing. Westcott

notes "the parenthetical involutions." "The calculated force of

the periods is sharply distinguished from the impetuous eloquence

of St. Paul." The writer does not use Paul's rhetorical expres-

sions τί οὖν; τί γάρ; Moulton (Camb. Bibl. Essays, p. 483) notes

the paradox that the Epistle to the Hebrews was written by one

who apparently knew no Hebrew and read only the LXX. The

use of subordinate sentences is common and the position of words

is carefully chosen. There is frequent use of μέν, and τε as well as

ὅθεν and διό. The optative occurs only once and illustrates the

true κοινή. The studied style appears particularly in ch. 11 in the

use of πίστει. The style is hortatory, noble and eloquent, and has

points of contact with Paul, Luke and Peter. The vocabulary,

like the style, is less like the vernacular than any book in

the N. T. Of 87 words which are found in the LXX and in this

book alone in the N. T., 74 belong to the ancient literary works

and only 13 to the vernacular. 18 other words peculiar to this

Epistle are found in the literary κοινή.  There are 168 (10 doubt-

ful) words in Hebrews that appear nowhere else in the N. T.

(cf. Thayer, Lexicon, p. 708). These 168 words are quite char-

acteristic also, like ἀφορᾶν, αἰσθητήριον, πανήγυρις, πρωτοτόκια. West-

 

            1 D. B., Hebrews.                                  2 Writers of the N. T., p. 42.

            3 Thayer, Lang. of the N. T., Hast. D. B.

            4 Early Chris. Lit., 1906, p. 12. On the lang. of Heb. see the careful re-

marks of Jacquier (Hist. des Livres du N. T., tome ler, 1906, pp. 457 ff.). Cf.

Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., pp. 1, 5, 279, 280 f., 288 f., 296 ff., 303 f.

 


THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH   133

 

cott1 considers the absence of words like εὐαγγέλιον, μυστήριον,

πληρόω remarkable. The chief bond of contact in the vocab-

ulary of Hebrews with the κοινή is in the use of "sonorous"

words like ἀντικαθίστημι, εὐπερίστατος, but the author is by no

means an Atticist, though he does approach the literary κοινή.

Deissmann2 indeed considers Hebrews as alone belonging "to an-

other sphere: as in subject-matter it is more of a learned theo-

logical work, so in form it is more artistic than the other books

of the N. T." He even feels that it "seems to hang in the back-

ground like an intruder among the N. T. company of popular

books" (Light, p. 243).

          (i) JOHN. The Johannine question at once confronts the mod-

ern grammarian who approaches the books in the N. T. that are

accredited to John. It is indeed a difficult problem.3 There is

a triple difficulty: the Gospel presents a problem of its own (with

the Epistles), the Apocalypse also has its burden, and there is the

serious matter of the relation of the Gospel and Apocalypse on

the linguistic side. Assuming that John the Apostle wrote the

Gospel, Epistles and Apocalypse, we have the following situation.

The Gospel of John has a well-defined character. There are few

Hebraisms in detail beyond the use of υἱοὶ φωτός (12:36), καί in

the sense of "and yet" or "but" (cf. Hebrew וְ and καί in LXX)

as in 20:14, the absence of the particles save οὖν, and the con-

stant co-ordination of the sentences with rhythmical parallelism.

In the formal grammar the Greek is much like the vernacular

(and literary) κοινή but the cast of thought is wholly Hebrew.

Ewald4  rightly calls its spirit "genuinely Hebrew," while Renan5

even says that the Gospel "has nothing Hebrew" in its style.

Godet6 calls the Gospel a Hebrew body with a Greek dress and

quotes Luthardt as saying that it "has a Hebrew soul in the

Greek language." Schaff7 compares Paul to an Alpine torrent

and John to an Alpine lake. There is indeed in this Gospel great

simplicity and profundity. John's vocabulary is somewhat lim-

ited, some 114 words (12 doubtful, Thayer, Lexicon, p. 704) be-

 

            1 Comm. on Heb., p. xlvi.                     2 Exp. Times, Nov., 1906, p. 59.

            3 Cf. Drummond, Charac. and Author. of the Fourth Gosp., 1904; Sanday,

Crit. of the Fourth Gosp., 1905; Bacon, The Fourth Gosp: in Res. and De-

bate, 1910.

            4 Quoted in Schaff, Comp. to Gk. N. T., p. 67.

            5 Ib. On p. 73 Schaff puts Jo. 1:18 side by side in Gk. and Heb The

Heb. tone of the Gk. is clear.

            6 Comm. sur l'Evang. de S. Jean, vol. I, pp. 226, 232.

            7 Comp. to Gk. N. T., p. 66.

 


134  A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

longing to the Gospel alone in the N. T. But the characteristic

words are repeated many times, such as ἀλήθεια, ἁμαρτία, γινώσκω,

δόξα, ζωή, κόσμος, κρίσις, λόγος, μαρτυρέω, πιστεύω, σκότος, φῶς, etc.

"He rings the changes on a small number of elementary words

and their synonyms."1 But words like ἐκκλησία, εὐαγγέλιον, μετά-

νοια, παραβολή, πίστις, σοφία do not occur at all. However, too

much must not be inferred from this fact, for πιστεύω and εὐαγγε-

λίζω do appear very often.2 Other characteristics of the Gospel

are the common use of  ἵνα in the non-final sense, the distinctive

force of the pronouns (especially ἐκεῖνος, ἐμός, ἴδιος), the vivid use

of the tenses (like Mark), the unusual use of οὖν,3  ζωὴ αἰώνιος is

frequent (21 times, and more than all the rest of the N. T.), fre-

quent repetition, favourite synonyms.4 The Johannine use of

καί, δέ, ἀλλά, γάρ, εἰ, ὅτι, μή, οὐ, etc., is all interesting (see Abbott).

The prepositions, the cases, the voices, the modes all yield good

results in Abbott's hands. The Epistles of John possess the same

general traits as the Gospel save that οὖν does not occur at all

save in 3 Jo. 8 while ὅτι is very common.  Καί is the usual con-

nective. Only eight words are common alone to the Gospel and

the Epistles in the N. T., while eleven are found in the Epistles

and not in the Gospel. Westcott,5 however, gives parallel sen-

tences which show how common phrases and idioms recur in the

Gospel and the First Epistle. The Apocalypse has much in

common with the Gospel, as, for instance, no optative is found in

either; ὅπως is not in either save in Jo. 11:57;  ἵνα is very common

in Gospel, 1 John and Apocalypse, more so than in any other

book of the N. T. save Mark, and ἵνα μή is very common in

Gospel and Apocalypse; οὖν is almost absent from the Apocalypse

 

            1 Abb., Joh. Vocab., p. 348.

            2 Ib., p. 158. Abbott has luminous remarks on such words as πιστεύω,

ἐξουσία, and all phases of John's vocabulary.

            3 Occurs 195 times in the Gospel and only 8 of the instances in the dis-

courses of Jesus. Nearly all of these are in the transitional sense. Cf. Abb.,

Joh. Gr., 1906, p. 165.

            4 On Joh. Synon. (like θεωρέω, ὁράω) see ch. III of Abbott's Joh. Vocab.,

1905. In John ὁράω is not used in present (though often ἑώρακα), but βλέπω,

and θεωρέω. Luke uses it also in present only 3 times, Heb. 2, Jas. 2, Ac. 8,

Apoc. 18. On the whole subject of Joh. gr. see the same author's able work

on Joh. Gr. (1906), which has a careful and exhaustive discussion of the most

interesting points in the Gospel.

            5 Comm. on Epis. of Jo., pp. xli The absence of οὖν, when so character-

istic of the Gospel, shows how precarious mere verbal argument is. Baur,

Die Evang., p. 380, calls the Gospel the Apocalypse "transfigured." Cf.

Blass on John's style, Gr. of N. T. Gk., pp. 261, 276, 278 f., 291, 302.

 


THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH   135

 

as in Epistles and the discourses of Jesus, being common as tran-

sitional particle in narrative portion of Gospel1; ἄρα, common in

other Evangelists and Paul, is not found in Gospel, Epistles or

Apocalypse; μέν, so common in Matthew, Luke (Gospel and Acts),

Paul and Hebrews, is not found at all in Apocalypse and John's

Epistles and only eight times in his Gospel; ὥστε, which appears

95 times elsewhere in the N. T., is not found in Gospel, Epistles

or Apocalypse save once in Jo. 3:16; μή ποτε, fairly common in

Matthew, Luke and Hebrews, does not occur in John's writings

save in Jo. 7:26 (Paul uses it also once only, 2 Tim. 2:25, prefer-

ring μή πως, which he alone uses, 13 exx.); μαρτυρέω is more fre-

quent in Gospel than in 1 John and Apocalypse, but μαρτυρία is as

common in Apocalypse as Gospel; ὄνομα is frequent in Gospel and

Apocalypse as applied to God; οἶδα is found less often in Apoca-

lypse than in Gospel; ἀληθινός is common in Gospel, Epistle and

Apocalypse, though ἀληθής and ἀλήθεια do not appear in the Apoca-

lypse; νικάω occurs only once in Gospel (16:33), but is common

in 1 John and Apocalypse; δίδωμι is more frequent in Gospel and

Apocalypse than in any other N. T. book (even Matt.); δεί-

κνυμι appears about the same number of times in Gospel and

Apocalypse; λόγος is applied to Christ in Jo. 1:1 and Rev.

19:13; the peculiar expression καὶ νῦν ἐστίν which occurs in John

5:25 is similar to the καί ἐσμεν of 1 Jo. 3:1, and the καὶ οὐκ εἰσί

of Rev. 2:2, 3:9; all are fond of antithesis and parenthesis

and repeat the article often. Over against these is to be placed

the fact that the Apocalypse has 156 (33 doubtful) words not in

the Gospel or Epistles, and only nine common alone to them.

Certainly the subject-matter and spirit are different, for the Son

of Thunder speaks in the Apocalypse. Dionysius2 of Alexandria

called the language Of the Apocalypse barbaric and ungram-

matical because of the numerous departures from usual Greek

assonance. The solecisms in the Apocalypse are not in the realm

of accidence, for forms like ἀφῆκες, πέπτωκαν, διδῶ, etc., are com-

mon in the vernacular κοινή.  The syntactical peculiarities are

due partly to constructio ad sensum and variatio structurae. Some

("idiotisms" according to Dionysius) are designed, as the expres-

sion of the unchangeableness of God by ἀπὸ ὁ ὤν (1:4). As to

ὁ ἦν the relative use of in Homer may be recalled. See also

ἡ οὐαί in 11:14, ὅμοιον υἱόν in 14:14, οὐαὶ τοὺς κ. in 8:13. Benson

 

            1 Similarly τε, which occurs 160 times in the Acts, is found only 8 times in

Luke's Gospel. Cf. Lee, Speaker's Comm., p. 457.

            2 Apud Eus. H. E., VII, xxv.

 


136    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

(Apocalypse) speaks of "a grammar of Ungrammar," which is a

bold way of putting it. But the "solecisms" in the Apocalypse

are chiefly cases of anacolutha. Concord is treated lightly in the

free use of the nominative (1:5; 2:20; 3:12), in particular the

participles λέγων, and ἔχων (4:1; 14:14); in the addition of a

pronoun as in 3:8; in gender and number as in 7:9; in the use

of parenthesis as in 1:5 f. Cf. Swete, Apocalypse, p. cxviii

          The accusative, as in the vernacular κοινή (cf. modern Greek)

has encroached upon other cases as with κατηγορεῖν (12:10). The

participle is used freely and often absolutely in the nominative as

ὁ νικῶν (2:26). Most of the variations in case are with the parti-

ciple or in apposition, as ὁ μάρτυς after Χριστοῦ (1:5). Moulton1

has called attention to the numerous examples of nominative ap-

position in the papyri, especially of the less educated kind. The

old explanation of these grammatical variations was that they

were Hebraisms, but Winer2 long ago showed the absurdity of

that idea. It is the frequency of these phenomena that calls for

remark, not any isolated solecism in the Apocalypse. Moulton3

denies that the Apocalypse has any Hebraisms. That is possibly

going too far the other way, for the book is saturated with the

apocalyptic images and phrases of Ezekiel and Daniel and is very

much like the other Jewish apocalypses. It is not so much par-

ticular Hebraisms that meet us in the Apocalypse as the flavour

of the LXX whose words are interwoven in the text at every turn.

It is possible that in the Apocalypse we have the early style of

John before he had lived in Ephesus, if the Apocalypse was writ-

ten early. On the other hand the Apocalypse, as Bigg holds true

 

            1 Exp., 1904, p. 71. Cf. also Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1904, p. 151; Reinhold,

Graec. Patr. etc., p. 57 f.; Schlatter, Die Spr. and Heimat des vierten

Evang. Schl. overemphasizes the Aramaic colour of the Gospel.

            2 W.-M., p. 671.

            3 Prol., p. 9. Cf. also Julicher, Intr. to N. T.; Bousset, Die Offenb. Joh.,

1896; Lee, Speaker's Comm. on Rev. Swete (Apoc. of St. John, 1906, p.

cxx) thinks that John's "eccentricities of syntax belong to more than one

cause: some to the habit which he may have retained from early years of

thinking in a Semitic language; some to the desire of giving movement and

vivid reality to his visions, which leads him to report them after the manner

of shorthand notes, jotted down at the time; some to the circumstances in

which the book was written." The Apoc. "stands alone among Gk. literary

writings in its disregard of the ordinary rules of syntax, and the success with

which syntax is set aside without loss of perspicuity or even of literary power."

Swete welcomes gladly the researches of Deissmann, Thumb and Moulton,

but considers it precarious to compare a literary document like the Apoc.

with slips in business letters, etc.

 


THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH   137

 

of 2 Peter, may represent John's real style, while the Gospel and

Epistles may have been revised as to Greek idioms by a friend or

friends of John in Ephesus (cf. Jo. 21:24). With this theory

compare Josephus' War and Antiquities. One is slow (despite

Moffatt's positiveness in the Exp. Gk. Test.), in the light of Dante,

Shakespeare, Milton, to say that John could not have written

the Apocalypse, though it be the last of his books. Besides what

has been said one must recall that the Apocalypse was composed

on the Isle of Patmos, in some excitement, and possibly without

careful revision, while the Gospel and First Epistle probably had

care and the assistance of cultured friends. At any rate the ver-

nacular κοινή is far more in evidence in the Apocalypse than in

the Gospel and Epistles. "As Dante had the choice between the

accepted language of education, Latin, and the vulgar tongue, so

St. John had to choose between a more artificial kind of Greek,

as perpetuated from past teaching, and the common vulgar

speech, often emancipated from strict grammatical rules, but

nervous and vigorous, a true living speech."'

               VII. N. T. Greek Illustrated by the Modern Greek Vernacular.

 Constant use will be made of the modern Greek in the

course of the Grammar. Here a brief survey is given merely to

show how the colloquial κοινή survives in present-day Greek ver-

nacular. Caution is necessary in such a comparison. The literary

modern Greek has its affinities with the literary κοινή or even

with the Atticists, while the vernacular of to-day often shows

affinities with the less educated writers of papyri of the N. T.

time. The N. T. did indeed have a great effect upon the later

κοινή when theological questions were uppermost at Alexandria

and Constantinople.2  The cleavage between the literary and the

vernacular became wider also. But apart from ecclesiastical

terms there is a striking likeness at many points between the Ver-

nacular κοινή and modern Greek vernacular, though modern Greek

has, of course, Germanic and other elements3 not in the κοινή.

The diminutive4 is more common in the modern Greek than in

 

            1 Ramsay, Letters to the Seven Churches, 1905, p. 209. In general isee

Seeberg, Zur Charak. des Apost. Joh., Neue Kirch. Zeitschr., 1905, pp. 51-64.

            2 Cf. Gregory Naz., II, 13, A; Gregory Nyssa, III, 557 B; Reinhold, De

Graec. Patr. etc., 1898.

            3 Thumb, Indoger. Forsch., 1903, p. 359 f. Boltz (Die hell. Spr., 1881,

p. 10) quotes Rangabe as saying that the mod. Gk. is as far removed from

that of the LXX as from that of Xenophon.

            4 Cf. Hatz., Einl. in d. neugr. Gr., p. 37 f., for list.

 


138     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

the κοινή and usually in ι, as τὸ ἀρνί. The optative is rare in the

N. T.; in the modern Greek it has disappeared. The infinitive is

vanishing before ἵνα in the N. T.; in the modern Greek νά has dis-

placed it completely save with auxiliary verbs.1 The accusative2

in modern Greek has made still further headway and is used even

with ἀπό and all prepositions. The μι verb has entirely vanished

in modern Greek vernacular except εἶναι. The forms in —οσαν,

ουσαν are very common, as are the α forms in aorist and imper-

fect. The forms in –ες (–ας) for perfect and first aorist are also

frequent. The middle voice has almost vanished as a separate

voice (cf. Latin). Prepositions in the vernacular (chiefly εἰς) have

displaced the dative. The superlative is usually expressed by

the article and the comparative. Kennedy3 gives an interesting

list of words that appear either for the first time or with a new

sense in the LXX or the N. T. (or the papyri) that preserve that

meaning in the modern Greek, as δῶμα (‘roof’), θυσιαστήριν (‘altar’),

καθηγητής (‘professor,’ in N. T. ‘master’), ξενοδοχεῖον (‘hotel,’ in

N. T. ξενοδοχέω = ‘entertain strangers’), παιδεύω (‘chastise,’ from

παῖς), φθάνω (‘arrive’), χορτάζω (‘feed’), etc. The list could be greatly

extended, but let these suffice.4 A specimen of modern Greek

vernacular is given from Pallis' translation of Jo. 1:6-8: Βγῆκε

ἕνας ἄνθρωπος σταλμένος ἀπὸ τὸ θεό· τ’ ὄνομά του  Ἰωάνης.  Αυοτὸς ἦρθε γιὰ

κήρυγμά γιὰ νὰ κηρύξει τὸ φῶς, ποὺ νὰ κάνει κι’ ὅλοι νὰ πιστέψουν.  Δὲν

εἶταν ἐκεῖνος τὸ φῶς παρὰ γιὰ νὰ κηρύξει τὸ φῶς. The literary modern

Greek in these verses differs very little from the original N. T.

text, only in the use of ὑπῆρξεν, ὀνομαζόμενος, διὰ νά, δέν, ἦτο.  Moul-

ton5 in an interesting note gives some early illustrations of

modern Greek vernacular. In the second century A.D. ἐσοῦ; is

 

            1 It still persists in Pontic-Cappadocian Gk. according to Thumb, Theol.

Literaturzeit., 1903, p. 421.

            2 There is a riot of indifference as to case in the vernacular Byz. Gk., as

σύν τῆς γυναικός. Cf. Mullach, Gr. der griech. Vulgarspr., p. 27. Jean Psichari,

 Ῥόδα καὶ Μῆλα (1906), has written a defence of the mod. Gk. vernac. and has

shown its connection with the ancient vernac. The mod. Gk. has like free-

dom in the use of the genitive case (cf. Thumb, Handb., pp. 32 ff.). Prep-

ositions have displaced the partitive gen., the genitive of material and of

comparison (abl.), in mod. Gk. The mod. Gk. shows the acc. displacing the

gen. and dat. of the older Gk. (op. cit., p. 35 f.) after ἀκολουθῶ, ἀκούω, ἀπαντῶ,

etc. The double acc. goes beyond anc. Gk. usages (op. cit., p. 36) as ὅλα ρόδινα

τὰ βλέπω, 'I see everything rosy.'

            3 Sour. of N. T. Gk., pp. 153 ff.

            4 Cf. Thumb's Handb. der neugr. Volksspr. (1895); V. and D., Handb. to

Mod. Gk. (1887); Thumb-Angus, Handb. of Mod. Gk. Vernac. (1912).

            5 Prol., p. 234.

 


THE PLACE OF THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE KOINH   139

 

found in OP 528. He quotes Thumb (BZ ix, 234) who cites

from an inscription of the first century A.D. ἔχουσες as nominative

and accusative plural. And Ramsay (Cities and Bish., II, p. 537)

gives ἐπιτηδεύσουν as third plural form on a Phrygian inscription

of the third century A.D. As one illustration note Paul's use of

κατέχω (Ro. 1:18). In modern Greek dialects κατέχω=ἠξεύρω, 'I

know.'

 


 

Intentionally left blank



Intentionally left blank.


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PART II
ACCIDENCE

 


 

 


 

 

CHAPTER V:   WORD–FORMATION

 

          I. Etymology. Grammar was at first a branch of philosophy

among the Greeks, and with the foundation of the Alexandrian

library a new era began with the study of the text of Homer.1

After Photius etymology "rules the whole later grammatical

literature."2 The Stoic grammarians were far better in ety-

mology than in anything else and we owe them a real debt in

this respect, though their extended struggle as to whether anal-

ogy or anomaly ruled in language has left its legacy in the long

lists of "exceptions" in the grammars.3 In some grammars the

term etymology is still applied to the whole discussion of Forms

or Accidence, Formenlehre. But to-day it is generally applied

to the study of the original form and meaning of words.4 The

word ἐτυμολογία is, of course, from ἔτυμος and λόγος, and ἔτ-υμος,

meaning 'real' or 'true,' is itself from the same root ετ— from which

ἐτ-εός, 'true,' comes. So also ἐτ-άζω, 'to test.' Compare also San-

skrit sat-yas, ‘true,’ and sat-yam, ‘truth,’ as well as the Anglo-Saxon

soth, ‘sooth.’  Τὸ ἔτυμον is the true literal sense of a word, the

root. No more helpful remark can be made at this point than to

insist on the importance of the student's seeing the original form

and import of each word and suffix or prefix. This is not all that

is needed by any means, but it is a beginning, and the right be-

ginning.5 "It was the comparative study of languages that first

 

            1 Riem. and Goelzer, Phonet. et Et. des Formes Grq. et Lat., 1901, p. 245.

            2 Reitzenstein, Gesch. der griech. Etym., 1897, p. vi.

            3 Steinthal, Gesch. der Sprachw. etc., 2. pp. 347 ff.

            4 "ὁ ἕτυμος λόγος heissit ja auch 'die wahre Bedeutung '; dass man hier ἔτυ-

μος sagte und nicht ἀληθής, liegt daran, dass ionische Sophisten, namentlich

Prodikos, die Etymologie und Synonymik aufbrachten." F. Blass, Hermen.

und Krit., Bd. I, Muller's Handb. d. klass. Alt., 1892, p. 183.

            5 See Pott, Etym. Forsch., 1861; Curtius, Gk. Etym., vols. I, II, 1886;

Prellwitz, Etym. Worterb. der griech. Spr., 1893; Brug. und Delb., Grundr.

der vergl. Gr., 1897-1901; Skeat, Etym. Dict. of the Eng. Lang., etc.

 

                                               143

 


144    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

gave etymology a surer hold."1 Curtius means etymology in

the modern sense, to be sure.

          II. Roots.2 It is not to be supposed that what are called roots

necessarily existed in this form. They represent the original

stock from which other words as a rule come. What the original

words actually were we have no means of telling. They were not

necessarily interjections, as some have supposed. Mere articu-

late sounds, unintelligible roots, did not constitute speech. Some

interjections are not roots, but express ideas and can often be

analyzed, as “jemine”=Jesu Domine.3 Others, like most nursery

words, are onomatopoetic. There is, besides, no evidence that prim-

itive man could produce speech at will.4  But a few root-words

appear like the Latin i (‘go’) and probably the Greek (though ἠέ

is found in Epic Greek). The number of Greek roots is compara-

tively few, not more than 400, probably less. Harris5 observes

that of the 90,000 words in a Greek lexicon only 40,000 are what

are termed classic words. The new words, which are constantly

made from slang or necessity, are usually made from one of the

old roots by various combinations, or at any rate after the anal-

ogy of the old words.6 Words are "the small coin of language,"7

though some of them are sesquipedalian enough. There seem to

be two ultimate kinds of words or roots, verbs and pronouns,

and they were at last united into a single word as φη-μί, 'say I.'

 

            1 Curtius, Gk. Etym., vol. I, p. 16.

            2 The whole subject of N. T. lexicography calls for reworking. Deissmann

is known to be at work on a N. T. Lex. in the light of the pap. and the

inscr. Meanwhile reference can be made to his Bible Studies, Light, and

his New Light on the N. T.; to J. H. Moulton's articles in the Exp.

(1901, 1903, 1904, 1908); to Kennedy's Sour. of N. T. Gk. (for LXX and

N. T.); to Thayer's N. T. Gk. Lex. and his art. on Lang., of N. T. in Hast.

D. B.; to Cremer's Theol. Lex. of N. T.; to Mayser's Gr. d. griech. Pap. For

the LXX phenomena see careful discussion of Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., pp. 112-

136. Nothing like an exhaustive discussion of N. T. word-formation can yet

be attempted. But what is here given aims to follow the lines of historical

and comparative grammar. We must wait in patience for Deissmann's Lex.

George Milligan is at work with Moulton on his Vocabulary of the New

Testament. Cf. also Nageli, Der Wortsch. des Apost. Paulus, a portion of

which has appeared. Especially valuable is Abb. Joh. Vocab. (1905). For

the LXX cf. also Swete, Intr. to 0. T. in Gk., pp. 302-304. The indices to

the lists of inscr. and pap. can also be consulted with profit.

            3 Paul, Prin. of the Hist. of Lang., p. 181.                      4 Ib., p. 187.

            5 MS. notes on Gk. Gr.

            6 Cf. on slang, Wedgwood, Intr. to the Dict. of the Eng. Lang.; Paul,

Prin. of the Hist. of Lang., p. 175.

            7 Giles, Comp. Philol., p. 235.


                             WORD-FORMATION                                  145

 

It does not seem possible to distinguish between verbal and nomi-

nal roots, as in English to-day the same word is indifferently verb

or noun, "walk," for instance. The modern view is that verbs are

nominal in origin (Hirt, Handb., p. 201). The pronominal roots

may furnish most of the suffixes for both verbs (ῥήματα) and nouns

(ὀνόματα). Verbs, substantives and pronouns (ἀντωνομίαι), there-

fore, constitute the earliest parts of speech, and all the others are

developed from these three.1 Adjectives (ὀνόματα ἐπίθετα) are

merely variations from substantives or pronouns. Adverbs (ἐπιρ-

ρήματα) are fixed case-forms of substantives or adjectives or pro-

nouns. Prepositions (προθέσεις) are adverbs used with nouns or

with verbs (in composition). Conjunctions (σύνδεσμοι) are adverbs

used to connect words and sentences in various ways. Inten-

sive (ἐπιτάσεως) particles are adverbs from nominal or pronominal

stems of a special kind. Speech has made a very small be-

ginning with isolated words; in fact the sentence is probably as

old as human speech, though we first discuss words.2 The number

of root-words with the mere ending is not very great, but some

few survive even in the N. T., where the case-ending is added

directly to the root, as ἅλ-ς (ἅλα, Mk. 9:50), with which compare

Latin sal, English sal-t. So ναῦς (Ac. 27:41), Latin nau-is. In-

stead of ἅλς the N. T. elsewhere follows the κοινή in using τὸ

ἅλας, and τὸ πλοῖον instead of ναῦς. In πούς (πόδ-ς) the root is only

slightly changed after the loss of δ (analogy of οὖς or ὀδούς). The

pronoun εἷς (ἕν-ς) is similarly explained. Pronouns and numerals

use the root directly. In verbs we have many more such roots

used directly with the personal endings without the thematic

vowel ο/ε and sometimes without any tense-suffix for the pres-

ent, like φη-μί (φα-μί). The whole subject of verbs is much more

complicated, but in general the non-thematic forms are rapidly

disappearing in the N. T., while in the vernacular modern Greek

the non-thematic or μι verbs are no longer used (save in the case

of εἶμαι), as δίδω for δίδω-μι, for instance. A number of these roots

go back to the common Indo-Germanic stock. Take δικ, the root

of δείκνυ-μι. The Sanskrit has dic-a-mi; the Latin dic-o, in-dic-o,

ju-dex; the Gothic teiho; the German zeigen. Take the thematic

verb σκέπ-το-μαι. The Sanskrit root is spac (‘look’), spac= spy.

The Zend has cpac, the Latin spec-io, spec-alum, spec-to, etc. In

the Greek root metathesis has taken place and σπεκ has become

 

            1 Uber das relative Alter der einen oder der anderen Wortklasse

sich nichts Sicheres ausmachen" (Vogrinz, Gr. des horn. Dial., 1889, p. 164).

            2 Brug., Furze vergl. Gr., p. 281.

 


146    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

σκεπ in σκέπ-το-μαι (‘to spy out’), σκοπ-ή (‘a watching’), σκοπ-ιά

(‘a watch-tower’), σκοπ-ός (‘a spy,’ ‘a goal’), σκώψ (‘owl’).1 Cf.

Ph. 3:14 κατὰ σκοπόν. The old Greek writers2 made μυστήριον=

μῦς τηρεῖν!

          III. Words with Formative Suffixes. The Indo-Germanic

languages have a highly developed system of affixes,3 prefixes,

infixes, suffixes. The suffixes are used for various purposes, as

case-endings of nouns, as personal endings of verbs, as aids in the

creation of words (formative suffixes). The Greek is rich in these

formative suffixes, which are more or less popular at various peri-

ods of the language. The suffixes in the Greek are quite similar to

those in the older Sanskrit. When the formative suffixes are used

directly with the root, the words are called primitives; when the

stem of the word is not a root, it is called a derivative. Hence

there are primitive and derivative verbs, primitive and deriva-

tive substantives, primitive and derivative adjectives. There

are, of course, in the N. T. Greek no "special" formative suffixes,

though the κοινή does vary naturally in the relative use of these

terminations from the earlier language. In the modern Greek a

number of new suffixes appear like the diminutives –πουλος (πῶλος,

‘foal’), κτλ. "In all essentials the old patterns are adhered to"

in the N. T. word-formation.4 See also Hadley-Allen (pp. 188 ff.)

for the meaning of the Greek formative suffixes.

          (a) VERBS. On the stem-building of the verb one can consult

Hirt or Brugmann for the new point of view.5 Without attempt-

ing a complete list of the new words in the κοινή,  I give what

is, I trust, a just interpretation of the facts concerning the new

words appearing from the time of Aristotle on that we find in the

N. T. Hence some classes of words are not treated.

          1. Primary or Primitive Verbs. No new roots are used to

make verbs with old or new terminations6 in the κοινή. The ten-

 

            1 Cf. Rachel White, Cl. Rev., 1906, pp. 203 ff., for interesting study of

ἐπισκήπτω.

            2 Blass, Hermen. und Krit, Bd. I, p. 191. Heine, Synon. des neutest. Griech.,

1898, has a very helpful discussion of N. T. word-building (pp. 28-65), but

does not distinguish the κοινή words.

            3 Next to Sans. Gk. uses more inflections and so more affixes. Cf. Jann.,

Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 45.

            4 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 61. On the whole subject of word-building see

Brug., Griech. Gr., 1900, pp. 160-362; K.-B1., Bd. II, Ausf. Gr., pp. 254-340.

            5 Brug. op. cit. Hirt, Handb. der griech. Laut- und Formenl., 1902, pp.

360-391.

            6 Schmid, Der Atticis. etc., 4. Bd., p. 702.

 


                                   WORD-FORMATION                                 147

 

dency is all towards the dropping of the non-thematic or μι. forms

both with the simple root and with the suffix. The remnants of

the μι forms, which are not quite obsolete in the N. T., will be

given in the chapter on the Conjugation of the Verb. Here may

be mentioned ἀπόλλυμι, which uses the suffix –νυ.1 Thematic verbs

made from the root by the addition of ο/ε are very common, like

λέγ-ω, λείπ-ω (λιπ). The N. T., as the κοινή, has new presents like

κρύβω, νίπτω, χύννω, etc. These kept increasing and are vouched

for by modern Greek. Cf. Thumb, Handbook, pp. 129 ff.

          2. Secondary or Derivative Verbs. Not all of these verbs are

formed from nouns; many come also from verbs. Denominatives

are made from nouns, like τιμά-ω from τιμή, while verbals (post-

verbals, Jannaris2) are made from verbs. The simple denomi-

natives,3 ending in –ὰω, –έω, --εύω, --άζω, --ίζω are not always

distinguished from the intensive verbals or the causative denomi-

natives, though –άω, –αίνω, --ύνω more commonly represent the

latter.  Ὀπτάνω (from ὄπτω) besides Ac. 1:3 appears in the LXX,

Hermes, Tebt. Papyri. Cf. also the rare λιμπάνω. The κοινή is

rich in new verbs in --νω.  Verbs in –άω are common in the N. T.,

as in the κοινή, like τιμάω, διψάω, ζάω, etc.   Ἀνα-ζάω occurs in Artem.,

Photius, inscriptions, etc. In the modern Greek verbs in –άω have

gained at the expense of verbs in –εω.4 They belong to the oldest

Greek speech and come from feminine stems in –α.5 Verbs in –άζω

show great increase in the N. T. as in the κοινή and modern Greek,6

like ἁγιάζω (ἅγιος, ἁγίζω, LXX), ἐνταφιάζω (ἐντάφια, Anthol., Plut.),

νηπιάζω (νήπιος) in Hippocrates, στυγνάζω (from στυγνός) in Schol.

on AEsch. and in LXX σινιάζω (σινίον, eccl., Byz.). Πυρράζω (Mt.

16:2 f.) occurs in LXX and Philo, but W. H. reject this passage.

          The majority of the new verbs in –έω are compound, as ἀσχημονέω,

πληροφορέω (πληρο-φόρος, LXX, pap.), but δυνατέω (only in N. T.)

is to be noticed on the other side.7   Ἀκαιρέω (from ἄκαιρος) is found

 

            1 On history of the μι verbs see Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 234. In the pap.

verbs in -υμι keep the non-thematic form in the middle, while in the active

both appear. Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 3S.

            2 Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 300.

            3 Harris, MS. Notes on Gk. Gr.

            4 Thumb, Handb., p. 175; Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., pp. 218, 300.

            5 Sutterlin, Gesch. der Verba Denom. in Altgriech., 1891, p. 7. Cf. also

Pfordten, Zur Gesch. der griech. Denom., 1886. Mayser (Gr., pp. 459-466) has

an interesting list of derivative verbs in the Ptol. pap. Cf. Frankel, Gr. Den.

            6 Thumb, Handb. of Mod. Gk., V., p. 135 f. There is frequent inter-

change between forms in –άζῳ, --ίζω and –.

            7 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 61.

 


148   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

in Diodorus; εὐπροσωπέω (εὐπρόσωπος) is found in Gal. 6:12 (in

papyri, 114 B.c.; ὅπως εὐπροσωπῶμεν, Tebt. P. No. 1912 f.). Cf.

Moulton, Expositor, 1903, p. 114. These verbs have always been

very numerous, though –εω gradually retreats before –αωΓρηγο-

ρέω (Arist., LXX, Jos.) is formed from the perfect ἐγρήγορα,

which is not in the N. T., but Winer long ago found a similar

form in ἐπικεχειρέω (Papyri Taurin. 7).1   Ἐλαττονέω (Arist., LXX,

pap.) is from ἔλλατον.  Ἐλλογέω (and –άω) is in inscriptions and

papyri.   Ἐξακολουθέω (Polyb., Plut., inscriptions) is not "biblical"

as Thayer called it.  Αὐθεντέω (αὐθέντης, αὐτός and ἔντεα) is in the

κοινή, according to Moeris, for the Attic αὐτοδικέω. (In the late

papyri see Deissmann, Light, p. 85.) No great distinction in

sense exists between –άω and —έω.

          Verbs in –εύω are also very common and are formed from a

great variety of stems.  Αἰχμαλωτεύω (from αἰχμάλωτος) is read in

2 Tim. 3:6 only by Dc EKL al. p1. Or., the form in –ίζω being

genuine. It is, however, common in the LXX, as is ἐγκρατεύομαι

(1 Cor. 9:25), from ἐγκρατής (in Aristotle).  Γυμνιτεύω (not γυμνη-

τεύω, Dio Chrys., Plut., Dio Cass., etc.) is found in 1 Cor. 4:11

and is from γυμνήτς.  Ζήλευε (Simplic., Democr.), not ζήλωσον, is

the correct text in Rev. 3:19 (so W. H. with ABC against אP).

Both are from ζῆλος. θριαμβεύω (from θρίαμβος) is in the literary

κοινή.2    Ἱερατεύω (Lu. 1:8) is from ἱερεύς and is found in the

LXX, the κοινή writers and the inscriptions.  Μεσιτεύω (Heb.

6:17) is from μεσίτης and is found in Arist., Polyb. and papyri.

Μαθητεύω is from μαθητής (Plut., Jambl.); ὀλοθρεύω (Heb. 11:28,

LXX) is from ὄλεθρος (ADE read ὀλεθρεύων in Heb. 11:28). In

Ac. 3:23 ἐξολεθρεύω) is the form accepted by W. H. after the

best MSS. of the LXX.3  Παγιδεύω (Mt. 22 : 15) is from  παγίς  

and occurs in the LXX.  Παρα-βολεύομαι is the correct word in

Ph. 2:30 against CKLP which read παρα-βουλεύομαι. The word

is from παρά-βολος, which has not been found in other writers, but

an inscription (ii/A.D.) at Olbia on the Black Sea has the very

form παραβολευσάμενος used by Paul (cf. Deissmann, Light, p. 84).

Περπερεύομαι (1 Cor. 13:4) is made from πέρπερος and is found in

 

            1 W.-M., p. 115.

            2 Cf. θρίαμβον εἰσάγιν, triumphum agere. Goetzeler, Einfl. d. Dion. von

Ital. auf d. Sprachgeb. d. Plut., 1891, p. 203. Deiss. (Light, p. 368) gives

this word (with ἀρετή, ἐξουσία, δόξα, ἰσχύς, κράτος, μεγαλειότης) as proof of a paral-

lel between the language of the imperial cult and of Christianity.

            3 Cf. W.-M., note, p. 114. Mayser (Gr., pp. 415-509) gives a very com-

plete discussion of "Stammbildung" in the Ptol. pap.

 


                             WORD-FORMATION                                       149

 

Antoninus.  Χρηστεύομαι is from χρηστός. Three verbs in –θω

appear which are made from verbs in –άω and –εω, viz. ἀλήθω

(ἀλέω), κνήθω (κνάω) νήθω (νέω), one (νήθω) being found also in Plato

Polit. (p. 289 c). Cf. modern Greek θέτω (τίθημι).

          The causative endingόω is usually formed on noun-stems and

is very common, sometimes supplanting verbs in –εύω or –ίζω, as

ἀνα-καινόω (Isocrates, ἀνακαινίζω),1 ἀναστατόω (from ἀνάστατος, LXX,

papyri. Cf. ἀναστατοῖ με, 'he upsets me,' Deissmann, Light, p. 81);

ἀφ-υπνόω (Anthol., classical ἀφυπνίζω); δεκατόω (classical δεκατεύω);

δολιόω (LXX, from δόλιος); δυναμόω (LXX, eccl. and Byz., from

δύναμις); ἐξουδενόω (often in LXX, but W. H. read ἐξουδενέω in

Mk. 9:12, Plutarch even ἐξουδενίζω);  θεμελιόω (LXX) is from

θεμέλιον; καυσόω (from καῦσος, Disc., Galen); κεφαλιόω (Lob., ad

Phryn., p. 95, κεφαλίζω, though not in any known Greek author)

W. H. read in Mk. 12:4 with אBL as against κεφαλαιόω and it

means 'beat on the head' (cf. κολαφίζω). So κολοβόω (from κόλοβος,

Arist., Polyb., Diod.); νεκρόω (from νεκρός, Plut., Epict., M. Aur.,

inscriptions); κραταιόω (LXX, eccl.), from κρατύνω; σαρόω (Artem.,

Apoll., Dysc.), from σαίρω (σάρος); σημειόω (from σημεῖον, Theoph.,

Polyb., LXX, Philo, Dion. Hal., etc.); σθενόω (Rhet. Gr.), from

σθενέω (σθένος); χαριτόω (LXX, Jos., eccl.), from χάρις. Verbs in –όω

do not always have the full causative idea,2 ἀξιόω=’deem worthy’

and δικαιόω='deem righteous.'

          Verbs in –ίζω do not necessarily represent repetition or inten-

sity. They sometimes have a causative idea and then again lose

even that distinctive note and supplant the older form of the

word. Forms in –ίζω are very common in modern Greek.   Ῥαντίζω

(LXX, Athen.), for instance, in the N. T. has displaced ῥαίνω, and

βαπτίζω (since Plato) has nearly supplanted βάπτω. These verbs

come from many sorts of roots and are very frequent in the N. T.,

as the κοινή is lavish with them. The new formations in the κοινή

appearing in the N. T. are as follows:  αἱρετίζω (from αἱρετός, LXX,

inscriptions); αἰχμαλωτίζω (literary κοινή and LXX), from αἰχμά-

λωτος; ἀναθεματίζω (LXX and inscriptions), from ἀνάθεμα; ἀνεμίζω

(Jas. 1:6) is found in schol. on Hom. Od. 12, 336, the old form

being ἀνεμόω; ἀτενίζω (from ἀτενής, Arist., Polyb., Jos.); δειγματίζω

(from δεῖγμα) appears in apocryphal Acts of Peter and Paul;

δογματίζω (from δόγμα) is in Diodorus and the LXX; ἐγγίζω (from

ἐγγύς, from Polyb. and Diod. on); ἐξ-υπνίζω (from ὕπνος LXX,

Plut.); θεατρίζω (from θέατρον) in ecclesiastical and Byzantine

writers, ἐκθεατρίζω being in Polybius; ἱματίζω (from ἱμάτιον) is

 

            1 Cf. Zur Gesch. der Verba Denom., p. 95.                     2 Ib.


 

150     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

found in Serapeum papyrus 163 B.C.; ἰουδαΐζω (from  Ἰουδαῖος) is

found in the LXX and Josephus and is formed like  ἑλληνίζω and,

similar ethnic terms; καθαρίζω (classic καθαίρω, from καθαρός, LXX,

Jos., inscriptions); κρυσταλλίζω (from κρύσταλλος, Rev. 21:11) is

still "not found elsewhere" (Thayer); μυκτηρίζω (from μυκτήρ, the

nose') is in the LXX; ὀρθρίζω (from ὄρθρος) is in the LXX; πελεκίζω

(from πέλεκυς) is common in literary κοινή; σκορπίζω (akin to σκορ-

πίος, root skerp) is in LXX and in literary κοινή, Attic form being

σκεδάννυμι, old Ionic according to Phrynichus; σπλαγχνίζομαι (from

σπλάγχνα, Heb. וַחֲמִים) occurs in LXX, Attic had an  active

σπλαγχνεύω; συμμορφίζω (from σύμμορφος) is the correct text in

Ph. 3:10 against συμμορφόω (EKL), though neither word is known

elsewhere, perhaps coined by Paul; φυλακίζω (from rom φυλακή) is in

LXX and Byzantine writers. Of verbs in –ύζω, γογγύζω (ono-

matopoetic, like τονθρύζω of the cooing of doves) is in the LXX

and the papyri.

          Verbs in –ύνω are fairly common, like παροξύνω. Only one word

calls for mention, σκληρύνω (from σκληρός), which takes the place

of the rare σκληρόω and is found in LXX and Hippocrates. No

new verbs in –αίνω (like εὐφραινω) appear in the N. T. Verbs in

σκω are, like the Latin verbs in –sco, generally either inchoative

or causative. It is not a very common termination in the N. T.,

though εὑρίσκω, γινώσκω and διδάσκω occur very often, but these

are not derivative verbs. In the N. T. the inchoative sense is

greatly weakened. The suffix belongs to the present and the im-

perfect only. In modern Greek it has nearly disappeared save

in the dialects.1  Γαμίσκω (accepted by W. H. in Lu. 20:34)

rather than γαμίζω is causative (Arist. pol.); γηράσκω and μεθύσκω

both come from the earlier Greek.2   Ἐν-διδύ-σκω occurs in the

LXX, Jos., inscriptions. The new present στήκω (Mk. 11:25) is

made from the perfect stem ἕστηκα (στέκω in modern Greek). As

in N. T., so in modern Greek desideratives in –σείω, –σιάω drop

out. The verbs in –ιάω still retained (ἀγαλλιάω, ἀροτρ-ιάω, θυμ-ιάω,

κοπ-ιάω) have no desiderative meaning. Of these ἀγαλλιάω, for

the old ἀγάλλομαι, is late κοινή; ἀροτριάω is from Theophr. on,

κοπιάω is late in the sense of ‘toil.’ No new reduplicated verbs

appear in the N. T.

               (b) SUBSTANTIVES.

          1. Primary or Primitive Substantives. Here the formative

(stem-suffix) suffix is added to the root. It is important to seek the

 

            1 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 302; Thumb, Handb., p. 133.

            2 Cf. Donaldson, New Crat., p. 615, for discussion of –σκω verbs.


                           WORD-FORMATION                                    151

 

meaning not only of the root, but of this formative suffix also

when possible. The root has in most cases the strong form, as

in λόγ(λεγ)-ο-ς. These substantives are thus from the same root

as the verb. With —μό-ς, --μή, expressing action, are formed in

the old Greek words like θύ-μός, -τι-μή. With —μα, denoting re-

sult, we find ἀντ-απόδο-μα (LXX, old Greek ἀντ-από-δο-σις, from

ἀντ-απο-δίδωμι); διά-στη-μα (from δι-ίστημι Arist., Polyb., Philo);

ἔν-δυ-μα (from ἐν-δύω, LXX, Strabo, Jos., Plut.); θέλη-μα (from

θέλω, Arist. and LXX); κατά-κρι-μα (from κατα-κρίνω, Dion. Hal.,

pap.); κατά-λυ-μα (from κατα-λύ-ω, literary κοινή for old κατ-αγωγεῖον,

and with idea of place); κατά-στη-μα (καθ-ίστη-μι, Plut. and the

LXX); κτίσ-μα (from κτίζω Strabo, Dion. Hal.); πρόσ-κομ-μα (from

προσ-κόπ-τω, in LXX and Plut.). The suffix —σι-ς, meaning action

(abstract), appears in ἀνά-βλεψ-ις (Arist., LXX); ἀνά-δειξ-ις (from

ἀνα-δείκ-νυ-μι-- Plut., Diod., Strabo, Sirach); θέλη-σις in Heb. 2:4

(from θέλω), a "vulgarism," according to Pollux); κατά-νυξ-ις (from

κατα-νύσσ-ω, LXX); κατά-κρισις (from κατα-κρίνω, Vettius Valens,

eccl.); πε-ποίθ-η-σις (from πέ-ποιθ-α, πείθω, Josephus and Philo,

condemned by the Atticists); πρόσ-κλι-σις (from προσ-κλίν-ω, Polyb.

and Diod.); πρόσ-χυ-σις (from προσ-χέ-ω, Justin Martyr and later).

The suffix —μονή is used with πεισ-μονή (from πείθω, Ignatius and

later) and επι-λησ-μονή (ἐπι-λανθ-άνω, ἐπι-λήσ-μων, Sirach). Σαγ-ήνη

(LXX, Plut., Lucian) has suffix —ήνη (cf. —ονο, --ονη, etc.).  Δια-

σπορ-ά (δια-σπείρω, LXX, Plut.) and προσ-ευχ-ή (προσ-εύχ-ομαι,

LXX, inscriptions) use the suffix —α (—η). Cf. ἀπο-γραφ-ή (N. T.,

papyri), ἀπο-δοχή (inscriptions), βροχή (papyri),  ἐμπλοκή (ἐμπλέκω

inscriptions), δια-ταγή (δια-τάσσω, papyri, inscriptions, later writ-

ings). The agent is usually —της (Blass, Gr., p. 62), not —τωρ or

τηρ as in διώκτης (from διώκω, earliest example) and δό-της (from

δί-δω-μι, classic δοτήρ.  But cf. σω-τήρ). See γνώστης (γι-νώσκω,

LXX, Plut.), κτίσ-της (κτίζω, Arist., Plut., LXX), ἐπι-στάτης (only

in Luke, ἐφίστημι). See further under compound words for more

examples. In modern Greek —της is preserved, but —τωρ and τηρ

become —τορης, τηρας. Jannaris, op. cit., p. 288; Thumb, Hand-

book, p. 49. I pass by words in –ευς, μην, --τρον, etc.

          2. Secondary or Derivative Substantives. Only important words

not in common use in the older Greek can be mentioned.

          (α) Those from verbs. Words in —μός expressing action. From

verbs in —άζω come ἁγιασ-μός (ancient Greek ἁγίζω, but later form

common in LXX and N. T.);  ἁγνισ-μός (from ἁγνίζω, Dion. Hal.,

LXX, Plut.); ἀπαρτισ-μός (Dion. Hal., Apoll. Dysc., papyri);

ἁρπαγ-μός (ἁρπάζω is from root ἁρπ, like Latin rapio.  Ἁρπαγ-μός once


          GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT   152

 

in Plutarch, ἁρπαγή common from AEschylus)1; γογγυσ-μός (from

γογγύζω, Antonin.); ἐνταφιασ-μός (Plutarch and scholia to Eur. and

Arist., ἐνταφιάζω);  ἱματισ-μός (from ἱματίζω, LXX, Theophr.,Polyb.,

Diod., Plut., Athen.); πειρασ-μός (from πειράζω and common in

the LXX). From verbs in –ίζω have βαπτισ-μός (Blass, Gr. of

N. T. Gk., p. 62) used by Josephus of John's baptism,2 but not in

the N. T. of the ordinance of baptism, save in Col. 2:12, in א°

BD*FG 47, 67**, 71, a Western reading rejected by W. H.;

ὀνειδισ-μός (Plutarch and Dion. Hal.); παροργισ-μός (not found

earlier than LXX nor in κοινή writers, Dion. uses παροργίζω); πορισ-

μός (Sap., Polyb., Jos., Plut., Test. XII Patr.); ῥαντισ-μός (LXX);

σαββατισ-μός (Plut. and eccl. writers); σωφρονισ-μός (Jos., Plut.,

etc.); ψιθυρισ-μός (from ψιθυρίζω, LXX, Clem. Rom., Plut., ono-

matopoetic word for the hissing of the snake). The ending –μός

survives in literary modern Greek. Cf. Jannaris, op. cit., p. 288.

The tendency to make new words in —μός decreased. The modern

Greek vernacular dropped it (Thumb, Handbook, p. 62).

          Abstract nouns in —σις are βίω-σις (in Sirach, from βιόω); ἀνα-

καίνω-σις (ἀνα-καινό-ω, Etym. M. Herm.); ἀπάντη-σις (ἀπ-αντά-ω,

LXX, Polyb., Diod., papyri); ἀπο-κάλυψις (LXX, Plut.); ἀπο-κατά-

στα-σις (Poly ., Diod., papyri, etc.); ἀπο-στα-σία (LXX); ἐκζήτη-σις

(ἐκ-ζητέω, true text in 1 Tim. 1:4, Basil Caes., Didym.); ἐν-δόμη-σις

(from ἐνδομέω, Jos., also ἐνδώμησις) ἐπιπόθη-σις (LXX, from ἐπι-

ποθέω); ὑπ-άντη-σις (LXX, Jos., App.). Words in –σις, common

in Hebrews, make few new formations in the later Greek.

 Ἀγάπη begins to displace ἀγάπησις (LXX, inscription in Pisidia,

and papyrus in Herculaneum). Abstract nouns in —εία (W. H.

ία) are chieiiy from verbs in –εύω as ἀρεσκεία (from ἀρεσκεύω,

Polyb., Diod., papyri, and usually in bad sense); ἐπι-πόθεια (so

W. H., not ἐπι-ποθία, in Ro. 15:23, from ἐπιποθέω probably

by analogy like ἐπιθυμία. Not found elsewhere).  Ἐριθεία (from

ἐριθεύω, Arist pol. The verb from ἔριθος, 'working for hire');

ἱερατεία (from ἱερατεύω, Arist. pol., Dion. Hal., LXX, inscriptions);

λογεία (—ία) is from λογεύω (‘collect’) and is found in inscrip-

tions, ostraca, papyri (see Deissmann, Light, p. 105); μεθοδεία

(from μεθοδεύω, which occurs in the κοινή, from μέθοδος, but not

the abstract noun).

 

            1 Rutherford, New Phryn., p. 407; Donaldson, New Crat., p. 451; Light-

foot on Ph. 2:6.

            2 Ant. 18. 5, Cf. Sturtevant, Stud. in Gk. Noun-Formation (Cl. Philol.,

vii, 4, 1912). For long list of derivative substantives in the Ptol. pap. see

Mayser, Gr., pp. 416-447.


                                     WORD-FORMATION                         153

 

          From ὀφείλω we have ὀφειλή (common in the papyri), ὀφείλημα

(Plato, Arist., LXX). Words in –μα (result) are more common in

the later Greek and gradually take an abstract idea of –σις in

modern Greek.1 The new formations appearing in the N. T. are

ἀ-γνόη-μα (0. T. Apoc., from ἀγνοέω); αἰτίω-μα (correct text in

Ac. 25:7, and not αἰτίαμα, from αἰτιάομαι). Cf. αἰτίωσις in

Eustathius, p. 1422, 21. This form as yet not found elsewhere);

ἄντλημα (from ἀντλέω, Plut., what is drawn, and then strangely a

thing to draw with, like ἀντλητήρ or ἀντλητήριον); ἀπ-αύγασ-μα

(from ἀπαυγάζω, and this from ἀπό and αὐγή, in Wisdom and

Philo); ἀπο-σκίασ-μα (from ἀποσκιάζω, and this from ἀπό and σκιά.

Only in Jas. 1:17); ἀσθένη-μα (from ἀσθενέω, in physical sense in

Arist. hist., papyri); βάπτισ-μα (from βαπτίζω), "peculiar to N. T.

and ecclesiastical writers," Thayer). In βάπτισ-μα, as distinct

from βαπτισ-μός, the result of the act is included (cf. Blass, Gr.

of N. T. Gk., p. 62); ἐξέρα-μα (from ἐξεράω, in Dioscor., example of

the verb, cf. Lob., ad Phryn., p. 64); ἥττη-μα (from ἡττάο-μαι,

LXX, in ecclesiastical writers); ἱεράτευ-μα (from ἱερατεύω, LXX);

κατ-όρθω-μα (from κατ-ορθόω, literary as Polyb., Diod., Strabo,

Jos., Plut., Lucian and 3 Macc.); ῥάπισ-μα (from ῥαπίζω, An-

tiph., Anthol., Lucian); στερέω-μα (from στερεόω, Arist., LXX).

Blass2 calls attention to the fact that in the later Greek words in

μα, like those in –σις, –της, --τος often prefer stems with a short

vowel, as δόμα (δόσις), θέμα (θέσις), though this form is already in

the older Doric, κλί-μα, κρί-μα, πόμα (Attic πῶμα). Hence ἀνάθε-μα

in N. T., though ἀνάθημα in Lu. 21:5 (W. H. acc. to BLQΓ, etc.),

and in the papyri "nouns in –μα are constantly showing short

penult."3 But ἀνάθεμα, like θέμα and δόμα, belongs to the list

of primary substantives.

          Words in --της (agent) are fairly numerous, like βαπτισ-τής (from

βαπτίζω, Jos.); βιασ-της (from βιάζω. Pind., Pyth. and others use

βιατάς); γογγυσ-τής (from γογγύζω, Theodotion and Symm. trans-

lation of the LXX); ἑλληνισ-τής (from ἑλληνίζω, not in Greek

authors, though ἑλληνίζω is, as in Xen., Anab., and Strabo, etc.); ἐξ-

ορκισ-τής (from ἐξ-ορκίζω, Jos., Lucian, eccl. writers); εὐαγγελισ-τής

 

            1 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 289. Thumb, Handb., p. 65. On frequency in

LXX see C. and S., Sel. from LXX, p. 28. Cf. Frankel, Griech. Denom., 1906.

            2 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 62 f. For same thing in LXX (ἀνάθεμα, πρόσθεμα,

δόμα, etc.) H C. and S., Sel. from LXX, p. 28.

            3 Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1904, p. 108. He instances besides ἀνάθεμα in the

sense of 'curse,' θέμα, ἐπίθεμα, πρόσθεμα, πρόδομα. On ἀνάθεμα, for exx. in iii/B.C.

inscr., see Glaser, De Rat., quae interc. inter Berm. Polyb. etc., 1894, p. 82.


154   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

(from εὐαγγελίζω, eccl. writers); κερματισ-τής (from κερματίζω, Nicet.,

Max. Tyr.); κολλυβις-της (found in Men. and Lys.) has no verb

κολλυβίζω, but only κόλλυβος, a small coin; λυτρω-τής (from λυτρόω,

LXX and Philo); μερισ-τής (from μερίζω, Pollux); προσ-κυνη-τής

(from προσκυνέω, inscriptions, eccl. and Byz.); στασιασ-τής (from

στασιάζω, Diod., Dion. Hal., Jos., Ptol.); τελειω-τής (from τελειόω,

only in Heb. 12:2).

          A few late words in –τήρ-ιον (from –τηρ and –ιον) occur as ἀκροα-

τήριον (from ἀκροάομαι, Plut. and other κοινή writers) where

--τήριον means ‘place’; ἱλασ-τήριον (from ἱλάσκομαι, LXX, inscrip-

tions, papyri, Dio Chrys.) is a substantive in the N. T., made

probably from the adjective ἱλαστήριος (cf. σωτήριος) and means

‘propitiatory gift’ or 'means of propitiation' and does not allude

to the mercy seat1 or covering. However, in Heb. 9:5 ἱλαστήριον

does have the meaning of 'place of propitiation' or 'mercy seat'

(cf. θυμια-τήριον). Deissmann passed this passage by, though he is

correct in Ro. 3:25. Cf. φυλακτήριον.

          (β) Those from substantives. Several words expressing place

are formed after the fashion of the older Greek as ἀφεδρών (prob-

ably from the Macedonian ἄφεδρος, and that from ἔδρα and ἀπό)

which may be compared with κοπρών; βραβεῖον (from βραβεύς, Me-

nand. Mon., Opp„ Lycoph., Clem. Rom.); ἐλαιών (from ἔλαιον,

like ἀμπελ-ών from ἄμπελος, in the LXX, Jos., inscriptions and

papyri),2 with which compare μυλών (--ῶνος) in Mt. 24:41 accord-

ing to DHM and most cursives instead of μύλος. Moulton (The

Expositor, 1903, p. 111) has found φοικών (—ῶνος), 'palm-grove,' in

A. P. 31 (112 B.C.).  Εἰδωλεῖον (–ιον W. H.), found first in 1 Macc.

and 1 Esd., is formed after the analogy of μουσε-ῖο-ν.  Τελώνιον

(from τελώνης) is found in Strabo.  Τετράδιον (Philo) is from τετράς,

the usual guard in the prisons. Several new words in —της (qual-

ity) appear, as ἀδελφότης (from ἀδελφός, 1 Macc., 4 Macc., Dio

Chrys., eccl. writers); θεό-της (from θεός, Lucian, Plut.); κυριό-της

 

            1 See Deiss., B. S., p. 131 f., where a lucid and conclusive discussion of the

controversy over this word is given. See also Zeitschr. fur neutest. Wiss., 4

(1903), p. 193.

            2 Blass is unduly sceptical (Gr., p. 64). Deiss. (B. S., p. 208 f.) finds nine

examples of ἐλαιών= 'place of olives' or 'olive orchard' in vol. I of the Ber.

Pap., and Moulton (Exp., 1903, p. 111; Prol., p. 49) has discovered over

thirty in the first three centuries A.D. In Ac. 1:12 it is read by all MSS.

and is correct in Lu. 19:29 (ag. W. H.) and 21:37 (ag. W. H.).   Ἐλαιῶν is

right in Lu. 19:37, etc. In Lu. 19:29; 21:37, question of accent. Cf.

also ἀμπελών (from ἄμπελος, LXX, Diod., Plut.) which is now found in

the pap.


                              WORD-FORMATION                                      155

 

(from κύριος, originally adj., eccl. and Byz. writers). Συρο-φοινίκισσα

is the text of אAKL, etc., in Mk. 7:26 as against Σύρα Φοινίκισσα

in BEFG, etc. In either case φοινίκισσα, not φοίνισσα (Text.

Rec.) which is the usual feminine of φοίνιξ, as Κίλισσα is of

Κίλιξ.  Lucian has a masculine Συροφοίνιξ and Justin Martyr a

feminine Συροφοινίκη. From this last φοινίκισσα probably comes.

Cf. the use of βασίλισσα, the Atticists preferring βασιλίς or

βασίλεια.

           Ἡρῳδιανός (from  Ἡρῴδης) and Χριστ-ιανός (from Χριστός) first

appear in the N. T., and are modelled after Latin patronymics

like Caesarianus (Καισαρ-ιανός, Arrian-Epictetus). Blass1 goes un-

necessarily far in saying that the N. T. form was Χρηστ-ιανός

(from Χηρστός), though, of course, ι and η at this time had little,

if any, distinction in pronunciation. Μεγιστάν is from μέγιστος

(as νεάν from νέος). Cf. Latin megistanes.  Μεγιστάν is found in

LXX, Jos., Maneth.  Πλημμύρα (LXX, Dion. Hal., Jos., Philo) is

from πλήμμη. There was, of course, no "Christian" or "biblical"

way of forming words.

          Diminutives are not so common in the N. T. as in the Byzan-

tine and modern Greek2 where diminutives are very numerous,

losing often their original force. Βιβλαρίδιον (a new form, but

compare λιθαρίδιον) is read in Rev. 10:2 by אACP against

βιβλιδάριον (fragment of Aristoph.) according to C* and most of

the cursives and βιβλίον (by B). Variations occur also in the text

of verses 8, 9, 10.  Γυναικάριον (from γυνή) is used contemptuously

in 2 Tim. 3:6 (also in Antonin. and Epict.).   Ἰχθύδιον (from

ἰχθύς), κλινίδιον and κλινάριον (from κλίνη) occur from Aristoph. on.

Κοράσιον (from κόρη, called Maced. by Blass) is used disparagingly

in Diog. Laert. and Lucian, but in LXX and Epict. as in the N. T.

that is not true, though it hardly has the endearing sense (some-

times found in the diminutive) in κυνάριον (κύνες='street-dogs'),

but that sense appears often in παιδίον as in Jo. 21:5.   Ὀνάριον

(from ὄνος) is found in Machon and Epictetus.   Ὀψάριον (from

ὄψον) is found in Alexis and Lucian, and οψώνιον (likewise from

ὄψον) is used by Dion., Polyb., Jos., Apocrypha and papyri.   Πτε-

 

            1 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 63. Cf. Lipsius, Ursp. des Christennamens, 1873.

W.-Sch. (p. 135) suggests that these two words are not after the Lat. model,

but after the type of   Ἀσιανός, which was foreign to the European Greeks.

But  Ἀσιανός (from  Ἀσία) is in Thucyd. and besides is not parallel to Χριστός,

Χριστ-ιανός. Cf. Eckinger, Die Orthog. lat. Worter in griech. Inschr., 1893,

p. 27.

            2 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 292; Thumb, Handb., p. 62.


156     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

ρύγιον (from πτέρυξ) comes from Arist. down, but ψιχίον (from

ψίξ) does not appear elsewhere. Both ὠτάριον (Anthol., Anax.) and

ὠτίον (LXX) are from οὖς, but have lost the diminutive idea, just

as μάτι in modern Greek means merely 'eye' (ὀμμάτιον).  Blass1

indeed accuses Luke of atticising when he uses οὖς in Lu. 22:50.

          (γ) Those from adjectives. The new substantives derived from

adjectives in the later Greek found in the N. T. all have suffixes

expressing quality. With –ία we find ἀπο-τομ-ία (from ἀπό-τομος,

Diod., Dion., pap.); ἐλαφρία (from ἐλαφρός., cf. Lob., ad Phryn.,

p. 343. Cf. αἰσχρ-ία from αἰσχρός, Eust.); παραφρον-ία (from παρά-

φρων. Greek writers use παραφρο-σύνη, but cf. εὐδαιμον-ία from εὐ-

δαίμων). So περισσεία (from περισσός, LXX, inscriptions, Byz.).

W. H. use the ending –ία with κακοπάθε-ια (from κακοπαθής).

With –σύνη several new words occur from adjectives in -ος,

with the lengthening of the preceding vowel, as ἀγαθω-σύνη (from

ἀγαθός, eccl.); ἁγιω-σύνη (from ἅγιος, not in earlier Greek writers);

μεγαλω-σύνη (from stem μεγέλο of  μέγας, LXX and eccl.). These

forms are like ἱερω-σύνη from ἱερός (also in N. T.) which is as old as

Herod. and Plato. Still μεγαλο-σύνη and ἱερο-σύνη are both found

in inscriptions or in Glycas.2 Most of the words in –σύνη belong

to the later language.3   Ἐλεημο-σύνη (from ἐλεήμων, Callim. in Del.,

Diog. Laert., LXX), like other words in –σύνη, loses the ν. So

ταπεινο-φρο-σύνη (Jos., Epict.).

          Rather more numerous are the new words in -της,4 as ἁγιό-της

(from ἅγιος, 2 Macc.); ἁγνό-της (from ἁγνός, inscriptions); ἀδηλό-

της (from ἄδηλος, Polyb., Dion. Hal., Philo); ἀφελότης (from

ἀφελής, eccl. writers, ancient Greek ἀφέλεια); γυμνό-της (from γυμ-

νός, Deut., Antonin.); ματαιό-της (from μάταιος, LXX and eccl.

writers); μεγαλειό-της (from μεγαλεῖος, Athen., Jer.); πιό-της (from

Arist., Theophr., LXX).   Ἀκαθάρ-της (Rev. 17:4) is not

supported by any Greek MSS.

          The neuter (and often the masculine and feminine) of any ad-

jective can be used as a substantive with or without the article, as

τὸ δοκίμιον (from δοκίμιος, Deissmann, Bible Studies, p. 259 f., Dion.

Hal., Long., LXX, papyri). Like μεθόριον (the Syrian reading for

ὅρια in Mk. 7:24) is προσφάγιον, (προσ-φάγιος, —ον from προσ-φα-

 

            1 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 63.

            2 Cf. W.-Sch., p. 124, n. 14. On the termination —συνη see Aufrecht, Ber.

Zeitschr. fur vergl. Sprachf., 6. Heft.

            3 W.-M., p. 118, n. 1.

            4 On words in --της see Lob. ad Pliryn., p. 350; Buhler, Das griech. Secun-

darsuffix της, 1858; Frankel, d. Gr. Nom. Ag. (1910).


                           WORD-FORMATION                                           157

 

γεῖν inscriptions), σφάγιον (σφάγιος, --ον, σφαγή, Am., Ezek.), ὑπο-

λήνιον (ὑπολήνιος, -ον, from ὑπὸ ληνόν, Demiopr. in Poll., Geop., LXX.

Cf. ὑπο-ζύγιον). As already seen, ἱλασ-τήριον is probably the neuter

of the adjective ἱλασ-τήριος, —α, —ον (from ἱλάσκομαι). So φυλακ-

τήριον is th neuter of the adjective (φυλακ-τήριος, —α, —ον (from

φυλακτήρ, φυλάσσω), Dem., Diosc., Plut., LXX).1  Σωτήριον and

σωτηρία (from σωτήριος) are both common in the old Greek as

is the case with ὑπερ-ῷον (from ὑπερῷος, -ωιος).  Ζευκ-τηρία (from

ζευκ-τήριος, only in Ac. 27:40) reverts to the abstract form in —ία.

               (c) ADJECTIVES.

          1. Primary or Primitive Adjectives. These, of course, come

from verbal roots.   Ἁμαρ-ωλός (from root ἁμαρτ-άνω, Arist.,

Plut., LX , inscriptions) is like φείδ-ωλος (4 Macc. 2:9), from

φείδ-ομαι.  Πειθ-ός (W. H. πιθ-ός from πείθω, as φειδ-ός from φείδομαι)

is not yet found elsewhere than in 1 Cor. 2:4, but Blass2 regards

it as "a patent corruption," πειθοῖς for πειθοῖ. The evidence is

in favour of πειθοῖς (all the uncials, most cursives and versions).

Φάγος (from root φαγ--) is a substantive in the N. T. with paroxy-

tone accent as in the grammarians, the adjective being φαγ-ός.

The other new adjectives from roots in the N. T. are verbals in

-τος. There is only one verbal (gerundive) in —τέος (Lu. 5:38,

elsewhere only in Basil), and that is neuter (βλητέον), "a survival

of the literary language in Luke."3 The sense of capability or

possibility is only presented by the verbal παθη-τός (from root

παθ--, πάσχω, eccl. writers). But the weakened sense of the verbal

in —τος, more like an ordinary adjective, is very common in the

later Greek.4  But they are rare in the modern Greek (Thumb,

Handb., p. 151). These verbals correspond to the Latin participle

in —tus,5 like γνωστός, or to adjectives in —bilis, like ὁρατός. They

are common in the N. T., though not many new formations

appear. They are usually passive like γραπ-τός (from γράφω,

Georg. apd., LXX), though προσ-ήλυ-τος (προσ-έρχ-ομαι, root

-ηλυθ-, LXX, Philo) is active in sense. The ancient form was

 

            1 This termination became rather common in the later Gk., as, for instance,

in ἀνακαλυπήριον, δεητήριον, θανατήριον, ἰαματήριον. See also Stratton, hap-

ters in the Hist. of Gk. Noun-Formation, 1889.

            2 Gr. of N T. Ok., p. 64. So W.-Sch., p. 135.

            3 Viteau, ss. sur la Synt. des Voix, Rev. de Philol., p. 38.

            4 Jann., H st. Gk. Or., p. 297.   Ἑκών also is wholly adjective and μέλλων,

sometimes so Cf. Brugmann, Grundr. d. vergl. Gr., p. 429.

            5 W.-M., . 120. Cf. Viteau, Ess. sur le Synt. de Voix, Rev. de Philol.,

p. 41. For deriv. adj. in the Ptol. pap. see Mayser, Gr., pp. 447-455.

 


 

158    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

ἔπηλυς. A number of new verbals were formed on compound

words which will be discussed later. For the syntactical aspects

of the verbal adjectives see discussion of the participle (cf. Moul-

ton, Prolegomena, p. 221).

               2. Secondary or Derivative Adjectives.

          (α) Those from verbs. Σιτισ-τός (from σιτίζω, Jos., Athen.) is

to be mentioned. It is equivalent to the Latin saginatus and is

passive in meaning.

          (β) Those from substantives. Some new words in --ινος occur

as ἀμαράντινος (from ἀμάραντος, Philost., inscriptions); καθημερ-ινός

(from καθ’ ἡμέραν, Athen., Plut., Jos.) is for ancient καθημέριος;

κόκκ-ινος is from κόκκος (LXX, Plut., Epict., papyri); ὀρθρ-ινός (from

ὄρθρος, LXX, older form ὄρθριος), with which compare ἐσπερ-ινός

(from ἑσπέρα, from Xen. on) in the minusc. 1, 118, 209 (Lu. 12:38);

πρωινός (so W. H., from πρωί, for the older πρώιος, LXX, Plut.,

Athen., etc.); πύρ-ινος (from πῦρ, Arist., LXX, Polyb., Plut.);

ταχινός (from τάχα) from Theocritus on (LXX also).

          There are several words in –ικός, like ἐθνικός (from ἔθνος, Polyb.,

Diod.); κεραμ-ικός (from κέραμος, Hipp., Plat. pol., LXX) which

supplanted the earlier κεράμιος, κεραμεοῦς; κυρι-ακός (from κύριος,

-ακός instead of —ικός after ι, eccl. writers) is found in papyri of

Faytim and in inscriptions of Phrygia and Lydia.1 So λειτουργι-

κός (from λειτουργία, LXX, papyri) and ὀνικός (from ὄνος, in a con-

tract in the Fayum Papyri dated Feb. 8, A.D. 33).

          Of special interest are several words in -ινος and –ικός.  Ὀστράλ-

ινος (from ὄστρακον, Hipp., Anthol., LXX), 'made of clay,'

‘earthen’; σάρκ-ινος (from σάρξ, Aristoph., Plato, Arist.) is thus

not a new word, but is used in Heb. 7:16 and by Paul in 1 Cor.

3:1; Ro. 7:14 (correct text in each instance), where many

MSS. have σαρκ-ικός. Indeed σάρκινος in these two passages must

mean more than made of flesh or consisting in flesh, perhaps

"rooted in the flesh" (Thayer).2 Cf. relation of ἀληθ-ινός to ἀλη-

θές. Still a real distinction seems to be observed between σάρκ-

ινος and σαρκ-ικός in 1 Cor. 3:1 and 3:3. Σαρκ-ικός (from σάρξ,

Arist., Plut., LXX) is a man who lives according to the flesh

and is here opposed to those who are πνευματ-ικοί. (from πνεῦμα,

from Arist. down, but not in LXX, pertaining to the wind).

But ὁ ψυχ-ικός (from ψυχή, Arist., Polyb., down) is the man pos-

 

            1 Deiss., B. S., p. 217 f.; Liget, p. 361; Thieme, Die Inschr. v. M., p. 15.

            2 See comm. in loco. W.-M. (p. 123) held that σάρκινος was "hardly to be

tolerated" in Heb. 7:16, but Schmiedel (p. 139) has modified that statement.

Cf. on --ινος, Donaldson, New Crat., p. 45S.


                               WORD—FORMATION                                  159

 

sessed of mere natural life (1 Cor. 2:14) as opposed to regenerate

(πνευματ-ικός) life (1 Cor. 2:15).  Σαρκ-ικός can be applied to either

of these two distinct classes.1 But in 1 Cor. 3:3 ἔτι γὰρ σαρκικοί

ἐστε Paul reproaches the Corinthians. Proper names also have

-ικός, as  Ἐβρα-ϊκός. Note accent in Τυχ-ικός.   Ῥωμα-ϊκός (from

 Ῥώμη) is read in Lu. 23:38 by the Western and Syrian MSS.,

common in the literary κοινή (Polyb., Diod., etc.).

          Αἰώνιος, though found in Plato and Diod., is not a common

adjective. But cf. LXX, 0. T. Apoc., Philo, inscriptions, papyri.

Cf. Moulton and Milligan, Expositor, 1908, p. 174.  Δοκίμιος

is from δοκιμή (Dion. Hal., Long., LXX, papyri).  Μίσθιος is

from μισθός (LXX, Plut.), while  Ῥωμαῖος is common in the lit-

erary κοινή.  Μελίσσιος (from μέλισσα, like θαλάσσιος from θάλασσα)

is read by the Syrian class of documents in Lu. 24:42. The

word occurs nowhere else, though Nic. has μελισσαῖος and

Eustath. μελίσσειος.

          (γ) Those from adjectives. There are only a few new adjectives

of this character, but they present special difficulties. About

ἐπιούσιος (found only in Mt. 6:11 and Lu. 11:3 and used with

ἄρτος) there has raged a long controversy. It has been derived

successively from ἐπί and οὐσία, 'bread for sustenance,' though

οὐσία only has the sense of ὕπαρξις in philosophical language (an-

other theory, 'bread of substance' in the spiritual sense); from ἐπί

and ὤν (ἐπόντιος, ἐπούσιος, like ἑκών, ἑκούσιος, etc.), 'bread for the

present,' though the ι in ἐπί is not allowed to remain with a vowel

save when a digamma existed as in ἐπιεικής; from ἐπ-ιών (ἔπ-ειμι,

‘approach’), like ἡ ἐπιοῦσα (ἡμέρα), ‘the next day’ (Ac. 16:11), this

last a common idiom. Lightfoot2 has settled the matter in favour

of the last position. See also ἤρεμος (from ἠρεμής, adv. ἠρέμα,

Lucian, Eustath., Hesych); νεωτερικός (from νεώτερος, 3 Macc.,

Polyb., Jos.). In περιούσιος (from περι-ών, περίειμι, LXX) no seri-

ous problem in etymology arises, for περί retains the ι in composi-

tion with vowels. It is used with λαός, to express the idea that

Israel belongs to God as his very own.3  Πιστ-ικός (from πιστός,

 

            1 See Trench, N. T. Synon., 1S90, pp. 268 ff.

            2 See Rev. of the N. T., pp. 194-234. Deiss., B. S., p. 214, calls attention

to Grimm's comment on 2 Macc. 1:8 about τοὺς ἐπιουσίους being added to τοῦς

ἄρτους by "three codices Sergii." Cf. W.-Sch., p. 136 f., n. 23, for full details.

Cf. Bischoff,  Ἐπιούσιος, p. 266, Neutest. Wiss., 1906. Debrunner (Glotta, IV.

Bd., 3. Heft, 1912) argues for ἐπὶ τὴν οὖσαν ηπμέραν, ‘for the day in question.’

            3 Cf. Lightfoot, Rev. of the N. T., pp. 234-242, for full discussion of

περιούσιος.


160  A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

Plato, Diog., Dion. Hal., in sense of persuading, but Artem.,

Cedrenus and other late writers in sense of 'genuine') is hardly

to be derived from πιπίσκω or πίω and hence= drinkable.'

‘Genuine nard’ is a much more probable meaning. For curious

details see Winer-Schmiedel, p. 138, n. 24.  Ποταπός is from the

older ποδαπός and occurs in Dion. Hal., Philo, Jos., papyri.

          (δ) Those from adverbs. From ἄνω come ἀνώτερος (Polyb., LXX,

Arist.) and ἀνω-τερικός (Hippoc., Galen); ἐξώ-τερος (LXX, Strabo,

etc.). See also ἐσώ-τερος (only N. T.); κατώ-τερος (Theoc., Hippoc.,

Athen.). Cf. Hagen, Bildung d. griech. Adverbien.

          (d) THE ADVERB. The adverb φειδομενως (from the participle

φειδόμενος, Plut., Mosch., Alex.) is a new word of this nature. Cf.

ὁμολογουμένως in the older Greek. So τυχόν, ὄντως and ὑπερβαλλόν-

τως. The neuter accusative singular and plural of adjectives con-

tinue to be used adverbially.  Βαθέως occurs also in Theoc. and

AElian.  Ἀκμήν (Theoc., Polyb., Strabo) is in the inscriptions also

as well as ἐν ἀκμᾶι (cf. Ditt., Syll. 326, 12).  Ἐβραϊστί (Sirach) is

properly formed (cf.  Ἑλληνιστί) from  Ἐβραΐς.  Ἰουδαϊκῶς is in Jos.

See also ἐθνικῶς (Apoll. Dysc., Diog. Laert.).  Εἶτεν (correct text

Mk. 4:28) is a rare Ionic form for εἶτα (papyri also).  Κενῶς

is used from Arist. on.  Ὀλίγως occurs out of the N. T. only in

Anthol. and Aquila. Πρώτως (correct text Ac. 11:26) occurs here

for the first time.  Ῥητῶς is found in Polyb., Strabo, Plut.

 Ῥωμαϊστί is common in the literary κοινή (Plut., App., etc.) and

in Epictetus.  Σωματικῶς comes from Aristotle and Plutarch.

Τυπικῶς is in the ecclesiastical writers.  Φυσικῶς is in Aristotle,

Philo, etc. Mayser (Gr., pp. 455-459) has a good list of deriva-

tive adverbs. See ch. VII for full discussion of the formation

of the adverb.

          IV. Words Formed by Composition (Composita). The Greek

in the Ptolemaic papyri is not equal to modern German in the

facility with which agglutinative compound words (διπλᾶ Aris-

totle termed them) are formed, but it is a good second. The N. T.

writers make use of many of the new compounds (some new

kinds also), but not more than the literary κοινή, though more than

the Atticists or Purists.1 The following lists will show how fond

the N. T. is of double prepositional compounds like ἀντ-ανα-πληρόω,

ἀπο-κατ-αλλάσσω, ἐπι-συν-άγω, συν-αντι-λαμβάνομαι, etc. So also com-

pound prepositional adverbs like ἐνώπιον, κατενώπιον, κατέναντι, etc.

On the whole subject of compound words in the Ptolemaic papyri

see Mayser, Gr., pp. 466-506. Compound words played an in-

 

            1 Schmid, Der Atticismus, Bd. IV, p. 730.


                                WORD-FORMATION                               161

 

creasing role in the κοινή. Cf. Jannaris, op. cit., p. 310. See in

particular F. Schubert, Zur mchrfachen preifixalen Zusammen-

setzung im Griechischen, Xenia Austriaca, 1893, pp. 191 ff.

          (a) KINDS OF COMPOUND WORDS IN GREEK: proper composition

(σύνθεσις), copulative composition (παράθεσις), derivative composi-

tion (παρασύνθεσις). In the first class the principal idea is ex-

pressed by the second part of the word, while the first and

qualifying part is not inflected, but coalesces with the second,

using merely the stem with connective vowel. As an example

take οἰκο-νόμος, 'manager of the house.' The second kind of

composition, paratactic or copulative, is the mere union of two

independent words like παρά-κλητος. It is not common in the

old Greek save in the case of prepositions with verbs, and even

this usage is far more frequent in the later Greek. It is seen in

many late compound adverbs as in ὑπερ-άνω. The third or deriv-

ative composition is a new word made on a compound, whether

proper or copulative, as εἰδωλο-λατρία (or –εία) from εἰδωλο-λατρεύω.

The above classification is a true grammatical distinction, but it

will be more serviceable to follow a more practical division of the

compound words into two classes. Modern linguists do not like

the term "proper composition." In principle it is the same as

copulative.

          (b) INSEPARABLE PREFIXES. These make a cross-line in the

study of compound words. They enter into the formation of

verbs, substantives, adjectives and adverbs. By prefixes here is

not meant the adverbs and prepositions so commonly used in

composition, but the inseparable particles - (ἀν–) privative, --

collective or intensive, ἀρχι--, δυσ--, ἡμι--, νη--.  As examples of such

new formations in the N. T. may be taken the following substan-

tives and adjectives (chiefly verbals) with – privative: -βαρής

(from Arist. down, papyri, in metaphysical sense); ἀ-γενεα-λόγητος

(LXX); ἄ-γναφος (Thom. Mag.); ἀ-γνόημα (0. T. Apoc., papyri);

ἀγρι-έλαιος (Arist., papyri); ἀ-γνοέω (Apoc., papyri); ἀ-δηλότης  

(Polyb., Dion. Hal., Philo); ἀ-διά-κριτος (from Hippocrates down);

ἀ-διά-λειπτος (Tim. Loer., Attic inscriptions, i/B.C.); ἀ-δια-=φθροία

(not in ancient Greek); ἀ-δυνατέω (LXX, ancient Greek means

‘to be weak’); ἀ-θέμιτος (for earlier ἀ-θέμιστος); ἄ-θεσμος (LXX,

Diod., Philo, Jos., Plut.); ἀ-θετέω (LXX, Polyb.); ἀ-καιρέω (Diod.);

ἀ-θέτησις (Diog. Laert., eccl. writers, papyri); ἀ-κατά-γνωστος

(2 Macc., eccl. writers, inscriptions, papyri); ἀ-κατα-κάλυπτος

(Polyb., LXX, Philo); ἀ-κατά-κριτος (earliest example); ἀ-κατά-

λυτος (4 Macc., Dion. Hal.); ἀ-κατά-παστος (found only here.


162   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

This is the reading of AB in 2 Pet. 2:14 rather than ἀ-κατά-

παυστος, verbal of καταπαύω, found in Polyb., Diod., Jos., Plut.,

cf. W. H., App., p. 170; Moulton, Prol., p. 47); ἀ-κατα-στασία

(Polyb., Dion. Hal., papyri); ἀ-κατά-στατος (Hippoc., Polyb.,

LXX); ἀ-κατά-σχετος (LXX, Diod.); ἀ-κυρόω (Diod., Dion. Hal.,

Plut., 1 Esdr.); ἀ-λάλητος (Anth. Pal.); ἀ-μέθυστος (LXX, Dion.

Hal., Plut.); ἀ-μετά-θετος (Polyb., LXX, Diod., Plut., inscriptions);

ἀ-μετα-νόητος (Lucian, Philo, papyri); ἀν-ἀντί-ρητος (from Polyb.

down, inscriptions); ἀν-απο-λόγητος (Polyb., Dion. Hal., Plut.);

ἀν-εκ-δι-ήγητος (Clem. Horn., Athen.); ἀν-έκ-λειπτος (Diod., Plut.,

papyri); ἀν-έν-δεκτος (Artem., Diog. Laert., eccl., Byz.); ἀν-εξ-

ερεύνητος (LXX, Symm., Dio Cass.); ἀν-εξ-ιχνίαστος (LXX, eccl.

writers); ἀν-επ-αίσχυντος (Jos.); ἀν-εύ-θετος (Moschion); ἀν-ίλεως

(reading in Jas. 2:13 of L, other MSS. have ἀν-έλεος, old Greek

ἀν-ηλεής); ἄ-νομος (LXX, ἀ-νομία from Thuc.); ἀν-υπό-τακτος (Artem.,

Philb); ἀ-παρά-βατος (Jos., Plut., papyri, etc.); ἀ-πειραστος (Jos.,

eccl., old Greek ἀ-πείρατος); ἀ-περί-τμητος (LXX, Philo, Plut.);

ἀ-πρόσ-ιτος (lit. κοινή); ἀ-πρόσ-κοπος (Sir., Sext., inscriptions); ἄ-ραφος

(LXX, Jos.); ἄ-σπιλος (Anthol., eccl.); ἀ-στατέω (Anthol.); ἀ-στοχέω

(Polyb., Plut., Lucian, papyri); ἀ-στήρικτος (Anthol.); ἀ-φελότης

(eccl. writers); ἄ-φθαρτος (Arist., Wisd., Plut., inscriptions); ἀ-φιλ-

άγαθος (papyri and 2 Tim. 3:3); ἀ-φιλ-άργυρος (Diod., Hippoc.,

inscriptions, papyri).1

          With ἀρχι-- (from ἄρχω) we have ἀρχ-άγγελος (eccl.); ἀρχ-ιερα-

τικός (inscr., Jos.); ἀρχ-ιερεύς (LXX, inscr.); ἀρχι-ποιμήν (Test.

of 12 Patr., wooden tablet from Egypt, Deissmann, Exp. Times,

1906, p. 61); ἀρχι-συν-άγωγος (inscr., eccl.); ἀρχι-τελώνης (only in

Lu. 19:2); ἀρχι-τρί-κλινος (Heliod., cf. συμποσι-άρχης in Sirach).

Cf. ἀρχι-φυλακίτης, P.Tb. 40 (B.C. 117), ἀρχι-δεσμο-φύλαξ (LXX).

          With — connective or intensive are formed ἀ-νεψιός (for ἀ-νεπ-

τιός, LXX, cf. Lat. con-nepot-ius), ἀ-τενίζω (Polyb., Diod., Jos.,

Lucian).2

          With δυσ-- we have δυσ-βάστακτος (LXX, Philo, Plut.); δυσ-

εντέριον (late form, correct text in Ac. 28:8, older form δυσ-εντερία);

 

            1 Cf. Hamilton, The Neg. Comp. in Gk., 1899. "The true sphere of the

negative prefix is its combination with nouns, adjectives and verbal stems

to form adjective compounds" (p. 17). Cf. also Margarete Heine, Subst.

mit α privativum. Wack. (Verm. Beitr. zur griech. Sprachk., 1897, p. 4)

suggests that ᾅδης is from ἀεί and --δε, not from α-- and ἰδεῖν. Ingenious! Cf.

Wack. again, Das Dehnungsgesetz der griech. Composita, 1889.

            2 Cf. on - connective or intensive, Don., New Crat., p. 397. Also Doder-

lein, De ἄλφα intenso, 1830.


                                   WORD-FORMATION                                         163

 

δυσ-ερμήνευτος (Diod., Philo, Artem.); δυσ-νόητος (Arist. Diog.

Laert.); δυσ-φημία (LXX, Dion. Hal., Plut.).

          With ἡμι-- (cf. Lat. semi) are found only ἡμι-θανής (Dion. Hal.,

Diod., LXX, Strabo), ἡμί-ωρον, (so W. H., Strabo, Geop., אP have

--ώριον). Cf. ἥμισυς.

          For νη— note νηπιάζω (Hippoc., eccl.).

          (c) AGGLUTINATIVE COMPOUNDS (Juxtaposition or Parathesis).

This sort of composition includes the prepositions and the cop-

ulative composition (dvandva). This last is much more com-

mon in the κοινή than in the older Greek. Cf. Jannaris, op. cit.,

p. 310, and Mayser, Gr., p. 469.

          1. Verbs. The new compound verbs are made either from

compound substantives or adjectives or by combining adverbs

with a verb-stem or noun-stem or by adding a preposition to the

older verb. This last method is very frequent in the later Greek

due to "a love for what is vivid and expressive."1 This embel-

lishment of the speech by compounds is not absent from the sim-

plest speech, as Blass2 shows in the case of Titus, where over thirty

striking compound words are found, omitting verbals and other

common ones. Moulton (Cl. Quarterly, April, 1908, p. 140) shows

from the papyri that the compound verb is no mark of the literary

style, but is common in the vernacular also. The preposition fills

out the picture as in ἀντι-μετρέω (Lucian), and so ἀντι-λαμβάνω

(Diod., Dio Cass., LXX). So also observe the realistic form of

the preposition in ἐξ-αστράπτω (LXX, Tryphiod.) in Lu. 9:29;

κατα-λιθάζω (eccl. writings) in Lu. 20:6. The modern Greek

even combines two verbs to make a compound, as παιζω-γελῶ.

As examples of new compound verbs may be given ἀγαθουγέω,

ἀγαθοεργέω, in 1 Tim. 6:18 (eccl.); ἀγαθο-ποιέω (LXX, later writers);

ἀλλ-γορέω (Philo, Jos., Plut., grammatical writers); ἀνα-ζάω (in-

scriptions, later writers); ἀνα-θεωρ-έω (Diod., Plut., Lucian); ἀνα-

στατό-ω (LXX, papyri); ἀν-ετάζω (LXX, papyri); ἀντι-δια-τίθημι

 

            1 W.-M., p. 127. Cf. Winer, De Verb. cum Praep. compos. in N. T. usu,

1834-43.

            2 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 70. Mostly adj., but πειθ-αρχεῖν occurs in the list.

Blass, ib., p. 65, even thinks that it is not the province of grammar to discuss

the numerous compounds with prepositions. It belongs to the lexicon. The

lists that I give are not complete for prepositional compounds because of lack

of space. See Helbing (Gr. d. Sept., pp. 128-136) for good list of compound

verbs in the LXX. Mayser (Gr., pp. 486-506) gives list of compound verbs

in the Ptol. pap. The κοινή is fond of compound verbs made of noun and

verb. Cf. εἰ ἐτεκνοτρόφησεν, εἰ ἐξενοδόχησεν (1 Tim. 5:10). So ὑψηλοφρονεῖν

(text of W. H. in 6:17).


 

164     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

(Philo, eccl. writers); ἀντι-παρ-έχρο-μαι (Anthol., Sap., eccl. writers,

Byz.); ἀντ-οφθαλμέω (Sap., Polyb., eccl. writers); ἀπ-ελπίζω (LXX,

Polyb., Diod., inscriptions); ἀπο-γράφομαι (papyri); ἀπο-θησαυρίζω

(Sir., Diod., Jos., Epict.); ἀπο-κεφαλίζω (LXX, Epict., etc.); αὐθ-

εντέω (Polyb., papyri); γονυ-πετέω (Polyb., Heliod., eccl. writers);

δια-γνωρίζω (Philo, schol. in Bekk.); δια-γογγύζω (LXX, Heliod.,

Byz.); δια-γρηγορέω (Herod., Niceph.); δι-αυγάζω (Polyb., Plut.);

δια-φημίζω (Aratus, Dion. Hal.); δι-ερμηνεύω (2 Macc. Pilyb.,

Philo); δι-οδεύω (LXX, Polyb., Plut.); δουλ-αγωγέω (Diod. Sic. and

on); εἰρηνο-ποιέω (LXX, Hermes); ἐκ-δαπανάω (Polyb.); ἐκ-δικέω

(LXX, Apo11., Diod.); ἐμ-βατεύω (inscr.); ἐν-κανίζω (LXX);  ἐν-

κακέω (Polyb., Symm. translation of LXX, Philo, Clem. Rom.);

ἐν-χρίω (Tob., Strabo, Anthol., Epict.); ἐξ-αρτίζω (Jos., Hipp.);

ἐξ-ισχύω (Sir., Strabo, Plut.); ἑπι-σκηνόω (Polyb.); ἐπι-φαύσκω

(LXX, Acta Thom.); ἐπι-χορηγέω (Dion. Hal., Phal., Diog. Laert.,

Alex. Aphr.); ἑτερο-διδασκαλέω (eccl. writers); ἑτερο-ζυγέω (LXX);

εὐ-αρεστέω (LXX, Philo, Diod.); εὐδοκέω (probably simply from

εὖ and δοκέω, as there is no such form as δόκος or εὔδοκος and cf.

καρα-δοκέω in Polyb., Diod., Dion. Hal.); εὐθυ-δρομέω (Philo);

εὐ-καιρέω (from Polybius on, papyri); εὐ-προσ-ωπέω (P. Tb., Chrys.);

θηριο-μαχέω (Diod., Artem., Ign.); ζωο-γονέω (Theophr., Diod.,

Lucian, Plut.); ζωο-ποιέω (Arist., Theophr., LXX); κακ-ουχέω (from

obsolete κακ-οῦχος, i.e. κακόν, ἔχω, LXX, Diod., Dio Cass., Plut.);

καλο-ποιέω (Etym. Magn., LXX, Philo); κατα-βαρέω (Polyb.,

Diod., App., Lucian papyri); κατ-αγωνίζωομαι (Polyb., Jos., Lucian,

Plut., AElian); κατ-αντάω (Polyb., Diod., eccl. writers, papyri);

κατα-κληρο-δοτέω (LXX); κατα-πονέω (2 and 3 Macc., Hipp., Polyb.,

Diod., Jos., AEl., etc.); κατ-εξ-ουσιάζω (only N. T.); κατ-οπτρίζω

(Athen., Diog. Laert., Philo); if the conjectural κεν-εμ-βατεύω in

Col. 2:18 be correct (as is now no longer probable), κεν-εμ-

βάτης has to be presupposed; λα-τομέω (LXX, Diod., Dion. Hal.,

Strabo); λιθο-βολέω (LXX, Diod., Plut.); λογο-μαχέω (only instance

in 2 Tim. 2:14); μακρο-θυμέω (LXX, Plut.); μεθ-ερμηνεύω (Polyb.,

Diod., Sir., Plut.); μετα-μορφόω (Diod., Philo); μετριο-παθέω (Philo,

Jos.); μοσχο-ποιέω (LXX and eccl. writers); μυ-ωπάζω (Arist.); οἰκο-

δεσποτέω (Lucian, Plut.); ὁμείρομαι is a puzzle (Fritzsche derives it

from ὁμοῦ and εἴρω, but other compounds with ὁμοῦ have instru-

mental-associative, not genitive case, as ὁμι-λέω, from ὅμιλος

(ὁμοῦ, ἴλη) Photius and Theophr. get it from ὁμοῦ ἡρμόσθαι; but,

as Nicander uses μείρομαι ἱμείρομαι, modern editors print ὁμει-

ρόμενοι in 1 Th. 2:8 (-- W. H., elsewhere only in Job and

Symm., Ps. 62); ὀρθο-ποδέω (only instance); ὀρθο-τομέω (LXX, eccl.


 

                                   WORD-FORMATION                                     165

 

writers); ὀχλο-ποιέω (only in Ac. 17:5); παρα-βολεύομαι (inscr.

ii,/A.D.); παρ-εισ-έρχομαι (Polyb., Philo, Plut.); περι-λάπω (Diod.,

Jos., Plut.); πληρο-φορέω (LXX, eccl. writers); προ-ελπίζω (Posid.,

Dexipp., Greg. N.); προσ-εγγίζω (LXX, Polyb., Diod., Lucian);

προσ-κληρόω (Philo, Plut., Lucian); προσωπο-λημπτέω (N. T. word);

συν-αυξάνω (LXX, inscriptions); συν-αποστέλλω (LXX, papyri, in-

scriptions); στρατο-λογέω (Diod., Dion. Hal., Jos., Plut., etc.);

συν-υπο-κρίνομαι (Polyb., Plut.) and many other verbs with συν;

τεκτο-γονέω (Anthol.); τεκνο-τροφέω (Arist.); τετρα-αρχέω (Jos.);

τροπο-φορέω (LXX and eccl. writers, so W. H. with אBDHLP,

etc., in Ac. 13:18); τροφο-φορέω (LXX and eccl. writers, so ACE

and some cursives in Ac. 13:18); ὑπερ-πλεονάζω (Ps. Sal, He-

rond., Herm.); ὑπο-λιμπάνω (Themist., Dion. Hal., eccl. and Byz.);

φιλο-πρωτεύω (Artem., Plut.); φρεν-απατάω (eccl. and Byz. writers);

χρονο-τριβέω (Arist., Plut., Heliod., Byz. writers). Thus, it will

be noticed, verbs compounded with nouns are very common in

the κοινή.

          Often two prepositions are used in composition with the same

verb, where the proper meaning must be given to each. The use

of double prepositional compounds grew rapidly in the κοινή; cf.

Schmid, Att. IV, pp. 708 ff. Mayser gives a long list in the Ptol.

papyri (Gr., pp. 497-504), some of which are old and some new.

Of 162 examples 96 are new. The N. T. is in perfect accord with

the κοινή here. So it is with ἀντι-παρ-έρχομαι (Anthol., Wisdom,

eccl. and Byz. writers) in Lu. 10:31; ἀντ-ανα-πληρόω Col. 1:24

(Dem., Dio Cass., Apoll. Dysc.); ἀντι-δια-τίθημι (Philo, Diod.);

ἀπο-κατ-αλλάσσω (not in old Greek), ἐπι-δια-τάσσομαι (only in

N. T.); ἐπι-συν-άγω (LXX, AEsop, Polyb.); κατ-εξ-ουσιάζω (only in

N. T.); παρ-εισ-έρχομαι (Polyb., Philo, Plut.); προ-εν-άρχομαι (only

in N. T.); συν-ανα-μίγνυμι (LXX, Plut.); συν-ανα-παύομαι (LXX,

Dion. Hal., Plut.); συν-αντι-λαμβάνομαι (LXX, Diod., Jos., inscrip-

tions, papyri); ὑπερ-εκ-χύνω (LXX) ὑπερ-εν-τυγχάνω (eccl.). There

is in the papyri (P. Th. I, 66) a triple prepositional compound,

προ-αντ-αν-αιρέω.

          2. Substantives. Here again the new compound substantive

draws on verbs, substantives, adjectives, adverbs and preposi-

tions for part or all of the word. There are also double compound

substantives from compound substantives, adjectives, adverbs and

prepositions like προσωποληψία, ἀλλοτριεπίσκοπος, διαπαρατριβή. The

great majority have substantive or adjective for the second half

of the word. These nouns are more often abstract than concrete.

 Ἀγαθο-ποιία (from adjective and verb-stem, eccl. writers); ἀγαθο-


166   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

ποιός (adjective and verb-stem, Sirach, Plut. and later papyri);

ἀργι-ἐλαιος (from ἄγριος and ἔλαιος, Arist.); αἱματ-εκ-χυσία (from

substantive, preposition and verb χύνω, eccl. writers); ἀκρο-βυστία

(LXX); ἀλεκτορο-φωνία (AEsop, Strabo, eccl. writers); ἀλλοτρι-επί-

σκοπος (from ἀλλότριος and ἐπί-σκοπος, Dion. Areop., eccl. writers.

Deissmann finds a synonym for the word in ἀλλοτρίων ἐπιθυμη-

τὴς, Fayum Papyri. See Bible Studies, p. 224); ἄμφ-οδον (LXX,

Aristoph., Hyper., papyri); ἀνά-χυσις (Sir., Polyb., Plut.); ἀνα-

ύπατος in the ethical sense (LXX, Polybius on, inscriptions in

Pergamum and Magnesia); ἀνά-δειξις (Strabo, Philo, Plut.); ἀνα-

στροφή (Polyb., Dion. Hal., Lucian, Plut., inscriptions); ἀντί-λυτρον

(one translation of Ps. 48:9, Orph.); ἀντί-χριστος (probably

formed by John, eccl.); ἀργυρο-κόπος (Plut., LXX, papyri); ἀρσενο-

κοίτης (Anthol., eccl.); ἀπο-καρα-δοκία (verb –έω in LXX, Jos., Plut.);

ἀσι-άρχης (inscriptions, Polyc.); γαζο-φυλάκιον (LXX, Jos., Strabo);

γλωσσό-κομον (earlier γλωσσοκουμεῖον, LXX, Jos., Plut., Longin., in-

scriptions, papyri); δεισι-δαιμονία (Polyb., Diod., Jos., Plut.); δεσμο-

φύλαξ (Jos., Lucian, Artem., ἀρχι-δεσμο-φύλαξ, LXX); δι-ερμη-νία

(only in AD 1 Cor. 12:10; δι-ερμηνευτής probably correct 1 Cor.

14:28, אAKL against ἑρμηνευτής by BDFG); δια-παρα-τριβή (not

found elsewhere) is the correct text for 1 Tim. 6:5, not παρα-

δια-τριβή, which may be compared with παρα-κατα-θή-κη in 2 Tim.

1:12, but παρα-θή-κη (Herod., LXX, inscriptions, papyri) is the

true reading; δωδεκά-φυλον (Clem. of Rome, N. T. Apoc.); δικαιο-

κρισία (Test. xii Pat., eccl., papyri); δωρο-φορία is read by MSS.

BDFG against διακονία in Ro. 15:31; ἐθελο-θρησκία (from verb

ἐθέλω and θρησκία, eccl., cf. ἐθελο-δουλεία); εἰδωλο-λατρεία (W. H. –ία,

two substantives, eccl.) and εἰδωλο-λάτρης (eccl.); εἰλι-κρίνεια (LXX,

Theophr. Sext., Stob.); ἐκ-πλήρωσις (2 Macc., Dion. Hal., Philo,

Strabo); ἐκ-τένεια (2 Macc., Judith, inscriptions); ἔν-εδρον (late

form of ἐνέδρα, LXX); ἐξ-ανά-στα-σις (double compound, Polyb.);

ἐπι-συν-αγωγή (double compound, 2 Macc., inscriptions, Artem.,

Ptol.); ἐπι-σύ-στασις (double compound, LXX, Philo, Sext.); ἐπι-

χορηγία (eccl.); εὐ-δοκία (LXX, inscriptions); εὐρ-ακύλων (a hybrid

from εὖρος and Lat. aquilo, like auto-mobile; so W. H. for Text.

Rec. εὐρο-κλύδων in Ac. 27:14, which is Etym. Magn. alone);

ἡδύ-οσμος (Strabo, Theophr.);  Ἰερο-σολυμείτης (Jos.); καλλι-έλαιος

(Arist.); καλο-διδάσκαλος (only in Tit. 2:3); καρδιο-γνώστης (eccl.

writers); κατ-αγγελεύς (inscriptions); κατά-θεμα (only in Rev. 22:3);

κατά-κριμα (Sir., Dion. Hal., papyri); κατά-λειμα (אaDEFGKLP

in no. 9:27 for ὑπό-λ, LXX, Gal.); κατ-ήγωρ (papyri; cf. Deiss-

mann, Light, p. 90; Radermacher, Gr., p. 15); κατά-λυμα (LXX,


                                   WORD-FORMATION                            167

 

Polyb, Diod.); κατα-πέτασμα (LXX, Jos., Aristeas, Philo, inscrip-

tions); κενο-δοξία (4 Macc., Polyb., Philo, Plut., Lucian); κοσμο-

κράτωρ (Orph., eccl. writers, inscriptions); κωμό-πολις (Strabo, Ag.

and Theod., eccl.); λογο-μαχία (only in 1 Tim. 6:4); ματαιο-λογία

(Plut., Porph.); μεσο-νύκ-τιον (Arist., LXX, κοινή writers); μεσό-

τοιχον (Erat.); μεσ-ουράνημα (Manetho, Plut.); μετ-οικεσία (LXX,

Anthol.); μισθ-απο-δοσία and -δότης (eccl.); μωρο-λογία (Arist.,

Plut.); νομο-διδάσκαλος (eccl.); νυχθ-ήμερον (Alex., App., Geop.);

οἰκο-δεσπότης (Alexis, Jos., Plut., Ign., etc.); οἰκο-δομή (possibly

Arist., Theophr., certainly LXX, Diod., Philo, Jos., Plut., con-

demned by Phrynichus); οἰνο-πότης (Polyb., LXX, Anthol.,

Anacr.); ὀλιγο-πιστία (eccl. and Byz.); ὁλο-κληρία (LXX, Diog.

Laert., Plut.); ὁρκ-ωμοσία (LXX, Jos., τὰ ὁρκ-ωμόσια in Attic);

ὁρο-θεσία (eccl.); ὀφθαλμο-δουλία (only instance is in N. T.);

παλιν-γενεσία (Philo, Longin., Lucian, Plut); παντο-κράτωρ (LXX,

eccl., Anthol.); παρά-κλητος (Aq. Theod., Diog. Laert., Dio Cass.,

papyri, inscriptions); παρα-χειμασία (Polyb., Diod.); παρτι-άρχης

(LXX); περί-θεσις (Arr., Gal., Sext.); περι-κάθ-αρμα (LXX, Epict.,

Curt.); περι-οχή (Theophr., Diod., Plut., etc.); περι-τομή (LXX,

Jos., papyri); περι-ψημα (Tob., Ign.); πραυ-παθία (Philo, Ign.); προ-

αύλιον (Pollux); προ-σάββατον (LXX, eccl.); προσ-αίτης (lit. κοινή);

πρόσ-κομμα (LXX, Plut.); προ-σάββατον (inscriptions, 81 A.D.);

προσ-κυνητής (inscriptions, eccl., Byz.);          προσ-φάγιον (inscriptions,

ὄψον  Ἀττικῶς, προσ-φάγιον  Ἑλληηνικῶς, Moeris);   προσωπο-λήμπτης

(Chrys.); προσωπο-λημψία (eccl.); πρωτο-καθεδρία (eccl.; πρωτο-κλισία

(eccl. writers); πρωτο-τόκια (LXX, Philo, Byz.); ῥαβδ-οῦχος (ῥάβδος,

ἔχω, literary κοινή); ῥαδι-ούργημα (literary κοινή), eccl.); σαρδ-όνυξ

(Jos., Plut., Ptol.); σιτο-μέτριον (Polyb., Diod., Jos., inscriptions);

σκηνο-πηγία (Arist., LXX, Philo, inscriptions); σκηνο-ποιός (AElian,

eccl.); σκληρο-καρδία (LXX); στρατο-πέδ-αρχος, --άρχης (reading of

Syrian class in Ac. 28:16), though critical text rejects both

(Dion. Hal., Jos., Lucian); συκο-μορέα (Geop.); various new words

with σύν, like συν-αιχμάλωτος, συν-κατά-θεσ-ις, συν-κληρονόμος (Philo,

inscriptions); συν-κοινωνός, συν-οδία (LXX, Strabo, Jos., Epict.,

Plut.); συν-πρεσ-βύτερος, σύν-τροφος (LXX), etc.; ταπεινο-φροσύνη

(Jos., Epict.); τεκνο-γονία (Arist.); τετρα-άρχης (Strabo, Jos.); υἱο-

θεσία (Diod., Diog. Laert., inscriptions); ὑπερ-έκεινα (Byz. and eccl.);

ὑπο-γραμμός (2 Macc., Philo, eccl.); ὑπό-λειμμα (from ὑπο-λείπω,

LXX, Arist., Theoph., Plut., Galen); ὑπό-λήνιον (LXX, Demioph.);

ὑπο-πόδιον (LXX, Lucian, Att.); in ὑπο-στολή (Jos., Plut.); ὑπο-ταγή

(Dion. Hal.); ὑπο-τύπωσις (Sext. Emp., Diog. Laert.); φρεν-ἁπάτης

(papyri, eccl. writers); χαλκο-λίβανον (LXX); χειρό-γραφον (Polyb.;


168    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

Dion. Hal., Tob., Plut., Artem., papyri); χρε-οφειλέτης (from

χρέος or χρέως and ὀφειλέτης, LXX, AEsop, Plut., Dion. Hal.);

χρηστο-λογία (Eust., eccl. writers); χρυσό-λιθος (Diod., LXX, Jos.);

χρυσό-πρασος (only in Rev. 21:20); ψευδ-αδελφός, ψευδ-απόστολος

ψευδο-διδάσκαλος, ψευδό-χριστος are all compounds of ψευδής and are

N.T. words; ψευδο-προφήτης (ancient Greek ψευδόμαντις) is found

in LXX, Philo, Jos.; ψευδό-μαρτυς (LXX) and ψευδο-μαρτυρία

both go back to Plato and Aristotle. The papyri show many

examples of such compounds. Cf. κωμο-γραμματεύς, P. Tb 40

(B.C. 117).

          3. Adjectives. It will not be necessary to repeat the adjec-

tives formed with inseparable prefixes (--, etc. The method of

many grammars in dividing the compounds according to the

element in the first or second part has not been followed here. It

is believed that the plan adopted is a simpler and more rational

exposition of the facts. These adjectives are compounded of

two adjectives like ὀλιγό-ψυχος, an adjective and substantive like

ἀκρο-γωνιαῖος or vice versa ἀνθρωπ-άρεσκος; a substantive and a

verbal like χειρο-ποιήτος; a preposition and a verb like συμ-παθής,

with two prepositions and verbal like παρ-είς-ακτος; an adverb

and a preposition and a verbal like εὐ-πρόσ-δεκτος, etc. The ad-

jective compounds used in the N. T. characteristic of the κοινή

are somewhat numerous.  Ἀγαθο-ποιός (Sirach, Plut.); ἀγρι-έλαιος

(Anthol.); ἀκρο-γωνιαῖος (eccl.); ἀλλο-γενής (LXX and Temple

inscriptions meant for gentiles to read); ἀν-εξί-κακος (from ἀνά,

ἔχομαι and κακός, Lucian, Justin M., Poll., papyri); ἀνθρωπ-άρεσκος

(LXX, eccl.); ἀπό-δεκτος (Sext. Emp., Plut., inscriptions); ἀπο-συν-

άγωγος (2 Esclr.); ἀρτι-γέννητος (Lucian, Long.); αὐτό-κατά-κριτος

(eccl. writers); βαρύ-τιμος (Strabo); γρα-ώδης (from γραῦς, εἶδος,

Strabo, Galen); δεξιο-λάβος (true reading in Ac. 23:23, late eccl.

writers); δευτερο-πρῶτος (cf. δευτερ-έσχατος, only MSS. in Lu. 6:1);

δι-θάλασσος (Strabo, Dio Chrys., eccl.); δί-ψυχος (eccl.); ἔκ-θαμβος

(Polyb., eccl.); ἐκ-τενής (Polyb., Philo); ἔκ-τρομος (only in אD

Heb. 12:21, other MSS., ἔν-τρομος, LXX, Plut.); ἔκ-φοβος (Arist.,

Plut.); ἐπι-θανάτιος (Dion. Hal.); ἐπι-πόθητος (eccl.); ἑτερό-γλωσ-

σος (LXX, Strabo, Philo); εὐ-άρεστος (Wisd., eccl., inscr., but

Xen. has εὐαρέστεως) εὔ-κοπος (Polyb., LXX); εὐ-λογητός (LXX,

Philo); εὐ-μετά-δοτος (Anton.); εὐ-πάρ-εδρος (for Text. Rec. εὐ-πρόσ-

εδρος, Hesych.); εὐ-περί-στατος (only in Heb. 12:1); εὐ-πρόσ-δεκτος

Plut., eccl.); εὐρύ-χωρος (Arist., LXX, Diod., Jos.); εὔ-σπλαγχνος

(Hippoc., LXX, eccl. writers); θεο-δίδακτος (eccl.); θεόπνευστος

(Plut., Phoc., eccl. writers, inscriptions); ἰσ-άγγελος (cf. ἰσό-θεος,


                                      WORD-FORMATION                             169

 

Philo, eccl.); ἰσό-τιμος (cf. ἰσόψυχος, Philo, Jos., Plut., Lucian,

AElia, etc.); καθημερινός (from καθ’ ἡμέραν, Judith, Theophr., Athen.,

Plut., Alciph., Jos.); κατ-ει-δωλος (only in Ac. 17:16); κενό-δοξος

(Polyb., Diod., Philo, Anton., eccl. writers); λα-ξευτός (LXX);

λετι-ουργικός (LXX, eccl. writers); μακρο-χρόνιος (LXX, Hipp.,

Agath.); ματαιο-λόγος (Telest.); μογι-λάλος (LXX, schol. to

Lucian); νεό-φυτος (LXX, papyri, Aristophanes?); ὀκτα-ήμερος

(eccl. writers); ὀλιγό-πιστος (only in N. T.); ὀλιγό-ψυχος (LXX,

Artem.); ὁλο-τελής (Plut., Hexapla, eccl. writers); παν-οῦργος

(Arist., κοινή, LXX); παρα-λυτικός (eccl. writers); παρ-εἰς-ακτος

(Strabo); παρ-επί-δημος (Polyb., Athen., LXX); πατρο-παρά-δοτος

(Diod., Dion. Hal., eccl. writers); πεντε-και-δέκατος (Diod., Plut.,

etc.); πολλα-πλασίων (Polyb., Plut., etc.); πολύ-σπλαγχνος (LXX,

Theod. Stud.); πολύ-τιμος (Plut., Herodian, Anatol.); ποτομο-

φόρητος (only in Rev. 12:15 and Hesyeh.); προ-βατικός (from

πρό-βατον, LXX, Jo. 5:2); πρόσ--καιρος (4 Macc., Jos., Dio Cass.,

Dion. Hal., Strabo, Plut., Herodian); προ-φητικός (Philo, Lucian,

eccl.); πρωτό-τοκος (LXX, Philo, Anatol., inscriptions, eccl.); σητό-

βρωτος (LXX, Sibyll. Or.); σκληρο-τράχηλος (LXX); σκωληκό-βρωτος

(Theophr.); σύμ-μορφος (Lucian, Nicand.); συμ-παθής (LXX); σύν-

ψυχος (eccl. writers); συν-εκ-λεκτός (only in 1 Pet. 5:13); σύν-σωμος

(eccl. writers); συ-στατικός (Ding. Laert.); ταπεινό-φρων (from τα-

πεινός, φρήν, LXX, Plut.); τρί-στεγος (Dion. Hal., Jos., Symm.);

φθιν-οπωρινός (Arist., Polyb., Strabo, Plut.); φιλ-αγαθός (Arist.,

Polyb., Wisd., Plut., Philo); φίλ-αυτος (Arist., Philo, Plut., Jos.,

Sext.); φιλ-ήδονος (Polyb., Plut., Lucian, etc.); φιλό-θεος (Arist.,

Philo, Lucian, etc.); φρεν-απάτης (eccl. writers); χειρ-αγωγός

(Artem., Plut., etc.); χειρο-ποίητος (LXX, Polyb., Dion. Hal.,

papyri); χρυσο-δακτύλιος (Jas. 2:2, elsewhere only in Hesych.).

It will be apparent from this list how many words used in

the N. T. appear first in Aristotle or the literary κοινή. Aris-

totle was no Atticist and broke away from the narrow vocab-

ulary of his contemporaries. Many of these late words are found

in the papyri and inscriptions also, as is pointed out. But we

must remember that we have not learned all that the papyri and

inscriptions have to teach us. Cf. also the numeral adjective

δεκα-τεσσαρες (LXX, Polyb., papyri).1 See further chapter VII,

Declensions.

          4. Adverbs. The late Greek uses many new adverbs and new

kinds of adverbs (especially compounds and prepositional ad-

verbs). For list of the new prepositional adverbs see chapter on

         

            1 Cf. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 70,


170   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

prepositions. These are usually formed either from adjectives

like ἐν-ώπιον (neuter of ἐν-ώπιος) or by composition of preposition

and adverb as in ὑπερ-άνω, or preposition and adjective as in ἐκ-πε-

ρισ-σοῦ), or two or more prepositions (prepositional adverbs as in

ἀπ-έν-αντι), or a preposition and a noun-root as in ἀπο-τόμως, or a sub-

stantive and a verb as in νουν-εχῶς, or an adjective and a substan-

tive as in παν-πληθεί, or an adjective and an adverb as in πάν-τοτε,

or a preposition and a pronoun as in ἐξ-αυτῆς. In a word, the com-

pound adverb is made from compound adjectives, substantives,

verbs with all sorts of combinations. The κοινή shows a distinct

turn for new adverbial combinations and the N. T. illustrates

it very clearly. Paul, especially, doubles his adverbs as in ὑπερ-

εκ-περισσοῦ.  These adverbs are generally formed by parathetic

composition and are used as prepositions in the later Greek, in-

correctly so according to Blass.1  But it must be remembered that

the κοινή developed according to its own genius and that even the

Atticists could not check it. In Luke παν-πληθεί, (Lu. 23:18) and

παν-οικεί (Ac. 16:34) are not derived from adjectives or previous

adverbs, but from substantives (perhaps assoc. instr.). As to the

use of adverbs as prepositions, all prepositions were originally

adverbs (cf. ἐν-αντίον). In the later language we simply can see

the process of development in a better state of preservation. No

magical change has come over an adverb used with a case. It is

merely a helper of the case-idea and is part of the analytic linguistic

development.

          The chief compound adverbs used in the N. T. characteristic

of the κοινή are here given. As the list of adverbs is much smaller

than those of verbs, substantives and adjectives, compounds

with -- privative are included here.  Ἀ-δια-λείπτως (Polyb., Diod.,

Strabo, 1 Macc., papyri); ἀνά-μεσον and ἀνά-μερος is the Text. Rec.

in Rev. 7:17 and 1 Cor. 14:27, but this is not the modern edit-

ing, rather ἀνὰ μέσον, etc.; ἀν-αντι-ρήτως (Polyb., etc.); ἀντι-πέρα

(Xen. ἀντι-πέραν, Polyb., etc.); ἀπ-έναντι (Polyb., LXX, papyri

and inscriptions); ἀ-περι-σπάστως (Polyb., Plut.); ἀπο-τόμως

(Polyb., Diod., Wisd., Longin.); δηλ-αυγῶς (so אCLΔ in Mk.

8:25 for τηλ-αυγῶς); δια-παντός is the way Griesbach and Tisch.

print διὰ παντός; ἔκ-παλαι (Philo and on, inscriptions); ἐν-τενῶς

(Polyb., LXX, inscriptions); ἕν-αντι (LXX, inscriptions); ἐν-ώπιον

(Theoc., LXX, papyri); ἐξ-άπινα (LXX, Jamb., Byz.); ἐξ-αυτῆς

(Theogn., Arat., Polyb., Jos., etc.); ἐφ-άπαξ (Lucian, Dio Cass.,

 

            1 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 65. Cf. Mayser's Gr., pp. 485 ff. Jannaris,

§ 1490.


171                          WORD-FORMATION

 

etc.); καθ-εξῆς (AElian, Plut.); κατ-έν-αντι (LXX, Hermas); κατ-

εν-ώπιον (LXX); νουν-εχῶς (Arist., Polyb.); παν-πληθεί (Dio Cass.);

παν-οικεί (rejected by the Atticists for πανοικίᾳ [LXX], Plato Eryx.,

Philo, Jos.); πάν-τοτε (Sap., Menand., Dion. Hal., condemned by

the Atticists for ἑκάστοτε); παρ-εκτός (LXX); προσ-φάτως (LXX,

Polyb., Alciph.); ὑπερ-άνω (Arist., LXX, Polyb., Jos., Plut., etc.);

ὑπερ-έκεινα (Byz. and eccl.); ὑπερ-εκ-περισσοῦ (Dan. 2:22, Ald.,

Compl.); ὑπερ-εκ-περισσῶς (T, W. H. marg. 1 Th. 5 : 13, Clem.

Rom.); ὑπερ-λίαν (Eust.); ὑπερ-περισσῶς (only Mk. 7:37). There

are two ways of writing some of these compound adverbs, either

as single words or as two or more words. The editors differ as

to διὰ παντος, ἐφ’ ἅπαξ, ἐκ-πάλαι, καθ ’ ἡμέραν, καθ ’ ὄλου, ὑπὲρ ἐκεῖνα

etc. The editors do as they wish about it. These compound

adverbs were still more numerous in the Byzantine writers.1 For

further list of verbs compounded with prepositions see "Language

of the N. T." by Thayer, in Hastings' D. B. The κοινή was fond

of compound words, some of which deserve the term sesquipe-

dalian, like καταδυναστεύω, συναντιλαμβάνομαι, etc. We must not for-

get that after all these modern words from Aristotle onwards

are only a small portion of the whole. Kennedy (Sources of N. T.

Greek, p. 62) claims that only about 20 per cent. of the words in

the N. T. are post-Aristotelian. Many of this 20 per cent. reach

back into the past, though we have no record as yet to observe.

The bulk of the words in the N. T. are the old words of the

ancients, some of which have a distinct classic flavour, literary

and even poetic, like αἰσθητήριον, πολυποίκιλος. See list in Thayer's

article in Hastings' D. B., III, p. 37.

          These lists seem long, but will repay study. They are reason-

ably complete save in the case of verbs compounded with preposi-

tions and substantives so compounded. As a rule only words

used by Aristotle and later writers are given, while Demosthenes

is not usually considered, since he was more purely Attic.

          V. Personal Names Abbreviated or Hypocoristic. The chap-

ter on Orthography will discuss the peculiarities of N. T. proper

names in general. Here we are concerned only with the short

names formed either from longer names that are preserved or

from names not preserved. This custom of giving short pet-

names is not a peculiarity of Greek alone. It belonged, moreover,

to the early stages of the language and survives still.2 It was used

not merely with Greek names, but also with foreign names brought

into the Greek. It is proof of the vernacular κοινή in the N. T.

 

            1 W.-M., p. 127.                        2 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 293.


172     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

Cf. English "Tom" and "Will." These abbreviated names are

regularly from compounds, as Ζηvᾶς for Ζηνό-δωρος (Tit. 3:13).

Of the various forms used in these abbreviated names only

three occur in the N. T., —ας, —ῆς, --ῶς. The great majority

belong to —ας or —ᾶς.1   Ἀμπλίας (or —ιᾶς) is the reading of the

Western and Syrian classes in Ro. 16:8 for   Ἀμπλιᾶτος (Latin

Ampliatus);   Ἀνδρέας is, according to Blass,2 "a genuine old Greek

form," while Schmiedel3 thinks it can come from  Ἀνδρομέδης;

  Ἀντίπας is an abbreviation of   Ἀντίπατρος (Rev. 2:13) (found in

inscription iii/A.D. at Pergamum4);   Ἀπολλώς, possibly5 an abbre-

viation for  Ἀπολλώνιος, is the reading of D in Ac. 18:24, though

א15, 180 read  Ἀπελλῆς here, while  Ἀπελλῆς is read by all MSS.

in Ro. 16:10 (cf. Doric  Ἀπελλᾶς in inscriptions, PAS, ii, 397);

 Ἀρτεμᾶς (Tit. 3:12) is an abbreviation of   Ἀρτεμίδωρος; Δημᾶς

(Col. 4:14; Phil. 24; 2 Tim. 4:10) is probably an abbreviation

of  Δημήτριος, though Δήμαρχος is possible (Δημέας also=Δημᾶς) not

to mention Δημάρατος, Δημόδοκος;  Ἐπαφρᾶς (Col. 1:7; 4:12; Phil.

23) is (Ramsay so takes it, Expositor, Aug., 1906, p. 153. Cf.

genitive  Ἐπαφρᾶδος, PAS, iii, 375; Fick-Bechtel, p. 16) an ab-

breviation of  Ἐπαφρόδιτος (Ph. 2:25; 4:18), but it does not fol-

low that, if true, the same man is indicated in Ph. and Col.;  Ἑρμᾶς

(Ro. 16:14) is from the old Doric form abbreviated from Ἑρ-

μόδωρος;  Ἑρμῆς (Ro. 16:14) may be merely the name of the god

given to a man, though Blass doubts it.6 Likewise we may note

that θευδᾶς (Ac. 5:36) is possibly an abbreviation of θεόδωρος;

 Ἰουνίας (sometimes taken as feminine  Ἰουνία, Ro. 16:7) may be

 Ἰουνιᾶς as abbreviation of  Ἰουνιανός; Κλεόπας (Lu. 24:18) is

apparently an abbreviation of Κλεόπατρος; Λουκᾶς (Col. 4:14; Phil.

24; 2 Tim. 4:11) is an abbreviation of Λουκανός and of Λούκιος7;

Νυμφᾶς (Col. 4:15) is probably derived from Νυμφόδωρος;  Ὀλυμπᾶς

 

            1 See Fick-Bechtel, Die griech. Personennamen, 1894; Pape, Worterbuch

der griech. Eigennamen, 1842, ed. Benseler, 1870; Neil, Beitr. zur Onomatolo

gie; W. Schulze, Graeca Lat., 1901; Hoole, the Class. Elem. in the N. T., 1888;

Kretsch., Gesell. der griech. Spr., Die kleinasiat. Personennamen, pp. 311-370.

            2 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 71.

            3 W.-Sch., p. 143.                                 4 Deiss., B. S., p. 187.  

            5 Cf. W.-Sch., p. 143 f., for objections to this derivation. In a Fayum

pap: (Deiss., B. S., p. 149)  Ἀπολλώνιος occurs ὃς καὶ συριστὶ  Ἰωνάθας. Cf.

Brug., Griech. Or., 1900, p. 175.

            6 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 71. Cf. also Fick-Bechtel, p. 304. Fick (xxxviii) takes

it from  Ἑρμοκράτης, as also  Ἑρμᾶς.

            7 Ramsay (Exp., Dec., 1912, pp. 504 ff.) quotes inscription of Pisid.

Antioch where Λουκᾶς and Λούκιος are used for the same person.


                                 WORD-FORMATION                                    173

 

(Ro. 16:15) is apparently abbreviated from  Ὀλυμπιόδωρος, though

 Ὀλυμπιανός is possible; Παρμενᾶς (Ac. 6:5) is probably an abbre-

viation of Παρμενίδης, though Blass1 suggests Παρμένων; Πατρόβας

(Ro. 16:14) is derived from Πατρόβιος; Σίλας (Ac. 15:22, etc.) is

the same man as Σιλουανός (MSS. often Σιλβανός), as Paul always

calls him (1 Th. 1:1, etc. So Peter in 1 Pet. 5:12); Στεφανᾶς

(1 Cor. 1:16; 16:15, 17) may be either a modification of Στέφα-

νος or an abbreviation of Στεφανηφόρος; Σώπατρος (Ac. 20:4) is read

Σωσίπατρος by a dozen of the cursives and the Sah. Cop. Arm.

versions, while Σωσίπατρος is the correct text in Ro. 16:21, but

it is not certain that they represent the same man, for Σώπατρος

is from Beroea and Σωσίπατρος from Corinth, though it is pos-

sible.   Ἀρχέλαος, Νικόλαος appear in the N. T. in the unabbreviated

forms, though in the Doric the abbreviated forms in –ας were used.

On the subject of the N. T. proper names one can consult also

Thieme, Die Inschriften von Magnesia am Maander und das N. T.,

1906, p. 39 f. He finds twenty of the N. T. names in the Mag-

nesia inscriptions, such as  Ἀπφία,  Ἀρτεμᾶς (  Ἀρτεμίδωρος), etc. Κυρία

is a common proper name (cf. Hatch, Journal of Bibl. Lit., 1908,

p. 145). For the papyri illustrations see Mayser, Gr. der griech.

Papyri (Laut- und Wortlehre, 1906), p. 253 f. Cf. also Traube,

Nomina Sacra (1907), who shows that in both B and א as well

as D the abbreviation IHC XPC is found as well as the more

usual IC XC.  Cf. Nestle, Exp. Times, Jan., 1908, p. 189. Moul-

ton (Cl. Quarterly, April, 1908, p. 140) finds  Ἀκουσίλαος in the

body of a letter in a papyrus and   Ἀκοῦτι, the abbreviated ad-

dress, on the back. See also Burkitt, Syriac Forms of N. T. Proper

Names (1912), and Lambertz, Die griech. Sklavennamen (1907).

          VI. The History of Words. This subject concerns not merely

the new words appearing in the N. T. but all words there used.

This is the best place for a few remarks on it. It is not enough

to know the etymology, the proper formation and the usage in

a given writer. Before one has really learned a word, he must

know its history up to the present time, certainly up to the period

which he is studying. The resultant meaning of a word in any

given instance will be determined by the etymology, the history

and the immediate context.2 The etymology and the history be-

long to the lexicon, but the insistence on these principles is within

 

            1 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 71. Cf. Meisterh., Gr. der att. Inschr. (pp. 114-

118), for formation of proper names.

            2 Cf. Heine, Synon. des neutest. Griech., p. 29. Goodell, The Gk. in Eng.,

1886, gives a popular exhibition of the influence of Gk. on Eng.


174    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

the purview of grammar. The N. T. Greek on this point only

calls for the same treatment granted all literature in all languages

and ages.

          Take σκάνδαλον, for instance. It is a shorter form of the old

Greek word σκανδάληθρον, ‘trap-stick.’ The root σκανδ is seen in the

Sanskrit skandami, ‘to dart,’ ‘to leap.’ The Latin has it in scando,

de-scendo. The termination –άληθρον is possibly the suffix –τρον,

(–θρον) for instrument and σκανδ-άλα(ν). The form σκανδάλη occurs

in Alciphro, of which σκάνδ-αλο-ν is simply the neuter variation.

Σκάνδ-αλο-ν occurs first in the LXX as a translation for מוֺקֵשׁ or

מִכְשׁוֺל, 'a noose,' ‘a snare,’ as in Ps. 69 (68):23. It was the trap-

stick, the trap, the impediment; then a stumbling-block or any

person who was an occasion of stumbling, as in Josh. 23:13. So

Peter became a stumbling-block to Jesus, σκάνδαλον εἶ ἐμοῦ (Mt.

16:23). Christ crucified became a σκάνδαλον to the Jews (1 Cor.

1:23). Take again ἐκ-κλησία (from ἔκ-κλητος, ἐκκαλέω). The root

καλ appears in the Latin cal-endae, con-cil-ium, nomen-cha-tor; in

the Old High German hal-on, 'to call.' Originally ἐκ-κλησία was a

calling-out of the people from their homes, but that usage soon

passed away. It became the constitutional assembly of Athens

and "we must banish from our minds all remembrance of its ety-

mology."1  In the LXX the word is used as the equivalent of

קָהָל, the assembly of the Israelites as a whole. In the N. T.

the word takes a further advance. It still appears in the sense of

‘assembly’ at times, as in 1 Cor. 11:18, but usually, as Thayer

shows (Lexicon), the idea of the word is that of body or company

of believers whether assembled or not, the body of Christ. This

is true at times where the idea of assembly is impossible, as in

Ac. 8:3. The word in this sense of body of Christians is used

either in the local (Ac. 8:3) or the general sense (Mt. 16:18).

In the general sense the word does not differ greatly from one

aspect of the word βασιλεία. These examples must suffice.

          VII. The Kinship of Greek Words. The study of the family tree

of a word is very suggestive.  Δείκ-νυ-μι is a good illustration

in point. It has the root δικ which appears in the Sanskrit dic-a-

mi, ‘to show,’ Latin dic-o, Gothic teiho, German zeigen, etc.

On the root δικ a number of Greek words are built, as δίκ-η,

‘the way pointed out,’ ‘right’ or ‘justice’; δίκην, 'after the way'

or 'like'; δεῖξ-ις, 'a showing'; 'something shown'; δίκ-αιος,

‘a man who seeks to go the right way,’ ‘righteous’; δικ-αιόω, ‘to

 

            1 Hicks, Cl. Rev., 1887, p. 43. See also Robertson, Short Gr. of the Gk.

N. T., pp. 57-60.


                          WORD-FORMATION                              175

 

make or declare one to be righteous'; δικ-αίω-σις, 'the act of declar-

ing one righteous';  δικ-αίω-μα, ‘the thing declared to be right’;

δικ-αιο-σύνη, 'the quality of being right,' ‘righteousness’; δικ-αίως,

‘righteously’ or ‘justly’; δικ-ασ-τήριον or δικ-0ασ-τῆς, one who decides

righteously'; δικ-ασ-τήριον, 'the place for judging righteously.'

Each of these words occurs in the N. T. save three, δίκην, δικ-αιω-

τής, δικασ-τήριον.  With these twelve words the difference in mean-

ing is not so much due to historical development (like ἐκκλησία) as

to the idea of the various suffixes. It is, of course, true that the

N. T. has a special doctrine of righteousness as the gift of God

which colours most of these words. The point is that all these

various points of view must be observed with each word. An-

other illustration that will not be followed up is λύτρον (Mt.

20:28), ἀπο-λύτρω-σις (Ro. 3:24). The ideas of action, agent,

result, instrument, quality, plan, person, etc., as shown by the

suffixes, differentiate words from each other.

          Green in his Handbook to Grammar of N. T. Greek1 illustrates

this point well with the root κρι (κριν), giving only the examples

that occur in the N. T. They will be found interesting: first, the

verb,; κρίν-ω, ἀνα-κρίν-ω, ἀντ-απο-κρίν-ομαι, ἀπο-κρίν-ομαι, δια-κρίν-ω,

ἐγ-κρίν-ω, ἐπι-κρίν-ω, κατα-κρίν-ω, συγ-κρίν-ω, συν-υπο-κρίν-ομαι, ὑπο-

κρίν-ω; second, the substantive, κρίσις, κρί-μα, κρι-τῆριον, κρι-τής,

ἀνάπκρι-σις, ἀπο-κρι-μα, ἀπό-κρι-σις, διάκρι-σις, εἰλι-κρίν-εια, κατά-κρι-μα,

κατά-κρι-σις, πρό-κρι-μα, ὑπό-κρι-σις, ὑπο-κρι-τής;  third, adjectives,

κρι-τικός, ἀ-διά-κρι-τος, ἀ-κατά-κρι-τος, ἀν-υπό-κρι-τος, αὐτο-κατά-κρι-τος,

εἰλι-κρι-νής.

          The development of this line of study will amply repay the

N. T. student.

          VIII. Contrasts in Greek Words or Synonyms. The Greek is

rich in synonyms. In English one often has a choice between the

Anglo-Saxon word or its Norman-French equivalent, as "to ask"

or "to inquire."2 The Greeks made careful distinctions in words.

Socrates tripped the Sophists on the exact meaning of words as

often as anywhere. We are fortunate in N. T. study in the pos-

session of two excellent treatises on this subject. Trench, Syno-

nyms of the N. T., 1890, is valuable, though not exhaustive. But

he gives enough to teach one how to use this method of investi-

gation. Heine, Synon. des neatest. Griech., 1898, is more com-

prehensive and equally able. The matter can only be mentioned

 

            1 § 149, new ed., 1904.

            2 Cf. Skeat, Prin. of Eng. Etym., 1st ser. (Native Words, 1892); 2d ser.

(Foreign Words, 1891).


176     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

here and illustrated. With δίκαιος, for instance, one should com-

pare ἀγαθός, ἅγιος, καθαρός, καλός, ὅσιος, before he can obtain a

complete idea of N. T. goodness or righteousness. We see Jesus

himself insisting on the use of ἀγαθός for the idea of absolute

goodness in Mk. 10:18, οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ θεός. Both ἀγαθός

and δίκαιος occur in Lu. 23:50. In Lu. 8:15 the phrase καρδία

ἀγαθὴ καὶ καλὴ  approaches Socrates' common use of καλὸς κ’ ἀγαθός

for "the beautiful and the good." It is also the Greek way of

saying "gentleman" which no other language can translate. To

go no further, τέρας, δύναμις and σημεῖον are all three used to de-

scribe the complete picture of a N. T. miracle.  Νέος is 'young'

and 'not yet old,' καινός is 'recent' and 'not ancient.'

 



 

 

CHAPTER VI:  ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS

 

          The term orthography is used to include all that pertains to the

spelling of Greek words. Phonetics deals with the sounds of the

letters. The orthography was constantly changing, but not so

rapidly as did the sounds. Each had an independent develop-

ment as is seen very strikingly in the modern Greek vernacular

(Thumb, Handbook of the Mod. Gk. Vernac., p. 6). There has

never been a fixed orthography for the Greek tongue at any stage

of its history. There has always been an effort to have new

phonetic spelling to correspond to the sound-change. Cf. Blass,

Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 6. The confusion in spelling grew with the

centuries as in English. Many delicate questions confront us at

once. It has not seemed possible to give the explanation of all

the varied phonetic (true or merely analogical) and orthographic

changes in the use of the vowels and consonants. An orderly

collection of the facts with historical side-lights is all that is

attempted.

          I. The Uncertainty of the Evidence. It is difficult to tell

what is the vernacular usage in N. T. times on many points,

though somewhat less so since the discovery of the papyri.

          (a) THE ANCIENT LITERARY SPELLING. The difficulty is much

increased by the comparison of the phonetic spelling of the modern

vernacular with the historical orthography of the ancient literary

Greek.1 This method applied to any language may lead one into

error. Modern conversational English differs widely in orthog-

raphy from Spenser's Faerie Queene. For most of the history

of the Greek language no lexicons or grammars were in use.

There were the schools and the books on the one hand and popu-

lar usage on the other. The movement of the Atticists was just

the opposite of the modern phonetic spelling movement in Eng-

lish. The Atticists sought to check change rather than hasten it.

It is to be remembered also that the Atticists were the cloister

 

            1 Jannaris, Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 19 f.

 

                                                177


178    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

copyists of the ancient Greek writings and of the N. T. Later

copyists reflect local types, some more conservative, some less so.

The law of life is best here, as always, without artificial impulse or

restraint. In seeking to restore the orthography of the ver-

nacular of the first century A.D. one must not be handicapped by

the literary Attic nor the modern Greek vernacular, though each

will be of service. In simple truth one has to be less dogmatic

these days concerning what could or could not have been in the

past. Breasted1 calmly assures us that before 3000 B.C. "the al-

phabetic signs, each of which stood for one consonant," were in

use in Egypt. He adds: "Had the Egyptian been less a creature

of habit, he might have discarded his syllabic signs 3500 years

before Christ, and have written with an alphabet of 24 letters."

The Greek language was a growth and did not at first have 24

letters.  E, even in early Attic,2 not to mention Cretan, had the

force of ε, η and sometimes ει. Indeed Jannaris3 asserts that

"the symbols η and ω, in numerous cases also ι, originated at

school as mere compensatory marks, to represent positional or

‘thetic’ ε or ο." It is not surprising with this origin of vowels

(and consonants do not differ) that variations always exist in the

sound and use of the Greek letters. Blass4 is clearly right when

he points out that in changes in the sounds of words "it is usual

for the spelling not to imitate the new sound off-hand," and in the

case of the N. T. writers there was "no one fixed orthography in

existence, but writers fluctuated between the old historical spelling

and a new phonetic manner of writing." Moulton5 adds that the

N. T. writers had to choose "between the literary and illiterate

Greek of their time," and "an artificial orthography left the door

open for not a few uncertainties." Here is a "letter of a prodigal

son" (B.G.U. 846 ii/A.D. See Milligan, Gk. Papyri, p. 93 f.) in which

we have "phonetic" spelling in abundance:  Καὶ διὰ πάντω[ν] εὔχομαί

σαι ὑγειαίνειν.  Τὸ προσκύνημά σου [ποι]ῶ κατ’  αἱκάστην ἡμαίραν παρὰ

τῷ κυρίῳ [Σερ]άπειδει. Γεινώσκειν σαι θέλω κτλ. There is here inter-

change of ε and αι, of ι and ει.

          (b) THE DIALECT-COLOURED VERNACULAR. The dialects explain

some variations in orthography. One copyist would be a better

representative of the pure vernacular κοινή while another might

 

            1 A Hist. of Egypt, 1906, p. 45.

            2 Meisterh., Gr. etc., p. 3; Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 26 f.; Solmsen, Inscr.

Graecae etc., pp. 52 ff.

            3 Op. cit., p. 27.

            4 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 6.                         5 Prol., p. 42.


                     ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                      179

 

live where Attic, Ionic, Doric or Northwest Greek had still posi-

tive influence. Often what looks like a breaking-down of the lan-

guage is but the survival or revival of old dialectical forms or

pronunciation. But these variations are mainly due to the per-

sonal equation. It was not till the time of Marcus Aurelius that

the learned grammarians succeeded in formulating the artificial

rules which afterwards prevailed for writing the old classical

Greek. The first century A.D. was still an age of freedom in or-

thography. Even in the fourth century A.D. the scribe of א pre-

fers ι rather than ει, while in the case of B ει often occurs where ι,

is the rule elsewhere. This is not mere itacism, but is also indi-

vidual preference.1 "The oldest scribes whose work we possess

(centuries 4 to 6) always kept themselves much freer from the

schools than the later."2 But, even if Luke and Paul did not

know the old historical spelling in the case of ι mute (subscript)

and ει, it is merely cutting the Gordian knot to "follow the By-

zantine school, and consistently employ the historical spelling in

the N. T." and that "without any regard to the MS. evidence."

It is not the spelling of the Byzantine school nor of the Attic

dialect that we are after, but the vernacular Greek of the first cen-

tury A.D., and this is not quite "the most unprofitable of tasks,"

as Blass would have us believe.3

          (c) THE UNCIALS. They do complicate the situation. On some

points, as noted above, the great uncials א and B differ, but usu-

ally that is not true. There is a general agreement between the

older uncials in orthography as against the later uncials and the

cursives which fell under the spell of the Byzantine reformers,

who sought to restore the classical literary spelling. The Syrian

class of documents therefore fails to represent the orthography of

 

            1 Hort, The N. T. in Orig. Gk., App., Notes on Sel. Read., p. 152. But

in the Intr. (p. 304) Hort is not willing to admit "peculiarities of a local or

strictly dialectic nature" in the N. T. Still Hort (Notes on Orth., p. 151)

allows the Doric ὁδαγέω (ὁδηγέω) in "single MS." like B and D, προσαχεῖν in

B, ῥάσσω in D, etc. Hirt (Handb. d. Griech., p. 53) attributes much of the

vocal change to dialect-mixing and analogy. On א and B see Hort, op. cit.,

p. 306 f.                                                            2 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 6 f.

            3 Ib., p. 7. Hort (p. 302 f. of the Intr. to the N. T. in Orig. Gk.) makes a

strong defence of his effort to give as nearly as possible "the spelling of the

autographs by means of documentary evidence." There must not be "slov-

enly neglect of philological truth." But Moulton (Prol., p. 47) does not "set

much store by some of the minutiae which W. H. so conscientiously gather

from the great uncials." Certainly "finality is impossible, notwithstanding

the assistance now afforded by the papyri" (Thack., Gr., p. 71).


180    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

the vernacular κοινή of the first century A.D. The Syrian class, for

instance, reads Καρερναούμ, not Καφαρναούμ. But do the MSS.

which give us the pre-Syrian types of text preserve the auto-

graphic orthography? The fourth century is a long time from the

first and the presumption might seem to be to some extent against

the Neutral, Alexandrian and Western classes also. The temp-

tation is constant to spell as people of one's time do. This diffi-

culty is felt by every editor of classical Greek texts and often

purely arbitrary rules are used, rules made by modern critics.

Hort1 is willing to admit that in some instances the spellings

found in the great uncials which are at variance with the Textus

Receptus are due to the "literary spellings of the time" when the

MSS. were written, "but for the most part they belong to the

‘vulgar’ or popular form of the language." Hort could see that

before we had the new knowledge from the papyri and inscrip-

tions. He adds2: "A large proportion of the peculiar spellings of

the N. T. are simply spellings of common life. In most cases

either identical or analogous spellings occur frequently in inscrip-

tions written in different countries, by no means always of the

more illiterate sort." This fact showed that the unclassical spell-

ings in the uncials were current in the Apostolic age and were the

most trustworthy even if sometimes doubtful. "Absolute uni-

formity belongs only to artificial times," Hort3 argues, and hence

it is not strange to find this confusion in the MSS. The confusion

existed in fact in the first century A.D. and probably the auto-

graphs did not follow uniform rules in spelling. Certain it is that

the N. T. writings as preserved in the MSS. vary. But itacism

applies to all the MSS. to a certain extent and makes it difficult

to know what vowel or diphthong was really before the scribe.

In general the N. T., like the LXX, is grounded in matters of or-

thography on the rules of the grammarians of the time of the

Caesars (Apollonius and Herodian) rather than upon those of

the time of Hadrian, when they had an archaistic or Atticistic

tendency (Helbing, Grammatik d. LKX, p. 1). Moulton (Prol.,

p. 42) thinks that "there are some suggestive signs that the great

uncials, in this respect as in others, are not far away from the

autographs." But Thackeray (op. cit., p. 56) denies that this

 

            1 Op. cit.,. p. 303 f. Jann. (Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 35) calls attention to the fact

that the professional copyists not only had to copy accurately, but "in the

received uniform spelling." Cf. also Helbing, Gr. d. LXX, p. 2. For further

remarks on the phenomena in the LXX MSS. see Swete, 0. T. in Gk. p. 300 f.

            2 Op. cit., p. 304.                                   3 Op. cit., p. 308.


                     ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                  181

 

conclusion can be drawn ipso facto of the LXX, since it was trans-

lated (the Pentateuch certainly) some three centuries earlier than

the N. T. was written.

          (d) THE PAPYRI. They strengthen the case for the uncials.

Deissmann1 and Moulton2 show that the great uncials correspond

in orthography not only with the contemporaneous inscriptions

as Hort had seen, but also with the papyri of the better-educated

writers. Among the strictly illiterate papyri writers one can

find almost anything. The case of ἐάν=ἄν in relative clauses is

worked out well by Moulton to prove this point. In the papyri

dated B.C. the proportion of ἐάν to ἄν in such cases is 13 to 29, while

in the first century A.D. it is 76 to 9. But in the fourth century

A.D. it is 4 to 8 and the usage disappears in the sixth century A.D.

Thackeray (Grammar, vol. I, pp. 65 ff.) shows (after Deissmann3)

how the LXX confirms this conclusion for ἐάν=ἄν. The usage

appears in B.C. 133; copyists are divided in different parts of the

same book as in Exodus or Leviticus; it is predominant in the

first and second centuries A.D., and then disappears. Thackeray

(p. 58) traces οὐθείς (μηθείς) "from its cradle to its grave" (from

378 B.C. to end of ii/A.D.) and shows how in ii/A.D.  οὐδείς is supreme

again. This point very strikingly confirms the faithfulness of the

uncials in orthography in a matter out of harmony with the time

when the MSS. were written. We may conclude then that Hort

is right and the uncials, inscriptions and papyri give us the ver-

nacular orthography of the κοινή with reasonable correctness.

          II. Vowel-Changes (στοιχεῖα φωνήεντα). In the old times the

vowels underwent many changes, for orthography was not fixed.

Indeed is it ever fixed? If the Atticists had let the κοινή have a

normal development, Dr. Rutherford would not have complained

that Greek was ruined by their persistence "in an obsolete or-

thography instead of spelling as they speak."4 But as early as

403 B.C. the orator Archinos5 had a law passed in Attica prescrib-

ing the use of the Ionic alphabet in the schools. The early Greek

used only α, ε, ι, ο, υ, and no distinction was made in writing be-

 

            1 B. S., pp. 202 ff.                                             2 Prol., pp. 42 ff.

            3 B. S., pp. 202 ff. On the whole subject of the difficulty of N. T. orthog.

see W.-Sch., pp. 31 ff. Deiss. (B. S., p. 180) is clearly right in denying a

"N. T. orthography" save as individual writers, as now, have their peculiar-

ities. For general remarks about vowel changes in LXX MSS. see Swete,

0. T. in Gk., p. 301 f.; Thack., Gr., vol. I, pp. 71-100; Helbing, Gr., Laut- u.

Wortl., pp. 3-14.

            4 Nicklin, Cl. Rev., 1906, p. 115, in review of Rutherford's A Chap. in

the Hist. of Annotation, 1905.               5 Cf. Bekker, Anec. Gr., vol. II, p. 783.


182   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

tween long and short vowels, as indeed was never done in "the

case of ι and υ. The Ionic invented1 Ω for long ο. Before the

introduction of the Ionic alphabet, I.E. a and e were represented

by ε. H was at first the aspirate like Hebrew ה and then now

aspirate and now long ε or α as the inscriptions amply show. It

is very common in the early inscriptions to see ε thus used as

long and o likewise, as in ε#ναι and τος. Cf. ε, o for spurious diph-

thongs ει, ου. The kinship of these vowels with the Phoenician

alphabet is plain, as α is from א, ε from ה, ι from י, o from ע, υ

from the doubling of ו (and so a Greek invention). It is inter-

esting to note that the Sanskrit has three pure vowels, a, i, u,

while e and o are diphthongs in origin. In Sanskrit a far surpasses

all other vowel-sounds, more than twice as many as all other vowel-

sounds put together.2 Schleicher3 speaks of the weakening of a

into i and u, and thus he, goes back to an original a sound for all

the vowels. In Latin also a breaks into e, i and u.4 Even in

Attica in the first century B.C., in spite of Archinos' law, the in-

scriptions use sometimes αι and αε, ει and ι, η and ι, υ and ι, υ and

υι, ι and ει interchangeably.5 Uniformity did not exist in one dialect,

not to mention the persistent differences between the various Greek

dialects. These changes were going on constantly all over the

Greek world in the first century A.D. For the alphabetical changes

in the dialects see Buck's Greek Dialects, pp. 15 ff. These inter-

changes between vowels are interesting.

          (a) THE CHANGES (INTERCHANGES) WITH α. The first sound

made by a baby is α.

          α and ε. These changes became dialectical peculiari-

ties in many words like the Lesbian κρέτος (κράτος, "ablaut" varia-

tions), the Boeotian ἅτερος (ἕτερος), Doric ἱαρός (ἱερός).6 So in the

vernacular Attic we find , ἐρετή (ἀρετή) where α breaks to ε before

ε (vowel assimilation), as in the Ionic-Attic a sometimes changes

to ε after ι and υ.7   See Kuhner-Blass6 for many examples.

 

            1 Riem. and Goelzer, Gr. Comp. du Grec et du Lat., Phonét., p. 38.

Cf. also Donaldson, The New Crat., pp. 207 ff.; K.-B1., Griech. Gr., Tl. I,

Bd. I, pp. 39 ff.; Earle, Names of the Orig. Letters of the Gk. Alph. (Class-

Papers, 1912, pp. 257 ff.); Flin.-Pet., Form. of the Gk. Alph. (1912). But

Sir Arthur Evans gets the Gk. Alph. from Crete.

            2 Whitney, Sans. Gr., p. 10.

            3 Vergl. Gr., p. 55. His opinion is now considered antiquated.

            4 Giles, Comp. Philol., p. 149 f.

            5 Telfy, Chron. and Topog. d. griech. Ausspr. etc., 1893, p. 39. See also

Larsfeld, Griech. Epig., 1892, pp. 494 ff.; King and Cookson, Sounds and

Inflex. in Gk. and Lat., 1888.                6 K.-B1., Tl. I, Bd. I, p. 115 f.

            7 Hirt, Handb. der griech. Laut- u. Formenl., pp. 115, 119. Γά, is the form


                   ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                  183

 

α and ε.   Ἀγγαρεύω appears as ἐγγαρ. in א (Mt. 5:41) and אB

(Mk. 15:21).1 The New Ionic εἵνεκεν (more commonly ἕνεκεν) has

nearly displaced the Attic ἕνεκα which Blass2 admits only in

Ac. 26:21.  Εἶτεν for εἶτα appears in Mk. 4:28 as a rare Ionic

form. Herodotus3 had both εἶτα and ἔπειτα.   Καθαρίζω in the

aorist (active and passive) and perfect middle has ε for the second

α in many of the best MSS. both in LXX and N. T. (cf. Mk.

1:42; Mt. 8: 3 W. H.). Gregory, Prolegomena, p. 82, gives the

facts. Blass4 points out that Πάτερα (Πάταρα) occurs in AC in

Ac. 21:1.  Τεσσεράκοντα is the form given always by W. H. This

is an Ionic form (vowel assimilation) which is not so common in

the papyri as in the N. T. MSS.5 In modern Greek both σαράντα

and σεράντα survive. Likewise W. H. always give the preference to

τέσσερα, though the papyri do not use it till the fourth century A.D.6

But in the inscriptions τέσσερα is found several times,7 one case in

the first century A.D.8  Τέσσερας, however, does not occur in the

N. T. MSS., though the papyri have it in the Byzantine age.9  The

Ionic and the modern Greek have τέσσαρες and τέσσερα. The N. T.

thus differs from the κοινή papyri, but is in harmony with the Ionic

literature and inscriptions. In some MSS. in both LXX and N. T.

 

in Doric and Boeotian, while γε is found in the Ionic, Attic and Cypriote

(Meister, Griech. Dial., Bd. II, p. 29).

            1 Deiss., B. S., p. 182, gives εὐγαρίας in a pap. (iv/A.D.).

            2 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 20. Cf. Note in W.-Sch., p. 50; Thack., pp. 82, 135;

Mays., p. 14.

            3 According to Phrynichus (Rutherford, New Phryn., p. 204) both of these

words are ἐσχάτως βὰρβαρα.

            4 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 20.                                   5 Moulton, Prol., p. 46.

            6 Ib. For assimilation between a and E in modern Gk. dialects see Dieterich,

Unters. etc., pp. 272, 274. In mod. Gk. vernacular a frequently displaces

initial ε or ο. Cf. Thumb, Handb., p. 14.

            7 Dieterich, Unters. zur Gesch. der griech. Spr., p. 4; also Schweizer, Gr.

d. perg. Inschr., p. 163.

            8 Nachm., Laute and Formen d. magn. Inschr., p. 146.

            9 Moulton, Prol., p. 46. For further evidence see Cronert, Mem. Graeca

Hercul., 1903, p. 199. In the Apostolic Fathers and the N. T. Apoc. τέσσερα

and τεσσεράκοντα are common as well as ἐκαθερίσθη (Reinhold, De Graecitate

Patr. Apostol. etc., p. 38 f. On the whole subject of α and ε in the papyri see

careful discussion of Mayser, Gr., pp. 54-60, where he mentions ἐκούω, ἐγγαρεύω,

ἐπελεύσασθαι (for similar confusion of aorist and fut. inf. see ἐκφεύξασθαι, 2 Macc.

9:22 V).  Τέσσερα and τεσσεράκοντα are very common also in the LXX MSS.

Cf. Helbing, Gr. d. LXX, p. 5; Thack., Gr., p. 62f. This spelling occurs as

early as iv/B.C. in Pergamum (Schweizer, Gr. d. perg. Inschr., p. 163 f.). In

Egypt it hardly appears before i/A.D. and is not common till ii/A.D. (Thack.,

Gr., p. 62). The uncials give the later spelling. See "Additional Notes."


 

184      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

τέσσαρες is accusative as well as nominative, like the Achaean dia-

lect, but this is another story. א in Rev. 3:16 has χλιερός. The

common (Ionic and Northwest Greek) use of —έω instead of –άω

with verbs as in ἐρωτέω will be discussed in the chapter on Verbs.

          ε and α. Conversely ε is sometimes changed to α.   Ἀμφιάζει is accepted

by W. H. in Lu. 12:28 rather than either the late ἀμφιέζει or the

early ἀμφιέννυσι. The form ἐραυνάω instead of ἐρευνάω W. H. have

everywhere received into the text, and so with ἐξερανυνάω and ἀνεξε-

ραύνητος.  אB always read it so, sometimes AC. It is supported

by the papyri. Cf. Mayser, Gr., p. 113; Helbing, Gr. d. LXX,

p. 7, for similar phenomena in the LXX.

          Initial ε often becomes α in modern Greek vernacular, as ἀλα-

φρός (ἐλαφρός), ἄντερα (ἔντερα), etc. Cf. Thumb, Handbook, p. 14.

So the Doric πιάζω is used in the N. T. everywhere save in Lu.

6:38, where, however, πεπιεσμένος has the original idea (‘pressed

down,' not ‘seized’). Both occur in the LXX. The Attic forms φιάλη,

ὕαλος are retained in the N. T. (as in LXX) rather than the Ionic and

vernacular κοινή forms in ε, a mark of the influence of the literary1 κοινή.

          Some verbs in —έω also use –αω forms, like ἐλεάω, ἐλλογάω, ξυράω.

See the chapter on Verbs.

          Changes in α take place in a few Hebrew proper names.  Καπερ-

ναούμ, is the Syrian reading for Καφαρναούμ (W. H.). So W. H. read

Μαλελεήλ in Lu. 3:37, not Μελ. (Tisch.), and Ναθαναήλ.  Σελαθιήλ (in-

stead of Σαλ.) appears in B. Thumb2 remarks that these changes

between α and ε occur to-day in the Kappadocian dialect.

          α and η The Doric forms ὁδαγός, ὁδαγῶ are found in the κοινή,

though Schweizer3 calls it hardly a Dorism. So in N. T. MSS.

we have προσαχέω in B (Ac. 27:27) and ῥάσσω in D (Mk. 9:18).

The Ptolemaic papyri regularly have ἀνηλίσκειν till ii/A.D. (May-

ser, Gr., p. 345). For α and see η and under (c).

          α and ο. The changes4 between these two vowels are seen in

the Lesbian ὐπά (ὑπό), Arcadian τριακάσιοι, Doric εἴκατι (εἴκοσι), etc.

W. H. give βατταλογέω in Mt. 6:7 (cf. βατταρίζω) instead of βατ-

τολογέω. ABK and twice א and many cursives have πρὸς Κολασσαεῖς

 

            1 Dieterich Unters. etc., p. 70. Cf. Thack., Gr., vol. I, p. 75 f. So Δαλματία

in 2 Tim. 4:10, though C has Δελμ. as Lat. has both. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk.,

p. 21. Both forms are in the pap., Deiss., B. S., p. 182.

            2 Hellen. (Griech. Spr.), p. 76. See also Rademacher, N. T. Gr., pp. 34 ff.

            3 Gr. d. perg. Inschr., p. 49. Cf. Mayser, Gr., p. 62, χρᾶσθαι for χρῆσθαι.

So A in 2 Macc. 6:21.

            4 K.-B1., Tl. I, Bd. I, p. 117 f. Cf. Meisterh., Gr. etc., p. 117, where Attic

inscr. are shown to have Νεοπολίτης.


                        ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                   185

 

as the title, while in Col. 1:2 nearly all MSS. read ἐν Κολοσσαῖς.

Blass finds the title in ο also in accordance with the coins and the

profane writers; Xen., Anab. I, 2. 6, has a variant reading in Κολασ-

σαί. In Mk. 13:35 B has μεσανύκτιον and D in Lu. 11:5 instead

of μεσονύκτιον.1  In 1 Tim. 1:9 W. H. give μητρολῴαις and πατρο-

λῴαις (instead of αλοίαις) on the authority of אDFGL. Blass2

compares πατρο-κτόνος.

          α and ω.    Ἀνάγαιον is read by the most and the best MSS. in

Mk. 14:15; Lu. 22:12.   Ἀνώγεον, ἀνώγαιον, ἀνώγεων, ἀνάγεον have

only "trifling authority."3  Γαῖος is Doric and Ionic.

          α and αι. The papyri4 sometimes have the Epic and Ionic αἰεί,

though the N. T. only reads ἀεί. The ι early dropped out between

the vowels. Cf. Mayser, Gr., p. 103. B has αἰεί in 1 Esd. 1:30.

The N. T., like the LXX, has καίω and κλαίω, though the Ptole-

maic papyri rarely have κάω and κλάω.

          α and αυ. In Lu. 2:1 אCΔ have   Ἀγούστου instead of  Αὐγούστου.

This spelling of α for αυ is found in Pergamum by Schweizer5

in the reflexive pronoun ἑατόν, while Meisterhans6 gives examples

of it as early as 74 B.C. in the Attic inscriptions. Moulton7 is

probably correct in saying that we need not assume the existence

of this spelling in the N. T. autographs, though it is not impos-

sible. He indorses Mayor's suggestion (Exp., VI, x, 289) "that

ἀκαταπάστους in 2 Pet. 2:14 AB may be thus explained: he com-

pares ἀχμηρῷ 1:19 A." This dropping of υ between vowels ex-

tended to the dropping of υ before consonants. In the modern

Greek we have αὐτός (aftos) and ἀτός (in Pontus), whence comes

τό (not the article).8 The examples of   Ἀγοῦστος and ἀτός (ἀτογεν-

νητόν, once) in the papyri are very common.9  Thackeray (Gr.,

p. 79) finds no instances in the LXX.

 

            1 Hort (Notes on Orth., p. 152) compares μέσαβον, and Blass (Gr., p. 21)

μεσαστύλιον.  Μετοξύ (μεταξύ) is in 1 Clem. and Barn. (Reinhold, De Grace.,

p. 40 . Cf. Mayser, Gr., p. 60 f., ὅλλοι for ἅλλοι. Illiterate scribes confused

α and ο, α and ε in the LXX (as μετοξί) and in the pap. (Thack., Gr., p. 77).

            2 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 21.

            3 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 151.  p. 51, compare κατα-φαγᾶς and

κατω-φαγᾶς as as parallel. Cf. Meisterh., Gr., p. 17.

            4 Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 31, 1904, p. 107.               5 Gr. etc., p. 91 f.

            6 Gr. etc., p. 61. Cf. also Dieterich, linters. etc., p. 78.                7 Prol., p. 47.

            8 Moulton, Exp., 1904, p. 363. So also in the Rom. period occasionally

ἐματοῦ, ἑατοῦ. Cf. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 35; Wack., Kuhn's Zeitschr.,

xxxiii, pp. 2

            9 Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 33; 1904, p. 107. He quotes Laurent (B.C.H.,

1903, p. 356) as saying that this phenomenon was very common in the latter

half of i/B.C.


186   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

          αι and ε.  αι was written αε in early Boeotian and Attic inscrip-

tions (cf. Latin transliteration) and so gradually was pronounced

as ε (Jannaris, Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 28). By 100 A.D. in the κοινή αι

was the mere equivalent of ε. The Egyptian papyri show abun-

dant illustrations of it. Especially do the LXX MSS. exhibit it

(Thackeray, Gr., p. 78). The modern Greek pronounces both these

vowel-sounds alike, as indeed did the Boeotian dialect long before

the κοινή. Numerous examples of this interchange of spelling exist

in the Pompeian wall-inscriptions and in the vernacular κοινή from

100 A.D. on.1  Indeed in the N. T. MSS. it is very common to

find –σθαι and –σθε used indiscriminately, probably representing the

common later pronunciation which was already developing in the

first century A.D. Hort2 compares this "shortening of an identical

sound" to the late στύλος for στῦλος and κρίμα for κρῖμα. So com-

mon did this blending become that Blass3 places little confidence

in the N. T. MSS. on this point. Such readings occur as ἐτεῖσθε

for αἰτεῖσθε and γυνε͂καις for γυναῖκες. Sometimes only the con-

text4 can decide between ε and αι where different forms result, as

in ἀνάπεσε or –αι (Lu. 14:10), ἔγειρε or —αι (Mt. 9:5), ἐπάναγκες

(Ac. 15:28),5 ἔρχεσθε or –σθαι in אADL (Lu. 14:17), ἑτέροις or

ἑταίροις (Mt. 11:16 Syrian reading), παρένεγκε or –αι (Mk. 14:36),

etc. In Gal. 4:18 both אand B read ζηλοῦσθε for ζηλοῦσθαι. B

reads Αἰλαμῖται in Ac. 2:9, from עַילָם, the rest  Ἐλ. The author-

ity according to Hort6 is "usually preponderant" for ἐξέφνης and

ἐφνίδιος instead of αἰφ. So κερέα, for κεραία is accepted7 in Mt. 5:18;

Lu. 16:17, and κρεπάλη for κραιπάλη in Lu. 21:34. Likewise

W. H. receive Λασέα for λαῖλαψ in Ac. 27:8. אAC in 2 Pet. 2:17

read λέλαπος, but λαῖλαψ is the undoubted reading in Matthew,

Luke. The uncials all have ῥέδη, not ῥαίδη, in Rev. 18:13. So

all the early uncials but A have Συκομορέα (not –αία) in Lu. 19:4.

Hort8 accepts also φελόνης for φαιλόνης (2 Tim. 4:13), though

Moulton9 doubts, because of the Latin paenula.

 

            1 W.-Sch., p. 47.

            2 Notes on Orth., p. 150. Cf. on at and E, Mayser, Gr., p. 107.

            3 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 9.                         4 W.-Sch., p. 47.

            5   Ἐπ’ ἀνάγκαις "Alexandrian only" according to Hort, Notes on Orth.,

p. 151.

            6 Ib.

            7 Ib. Cf. the Western καινοφωνίας for κενοφωνίας in 1 Tim. 6:20. In 1

Th. 3:3 instead of σαίνεσθαι FG read σιένεσθαι. Nestle (Neut.-Zeit., 1906,

p. 361) finds parallels in the forms σιανομένων and σιανθείς.

            8 Notes on Orth., p. 151.

            9 Cl. Rev., 1904, p. 107. The pap. give φαινόλιον.


                     ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS               187

 

          (b) THE CHANGES WITH ε. The interchanges of ε and α have

already been discussed under (a), but others took place with η, ι, ο.

            ε and ει In the Boeotian these were freely interchanged1 and

the same interchange occurs in the Doric, New Ionic and Attic

as πλέων, or πλείων. The Attic inscriptions2 show this common

phenomenon. The ι before a vowel easily and early loses its force

and drops out. Before the adoption of the scholastic orthography

at Athens (B.C. 403) ε stood for ε, η, ει.  Sooner or later ει became

everywhere a monophthong (Buck, Greek Dialects, p. 28). But

the κοινή usually wrote ει before vowels rather than ε (Thackeray,

Gr., p. 81). The LXX MSS. reveal the same traits as the N. T.

 Ἀρεοπαγίτης is in Acts 17:34, but   Ἄρειος occurs (Ac. 17:19, 22).

  Ἀχρεῖος is uniform in the N. T., but in Ro. 3:12 we have  ἠχρεώ-

θησαν (אABDG). In Lu. 3:13; Jo. 21:15; Ac. 15:28, W. H.

print πλέον (Attic has even πλέονος),3 but elsewhere the N. T. has

forms in ει.  The derivatives all have ε like πλεονεκτέω. But the

N. T. has only τέλειος, τελειόω, though Herodotus always and the

Attic usually used τελεόω.  Dc has τελεῶσαι in Heb. 10:1.4  Of

words with ε and ει before consonants one may note that ἀπο-

στείλω in Ac. 7:34 is aorist subjunctive. (Cf. Ex. 3:10.) Both

ἕνεκεν and εἵνεκεν occur in the N. T. (both Ionic and Attic). The

N. T. never has ἐς, but always εἰς. However, ἔσω is the uniform

reading in the N. T. Homer used either εἴσαω or ἔσω.

          ε and η.  Numerous examples of long ε occur in the inscriptions

like μετε (μήτε).5  These changes are probably all analogical and

not phonetic. But in the N. T. we have only the shortening of

η, back to short ε in some words like ἀνάθεμα, though this particular

word (‘curse’) came to be distinct from ἀνάθημα (‘votive offering’).

  Ἀνάθημα occurs only once in the N. T. (Lu. 21:5), and even here

אADX, etc., have ἀνάθεμα.  Tisch. quotes Moeris as saying ἀνά-

θημα ἀττικῶς, ἀνάθεμα ἑλληνικῶς.  But the use of ἀνάθεμα as 'curse'

 

            1 Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 28, as θειός = θεός; Thumb, Handb., p. 220.

            2 Meisterh., Gr., p. 20 f. Cf. Schweizer, Gr. etc., p. 44 f. The change

in ε and ει was very common in vi/iii B.C. Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 37.

            3 But even the Arcadian dial. has πλέονα, πλεόνων (Solmsen, Inscr. Grace., p.

4).  Πλέον is common in the N. T. Apoc. (Reinhold, De Grace. Patr. Apost. etc.,

p. 40). Cf. Meisterh., Gr. d. att. Inschr., p. 40 f. On the whole subject of ε

and ει in the pap. see Mayser, Gr., pp. 67-73. They arc very numerous indeed,

these changes in the pap., both ways.                4 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 22.

            5 Solmsen, Inscr. Graecae etc., p. 1. Arcadian dial. Cf. also Meisterh.,

Gr., p. 3. In the Pontic dial. to-day there is a wide-spread use of ε instead of

η, as in σέπομαι (Thumb, Hellen. [Griech. Spr., referred to hereafter usually as

Hellen.] p. 149).


188    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

"is not an innovation of biblical Greek" (Moulton, Prolegomena,

p. 46). In Ac. 11:11 אABDGr read ἦμεν, not ἤμην. Perhaps this

exchange between ε and η bears on the use of στήκετε with ἵνα

in Mk. 11:25; 1 Th. 3:8, and of MS. evidence for θαυμάζετε in

Jo. 5:20 and ἐξομολογήσεται in Ph. 2:11. Cf. also ὄψησθε and

ὄψεσθε in Lu. 13:28. So in 13:25.  Mayser (Gr., p. 64) thinks

that sometimes ε represents an original open η as in παρεστεκότες.

The κοινή shows quite a preference for words in —εμα rather than

--ημα (Mayser, Gr., p. 65 f.), and the LXX has new words in —εμα,

though some words have both forms (Thackeray, Gr., p. 80).

          In the papyri this shortening (as in the LXX) appears in words

like ἐπίθεμα, πρόσθεμα, etc.1  The interchanges between η and ει, ηι,

and ει will be discussed under η (c). Mayser (Gr., p. 63 f.) thus

(η for ε) explains πλήρης as an indeclinable neuter form.

          ε and ι.  Dieterich2 mentions as one of the marks of the Attic

and Egyptian κοινή the fact that ι and ε interchange when used

with λ and ν.  Cf. the modern Greek, and the Lesbian Greek used

τέρτος for τρίτος, and the Thessalian θιός for θεός. It is a Doric

characteristic. This variation appears in the inscriptions3 and in

the papyri,4 especially in the case of λεγιών, which is also λεγεών and

even λεγειών, not to mention a genitive λεγιο͂νως (ο and ω having

the same sound).  Λεγιών, is the reading of the best N. T. MSS.

(אBDL; cf. Latin legio), as in the papyri. Especially in the case

of the Latin short i does the κοινή have ε.   Ἁλεεῖς, not ἑλιεῖς, is the

reading in the N. T. according to the best MSS. (Mk. 1:16, etc.).5

This is a natural assimilation after a liquid. The frequency of ε

for ι in the Egyptian papyri may be due in part to the Coptic,

which has no short i (Steindorff, Kopt. Gr., p. 13). Note a

soldier's use of χε͂ραν for χεῖρα(ν), B.G.U. 423 (ii/A.D.).  Λέτιον

(Jo. 13:4, Latin linteum) is a change in the other direction,

Latin i to Greek ε. Blass6 says that λέντεον would have looked

 

            1 Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1904, p. 108. Cf. also Moulton, Prol., p. 46, and    

Schweizer, Gr. d. perg. Inschr., pp. 47 ff., has good discussion of this short-

ening of η to ε and also ω to ο. "E and η interchange times without number

from v/B.C. down to ix/A.D." (Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 36). Reinhold (De

Graec. Patr. etc., p. 101 f.) shows howl the confusion between η and ε led to

forms like ἐὰν ἀγάγετε. Cf. the mod. Gk. στέκω (στήκω) and θέτω (θήτω).

            2 Unters. etc., p. 136.                3 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., P. 43 f.

            4 Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, pp. 33, 434; 1904, p. 107. Cf. Mayser, Gr.,

p. 80 f.

            5   Ἁλιεῖς occurs in pap. also. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 307; Thackeray,

p. 84.

            6 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 22.


                        ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                       189

 

unnatural to a Greek. Νηφάλιος also is alone well-attested,1 not

νηφάλεος (1 Tim. 3:2, etc.).  Ποτίολοι in Ac. 28:13 represents the

Latin Puteoli, using ι for ε (cf. Dittenberger, p. 145).  Σιμικίνθιον

(not —εον) is the N. T. reading (Ac. 19:12) for Latin semicinctium.

So Τιβέριος (not Τεβέριος) is the N. T. rendition of Tiberius in Lu.

3:1, though the later Greek writers used Τεβέριος, Δομέτριος, etc.2

It is really surprising that more examples of this exchange of ε

and ι do not appear. The interchanges between ει and ι are dis-

cussed under (d), those between ευ and υ under (f).

          ε and o. The Lesbian AEolic had στρόφω for the Doric στράφω.

The Ionic-Attic made it στρέφω. Meisterhans3 gives numerous ex-

amples of this change in ε and o:  ὀβολός for ὀβελός as early as the

middle of the fourth century B.C. Dieterich4 mentions the assimi-

lation of ε and o as one of the marks of the Egyptian κοινή. In Ac.

18:24 א 15. 180.  Cop. arm. and in 19:1 א180. read   Ἀπελλῆς for

  Ἀπολώς, though D has  Ἀπολλώνιος in 18:24. The Doric and the

Attic inscriptions5 had  Ἀπέλλω,  Ἀπελλώνιος,  Ἀπέλλιος, etc. In

1 Cor. and Titus we have only   Ἀπολλώς. Indeed Blass6 suggests

that  Ἀπελλῆς is the reading of the α text in Acts and that   Ἀπολλώς

is an interpolation from 1 Cor. It is more likely to think that

the two old forms of the name were still in use, though  Ἀπολ-

λώς is the correct text in Acts also. The MSS. of the N. T., even

good uncials, have ὀλοθρεύω, ἐξολοθρεύω, ὀλοθρευτής as well as the

usual ὀλεθρεύω, etc. (cf. ὀβολός for ὀβελός by assimilation), and

Hort7 accepts the ε form only in Ac. 3:23. The Syrian class

has the o form.  Blass,8 who usually cares little for such points,

properly insists on the documentary evidence. In Heb. 11:28

only ADE have the ε form, while in 1 Cor. 10:10 DFG read ε.

 

            1 Notes on Orth., p. 151.

            2 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 21. But always Τίτος. Cf. Nachm., Magn.

Inschr., p. 22, in discussion of ε for Lat. i. Both λεγιών and λέντιον are read in

Magn. inscr. (Thieme, Die Inschr. von Magn. etc., p. 8). Cf. also Schweizer,

Gr. d. perg. Inschr., p. 46. For assimilation between ε and ι in mod. Gk. see

Dieterich, Unters. etc., p. 272 f.

            3 Gr. d. att. Inschr., p. 22. Cf. also K.-B1., Tl. I, Bd. I, p. 118.

            4 Unters. etc., p. 135 f. Cf. Hirt, Handb. d. Griech. etc., p. 115.

            5 K.-B1., Tl. I, Bd. I, p. 118, and Hirt, op. cit., p. 115.

            6 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 21. Cf. Mayser (Gr., pp. 94-97) for a discussion of

the pap. situation.

            7 Notes on Orth., p. 152.

            8 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 21. He quotes Buresch, Rhein. Mus., p. 216 f., as

in favour of ε in the N. T. as well as the LXX.  Ὀλεθ. appears in the Apost.

Fathers (Goodspeed, Index) and ὀλοθ. in N. T. Apoc. (Reinhold, p. 40). For

assimilation between ε and o in mod. Gk. see Dieterich, Unters. etc., p. 274.


190   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

The LXX according to אAB reads ε, though the modern Greek

has ξολοθρεύω. But ὄλεθρος is the uniform spelling in the N. T.

and is the rule in the LXX (Thackeray, Gr., p. 88).

          In Mk. 8:14 B has ἐπελάθεντο as is common in the LXX

(Thackeray, Gr., p. 89). Cf. also ἀπέδετο (Heb. 12:16, LXX),

ἐξέδετο (Mk. 12:1), διεδίδετο (Ac. 4:35), παρεδίδετο (1 Cor. 11:23),

and ἐξεκρέμετο (Lu. 19:48 אB). Hort (Appendix, p. 167 f.) ex-

plains these changes as "euphonic," but it is a change of the root-

vowel of δο, a confusion of thematic and athematic conjugations.

          ἐάν and ἄν.  See also I (d) under Papyri. This is as good a

place as any to say a word further on the interchange of these

two forms, not strictly vowel-changes, however. We have also

εἰάν, (really εἰ+ ἄν) as in P Eleph. 1 (B.c. 311). See also αἰάν for ἐάν,

B.G.U. 530 (i/A.D.). The use of ἐάν= modal ἄν in relative sentences,

so common in the LXX, N. T. and papyri of i/ii A.D., is not an ex-

change of vowels, but possibly a slurring over of the ε before α.

 Ἄν=ἐάν survives from the ancient Greek in a few instances, as Jo.

5:19 (אB); 12:32 (B and accepted by W. H.); 13:20 DEFG,

etc., have ἐάν, but אBC ἄν and accepted by W. H.); 16:23 (BACD,

accepted by W. H.); 20:23 (twice and accepted by W. H., though

AD have first ἐάν and אAD second). In Ac. 9:2 only אE have ἄν

and W. H. read ἐάν.  Blass1 thinks that as ἐάν made encroachment

into the province of ἄν "a kind of interchange of meaning between

the two words" grew up. The modern Greek vernacular uses ἄν for

‘if.’  Hort2 considers the whole subject of the interchange between

ἐάν and ἄν after relatives "peculiarly irregular and perplexing.

Predominantly ἄν is found after consonants, and ἐάν after vowels,

but there are many exceptions." Cf. ἐάν in Mt. 20:4 and ἄν in

Mt. 20:26 f. Moulton3 has shown that ἐάν= ἄν is scarce in the

papyri save from 100 B.C. to 200 A.D. In the Magnesian inscrip-

tions4 only ἐάν appears, not ἄν nor ἤν, ἤν=ἐάν is not in the

N. T. But in the Herculaneum papyri these particles interchange

freely.5 The Attic inscriptions uniformly have ἄν with relatives.6

 

            1 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 60. Omitted by Debrunner in ed. 4.

            2 Notes on Orth., p. 173. Hort has a curious error here, for the references

under ἄν and ἐάν should be exactly reversed.   Ἄν =ἐάν (‘if’) is rarely found

in the pap. also. Moulton (Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 434) gives ἂν μὴ ἀποδῶι. (AP 43,

ii/B.C.). Cf. also Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 32; Mayser, Gr., p. 152 f. Mayser gives

exx. of ἐὰν=ἄν and of ἄν=ἐάν.              3 Prol., p. 43; Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 32, etc.

            4 Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 68. See Gregory, Prol. (Nov. Test. Gr.), p.

96, for the facts about the N. T. MSS. and ἐάν.

            5 Cronert, Mem. Graeca Here., p. 130.

            6 Dieterich, Unters. etc., p. 326.


                   ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                           191

 

Indeed Attic often contracts this particle ἐάν= ἤν.1  But

modal ἄν is found in Xen. Mem., ᾧ ἐὰν ἁρμόττῃ, in Lysias, οὓς ἐὰν

βουληθῶσιν, etc. (see Jannaris, Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 421). This use

of ἐὰν occurs sixty-one times in the N. T. Examples occur in

late Greek of εἰἐάν, as well as εἰἄν, instead of ἐάν. Cf. Rein-

hold, De Graecitate Patrum Apost. etc., p. 35; Moulton, Classical

Review, 1901, p. 32. Thackeray (Gr., pp. 65 ff.) finds that in the

ii/B.C. the papyri nearly always have ὃς ἄν, while in the i/A.D. they

nearly always have ὃς ἐάν.  In the books of Exodus and Leviticus

he notes that in the first half of each book both forms occur

while in the second part ὃς ἐάν almost vanishes. Each book may

have been written on two rolls.

          (c) THE CHANGES WITH η. The changes between η and α, η and

ε have already been discussed.

          η and ι. As already stated, originally H was merely the rough

breathing, but the Ionic psilosis left a symbol useless, and heta was

called eta.2 Thus the new letter took the old long ε value in Ionic

and Attic and also largely supplanted the long α where α became e.

The Sanskrit used long a, the Greek η and the Latin either e or i

This new (in spelling) η (v/B.c.) gradually turned more to the i

sound in harmony with the growing itacism of the language, though

there was some etacism on the other hand.3 As early as 150 B.C.

the Egyptian papyri show evidence of the use of ι for η.4 By the

middle of the second century A.D. the confusion between η and ι,

η and ει, ηι and ει is very general. By the Byzantine times it is

complete and the itacism is triumphant in the modern Greek.5

Reinhold6 thinks that the exchange between η and ι was natural

in view of the relation between η and ε and the interchange be-

tween ε and ι.  As early as the fifth century B.C. the change

between η and ι is seen on vases and inscriptions. But the Ptole-

maic papyri show little of it and it is rare in the LXX MSS. אAB

(Thackeray, Gr., p. 85). In the N. T. times the interchanges

between η and ι, η and ει, ηι and ει are not many.  In 1 Cor. 4:11

W. H. read γυμνιτεύω, though L and most of the cursives have η.

 

            1 Thumb, Hellen., p. 92.

            2 Hirt, Handb. d. Griech. etc., p. 63.

            3 Thumb, Hellen., p. 98 f.

            4 Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 29. Cf. also Thumb, Hellen., p. 138. In Boeotia

also η and ι interchange in ii/B.C. Cf. W.-Sch., p. 46. Mayser (Gr., p. 82)

cites from a Hom. pap. of i/B.C. ἔθικε for ἔθηκε, and per contra (p. 84) ἀφήκετο

            5 Schweizer, Gr. d. perg. Inschr., p. 47. He gives ἐπή for ἐπί from a Byz.

inscr.

            6 De Graec. Patr. etc., p. 41. Cf. also Meisterh., Gr. d. att. Inschr., p. 34 f.


192     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

The N. T. always has δηνάριον, though δινάριον appears very early.1

For κάμηλος in Mt. 19:24 and Lu. 18:25 a few late cursive MSS.

substitute κάμιλος (‘rope’), a word found only in Suidas and a

scholium on Arist. But "it is certainly wrong,"2 a mere effort to

explain away the difficulty in the text, an effort as old as Cyril

of Alexandria on Luke. For Κυρήνιος B3 it. vg. sah. have Κυρῖνος,

while B* has Κυρεῖνος and A has Κηρύνιος, a striking example of

itacism, η, ι, ει, υ having the same sound in these MSS. The

N. T. MSS. give σιμικίνθιον in Ads 19:12, but Liddell and Thayer

both suggest σημ. as an alternative spelling like the Latin semi-

cinctium. So also the best MSS. in Rev. 18:12 read σιρικός, though

some cursives have σηρικός (like Jos. and others), and still others

συρικός.3  Indeed in 1 Pet. 2:3 for χρηστός L and many cursives

have Χριστός. The heathen misunderstood the word Χριστός and

confounded it with the familiar χρηστός, pronounced much alike.

Suetonius (Claudius 25) probably confused Christus with Chres-

tus. In Ac. 11:26 א 61 have Χρηστιανούς, while B has Χρειστ.

So in Ac. 26:28 אhas Χρηστιανόν for Χριστ., while B has again ει.

The same thing occurs in 1 Pet. 4:16.

          η and ει. The Boeotian and the Thessalian dialects early

changed4  η for ει, τίθειμι=τίθημι. Schweizer5 gives παράδησος for

παράδεισος (Byzantine inscription). In Lu. 14:13 (21) we have

ἀνάπειρος (ABDEL), ἀνάπηρος (GHK, etc.), and --πιρ— (אR). This

itacism is condemned by Phrynichus the Atticist as vulgar.6  In

the LXX א has ἀνάπειρος in Tob. 14:2 and AV show it in 2

Macc. 8:24 (Thackeray, Gr., p. 83).  In Heb. 6:14 W. H.

follow אABD in reading εἶ μήν rather than ἦ μήν.  This form

occurs in the LXX and in the papyri. Moulton7 has shown that

several times in the papyri it is obviously for ἦ μήν by mere ita-

cism, and so is not due to a confusion between the Hebraistic

use of εἰ μή =אִמ לֹא, thus correcting Hort. The uncials and the

 

            1 Blass, Ausspr. d. Griech., pp. 37, 94.

            2 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 151.

            3 Ib., refers to σιρικοποιός in Neap. inscr. (C. I. G. 5834). In the mod.

Gk. η=ι in pronunciation. Cf. Thumb, Handb. d. neugr. Volkerspr., p. 2.

W.-Sch. (p. 46) mention θήβην, θίβην, θείβην, in Ex. 2:3-6.

            4 Cf. Blass, K.-B1., Tl. I, Bd. I, p. 135.

            5 Perg. Inschr., p. 47. Cf. also p. 56. See numerous exx. of this change in

Meisterh., Gr. d. att. Inschr., p. 47 f.

            6 Cf. Bekker, Anec., I, pp. 9, 22. It is found also in 2 Macc. 8:24. Hort

(Notes on Orth., p. 15) shows that ἄπειρος (not ἄπηρος) is read in Herod.

i. 32.

            7 Prol., p. 46; Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 33. See also Thackeray, p. 83.


               ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                   193

 

papyri here agree. Deissmann1 calls attention to the use of εἰ

μάν in a Doric inscription of the first century B.C. Blass (Gr.

of N. T. Gk., p. 306) observes that a papyrus reads κηρία for κειρία

(cf. Jo. 11:44, κειρ–, κηρ—, κιρ-ίαις).

          ηι and ει.  In the old Attic there was no ηι in writing, only ει,

since η was not used as a vowel. As early as 400 B.C. the Attic used

ηι and ει interchangeably, κλῄω becoming κλείω, κλῄς=κλείς, λῃτουρ-

γός=λειτουργός, etc.2  This usage was not very common in Perga-

mum3 nor in Magnesia.4  Cronert finds this interchange in the

Herculaneum papyri only in the papyri copies of Epicurus and

Polystratus.5  In the N. T λειτουργός, ία, —εῖν, --ικός are taken over

from the Attic, but they occur also in Pergamum6 and Magne-

sia.7  The Attic indeed carried the fondness for ει so far that it

was used always in writing in the second singular indicative middle

everywhere, the other dialects using save the Ionic. The κοινή has

save in βούλει, οἴει, ὄψει.  In the N. T. is universal according to

W. H. save in Lu. 22:42 where βούλει is genuine, though some

MSS. have ει in other passages. Blass8 observes that this is a

literary touch in Luke for the colloquial θέλεις. Hatzidakis9 notes

how difficult this process made it to tell the difference between

ποιήσῃς and ποιήσεις, for instance, because of this Attic intermix-

ture of the diphthongs. Blass10 will not hear of this as a possible

explanation in any cases, but one must remark how well this

vowel-blending harmonized with the kinship in meaning between

the aorist subjunctive and the future indicative (cf. δώσῃ in

some MSS. for δώσει in Jo. 17:2) and made it easy for the

later so-called future subjunctive (cf. Latin) to develop. Winer-

Schmiedel indeed accept as possible this vowel confusion in sev-

eral instances.11  In Mk. 8:35 (Lu. 17:33) ὃς ἂν ἀπολέσει, Lu. 12:8

ὃς ἂν ὁμολογήσει, 2 Cor. 12:21 μὴ ταπεινώσει, Ro. 3:4 (Ps. 51:6)

 

            1 B. S., pp. 205-8. Cf. Dittenb., Syll., No. 388, p. 570. See also Mayser,

Gr., pp. 74-79, for careful discussion.

            2 Meisterh., Gr. d. att. Inschr., pp. 36 ff. Cf. Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., pp. 39

and 49. See also Mayser, Gr., pp. 79 f., 126-131.

            3 Schweizer, Gr. d. perg. Inschr., p. 60 f.

            4 Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 50 f.                      6 Schweizer, op. cit., p. 60.

            5 Mem. Graeca Hercul., p. 37.               7 Nachm., op. cit., p. 51.

            8 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 8. βούλει, οἴει, ὄψει in Ap. Fathers (Goodspeed, Index).

            9 Einl. in d. neugr. Gr., p. 306. He gives exx. from the N. T. Apoc.

            10 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 8.

            11 W.-Sch., p. 47. Moulton (Prol., p. 168) would take indifferently ὑπάγει

or ὑπάγῃ in Rev. 14:4. For many similar exx. in the inscr. see Dittenb.,

ὅπως ἂν ὑπάρχει (117. 17), εἱρέθησαν (352. 66), etc.


194   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

νικήσεις (cf. διακιωθῇς), Ac. 5:15 ἵνα ἐπισκιάσει, 8:31 ἐὰν ὁδηγήσει.

Winer-Schmiedel would find the aorist subjunctive and not the

future indicative. This is possible but by no means certain, since

the future indicative was undoubtedly used both with ἐάν and

ἵνα (ὅπως). W. H. read  Ἰωάνει instead of in Mt. 11:4 = Lu. 7:18.

Τῷ  διοκητεῖ occurs in papyri Brit. Mus. I, Nr. 2. 135. In 2 Coy.

2:9 AB 109 have where εἰ is probably correct.

          η and .  Irrational Iota. The iota subscript was iota adscript

till the twelfth century A.D., but as early as the third century B.C.

it was not pronounced.1 When a was practically equal to η in

sound, it was natural that (ηι) should be. The ι was then dropped

in sound long before it was subscript.2  Gradually it was felt to

be a matter of indifference in some words whether this iota was

written or not. Examples of η instead of occur in the inscrip-

tions of Pergamum3 as ἐν ἦ as well as in the Attic.4  Moulton

finds irrational ι adscript (ἔχωι, for instance) abundant in the

Ptolemaic Tebt. Papyri (Classical Review, 1904, p. 106). Cf.

Mayser (Gr., pp. 122-126) who gives many examples. In the

N. T. ι has dropped from θνήσκω.  Indeed since the second cen-

tury B.C. ι adscript in the diphthongs , , had become mute.

Hort,5 however, argues for the retention of ι in ζῇν6 and infinitives

in —ᾷν instead of the Doric-Attic form, as well as in ἀθῷος, εἰκῇ,

ζῷον,  Ἡρῴδης, κρυφῇ, λάθρᾳ, πανταχῇ πάντῃ, πρῴρα, σῴζω, ὑπερῷον,

ζῷον, though he hesitated to put σῴζω in the text. It is just as

well to finish the discussion of the iota subscript here, though

some of these examples go beyond the range of . The best edi-

tors print also σημοσίᾳ, ἰδίᾳ, μητρολῴαις, πατρολῴαις, πατρῷος, πεζῇ,

Σαμοθρᾴκη, Τρῴας, though μιμνήσκω and πρᾶος. W. H. have forms

in –οῖν also, as κατασκηνοῖν (Mt. 13:32). Moulton7 gives a curious

example of the loss of the irrational ι in the case of the subjunctive

which sometimes in the papyri appears as ἦν, having lost the ι,

and taken on irrational ν.  As a matter of fact iota adscript (iota

 

            1 Blass, Pronun., etc., p. 50.                  2 Hirt, Handb. d. Griech., p. 114.

            3 Schweizer, Gr. d. perg. Inschr., p. 65.

            4 Meisterh., Gr. d. att. Inschr., p. 64. In the iv/n.e. the Attic often

wrote ει for ηι, but not for .  In the Thess., AEol and Ionic inscriptions

the ι with α, η, ω is freely omitted or wrongly inserted (irrational ι), as in

τῆ πόλει, τὰ ὄρῃ, as early as vi/B.C.  Cf. K.-B1., Tl. I, Bd. I, p. 183 f. Strabo

(14. 41) says that many regularly dropped the ι in spurious diphthongs. πολ-

λοὶ γὰρ χωρὶς τοῦ ι γράφουσι τὰς δοτικάς, καὶ ἐκβάλλουσι δὲ τὸ ἔθος φυσικὴν αἰτίαν οὐʽκ ἔχον. Cf. Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 29 f. Schweizer (Perg. Inschr., p. 47)

cites τὴιν εὔνοιαν.                                5 Introd. to N. T. Gk., p. 314.

            6 Mayser, Gr., p. 121, finds no ι with ᾶν in the pap.    7 Prol., pp. 49, 168, 187.


                ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                  195

 

subscript not yet, of course) does not appear in the great uncials

save ἤιδισαν in D (Mk. 1:34) and ξύλωι in Κ (Lu. 23:31).1 Forms

with and without the mute iota appear in the Herculaneum pa-

pyri,2 as εἰκῆι or εἰκῆ.  Blass3 would also restore ι to ἀντιπέρα(ᾳ).

He doubts if ι was written in such new optative forms as δώην

(δοίην Attic) though it should be put in the text.

          η and υ. Since these two vowels came to be pronounced alike

as in modern Greek,4 it was to be expected that some interchange

would come, though any early examples are wanting. However,

by the second century A.D. the inscriptions give many instances

such as θήρα (θύρα), μηστήριον (μυστ.), σκῦπτρον (σκῆπτρον), etc.5  It

is already in the Egyptian κοινή according to Thumb.6 Hence

we are not surprised to see the N. T. MSS. get mixed over ἡμεῖς

and ὑμεῖς.  Especially in 1 Peter does this itacism lead to a mixing

of the historical7 standpoint as in 1:12, where ὑμῖν is read by

אABCL, etc., ἡμῖν by K and most cursives Syrsch Cop. In 1 Pet.

5:10 the MSS. similarly support ὑμᾶς and ἡμᾶς.  In 2 Cor. the

personal relations of Paul and his converts are involved in this

piece of orthography as in 8:7 ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐν ἡμῖν (אCDE, etc.) or

ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν (B 30, 31, 37, etc.). See especially καθ’ ἡμᾶς in Ac.

17:28 (B 33 Cop., etc.) which reading would make Paul identify

himself with the Greeks on this occasion.

          (d) THE CHANGES WITH ι. For ι and ε see under (b); for ι and

η see under (c); for iota subscript (adscript), mute or irrational ι,

see under (c). For irrational iota see also Infinitive under Verb.

The papyri show it in queer forms like ἀληθῆι, λέγωι, P. Oxy. 37

(A.D. 49).

          ι and ει. The interchange between these vowel-symbols began

very early (certainly by the sixth century B.C.8) and has been very

persistent to the present day. The inscriptions give numerous

examples9 in the fifth century B.C., such as ἀποκτινη,  Ἐπαφρόδειτος.

This was apparently the beginning10 of itacism which was extended

to υ, η, and then to ῃ, οι, υι. Jannaris11 thinks that the introduc-

 

            1 Gregory, Prol. (New Test. Gr.), p. 109.

            2 Cronert, Mem. Graec. Hercul., pp. 41 ff.

            3 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 7. The LXX phenomena are similar. Cf. Helbing,

Griech. d. LXX, pp. 3

            4 Hatz., Einl. in neugr. Gr., p. 304.

            5 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 48.                  6 Hellen., p. 171.

            7 Hort, Intr. to Gk. N. T., p. 310. On the subject of η and υ see Mayser,

Gr., p. 85 f. He denies (p. 86) that the itacising pronunciation of η prevailed

in the Ptolemaic period.

            8 Jann., Hist. Gk. Or., p. 47.      9 Ib.                  10 Ib.                 11 Ib., p. 41.


196   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

tion and rapid spread of η contributed to this confusion as by

that time ει was pronounced like ι, and η was taken by many, not

as long ε, but equal to ι. The confusion apparently began in the

Boeotian dialect1 and in postclassical times, but swept the field

in all the dialects till every ει (closed and open) was pronounced

as ι.  By 100 B.C. the Attic inscriptions show a general inter-

change between ει and ι, and in the second century A.D.2 the con-

fusion exists between ει and ι. Dieterich3 thinks that this itacism

had its widest development in Egypt. The Ptolemaic papyri of

ii/B.C. show itacism very frequently. It is only the more illit-

erate scribes that use ει for ι, though B has ὄρειον (Thackeray,

Gr., p. 86 f.). Thumb4 considers the interchange between ι and

ει in the κοινή on a par with that between ο and ω. In Pergamum5

the change from ι to ει is much more common than that from ει

to ι, though forms in –ία for –εία occur, as ἀμελία. The same thing

is true in Magnesia, where ἡμεῖν (ἡμῖν) is common.6  The Hercu-

laneum papyri tell the same story,7 while it is so common in the

Egyptian papyri that Moulton8 is unable to set much store by

the minutiae gathered by W. H. from the great uncials, "for even

W. H. admit that their paramount witness, B, 'has little authority

on behalf of ει as against ι.'" Clearly the partiality of א for ι and

of B for ει throw them both out of court as decisive witnesses on

this point.9  So it is not merely itacism that we have to deal with

in the numerous N. T. examples of exchange between ι and ει,

but "genuine peculiarities of original orthography" also.10 What-

ever Dr. Hort meant, all that is true is that different scribes

merely preferred one or the other method of representing ι. The

whole matter therefore remains in doubt and one is prepared for

all sorts of variations in the N. T. MSS., because the κοινή no

 

            1 K.-B1., p. 131. Mayser (Gr., pp. 87-94) has a full discussion of the prob-

lem in the pap. of the first three centuries B.C. and finds that in Egypt the

pronunciation of ει closely approached that of ι.

            2 Meisterh., Gr. d. att. Inschr., p. 49. In the succeeding pages he gives

numerous exx. in chron. order of the various interchanges between ι and ει,

many of them identical with the N. T. exx.       3 Unters. etc., p. 45.

            4 Hellen., p. 172. The next most common interchange of vowels in the

N. T. MSS. are αι and ε, η and ι or ει, οι and υ (Warfield, Text. Crit. of the

N. T., p. 103).                           5 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 53 f.

            6 Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 35 f. Cf. Egyp. pap. also.

            7 Cronert, Mem. Grace. Hercul., pp. 27 ff.

            8 Prol., p. 47. For the LXX see Helbing, Gr. d. LXX, pp. 7 Thack.

(Gr., p. 86 f.) thinks that the orthography in this point is older than that of

אand A.                                               9 Warfield, Text. Crit. of the N. T., p. 103.

            10 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 152.


                    ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                        197

 

longer insisted in the vernacular on the distinction between long

or short ι and ει. The examples here presented will give a fair

idea of the situation. For the textual evidence see careful dis-

cussion by Gregory.1 Where ει is written for ι it is to be pro-

nounced like ι.  Ει is shortened to ι in some abstract substantives,

--ία instead of –εία, as2   Ἀτταλία, ἁγνία (possibly), perhaps ἀκριβία,

ἀλαζονία, ἀναδία, ἀρεσκία, perhaps ἀπειθία, ἐθελοθρησκία (but θρησκεία),

εἰδωλολατρία (but λατρεία), εἰλικρινία, perhaps ἐκτενία, ἐπιεικία, ἐριθία,

ἑρμηνία, ἱερατία, Καισαρία, κακοηθία, κακοπαθία, κολακία, κυβία, Λαοδικία,

μαγία, μεθοδία, ὀφθαλμοδουλία (δουλία doubtful), possibly παιδία (cf.

Ps. 53:5), πολιτία, πορία, πτωχία, πραγματία, πραϋπαθία, probably

Σαμαρία, Σελευκία, perhaps στρατία, φαρμακία, Φιλαδελφία, ὠφελία.

Deissmann3 shows that it is λογεία, not λογία in the papyri and

so in 1 Cor. 16:1 f. Some MSS. have ἐπάρχεια (for –ια), εὐτρταπέλεια

(for –ια), late MSS. κολωνεία.

          The endings —ειον, and –ειος appear sometimes as –ιον, --ιος. So

αἴγιος,    Ἅριος (Πάγος), ἄστιος, δάνιον (cf. δανίζω, δανιστής), εἰδώλιον,

  Ἐπικούριος, ἐπιτήδιος, μεγάλια (cf. μεγαλιότης), πανδοκίον, στοιχίον.

Strong testimony exists for all these. So also –ινός for —εινός

appears in ὀρινός, σκοτινός, φωτινός.

          Further examples of ι for ει are found as in the MSS. in ἀδιά-

λιπτος, ἀνέκλιπτος, ἀλίφω, ἀπιθέω, ἀπιθής, ἀπιθία, ἀποδεδιγμένος,  Ἄρεοπα-

γίτης, δίγμα, ἐξαλίφω, καταλελιμμένος (Ac. 25:14), even κρίσσων, λίμμα,

λιτουργός, μαργαρίτης (cf. πολίτης, τεχνίτης), μεσίτης, οἰκτίρω, παρα-

διγματίζω, πιθός ὑπόλιμμα, φιλόνικος, φιλονικία, χρεοφιλέτης. This is

not to mention the verb-forms ἴδον, ἴδαν, ἴδεν which W. H. count

alternate forms in Revelation, but which are pure examples of

itacism. In the case of   Ἰκόνιον (Ac. 13:51; 14:1) the inscriptions

give both  Ἰκ. and Εἰκ.4

          εἰ for ι. The use of εἰ for ι is seen in several ways also in N. T. MSS.

In Mt. 28:3 W. H. give εἰδέα, not ἰδέα. Γείνομαι and γεινώσκω are

very common in the best MSS.  Ἡμεῖν and ὑμεῖν are rarely seen,

however.  Ἀξείνη, Γαλειλαία,  Ἐλαμείτης, Λευείτης, Λευειτικός, λείαν,

Νινευείτης, Πειλᾶτος, Σαμαρείτης all are found, as well as τραπεζείτης,

Φαρεισαῖοι.  Τάχειον appears in John and Hebrews. In the Pas-

toral Epistles, Hort5 finds —λειπ— for —λιπ— forms. Κειρίαις is

correct in Jo. 11:44. Hort6 also prefers πανοικεί, but παμπληθεί

is undisputed. Such verb-forms occur as μείγνυμι, τειμάω, τείσω.

 

            1 Prol., pp. 83-90.

            2 According to Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 153.

            3 B. S., pp. 142 f., 219 f.                                    5 Notes on Orth., p. 155.

            4 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 8.               6 Ib., p. 154.


198    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

          Semitic proper names in יhave ει as  Ἀδδεί,   Ἀρνει,  Ἐσλεί,

 Ἠλεί, Μελχεί, Νηρεί.  Cf. also1    Ἀδμεῖν,   Ἀχείμ, βενιαμείν, Δαυείδ,

 Ἐλιακείμ,  Ἰωρείμ,  Κείς,  Λευείς,  Νεφθαλείμ, Σαλείμ, Σεμεείν, χερουβείν,

Χοραζεὶν.  So also  Ἐλεισαβέτ,  Ἠλείας, θυάτειρα,  Ἰάειρος,  Ἰερειχώ,

 Ἰωσείς,  Ὀζείας, Σάπφειρα,  Ταβειθά. Cf. also ἠλεί ῥαββεί ῥαββουνεί,

σαβαχθανεί.  But י appears as ι in  Ἀμιναδάβ, Μελχισεδέκ,  Σινά, Σιών.

Likewise the MSS. usually read  Ἀνανίας, Βαραχίας,  Ἐζεκίας, Ζαχα-

ρίας,  Ἰερεμίας,  Ἰερχονίας,  Μαθθίας,  Ματταθίας,  Οὐρίας.

          In many of these examples of changes in ι and ει the testimony

is greatly divided and one must not stickle too much for either

spelling. The papyri and the inscriptions have nearly all of

them. See 1 (c) for remarks on the difficulty of relying on the

uncials in the matter of orthography. It is impossible to be dog-

matic on the subject.

          ι. and ο.  It is a peculiar change, as Blass2 observes, that we

have in ὀμειρόμενοι for ἱμειρόμενοι (1 Th. 2:8). It appears in the

LXX (some MSS. for Job 3:21 and Symm. at Ps. 62:2). The

only example so far brought to light is ὑπερομείρεσθαι in Iren. 60.

Winer-Schmiedel3 sees no comparison in καταντροκύ for καταντικρύ.

Meisterhans4 gives ἀπαντροκύ for ἀπαντικρύ.

          ι and οι.  Jannaris5 defends the exchange of ι and οι possibly as

early as the fifth century B.C. Certainly in the first century B.C.

Αὐγουστοῖνος occurs in the inscriptions.6  Οι was exchanged with

ει and as well as with ι.  In the N. T. the only example is in

Mk. 11:8 where ACSVTXΓ Or. have στοιβάς for the usual στιβάς

(from στείβω).  N and a few other MSS. read στυβάς. Zonar.

illustrates this also by using στοιβάς. Cf. also στοιβή, στοιβάζω,

etc. This word thus illustrates well the common itacistic ten-

dency, showing forms in –ι, –οι, –υ and —ει (in the verb). The

LXX has only στίχος and στιχίζω, not στοιχ. (Thackeray, Gr.,

p. 92).

          ι and υ.  These two vowels sometimes have the force of the

consonants7 j (y) and υ (cf. Latin). Cf. αυ– (af) and ευ-- (ef) in

modern Greek, and ε in πόλεως.  In modern Greek "every ι- or

e-sound which collides in the middle of a word with a succeeding

 

            1 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 155.

            2 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 22. But it is quite possible (see j) that this is a case

of prothetic o.

            3 W.-Sch., p. 52.                                   4 Gr. d. att. Inschr., p. 81.

            5 Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 53. Cf. on the other side K.-BI., I, 3, p. 53.

            6 Jann., ib., p. 52. Cf. Mayser, Gr., p. 112.

            7 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., pp. 27, 55, etc.


                    ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                  199

 

vowel, loses its syllabic value and becomes consonanted" (Thumb,

Handb., p. 10).  So ἅγιος = ayos.  The ι is the last of the five

original vowel-sounds in this order: α, ο, υ, ε, ι. This relative value

has persisted in modern Greek (Thumb's Handbook, p. 12 f.).

Jannaris1 gives ἀπωθούμενοι as an illustration of this gradation in

sound. But as a matter of fact the interchange between ι and υ

is not frequent. Meisterhans2 finds only five examples in the

Attic inscriptions, two of which, βυβλιον and Μιτυληναῖος, are found

in N. T. MSS. (assimilation). Examples occur in the κοινή of Asia

Minor, though Thumb3 agrees with Kretschmer in calling it a

"barbarism." Still the old distinction in sound between ι and υ

slowly broke down till in modern Greek the two vowels have the

same sound. βήρυλλος in Rev. 21:20 is spelled also in MSS. βή-

ριλλος, βύριλλος, βιρύλλιος, a fine illustration of itacism. D reads

βύβλος for βίβλος in Mk. 12:26 and Lu. 20:42: In Ac. 20:14

Μιτυλήνη is the correct text for the old Μ<υτ., but AE have Μιτυ-

λίνη and L Μυτυλίνη.  For the Τρωγίλιον of Strabo and the By-

zantine writers the Textus Receptus addition to Ac. 20:15 has

Τρωγυλία, other MSS. Τρωγύλλιον, Τρωγύλιον.4 The LXX shows

also ἥμυσυ in θ Dan. 7:25 (13). The Ptolemaic papyri vary in

this word (Thackeray, Gr., p. 95). In Lu. 19:8 D has ἥμυσοι.

          (e) THE CHANGES WITH ο. For changes with α see under (a),

for ο and ε under (b), for o and ι under (d).

          o and ου. The old Attic used Διόσκορος, which Phrynichus5 pre-

fers, though Thucyd. and Plato have the form in –ουρος also (Epic

or Ionic). In Ac. 28:11 only some of the cursives have the form

in –ορος. Both forms appear in the inscriptions.6 This exchange

is rather common in the Ptolemaic papyri (Mayser, Gr., pp. 10 f.,

116 f.). In the LXX א shows sometimes ὀκ for οὐκ (Thackeray,

Gr., p. 91). The modern Greek dialects have much diversity of

usage on this point. Cf. Thumb, Handb., p. 8.

 

            1 Ib., p. 84.                               2 Gr. d. att. Inschr., p. 28 f.

            3 Hellen., pp. 139, 193 ff. Cf. Kretschmer, Einl. in d. Gesch. d. griech.

Spr., p. 225 f. Cronert (Mem. Grace. Hercul., p. 21 f.) gives exx. in Hercul.

pap. Cf. Mayser, Gr., pp. 100-103, for exx. like βύβλος, βυβλίον, etc., in the pap.

            4 Cf. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 22. In Athens before 403 B.C. o stood for

ο, ω, ου (Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 24).

            5 Lobeck, p. 235; The New. Phryn., p. 310. Cf. K.-BI., I, p. 140 f., for this

change in Old Attic and New Ionic. The N. T. Apoc. (Reinhold, De Graec.

etc., p. 41) has exx. like ἐβολὸμην as the mod. Gk. vernac. (Thumb, Neugr.

Volksspr., p. 6). Cf. Buresch, Phil. li, 89. Most common bet. vi/iii B.C. acc.

to Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 37.

            6 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 66 f.


200     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

          o and υ.  The MSS. vary between1 πρᾶος (Syrian) and πραΰς in

Mt. 11:29; 1 Pet. 3:4, as well as between πραότης and πραΰτης

Pauline Epistles. W. H. adopt the form in –υ. Von Soden varies

between these forms, giving no reasons. It is the old distinction  

surviving in the κοινή. The LXX has the υ form. The papyri

have other illustrations (Mayser, Gr., p. 97). Cf.  Ποτίολοι in Ac.

28:13 for the Latin Puteoli.

          o and ω.  Originally o represented both the short and long noun

so that it was easy with careless pronunciation for more or less con-

fusion to exist after ω came into use. The Boeotian Pindar, for

instance, has Διώνυσος instead of Διόνυσος.2 The New Ionic ζόη

(parox.) appears in lieu of ζωή.  However, the introduction of the

Ionic alphabet in 403 B.C. kept the two vowels pretty distinct

in Attic till the Roman time, though the change began in the

third century B.C.3 After the second century B.C. the exchange

of these two vowels was indiscriminate in the more illiterate

vernacular.4 The confusion was earliest in Egypt, but the Attic

inscriptions kept the distinction well till 100 A.D. The early un-

cials for the LXX and the N.T. show little evidence of the inter-

change (Thackeray, Gr., p. 89). Jannaris finds it common. The

modern Greek makes no difference in sound between o and ω ex-

cept medial o as in not.  "In the early papyri the instances of

confusion between o and ω are innumerable."5 The inscriptions

tell the same story about the κοινή in Magnesia6 and Pergamum.7

In some instances,8 like δόμα for δῶμα and πρόδομα an ω is shortened

to o after the analogy of ε from η in θέμα.  In the N. T. MSS.

"probably the commonest permutation is that of o and ω, chiefly

exemplified in the endings —ομεν, and –ωμεν."9 It is useless to fol-

low the MSS. through their variations on this point. In Ro.

5:1 ἔχωμεν is supported by all the best documents and gives a

difficult sense at first, though a better one on reflection than

ἔχομεν.  In 1 Cor. 15:49 the evidence is so nearly balanced that

 

            1 Gregory, Prol., p. 82.                          2 K.-B1., I, p. 141.

            3 Meisterh., Gr. d. att. Inschr., p. 24 f., gives numerous exx. of the exchange

in inscr. of various dates.

            4 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 37. Jann. quotes a Louvre pap. (165 B.C.) which

has το͂ αὐτο͂ τρόπωι. Mayser (Gr., pp. 97 ff.) finds only two exx. of this confusion

of o and ω in the Ptol. pap. of iii/B.C., but seventy in the next two.

            5 Ib. Cf. Cronert, Mem. Graec. Hercul., p. 19 f.

            6 Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 64.

            7 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 95. Cf. Thumb, Hellen., pp. 143, 172.

            8 Reinhold, De Graec. Patr., p. 41, and Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1904, p. 108.

            9 Hort, Intr. to Gk. N. T., p. 309.


                 ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                             201

 

W. H. cannot decide between φορέσωμεν and φορέσομεν (the latter

in the margin). Von Soden gives –σω–. This difficulty of dis-

tinguishing between o and ω in the indicative and subjunctive

increased in later κοινή times.1 Several further N. T. examples of

interest are ἀγοράσωμεν (Lu. 9:13), is ἵνα ἀναπαήσονται (Rev. 14:13),

ἵνα ἀναπαύσονται, (Rev. 6:11), ἐὰν ἀποθνήσκομεν as read by Lachmann

(Ro. 14:8), ἵνα γινώσκομεν (1 Jo. 5:20), ἵνα διώκονται according to

Tisch. (Gal. 6:12), ἵνα διέρχομαι according to Treg. (Jo. 4:15),

δώσωμεν according to Treg. and Tisch., and preceded by ἀγορά-

σωμεν (Mk. 6:37), ἰάσομαι (Mt. 13:15; cf. Is. 6:10), ἵνα καυθήσωμαι

or καυχήσωμαι (1 Cor. 13:3), ἵνα ξυρήσονται (Ac. 21:24). In all

these instances syntactical questions enter also besides the mere

question of vowel interchange.2

          ω and ο.  The o appears instead of ω in πόμα (1 Cor. 10:4; Heb. 9:10),

πρόϊμος (Jas. 5:7), Στοϊκός (Ac. 17:18),3 συκομορέα, not μωρέα (Lu.

19:4), χρεοφιλέτης according to W. H. and not χρεοφειλέτης (Soden)

nor χρεωφειλέτης according to LU, etc. (Lu. 7:41; 16:5). But ω is

correct apparently in ἀγαθωσύνη, ἁγιωσύνη, ἐνδώμησις (Rev. 21:18,

Soden —δόμ--), ἱερωσύνη, μεγαλωσύνη, πρωϊνός. So also the LXX, but

πρόϊμος (Thack., Gr., p. 90). Codex B shows others in the LXX

(ib.). In Lu. 18:5 and 1 Cor. 9:27 the MSS. vary between

ὑπωπιάζω (from ὑπ-ώπιον) and ὑποπιάζω (--πείζω old form), though

the best MSS. read ὑπωπ.4  In Ro. 13:3 τῷ ἀγαθῷ ἔργῳ may

possibly be τῷ ἀγαθοεργῷ.  So in 2 Pet. 3:6. δι’ ὧν may be5 for

δι’ ὅν.  In Rev. 4:7 f. ἔχων, not ἔχον (Soden), is read by the best

MSS., though the substantive is ζῷον. Now second century B.C.

papyri have ὑπόμνημα ἔχων where ω and o are exchanged.6

          (f) THE CHANGES WITH υ.  For the changes with υ and ι see

under (d), υ and o under (e).

          υ and ευ. Only one example of this exchange appears in the

N. T., that of πρεσβύτης in Phil. 9. Here the sense seems to

demand πρεσβευτής. Bentley suggested it long ago and Lightfoot

(comm. in loco) collected a number of instances of the omission

 

            1 Cf. Reinhold, De Graec. Patr., p. 102; Hatz., Einl. etc., p. 306.

            2 W.-Sch., p. 48.

            3 Hort thinks so "perhaps." The Doric had στοιά. Blass (Gr. N. T. Gk.,

p. 22) prefers the correct Στωϊκός, Von Soden Στοϊκός

            4 Acc. to W.-Sch. (p. 48 f.) this is not orthographical at all, but etymolog-

ical. Why not both?

            5 Ib., p. 48.

            6 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 37. Doubtless other vowel-exchanges in Rev.

may have a similar explanation and so do not violate concord of gender.


202     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

of ε from ευ, in single MSS.  Hort1 thinks it due to a scribe and

not to Paul, since the earlier Greek shows no examples of this

interchange. However, Wood2 has found  πρεσβεύτερος for πρεσβύ-

τερος in an Ephesian inscription (analogy: in modern Greek

ευ=ef). Thackeray (Gr., p. 97) finds this "natural error" in the

LXX MSS.

          υ and ου. This has always been a rare exchange in the Greek,

the Boeotian dialect having retained the original υ sound of υ

after the Attic gave it up.3 The Zaconian preserves it in the

modern Greek.4  The κοινή has sometimes χρουσός for χρυσός.5  But

ου was rather frequent in the κοινή to represent the Latin u as

Δροῦσος.6  In Rev. 3:18 the MSS. have κολλούριον, κολλύριον, κουλ-

λούριον, etc. (Latin collyrium). W. H. prefer κολλούριον, though

אBC read –ύριον (so Soden).—Blass7 observes that we have long

υύριον.  B in the LXX shows the same variations (Thack.,

Gr., p. 92). The Ptolemaic papyri have few instances. Cf. change

of υ and ου (Mayser, Gr., p. 118). Thumb (Hellen., p. 193 f.) thinks

that υ in the κοινή was pronounced like German u*, i and also u.

In Rev. 1:5 the distinction between λύσαντι (אAC) and λούσαντι  

(BP) is more than mere orthography, though the confusion was

rendered easy. ΥΙ  is always so written in the N. T. uncial MSS.,8

though the iota was sometimes dropped in, the inscriptions.

          (g) THE CHANGES WITH ω. For changes with ω and α see under

(a), for ω and o under (e).

          ω and ου. The Thessalian dialect9 changed ω to ου as in τοῦ

κοινοῦ for τῶ κοινῶ. This change reappears in Rhodes and the

AEolic-Doric.10  Buresch11 finds the change between ω and ου

common in the Egyptian vernacular, as in the Sahidic dialect oo

is often used for ω.12  It is, of course, possible, according to the

view of Winer-Schmiedel,13 that some indicatives in ου may really

 

            1 Notes on Sel. Read., p. 136.                2 Disc. at Ephesus, App., p. 24.

            3 Thumb, Hellen., p. 31. Cf. Brug., Griech. Gr., 4th ed., p. 32 f.

            4 Hatz., Einl. etc., p. 103.                      5 Thumb, Hellen., p. 85.

            6 Cf. Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 62. Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 71 f.

            7 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 22. Cf. Mayser, Gr., p. 118.

            8 Cf. Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 46 f.; Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 9 f., ob-

serves that B occasionally divides thus ὑ/ιός at end of a line and so practically

A and D.

            9 K.-B1., p. 135. Common in mod. Gk. (Thumb, Handb., p. 8).

            10 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 70 f.

            11 Jahrb. f. klass. Philol., 1891, p. 434.   12 Tattam's Egyp. Gr., p. 5.

            13 P. 52. Reinhold (De Graec. Patr. Apost., p. 41) gives similar exx.  Συνκυ-

ρῶντα a appears in Egyp. pap. (B. M., vol. II, cliv). Cf. Mayser, Gr., p. 99 f.


               ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                203

 

be subjunctive as a result of this vowel-interchange. The con-

tract form for the present participle τῷ νικοῦντι is read by AC in

Rev. 2:17 and A in 2:7, a change more likely due to confu-

sion of άω and –έω verbs. So with ἵνα ζηλοῦτε (Gal. 4:17) and

ἵνα φυσιοῦσθε (1 Cor. 4:6), but the present indicative can be used

with ἵνα, and one is slow to credit this form to a mere vowel-

exchange. The same remark applies to ἵνα τρέφουσιν (W. H. marg.

Rev. 12:6) as well as ἵνα γινώσκουσιν (Tisch. and Treg., Jo. 17:3)

and ἵνα σωφρονίζουσιν (Tisch. and Treg., Tit. 2:4). The future

indicative with ἵνα as καταδουλώσουσιν (Gal. 2:4), προσκυνήσουσιν

(Rev. 9:20), σταυρώσουσιν (Tisch., Treg., Lach., Mk. 15:20),

σφάξουσιν (Rev. 6:4) has rival readings with ω, aorist subjunctive.

It is hardly mere vocal similarity. Similar instances are μήποτε

καταπατήσουσιν (Mt. 7:6), ἐὰν μετανοήσουσιν (Rev. 2:22), ᾧ ἐάν δου-

λεύσουσιν (Ac. 7:7). In these and similar examples where the

MSS. vary between ω and ου it is probable that, as with η and ε, ο

and ω, the difference in mode may have been blurred by the ten-

dency to exchange these vowels. But the syntactical question is

not essentially altered by this incidental orthographical problem.

            ω and ωϋ.  Lachmann, Tregelles, W. H. all write ωυ in Μωυσῆς,

but Thayer urges that the word is a trisyllable Μωϋσῆς (Fritzsche,

Gesenius, Tisch., Soden). The Ionic ἑωυτοῦ is a trisyllable. Cf.

Mayser, Gr., p. 138. Blass1 indeed says that the diphthong ωυ

is non-existent in the N. T. as in the Attic. The Text. Rec.

reads Μωσῆς, following Strabo and Josephus in the Antiquities,

though in the LXX and Josephus elsewhere we have Μωϋσῆς.

          (h) CONTRACTION AND SYNCOPE. In general the κοινή uses

contraction of vowels from the standpoint of the Attic,2 though a

strong Ionic infusion3 is present also as in forms like χειλέων, ὀρέων,

etc. The N. T. examples of unusual contraction find illustration4

in the κοινή. In the N. T. contraction is rarely neglected, as

Winer saw, though ἐδέετο (אC for Lu. 8:38, though BL 33 read

ἐʽδεῖτο), νοΐ (1 Cor. 1 : 10, etc.), ὀστέα (Lu. 24:39), ὀστέων (Mt.

23:27, etc.), ὀρέων (Rev. 6:15, Attic as well as Ionic), χειλέων

(Heb. 13:15), χρυσέων (Rev. 2:1, Lach., Treg.) show that the

N. T. in this respect was like the κοινή and not the literary Attic.

Blass5 observes that the N. T. Greek did not go quite as far in

 

            1 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 10.                       2 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 100.

            3 Thumb, Hellen., p. 237. Cf. also ib., p. 63. For the mod. Gk. contrac-

tion see p. 249. Cf. K.-B1., Bd. I, pp. 201-218.

            4 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., pp. 100 ff.; Nachm., Magn. Inschr., pp. 68 ff.

            5 W.-Th., p. 46; W.-M., p. 51.   6 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 22 f.


204       A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

contracting vowels as the Attic did. In illustration can be men-

tioned ἀγαθοεργεῖν (1 Tim. 6:18), though ἀγαθουργῶν is the cor-

rect text in Ac. 14:17. But we have ἀμπελουργός, ἱερουργεῖν,

κακοῦργος, οἰκουργός, πανοῦργος, not to mention the conjectural read-

ing ἀγαθοεργός for Ro. 13:3 on the other hand. In Col. 2:16

νεομηνία for the Attic νουμηνία is read by W. H., though supported

only by BFG 121 f g vg.  So the LXX (Thack., Gr., p. 98). In

the case of ἐλεινός  W. H. have the regular form in Rev. 3:17, but

ἐλεεινός in 1 Cor. 15:19.  Blass1 reminds us, however, that even

ἐλεινός may represent ἐλεϊνός. The N. T. likewise has νοσσός in Lu.

2:24 (like the LXX) and νοσσία (or νοσσιά) in Lu. 13:34; Mt. 23:

37.  Phrynichus2 condemned this dropping of ε in νεοσσός. Καμμύω

(Mt. 13:15; Ac. 28:27, both from Is. 6:10) comes from the Epic

and the old vernacular. Κατ was an old form parallel with Κατά.

          There are several noteworthy points about ι.  The ι is retained

in ἀλλοτριεπίσκοπος (1 Pet. 4:15). The same thing is true with

ἡμίωρον (Rev. 8:1), like ἡμιώβολον in the Attic inscriptions.3 The

form ἔστων in Mk. 1:6 (already in Homer) is a twin rather than

a syncopated form of ἐσθίων (Mt. 11:19).4  In the N. T. the ι

is not dropped in such forms as βιώσεσθε, ἐνύπνιον, σιωπᾶν, υἱός.

Blass5 calls the contraction of ιει=ii=ι "an entirely new kind,"

though it appears in the κοινή, as in ἐπεικῶς, ταμεῖον, ὑγεῖα, etc.6

When ει came to be equal to ι, the two sounds naturally blended

into one. Cf. the Ionic dative πόλι for πόλιι.  So in the N. T. we

find πεῖν (BCD), even πῖν (אAL) for πιεῖν in Jo. 4:9, and else-

where in the N. T. In Mt. 6:6, etc., ταμεῖον is read for ταμεῖον.7

On the other hand in Rev. 21:20 A reads σαρδιόνυξ for σαρδόνυξ.

W. H. read τετρααρχέω, τετραάρχης rather than τετραρχέω, etc. The

use of γλωσσόκομον instead of the earlier γλωσσοκόμειον (—ιον) should

be noticed also. For the use of ἐάν = modal ἄν see under (b), p. 190.

          (i) DIPHTHONGS AND DIAERESIS. The Boeotians monoph-

thongized the diphthongs αι, ει, οι, ου in the fourth and fifth

 

            1 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 23.

            2 Rutherford, New Phryn., p. 287. For other syncopated forms in the

LXX see Thack., Gr., p. 99.

            3 Meisterh., Gr. etc., p. 23.                    4 Hort., Notes on Orth., p. 145.

            5 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 23. Omitted by Debrunner.

            6 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 101. Cf. Dittenb., Or. Graec. Inscr. Sel.,

ἐπεικῶς (565. 19), ταμεῖον, (515. 26 ff.), ὑγείας (618. 2). For the same phenomena

in the LXX see Helbing, Gr. d. LXX, p. 10 f.

            7 See Deiss., B. S., p. 183, for pap. illustrations of πεῖν, πῖν, ταμεῖον. Moul-

ton, Prol., p. 45, calls this coalescence of two successive ι sounds "a universal

law of Hellenistic phonology." Cf, for the LXX Thack., Gr., pp. 22, 63 f., 98.


                 ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                205

 

centuries B.C.1  The Boeotians pronounced χαίρει=cheri as the

vernacular κοινή did. Thumb (Hellenismus, p. 228) objects to "this

emphasizing of Boeotian" by Kretschmer (Die griech. Vasenin-

schriften; Einleit. in d. Gesch.). Moulton (Prolegomena, p. 33 f.)

allows this Boeotian influence on the κοινή with a "perhaps." The

itacising process still further developed this use of the diphthongs

as monophthongs. Indeed Jannaris2 insists that the term δίφθογ-

γος as applied to συλλαβή concerned the eye rather than the ear

and meant more biliteral than bivocal. The spurious diphthongs

show the process in a state of completion. The papyri, unlike the

inscriptions, do not dissect a diphthong at the close of a line.3

Where two vowels do not blend into one syllable, it is necessary

to indicate it. Hence from very early times marks of diaeresis

were used to show that each vowel has its own sound. The mark

is put over the ι or υ which might otherwise be considered to

unite with the preceding vowel. These marks are found in the

oldest N. T. MSS. with such words as ἁλληλούϊα, (Rev. 19:1;

but in the case of proper names transliterated from the Hebrew

or Aramaic W. H. follow the Hebrew or Aramaic spelling.

Cf. Hort, Intr., p. 313. So in other examples below),  Ἀχαΐα,

 Ἀχαϊκός (1 Cor. 16:17), Βηθσαϊδά, Γάϊος (also Γαῖος in Ac. 20:4,

etc., but cf. Allen, Harvard Studies in Class. Philol., ii, 1891, pp.

71 ff.), διϋλίζειν (Mt. 23:24),  Ἐβραϊτί, ἐλωΐ (Mk. 15:34),  Ἐφ-

ραίμ, however, or  Ἐφρέμ (אL in Jo. 11:54),  Ἠσαΐας, though B usu-

ally without,4   Ἰουδαϊκῶς, ἰσχΰι (2 Pet. 2:11), Καϊάφας, Κάϊν (W. H.

Καίν), so W. H. Καινάν (not Καϊνάν nor —άμ), Λευείτης and not Λευΐτης

in W. H.,  Λωΐς (W. H. –ίς), Μωυσῆς in W. H., not Μωϋσῆς, Νινευείτης

and not Νινευΐτης, πρόϊμος according to W. H., but πρωί, πρωινός.

W. H. have Πτολεμαΐδα in Ac. 21:7 and  Ῥωμαϊστί in Jo. 19:20.

D reads Χοραζαΐν. The Semitic etymology complicates the matter

with some of these words.5 Many of the MSS. use diaeresis at

the beginning of words as in ΐνα.6  אA regularly write ηϋ, while

ωϋ is correct also.7  See Giles8 on the subject of diphthongs. For

iota subscript see under (c).

          (j) APHAERESIS AND PROTHETIC VOWELS. θέλω, not ἐθέλω, is the

only form in the N. T., as it is the common form in the κοινή and

is that used in modern Greek. It is as old as Homer, and since

 

            1 Hatz., Einl. etc., p. 304. Cf. K.-BI., Bd. I, pp. 243 ff.

            2 Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 29.                3 Ib., p. 43. Cf. Mayser, Gr., p. 153 f.

            4 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 17. So  Ἰεσσαί.

            5 Ib. Cf. W.-Sch., p. 34.             7 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 10.

            6 Gregory, Prol. etc., p. 108.       8 Comp. Philol., pp. 158 ff.


206    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

250 B.C. is the only form in the Attic1 and Ionic2 inscriptions.

The augment, however, is always η. Cronert3 finds ἐθέλω after

consonants. The κοινή does not follow the Ionic in the use of

κεῖνος for ἐκεῖνος. Aphaeresis is frequent4 in the modern Greek

vernacular, κεῖ and ἐκεῖ, δέν for οὐδέν, etc. But the N. T. has

only ἐχθές (so LXX) in the best MSS. (cf. Jo. 4:52 אABCD;

Ac. 7:28 אBCD; Heb. 13:8 אACD), the usual Attic form,

though the papyri sometimes have χθές instead of the common

ἐχθές. The N. T. does not have δύρομαι, κέλλω, μείρομαι, where

o is dropped.  Cf. Kuhner-Blass, Tl. I, Bd. 1, p. 186. The form

μείρομαι (cf. ὀμειρόμενοι, in 1 Th. 2:8) occurs in Nicander for

ἱμείρομαι. It is possible that in ὀ(ὁ)μείρομαι we have prothetic o

instead of apharesis. Cf. Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 152; Winer-

Schmiedel, p. 141. See Additional Notes for full list.

          (k) ELISION. Besides the use of the movable final ν and ς the

Greeks had two other methods of obviating hiatus (elision, cra-

sis). The hiatus was distasteful to the finished writers, though

more freedom was exercised in poetry. The avoidance of hiatus

was always a more or less artificial matter and hiatus was un-

avoidable in the most careful Attic writers, as in the case of ὅτι,

περί, πρό, τί τι, the article, relative, the small "form-words" (καί,

εἰ, μή), etc. But the harsher hiatus like ἐδίδοτο αὐτῷ would be

avoided by the literary κοινή writers as well as by the Atticists.

The inscriptions and the papyri show far less concern about hia-

tus than do the literary writers of the κοινή. As might be expected

the N. T. books agree in this matter with the vernacular κοινή

and the MSS. vary greatly among themselves. Blass5 considers

this situation in harmony with the tendency to greater isolation

of the words in the later language. Indeed he thinks that only

one6 book in the N. T. (Hebrews) shows the care of an artistic

writer in the avoidance of hiatus. By omitting the 0. T. quota-

tions and chapter 13 he finds that hiatus where there is a pause

is a matter of indifference, as also with καί. He finds fifty-two

other instances of hiatus, whereas Romans goes beyond that num-

 

            1 Meisterh., Gr., p. ,178.

            2 Smyth, Ionic Dial., p. 482. Cf. Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 155.

            3 Mem. Graec. Hercul., p. 133 f.

            4 Cf. Thumb, Handb., p. 13.

            5 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 18. Cf. on hiatus K.-B1., I, pp. 190 ff.

            6 Ib., p. 296 f. On indifference of later Gk. to hiatus see Bischoff, Neut.

Wiss., 1906, p. 268; Thieme, ib., p. 265. Moulton (Prol., p. 92) quotes Kaelker

(Qumst., p. 245 f.) as saying that Polyb. uses ὅστις for ὅς merely to avoid

hiatus. Cf. Mayser, Gr., p. 160.


              ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                                207

 

ber as far as ch. 4:18. But even then Blass has to admit cases

of harsher hiatus in Hebrews, like ἀδελφοὶ ἅγιοι, ἔνοχοι ἦσαν, etc.

          The Attic inscriptions show that the vernacular tongue did not

care much about hiatus.1 The lighter elisions like δ’ were used or

not at will, while the heavier ones like δίκαι’ ὅπως were rare. The

same indifference to elision appears in the κοινή inscriptions2 and

in the papyri.3  In general in the N. T. elision takes place regu-

larly before pronouns and particles and before nouns in combina-

tions of frequent occurrence4 like κατʼ οἶκον.  Blass5 has carefully

worked out the following facts in the N. T. MSS. Τε, οὖτε, μήτε,

ἅμα, ἄρα, γε, ἐμέ ἔτι, ἵνα, ὥστε, etc., do not undergo elision nor do

noun- or verb-forms . The verse of Menander quoted in 1 Cor.

15:33 is properly printed χρηστὰ  ὁμιλίαι  by W. H.6 Even the

compound words τεσσερακονταετής (Ac. 7:23) and ἑκατονταετής

(Ro. 4:19) do not suffer elision, while τετρα-άρχης has no eli-

sion in אCΔ (Alexandrian, Hort).  Τοῦτ’ ἔστι or τουτέστι is the only

example in the pronouns that we have in the N. T.7 It is in the

particles then that most N. T. elisions occur, though there are

comparatively few.  Ἀλλά, according to Gregory,8  has elision in

215 cases and fails to have it in 130, though the MSS. vary much.

Hort9 observes that in ἀλλά elision is usual before articles, pro-

nouns and particles, but rare before nouns and verbs. Ro. 6:

14-8:32 has many non-elisions of ἀλλά, and the elision varies be-

fore the different vowels except that it is constant before 

rarely suffers elision outside of ὅς δ’ ἄν, but here frequently, while

W. H. read δὲ αὐτό in Ph. 2:18 after אBP. In 2 Cor. 3:16

W. H. put ἡνίκα δ’ ἄν in the margin, text ἡν. δὲ ἐάν (so Tisch,

Nestle). In οὐδέ elision takes place several times, as in οὐδ’ ἄν

(Heb. 8:4), οὐδ’ εἰ (Ac. 19:2, אAB), οὐδ’ ἵνα (Heb. 9:25), οὐδ’

ὅτι (Ro. 9:7), οὐδ’ οὐ (Mt. 24:21; Heb. 13:5), οὐδ’ οὕτως (1 Cor.

14:21). Blass10 further notes that prepositions seldom use elision

 

            1 Meisterh., Att. Inschr., p. 69 f.

            2 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 134; Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 71 f.

            3 Cronert, Mem. Graec. Hercul., p. 138 f. Cf. also Thumb, Hellen. etc.,

p. 82.                                                                4 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 146.

            5 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 18. Cf. also Gregory, p. 93 f.

            6 Moulton (Cl. Rev., Feb. 31, 1901) finds that the pap. like the Lat. have

a vowel not used in the metre. The inscr. concur in this practice. Moulton,

Prol., p. 45. Cf. also Mayser, Gr., pp. 155-158, 160-162. He shows that in

the pap. it is largely a matter of indifference. On the scarcity of elision in the

LXX see Helbing, Gr. d. LXX, p. 12 f.; Thackeray, pp. 22, 136 f.

            7 Blass (Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 306) refers to the Oxyrhynchus pap., which

have τοῦτ εἰπών in Jo. 20:22                8 Prol., p. 93 f.

            9 Notes, p. 146.                         10 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 18.


208    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

with proper names, since it was thought better, as on the in-

scriptions, to keep the name distinct and readily discernible,

though W. H. read δι’   Ἀβραάμ in Heb. 7:9. Elision is most

common with διά as δι’ ἐσόπτρου (1 Cor. 13:12), "because there

were already two vowels adjacent to each other" Blass1 thinks.

 Ἀντί has elision only in ἀνθ’ ὧν (Lu. 1:20, etc.). Elsewhere the

prepositions show elision with pronouns and in current phrases,

as in ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς, ἀπ’ἄρτι, ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ, ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ, ἐπ’ αὐτῷ, κατ’ ἐμέ, κατ’

ἰδίαν (καθ’ ἱδίαν), κατ’ οἶκον, μετ’ ἐμοῦ, παρ’ ὧν, ὑφ’ ἡμῶν’  (ὑμῶν), ὑπ’

οὐδενός (1 Cor. 2:15).2 So the LXX (Thackeray, Gr., p. 137).

          (l) CRASIS. The Attic official inscriptions make little use of

crasis, though it is fairly common in the vase-inscriptions of the

fifth century B.C.3 In Magnesia Nachmanson finds only a few

examples of καί and the article.4 The same thing is true of Per-

gamum.5 In the N. T. it is confined also to καί and the article.

And in the case of καί crasis only occurs if the following word is

a pronoun or a particle.  Καί thus often, though not always,

coalesces with ἐγώ and the oblique cases, as κἀγώ, κἀμοί, κἀμέ. If

there is a "distinct co-ordination of ἐγὼ with another pronoun or

a substantive," crasis does not take place.6  Even the MSS. vary

greatly.7  Κἀκεῖνος also is found as well as κἀκεῖ and κἀκεῖθεν.  Καί

likewise blends only occasionally with ἐάν in the sense of 'and if,'

as in Mk. 16:18; Lu. 13:9; Jas. 5:15. In the sense of 'even

if’ the crasis is more common, as in Mt. 26:35; Jo. 8:14. In

the sense of 'if it be but' or 'if only' the crasis is uniform as in

Mk. 5:28; 6:56; 2 Cor. 11:16.8 Cf. κἄν--καὶ ἐάν (Jo. 8:14,

16). The article suffers crasis very often in the older Greek, but

in the N. T. it is seldom so. Hort 9 declines to accent ταὐτά for

ταῦτα in 1 Cor. 9:8 or ταὐτά for τὰ αὐτά in Lu. 6:23, 26; 17:30,

though supported in Luke by some good MSS. He does, how-

ever, accept τοὔνομα in Mt. 27:57 and τοὐναντίον in 2 Cor. 2:7;

Gal. 2:7; 1 Pet. 3:9 ("stereotyped as a single word," Blass10).

Crasis is quite rare in the LXX (Thackeray, Gr., p. 137).

 

            1 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 18. See Additional Notes.

            2 For more minute details about the prep. see Gregory, Prol., pp. 94 ff.

            3 Meisterh., Att. Inschr., pp. 70 ff.                     4 Magn. Inschr., p. 74.

            5 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 133. Cf. Mayser, Gr., pp. 158 ff., for the

common pap. exx. like κἀγώ, τἀληθές, etc.      6 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 145.

            7 See Gregory, Prol., p. 96; Von Soden, I, p. 1380.

            8 See Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 18, and W.-Sch., p. 38; Von Soden, I, p. 1380.

Blass gives κἀπεθύμει from D (Lu. 15:16).                   9 Notes on Orth., p. 145.

            10 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 19. For scarcity in LXX see Helbing, Gr. d. LXX,

p. 13 f.


                ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                209

 

          III. Consonant-Changes (στοιχεῖα σύμφωνα). The Greek, like

other Indo-Germanic tongues, wrote out both vowels and con-

sonants save in the case of iota adscript, which was not always

used. But, as with the Phoenician and Hebrew, which wrote only

consonants, the consonants form the backbone of the language.

Both consonants and vowels are originally pictographic. "Beth"

(βῆτα) is 'house,' "gimul" (γάμμα) is 'camel,' "daleth" (δέλτα) is

'door,' etc.1  The Greek indeed developed the vowels α, ε, ι, ο out

of the Phoenician consonants aleph, he, yod, ayin.2

          (a) ORIGIN AND CHARACTER OF THE CONSONANTS. Though

the Greek consonants undoubtedly come chiefly from the Phoeni-

cian symbols, they were not all used at once nor in the same

places. At first the digraphs  were used for the later

X, θ, Φ, and even after these letters won a foothold ΚΣ, ΧΣ,

ΠΣ, ΦΣ were used in Attic for ξ, ψ.  It is only since 403 B.C. that

the Greek alphabet (ἄλφα βῆτα) has had regularly twenty-four

letters. Jannaris3 gives an interesting study of the way the

Greek letters looked in eighth, sixth, fifth and fourth centuries

B.C. as shown by the inscriptions. In the inscriptions, however,

κόππα continued to be used (like Latin Q) and βαῦ or δίγαμμα.

This last, though called double γάμμα, perhaps represents the Phoe-

nician vau. On the use of digamma in Homer see Kuhner-Blass.4

It is a half-vowel in fact, as ι and υ are partly consonant in force,

like Latin u (u) and i (j).5  The dropping of digamma affected

many words, some of which have the rough breathing, though

Thumb6 and Moulton7 think that this is an accident simply, and

the rough breathing is due to analogy and not to the digamma in

cases like καθ’ ἕτος, etc. But changes in the use of the consonants

did not cease when the Euclidean spelling reform was instituted

403 B.C. As the vowels underwent steady development, so it was

and is with the consonants. B early began occasionally to have

the force of υ, and γ sometimes the j value of ι as in modern Greek,

and it was even inserted (irrational γ).8 In general in the κοινή the

 

            1 Cf. Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 21. 2 Ib. Cf. Meisterh., Gr. etc., p. 3.

            3 Ib., p. 24 f. On the whole subj. of changes in the pap. see Mayser, Gr.,

pp. 163-248. For general remarks about consonant-changes in LXX MSS.

see Swete, 0. T. in Gk., p. 301.  4 Bd. I, pp. 85-101.

            5 Ib., pp. 77-85, 101-103. The mod. Gk. pronounces αὐτός =aftos. The

inscr. give the form Fυτοῦ. Cf. Riem. and Goelzer, Phonet., p. 34.

            6 Hellen., pp. 245 ff.

            7 Prol., p. 44. But Sommer, Gr. Lautstudien, shows that the rough

breathing is sometimes due to digamma.

            8 Thumb, Hellen., p. 187 f.; cf. p. 134 f. for intervocal γ.


210    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

consonant-changes are much fewer thhn those of the vowel. Such

peculiarities as σσ, γίνομαι, λήμψομαι are common (Thackeray, Gr.,

p. 100).

          (b) THE INSERTION OF CONSONANTS. In the older Greek δ

is inserted in ἀν-δ-ρός, and so with β in μεσημ-β-ρία.1  The

Attic used either form in ἐμπί(μ)πλημι, ἐμπί(μ)πρημι.  So in Ac.

14: 17 DEP read ἐμπιμπλῶν, (D ἐν--), and in Ac. 28:6 אcBHLP

most cursives have πίμπρασθαι. The LXX MSS. show the same

variation. D in Lu. 2:32, etc., has  Ἰσ-τ-ραήλ. The retention of

μ in all the forms (derivatives also) of λαμβάνω (root λαβ) is in ac-

cord with the usage of the papyri ("almost invariably")2 and the

inscriptions of the κοινή, and is due to the Ionic λάμψομαι.3  Hence

λήμψομαι, ἐλήμφθην, etc. In the Ptolemaic age (iii/i B.C.) the

papyri give both forms. From i/iv A.D. the papyri and uncials

(LXX and N. T.) give almost wholly forms. In the Byzantine

period (vi/viii A.D.) the classic λήψομαι reappears. Cf. Thack-

eray, Gr., p. 108 f.; Mayser, Gr., p. 194 f.; Cronert, Mem., p. 66.

In the LXX the uncials give the spelling of their own date, not

that of the translation. In Mk. 7:32 the extra γ in μογ(γ)ιλάλον

is inserted by the Syrian class only and is not to be accepted. In

Heb. 11:32 π is added to Σαμισών (Σαμψών).  So also in Ac. 3:7

(אABC) δ is added to σφυ(δ)ρόν which is as yet "unexplained."4

In the case of   Ἁδραμυντηνῷ (Ac. 27:2), read by W. H. on author-

ity of AB 16 Copt. instead of   Ἁδραμυττηνῷ, a slightly different

situation exists. Two ways of pronouncing and spelling the

name of the city existed.

          (c) THE OMISSION OF CONSONANTS. There are not many

cases where a consonant drops out of a N. T. word. In Rev.

13:2 the correct reading (all the uncials) is undoubtedly ἄρκου,

not ἄρκτου. This form is found also in the LXX and in inscrip-

tions of the first or second century A.D.5 W. H., following B and

א, also (save in Mk. 3:22) read βεεζεβούλ instead of βεελζεβούλ.

Γίνομαι and γινώσκω are the exclusive forms in the N. T., though

some MSS., as in the papyri and inscriptions, have γειν–. Nach-

 

            1 Blass compares the insertion of consonants in Semitic names like  Ἔα-δ-

ρας, Μαμ-β-ρῆ.                                  2 Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 34.

            3 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 179 f. Cf. W.-Sch., p. 64, for full references

concerning the use of μ with λαμβάνω.  Cf. Gregory (Prol., p. 72) for list and

references of the various compounds of λαμβάνω and λῆμψις in the N. T.,

ἀνα--, ἀνεπι--, ἀντι--, ἀπο--, κατα--, μετα--, παρα--, προ--, προσ--.  The LXX MSS.

have λήμψομαι (Q λήψονται) and ἐλήμφθην. Cf. Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 22.

            4 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 24; W.-Sch., p. 64.

            5 Ib., p. 65.


                     ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                    211

 

manson1 states clearly the facts. The Ionic as early as the fifth

century B.C. used the γιν forms, and the Doric shows the same

situation in the fourth century. Even in Athens the γιν, forms

appear, and in the κοινή the γιγν forms vanish.  Γολγοθά follows

the Hebrew גֻלְגּלֶתrather than the Chaldaic גֻּלְגָּלְחָא in having

only one λ. According to Winer-Schmiedel2 the two forms καῦδα

and κλαῦδα (Ac. 27:16) represent two different islands near each

other, which were confused in the MSS. It is hardly worth while

to remark that σάρδιον (correct text in Rev. 4:3) is a substantive,

while σάρδινος (Text. Rec.) is an adjective.

          (d) SINGLE OR DOUBLE CONSONANTS. Blass3 and Winer-

Schmiedel4 comment on the obscurity concerning the use of single

or double consonants in the κοινή.  The phenomena in the N. T.

in general correspond to the situation in the κοινή.5 In the modern

Greek vernacular (cf. Thumb, Handbook, p. 27) the double con-

sonants, except in Southeastern Greek dialects, have the value of

only one. In the oldest Attic inscriptions in most cases where

the doubling of consonants was possible the single consonant was

used.6 The rule with initial was that when it passed to the

middle of a word as a result of reduplication or the prefixing of

a preposition, etc., it was doubled. But ῤεραντισμένος is read by

אACDP in Heb. 10:22 as in Ionic and late Greek, ῥεριμμένοι in D

(Mt. 9:36), and περιρεραμμένος in א (Rev. 19:13). Blass7 observes

 

            1 Magn. Inschr., p. 108. Cf. also Hoffmann, Griech. Dial., Bd. III, p. 173;

Meisterh., p. 128; Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 165; Schmid, Atticismus, Bd.

IV., p. 579 (for the Atticistic γιγν); Cronert, Mem. Graec. Hercul., p. 91 f.;

Reinhold, De Graec. Patr. etc., pp. 46-48. In the LXX γίνομαι and γινώσκω

are uniform. Cf. Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 21. Thack. (Gr., p. 111 f.) finds

illustrations of the omission of intervocalic 7 in the LXX uncials as in the

pap. (Mayser, Gr., p. 167 f.).

            2 P. 65, where a full discussion of the geographical points is given.

            3 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 10.

            4 P. 55; cf. also Riem. and Goelzer, Phonet., pp. 225 ff.

            5 See Thumb, Hellen., pp. 20 ff.; Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., pp. 122 ff.;

Nachm., Magn. Inschr., pp. 88 ff.; Cronert, Mem. Graec. Hercul., pp. 74 ff.

Cf. Mayser, Gr., pp. 211-219. For the LXX see Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., pp.

14-16. The MSS. of the LXX are largely the same as those of the N. T. and

show similar phenomena in orthography. So in Ex. 7:10 B has ἔριψεν,  Ἀρρ.

Both ἀρραβών, and ἀραβών occur, and it is in the pap. that we can often find the

true Ptolemaic spelling. A curiously has usually γένημα and B γέννημα.

            6 Meisterh., Gr. d. att. Inschr., p. 93.

            7 Gr. of N. T. Gk., pp. 10, 328. Similar variations in usage as to ρ or ρρ

appear in the inscr. of the κοινή (Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 124, ἀναντιρήτως,

etc.; Nachm., Magn. etc., p. 91) and even in the Attic inscr. (Meisterh., p. 95,

ἀναρηθέντες, etc.). Cf. Reinhold, De Graec. etc., p.42, for exx. of ἐρύσατο, etc.


212     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

that the Syriac versions use רהומא for  Ῥώμη, though some Attic

inscriptions use initial pp. In Mt. 9:20 αἱμορροῦσα is correct

(אL one ρ). In Ac. 10:29 BD 61 read ἀνατιρήτως, and in Ac.

19:36 BL have ἀναντιρήτων. In Ac. 27:43 W. H. follow אC in

ἀπορίψαντας, and in Lu. 19:35 all but the Syrian class read ἐπι-

ρίψαντες and אAB have the same form in 1 Pet. 5:7. In Mt. 9:36

the Neutral (and Alexandrian) class has ἐριμμένοι, the Syrian ἐρρ.,

while D has ῥεριμμ–.  In Mt. 15:30 אDL read ἔριψαν, while B

and the rest have ἔρριψαν, but see Ac. 27:19. But in Lu. 17:2

ἔρριπται is supported by all MSS. save II and pscr. In Jo. 19:23

ἄραφος is read by W. H., though B has app. In 2 Cor. 12:4 ἄρρητα

is right as ἄρρωστος in Mk. 6:5, 13, etc. In 2 Cor. 1:22 W. H.

follow BCD vs. אAL in reading ἀρραβῶνα, a Semitic word which

in its Semitic form has the doubling of the consonant and the

metrical prosody – ˇ – according to Blass,1 who compares also

the Latin arrha. W. H. have διαρ<ξας in Mk. 14:63 after BN,

while in Lu. 8:29 διαρήσσων is supported by ABCRUΔ.  In Mt.

26:65 W. H. give διέρηξεν on the authority of only θf according

to Tisch., though BL read διερήσσετο in Lu. 5:6. But προσέρηξεν

in Lu. 6:48 is supported by אBDL and in 6:49 by BDL. In

Ac. 16:22 περιρήξαντες is the reading of all uncials save P, but

most cursives follow P. But in Ac. 14:14 all MSS. have διαρρή-

ξαντες and in Lu. 9:42 the same thing is true of ἔρρηξεν.  In Mk.

2:21 ἐπιράπτει is read by all the best MSS. and the Syrian class

is divided, and the same is true of Mt. 26:67 ἐράπισαν.  In 2 Cor.

11:25 ἐραβδίσθην, is correct, while likewise ἐράντισεν (Heb. 9:19,

21) has all save late Syrian support. So –ρρ– in ἐρρέθη (BD ἐρρήθη,

not W. H., Mt. 5:21, etc.) is the constant reading in the N. T.

In Eph. 3:17 (18) and Col. 2:7, all MSS. have ἐρριζωμένοι. W. H.

follow B alone in 2 Cor. 1:10; 2 Pet. 2:7 with ἐρύσατο, while in

Col. 1:13 B is joined by FGP. In 2 Tim. 3:11 AD read ἐρύσατο,

and אAC 37 give ἐρύσθην in 2 Tim. 4:17. All MSS. have ἔρρωσθε

(Ac. 15:29).  Μύρρα (B) is changed to Μύρα in the Syrian text (Ac.

27:5; cf. Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 160), but Winer-Schmiedel (p. 58)

found only Μύρα in the inscriptions.  Παραρυῶμεν (Heb. 2:1) is read

by all the pre-Syrian classes. Παρρησία, παρρησιάζομαι (from παν-

ρησία), not παρη–, is the usual reading in the N. T. (see Additional

Notes), as occasionally in the inscriptions.2  W. H. read πυρρός in

 

            1 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 10.  Ἀραβών "only Western," Hort, Notes on Orth.,

p. 148. But the pap. (Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 33; Deiss., B. S., p. 183 f.)

frequently have ἀραβών, and, as Deissmann remarks, people are not always par-

ticular to preserve mere etymology.       2 CIGII, 2722. 5. Cf. W.-Sch., p. 56,


                   ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                          213

 

Rev. 6:4 and 12:3, though the evidence is pretty evenly balanced.1

The Alexandrian class has πυράζει in Mt. 16 : 2, but W. H. reject the

passage. The MSS. all have Χειμάρρου in Jo. 18:1.

          The other instances outside of ρ are not so numerous. The

MSS. (all but late Syrian) support (βαλλάντιον, not βαλάντιον, as

do the papyri.2  Blass3 argues for it also on metrical grounds.

Γένημα, because given by no grammarian, was "attributed by

Fritzsche (on Mark, pp. 619 ff.) to the carelessness of transcribers"

(Thayer), but as sometimes in the LXX (Ezek. 36:30) so in the

N. T. the best MSS. distinguish between γέννημα (from γεννάω),

'living creatures,' as γεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν  (Mt. 3:7) and γένημα (from

γιν<ομαι, ‘the fruits of the earth,’ as ἐκ τοῦ γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου (Mk.

14:25). Phrynichus4 condemns the use of γέννημα=καρπός (Dio-

dorus, Polybius, etc.). Root of both verbs is γεν.  This distinction

between γένημα and γέννημα appears in the papyri also, though γενη-

θέντα occurs in the Fayum Papyri (B.U. 110. 14) "undoubtedly

from γεννάω."5  So N. T. MSS. vary6 about γέννημα. The gram-

marians (Lobeck, ad Phrynichum, p. 726) reject ἐκχύνω for ἐκχέω,

but the best MSS. give ἐκχύννω everywhere in the N. T. W. H.

accept this AEolic form in Mt. 23:35; 26:28; Mk. 14:24; Lu.

11:50 marg.); Lu. 22:20 (bracket the passage); and Ac. 22:20.

So also συνχύννω (W. H.) in Ac. 9:22; 21:31.  Cf. ὑπερεκχυννόμε-

νον in Lu. 6:38.  Likewise MSS. support ἀναβαίννω, ὀπτάννομαι,

while the AEolic ἀποκτέννω is received by W. H. in Rev. 6:11 and

ἀποκτεννύω in Mk. 12:5, though rejected elsewhere in N. T. on

divided testimony.    Ἔνατος has been restored throughout the

N. T. by W. H. instead of ἔννατος of the Text. Rec. The inscrip-

tions support the N. T. MSS. in this change (Thayer). So W. H.

give ἐνενήκοντα (Mt. 18:12 ff.; Lu. 15:4, 7) but ἐννέα always.

 Ἐνεός, not ἐννεός, W. H. give (Ac. 9:7) as the LXX (Is. 56:10), a

word possibly identical with ἄνεως (ἄναος). W. H. present7 κράβατ-

τος instead of the κραββατος of the Text. Rec., though κράβατος

would more nearly represent the Latin grabatus as it appears

in Etym. M. (154. 34; 376. 36). Κραβάτριος is found also for the

 

            1 The inscr. show πυρός also (Dittenb., 177. 15; 748. 20).

            2 Cronert, Mem. Graec. Hercul., p. 76.            3 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 11.

            4 Rutherford, New Phryn., p. 348.

            5 Deiss., B. S., pp. 109 f., 184. Cf. Thackeray, p. 118.

            6 Gregory, Prol., p. 79.

            7 In Mk. B (5) has κράβατος, but is not followed by W. H. in Jo. and Ac.

(6). Thumb, Hellen., p. 22, argues for ββ as the correct form from mod. Gk.

usage. Blass (Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 328) cites both κράβαττος and κραβάτιον from

Arrian's Diss. Epict. and κράβαττος from the pap. Cf. Moulton's note in Einl.


214     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

Latin grabatarius (CIGII 2114 d ι).  א, however, has 10/11 times

the strange form κράβακτος (–ττ– only in Ac. 5:15).  Λασέα (Ac.

27:8) is Λασσαία in some MSS.  Μαμωνᾶς, from Aramaic מָאמוֺנָא,

is correct.  Μασάομαι is the right reading in Rev. 16:10 (אACP).

Only the Western class has πλημύρης for πλημμύρης in Lu. 6:48.

W. H. properly have ῥάκος, not ῥάκκος, from ῥήγνυμι (Mt. 9:16;

Mk. 2:21).  In the Western interpolation in Ac. 20:15, W. H.

read Τρωγύλιον, not –ύλλιον nor –ίλιον. Some Latin MSS. read

hysopus for ὕσσωπος in Jo. 19:29 and Heb. 9:19.  Φύγελος, not

ελλος, is read in 2 Tim. 1:15 by all save A and most cursives.

Cf.  Φυγέλιος in CIGII 3027.

          The Hebrew and Aramaic proper names call for special re-

mark.   Ἅννας =חָנָן (Josephus    Ἄνανος) may be due to the drop-

ping of α or to the analogy of    Ἅννα=חַנָּה. W. H. (Ac. 1:23;

15:22) prefer Βαρσαββᾶς (from בַּרשַׁבָּא, ‘son of the Sabbath’) to

Βαρσαβᾶς (from בַּר שְׁבָא, 'son of Saba').1  The Text. Rec. has Φενη-

σαρέτ (W. H. Γεννησαρέτ) in Mk. 6:53, elsewhere –νν–.2   Γόμορρα is

read in LXX and N. T. (Mt. 10:15, etc.), עֲמֹרָה.  W. H. accept

Ἐλισαῖος, not   Ἐλισσ. (Syrian) in Lu. 4:27=אֱלִישָׁע.   Ἰεσσαί

(Lu. 3:32, etc.) comes from  יִשַׁי.  The N. T. and 1 Macc. have

 Ἰόππη, but the ancient grammarians and lexicographers pre-

fer   Ἰόπη.3  In Lu. 3:27  Ἰωανάν (indeclinable) is the right text.

W. H. prefer  Ἰωάνα (יוֺהַו) to  Ἰωάνης in Lu. 8:3; 24:10. But more

doubt exists concerning  Ἰωάνης, which W. H. read everywhere

save in Ac. 4:6; 13:5; Rev. 22:8, following B and sometimes

D. The single ν prevails in D in Luke and Acts, while  Ἰωάννης is

more common in D in Matthew, Mark, John.4   אhas the single

ν in the part written by the scribe of B.5  The inscriptions have

it both ways. Blass6 finds the explanation in the Hebrew termi-

nation –an, which was treated as a variable inflection in the Greek,

the LXX MSS. having now  Ἰωανάν and now  Ἰωάνον. This fact

opposes the derivation of the name  Ἰωάννης from  Ἰωανάν-ης, leaving

the –ης unexplained.7  Μαριάμ (מִרְיָם) = Μαριάμμη in Josephus.8

Μεσσίας is from the Aramaic מְשִׁיָחא= Hebrew הַמָּשִׁיהַbut the Syr-

 

            1 Cf. W.-Sch., p. 57.

            2 Cf. Pliny (Nat. Hist., V, 15. 71 for Γενη.) also. In W.-Sch., p. 57, the

point is made that the unpointed Targums do not distinguish between גְּנֵיסַר

and גִּנֵּיסַר.

            3 W.-Sch., p. 56, =יָפוֺ or יָבַיָ.  Cf. on this subject Helbing, Gr. d. Sept.,

p. 26 f.                                                  4 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 328, quoting E. Lippett.

            5 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 159.  7 W.-Sch., p. 57; E. Bibl., p. 2504 f.

            6 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 11 .           8 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 11.


             ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                   215

 

ian class reads Μεσίας in Jo. 1:41 (42); 4:25. Σάρρα, Heb.

שָׂרָה: (feminine of  שַׂר), is read by MSS. generally in N. T., though

L has Σάρας in Ro. 4:19 (vulg. Sarae). All the MSS. have νν

in Σουσάννα (Lu. 8:3) after the Heb. שׁוֺשַׁנָּה (‘a lily’).  Χαρράν is

supported by most MSS., though D and a few cursives have

Χαράν in Ac. 7:2 after the Hebrew חָרָן.  The LXX has Χαρράν  

and the Greek writers (Strabo, etc.) have Κάρραι, Latin Carrhae.

          Doubling of the Aspirate. As a rule the aspirated mutes (θ, χ,

φ) are not doubled in more correct writing either in early or late

Greek, but N. T. MSS. give examples of θθ, χχ, φφ.  In Philemon

2 D has  Ἀφφία, while 3 has  Ἀππία (so vulg.) and FG, etc., even

Ἀμφία.  In Mk. 7:34 all MSS. have ὀφφαθά (or ἐφφεθά) save Δ

and two Coptic MSS. which have ἐπφαθά. W. H. give Μαθθαῖος=

Hebrew מַתִּיָה; in the N. T. (Mt. 9:9 ff., etc.), and Μαθθάν in Mt.

1:15. W. H. read Ματθάτ in Lu. 3:24, but Μαθθάτ in Lu. 3:29.

In Ac. 1:23, 26 W. H. have Μαθθίας, but in Lu. 3:25 f. they pre-

fer Ματταθίας to Μαθθαθίας.  In Ac. 5:1, W. H. consider Σαφφειρα

Western and read Σαπφειρα (either Aramaic סַפִּירָא, ' beautiful,' or

Hebrew סַפִּיר'precious stone').1  The LXX MSS. show the same

variations. Cf. Thackeray, Gr., p. 121.

          (e) ASSIMILATION OF CONSONANTS. In the early period of the

Greek language the inscriptions often show assimilation of con-

sonants between separate words. The words all ran together

in the writing (scriptura continua) and to some extent in pro-

nunciation like the modern French vernacular. Usage varied

very early, but the tendency was constantly towards the dis-

tinctness of the separate words (dissimilation). However, ἐξ

came finally to be written ἐκ before consonants, though ἐγ, ἐκκ, ἐχ,

ἐγκ and even (cf. Latin) are found in Attic inscriptions,2 as ἐγ

νήσων, etc. Only sporadic examples outside of ἐξ and ἐκ appear

in the N. T. as ἀνέγλιπτος in D (Lu. 12:33), ἀπεγδύσει in B (Col.

2:11), ἔγγονα in D (1 Tim. 5:4), eggona, not engona.3 The Attic

inscriptions even have ς assimilated in τοὺλ λίθους. The most

 

            1 On the whole subject see Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 159, and Blass, Gr. of

N. T. Gk., p. 11. Cf. also Schweizer, Perg. etc., pp. 110 f., 114 f. Cf. for

the pap., Mayser, Gr., pp. 190-224; Soden, I, pp. 1372 ff.

            2 Cf. Meisterh., pp. 105-109. In North Engl. one hears "ith wood" for

"in the wood." The MSS. of the LXX show the same phenomena as one

sees in the N. T. MSS. and the pap., like ἐγ γαστρί, ἐμ μέσῳ, συγγράφειν, etc.

Cf. Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 16 f.; Thack., Gr., pp. 130 ff.

            3 Cf. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 12; Ausspr, etc., p. 123. Alexandrian

writers followed the Attic in this assimilation. Blass compares the guttural

use of α in ἀἡλί (Mt. 27:46) in L and in the LXX   Ἀερμών,  Ἀενδώρ.


216      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

common assimilation between separate words is in words ending

in --ν especially with the article and ἐν.  Examples like τὴμ πόλιν,

τὸλ λόγον, τὸρ  Ῥόδιον,  ἐλ  Λέσβῳ,  ἐσ Σιδῶνι, etc., are very common.1

Similar phenomena occur in the κοινή inscriptions, though the

failure to assimilate is far more noticeable. See list of examples

in Nachmanson.2 As a rule the papyri do not assimilate such

cases.3 In the N. T., as in the later κοινή generally, only a few

remnants survive of this assimilation of ν between words. Blass,4

who has used the MSS. to good purpose, finds several, as, for in-

stance, ἐγ γαστρί in A (Lu. 21:23), ἐγ Κανᾶ in AF (Jo. 2:11), ἐμ

μέσῳ in AC (Rev. 1:13; 2:1, etc.), in AP (Heb. 2:12), in LΔ

(Mt. 18:2; Lu. 8:7), ἐμ πραύτητι in א (Jas. 1:21), σὺμ Μαριάμ in

AE, etc. (Lu. 2:5), σὺμ πᾶσιν in EG, etc. (Lu. 24:21). The earlier

papyri (up to 150 B.C.) show a good deal of this assimilation be-

tween words (Thackeray, Gr., p. 131). This assimilation between

separate words is common in modern Greek (cf. Thumb, Handb.,

pp. 16 ff.). So τὸν πατέρα=tombatera. But a much more difficult

matter is presented in the case of ἐν and σύν in composition,

though in general "assimilation is the rule in compounds of ἐν,

retention of ν in those of σύν."5  But in 1 and 2 Peter assimila-

tion is the rule (only two clear exceptions) for both σύν and ἐν

due possibly6 to the absence of uncials. The later papyri as a

rule do not assimilate σύν, though often ἐν.7  In the N. T. no ex-

amples occur of ἐν or σύν before ξ or ρ.8  Hort9 gives a list of what

he considers "the certain and constant forms" of ἐν and σύν in

composition. "All other compounds of σύν and ἐν are included in

the list of alternative readings." Hort thus reads ἐμ– before the

labials (π, β, φ) and the liquid μ except ἐνπεριπατήσω (2 Cor. 6:16),

possibly ἐνπνέων (Ac. 9:1), and ἔνπροσθεν once (Rev. 4:6) and

Western class elsewhere. So assimilation takes place before the

liquid λ, as ἐλλογάω).  But before the palatals κ, γ the usage varies,

though before χ we have ἐγχρῖσαι (Rev. 3:18) with reading ἐν.

 

            1 Meisterh., p. 110 f. Cf. Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 97.

            2 Magn. Inschr., p. 100 f. Cf. also Schweizer, Perg. etc., p. 127; Jann.,

Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 92.

            3 Cronert, Mem. Graec. Hercul., p. 57; Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 12.

            4 Ib., pp. 11 f., 306.                               5 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 149.

            6 Ib. In general see Wecklein, Curae Epigr. ad Gr. Graeca.e etc., 1869,

p. 47 f.

            7 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 12. Cf. Cronert, Mem. Graec. Hercul., p. 61.

            8 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 149. See for LXX Thackeray, pp. 132

            9 Ib. For the inscr. see Nachm., Magn., p. 104 f. The Coptic shows similar

variation. For the loss of final ν in mod. Gk. vernac. see Thumb, Handb., p. 24 f.


                    ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                    217

 

We read ἐνγεγραμμένη in 2 Cor. 3:2 f. (אABCDFG) and ἐνκαί-

νια, ἐνκαινίζω, ἐνκατοικέω, ἐνκαυχῶμαι, ἐνκεντρίζω, ἐνκρίνω, though ἐγ-

καλέω, ἔγκλημα, etc., and ἐγκαταλείπω except in Acts.1 As to σύν

here is Hort's decision.  Συνπ– he accepts save in συμπόσια. On the

other hand Hort has only συνβασιλεύω, συνβιβάζω, elsewhere συμβ

as in συμβαίνω; only σύνφημι, συνφύω, but συμφ— as in συμφέρω. With

the palatals Hort reads συνκ– always, as in συνκάθαημαι, only συγγε-

νής, συγκαλύπτω, but συνχρῶμαι and σύγχυσις. He has both συνλαλέω,

συνλυποῦμαι and συλλαμβάνω, συλλέγω; συνμαθητής, etc., but συμμορ-

φιζω, σύμμορφος.  Hort has συνζῶ, etc., but σύζυγε; σύνψυχος, but

has both συνσταυρόω, etc., and συστρέφω, etc. For the detailed

W. evidence see Gregory.2  Hort also prefers παλινγενεσία, but

is doubtful about κενχρεαί, πανπληθεί.

               (f) INTERCHANGE AND CHANGING VALUE OF CONSONANTS.

One cannot here go into the discussion of the labial, palatal, dental,

velar stops, the spirants, liquids, nasals. One can give only the

special variations in the N. T. The b sound was rare in the older

Indo-Germanic languages and easily glided into u or v.3 The Greek

βαίνω is like venio in Latin, βίος is like vivus though different in his-

tory. In modern Greek β has sound of v.  In the N. T. as in the

LXX all the uncials have υ in Δαυείδ (W. H.) where the minuscules

read Δαβίδ.4  In the case of βελίαρ (2 Cor. 6:15) it is from בֵּל יַעַר

(‘lord of the forest’), while the Text. Rec. βελίαλ is from

בְּלִיּעַלַ(‘worthlessness’).5 The variation between ρσ and ρρ, Moulton6 ob-

serves, runs down to modern Greek. The Attic ρρ did not displace

the Ionic and early Attic ρσ entirely in the Attic inscriptions.7 In

the N. T., like the rest of the κοινή, usage is divided.8  Hort (p. 149)

prefers ἄρσην except ἄρρην perhaps 4/4 times in Paul. In the Gos-

pels and Acts θάρσος and the two imperatives θάρσει, θαρσεῖτε are

uniform, but in 2 Cor. (5:6, 8; 7:16; 10:1, 2) and Heb. (13:6)

 

            1 About ἐν, in composition see Gregory, Prol. etc., p. 76 f.; Soden, I,

p. 1383.   Ἐν in MSS. appears in composition as ἐν--, ἐγ-- and even ἐκ--, as

ἐκκόπην.  On ἔνπροσθεν in the pap. see Mayser, Gr., p. 45.

            2 Prol. etc., p. 73 f. Cf. Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., pp. 91-97, for the history of

this subject during various stages of the language.

            3 Cf. Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., pp. 98, 124

            4 Cf. W.-Sch., p. 66 note.

            5 Cf. ib., p. 58 note, for further discussion.

            6 Prol., p. 45. Cf. also Thumb, Theol. Literaturzeit., XXVIII, p. 422.

            7 Meisterh., Att. Inschr., pp. 99 f.

            8 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 125; Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 94. In the

pap. ἄρρην "greatly preponderates over. ἄρσην" (Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p.

33). Cf. also Reinhold, De Graec. etc., p. 44 f. Thumb, Hellen., p. 77 f.


218    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

θαρρεῖν is the correct text.  ζ displaces σ in a few words. Voiced

σ in union with voiced consonants had the sound of z, and ζ was

pronounced σδ.1   Ἄζωτος (Ac. 8:40) אַשְׁדּוֺד, Ashdod. Lagarde's

LXX has   Ἀσεδδώδ in Josh. 11:22 (A has   Ἀσηδώδ, B  Ἀσελδώ).

עֶזְרָאis rendered also  Ἔζρας or  Ἔσδρας. But in the N. T. period

ζ is changing from the ds sound to z.   Ἁρμόζω, not the Attic

ἁρμόττω, is the N. T. form.2  Lachmann has μαζός for μαστός in

Rev. 1:13. In 1 Th. 5:19 BDFG (Western class) read ζβέννυτε,3

simply phonetic spelling. Hort4 considers Ζμύρνα as Western

only in Rev. 1:11; 2:8, but the papyri and inscriptions both

give it.5  The most noticeable feature of all is, however, that

the Attic and Boeotian ττ did not hold against the Ionic σσ

(though even Thucydides and the Tragic poets used σσ). Papyri,

inscriptions and N. T. MSS. all unite in using σσ as the rule,

though all occasionally have ττ.  It does not seem possible to

reduce the usage to an intelligent rule.6   Ἐκπληττόμενος is ac-

cepted by W. H. in Ac. 13:12, elsewhere σσ.  Both ἐλάσσων

(Jo. 2:10; Ro. 9:12) and ἐλάττων (1 Tim. 5:9; Heb. 7:7) are

found, but only the "literary" (so Blass) words ἐλαττόω (Jo. 3:

30; Heb. 2:7, 9) and ἐλαττονέω (2 Cor. 8:15). Similar diversity

exists between ἧσσον (1 Cor. 11:17; 2 Cor. 12:15) and ἡσσώθητε

(2 Cor. 12:13) on the one hand and ἥττημα (1 Cor. 6 : 7; Ro.

11:12) and ἡττᾶσθαι (2 Pet. 2:19 f.) on the other.  In Heb. 6:9;

10:34 W. H. read κρείσσονα, elsewhere κρείττονα (Heb. 1 : 4; 7: 7,

19, 22; 8: 6; 9:23; 11:16, 35, 40; 12:24), and Hebrews has

some literary influence, an argument for Blass' idea above. Paul

has κρεῖττον only in 1 Cor. 7:9, while κρεῖσσον is found in 1 Cor.

7:38; 11:17; Ph. 1:23.  Hort accepts κρεῖττον in 1 Pet. 3:17

 

            1 Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., pp. 113, 115. On the whole subject of the

exchange of consonants in the pap. see Mayser, Gr., pp. 169-188, 219-224.

For the LXX exx. (οὐδέν, οὐθέν; γλῶσσα, γλῶττα; φυλάσσω, φυλάττω;

ἐλάσσων, ἐλάττων; ἄρρην, θαρρῶ), etc.) see Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., pp. 17-20;

Thack., Gr., pp. 100-124.

            2 Cf. Rutherford, New Phyrn., p. 14.

            3 Cf. ἄζβεστος in N (Mk. 9:43), ἐγνωζμένος, etc., in pap. (W.-Sch., p. 59).

            4 Notes on Orth., p. 148.

            5 Deiss., B. S., p. 185. Cf. Moulton, Prol., p. 45; Dittenb., 458. 41, iv

Ζμύρνῃ.

            6 Cf. Thumb, Hellen., pp. 53, 78 ff.; Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 125;

Nachm., Magn. etc., p. 95 f.; Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 32; Prol., p. 45;

Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 23; Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 148; Reinhold, De

Grace. etc., p. 43 f. Giles (Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 115) thinks that the σσ

in Athens was a literary mannerism and pronounced just like ττ.


              ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                        219

 

and 2 Pet. 2:21 (doubtful). Cf. σήμερον for the Attic τήμερον.

  Ὄρνιξ (Lu. 13:34) is called Western by Hort, though Moulton,1

observes that it has some papyrus support and is like the modern

Greek (Cappadocian) ὀρνίχ.

          (g) ASPIRATION OF CONSONANTS. There is besides some fluc-

tuation in the aspiration of consonants. See under (d) for the

double aspirates like  Ἀφφία, etc. This uncertainty of aspiration is

very old and very common in the inscriptions and papyri,2 though

the N. T. has only a few specimens. W. H. read  Ἁκελδαμάχ in

Ac. 1:19, חֲקַל דְּמָא.   So ῥακά (Mt. 5:22), רֵיקָאbut σαβαχθανεί

(B has -κτ-) in Mt. 27:46.  Γεννησαρέτ is correct; the Syrian

class has –έθ in Mt. 14:34. W. H. have uniformly Καφαρναούμ,

and read Ναζαρέτ save in four passages, Ναζαρέθ in Mt. 21:11;

Ac. 10:38, and Ναζαρά in Mt. 4:13; Lu. 4:16. In Lu. 11:27;

23:29 DFG have μασθοι for μαστοί, likewise א in Rev. 1:13.   Ἐθύθη

is read by cursives, Clem., Or., etc., in 1 Cor. 5:7.  In οὐθείς and

μηθείς after elision of ε the δ has blended with the εἷς as if it were

τ and become θ.  It is first found in an inscr. 378 B.C. and is the

usual form in the pap. in iii/B.C. and first half of ii/B.C. By i/A.D.

the δ forms are supreme again (Thack., Gr., pp. 58 ff). Blass3 finds

οὐθενός in Lu. 22:35 (ABQT); 2 Cor. 11:8 (אBMP); οὐθέν, in Lu.

23:14 (אBT); Ac. 15:9 (BHLP); 19:27 (אABHP); 26:26 (אB);

1 Cor. 13:2 (אABCL); μηθέν in Ac. 27:33 (אAB).  But ἐξουθενέω

in the LXX and the N. T. prevails, though W. H. (after BD) read

ἐξουδενηθῇ in Mk. 9:12.  א and אD read the Attic πανδοκεῖον, -εύς

in Lu. 10:34 f., but W. H. accept πανδοχεῖον, ---εύς (from δέχομαι).

Σάρεπτα in Lu. 4:26 is the LXX rendering of צרְפַת.  Τροποφορέω

and τροφοφορέω are two distinct words, though the MSS. differ

widely in Ac. 13:18, the Neutral and Western supporting τροπ-

Hort considers σφυρίς for σπυρίς right (Mt. 15:37, etc.).  It is

well attested by the papyri.4  W. H. read φόβηθρον, not φοβητρον,

in Lu. 21:11.

          (h) VARIABLE FINAL CONSONANTS. The use of ν ἐφελκυστικόν

(paragogic ν) cannot be reduced to any clear rule. The desire to

avoid hiatus extended this usage, though it probably originally had

a meaning and was extended by analogy to cases where it had none.

Cf. English articles a, an (Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 208).

 

            1 Prol., p. 45. Cf. Thumb, Hellen., p. 90.                        2 Cf. W.-Sch., p. 59..

            3 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 24; W.-Sch., p. 61. Cf. Meisterh., p. 48, for this

interaspiration in the old Attic inscr. Cf. Mayser, pp. 180

            4 Moulton, Prol., p. 45. The Ptol. pap. have both spellings, Deiss., B. S.,

p. 185. Cf. Mayser, Gr., p. 173.


220    A GRAMMAR OP THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

The same thing is true of movable final ς.  In the old Attic before

403 B.C. this movable ν was seldom used. It is more frequent in the

new Attic up to 336 B.C., and most common in the κοινή, vanishing

again in the modern Greek, as ν easily disappears in pronuncia-

tion. Meisterhans1 has an interesting table on the subject, show-

ing the relative frequency in different centuries. This table

proves that in the κοινή it came to be the rule to use the movable

ν both before consonants and vowels. This is shown also by the

inscriptions2 and the Ptolemaic papyri. Per contra note the dis-

appearance of final ν in modern Greek vernacular, when not pro-

nounced (Thumb, Handb., pp. 24 ff.). However, as a rule, this

movable final ν occurs only with the same classes of words as in

the Attic as after –σι, εστί and ε in verbs (3d sing. past tenses).

The irrational ν mentioned as common later by Hatzidakis3 is

rare. The older N. T. MSS. (אABC) are in harmony with the

κοινή and have the movable ν and ς both before consonants and

vowels with a few exceptions. The later N. T. MSS. seem to

feel the tendency to drop these variable consonants. Moulton4

mentions μείζων (Jo. 5:36) as a good example of the irrational ν

in N. T. MSS. (ABEGMA). Cf. also the irrational ν with the

subjunctive in the papyri. So ἐὰν ἦν ἄρσενον P. Oxy. 744 (i/B.C.) for

ᾖ.  See Moulton, Prol., pp. 168, 187, for further examples. The

failure to use this ν was originally most common in pause, some-

times even before vowels.5 Blass6 observes that it was only the

Byzantine grammarians who made the rule that this ν should be

used before vowels and not before consonants, a rule of which

their predecessors did not have the benefit, a thing true of many

other grammatical rules. We moderns can teach the ancients

much Greek! Since the N. T. MSS.7  show no knowledge of this

later grammatical "rule," W. H. follow a mechanical one indeed,

 

            1 Att. Inschr., p. 114.

            2 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 137, whose. table confirms that of Meisterh.

Cf. also Thieme, Inschr. von Magn., p. 8; Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 110,

with similar table. The pap. agree, Cronert, Mem. Graec. Hercul., p. 137, and

Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., pp. 236 ff. In the LXX ν ἐφελκ. occurs before con-

sonants also. Cf. Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., pp. 22 ff.; Thack., Gr., pp. 134 ff.

So as to movable ς. Cf. μέχρι ὑμῶν and μέχρις οὗ in LXX.

            3 Einl. etc., p. 111, like ἱστορήθην ὁ ναός. Cf. Schweiz., Perg. Inschr., p. 137.

            4 Prol., p. 49. Cf. also Reinhold, De Graec., p. 37.

            5 W.--Sch., p. 62.                                  6 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 19.

            7 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 147 f.; Gregory, Prol., p. 97 f. In simple truth

ν movable was not so uniform in the earlier Gk. (esp. Thuc.) as the grammars

imply. Cf. Maasson, De littera v Graec. parag., 1881, pp. 47, 61.


             ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                   221

 

but the only practical guide under the circumstances. They go

by the testimony of the oldest uncials. Hort gives a considerable

list of examples where the ν is wanting in one or more of the older

uncials, but where W. H. have ν, as in ἀροῦσιν (Mt. 4:6), πᾶσιν

(Mt. 5:15), etc. But in Lu. 1:3 ἔδοξε is read by אBCD. In Ac.

24:27 κατέλιπε is supported by אB. There are about a dozen

more instances in Hort's long list of alternative readings where

W. H. prefer the form without ν, rather more frequently after at,

than after ε.1 W. H., however, have εἴκοσι everywhere, as was

usually the case in the Attic inscriptions and always in the Ptole-

maic papyri and the LXX MSS. both before vowels and con-

sonants.2  So ἔμρποσθεν, ἔξωθεν, ὄπισθεν in the N. T. Likewise

πέρυσι is correct in 2 Cor. 8:10; 9:2.3

          The variables calls for a few words more. All good MSS. give

ἄντικρυς Χίου in Ac. 20:15.4  But as in Attic, the N. T. MSS.

usually have ἄχρι and μέχρι even before vowels.   Ἄχρι (always

before consonants) thus precedes vowels some fifteen times, and

once only do we certainly5 have ἄχρις (Gal. 3:19), though it is

uncertain whether it is followed by ἄν or οὗ.  Μέχρι is always used

in the N. T. before a consonant and once before a vowel, μέχρι

  Ἰωάνου (Lu. 16:16). The early N. T. editors used to print οὕτω  

before consonants and οὕτως before vowels, but W. H. print οὕτως  

196 times before consonants and vowels and only ten times οὕτω  

(all before consonants). These ten instances are Mk. 2:7; Mt.

3:15; 7:17; Ac. 13:47; 23:11; Ro. 1:15; 6:19; Ph. 3:17; Heb.

12:21; Rev. 16:18.6

          (i) METATHESIS. Φαιλόνης (2 Tim. 4:13), Latin paenula. See

Additional Notes.

               IV. Breathings.

          (a) ORIGIN OF THE ASPIRATE. As is well known, in the mod-

ern Greek no distinction is made in pronunciation between spiri-

tus asper and spiritus lenis, or πνεῦμα δασύ and πνεῦμα ψιλόν. That

 

            1 See Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 19; Gregory, Prol., p. 97.

            2 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 328, and references there given. Cf. Thack.,

Gr., p. 135.

            3 Blass (Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 19) quotes Attic usage for πέρυσιν before vowels.

            4 For the Hom.  ἄντικρυ and further items see W.-Sch., p. 63 and note.

  Ἄντικρυς (καταντικρύ) in Attic is 'downright,' not ‘over against’ (Blass, Gr. of

N. T. Gk., p. 20). Cf. for the pap. Mayser, Gr., pp. 242 ff.

            5 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 148. But W. H. read ἄχρις οὗ in Heb. 3:13, else-

where ἄχρι οὗ.  For further discussions of ἄχρι and μέχρι see W.-Sch., p. 63 note.

            6 For illustrations from the κοινή inscr. see Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 112.

Cf. Reinhold, p. 37 f.


222        A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

is to say, the "rough" breathing is only a conventional sign used

in writing. This sign is indeed a comparatively modern device,

‘and’, in use in the MSS. generally since the eleventh century

A.D.1  This form was an evolution from H (Phoenician □, he),

then ├ and ┤, then ∟ and û.2 This breathing (rough or smooth)

did not find a place in the Greek alphabet, and so is not found in

the early uncial MSS. It becomes therefore a difficult question

to tell whether the modern ignoring of the rough breathing was

the rule in the first century A.D. The MSS., as Hort3 points out,

are practically worthless on this point. The original use of H as

equal to h or the rough breathing was general in the old Attic

and the Doric, not the AEolic and Ionic. And even in the Attic

inscriptions the usage is very irregular and uncertain. Numerous

examples like HEKATON occur, but some like HEN also, so that

even H was not always rough.4 The modern English cockneys

have no monopoly of trouble with h's. In French h is silent as

l'homme. The Greeks always found the matter a knotty prob-

lem. The use of H=η in the Ionic and Attic (after 403 B.C.)

left the Greeks without a literary sign for h. The inscriptions

show that in the vernacular H continued to be so used for some

time.

          (b) INCREASING DE-ASPIRATION (Psilosis). But there was a

steady decrease in the use of the h sound. The Ionic, like the

AEolic, was distinguished by psilosis, and the κοινή largely5 fol-

lowed the Ionic in this respect. More certain is the use of the

aspirated consonants χ, θ, φ, which succeeded the older KH, TH,

ΠH.6  But certainly the rough breathing was in early use as the

 

            1 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 63. The marking of the rough breathing was

general in the earlier forms in vii/A.D., ib., p. 65.

            2 Cf. Bekker, Anec., II. 692, and Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 63.

            3 Intr. to Gk. N. T., p.  310. Cf. also Sitterley, Praxis in MSS. of the Gk.

Test., 1898, p. 32. See Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 25 f., for remarks on breath-

ings in the LXX MSS., where Aolic and Ionic psilosis occur in ἐπ’ ὁδοῦ

κατ’ ἕνα as well as exx. of aspirated consonants like καθ’ ὀφθαλμούς, καθ’ ἐνιαυτόν,

ἐφ’ εἶδεν, not to mention οὐκ ἑωράκασιν and οὐχ ἰδού. For further remarks on

breathings in the LXX see Swete, 0. T. in Gk., p. 302.

            4 Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., pp. 81, 91. The stop for the opening of the

glottis (lenis) easily becomes breathed (rough). Cf. also Thumb, Unters.

uber d. Spir. Asper. im Griech., 1888, p. 63.

            5 Cf. Thumb., p. 73 f. The Laconic Gk. used H in interaspiration as well

as at the beginning (ib., p. 8). Dawes (Pronun. of the Gk. Aspirates, 1894,

p. 103) is not able to reach a final decision as to whether the Gk. aspirates are

genuine aspirates like the Sans. according to Brugmann, Curtius, etc.

            6 Cf. Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 91. On the whole subject of the aspirated


             ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                 223

 

inscriptions show, though not with much consistency.1  Some-

times the rough breathing may be due to the disappearance of a

digamma, though sometimes a smooth breathing displaces it, as

ἔργον from Fέργον2 (cf. English ‘work’). Then again the disap-

pearance of σ has the same result, as ἰσαρός=ἱερός.3  It is not strange

therefore that usage in the κοινή is not uniform. Examples like

ὑπο’ αὐτοῦ, ὑφ’ αὐτοῦ, οὐκ ἑωρῶμεν, etc., appear in the Pergamum in-

scriptions, not to mention καθ’ ἕτος, καθ’ ἱδίαν, etc.4 The same

story of uncertainty is told elsewhere in the κοινή as in Magnesia,5

Herculaneum.6 Some of this variation is probably due to anal-

ogy,7 so that though "de-aspiration was the prevailing tendency,"8

yet the N. T. shows several examples in the opposite direction.

          (c) VARIATIONS IN THE MSS. (Aspiration and Psilosis). The

aspiration of the consonants κ, π, τ in case of elision is therefore

a matter of documentary evidence9 and occurs in the case of ἀντί,

ἐπί, κατά, μετά, οὐκ, ὑπό. The N. T. MSS. vary considerably among

themselves as in the LXX, though some like D in the Gospels

and Acts are wholly untrustworthy about aspiration.10 In general

Attic literary usage cannot be assumed to be the κοινή vernacular.

Hort11 prefers  Ἁδραμυντηνός (Ac. 27:2) like Hadrumetum.  Ἀλοάω

(1 Cor. 9:9 f.; 1 Tim. 5:18) is connected with ἅλως or ἀλωή and

may be compared with ἀπηλιώτης (ἥλιος).12  Hort (p. 144) prefers

avats (Mk. 5:3), but εἰλικρινής and εἰλικρινία, though εἱλ. has

ancient authority.   Ἀφελπίζοντες is read by DP in Lu. 6:35

and the LXX has several similar instances,13 not to mention one

 

consonants see Riem. and Goelzer, Phonet., pp. 194 ff., and for the dialects and

interaspiration see K.-B1., Bd. I, pp. 107-114.

            1 Cecil Bendall, Jour. of Philol., 1904, pp. 199 ff.

            2 R. Weiss, De Dig. etc., 1889, p. 47. Cf. also Paues, De Dig. Hesiodes

Quest., 1887, p. 48.

            3 Cf. Sommer, Griech. Lautstudien, 1905, p. 2. On metathesis in aspiration,

as ἕχω (ἔχω), see Meisterh., p. 102, exx. of ἕχω in Attic inscr. v/B.C. See also

article by Pernot in Rev. des Et. Grq., 1906, pp. 10-23, on La Metathese

dans les Dial. de Chio.

            4 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr. etc., pp. 116 ff. The Attic had only  ἴδιος, but

(Meisterh., p. 87).                                 5 Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 83.

            6 Cronert, Mem. Graec. Hercul., p. 152 f.

            7 Thumb, Hellen. etc., p. 64.

            8 Moulton, Prol., p. 44. Cf. also for the inscr., Dittenb., ἐφ’ ἕτος (458. 71),

καθ’ ἱδίαν (233. 49), and for the pap., Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901 (pp. 33, 434) and

1904 (p. 106). Cf. also Hort, Intr. to Gk. N. T., p. 312.

            9 Ib., p. 311.                              10 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 15.

            11 Intr. to Gk. N. T., p. 313; App., p. 160.

            12 W.-Sch., p. 40.                      13 Gregory, Prol., p. 91; Thack., p. 125.


224   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

in Hermas and in the Attic.1  In Ro. 8:20 W. H. accept ἐφ’

ἐλπίδι, while various MSS. support it in Ac. 2:26; 1 Cor. 9:10;

Ro. 4:18; 5:2; Tit. 1:2, and FG have καθ’ ἐλπίδα in Tit. 3:7.

Hort2 thinks this is due to digamma dropped as well as in the case

of ἀφίδω (Ph. 2:23), but analogy to acpopav may be the explana-

tion.3   Ἔφοδε is read by a few MSS. in Ac. 4:29 as ἐφῖδεν in

Lu. 1:25.  Gregory4 gives many examples of ἀφ--, ἐφ--, καθ-- with

ἐλπίζω and εἶδον in the LXX. W. H. offer οὐχ ἱδού as an alternative

reading in Ac. 2:7, while B reads οὐχ ἱδόντες in 1 Pet. 1:8 and οὐχ

εἶδον in Gal. 1:19. A has οὐχ ὅψεσθε in Lu. 17:22. W. H.5  put

οὐχ  Ἱουδαϊκῶς in the margin in Gal. 2:14.  Καθ’ ἱδίαν appears in א

once, in B eight times, in D three times, in Δ once (Mt. 14:23; 17:

1, 19; 20:17; 24:3; Mk. 4:34; 6:31; 9:28; 13:3). But W. H. no-

where accept it, not even when B combines with א or D.  אB have

it in Mt. 24:3. The form καθ’ ἱδίαν is common in the κοινή inscrip-

tions and the papyri. Καθείδωλον is read by M in Ac. 17:16. On the

other hand καθ’ ἕτος, so common in the κοινή (cf. Latin vetus), is

not found in the N. T., all MSS. in Lu. 2:41 reading κατ’ ἔτος.

Hort6 considers οὐκ ἔστηκεν (Jo. 8:44) to be merely the imperfect

indicative of στήκω.  So also as to ἔστηκεν in Rev. 12:4.  א has

ἐφιορκήσεις in Mt. 5:33, a form common in the Doric inscrip-

tions.7  DP have ἐφίορκος in 1 Tim. 1:10. In Rev. 12:11 A

reads οὐχ ἡγάπησεν, while οὐχ ὁλίγος is read in the LXX and pa-

pyri as well as a number of times in Ac. (12:18 by אA, 14:28

by א, 17:4 by B, 19:23 by אAD, 19:24 by א, 27:20 by A).

In Ac. 5:28 D has ἐφαγαγεῖν.  W. H. print on the other hand

ἀποκατιστάνει in Mk. 9:12 rather than ἀποκαταστάνει though with

hesitation.8  So likewise W. H. give ἐπίσταται instead of ἐφίσταται

 

            1 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 16. Cf. Thumb, Unters. d. Spir. Asper, p. 65.

            2 Notes on Orth., p. 143.

            3 Moulton, Prol., p. 44; Thumb, Spir. Asper, p. 71. Moulton (Cl. Rev.,

Mar., 1910, p. 53) now says: "I am quite willing to be convinced that the

long-lost digamma was an accessory here if no better explanation turns up."

Thumb (Spir. Asper, pp. 11, 71) admits the possibility of the digamma ex-

planation in some cases.                                                4 Prol., p. 91.

            5 Cf. Intr. to Gk. N. T., p. 313 f., where Hort really favours οὐχ  Ἱουδ. and

the rough breathing for all the forms of   Ἰούδας,  Ἰουδαῖος, etc. For the varia-

tions in the LXX MSS. see Thack., p. 125.

            6 Intr. to Gk. N. T., p. 312.

            7 Rutherford, New Phryn., p. 363. For this transfer of aspiration cf.

Curtius, Gk. Verb, II, 109. Nestle (Am. Jour. of Theol., July, 1909, p. 44S)

urges that, since the Gk. of the Bible is an "east-west language," attention

must be paid to oriental tongues. He notes that the Coptic has aspiration in

helpis, hisos, for ἐλπίς, ἴσος.                            8 Notes on Orth., p. 168.


                ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                     225

 

in 1 Th. 5:3 (like B in Sap. 6:8), a wholly unusual' absence of

aspiration in compounds of  ἵστημι.  For the LXX phenomena

see Thackeray, Gr., p. 127 f.  It is wholly doubtful whether ὀμεί-

ρομαι or ὁμείρομαι is right (1 Th. 2:8).  Οὐκ εὖρον in some MSS.

in Lu. 24:3, and οὐκ ἔνεκεν in 2 Cor. 7:12, Blass2 considers as cler-

ical errors, though they are common in the LXX and in the in-

scriptions.3 N. T. MSS. (late cursives) even have αἱτέω, ὁστεών,

ὅχλος, etc. For μηθείς, οὐθείς see this chapter p. 219, the Inter-

change of Consonants and chapter on Pronouns, pp. 750 f.

          (d) TRANSLITERATED SEMITIC WORDS. The aspirate in the

case of transliterated Semitic words (chiefly proper names) causes

some difficulty. Blass4 calls it "insoluble," though he accepts

Hort's practice as rational,5 expressing א and ע by the smooth

breathing and ה and ח by the rough breathing. The MSS. dis-

agree and are not consistent, but Blass calls the result of this

procedure "strange." Hence Hort argues for    Ἅβελ (ה) ,   Ἀβραάμ

(א),   Ἅγαβος (ע),   Ἅγαρ (ה),   Ἁκελδαμάχ (ח),  ἁλληλούϊα (ה),   Ἁλφαῖος

(ח),  Ἁνανίας (ה),   Ἅννα (ח),  Ἁρέτας (ח),   Ἁριμαθαία (ה),   Ἅρ Μαγεδών

(ה),  Ἐβέρ (ע),  Ἐβραῖος (ע),   Ἐβραΐς (ע),   Ἐβραϊστί (ע),6   Ἐλισαῖος (ע),

Ἐλμαδάμ (א),   ἐλωΐ (א),   Ἑμμώρ (ח),   Ἑνώχ (ח, but   Ἐνώς, א),  Ἑρρώμ

(ה, but  Ἐσλεί, א),  Εὕα (ח),  ἠλεί (א), but  Ἡλεί (ה),  Ἠλείας (א),  Ἤρ

(ע), ὔσσωπος (א),7 ὡσαννά (ה),  Ὡσηέ (ה).  Hort8 gives, moreover,

the smooth breathing to all names beginning with as יas  Ἠσαίας.

Besides he considers it a "false association"9 to connect   Ἰερεμίας,

 Ἰεριειχώ,  Ἰεροσόλυμα (--μείτης),  Ἰερουσαλήμ with ἱερός, though Blass

retains  Ἱεροσόλυμα rather inconsistently.10

          (e) THE USE OF BREATHINGS WITH ρ AND ρρ. W. H. follow

Tischendorf and Lachmann in dropping the breathings in ρρ as in

ἄρρητα (2 Cor. 12:4), though retaining the rough breathing with

initial ρ as in ῥήματα (Ib.). Winer11 argued that the Romans

heard an aspiration with ρρ, since they used Pyrrhus, Tyrrhenus,

etc. W. H. seem justified in using the smooth breathing with the

first ρ in the word ῤεραντισμένοι. (Heb. 10:22) by old Greek cus-

 

            1 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 144.              3 W.-Sch., p. 39.

            2 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 16.                                   4 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 16.

Hort, Intr. to N. T. Gk., p. 313. Cf. also Gregory, Prol., p. 106 f., for

list of these words.

            6 Strange as it may seem, "Hebrew" rather than "Ebrew" is modern (Hort,

Intr. to Gk. N. T., p. 313).

            7 Hort (Notes, etc., p. 144), however, merely follows custom and prints ὕσσ.

            8 Intr. to N. T. Gk., p. 313.                                9 Ib.

            10 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 16. Cf. Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 30 f.

            11 W.-M., p. 53.


226       A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

tom.1  The MSS., of course, give no help in the matter. The

breathing with ρ is not written in the modern Greek vernacular

text as in Pallis or Thumb.

          (f) THE QUESTION OF Αὑτοῦ. This is somewhat knotty. It

seems clear that as a rule αὐτοῦ and not αὑτοῦ is to be printed in

the N. T. A number of reasons converge2 on this point. The

older Greek often used αὑτοῦ rather than ἑαυτοῦ as shown by the

aspiration of the prepositions like ἀφ’ αὑτοῦ, etc.  In the N. T.

there is not a single case of such aspiration after elision save in a

few single MSS. Add to this the fact that the N. T. uses the re-

flexive pronoun much less than the earlier Greek, "with unusual

parsimony" (Hort). Besides the personal pronouns of the first

and second persons are frequently employed (Buttmann) where

the reflexive might have been used. Buttmann urges also the

point that in the N. T. we always have σεαυτοῦ, not σαυτοῦ.  The

earliest uncial MSS. of the N. T. and the LXX that use the dia-

critical marks belong to the eighth century, but they all have

αὐτοῦ, not αὑτοῦ.  Even in the early times it was largely a matter

of individual taste as to whether the personal or the reflexive pro-

noun was used. Blass (p. 35) indeed decides absolutely against

αὑτοῦ.  But the matter is not quite so easy, for the Kotin' inscrip-

tions give examples of ὑφ αὑτοῦ in first century B.C. and A.D.3

Mayser4 also gives a number of papyri examples like καθ’ αὑτοῦ

μεθ’ αὑτοῦ, ὑφ’ αὑτῶν, where the matter is beyond dispute. Hort

agrees with Winer in thinking that sometimes αὑτοῦ must be read

unless one insists on undue harshness in the Greek idiom. He in-

stances Jo. 2:24, αὐτὸς δὲ   Ἰησοῦς οὐκ ἐπίστευσεν ἁυτὸν αὐτοῖς, and

Lu. 23:12, προϋπῆρχον γὰρ ἐν ἔχθρᾳ ὄντες πρὸς αὑτούς. There are

other examples where a different meaning will result from the

smooth and the rough breathing as in 1 Jo. 5:10 (αὑτῷ), 18 (αὐ-

τόν αὐτοῦ, Eph. 1:5 (αὐτόν), 10 (αὐτῷ), Col. 1:20 (αὐτόν), 2:15

(αὐτῷ). W. H. print αὑτοῦ about twenty times. Winer leaves the

matter "to the cautious judgment of the editors."

               V. Accent.

          (a) THE AGE OF GREEK ACCENT. The MSS. are worth as lit-

tle for accent as for breathings. The systematic application of

accent in the MSS., like the regular use of the spiritus lenis, dates

 

            1 Cf. W.-Sch., p. 40 f.

            2 On the whole matter see Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 144 f.; W.-M., p. 188 f.;

Buttmann, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 111; Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 35.

            3 Nachm., Magn. Inschr., pp. 84, 144; Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 161.

            4 Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 306.


              ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                      227

 

from the seventh century A.D.1   Hort2 caustically remarks that

most modern grammarians have merely worked out "a consistent

system of accentuation on paper " and have not recovered the

Greek intonations of voice, though he has little to offer on the

subject. Chandler3 indeed laments that modern scholars scatter

their Greek accents about rather recklessly, but he adds: "In Eng-

land, at all events, every man will accent his Greek properly who

wishes to stand well with the world." It is a comfort to find one's

accents irreproachable, and Chandler rightly urges that the only

way to use the accents properly is to pronounce according to the

accent. The ancients were interested in Greek accent. Herodian

in his Καθολικὴ προσῳδία investigated the accent of 60,000 words,

but the bulk of his twenty books is lost. Chandler4 found most

help from Gottling, though others have written at length on the

subject.5  There are no accent-marks in the early inscriptions and

papyri; in fact tradition ascribes the invention of these signs as a

system to Aristophanes of Byzantium in the third century B.C.,

though the beginnings appear in the preceding century.6  He and

his disciple, Aristarchus, made the rules at any rate.7  The Alex-

andrian grammarians developed these rules, which have shown a

marvellous tenacity even to the present day in the modern Greek,

though, of course, some words would naturally vary in accent

with the centuries.8 There is the Harris papyrus of Homer in

the first century A.D. which has accents, and clearly the word had

the accent in pronunciation like English long before it was writ-

ten out. After the fourth century A.D. the use of accentual

rhythm in Greek in place of quantitative rhythm had a tendency

 

            1 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 66. Cf. also pp. 507 ff. on the Origin and History

of Accent.

            2 Intr. to Gk. N. T., p. 314.

            3 Gk. Accentuation (1881), p. xxiii.                   4 Ib., p. xvii.

            5 Cf. Meister, Bemerk. zur dorischen Accentuation (1883); Hadley, On the

Nat. and Theory of the Gk. Accent. (Ess. Phil. and Crit., pp. 110 ff.); Wheeler,

Die griech. Nominalaccente (1885); Bloomfield, Study of Gk. Accent (Am. Jour.

of Philol., 1883); Wack., Beitr. zur Lehre vom griech. Akzent; Brugmann,

Griech. Gr. (1900), pp. 150 ff.; K.-B1., I, pp. 317 ff.; for further lit. see Brug-

mann above. On accent changes in mod. Gk. see Hatz., Einl., pp. 418-440;

Thumb, Handb., p. 28 f. For the accent in the LXX see Helbing, Gr. d.

Sept., p. 24. Here the same MSS. present the same problems that we have

in the N. T.

            6 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 62.      7 Riem. and Goelzer, Phonet., p. 77.

            8 Krumb., Beitr. zu einer Gesch. der griech. Spr., Kuhn's Zeitschr. fur

Sprachl., 1885, p. 521. Cf. also Hats., Einl. etc., p. 418; Chandler, Gk. Accen-

tuation, p. v; Brugmann, Griech, Gr., p. 150.


228    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREED NEW TESTAMENT

 

to make the accent rather more stable.1 "Of all the phonetic

peculiarities of a language accent is the most important."2  The

earlier use of accents and breathings was probably "for the text

of poetry written in dialect"3 (cf. our reading-books for children).

They were not written out "in ordinary prose till the times of

minuscule writing," though Euthalius (A.D. 396) made use of

them in his edition of the N. T.4 The Christian hymns early

show signs of changing from tone (pitch) to stress as is the rule in

modern Greek. Cf. Thumb, Handb., p. 6.

          (b) SIGNIFICANCE OF ACCENT IN THE Κοινή. In Greek it is

pitch, not stress, that is expressed by the accent, though in mod-

ern Greek the accents indicate stress. "In the ancient Sanskrit

and the ancient Greek the rise and fall in musical tone was very

marked."5 In English we are familiar with stress-accent. "Had-

ley has ably argued that the compass of tone used by the Greeks

was a musical fifth, i.e. from C= do to G= sol, involving also the

intermediate third or E= me."6  It was not a stronger current of

breath,7 but a higher musical note that we have. It was in a

word "das musikalische Moment."8  Hadley ("Nature and Theory

of Gk. Accent," Essays Philol. and Crit., p. 111 f.) points out that

προσῳδία comes from a root meaning ‘to sing’ (like the Latin ac-

centus) and so ὀξύς and βαρύς answer to our high and low pitch.

Giles9 thinks that in the original Indo-Germanic language pitch

and stress-accent were more evenly balanced. The accent singles

out one syllable sharply and raises it higher than the rest, though

as a matter of fact each syllable in a word has an accent or pitch

lower down in the scale: Cf. the secondary accent in the English

"incompatibility." The Harris papyrus of Homer even accents

every syllable in each word.10  Then again "the accent of a sen-

tence is as much under the influence of a law of some kind as the

accent of the word."11 Language without accent or musical va-

 

            1 Sophocles, Lex. of Rom. and Byz. Period, p. 48.

            2 Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 91.    3 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 14.

            4 Ib. Cf. Gregory, Prol., p. 114, for specimen from Euthalius.

            5 Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 92.

            6 Harris, MS. Notes on Gk. Gr. Cf. Riem. and Goelzer, Phonet., p. 77 f.,

for a discussion of the musical aspect of the matter.

            7 Arnold and Conway, The Restored Pronun. of Gk. and Lat., 1895, p. 18.

            8 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 129.          9 Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 94.

            10 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 65.

            11 Bloomfield, Study of Gk. Accent, Am. Jour. of Philol., 1883, p. 22. Cf.

Plato, Crat., 399 A–B. Hirt (Der Indoger. Akzent, 1895, p. 17) contends for

the two-tone principle.


                 ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                 229

 

riety in tone would be hopelessly monotonous and ineffective.

An instance of the importance of accent and breathings is seen in

οὗ οὐ, Ac. 19:40.

          (c) SIGNS OF ACCENT. In practical usage (in our school gram-

mars) there is only one distinction, the accented syllable and the

unaccented syllables. The Greeks themselves distinguished the

pronunciation of the acute and the circumflex. The differ-

ence is well illustrated by εἶμι and εἰμί. The three signs (acute

or ὀξεῖα, grave or βαρεῖα, circumflex or περισπωμένη) come to

symbolize the higher pitch of the accented syllable.1  Originally

the accented syllable was marked by the acute and all the unac-

cented syllables by the grave (merely the absence of the acute),

but by and by this use of the grave accent was felt to be useless

and was dropped.2 Then the grave accentual mark of falling in-

flection was used for the acute when an oxytone word comes before

another word (not enclitic), though this "grave" accent has the

pitch of the unaccented syllable. Similarly in contraction of two

syllables with acute and grave (  <  >) arose the circumflex, the grave

and the acute making acute still. The actual use in pronunciation

of both acute and grave in the contracted syllable disappeared, so

that the circumflex in pitch differed little, if any, from the acute.

The difference, for instance, between the acute in δηλώσαι, and the

circumflex in δηλῶσαι at was not perceptible in sound.3 The Greek

and the Latin agree in having the accent only on one of the three

last syllables and thus differ from English and French for instance.

It is not necessary here to go into the rules (not wholly arbitrary)

which the Greeks developed for the accent of words. In the use

of unaccented words (proclitics or enclitics) Greek does not differ

radically from English. If the Greek has ἐν οἴκῳ, the English has

"at-home." If the Greek has εἰπέ μοι, the English has "tell-me."4

          (d) LATER DEVELOPMENTS IN ACCENT. There was not in-

deed uniformity among the dialects in the use of accent. They

agreed only in the one point of not accenting further back than

the third syllable from the end. "In other respects the Greek

dialects show the widest divergencies in their accentuation. The

two antipodes are AEolic and Doric, which are so closely allied

phonetically:  AEolic throws the accent as far back as possible in

 

            1 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 66.      2 Ib., pp. 65, 68.

            3 Hadley, Uber Wesen and Theorie der griech. Beton., 1872, pp. 409, 415.

            4 Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 96. Giles thinks that words like ἐφερόμεθα

originally had the accent further back. Cf. Riem. and Goelzer, Phonet.,

p. 80, for Plato's word of 17 syllables and Aristophanes' word of 78.


230     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

all words, e.g. βασίλευς=βασιλεύς, . . .; Doric, on the contrary,

faithfully preserves the original oxytone accent. Between these

two dialects lie Ionic and Attic, which, however, are much nearer

to Doric than to AEolic. But all the dialects, including Doric,

observe the rule that, in those forms of the verb which are capa-

ble of being conjugated, the accent goes back as far as possible."1

AEolic, for instance, has ἥ ση where the Attic has ἡ σή.  But all

the dialects2 have ἐγώ, ἔγωγε.  On this point in general see

Kuhner-Blass, I, pp. 323 ff. The Dorians even had ἀνθρώποι,

ἐλύσαν, etc. Perfect uniformity was no more possible in Greek

than in English. The modern Greek preserves the three-syllable

accent rule. Examples like ἔπιασε, ἐβράδυασε are not exceptions,

since the ι and υ count as consonants. Cf. Thumb, Handb., p. 28.

French follows tone like the ancient Greek. Pecheur is 'fisher,'

while pecheur is 'sinner,' for example, a difference only in quality,

not in accent.

          (e) N.T. PECULIARITIES. Where so much is in doubt, ex-

cessive refinement is certainly not desirable. But the follow-

ing points call for remark, and Gregory3 can be consulted for the

actual evidence (very slight) from the N. T. MSS. on the subject

of accent. D alone among the older uncials has the accent (and

that the occasional circumflex) save by the hand of a corrector.

          1. Shortening Stem-Vowels. There is quite a tendency in the

κοινή towards shortening some of the stem-vowels, especially in

words in --μα.  Hence W. H. do not follow the Attic accent here,

but that of the κοινή, and give us κλίμα, κρίμα, μίγμα (cf. ἕλιγμα),

πόμα, χρίσμα, though as to χρίσμα Blass4 suggests that χρῖσμα is

correct because of χριστός and because B (1 Jo. 2:20, 27) has

χρεῖσμα.  Analogy plays havoc with rules. Herodian5 says that

ι and υ were usually shortened before So W. H. give us κῆρυξ,

κηρύξαι, στηρίξαι (Ro. 16:25), probably φοῖνιξ, χοῖνιξ. Accord-

ing to Winer-Schmiedel6 this rule applies to ψ also, but W. H.

and Blass7 do not agree. So W. H. have θλίψις, ῥίψαν (Lu.

 

            1 Henry, Comp. Gr. of Gk. and Lat., Elliott's transl., 1890, p. 93 f. Cf.

Meister, Bemerk. zur dorischen Accentuation, p. 1.

            2 Cf. Wheeler, Griech. Nom. etc., p. 11, and Wack., Beitr., p. 19.

            3 Prol., p. 99 f.

            4 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 15. Cf. W.-Sch., p. 67, for further parallels. Also

W.-M., p. 57.                            5 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 15.              6 P. 68.

            7 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 15. Blass urges that B has θλεῖψις, but W. H. refuse

to follow B in matters of orthography. But the Herculaneum rolls here rein-

force B with ει before ψ.  On the whole subject see Lipsius, Gr. Unters., pp.

31 ff.; Lobeck, Parall., pp. 400 ff.; Cobet, N. T. Vatic., pp. xlix ff.

 


            ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                          231

 

4:35). By parity of reasoning W. H. reject the circumflex ac-

cent in ἑλκύσαι, λίνον, μύρον, σπίλος, στύλος, συντετρίφθαι (Mk. 5:4),

though συντρῖβον (Lu. 9:39) and σκῦλα (Lu. 11:22). Cf. μῦθος,

μαργαρῖται, νῖκος, σῖτος, σῦκον etc. W. H. read ψύχος also. The

length of υ in κύπτω is uncertain; ἀνακύψαι and παρακύψαι usually

appear in the N. T. W. H. have, however, κρᾶζον in Gal. 4:6

and λαῖλαψ in Mk. 4:37. But ἑστάναι (Ac. 12:14) is right, though

ἆραι (Mt. 24:17), θυμιᾶσαι (Lu. 1:9) because of long a. Cf. also

ἐπᾶραι (Lu. 18:13), ἐπιφᾶναι (Lu. 1:79), πρᾶξαι. (Ac. 26:9), but

πιάσαι (Jo. 7:30). So  καταλῦσαι (Mt. 5:17), κατευθῦναι (Lu. 1:79)

and κωλῦσαι (Ac. 10:47).

          2. Separate Words. These are not so easily classified. W. H.

read ἀγοραῖοι, not ἀγόραιοι; ἄντικρυ,  not ἀντικρύ; ἀντίπερα, not ἀντι-

πέρα(ν); ἀπόδεκτος, not ἀποδεκτός but ἐκλεκτός, εὐλογητός, μισθωτός;

ἀρεσκία (from ἀρεσκεύω) with which compare ἐριθία (from ἐριθεύω);

ἀρεσκία (Attic ἄχρειος), as also ἔρημος (Attic ἐρῆμος), ἕτοιμος (Attic

ἑτοῖμος), μωρός (Attic μῶρος), ὅμοιος (Attic ὁμοῖος), χλωρός (Attic χλῶ-

ρος); βραδυτής (3d decl.), but ἁδρότης (3d decl.); γαζοφυλάκοιν, not

--εῖον and εἰδώλιον, with which compare τελώνιον, γλωσσόκομον being

for the earlier γλωσσοκόμιον; δέσμη, not δεσμή; διετής (Mt. 2:16),

not διέτης (Attic), and so with other compounds of -ετης, like

ἑκατονταετής, etc., but ἑκατονταρχῶν (Ac. 23:17) is from άρχης, not

--αρχος; εἰπόν is the imperative (Mt. 18:17), for εἶπον is only

Attic, and Charax calls εἰπόν Syracusan,1 with which one may

compare ἴδε (ἰδέ only Attic according to the Alexandrian gram-

marians, though Bornemann urged ἰδέ when verb and ἴδε when

exclamation) and λάβε (λαβέ only Attic); θρησκός (Jas. 1:26), not

θρῆσκος; ἱδρώς (Lu. 22:44), not ἱδρῶς; ἱμάντα (Mk. 1:7), not the

Attic ἱμᾶντα; ἴσος, not the ἶσος2;  ἰχθύς (Mt. 7:10), not ἰχθῦς;

ὀσφύς (Mt. 3:4), not ὀσφῦς; ἰσχύς, not ἰσχῦς; κλείς in nominative

singular (Rev. 9:1), though κλεῖς (1:18) and κλεῖδας (Mt. 16:19)

in accusative plural, etc., with which compare πούς (Mk. 9:45),

not ποῦς, and σής (Mt. 6:19), not σῆς; κτίστης (1 Pet. 4:19),

not κτιστής, as γνώστης, etc.; κρύπτη, not κρυπτή (Lu. 11:33); μογι-

λάλος (Mk. 7:32), not λᾶλος; μυλών (Mt. 24:41) is read only by

DHM and most of the cursives, μύλος being correct; μυριάδων (--άς)

as in Lu. 12:1; Rev. 5:11, not the Attic μυριαδῶν, and so as to

χιλιάδων; ὀργυιά (Ac. 27:28), not ὄργυια; οὐά (Mk. 15:29), not

οὐᾶ; ποίμνιον (Lu. 12:32), not ποιμνίον, and τρύβλιον in Mk. 14:20

 

            1 Cf. W.-M., p. 58.

            2 As shown in W.-M. (p. 60), the N. T. MSS. have ἔσω, not εἴσω, though εἰς, not ἐς.


232      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

(called no diminutive by some),1 but τεκνίον always; πλήμμυρα (Lu.

6:48) is preferred by Winer-Schmiedel2 as nominative to πλημ-

μύρης rather than –μύρα; πονηρός always, not πόνηρος in the physical

sense (Rev. 16:2) and πονηρός in the moral (Gal. 1:4)3;  πρῷρα

(Ac. 27:41), not πρώρα; σπεῖρα (Mk. 15:16), not σπείρα; φλύαρος

(1 Tim. 5:13), not φλυαρός.  The compound adverbs ἐπέκεινα, ὑπερ-

έκεινα have thrown back the accent.

          3. Difference in Sense. With some words the accent makes a

difference in the sense and is quite important. We have, for in-

stance,  Ἅγια, not ἁγιὰ, in Heb. 9:2. W. H. read ἀλλά, not ἄλλα,

in Jo. 6:23. In Jas. 1:15 W. H. have ἀποκυεῖ (from –έω), not

ἀποκύει (from –κύω). So W. H. print ἆρα (interrog.) in Gal. 2:17,

not ἄρα (illative).  Αὐτή and αὕτη are easily confused, but W. H.

prefer αὕτη to αὐτή in Mt. 22:39 (αὐτῇ in margin); Ro. 7:10;

1 Cor. 7:12; and αὐτή to αὕτη in Lu. 2:37; 7:12; 8:42; Ro.

16:2.  In Rev. 2:24 the adjective βαθέα is correct, not the sub-

stantive βάθεα (uncontracted from βάθος).  Δεξιολάβος or δεξιόλα-

βος is possible in Ac. 23:23 (cf. Winer-Schmiedel, p. 69). So

W. H. give us ἐγχρῖσαι (infinitive) in Rev. 3:18, not ἔγχρισαι

(imperative). Cf. also ἐπιτιμήσαι (Jude 9), optative, not infinitive

--ῆσαι. Note the difference between φοβηθῆτε (subjunctive) and

φοβήθητε (imperative) in Lu. 12:5. In Jo. 7:34, 36, W. H. prefer

εἰμί rather than εἶμι (not elsewhere used in the N. T. save in com-

position with prepositions ἀπό, εἰς, ἐξ, ἐπί, σύν). In Mk. 13:28

and Mt. 24:32 W. H. have ἐκφύῃ (present active subjunctive),

not ἐκφυῇ (second aorist passive subjunctive). In Lu. 19:29;

21:37 W. H. prefer  Ἐλαιῶν, not  Ἐλαιών (the correct text in Ac.

1:12, and possibly in Luke also according to the papyri, though

 Ἐλαιῶνα would be the form expected).4  In Mk. 4:8, 20, W. H. put

ἐν in the text and ἕν in the margin.   Ἔνι, not ἐνί, occurs with οὐκ

several times, once (1 Cor. 6:5) οὐκ ἔνι ἐν.  In Lu. 9:38, W. H.

read ἐπιβλέψαι (infinitive), not ἐπίβλεψαι (imperative).  In 1 Cor.

5:11 W. H. read (subjunctive), not (conjunction as Rec.). In

Ro. 1:30 W. H. follow most editors in giving θεοστυγεῖς (pas-

sive), not θεοστύγεις (active sense of the adjective). In Mk. 5:29

all editors have the perfect ἴαται, not the present ἰᾶται. In Lu.

22:30 W. H. read καθῆσθε (subjunctive), not κάθησθε (indicative)

nor καθήσεσθε (future, margin).  In 1 Cor. 9:21 W. H. prefer

κερδανῶ (future indicative) to κερδάνω (aorist subjunctive), and in

 

            1 Cf. W.-S., p. 73.                     2 Ib., p. 72.                   3 Ib., p 69.

            4 Cf. Moulton, Prol., p. 69. On accent of the vernac. see Apostolides,

Γλκωσσικαὶ Μελέται (1906).


                ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                      233

 

1 Cor. 6:2 κρινοῦσιν (future) to κρίνουσιν (present indicative in

marg.). In Mk. 12:40 we have μακρά, not μακρᾷ. In 1 Cor. 3:14

W. H. prefer μενεῖ (future) to μένει (present), and in Jo. 14:17 they

have μένει.  In 1 Cor. 4:15 (14:19) and Mt. 18:24 no distinction

can be made in the accent of μυρίοι (‘innumerable’) and μύριοι

(‘ten thousand’) because of the cases. Dr. E. J. Goodspeed, of Chi-

cago University (Expository Times, July, 1909, p. 471 f.), suggests

ὠφελήθης in Mk. 7:11 instead of ὠφεληθῇς. It is entirely possible.

In 1 Cor. 14:7 ὅμως is correct, not ὡμῶς-ὁμοίως.  In Jo. 18:37

W. H. give οὐκοῦν, not οὔκουν, in Pilate's question. In Ac. 28:6

W. H. print πίμπρασθαι (μι verb), not πεμπρᾶσθαι (ω verb). In

Rev. 17:5 πορνῶν (feminine) is probably right, not πόρνων (mas-

culine).  Πρωτότοκος (Col. 1 : 15), not πρωτοτόκος, is manifestly

right. The difference between the interrogative τίς and the in-

definite τὶς calls for frequent attention. In Heb. 5:12 W. H.

have τινά, not τίνα, but in Heb. 3:16 τίνες, not τινές, and in 3:17

τίσιν, not τισίν.  While in Mt. 24:41, 1 Th. 4:6, 1 Cor. 15:8 and

16:16 the article τῷ is to be read, not the indefinite τῳ, which

form does not occur in the N. T. In 1 Cor. 10:19 τί ἐστιν (twice)

is not interrogative, but the enclitic indefinite with the accent of

ἐστιν.  In Jas. 3:6 τροχός (‘wheel’) is properly read, not τρόχος  

(‘course’).  In Mk. 4:12 W. H. read συνίωσιν, not συνιῶσιν, as

συνίουσιν in Mt. 13:13. Winer1 considers the suggestion of φωτῶν

for φώτων in Jas. 1:17 "altogether absurd."

          4. Enclitics (and Proclitics). Proclitics are regular in the N. T.

The accent of enclitics calls for comment. As a rule W. H. do not

accent them. So we have αὐτόν τινας (Mk. 12:13), εἶναί τινα (Ac.

5:36), ἰδού τινες (Mt. 28:11), ὁδόν εἰσιν (Lu. 8 : 12), ἀσύνετοί ἐστε

(Mk. 7:18), γάρ ἐστε (Mk. 13:11), καί φησι (Ac. 10:31; 25:24).

However, plenty of cases call for accent on the enclitic, as, for

example, in εὑρεῖν τινάς (Ac. 19:1) for emphasis, γάρ, φησίν (Heb. 8:5

and cf. Mt. 14:8; Ac. 25:5, 22; 26:25; 1 Cor. 6:16; 2 Cor. 10:10)

for clearness in punctuation, καὶ εἰσίν (Mt. 19:12 and cf. Ac. 5:25)

for emphasis, θεοῦ ἐσμέν (1 Jo. 3:2), ὑπὸ τινῶν (Lu. 9:8) likewise,

οὐκ εἰμί (Jo. 1:21). In ὅπου εἰμί (Jo. 7:34, 36) the accent is regular,

though some critics wrongly prefer εἶμι.

          The use of ἐστίν and ἔστιν demands special comment. When

unemphatic, not at the beginning of a sentence, not preceded by

ἀλλ’, εἰ, καί, οὐκ, ὅτι, τοῦτ’,  or a paroxytone syllable, as, for example,

in  Ἰουδαίων ἐστίν (Jo. 4:22), we have unaccented ἐστιν as in ἀγρός

ἐστιν (Mt. 13:38, 39), καθώς ἐστιν (1 Jo. 3:2), etc. In some ex-

 

            1 W.-M., p. 62.


234   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

amples of mild emphasis W. H. have ἐστίν, as in νῦν ἐστίν (Jo.

4:23; 5:25), ποῦ ἐστίν (Mt. 2:2; Mk. 14:14). But the cases

are numerous where ἔστιν is correct, as when it is emphatic, and

expresses existence or possibility, as in εἶδες ἔστιν (Rev. 17:18),

αὐτοῦ ἔστιν (Ac. 2:29),  ἅγιον ἔστιν (Ac. 19:2), ὁ εἷς ἔστιν (Rev.

17:10), οὐδεὶς ἔστιν  (Lu. 1:61; 7:28; 18:29).   Ἔστιν is also the

accent at the beginning of sentences, as in Jo. 21:25; 1 Cor. 15:41;

1 Jo. 5:16 f.; Heb. 11:1. Cf. ἐστίν in Col. 1:15 and ἔστιν in

1:17. Then again we have, according to the usual rule, ἔστιν

after ἀλλ’  (Jo. 13:10), εἰ (1 Cor. 15:44), καὶ (Mk. 12:11; 2 Cor.

4:3), ὅτι (2 Th. 2:4; Mk. 6:55; Heb. 11:6), but ὅτι ἐστίν

(Ac. 23:5) when the idea of existence is not stressed, οὐκ (1 Cor.

11:20; Ro. 8:9, etc.), τοῦτ’ (Mk. 7:2; Ro. 7:18). W. H. give

only ἐστίν after ποῦ (Jo. 9:12; 11:57; Mk. 14:14).

          Sometimes two enclitics come together. Here the critics differ

and W. H.1 do not make clear the reasons for their practice. In

Ac. 13:15 W. H. have εἴ τις ἔστιν and in Gal. 6:15 περιτομή τι

ἔστιν, because they take go ἔστιν to be emphatic in both instances. In

Jo. 6:51  W. H. have σάρξ μου ἐστίν.  But in many examples the

first enclitic is accented and the second unaccented as in Lu. 8:46

ἥψατό μού τις, 10:29 τίς ἐστίν μου, Jo. 5:14 χεῖρόν σοί τι, 8:31

μαθηταί μού ἐστε, 12:47 ἐάν τίς μου, 14:28 μείζων μού ἐστιν Ac. 2:25

δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, 25:5 εἴ τί ἐστιν,  25:14 ἀνήρ τίς ἐστιν, 1 Cor. 10:19

εἰδωλόθυτόν τί ἐστιν and εἴδωλόν τί ἐστιν, 11:24 τοῦτό μού ἐστιν,

2 Cor. 11:16 μή τίς με, Ro. 3:8 καθώς φασίν τινες Heb. 1:10

χειρῶν σού εἰσιν, 2:6 δέ πού τις, Tit. 1:6 εἴ τίς ἐστιν. Modern Greek

only has a second accent when the accent is in the third syllable

as in τ’ ἅρματά μας (Thumb, Handbook, p. 29).

          The personal pronouns now have the accent in W. H. and

now are without it, as ὀφθαλμῷ σοῦ and ὀφθαλμοῦ σου (both in

Mt. 7:4). Cf. also ἐγώ σε (Jo. 17:4), σύ με (17:8), but τί ἐμοὶ

καὶ σοί (Lu. 8:28).  With prepositions generally the enclitics are

accented, as ἐν σοί (Jo. 17:21), though ἔμπροσθέν μου and ὀπίσω μου

(Jo. 1:30 both, and so continually with these two prepositions).

 Ἐνώπιον ἐμοῦ (Lu. 4:7) and ἐνώπιόν μου (Ac. 2:25) both appear.

With the prepositions usually ἐμοῦ, not μου, occurs as ἕνεκα ἐμοῦ

(Mt. 5:11). It is only with πρός that we have much trouble.

The N. T. editors have generally printed πρός σε, but W. H. have

that only in Mt. 25:39, elsewhere πρός σέ as in Mt. 26:18.

Usually we have, according to W. H., πρός με as in Mt. 25:36;

Jo. 6:65; 7:37, etc., and where the "me" is emphatic in sense,

 

          1 Cf. W.-Sch., p. 77.


               ORTHOGRAPHY AND. PHONETICS                      235

 

as Mt. 3:14; 11:28, in the first of which Tisch. and Griesbach

have πρὸς μέ, a usage not followed by W. H., though kept in the

LXX text of B, as in Is. 48:16; etc.1  W. H. a few times prefer

πρὸς ἐμέ  (not enclitic) as in Lu. 1:43; Jo. 6:35, 37 (both ways

here), 44 (marg.), 45; Ac. 22:8, 13; 23:22; 24:19. Occasionally

the enclitic τινὲς is found at the beginning of a sentence, as in Mt.

27:47; Lu. 6:2; Jo. 13:29; Ph. 1:15; 1 Tim. 5:24.

          5. Proper Names cannot always be brought under rules, for in

Greek, as in English, men claim the right to accent their own

names as they will. On the accent of the abbreviated proper

names see chapter V, v. It is difficult to make a clear line of

distinction as to why   Ἀντίπας (Rev. 2:13) is proper, but  Ἀρτεμᾶς

(Tit. 3:12), save that in  Ἀρτεμίδωρος the accent was already

after μ.  But cf. Κλεόπας (Lu.. 24:18) and Κλωπᾶς (Jo. 19:25).2

In general one may say that proper names (geographical and

personal) throw the accent back, if the original adjectives or sub-

stantives were oxytone. This is for the sake of distinction.  Ἀλεξαν-

δρινός (Ac. 27:6; 28:11) is the adjective.   Ἄσσος (Ac. 20:13 f.)

is doubtless correct, though Pape gives   Ἀσσός also.3  In   Ἀχαϊκός

(1 Cor. 16:17) the accent is not thrown back nor is it in  Ἀπολλώς

(1 Cor. 16:12).   Ἀσύνκριτος (Ro. 16:14) retains the accent of

the adjective, like Τρόφιμος (Ac 20:4) and  Ὑμέναιος (1 Tim. 1:

20).  But we have Βλάστος (Ac. 12:20), Διοτρέφης (3 Jo. 9),  Ἐπαί-

νετος (Ro. 16:5),   Ἔραστος (16:23),  Ἑρμογένης. (2 Tim. 1:15),

Εὔτυχος (Ac. 20:9), Κάρπος (2 Tim. 4:13), probably  Ὀνησίφορος

(2 Tim. 1:16; 4:19), Πάταρα (Ac. 21:1), Πύρρος (Ac. 20:4),

Συντύχη (Ph. 4:2), Σωσθένης (1 Cor. 1:2), Τίμων (Ac. 6:5), Τύ-

χικος (Ac. 20:4) Φίλητος (2 Tim. 2:17). But Χριστός always re-

tains the oxytone accent whether proper name (1 Tim. 1:1) or

verbal adjective (Mt. 16:16). In 2 Tim. 4:21 Λίνος, not Λῖνος,

is read. So Τίτος (2 Cor. 2:13, etc.). In Ac. 27:17 Σύρτις is read

by W. H. But φῆλιξ in Ac. 24:22, etc.

          6. Foreign Words. These always give occasion for diversity

of usage in transliterating them into another tongue. Blass4

lets the quantity of the vowel in Latin determine the accent in

the Greek equivalent for Latin words. So Marcus, Μᾶρκος, etc.,

but W. H. do not accept this easy principle and give us Μάρκος

in Ac. 12:25, etc.,  Κρίσπος (1 Cor. 1:14), etc. W. H. likewise

 

            1 Cf. Lipsius, Gr. Unters., p. 61. Cf. also W.-Sch., p. 78.

            2 In W.-Sch., p. 74 f., see remarks on the subject.

            3 Cf. W.-Sch., p. 73. This word is, of course, not to be confounded with

ἆσσον (Ac. 27:13) as Text. Rec. did.                 4 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 15.


236     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

throw the accent back on Latin names like Κούαρτος (Ro. 16:23),

Πρίσκιλλα (Ac. 18:2), Σέκουνδος (Ac. 20:4), Τέρτυλλος (24:2), but

we have on the other hand Γαῖος (Ro. 16:23), not Γάϊος, Οὐρ=

βανός (Ro. 16:9), Σιλουανός (2 Cor. 1:19), Σκευᾶς (Ac. 19:14).1

          But not even Blass attempts to bring the Semitic words under

regular rules. Still, it is true, as Winer2 shows, that indeclinable

Semitic words (especially proper names) have the accent, as a

rule, on the last syllable, though the usage of Josephus is the con-

trary, because he generally inflects the words that in the LXX

and the N. T. are indeclinable. So   Ἀαρών,   Ἀβαδδών,   Ἀβιά,   Ἀβιούδ,

 Ἀβραάμ, to take only the first two pages of Thayer's Lexicon,

though even here we find on the other side   Ἅβελ and   Ἀβιάθαρ.

If you turn over you meet   Ἅγαρ,  Ἀδάμ,  Ἀδδεί,  Ἀδμείν,   Ἀζώρ, etc.

It is not necessary here to give a full list of these proper names,

but reference can be made to Lu. 3:23-38 for a good sample.

In this list some indeclinable words have the accent on the penult,

as  Ἐλιέζερ (29),  Ζοροβάβελ (27), Λάμεχ (36), Φάλεκ (35).3 The in-

flected Semitic words often throw the accent back, as  Ἄζωτος,

 Ἰάκωβος, Λάζαρος.  Many of the Aramaic words accent the ultima,

as  Ἀββά, Γολγοθά,  Κορβάν,  Ἐλωί, σαβαχθανεί, etc. For further re-

marks on the subject see Helbing, Gr. d. Sept:, pp. 26-31. The

difficulties of the LXX translators are well illustrated here by

Helbing.

          VI. Pronunciation in the Κοινή. This is indeed a knotty

problem and has been the occasion of fierce controversy. When

the Byzantine scholars revived the study of Greek in Italy, they

introduced, of course, their own pronunciation as well as their

own spelling. But English-speaking people know that spelling is

not a safe guide in pronunciation, for the pronunciation may

change very much when the spelling remains the same. Writing

is originally an effort to represent the sound and is more or less

successful, but the comparison of Homer with modern Greek is a

fruitful subject.4  Roger Bacon, as Reuchlin two centuries later,

adopted the Byzantine pronunciation.5 Reuchlin, who intro-

duced Greek to the further West, studied in Italy and passed on

the Byzantine pronunciation. Erasmus is indirectly responsible

for the current pronunciation of ancient Greek, for the Byzan-

 

            1 Cf. W.-Sch., p. 75.                                          2 W.-M., p. 59.

            3 Cf. also Gregory, Prol., p. 102 f.; W.-Sch., p. 75; Westcott, Notes on

Orth., pp. 155, 159; Thackeray, pp. 150 ff.

            4 Blass, Ausspr. des Griech., 1888, p. 7.

            5 Nolan, The Gk. Gr. of Roger Bacon, p. xx.


            ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                 237

 

tine scholars pronounced ancient and modern alike. Jannaris1

quotes the story of Voss, a Dutch scholar (1577-1649), as to how

Erasmus heard some learned Greeks pronounce Greek in a very

different way from the Byzantine custom. Erasmus published a

discussion between a lion and a bear entitled De Recta Latini

Graecique sermonis pronuntiatione, which made such an impres-

sion that those who accepted the ideas advanced in this book were

called Erasmians and the rest Reuchlinians. As a matter of fact,

however, Engel has shown that Erasmus merely wrote a literary

squib to "take off" the new non-Byzantine pronunciation, though

he was taken seriously by many. Dr. Caspar Rene Gregory

writes me (May 6, 1912) : "The philologians were of course down

on Engel and sided gladly with Blass. It was much easier to go

on with the totally impossible pronunciation that they used than

to change it." Cf. Engel, Die Aussprachen des Griechischen,

1887. In 1542 Stephen Gardiner, Chancellor of the University

of Cambridge, "issued an edict for his university, in which, e.g.

it was categorically forbidden to distinguish at from ε, ει and οι

from ι in pronunciation, under penalty of expulsion from the

Senate, exclusion from the attainment of a degree, rustication

for students, and domestic chastisement for boys!"2  Hence

though the continental pronunciation of Greek and Latin was

"Erasmian," at Cambridge and Oxford the Reuchlinian influence

prevailed, though with local modifications. Geldart,3 however,

complains that at Eton, Rugby and Harrow so little attention

is paid to pronouncing according to accent that most Greek

scholars handle the accents loosely. The Classical Review (April,

1906, p. 146 f.) has the scheme approved by the Philological So-

cieties of Cambridge and Oxford for "The Restored Pronuncia-

tion of Latin," which is the virtual adoption of the Continental

principle. The modern Greeks themselves rather vehemently in-

sist that ancient Greek should be pronounced as modern Greek

is. Muller,4 for instance, calls the "Erasmian" pronunciation

"false" because it treats Greek "as dead." Geldart (Modern

Gk. Language in Its Relation to Ancient Gr., p. vii) says: "Mod-

ern Greek is nothing but ancient Greek made easy." It is not

 

            1 Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 31 f. Cf. Mayser, Gr., pp. 138-151.

            2 Blass, Pronun. of Anc. Gk., Purton's transl., p. 3.

            3 Guide to Mod. Gk., p. X.

            4 Hist. Gr. der hell. Spr. (pp. 26, 36). In pp. 35-40 he states the case

against the squib of Erasmus. Cf. Engel (Die Ausspr. des Griech., 1887) who

defends the mod. Gk. method, as already stated.


238     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

quite as simple as that.  Foy1 properly distinguishes between the

old Greek vocal sounds and the modern Greek and refers to the

development of Latin into the several Romance languages. There

is this difference in the Greek, however, that it has only one

modern representative (with dialectical variations) of the ancient

tongue. One must not make the mistake of comparing the pro-

nunciation of the modern Greek vernacular with the probable

pronunciation of the literary Attic of the fifth century B.C. Then,

as now, there was the literary and the vernacular pronunciation.

The changes in pronunciation that have come in the modern

Greek have come through the Byzantine Greek from the κοινή

and thus represent a common stream with many rills. The vari-

ous dialects have made contributions to the pronunciation of the

κοινή and so of the modern Greek. In cultivated Athens at its

best there was a closer approximation between the people and the

educated classes. "Demosthenes, in his oration περὶ στεφάνου

called AEschines a μισθωτόν, but had accented the word erroneously,

namely, μίσθωτον, whereupon the audience corrected him by cry-

ing μισθωτόν."2  Like the modern Italian, the ancient Greek had a

musical cadence that set it above all other European tongues.3

We can indeed appeal to the old Greek inscriptions for the popu-

lar pronunciation on many points.4  According to this evidence

in the first century B.C. in Attica αι=ae, ει=ι, η=ι, υ=ι, υι=υ, οι=ι,

β=υ (English v).5 Clearly then in the κοινή the process of itacism

was already at work before the N. T. was written. What was

true of the κοινή vernacular then does not of course argue conclu-

sively for the pronunciation of cultivated Athenians in the time

of Socrates. In versatile Athens "a stranger, if introduced on the

stage, is always represented as talking the language or dialect of

the people to which he belongs."6  Blass indeed thinks that in

Tarsus the school-teacher taught Paul Atticistic Greek! " Ἴσμεν,

 

            1 Lautsystem der griech. Vulgarspr., 1879, p. 83 f.

            2 Achilles Rose, Chris. Greece and Living Gk., 1898, p. 61.

            3 Cf. Mure, A Crit. Hist. of the Lang. and Lit. of Anc. Greece, I, p. 99;

Bolland, Die althell. Wortbet. im Lichte der Gesch., 1897, p. 6. Cf. Pronun.

of Gk. as deduced from Graeco-Latin Biling. Coins. By Cecil Bendall in

Jour. of Philol., vol. XXIX, No. 58, 1904. Here the rough breathing is

represented by h, θ=th, φ = ph.

            4 Thumb, Unters. etc., 1888, p. 1. Cf. Sophocles, Hist. of Gk. Alph. and

Pronun., 1854.

            5 Telly, Chron. and Topog. der griech. Ausspr. nach d. Zeugnisse der

Inschr., 1893, p. 39.

            6 Rutherford, The New Phryn., p. 32.    7 Philol. of the Gosp., p. 9,


                     ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                    239

 

ἴστε, ἴσασιν, he must have said, are the true forms which you

must employ if you care to be considered a cultivated speaker or

writer." Yet in Paul's Epistles he constantly has οἴδαμεν, --ατε,

--ασιν.  The Atticistic pronunciation was no more successful than

the Atticistic spelling, forms and syntax. We maybe sure of one

thing, the pronunciation of the vernacular κοινή was not exactly

like the ancient literary Attic nor precisely like the modern Greek

vernacular, but veering more towards the latter. In Greek as

in English the pronunciation has perhaps varied more than the

spelling. Giles1 observes that English pronunciation "is really

a stumbling-block in tracing the history of the English language."

Hadley2 has a very able and sane discussion of this matter of

changes in Greek pronunciation. He insists on change all through

the centuries (p. 139), which is the only rational position. If we

turn to the earliest N. T. MSS. we shall find undoubtedly traces

of this process of change from the old Attic toward the Byzantine

or modern Greek pronunciation. Indeed in the fourth and fifth

centuries A.D.,3 the date of the earliest uncials, the process is

pretty well complete. The N. T. scribes make no hesitation in

writing αι or ε; ι, ει, η, ῃ; οι or υ according to convenience or indi-

vidual taste.4  Blass,5 contrary to his former view about Tarsus,

says that it is impossible to suppose that there was anybody in

the schools at Tarsus who would have taught Paul the correct

historical spelling or pronunciation. To the student of the κοινή,

as to us, in a sense "the Greek γράμματα were dead symbols,

from which must be recovered the living sounds."6  Of one thing

we may be sure, and it is that other dialects besides the Attic

contributed to the κοινή pronunciation. The κοινή would be

dialect-coloured here and there in its pronunciation. Alexan-

der's conquest, like the railroad and the steamship of the present

day, levelled the dialectical variations in many points, whereas

before every valley in Greece had its own pronunciation of

certain words.7  One taught the κοινή in a Doric environment

 

            1 Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 103. Cf. also Ellis, Early Eng. Pronun.

            2 "Gk. Pronun." in Ess. Philol. and Crit., pp. 128-140.

Hatzidakis, Einl. etc.

            4 Cf. Moulton, Prol., p. 34 f.      5 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 6 f.

            6 Nicklin, Cl. Rev., Mar., 1906, p. 116. This is precisely the objection that

Jannaris (Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 33) brings against the ancient grammarians as

"post-Christian scribes" and unable to "speak with authority of the pro-

nunciation of classical Greek."

            7 Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 75. Cf. Oppenheim and Lucas, Byz.

Zeitschr., 1905, p. 13, for exx. of phonetic spelling.


240    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

would show it somewhat. As a matter of fact the Boeotian

dialect contributed largely to the κοινή vernacular pronunciation

(and so the modern Greek) in points where the Boeotian differed

radically from the old Attic.1  Boeotian Greek "modified its

vowel-system more than any other Greek dialect."2 Thus

already in Boeotian we find both αι and αε in the earliest in-

scriptions and finally η.  So in Boeotian  η became3 ει in sound,

as ἐπιδεί=ἐπειδή.  The early Greek generally, as already shown,

made no distinction in sign between o and ω, and η was a slow

development from ε.  The Ionic dialect never took kindly to

the rough breathing and greatly influenced the κοινή and so the

modern Greek. By the Christian era β is beginning to be pro-

nounced as ν, as the transliteration of Latin words like Βεργίλιος

shows.  Z is no longer ds, but z, though δ seems still usually d,

not th.  Who is right, therefore, the "Erasmians" or the Reuch-

linians? Jannaris4 sums up in favour of the Reuchlinians, while

according to Riemann and Goelzer5 the "Erasmians" are wholly

right. As a matter of fact neither side is wholly right. In

speaking of ancient Greek one must recognise other dialects

than the literary Attic of the fifth century B.C. If you ask for the

pronunciation of the vernacular κοινή of the first century A.D.,

that will be found as a whole neither in the literary Attic alone

nor in the N. T. MSS. of the fifth century A.D. The papyri and

the inscriptions of the time throw light on a good many points,

though not on all. But even here the illiterate papyri do not fur-

nish a safe standard for the vernacular of a man like Paul or

Luke. It is small wonder therefore that N. T. MSS. show much

confusion between —σει (future indicative) and σῃ (aorist subjunc-

tive), -ομεν (indicative) and —ωμεν (subjunctive), --σθαι (infinitive)

and --σθε (indicative middle), etc. It is possibly as well to go on

pronouncing the N. T. Greek according to the literary Attic, since

we cannot reproduce a clear picture of the actual vernacular

κοινή pronunciation, only we must understand frankly that this

 

            1 Cf. Riem. and Goelzer, Phonet., p. 41.

            2 Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 540.

            3 Riem. and Goelzer, Phonet., pp. 41, 46. Thumb (Hellen., p. 228) warns

us against overemphasis of the Boeotian influence.

            4 Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 31. "The pronunciation of ancient Gk. in the manner

of the present Greeks had been traditionally accepted at all times, before

and through the Middle Ages, as a matter of unquestioned fact."

            5 Phonet., p. 56. "En resume, la prononciation grecque ancienne etait,

sur presque tous les points, differente de la prononciation moderne."


                ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                     241

 

is not the way it was done. On the other hand the modern Greek

method misses it by excess, as the literary Attic does by default.

There was, of course, no Jewish pronunciation of the κοινή. The

Coptic shows the current pronunciation in many ways and prob-

ably influenced the pronunciation of the κοινή in Egypt. Cf. a

German's pronunciation of English.

          VII. Punctuation. In the spoken language the division of

words is made by the voice, pauses, emphasis, tone, gesture, but

it is difficult to reproduce all this on the page for the eye. Many

questions arise for the editor of the Greek N. T. that are not easy

of solution. Caspar Rene Gregory insists that whenever N. T.

MSS. have punctuation of any kind, it must be duly weighed,

since it represents the reading given to the passage.

          (a) THE PARAGRAPH. As early as Aristotle's time the para-

graph (παράγραφος) was known. A dividing horizontal stroke was

written between the lines marking the end of a paragraph. Some

other marks like > (διπλῆ) or ┐ (κορωνίς) were used, or a slight

break in the line made by a blank space. Then again the first

letter of the line was written larger than the others or even made

to project out farther than the rest.1  The paragraph was to the

ancients the most important item in punctuation, and we owe a

debt to the N. T. revisers for restoring it to the English N. T.

Cf. Lightfoot, Trench, Ellicott, The Revision of the N. T., 1873,

p. xlvi. Euthalius (A.D. 458) prepared an edition of the Greek

N. T. with chapters (κεφάλαια), but long before him Clement of

Alexandria spoke of περικοπαί and Tertullian of capitula. These

"chapters" were later called also τίτλοι.2 The στίχος of Euthalius

was a line of set length with no regard to the sense, like our prin-

ter's ems. W. H. have made careful use of the paragraph in their

Greek N. T. The larger sections are marked off by spaces and

the larger paragraphs are broken into smaller sub-paragraphs

(after the French method) by smaller spaces.3  Another division

is made by W. H. in the use of the capital letter at the beginning

of an important sentence, while the other sentences, though after

a period, begin with a small letter. This is a wholly arbitrary

method, but it helps one better to understand W. H.'s interpre-

tation of the text.

 

            1 On the paragraph see Thompson, Handb. of Gk. and Lat. Palaeog.,

pp. 67 ff. Occasionally the double point (:) was used to close a paragraph.

            2 Cf. Warfield, Text. Crit. of N. T., pp. 40 ff.

            3 Hort. Intr. to Gk. N. T., p. 319. For the στίχος see further Gregory,

Prol., p. 112 f.


242    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

W. H.1 have also printed in metrical form passages metrical in

rhythm like the Magnificat of Mary (Lu. 1:46-55), the fragment

of a hymn in 1 Tim. 3:16, etc., while Lu. 2:14 and the non-

metrical hymns in Revelation are merely printed in narrower

columns. The Hebrew parallelism of 0. T. quotations is indicated

also.

          (b) SENTENCES. The oldest inscriptions and papyri show few

signs of punctuation between sentences or clauses in a sentence,2

though punctuation by points does appear on some of the ancient

inscriptions. In the Artemisia, papyrus the double point (:) occa-

sionally ends the sentence.3 It was Aristophanes of Byzantium

(260 B.C.) who is credited with inventing a more regular system

of sentence punctuation which was further developed by the

Alexandrian grammarians.4  As a rule all the sentences, like the

words, ran into one another in an unbroken line (scriptura con-

tinua), but finally three stops were provided for the sentence by

the use of the full point. The point at the top of the line (·) (στιγμὴ

τελεία, 'high point') was a full stop; that on the line (.) (ὑποστιγμή)

was equal to our semicolon, while a middle point (στιγμὴ μέση)

was equivalent to our comma.5  But gradually changes came over

these stops till the top point was equal to our colon, the bottom

point became the full stop, the middle point vanished, and about

the ninth century A.D. the comma (,) took its place. About this

time also the question-mark (;) or ἐρωτηματικόν appeared. These

marks differed from the στίχοι in that they concerned the sense

of the sentence. Some of the oldest N. T. MSS. show these marks

to some extent. B has the higher point as a period, the lower

point for a shorter pause.6  But still we cannot tell how much, if

any, use the N. T. writers themselves made of punctuation points.

We may be sure that they did not use the exclamation point,

the dash, quotation-marks, the parenthesis, etc.7  Parenthetical

clauses were certainly used, which will be discussed elsewhere,

though no signs were used for this structure by the ancient

Greeks. W. H. represent the parenthesis either by the comma

(Ro. 1:13) or the dash with comma (1 Tim. 2:7). Instead of

 

            1 Intr. to Gk. N. T., p. 319 f.      3 Thompson, Handb., etc., p. 69.

            2 Jannaris, Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 62. 4 Ib., p. 70; Jannaris, Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 67.

            5 I follow Thompson (Handb., etc., p. 70) on this point instead of Jannaris

(pp. 63 and 67), who makes the ὑποστιγμή = our comma.

            6 Cf. Gregory, Prol., pp. 345, 348; Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 17. D has

the στίχοι, in the way of sense-lines (Blass, ib.).

            7 Jannaris, Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 67.


             ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                   243

 

quotation-marks W. H. begin the quotation with a capital letter

with no punctuation before it, as in Jo. 12:19, 21. One way of

expressing a quotation was by τό, as in Ro. 13:9. In the case

of 0. T. quotations the Scripture is put in uncial type (Jo. 12:13).

The period (περίοδος) gives very little trouble to the modern edi-

tor, for it is obviously necessary for modern needs. Here the

editor has to make his interpretation sometimes when it is doubt-

ful, as W. H. give ἕν. ὃ γέγονεν ἐν,  not ἓν ὃ γέγονεν. ἐν (Jo. 1:4). So

W. H. read θαυμάζετε. διὰ τοῦτο Μωυσῆς in Jo. 7:22, not θαυμάζετε

διὰ τοῦτο. Μωυσῆς, etc. The colon (κῶλον),1 ‘limb of the sentence’

formed a complete clause. See Jo. 3:31 for example of use of

colon made by W. H. The comma (κόμμα) is the most common

division of the sentence and is often necessary, as with the voca-

tive. So Διδάσκαλε, τί ποιήσωμεν; (Lu. 3:12) and many common

examples. In general W. H. use the comma only where it is

necessary to make clear an otherwise ambiguous clause, whether

it be a participial (Col. 2:2) or conjunctional phrase (Col. 1:23),

or appositive (Col. 1:18), or relative (Col. 2:3). The first chap-

ter of Colossians has a rather unusual number of colons (2, 6, 14,

16, 18, 20, 27, 28) as Paul struggles with several long sentences,

not to mention the clashes (21, 22, 26). The Germans use the

comma too freely with the Greek for our English ideas, leaving

out the Greek!  Even Winer defended the comma after καρπόν in

Jo. 15:2 and ὁ νικῶν in Rev. 3:12, not to mention Griesbach's

"excessive" use of the comma, Winer himself being judge.2  My

friend, Rev. S. M. Provence, D.D. (Victoria, Tex.), suggests a full

stop before μαθών in Ac. 23:27 f. That would help the character

of Claudius Lysias on the point of veracity.

          (c) WORDS. The continuous writing of words without any

space between them was not quite universal, though nearly so.3

The oldest Attic inscription (Dipylon vase, probably eighth cen-

tury B.C.) is written from right to left. With the common method

it was not always easy for the practised eye to distinguish between

words. Hence there arose the διαστολή or ὑποδιαστολή a comma

used to distinguish between ambiguous words, as ὅ, τι, not ὅτι.

But W. H. make no use of this mark, not even in ὅ, τι to dis-

tinguish it from the conjunction ὅτι.  They print uniformly ὅτι  

(Lu. 10:35; Jo. 2:5; 14:13; 1 Cor. 16:2, etc.), not to men-

 

            1 Thompson, Handb., etc., p. 81. So Suidas. The colon is the main semi-

division of the sentence, but mod. Eng. makes less use of all marks save the

period and comma.

            2 W.-M., pp. 63, 67.                              3 Thompson, Handb., etc., p. 67.          


244 A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

tion doubtful cases like those in Mk. 9:11, 28; Jo. 8:25; 2

Cor. 3:14.1  As to the marks of diaeresis (  * ) reference may be had

to the discussion of diphthongs and diaeresis in this chapter under

II (i). W. H., like other modern editors, use the apostrophe (  ʼ ) (or

smooth breathing) to represent elision, as ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς (Mt. 24:21).2

The coronis is the smooth breathing used also to show when crasis

has taken place, as in κἀμοί (Lu. 1:3).3 The hyphen, a long

straight line, was used in the Harris-Homer MS. to connect com-

pound words, but it is not in the N. T.4 The editors vary much

in the way such words as ἀλλά γε,< ἵνα τί, τοῦτ’  ἔστι, etc., are printed.

The MSS. give no help at all, for τοῦτο δέ ἐστιν in Ro. 1:12 is not

conclusive against τοῦτ’ ἔστιν elsewhere.5  W. H. prefer ἁλλά γε (Lu.

24:21; 1 Cor. 9:2), ἆρά γε (Ac. 8:30), διά γε (Lu. 11:8; 18:5),

εἴ γε (2 Cor. 5:3, etc.), καί γε (Ac. 2:18; 17:27), ὅς γε (Ro. 8:32),

διὰ παντός (Mk. 5:5, etc.), διὰ τί (Mt. 9 : 11, etc.), ἵνα τί (Mt. 9:4,

etc.), εἴ πως (Ac. 27:12), μή ποτε (everywhere save in Mt. 25:9

where  μήποτε), μή που (Ac. 27:29), μή πως (1 Cor. 9:27, etc.), μή

τις (1 Cor. 16:11, etc.).  So also δῆλον ὅτι in 1 Cor. 15:27, ὅστις

οὖν (Mt. 18:4). But on the other hand W. H. print διότι as well

as εἴτε, οὔτε, μήτε, ὥστε, καίπερ, μήποτε (once), μηδέποτε, μηδέπω

οὐδέποτε, μηκέτι, οὐκέτι, μήπω, οὔπω, μήτιγε, even μήγε (Mt. 6:1),

καθά καθό, καθώς, καθάπερ, καθότι, καθόλου, ὥσπερ, ὡσεί, ὡσπερεί (1 Cor.

15:8), etc. But W. H. give us καθ’ εἷς in Ro. 12:5, ἀνὰ μέσον in

Mt. 13:25, etc.; Κατὰ μόνας in Mk. 4:10, καθ’ ὅσον in Heb. 3:3.

Adverbs like ἐπέκεινα (Ac. 7:43), ὑπερέκεινα (2 Cor. 10:16), παρεκτός

(2 Cor. 11:28) are, of course, printed as one word. W. H. prop-

erly have ὕπερ ἐγώ (2 Cor. 11:23), not ὑπερεγώ.  In Ac. 27:33

τεσσαρεσκαιδέκατος is one word, but W. H. have  Ἱερὰ Πόλις in Col.

4:13 and Νέα πόλις in Ac. 16:11. It must be confessed that no

very clear principles in this matter can be set forth, and the effort

of Winer-Schmiedel6 at minute analysis does not throw much light

on the subject.

          (d) THE EDITOR'S PREROGATIVE. Where there is so much con-

fusion, what is the editor's prerogative? Blass7 boldly advances

 

            1 W.-Sch., p. 35.

            2 See this ch. ii (k) for discussion of elision. For origin and early use of

the apostrophe see Thompson, Handb., etc., p. 73.

            3 See this ch. II (1) for discussion of crasis. Cf. Jannaris, Hist. Gk. Gr.,

p. 88.                                                                4 Thompson, Handb., etc., p. 72.

            6 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 14. For the usage of Tisch. in the union and

the separation of particles see Gregory, Prol., pp. 109-111. In most cases

Tisch. ran the particles together as one word.     6 P. 35.

            7 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 17. Left out by Debrunner.


               ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONETICS                 245

 

the German idea: "The most correct principle appears to be to

punctuate wherever a pause is necessary for reading correctly."

But Winer1 shrinks from this profusion of punctuation-marks by

the editors, which "often intruded on the text their own interpre-

tation of it." The editor indeed has to interpret the text with

his punctuation, but certainly good taste demands that the mini-

mum, not the maximum, of punctuation-marks be the rule. They

must of necessity decide "a multitude of subtle and difficult

points of interpretation."2  Hort indeed aimed at "the greatest

simplicity compatible with clearness," and this obviously should

be the goal in the Greek N. T. But the editor's punctuation may

be a hindrance to the student instead of a help. It is the privi-

lege of each N. T. student to make his own punctuation.

 

 

            1 W.-M., p. 63.              2 Hort, Intr. to Gk. N. T., p. 318.



 

 

 

CHAPTER VII:   THE DECLENSIONS (ΚΛΙΣΕΙΣ)

 

          Space will not be taken for the inflection of the nouns and pro-

nouns, for the student of this grammar may be assumed to know

the normal Attic inflections. Aristotle1 used the term "inflection"

(πρῶσις) of noun and verb and even adverb, but practically inflec-

tion is applied to nouns and conjugation (κλίσις ῥημάτων=συζυγία)

to verbs. Noun (ὄνομα) does, of course, include both substan-

tive and adjective without entering the psychological realm and

affirming the connection between name and thing (cf. Plato's

Cratylus).

 

I. THE SUBSTANTIVE (TO ὌNOMA)

 

          The Substantive (τὸ ὄνομα) is either concrete (σῶμα) or abstract

(πρᾶγμα), ordinary appellative (ὄνομα προσηγορικόν) or proper (ὄνομα

κύριον).

          1. History of the Declensions. It is only since the seventeenth

century A.D. that modern grammarians distinguish for conveni-

ence three declensions in Greek. The older grammars had ten

or more.2  In the modern Greek vernacular the first and third de-

clensions have been largely fused into one, using the singular of

the first and the plural of the third.3  Thumb (Handbook, pp.

43 ff.) divides the declension of substantives in modern Greek

vernacular according to gender simply (masculine, feminine,

neuter). This is the simplest way out of the confusion. In San-

skrit five declensions are usually given as in Latin, but Whitney4

says: "There is nothing absolute in this arrangement; it is merely

believed to be open to as few objections as any other." Evidently

 

            1 Donaldson, New Crat., p. 421. It is in the accidence that the practical

identity of N. T. Gk. with the popular κοινή is best seen, here and in the lexical

point of view (Deissmann, Exp., Nov., 1907, p. 434).

            2 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 102; Gildersl., Am. Jour. of Philol., 1908, p. 264.

            3 Ib., pp. 105, 111. Cf. Hatzidakis, Einl. etc., pp. 376 ff.

            4 Sans. Gr., p. 111.

                                              246


                   THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                        247

 

therefore the ancient Greeks did not have the benefit of our mod-

em theories and rules, but inflected the substantives according to

principles not now known to us. The various dialects exercised

great freedom also and exhibited independent development at

many points, not to mention the changes in time in each dialect.

The threefold division is purely a convenience, but with this justi-

fication: the first has α stems, the second o stems, the third con-

sonant and close vowel (ι, υ) stems. There are some differences in

the suffixes also, the third declension having always the genitive

ending in –ος.  In the third declension especially it is not possible

to give a type to which all the words in all the cases and numbers

conform. Besides, the same word may experience variations.

Much freedom is to be recognized in the whole matter of the de-

clensions within certain wide limits. See metaplasm or the fluc-

tuation between the several declensions.

          2. The Number of the Cases (πτώσεις). The meaning and

use of the cases will have a special chapter in Syntax (ch. XI).

          (a) THE HISTORY OF THE FORMS OF THE CASES. This is called

for before the declensions are discussed. The term "case" (πτῶσις,

cases) is considered a "falling," because the nominative is regarded

as the upright case (πτῶσις ὀρθή, εὐθεῖα), though as a matter of

fact the accusative is probably older than the nominative (πτῶσις

ὀνομαστική or ὀρθή). The other cases are called oblique (πλάγιαι)

as deviations from the nominative. In simple truth the vocative

(κλητική or προσαγορεύτικη) has no inflection and is not properly a

case in its logical relations. It is usually the noun-stem or like

the nominative in form. There are only three other case-endings

preserved in the Greek, and the grammars usually term them ac-

cusative (πτῶσις αἰτιατική), genitive (πτῶσις γενική) and dative

(πτῶσις δοτική).1  There is no dispute as to the integrity of the ac-

cusative case, the earliest, most common of all the oblique cases

and the most persistent. In the breakdown of the other cases

the accusative and the prepositions reap the benefit. In truth

the other oblique cases are variations from the normal accusative.

But this subject is complicated with the genitive and the dative.

It is now a commonplace in comparative philology that the

Greek genitive has taken over the function of the ablative (ἀφαι-

ρετική) also. In the singular the Sanskrit had already the same

 

            1 Mod. Gk. vernac. has only three cases (nom., gen. and acc.) and these

are not always formally differentiated from each other. The mod. Gk. has

thus carried the blending of case-forms almost as far as mod. Eng. Cf. Thumb,

Handb., p. 31.


248    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

ending (–ας) for genitive and ablative, while in the plural the San-

skrit ablative had the same form as the dative (bhyas; cf. Latin

ibus). Thus in the Sanskrit the ablative has no distinctive end-

ings save in the singular of a stems like kamat (‘love’) where

the ablative ending –t (d) is preserved. In Latin, as we know,

the ablative, dative, locative and instrumental have the same

endings in the plural. The Latin ablative singular is partly

ablative, partly locative, partly instrumental. Some old Latin

inscriptions show the d, as bened, in altod marid, etc. In Greek

the ablative forms merged with the genitive as in the Sanskrit

singular, but not because of any inherent "internal connec-

tion between them, as from accidents affecting the outward

forms of inflection."1 The Greek did not allow τ or δ to stand at

the end of a word. So the Greek has πρός (not πρότ for προτί).

Καλῶς may be (but see Brugmann2) the ablative καλῶτ and so all

adverbs in —ως.  The meaning of the two cases remained distinct

in the Greek as in the Sanskrit. It is not possible to derive the

ablative (source or separation) idea from the genitive (or γένος) idea

nor vice versa. The Greek dative (δοτική) is even more compli-

cated. "The Greek dative, it is well known, both in singular and

plural, has the form of a locative case, denoting the place where

or in which; but, as actually used, it combines, with the mean-

ing of a locative, those of the dative and instrumental."3 This

is only true of some datives. There are true datives like ὁδῷ,

χώρᾳ. The Indo-Germanic stock, as shown by the Sanskrit,

had originally three separate sets of endings for these cases.

 

            1 Hadley, Ess. Philol. and Crit., Gk. Gen. or Abl., p. 52. Cf. also Miles,

Comp. Synt. of Gk. and Lat., 1893, p. xvii. This blending of the cases in

Gk. is the result of "partial confusion" "between the genitive and the ablative

between the dative and the locative, between the locative and the instru-

mental" (Audoin, La Decl. dans les Lang. Indo-Europ., 1898, p. 248). In

general on the subject of the history of the eight cases in Gk. see Brugmann,

Griech. Gr., pp. 217-250, 375 f.; Comp. Gr. of the Indo-Ger. Lang., vol. III, pp.

52-280; Furze vergl. Gram., II, pp. 418 ff.; K.-B1., I, pp. 365-370, II, pp.

299-307; Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., pp. 268-301; Bopp, Uber das Dem.

und den Urspr. der Casuszeichen etc., 1826; Hartung, Uber die Casus etc.,

1831; Hilbschmann, Zur Casuslehre, 1875; Rumpel, Casusl., 1845; Meillet,

Intr. a l'Etude Comp., pp. 257 ff.; Penka, Die Entst. der Synkr. Casus im

Lat., Griech. und Deutsch., 1874. See also p. 33 f. of Hubner, Grundr. zu

Vorles. uber die gricch. Synt.; Schleicher, Vergl. Griech.; Schmidt, Griech.

Gr., etc.

            2 Brugmann (Griech. Gr., 1900, p. 225), who considers the ς in οὕτως, κτλ.,

due to analogy merely, like the ς in ἐγγύ-ς, κτλ. But he sees an abl. idea in

ἐκ-τός. Cf. also οὐρανό-θε like coeli-tus.                      3 Hadley, Ess. Phil. and Crit., p. 52.


                THE DECLENSIONS (ΚΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                       249

 

The Greek plural uses for all three cases either "the loca-

tive in –σι or the instrumental forms in —οις."1  "The forms in

αις, Latin —is, from –a stems, are a new formation on the analogy

of forms from —o stems."2    Ἀθήνησι is locative plural. In the

singular of consonant, ι and υ stems, the locative ending —ι is used

for all three cases in Greek, as νυκτί.  In the a declension the

dative ending –αι is the same as locative α+ι.  The form –αι con-

tracts with the stem-vowel α into or .  A few examples of

the locative here survive, as in πάλαι,  Ὀλυμπίαι, θηβαι-γενής.3

Χαμαί may be either dative or locative. In the o declension also

the dative ending –αι is the usual form, contracting with the o

into .  But a few distinct locative endings survive, like

 Ἰσθμοῖ, οἴκοι (cf. οἴκῳ), ποῖ, etc.  The Homeric infinitive δόμεν and

the infinitive like φέρειν are probably locatives also without the ι,

while the infinitives in –αι (δόμεναι, δοῦναι, λελυκέναι, λύεσθαι, λῦσαι,

etc.) are datives.4  The instrumental has left little of its original

form on the Greek singular. The usual Sanskrit is a.  Cf. in

Greek such words as ἅμα, ἕνεκα, ἵνα, μετά, παρά, πεδά, possibly

the Doric κρυφᾶ, Lesbian ἄλλα.  Brugmann5 thinks the Laconic

πή-ποκα= Attic πώ-ποτε is instrumental like the Gothic he (English

why). Cf. the in "the more the better," etc. Another Greek suffix

φι (Indo-Germanic, bhi) is found in Homer, as βίηφι, θεόφιν

(plural). But this –φι was used also for ablative or locative, and

even genitive or dative. It is clear therefore that in Greek the

usual seven (eight with the vocative) Indo-Germanic cases are

present, though in a badly mutilated condition as to form. The

ideas, of course, expressed by the cases continued to be expressed

by the blended forms. In actual intelligent treatment it is simpler

to preserve the seven case-names as will be seen later.

          (b) THE BLENDING OF CASE—ENDINGS. This is a marked pe-

culiarity of the Indo-Germanic tongues. Neuter nouns illustrate

 

            1 Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 287.

            2 Ib., p. 290. For survivals of the dat. —at see the Rhodian ταῖ, (Bjorkegren,

De Sonis dial. Rhod., p. 41).

            3 Brugmann, Griech. Gr., p. 228. Cf. the Lat. domi, Romoe(i). For nu-

merous exx. of loc. and dat. distinct in form in the various dialects see Meister,

Griech. Dial., Bd. II, pp. 61 ff.; Hoffmann, Griech. Dial., Bd. I, p. 233 (dat.

αι, loc. --ι; dat. —ωι, loc. —οι). Cf. Collitz and Bechtel, Samml. d. griech. dial.

Inschr., p. 308.             4 Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 278 f.

            5 Griech. Gr., 3. Aufl., p. 229. Cf. K.-B1., II., pp. 301-307, for examples of

the survival of abl., loc. and instr. forms in Gk. adverbs. Cf. also Meister,

Griech. Dial., II., p. 295, for survivals of instr. forms in Cypriotic dial. (ἀρᾶ,

εὐχωλᾶ). See Delbruck, Vergl. Synt., I. Tl., p. 194.


250         A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

the same tendency, not to mention the dual. The analytic pro-

cess has largely triumphed over the synthetic case-endings.

Originally no prepositions were used and all the word-relations

were expressed by cases. In modern French, for instance, there

are no case-endings at all, but prepositions and the order of

the words have to do all that was originally done by the case-

forms. In English, outside of the old dative form in pronouns

like him, them, etc., the genitive form alone remains. Finnish

indeed has fifteen cases and several other of the ruder tongues

have many.1 On the other hand the Coptic had no case-end-

ings, but used particles and prepositions like NTE for genitive,

etc. It is indeed possible that all inflectional languages passed

once through the isolating and agglutinative stages. English may

some day like the Chinese depend entirely on position and tone

for the relation of words to each other.

          (c) ORIGIN OF CASE, SUFFIXES. Giles2 frankly confesses that

comparative philology has nothing to say as to the origin of the

case-suffixes. They do not exist apart from the noun-stems.

Some of them may be pronominal, others may be positional (post-

positions), but it adds nothing to our knowledge to call some of

the cases local and others grammatical. They are all gramma-

tical. The ablative and the locative clearly had a local origin.

Some cases were used less often than others. Some of the case-

forms became identical. Analogy carried on the process. The

desire to be more specific than the case-endings led to the use of

prepositional adverbs. As these adverbs were used more and more

there was "an ever-increasing tendency to find the important

part of the meaning in the preposition and not in the case-ending."3

In the modern Greek vernacular, as already stated, only three

case-forms survive (nominative, genitive, accusative), the dative

vanishing like the ablative.4

 

            1 Farrar, Gr. Synt., p. 23.

            2 Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 271. Bergaigne (Du Role de la Deriv. dans la

Decl. Indo-Europ., Mem. de la Soc. de Ling. de Paris, to. ii, fasc. 5) and G.

Meyer (Zur Gesch. der indo-germ. Stammb. and Decl.) both argue that case-

endings had no distinctive meaning in themselves nor separate existence.

But see also Hirt, Handb. etc., pp. 231-288, for careful treatment of the cases.

On the general subject of syncretism in the Gk. cases see Delbruck, Vergl.

Synt., 1. Tl., pp. 189 ff., 195 f. See also Sterrett, Horn. II., N. 15, for traces of

abl., loc. and instr. forms in Hom. (loc. –ι, --θι; instr., –φι, –φιν; abl., –θεν).

            3 Giles, op. cit., p. 273.

            4 Dieterich, Unters. etc., p. 149. Cf. also Keck, Uber d. Dual bei d. griech.

Rednern etc., 1882.


               THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                        251

 

          3. Number (ἀριθμός) in Substantives. The N. T. Greek has

lost the dual (δυικός) and uses only the singular (ἑνικός) and the

plural (πληθυντικός). The Sanskrit and the Hebrew had the dual,

but the Latin had only duo and ambo (and possibly octo and vi-

ginti) which had a plural inflection in the oblique cases. Coptic1

had no plural nor dual save as the plural article distinguished

words. English has only the dual twain, but we now say twins.

The scholars do not agree as to the origin of the dual. Moul-

ton2 inclines to the idea that it arose "in prehistoric days when

men could not count beyond two." It is more likely that it is

due to the desire to emphasize pairs, as hands, eyes, etc., not to

accept "Du Ponceau's jest that it must have been invented for

lovers and married people."3  In the oldest Indo-Germanic lan-

guages the luxury of the dual is vanishing, but Moulton considers

its use in the Attic as a revival.4 It never won a foothold in the

AEolic and the New Ionic, and its use in the Attic was limited and

not consistent.5  The dual is nearly gone in the late. Attic inscrip-

tions,6 while in the κοινή it is only sporadic and constantly vanish-

ing in the inscriptions and papyri.7  In Pergamum8 and Pisidia9

no dual appears in the inscriptions. The only dual form that

occurs in the LXX and the N. T. is δύο (not δύω) for all the cases

(as genitive in 1 Tim. 5:19), save δυσί(ν) for the dative-locative-

instrumental, a plural form found in Aristotle, Polybius, etc., and

called a barbarism by Phrynichus.10 Only in 4 Macc. 1:28 A

δυοῖν is found, but δυεῖν in אV, as in Polybius and the Atticists

(Thackeray, p. 187). For examples of δυσί(ν) see Mt. 6:24 = Lu.

16:13; Ac. 21:33; Heb. 10:28, etc. In the papyri, however,

δύω, δυῶ, δυεῖν occasionally appear11 along with δυσί(ν). In the

modern Greek the dual is no longer used.   Ἄμφω has vanished in

the N. T. while ἀμφότεροι occurs fourteen times (Mt. 9:17, etc.),

 

            1 Tattam's Egyp. Gr., p. 16.                   2 Prol., p. 57.

            3 Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 23. Cf. Geiger, Ursp. d. Spr., § ix. Cf. Giles,

Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 264.                          4 Prol., p. 57.

            5 Jannaris, Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 101.                        5 Meisterhans, Att. Inschr., p. 201.

            7 Moulton, Cl. Rey,, 1901, p. 436.         8 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 138.

            9 Compernass, De Serm. Vulg. etc., p. 15. Tatian (p. 96 of his works)

shows a dual.

            10 Rutherford, New Phryn., p. 289 f. But cf. K.-BI., I, p. 362, for further

items about the dual.

            11 Deissmann, B. S., p. 187. For δυσί(ν) in the inscriptions see Dittenberger,

118. 22, etc. Cf. Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 313. For similar situations

in the LXX MSS. (τοῖς δύο, τοῖς δυσί, and A δυοῖν, א δυεῖν) see Helbing, Gr. d.

Sept., p. 53. Cf. also C. and S., Sel. from the LXX, p. 25.


252    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

once (Ac. 19:16) apparently in the sense of more than two, like

the occasional use of the English "both" and the Byzantine use

of ἀμφότεροι and "two clear examples of it in NP 67 and 69

(iv/A.D.)."1  Once for all then it may be remarked that in the

N. T. both for nouns and verbs the dual is ignored. The dual was

rare in the later Ionic and the κοινή follows suit (Radermacher,

N. T. Gk., p. 184). The syntactical aspects of number are to be

discussed later.

          4. Gender (γένος) in Substantives. In the long history of the

Greek language gender has been wonderfully persistent and has

suffered little variation.2  It is probably due to the natural differ-

ence of sex that grammatical gender3 arose. The idea of sense

gender continued, but was supplemented by the use of endings

for the distinction of gender. This personification of inanimate

objects was probably due to the poetic imagination of early peo-

ples, but it persists in modern European tongues, though French

has dropped the neuter (cf. the Hebrew) and modern English

(like the Persian and Chinese) has no grammatical gender save in

the third personal pronoun (he, she, it) and the relative.4 Anal-

ogy has played a large part in gender.5 The Sanskrit, Latin and

Greek all gave close attention to gender and developed rules that

are difficult to apply, with many inconsistencies and absurdities.

In Greek ἥλιος is masculine and σελήνη feminine, while in German

we have die Sonne and der Mond.  Perhaps we had better be

grateful that the Greek did not develop gender in the verb like

the Hebrew verb. Moulton6 thinks it "exceedingly strange" that

English should be almost alone in shaking off "this outworn ex-

crescence on language." The N. T., like Homer and the modern

Greek, preserves the masculine (ἀρσενικόν), feminine (θηλυκόν) and

neuter (οὐδέτερον).  Some words indeed have common (κοινόν) sex,

like ὁ ἡ παῖς, ὄνος, θεός, while others, applied to each sex, are called

epicene (ἐπίκοινον), like ἡ ἀλώπηξ, ἄρκτος. In German we actually

have das Weib (‘wife’)!

          (a) VARIATIONS IN GENDER. They are not numerous.

ἄβυσσος (χώρα) is a substantive in the LXX (Gen. 1:2, etc.) and

the N. T. (Lu. 8:31, etc.), elsewhere so only in Diogenes Laertes.

 

            1 Moulton, Prol., p. 80.                         2 Jannaris, Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 103.

            3 Paul, Prim of Hist. of Lang., pp. 289 ff. Brugmann thinks that gender

came largely by formal assimilation of adj. to subst. as ἄνθρωπος κακός, χώρα

ἱερά. Dan. Crawford, the Bantu missionary, claims 19 genders for Bantu.

            4 Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 26 f.                    5 Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., pp. 64, 259.

            6 Prol., p. 59. On the whole subject of gender see K.-B1., I, pp. 358 ff.


                  THE DECLENSIONS (ΚΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                           253

 

In Mk. 14:3 W. H. and Nestle properly read τὴν ἀλάβαστρον,

though the Western and Syrian classes give τὸν ἀλ. after Herod-

otus, and a few of the late MSS. τὸ ἀλ. In Rev. 8:11 (not )

ἄψινθος is read, though א and some cursives omit the article, be-

cause the word is a proper name. In Mk. 12:26 all editors

have ὁ βάτος (the Attic form according to Moeris), elsewhere

ἡ βάτος (Lu. 20:37; Acts 7:35).  θεός may be either masculine as

in Ac. 19:11 or feminine as in Ac. 19:37, but in Ac. 19:27 we

have θέα (Text. Rec. also in 35, 37), an "apparently purposeless

variation."1  Thieme (Die Inschr. von Magn., p. 10) says that

ἡ θεός is used in the inscriptions of Asia Minor in formal religious

language. Burnet (Review of Theology and Philosophy, 1906,

p. 96) says that in Athens ἡ θεός was used in every-day language,

but ἡ θεά in the public prayers, thus taking the Ionic θεά. Cf.

Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Papyri (Laut- and Wortlehre, 1906), p. 254 f.,

for papyri illustrations. Blass2 considers ἡ   Ἰερουσαλήμ (Ac. 5:28,

etc., the common form in LXX, Luke and Paul) feminine be-

cause it is a place-name, and hence he explains πᾶσα  Ἰεροσόλυμα

(Mt. 2:3) rather than by πόλις understood.  Ληνός in Rev. 14:19

strangely enough has both masculine and feminine, τὴν ληνόν . . .

τὸν μέγαν but אfem. (bis). The feminine is the common construc-

tion, but the masculine is found in LXX in Is. 63:2 only.  Λίθος  

is always in the N. T., even when it means a precious stone

(Rev. 5 times), where Attic after 385 B.C.3 had .   Λιμός is mascu-

line in Lu. 4:25 as in the Attic, but is chiefly feminine in Acts

and Luke, like the Doric and late Attic, as in Lu. 15:14; Acts

11:28.4  In Lu. 13:4, Jo. 9:7, 11 we have ὁ Σιλωάμ, while Jose-

phus has both (War, V, 12. 2) and (War, II, 16. 2). Blass5

explains the use of in the Gospels by the participle ἀπεσταλμένος

in Jo. 9:7.   Στάμνος in Heb. 9:4 is feminine after the Attic

instead of the Doric ὁ στ., as in Ex. 16:33. In Rev. 21:18 (21)

we read also ὁ ὕαλος rather than ἡ ὕαλος as is customary with

 

            1 Moulton, Prol., p. 60, but he adds "is explained by inscriptions." Cf.

Nachmanson, Magn. Inschr., p. 126, for many exx.

            2 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 32. Cf. Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 160. Mk. and Jo.

have only τὸ   Ἰεροσόλυμα and Mt. usually.

            3 Meisterhans, Att. Inschr., p. 129.

            4 Cf. Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 157. Moulton (Prol., p. 60) finds λιμός

now masc. and now fern. in the pap. LXX MSS. show similar variations. Cf.

Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 45; Thack., p. 145 f., for same situation in LXX

concerning βάτος, ἀλάβαστρος (--ον), ληνός,  στάμνος. Cf. C. and S., Sel. from the

LXX, p. 27, for further exx.

            5 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 32.


254   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

precious stones.1    Ὕσσωπος (Heb. 9:19; Jo. 19:29) reveals its

gender only in the LXX (Lev. 14:6, 51 f.) where it is masc. in

BA, fem. in E and 1 (3) Ki. 4 : 19 BA. The neuter τὸ ἅλας occurs

in papyri as early as third century B.C. (Moulton and Milligan,

Expositor, 1908, p. 177).

          (b) INTERPRETATION OF THE LXX. In Ro. 11:4 Paul uses

τῇ βάαλ rather than the frequent LXX τῷ βάαλ. The feminine is

due, according to Burkitt, to the Q'ri, בּשֶׁת. (αἰσχύνη). Moulton

speaks of ἡ βάαλ as occurring "three times in LXX and in Ascen-

sio Isaiae 12."2 But ἡ βάαλ occurs "everywhere in the pro-

phetic books, Jer., Zeph., Hos., etc." (Thayer), though not so

common in the historical books, far more than the "three times" of

Moulton. In Mk. 12:11 and Mt. 21:42 the LXX αὕτη is due to

זֹאת, though the translators may have "interpreted their own Greek

by recalling κεφαλὴν γωνίας."3  In Gal. 4:25 Paul has not mis-

takenly used τό with   Ἅγαρ, for he is treating the name as a word

merely. Any word can be so regarded.

               (c) VARIATIONS IN GENDER DUE TO HETEROCLISIS AND METAPLASM.

These will be discussed a little later. Delbruck thinks

that originally all the masculine substantives of the first or α de-

clension were feminine and that all the feminine substantives of

the second or o declension were masculine.

          5. The First or α Declension. There was a general tendency

towards uniformity4 in this declension that made it more popular

than ever. Here only the N. T. modifications in this general de-

velopment can be mentioned.

          (a) THE DORIC GENITIVE—ABLATIVE SINGULAR α. This form

survives in βορρᾶ (Lu. 13:29; Rev. 21:13) and was common in

the Attic after 400 B.C. Note also μαμωνᾶ (Lu. 16:9). It is fre-

quent in the LXX, papyri, inscriptions, though mainly in proper

names. These proper names in –ας, chiefly oriental, make the

genitive-ablative in — or, if unaccented —ας, in a. So Ακύλα and

 Ἀκύλου in papyri (Deissmann, Bible Studies, p. 187), though, no

gen. in N. T. (only -ας and -αν)   Ἀγρίππα5 (Ac. 25:23),    Ἀνανία

 

            1 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 26. Cf. Theophrast, De lapid. 49, fors ἡ ὕελος.

            2 Moulton, Prol., p. 59. He corrects this erratum in note to H. Scott.

            3 Ib.

            4 Jannaris, Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 106. Swete, 0. T. in Gk., p. 304 f., has some

good illustrations and remarks about the declensions in the LXX.

            5 Both   Ἀγρίππα and   Ἀγρίππου occur in the pap. Cf. Moulton, Cl. Rev.,

1901, pp. 34 and 434. This gen. in —α gradually became "a ruling principle"

for all substantives in —ας (Jannaris, Hist. Gk. Gr., pp. 108, 110). See Thumb,


                        THE DECLENSIONS (ΚΛΙΣΕΙΣI)                            255

 

(from –ας, so Thayer),   Ἅννα (Lu. 3:2),   Ἀντίπας (indeclinable here

or mere slip for –α, Rev. 2:13),   Ἁρέτα (2 Cor. 11:32), Βαραββᾶ

(gen. does not appear, only nom. –ας as Mk. 15:7, and accus. –ᾶν

as 15:11, etc.), Βαρνάβα (Gal. 2:1; Col. 4:10; see Deissmann,

Bible Studies, p. 187),   Ἐπαφρᾶ (Col. 1:7),   Ἑρμᾶν (Ro. 16:14, Doric

accusative), Ζηνᾶν likewise (Tit. 3:13);   Ἠλεία (Lu. 1:17) accord-

ing to אB (so W. H.)   Ἰούδα (person, Lu. 3:33; Mk. 6:3; tribe,

Mt. 2:6; Heb. 8:8; land, Lu. 1:39),   Ἰωνᾶ, (Mt. 12:39),  Καιάφα

(Lu. 3:2; Jo. 18:13), Κηφᾶ (1 Cor. 1:12), Κλωπᾶ (Jo. 19:25),

Λουκᾶς (only in nominative, as Col. 4:14, but genitive would be –),

Σατανᾶ (Mk. 1:13), Σίλας (dative Σίλᾳ. in Ac., and genitive Σίλα

in Jos. Vit., 17),  Σκευᾶ (Ac. 19:14),  Στεφανᾶ (1 Cor. 1:16). Nach-

manson finds the Doric genitive fairly common with such short

proper names and mentions Σηνᾶ in his list.1  Very common in

modern Greek, cf. Hatzidakis, Einl., p. 76.

          (b) THE ATTIC GENITIVE-ABLATIVE. The usual Attic form for

the masculine gen. abl. (ου) is found also as in  Αἰνέας (so Lobeck,

Prol. Pathol., p. 487),   Ἀνδρέου (Mk. 1:29), Βαραχίου (Mt. 23:35),

 Ἐζεκίου (so LXX),   Ἠλείου (Lu. 4:25),   Ἠσαίου (Mt. 3:3, etc.),

 Ἰερεμίου (Mt. 2:17),  Λυσανίου (Lu. 3:1),  Οὐρίου (Mt. 1:6), Ζαχα-

ρίου (Lu. 1:40). These Hebrew proper names ended in but

receive the regular inflection for masculine nouns of the first

declension. There are likewise some proper names in –ης with

genitive-ablative in –ου.   Ἰαννῆς and   Ἰαμβρῆς (2 Tim. 3:8) only

appear in the N. T. in the nominative.  Κρήσκης (2 Tim. 4:10) and

Πούδης (2 Tim. 4:21) belong to the 3d declension.  Εὐφράτης (Rev.

9:14; 16:12) has only accusative and dative (instrumental-loca-

tive) in the oblique cases in the N. T., though the genitive-ablative

form is –ου.   Ἡρῴδου (Mt. 2:1) and  Ἰορδάνου (Mt. 3:5) follow the

usual rule like ᾅδου (Mt. 16:18).   Ἀπελλῆς (Ro. 16:10),   Ἑρμῆς

(Ro. 16:14), like κοδράντης (Mt. 5:26) and φελόνης (2 Tim. 4:13),

have no oblique case in the N. T. save the accusative (-ῆν).2

 Ἰωάνης in W. H. always has genitive-ablative in –ου for the Apostle

and in Jo. 1:42; 21:15, 16, 17, for the father of Simon Peter,

though Βαριωνᾶ in Mt. 16:17.3  So for John Mark (Acts 12:12).

 

 Handb., p. 49. Cf. Thackeray, Gr., pp. 160-166. Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 33,

for LXX illustrations.

            1 Magn. Inschr., p. 120. Cf. also Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 139.

            2 Cf. W.-Sch., p. 94.

            3 Cf. Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 159. See Nachmanson (Magn. Inschr., p.

119) and Schweizer (Perg. Inschr., p. 138 f.) for illustrations of these points

from the κοινή  inscr. The gen. in –ου is more common in the pap. than that in


256          A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

Σωσθένης has accusative in ην (Ac. 18:17) for the first declension

and is heteroclite.1 We have only ξεστῶ in Mk. 7:4. Words like

νεανίας have the genitive-ablative in –ου (Ac. 7:58).

          (c) Vocative in —α of masc. nouns in -της in δέσποτα, ἐπιστάτα, καρ-

διογνῶστα, ὑποκριτά.   Cf. ᾅδη.

          (d) WORDS IN –ρα AND PARTICIPLES IN —υῖα. These come reg-

ularly2 to have the genitive-ablative in --ης and the dative-locative-

instrumental in – like the Ionic. Moulton3 indeed thinks that

"analogical assimilation," on the model of forms like δόξα, δόξης,

had more to do with this tendency in the κοινή than the Ionic in-

fluence. Possibly so, but it seems gratuitous to deny all Ionic in-

fluence where it was so easy for it to make itself felt. The "best

MSS."4 support the testimony of the papyri and the inscriptions

here.5  So W. H. read μαχαίρης (Rev. 13:14), πλημμύρης (Lu. 6:

48), πρῴρης (Ac. 27:30), Σαπφείρῃ (Ac. 5:1), σπείρης (Ac. 21:31;

27:1). In Acts B is prone to have —ας, — as with D in Ac. 5:1,

but W. H. do not follow B here. In Ac. 5:2 συνειδυίης may be

compared with ἐπιβεβηκκυίης (1 Sam. 25:20), and other examples in

the LXX,6 but the forms –υίας, --υίᾳ still survive in the Ptolemaic

period.7 The preference of the LXX MSS. and the early papyri

for μαχαίρας (–ρᾳ) shows that it is a matter of growth with time.

In the early Empire of Rome –ρης forms are well-nigh universal.

Cf. Thackeray, Gr., p. 142. On the other hand note the adjective

στειρᾳ, (Lu. 1:36). Words like ἡμέρα (—ρα) and ἀλήθεια, μία (ια, εια)

preserve the Attic inflection in —ας, ᾳ.8

          (e) THE OPPOSITE TENDENCY TO (d). We see it in such exam-

ples as Λύδδας (Ac. 9:38, but Soden reads –δης with EHLP) and

Μάρθας (Jo. 11:1). Moulton9 finds the Egyptian papyri giving

Ταμύσθας as genitive.   θέρμα is given by Lobeck, though not in

N. T. (genitive –ης, Ac. 28:3), and note πρύμνα in Ac. 27:41.

 

α. See Mayser, Gr. griech. Pap., 1906, p. 250 f. (Laut- u. Wortlehre). For

the contracted forms see p. 252. It is also more frequent in the LXX. Cf.

Thackeray, Gr., p. 161 f.

            1 W.-Sch., p. 94.                                               2 B. S., p. 186.

            3 Prol., p. 48; Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 34. where a number of exx. are given like

ἀρούρης, καθηκυίης, etc. Cf. Thumb, Hellen., p. 69. Cf. Helbing, Gr. d. Sept.,

pp. 31-33, and Thack., Gr., p. 140 f., for similar phenomena in the LXX.

            4 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 156.                           5 Deissmann, B. S., p. 186.

            6 Gregory, Prol., p. 117. Cf. W.-Sch., p. 81.

            7 Moulton, Prol., p. 48.

            8 Cf. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 25.

            9 Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 434. For examples in Attic inscriptions see Meister-

hans, p. 119 f. Cf.  Σουσάννας in LXX, C. and S., Sel. fr. the LXX, p. 26.

 


                     THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                             257

 

Moulton1 suggests that Νύμφαν (Col. 4:15 according to the cor-

rect text) is not clue to a Doric Νύμφαν, but by a "reverse analogy

process" the genitive Νύμφης produced the short nominative Νύμφα

like δόξα, δόξης.  Blass2  calls χρυσᾶν (Rev. 1:13) "a gross blunder,

wrongly formed on the model of χρυσᾶς 1:12," but Moulton3  

holds that we have "abundant parallels."

          (f) DOUBLE DECLENSION. This phenomenon appears in the

case of Νέαν Πόλιν (Ac. 16:11) and   Ἱερᾲ Πόλει (Col. 4:13), the

adjective as well as the substantive being treated separately in

the first and third declensions.

        (g) HETEROCLISIS (ἑτερόκλισις) AND METAPLASM (μεταπληασμός).

Blass4 makes no distinction in his treatment of heteroclisis and

metaplasm, though the distinction is observed in Winer-Schmie-

del.5  For practical use one may ignore the distinction and call

all the examples metaplasm with Blass or heteroclisis with Moul-

ton.6  The fluctuation is rare for the first declension in the N. T.

In Ac. 28:8 editors properly read δυσεντέριον rather than δυσεντε-

ρία (supported only by a few cursives). The form θεά (Ac. 19:27)

and the usual Attic ἡ θεός (Ac. 19:37) are both found. This varia-

tion between the first and the second declensions is well illustrated

by Γομόρρας (2 Pet. 2:6) and Γομόρρων (Mt. 10:15; —οις, Mk. 6:11

Rec.), Λύστραν (Ac. 14:6) and Λύστροις (Ac. 14:8). Moulton7  

finds abundant parallel in the Egyptian papyri use of place-names.

In Rev. 1:11 ABC and some cursives read θυάτειραν instead of

the usual θυάτειρα. So in Ac. 27:5 some of the MSS. read Μύρραν

instead of Μύρρα as accus., a reading confirmed by Ramsay,8 who

found the accus. in —αν and the gen. in —ων. Moulton9 cites

 Ἱεροσόλυμα from two MSS. of xi/A.D. (Usener, Pelagia, p. 50).

          The chief variation between the first and second declensions

appears in the compounds in –αρχης and (Attic) –αρχος. Moulton10

finds examples of it passim in the papyri and calls the minute

work of Winer-Schmiedel "conscientious labour wasted thereon."

But Hort11 does not think these variations in good MSS. "wholly

 

            1 Prol., p. 48. Cf. also his paper in Proc. Camb. Philol. Soc., Oct., 1893,

p. 12.

            2 Gr., p. 25, but 4th ed., p. 28, cites P. Lond. I, 124, 26, χρυσᾶν ἢ ἀργυρᾶν.

            3 Prol., p. 48. "Falsche Analogie" acc. to W.-Sch., p. 81.

            4 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 28 f.

            5 Pp. 83 ff. Thack. (Gr., p. 153) includes heteroclisis under metaplasm.

            6 Prol., p. 48.                                                                            7 Ib., p. 244.

            8 St. Paul the Traveller, p. 129. Cf. Moulton, Prol., p. 48.           9 Ib.

            10 Ib. Cf. Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 34.

            11 Notes on Orth., p. 156.


258   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

irregular." In the N. T. forms in -αρχης, like most of the dialects

and the κοινή are greatly in the majority.1  Thus in the N. T. we

have  Ἀσιάρχης (Ac. 19:31; not in nom. in N. T.), ἐθνάρχης (2

Cor. 11:32), πατριάρχης (Heb. 7:4), πολιτάρχης (Ac. 17:6, 8),

τετραάρχης (Lu. 3:19), but always χιλίαρχος. In the addition of

the β text to Ac. 28:16 the MSS. divide between στρατοπέδαρχος

(HLP) and –άρχης (cursives).   Ἑκατόνταρχος is the nominative

in Mt. (8:5, 8; 27:54), and the accusative in —χον is found once

in Acts (22:25). Elsewhere in all cases in Matthew, Luke and

Acts the form in —χης is read by the best MSS. (as Ac. 10:1).

          The first and the third declensions show variation in δίψος (old

form δίψα) in 2 Cor. 11:27, where indeed B has δίψῃ instead of

δίψει.  Νίκη (the old form) survives in 1 Jo. 5:4, but elsewhere the

late form νῖκος prevails (as 1 Cor. 15:54 f.). The LXX likewise

shows τό δίψος, τὸ νῖκος interchangeably with the forms. Helbing,

Gr. d. Sept., p. 49; Thackeray, Gr., p. 157. The dative   Ἰωάνει

(third declension) instead of  Ἰωάνῃ (first declension) is accepted a

few times by W. H. (Mt. 11:4; Lu. 7:18; Rev. 1:1). Σαλαμίνῃ

(first declension) for Σαλαμῖνι (third declension) in Ac. 13:5, Hort2

considers only Alexandrian.

          The third declension nouns often in various N. T. MSS. have

the accusative singular of consonant stems in —ν in addition to —α,

as χεῖραν in Jo. 20:25 (אAB), 1 Pet. 5:6 (אA). This is after the

analogy of the first declension. Other examples are ἄρσεναν

Rev. 12:13 (A), ασεβῆν in Ro. 4:5 (אDFG), ἀστέραν in Mt. 2:10

(אC), ἀσφαλῆν in Heb. 6:19 (ACD), Δίαν in Ac. 14:12 (DEH),

εἰκόναν in Rev. 13:14 (A), μῆναν in Rev. 22:2 (A), ποδήρην in Rev.

1:13 (A), συγγενῆν in Ro. 16:11 (ABD), ὑγιῆν in Jo. 5:11 (א).

Blass3 rejects them all in the N. T., some as "incredible," though

properly recalling the Attic τριήρην, Δημοσθένην. Moulton4 finds

this conformation to the "analogy of first declension nouns" very

common in "uneducated papyri, which adequately foreshadows

 

            1 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 28; K.-B1., I, 3, 502. Cf. also W.-M., p. 70 f;

W.-Sch., p. 82; Soden, p. 1387 f. For illustrations from the LXX see W.-M.

Cf. also Nachmanson, Magn. Inschr., p. 121. For numerous pap. examples

of compounds from ἄρχω see Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap. (Laut- u. Wortl.),

p. 256 f. For the LXX see Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 37 f. Thack., Gr.,

p. 156, finds —αρχης ousting —αρχος.

            2 Notes on Orth., p. 156.                       3 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 26. Not in ed. 4.

            4 Prol., p. 49. Cf. Gregory, Prol., p. 118; W.-M., p. 76; Jann., pp. 119,

542; Psichari, Grec de la Sept., pp. 165 ff. Cf. Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901,

34 f., for this "very common" ace, in the pap. See Mayser, Gr. d. griech,

Pap., p. 286 f.


                  THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                           259

 

its victory in modern Greek." The inscriptions1 as well as the

papyri have forms like γυναῖκαν, ἄνδραν, etc. It is these accusative

forms on which the modern Greek nominative in ἄρχονται is made

(of. Thumb, Handb., p. 47) and thus blended the first and the

third declensions.2  Hort3 will accept none of these readings in

the N. T. because of the "irregularity and apparent capricious-

ness" of the MS. evidence, though he confesses the strength of

the testimony for ἀσφαλῆν in Heb. 6:19, συγγενῆν in Ro. 16:11,

and χεῖραν in Jo. 20:25. These nouns are treated here rather

than under the third declension because in this point they invade

the precincts of the first. The LXX MSS. exhibit the same phe-

nomena (ἐλπίδαν, μονογενῆν, etc.). See Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 50;

Thackeray, Gr., p. 147. The opposite tendency, the dropping of

ν in the first declension .accusative, so common in modern Greek,

is appearing in the papyri, as δεξιὰ χεῖρα (Volker, Papyrorum

Graecorum Syntaxis etc., p. 30 f.).

          (h) INDECLINABLE SUBSTANTIVES. These are sometimes inflected

in some of the cases in the first declension. Βηθανιά is accusative

in Lu. 19:29, and so indeclinable, like Βηθφαγή, but elsewhere it is

inflected regularly in the first declension (so –ίαν Mk. 11:1, etc.)

save once or twice in B.  Βηθσαιδά has accusative Βηθσαιδάν in

Mk. 6:45; 8:22, but it may be only another alternate inde-

clinable form (Thayer) like Μαγαδάν. So likewise Γολγοθά has

accusative in in Mk. 15:22. Hort4 finds "the variations

between Μαρία and the indeclinable Μαριάμ" "singularly intricate

and perplexing, except as regards the genitive, which is always

ίας, virtually without variation, and without difference of the

persons intended." It is not necessary to go through all the

details save to observe that as a rule the mother of Jesus and

the sister of Martha are Μαριάμ, while Mary of Clopas is always

Μαρία. Mary Magdalene is now Μαριάμ, now Μαρία. In the

Aramaic as in the Hebrew probably all were called Μαριάμ.

Μαρία is merely the Hellenized form of Μαριάμ. It is probably

splitting too fine a hair to see with Hort5 a special appropriate-

ness in Μαριάμ in Jo. 20:16, 18.

          6. The Second or o Declension. There is no distinctively

feminine inflection in the o declension, though feminine words oc-

 

            1 Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 133.

            2 Cf. Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 156 f.; Schmid, Atticismus, IV, 586.

            3 Notes on Orth., p. 158. Kretschmer (Entst. der κοινή, p. 28) finds this

ace. in —αν in various dialect inscriptions. Cf. also Reinhold, De Graec. etc.,

p. 24, for χάριταν, etc. 4 Notes on Orth., p. 156.                       5 Ib.


260    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT.

 

cur, like ἡ ὁδός.  But the neuter has a separate inflection. Modern

Greek preserves very few feminines in –ος.1  Thumb (Handb., p. 53 f).

gives none. The main peculiarities in the N. T. are here noted.

          (a) THE SO-CALLED ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. It is nearly

gone. Indeed the Attic inscriptions began to show variations

fairly early.2 The κοινή inscriptions3 show only remains here and

there and the papyri tell the same story.4 Already λαός (as Lu.

1:21) has displaced λεώς and ναός (as Lu. 1:21) νεώς, though νεω-

κόρος survives in Ac. 19:35.    Ἀνάγαιον likewise is the true text

in Mk. 14:15 and Lu. 22:12, not ἀνώγεων nor any of the various

modifications in the MSS. In Mt. 3:12 and Lu. 3:17 ἡ ἅλων

may be used in the sense of ἡ ἅλως (see Thayer) by metonymy.

The papyri show ἅλως (Attic second declension) still frequently

(Moulton and Milligan, Expositor, Feb., 1908, p. 180). Cf. same

thing in LXX. Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 49 f.; Con. and Stock,

Sel. fr. LXX, p. 26; Thackeray, Gr., p. 144.   Ἀπολλώς has accusa-

tive in –ών in 1 Cor. 4:6 and Tit. 3:13, though the Western and

Syrian classes have – in both instances. In Ac. 19:1   Ἀπολλώ  is

clearly right as only A2L 40 have –ών.  The genitive is   Ἀπολλώ

without variant (1 Cor. ter). So the adjective ἵλεως is read in Mt.

16:22 and Heb. 8:12, though a few MSS. have ἵλεος in both places.

The best MSS. have τὴν Κῶ in Ac. 21:1, not Κῶν as Text. Rec. Cf.

1 Macc. 15:23. Blass5 compares albc:os of the third declension.

          (b) CONTRACTION. There is little to say here. The adjectives

will be treated later.  Ὀστοῦν (Jo. 19:36) has ὀστέα, accus. pl., in

the best MSS. in Lu. 24:39 and ὀστέων in Mt. 23:27 and Heb.

11:22. So also ὀστέων in the Western and Syrian addition to Eph.

5:30.   Ὀρνέου (Rev. 18:2) and ὄρνεα (Rev. 19:21) are without

variant. The papyri show this Ionic influence on uncontracted

vowels in this very word as well as in various adjectives (Moul-

ton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 435). For examples in the LXX (as ὀστέων,

2 Ki. 13:21) see Winer-Schmiedel, p. 82, and Helbing, Gr. d.

Sept., p. 36; Thackeray, p. 144; Con. and Stock, Sel. fr. LXX,

p. 27. Moulton6 considers it remarkable that the N. T. shows

 

            1 Jam., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 111 f.   2 Meisterh., Att. Inschr., p. 127 f.

            3 Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 123 f.; Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 142.

            4 Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 34. See also Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap.,

1906, p. 259 f. For the LXX see Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 38 f., where a few

exx. occur.

            5 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 25.  Νεώς appears in 2 Macc. 6:2, etc.

            6 Prol., p. 48 f. He thinks it proof that the N. T. writers were not illiterate,

since the pap. examples are in writers "with other indications of illiteracy."

Cf. also Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 34.


                  THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                                261

 

no traces of the contraction of κύριος into κύρις and παιδίον into

παιδίν, for instance, since the papyri have so many illustrations

of this tendency. The inscriptions1 show the same frequency of

the –ις, –ιν forms which finally won the day in modern Greek. Cf.

Thumb, Handb., p. 61.

          (c) THE VOCATIVE. In the o declension it does not always end

in ε in the masculine singular.  θεός in ancient Greek is practically

always retained in the vocative singular. The N. T. has the same

form as in Mk. 15:34 (cf. also Jo. 20:28), but also once

(Mt. 27:46). This usage is found occasionally in the LXX and

in the late papyri.2  So also Paul uses Τιμόθεε twice (1 Tim. 1:18;

6:20). Aristophanes had   Ἀμφίθεε, Lucian Τιμόθεε, and the in-

scriptions φιλόθεε.3  Note also the vocative υἱὸς Δαυείδ (Mt. 1:20)

and even in apposition with κύριε (Mt. 15:22). The common use

of the article with the nominative form as vocative, chiefly in the

third declension, belongs more to syntax. Take as an instance of

the second declension μὴ φοβοῦ, τὸ μικρὸν ποίμνιον (Lu. 12:32).

          (d) HETEROCLISIS AND METAPLASM. Variations between the

first and second declensions have been treated on p. 257. The

number of such variations between the second and third declen-

sions is considerable. Νοῦς is no longer in the second declension,

but is inflected like βοῦς, viz. νοός (2 Th. 2:2), νοΐ (1 Cor. 14:15,

19). So πλοός in Ac. 27:9, not πλοῦ.4  The most frequent inter-

change is between forms in –ος, masculine in second declension

and neuter in the third. In these examples the N. T. MSS. show

frequent fluctuations.  Τὸ ἔλεος wholly supplants τὸν ἔλεον (Attic)

in the N. T. (as in the LXX), as, for instance, Mt. 9:13; 12:7;

23:23; Tit. 3:5; Heb. 4:16, except in a few MSS. which read

ἔλεον.  Without variant we have ἐλέους and  ἐλέει.  On the other hand

ὁ ζῆλος is the usual N. T. form as in the ancient Greek (so ζήλω,

Ro. 13:13; 2 Cor. 11:2) , but τὸ ζῆλος is the true text in 2 Cor.

9:2 and Ph. 3:6. In Ac. 5:17 only B has ζήλους, and all read

ζήλου in Acts 13:45.   Ἦχος is usually masculine and in the second

declension, as in Heb. 12:19 (cf. Lu. 4:37; Ac. 2:2), and for the

 

            1 Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 125; Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 143. On

the origin of these forms see Hatz., Einl., p. 318; Brug., Grundr., § 62 n.;

Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 34.

            2 Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, pp. 34, 434.

            3 Cf. W.-Sch., p. 81. In the LXX both θεός and θεέ occur. Cf. Helbing,

Gr. d. Sept., p. 34; C. and S., Sel. fr. LXX, p. 26; Thack., p. 145.

            4 Cf. Arrian, Peripl., p. 176. See W.-Sch., p. 84, for similar exx. in the

inscr., as ῥοῦς, ῥοός in late Gk. For pap. exx. of βοῦν, πλοῦν and χοῦν see Mayser,

Gr. d. griech. Pap., pp. 257 f., 268 f.


262    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

earlier according to Moeris and Blass.1  In Lu. 21:25 W. H.

read ἠχοῦς from ἠχώ but Hort2 admits ἤχους from τὸ ἦχος to be

possible, and Nestle reads ἤχους in his sixth edition. In Ac. 3:10

C reads θάμβου instead of θάμβους.  In eight instances in Paul

(2 Cor. 8:2; Ph. 4:19; Col. 1:27; 2:2; Eph. 1:7, 2:7; 3:8,

16) in the nominative and accusative we have τὸ πλοῦτος, but

ὁ πλοῦτος in Gospels, Jas., Heb., Rev. The genitive is always --του.

Τὸ σκότος instead of ὁ σκότος is read everywhere in the N. T. save

in the late addition to Heb. 12:18 where σκότῳ appears, though

ζόφῳ is the true text. The form δάκρυσιν (Lu. 7:38, 44) is from

δάκρυ, an old word that is found now and then in Attic, but τὸ

δάκρυον appears also in Rev. 7:17; 21:4; δακρύων may belong to

either decl. Σάββατον (–του, --τῳ) is the form used in the N. T. al-

ways, as Mk. 6:2, but σάββασιν as Mk. 1:21, etc. B has σαββάτοις,

like the LXX sometimes, in Mt. 12:1, 12.  Κατήγωρ is accepted

by W. H. and Nestle in Rev. 12:10 on the authority of A against

אBCP, which have the usual κατήγορος. According to Winer-

Schmiedel3 this is not Greek, but a transliteration of the Aramaic

קעיגור.  Blass,4 however, thinks it is formed on the model of ῥήτωρ.

          Several words fluctuate between the masculine and the neuter

in the second declension. In Lu. 14:16; Rev. 19:9, 17, several

MSS. read δεῖπνος instead of the usual δεῖπνον. Like the old Greek,

δεσμός has the plural δεσμά in Lu. 8:29; Ac. 16:26; 20:23, but

οἱ δεσμοί in Ph. 1:13. Before Polybius –ζυγόν was more common.

(Thayer), but in the N. T. it is ζυγός (Mt. 11:30).   Ὁ θεμέλιος is

the only form of the nom. sing. in the N. T., as 2 Tim. 2:10

(supply λίθος); Rev. 21:19, but τὰ θεμέλια (acc) in Ac. 16:24

like the LXX and the Attic. The plural θεμελίους we have in Help

11:10; Rev. 21:14, 19.  θεμέλιον (acc.) may be either masculine,

or neuter. In Ro. 11:10 ὁ νῶτος is used in the quotation from the

0. T. instead of the older τὸ νῶτον.  In the early Greek ὁ σῖτος

(never τὸ σῖτον) had a plural in σῖτα as well as σῖτοι.  The same,

thing is true of the N. T. MSS. for Ac. 7:12 except that they di-

vide between τὰ σῖτα and τὰ σιτία, and σιτία is the correct text.

 

            1 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 28. Cf. LXX MSS., for like variations in 7-6

and ὁ ζ., ὁ ἔλεος and τὸ ἔλ., ὁ ἦχος and τὸ ἦ., ὁ πλοῦτος and τὸ πλ.. See Helbing,

Gr. d. Sept., p. 47 f. See p. 49 for σάββασι and σαββάτοις, δάκρυον, δάκρυσι and

Cf. also Thack., Gr., pp. 153 ff.

            2 Notes on Orth., p. 158. See W.-Sch., p. 84, for exx. of ἤχους in the LXX.

For similar variations in the inscr. see Nachrn., Magn. Inschr., p. 135.

            3 P. 85. So also Thayer, the Rabbins' name for the devil.

            4 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 29; Deiss., Light, p. 90; Raderm., Gr., p. 15.


                 THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                          263

 

Blass1 indeed objects that σιτία does not suit the sense. Στάδιον

has σταδίους rather than the Attic στάδια in Lu. 24:13; Jo. 6:19

(W. H. and Nestle, but Tisch. στάδια אD), and is a marginal

reading in Rev. 21:16 instead of σταδίων.

          (e) THE MIXED DECLENSION. Some substantives with spe-

cial inflection have this. It is particularly in foreign names in

the α and o declensions that this inflection became popular. "The

stem ends in a long vowel or diphthong, which receives —ς for nom

inative and --ν for accusative, remaining unchanged in vocative,

genitive, and dative singular.  Ἰησοῦς is the most conspicuous of

many N. T. examples. It plays a large part in modern Greek."2

Hence we have  Ἰησοῦς nominative,   Ἰησοῦ genitive-ablative, as

Mt. 26:6; dative, etc., as Mt. 27:57; vocative Mk. 1:24. Some

MSS. of the LXX have dative  Ἰησοῖ in Deut. 3:21, etc. The

accusative is  Ἰησοῦν, as Mt. 26:4.   Ἰωσῆ is the genitive of  Ἰωσῆς

according to the reading of Mt. 27:56 in W. H. Mg. instead of

 Ἰσωήφ, but in Mk. 6:3   Ἰωσῆτος is the reading. So runs Λευείς

(nominative, Lu. 5: 29),  Λευεί (genitive, Lu. 3 : 24), Λευείν (accu-

sative, Lu. 5:27). Dative appears only in the LXX as Gen.

34:30 Λευεί.   Μανασσῆς has accusative Μανασσῆ in Mt. 1:10 and

the genitive in – (Rev. 7:6), but Hort3 calls attention to the

fact that אbB have Μανασσῆ instead of the nominative in Mt.

1:10, making the word indeclinable.

          (f) PROPER NAMES.  Ἰακώβ is indeclinable in Mt. 1:2, but we

have  Ἰάκωβον in Mt. 4:21. Several proper names have only the

plural, as θυάτειρα (Rev. 2:18, but B -ρη and ABC -ραν, 1:11),

  Ἰεροσόλυμα (Mt. 2:1, but πᾶσα 'I., 2:3),  Φίλιπποι (Ac. 16:12),

Καῦδα (Ac. 27:16), Μύρρα (Ac. 27:5), Πάταρα (Ac. 21:1), Σάρεπτα

(Lu. 4:26),  Σόδομα (Jude 7). The Latin words μόδιος (Mt. 5:15)

and μάκελλον (1 Cor. 10:25) are inflected. So Latin proper names

like  Ἰοῦστος (Ac. 18:7) and Παῦλος (Ro. 1:1). For Γομόρρας and

Λύστραν see 5 (g).

          7. The Third Declension (consonants and close vowels ι and

υ). The third declension could easily be divided into several

and thus we should have the five declensions of the Sanskrit and

the Latin. But the usual seven divisions of the third declension

have the genitive-ablative singular in --ος (--ως). The consonantal

 

            1 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 28. In the LXX MSS. we find δεσμοί and —, ζυγοί,

and –ά, θεμέλιοι and —α, νῶτοι and —α, στάδιον and στάδιοι, σῖτος and σῖτα.

Cf. Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 46 f.; Thack., p. 154f.         2 Moulton, Prol., p. 49.

            3 In the LXX proper names have great liberty in inflection. This is quite

natural in a transl. Cf. Thack., Gr., pp. 160-171.


264   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

stems show more sweeping changes than the vocalic (sonantic)

stems in this declension.1 Only those changes that are related to

the N. T. Greek can be here discussed.

          (a) THE NOMINATIVE AS VOCATIVE. There is an increasing

use of nominative forms as vocatives. This usage had long ex-

isted for nouns that were oxytone or had labial or guttural stems.

Elsewhere in general the stem had served as vocative. No

notice is here taken of the common use of the article with the

nominative form as vocative, like ἡ παῖς (Lu. 8:54), a construc-

tion coming under syntactical treatment. According to Winer-

Schmieder2 the use of the singular without the article belongs also

to syntax and the solution of W. H. is called "certainly false."

Hort3 had suggested that in the case of θυγάτηρ as vocative (Mk.

5:34; Lu. 8:48; Jo. 12:15) and πατήρ (Jo. 17:21, 24, 25) the

long vowel (η) was pronounced short. Why not the rather sup-

pose that the vocative is like the nominative as in the case of la-

bial and guttural stems? The usage is thus extended sometimes

to these liquids. Indeed, in Jo. 17:25 we have πατὴρ ἀγαθέ the

adjective having the vocative form. In Mk. 9:19 (Lu. 9:41) we

have ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος and ἄφρων in Lu. 12:20; 1 Cor. 15:36).

See also ὦ πλήρης (Ac. 13:10) for —ες, which might be an inde-

clinable form like the accusative (II, 2 (f)). But these adjectives

show that the usage is possible with substantives. There are in-

deed variant readings in the MSS. above, which have θύγατερ and

πάτερ, but in Mt. 9:22 DGL have θυγάτηρ. Note also ἄνερ (1 Cor.

7:16) and γύναι (Lu. 13:12). For peculiarities in nom. see (d).

          (b) THE ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR. The theoretical distinction

that consonant-stems had the accusative singular in –α and vocalic

stems in –ν began to break down very early. From the third cen-

tury B.C. Jannaris4 suspects that popular speech began to have all

accusative singulars with ν, an overstatement, but still the ten-

dency was that way. The use of ν with words like πόλιν, ναῦν (Ac.

27:41, only time in N. T., elsewhere vernacular πλοῖον), etc., to-

gether with the analogy of the first and second declensions, had a

positive influence. See p. 258 for discussion of the double accusa-

tive ending –α plus ν, like ἄνδραν in the papyri.5  These forms belong

in reality to the third declension, though formed after the analogy

of the first, and so were presented when first reached in the Lis-

 

            1 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 121.                2 P. 90.

            3 Notes on Orth., p. 158. Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 35, gives μήτηρ as

voc. three times in a iii/A.D. pap. (B.U.).

            4 Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 119.              5 Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 435.


                             THE DECLENSION (ΚΛΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                   265

 

cussion. However, there are other consonant-stems which form

the accusative in –ν instead of –α.  In Tit.3:9 and Ph. 1:15

we have ἔριν instead of ἔριδα.1  So in Rev. 3:7 and 20:1 the Attic

κλεῖν is read, for this is not a new tendency by any means, but

Lu. 11:52 the MSS. have κλεῖδα, though here also D has

κλεῖνΚλεῖδα is found in the LXX as in Judg. 3:25.  Χάριτα

appears in Ac. 24:27 and Ju. 4, and A has it in Ac. 25:9, but

the Attic χάριν holds the field (forty times).2 In the LXX the

Ionic and poetical χάριτα occurs only twice (Zech. 4:7; 6:14) and

is absent from the papyri before the Roman period. Cf Thack-

eray, Gr., p. 150. For the irrational ν with μείζω in Jo. 5:36 see

Adjectives. In Ac. 27:40 the correct text is ἀρτέμωνα, not --ονα,

from nom. ἀρτέμων.

          (c) THE ACCUSATIVE PLURAL. In Winer-Schmiedel (p. 88)

ἔρεις is given as nominative and accusative except in 1 Cor. 1:11

(ἔριδες, nom.), but as a matter of fact the accusative plural

does not appear in the N. T. except as an alternative reading

ἔρεις in אcACKLP, in Tit. 3:9 (correct text ἔριν). In Gal. 5:20

W. H. put ἔρεις in the margin rather than ἔρις, probably "an

itacistic error."3  W. H. read τὰς κλεῖς in Rev. 1:18, but κλεῖδας

in Mt. 16:19. In Ac. 24:27 χάριτας is supported by HP and

most of the cursives against χάριτα (correct text) and χάριν (אcEL,

etc.). The accusative in -νς has changed into -ας with --υ and --ου

stems, as βόας from βοῦς (Jo. 2:14 f., cf. LXX), βότρυας from βό-

τρυς (Rev. 14:18), ἰχθύας from ἰχθύς (Mt. 14:17).4  This simplifica-

tion of the accusative plural was carried still further. Just as

πόλεας had long ago been dropped for πόλεις, so βασιλέας has be-

come –εῖς like the nominative, "and this accusative plural is reg-

ular in N. T. for all words in --ευς."5  In the LXX --εας appears a

few times, but since 307 B.C. the Attic inscriptions show --εις as

accusative.6  It is found indeed sometimes in Xenophon and

 

            1 Cf. Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 157. For the LXX see Thack., p. 140; Hel-

bing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 40 f., where the N. T. situation is duplicated.

            2 See Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 151, for illustr. of these accs. in the inscr.

For the pap. see Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 35, both χάριτα and χάριν, etc.

Cf. Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 271 f.

                    3 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 157.

                    4 Cf. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 26, and W.-Sch., p. 86. Arrian has ἰχθύας.

LXX MSS. (Thack., Gr., p. 147) show νηός and νεώς, νῆας and ναῦς, βόας. Cf.

Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 43. Usually ἰχθύας, p. 44.

                    5 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 26.

                    6 Meisterh., p. 141. Cf. W.-Sch., p. 86. So the LXX. Cf. Thack., Gr.,

p. 147 f.; Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p, 43. Wackern. (Indoger. Forsch., 1903,


266 A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

Thucydides, though the strict Atticists disown it. Cf. γραμμα-

τεῖς in Mt. 23:34, etc. A few forms in —εας survive in the in-

scriptions.1  Νήστεις (from νῆστις) is the correct accusative in Mk.

8:3 and Mt. 15:32.  א here reads νήστις, but is unreliable on

this itacism (Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 157). The Achaean, Elean,

Delphian and Phocian inscriptions2 (Northwest Greek) have ithe

accusative plural in –ες just like the nominative (cf. Latin).3 It is

very common in the modern Greek vernacular and in the papyri.4

Moulton5 finds many examples like γυναῖκες, μῆνες, ὄντες, πάντες,

τέκτονες, τέσσαρες, etc.  In the LXX  τέσσαρες as accusative is very

common as a variant in the text of Swete.6  In Herodotus τεσσα-

ρεσκαίδεκα is indeclinable and τρεισκαίδεκα in Attic since 300 B.C.7

So in the N. T. some MSS. read τέσσαρες (though the most still

have τέσσαρας) as אA in Jo. 11:17, א in Ac. 27:29, AP in Rev.

4 :4; 7: 1, א in Rev. 9:14.8  In Rev. 4:4 the best authority (א,

AP, etc.) is really on the side of τέσσαρες (second example).9  In-

deed "in the N. T. τέσσαρας never occurs without some excellent

authority for τέσσαρες."10  In the first 900 of Wilcken's ostraca,

Moulton (Prol., p. 243) finds forty-two examples of accusative

τέσσαρες and twenty-nine of τέσσαρας.  Moulton11 considers it prob-

able that other nominative forms in Revelation, like ἀστέρες in A

(Rev. 1:16), may be illustrations of this same tendency.

 

p. 371) thinks the acc. in —εις is due not to the nom. but to compensative

lengthening.

            1 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 150.

            2 Also early in Phthiotis (J. Wackernagel, Zur Nominalinfl., indoger.

Forsch., 1903, p. 368). Cf. Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 119; Mayser, Gr. d. griech.

Pap., 1906, p. 270 f.

            3 Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 546.

            4 Moulton, Prol., p. 36. Cf. Volker, Pap. Grace. Synt., p. 28.

            5 Cl. Rev., 1901, pp. 34, 435. Cf. also Buresch, Rhein. Mus., XLVI, 218.

            6  W.-Sch., p. 87.                                  7 Ib. Cf. Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 163 f.

            8 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 26. Cf. Jann., p. 120.

            9 Cf. Hort, Notes on Sel. Read., p. 138.

            10 Moulton, Prol., p. 36. "In Rev. CB have —ραςא 3/5, AP 3/6."  H.

Scott.

            11 Ib. This use of —ες as acc. may be compared with the common acc. pl.

in —ες in the mod. Gk. vernac. Cf. Thumb, Handb., pp. 47 ff. Cf. nom. like

ὁ πατέρας (Psichari, Ess. de Gr. Hist. Neo-grecque, 1886, le partie, p.

Even ἡμέρες, πολίτες, etc. In the Eleatic dial. the loc.-dat. pl. is —οις as in

χρημάτοις.  Cf. Meister, Bd. II, p. 61. The LXX MSS. show τέσσαρες as acc.

See Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 54. The acc. in —ες rare in LXX MSS. outside of

τέσσαρες. Thack., Gr., p. 148 f. Moulton (Prol., p. 243, ed. 2) suggests that

this tendency started with τέσαρες because it is the only early cardinal that

had a separate form for the acc. plural.


                THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                               267

 

          (d) PECULIARITIES IN THE NOMINATIVE. In general one may

say that the various ways of forming the nominative singular in

Greek are blending gradually into unity, the masculine in ς and

the feminine in α or η. Many of the new substantives went over

to the first declension.1  Luke has gen.  Ἐλαιῶνος, in Ac. 1:12 from

nom.  Ἐλαιών, and the papyri give nearly thirty examples of this

noun.2  Jos. also (Ant. vii, 9, 2) has  Ἐλαιῶνος. On the other

hand the use of   Ἐλαία is frequent (in Jos. also), as εἰς τὸ ὄρος τῶν

 Ἐλαιῶν, (Mt. 21:1). But in Lu. 19:29 we have πρὸς τὸ ὄρος τὸ

καλούμενον  Ἐλαιῶν, (W. H.),and in Lu. 21:37 εἰς τὸ ὄρος κτλ.  In

both these examples it would be possible to have  Ἐλαιών, not as

an indeclinable substantive, but as a lax use of the nominative

with ὁ καλούμενος (cf. Revelation and papyri). So Deissmann.3

But even so it is still possible for  Ἐλαιῶν to be proper (on the

whole probably correct) in these two disputed passages.4  It is

even probable that the new nominative  Ἐλαιών, is made from the

genitive  Ἐλαιῶν.5    Ἔρεις is a variant with ἔρις in Gal. 5:20 ( marg.

W. H.), 1 Cor. 3:3; 2 Cor. 12:20; 1 Tim. 6:4, but in 1 Cor.

1:11 all MSS. have ἔριδες.  W. H. once (Ac. 1:10) accept the

rare form ἔσθησις (2, 3 Macc.) rather than the usual ἐσθής, though

the Alexandrian and Syrian classes have it also in Lu. 24:4. In

Lu. 13:34 אD read nominative not found in ancient Greek

(Thayer), though the Doric used the oblique cases ὄρνιχος, etc.6  

Elsewhere in all MSS. the usual ὄρνις occurs, as Mt. 23:37, and

in the N. T. only the nominative singular is found.7  Another con-

trary tendency to the usual ς in the nominative singular is seen in

ὠδίν (1 Th. 5:3; cf. also Is. 37:3) for the usual ὠδίς. The papyri

show forms like ὀξύρριν.

          One or two points about neuter substantives call for remark.

The inflection in —ας, —αος = —ως, has nearly vanished.8  A few ex-

amples still survive in the inscriptions.9  In Lu. 1:36 the Ionic

form γήρει from γῆρας is found, as often in the LXX and Test.

 

            1 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 121.

            2 Moulton, Prol., p. 49; Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 35. Deiss., B. S., pp. 208 ff.

            3 B. S., p. 210.

            4 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 158. Cf. W.-Sch., p. 93. Moulton (Prol., pp. 69,

235) has a full presentation of the facts.

            5 Moulton, Prol., p. 235.

            6 The form ὄρνιξι appears several times in the pap. Moulton, Cl. Rev.,

1901, p. 35. Cf. Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 149.

            7 W.-Sch., p. 89. LXX ὀρνίθων.

            8 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 26.

            9 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 156.


268      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMEN'T

 

XII Pat.1   Κέρας always in the N. T. (as in LXX) has the Attic

plural κέρατα (Rev. 8 times) and τέρας regularly τέρατα (11 times).

The plural κρέα (from κρέας) is the only form in the N. T. (1 Cor.

8:13; Rom. 14:21) as in the LXX, though a MSS. or so in each

case has κρέας (singular).

          (e) THE GENITIVE-ABLATIVE FORMS. These call for little re-

mark save in the adjective, for which see later.  Σινάπεως (from

σίναπι) is uniform in the N. T., as Mt. 17:20.  Πήχυς has no geni-

tive singular in the N. T. though πήχεος is common in the LXX,2

but has πηχῶν (from Ionic πηχέων or through assimilation to neu-

ters in –ος), not the Attic πήχεων. In Jo. 21:8 only A Cyr. have

πήχεων and in Rev. 21:17 only א.3  For the genitive singular of

 Ἰωσῆς and Μανασσῆς see 6 (e).

          (f) CONTRACTION. It is not observed in ὀρέων (Rev. 6:15)

and χειλέων (Heb. 13:15). In both instances the Ionic absence

of contraction is always found in the LXX (Prov. 12:14). This

open form is not in the Attic inscriptions, though found in MSS.

of Attic writers and the poets especially.4 In the κοινή it is a

"widespread tendency" to leave these forms in —os uncontracted,

though  ἐτῶν is correct in Ac. 4:22, etc.5  So the LXX, Thackeray,

Gr., p: 151.

          (g) PROPER NAMES. Μωυσῆς has always the genitive-ablative

Μωυσέως (Jo. 9:28), though no nominative Μωυσεύς is known. The

genitive Μωσῆ appears usually in the LXX, as Num. 4:41, and

the vocative Μωσῆ as in Ex. 3:4. Cf. Thackeray, Gr., p. 163 f.

W. H. have Μωυσεῖ (always with v. r. –σῇ)  as in Mk. 9:4, except

in Ac. 7:44 where the form in --is due to the LXX (usual form

there).6  The accusative is Μωυσέα once only (Lu. 16:29), else-

where –ῆν, as in Ac. 7:35 (so LXX).  Σολομών (so in the nom-

inative, not –ῶν) is indeclinable in א in Mt. 1:6 as usually in

the LXX. But the best MSS. in Mt. 1:6 have the accasative

Σολομῶνα, a few –ῶντα.  So the genitive Σολομῶνος in Mt. 12:42,

 

            1 W.-Sch., p. 86. So Sir. 25:3, etc. The LXX also has the Ionic gen.

γήρους. See Thack., Gr., p. 149; Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 42. Cf. Mayser,

Gr. d. Griech. Pap., p. 276.                    2 As Ex. 25:9. Cf. W.-Sch., p. 87.

            3 Hort, Notes on Orth. But Xen. and Plut. (often) have πηχῶν. See

W.-M., p. 75. In LXX note πήχεος and πήχεως, πήχεων and πηχῶν. Helbing,

Gr., p. 45; Thack., p. 151.

            4 W.-Sch., p. 88.                                   5 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 27.

            6 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 158. Cf. Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., pp. 581-60, for

discussion of the decl. of proper names in the LXX. The phenomena corre-

spond to those in N. T. MSS. Προμηθεύς had an Attic nom. –ής, gen. —έως,

Thumb, Handb., § 330. 1,


                  THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                              269

 

though a few MSS. have –ῶντος.  The Gospels have uniformly the

genitive in —ῶνος.  But in Ac. 3:11 W. H. accept Σολομῶντος (so

also 5:12), though BD etc. have ῶνος in 5:12.  Cf. Ξενοφῶντος

(from nominative –ῶν).  Διοτρ<φης (3 Jo. 9) and   Ἑρμογένης (2 Tim.

1:15) occur in nom. There are other proper names (Roman and

Semitic) which are inflected regularly like Βαβυλών (Mt. 1:11),

Γαλλίων (Ac. 18: 12),  Ἐλαιών (Ac. 1:12) Καῖσαρ (Mt. 22: 17), Σαρών

(Ac. 9:35), Σιδών (Mt. 11:21), Σίμων (Mt. 4:18). There should

be mentioned also Σαλαμίς (dative —ῖνι, Ac. 13:5). Cf. proper

names in the LXX, Thackeray, Gr., pp. 163 ff.

          (h) HETEROCLISIS AND METAPLASM. Most of the examples

have already been treated under the first declension 5 (g) or the

second declension 6 (d). The accusative ἅλα (Mk. 9:50) is like

the old Greek ὁ ἅλς.  Some MSS. (Western and Syrian classes) in

Mk. 9:49 have ἁλί also.  In Mk. 9:50 אLA have τὸ ἅλα as nomi-

native (cf. Lev. 2:13) like γὰλα.  But the best MSS. (אBDLΔ)

give τὸ ἅλας in the first two examples in 9:50 and ἅλα (accusative)

in the third (so W. H.).  So also Mt. 5:13 and Lu. 14:34. Cf.

dative ἅλατι in Col. 4:6.  In the LXX τὸ ἅλας is rare (Thackeray,

Gr., p. 152).  Papyri show τὸ ἅλας in third century B.C. (Moulton,

and Milligan, Expositor, Feb., 1908, p. 177). Instead of ὄρνις in

Rev. 18:2 we have the genitive ὀρνέου, from ὄρνεον (good old Greek

word), ὀρνέοκις in Rev. 19:17, and ὄρνεα in 19:21. In Mk. 6:4

and Lu. 2:44 συγγενεῦσι. (cf. 1 Macc. 10:88) is probably1  from

συγγενεύς, not συγγενής.  Cf. 1 Macc. 10:89. This is a good

place for me to record the admiration which has possessed me as I

have tested the work of Hort through the maze of details in the

MS. evidence concerning the forms.

          8. Indeclinable Words. These do not, of course, belong to

any declension. Josephus Grecized most of the Hebrew proper

names like  Ἀμίναβος (Mt. 1:4,  Ἀμιναδάβ).2 Some he put in the

first declension, many in the second and third declensions.3  Blass4

sums the matter up by observing that "the Hebrew personal

names of the 0. T., when quoted as such," are indeclinable. This

is an overstatement. But certainly many that in the LXX and

the N. T. are not inflected, might have been, such, for instance,

as  Ἀαρών,   Ἰακώβ, Κεδρών, Σαλμών, Συμεών, to go no further.5  It

is hardly worth while to give the entire list of these words.

 

            1 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 158.  3 W.-Sch., p. 91.

            2 Ib. for extensive list.               4 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 29.

            5 Thack., Gr., p. 169, suggests that place-names in —ων are declined or in-

declinable according to rank and distance.


270       A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

They include such other words as the majority of those in the

genealogy in Mt. 1 and that in Lu. 3, besides many other proper

names,1 including such geographical names as Αἰνών, Βηθφαγή,

Σιών, Σινᾶ, etc.

          There are other indeclinable Hebrew and Aramaic words such

as Κορβᾶν (Mk. 7:11),  μάννα (Rev. 2:17), πάσχα (Lu. 2:41), σί-

κερα (Lu. 1:15 as in LXX). The gender (fem.) of the inde-

clinable οὐαί (Rev. 9:12; 11:14) is probably due, as Blass2 sug-

gests, to θλίψις.  In 1 Cor. 9:16 οὐαί is used as a substantive (so

also LXX).

          The use of ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος in the nominative after

ἀπό in Rev. 1:4, etc., belongs more to syntax than to accidence.

It is evidently on purpose (to express the unchangeableness of

God), just as ὁ διδάσκαλος καὶ ὁ κύριος is in apposition with με (Jo.

13:13) in lieu of quotation-marks.

 

                II. THE ADJECTIVE (  ὌΝΟΜΑ   ἚΠΙΘΕΤΟΝ)

          Donaldson3 is probably right in saying that, in general, the

explanation of the adjective belongs to syntax rather than to

etymology.  But there are some points concerning the adjective

that demand treatment here.

          1. The Origin of the Adjective. Adjectives are not indis-

pensable in language, however convenient they may be.4  In the

Sanskrit, for instance, the adjective plays an unimportant part.

Whitney5 says: "The accordance in inflection of substantive and

adjective stems is so complete that the two cannot be separated

in treatment from one another." He adds6 that this wavering

line of distinction between substantive and adjective is even

more uncertain in Sanskrit than in the other early Indo-Ger-

manic tongues. Most of the Sanskrit adjectives have,three

endings, the masculine and neuter being usually α stems while

the feminine may have α or ι, this matter being "determined in

great part only by actual usage, and not by grammatical rule."

So likewise Giles in his Comparative Philology has no distinct

treatment of adjectives. The adjective is an added descriptive

appellative (ὄνομα ἐπίθετον) while the substantive is an essential

appellative (ὄνομα οὐσιαστικόν). But substantives were doubtless

 

            1 See further list in W.-Sch., p. 91.        3 New Crat., p. 502.

            2 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 32.                                   4 Farrar, Gk. Synt., p.' 29.

            5 Sans. Gr., p. 111.

            6 Ib. Cf. Monro, Hom. Gr., p. 117, for the adjectival use of the substantive.

 

 


             THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                             271

 

used in this descriptive sense before adjectives arose, as they are

still so used. So, for instance, we say brother man, Doctor A.,

Professor B., etc. Cf. in the N. T. ἐν τῷ  Ἰορδάνῃ ποταμῷ (Mt.

3:6), etc. This is, indeed, apposition, but it is descriptive ap-

position, and it is just at this point that the adjective emerges in

the early period of the language.1  Other Greek adjectives in

form as in idea are variations from the genitive case, the genus

case.2  In itself the adjective is as truly a noun as the substantive.

As to the form, while it is not necessary3  that in every case the

adjective express its gender by a different inflection, yet the ad-

jectives with three genders become far commoner than those

with two or one.4 From the etymological point of view this in-

flection in different genders is the only distinction between sub-

stantive and adjective.5 The Greek has a much more highly

developed system of adjectives than the Sanskrit, which has sur-

vived fairly well in modern Greek, though a strong tendency is

present to simplify adjectives to the one declension (--ος, —η, --ον).

Participles, though adjectives in inflection, are also verbs in sev-

eral respects and call for separative discussion. The process of

treating the adjective as a substantive belongs to syntax.6 The

substantivizing of the adjective is as natural, though not so com-

mon in Greek as in Latin, as the adjectivizing of the substantive

which we have been discussing.7 The distinction between adjec-

tive and substantive is hard to draw in modern Greek (Thumb,

Handb., p. 66). In modern Greek every adjective has a special

feminine form. The development is complete. Cf. Thumb, pp.

66 ff.

          2. Inflection of Adjectives. In Greek as in Sanskrit, the ad-

jective has to follow the inflection of the substantive in the various

declensions, the three genders being obtained by combining the

first with the second or the third declensions.

          (a) ADJECTIVES WITH ONE TERMINATION. Of course at first

this may have been the way the earliest adjectives arose. Then

the genders would be formed. But analogy soon led to the for-

mation of most adjectives with three endings. Some of these

 

            1 Delbruck, Syntakt. Forsch., IV, pp. 65, 259. Cf. Giles, Man. of Comp.

Philol., p. 239.

            2 Donaldson, New Crat., p. 474.             4 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 139.

            3 Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 30.                      5 Donaldson, New Crat., p. 502.

            6 Brug. (Griech. Gr., pp. 413-417) has no discussion of the adjective save

from the syntactical point of view.

            7 See Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 414 f., for numerous exx. in the earlier Gk.

 

 


272     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

adjectives with one ending were used only with the masculine or

the feminine, and few were ever used with the neuter.1  Jannaris2

considers them rather substantives than adjectives, but they il-

lustrate well the transition from substantive to adjective, like

ἄπαις, μάκαρ, φυγάς.  In fact they are used of animated beings.

In the N. T. we have ἅρπαξ (Mt. 7:15; 1 Cor. 5:10), πένης (2 Cor.

9: 9. Cf. πλάνητες, Jude 13 B), and συγγενίς (Lu. 1:36).  Συγγενίς

is a later feminine form like εὐγενίς for the usual συγγενής (both

masculine and feminine) which Winer3 treats as a substantive (so

Thayer). Strictly this feminine adjective belongs4 only to words

in –τής and –εύς.  Blass5 quotes εὐγενίδων γυναικῶν by way of com-

parison. Modern Greek still has a few of these adjectives in use.

The ancient adjectives in –ης  (εὐγενής) have disappeared from the

modern Greek vernacular (Thumb, Handb., p. 72).

          (b) ADJECTIVES WITH TWO TERMINATIONS. Some adjectives

never had more than two endings, the masculine and the femi-

nine having the same form. In the so-called Attic second de-

clension this is true of  ἵλεως (Mt. 16:22). But a few simple

adjectives of the second declension never developed a feminine

ending, as, for instance, βὰρβαρος (1 Cor. 14:11), (αἰ)φνίδιος (Lu.

21: 34), σωτήριος (Tit. 2:11).6  In the N. T. ἥσυχος has changed

to ἡσύχιος (1 Pet. 3:4). The adjectives in the third declension

which end in –ης or –ων have no separate feminine form. So

εὐγενής (Lu. 19:12), εὐσεβής  (Ac. 10: 7) μείζων (Jo. 15:13), etc.

Then again some simple adjectives varied7  in usage in the earlier

Greek, especially in the Attic, and some of these have only two

endings in the N. T., like ἀΐδιος (Ro. 1:20), ἔρημος (Ac. 1:20, etc.,

and often as substantive with γῆ or χώρα not expressed), κόσμιος

(1 Tim. 2:9), οὐράνιος (Lu. 2:13; Ac. 26:19), φλύαρος (1 Tim.

5:13), φρόνιμος (Mt. 25:2, 4, 9), ὠφέλιμος (1 Tim. 4:8; 2 Tim.

3:16).  With still others N. T. usage itself varies as in the case

of αἰώνιος (Mt. 25:46, etc.) and αἰωνία (Heb. 9:12; 2 Th. 2:16,

and often as a variant reading); ἕτοιμος (Mt. 25:10) and ἑτοίμη

(1 Pet. 1:5); μάταιος (Jas. 1:26) and ματαία (1 Pet. 1:18); ὅμοιος

(Rev. 4: 3, second example correct text) and ὁμοία (Rev. 9:10,

 

            1 K.-B1., I, p. 547 f.                                          2 Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 143.

            3 W.-M., p. 80. But cf. W.-Sch., p. 97.

            4 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 33.              5 Ib.

            6 Cf. K.-B1., I, p. 535 f., for fuller list. Some of the simple verbals in —τος

also had no fem., as ὤνητος.

            7 In the LXX we see a very slight tendency towards giving a fem. form to

all adjs. Thack., Gr., p. 172.

 


                         THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                                273

 

though W. H. put ὁμοίας in the margin instead of ὁμοίας, 19); ὅσιος

(1 Tim. 2:8; so probably, though ὁσίους may be construed with

ἐπαίροντας instead of χεῖρας).  The early Attic inscriptions furnish

examples of two endings with such adjectives as δόκιμος (no fem-

inine example in the N. T.) and λοιπός with either two or three

(N. T. only three).1  The papyri furnish ἔρημος and οὐράνιος as

feminine and others not so used in the N. T., as δίκαιος, μέτριος,  

σπόριμος.2  It was the rule with compound adjectives to have only

two endings, for the most of them never developed a feminine

form, as ὁ (ἡ) ἅλογος.3  This tendency survives in the inscriptions,

especially with compounds of α– privative and prepositions, and

in the papyri also we have abundant examples.4 The N. T. usage

is well illustrated by 1 Pet. 1:4, εἰς κληρονομίαν ἅφθαρτον καὶ ἀμίαν-

τον καὶ ἀμάραντον. Cf. Jas. 3: 17.

          (c) ADJECTIVES WITH THREE TERMINATIONS. The great ma-

jority of Greek adjectives, like ἀγαθός, --ή, --όν,  developed three

endings and continue normal (cf. Thumb, Handbook, p. 68), as

is universal in the modern Greek. Some of the compound adjec-

tives also had three endings, especially compounds in —ικός and

ιος, as μοναρχική, ἀναξία (Plato).5 The same thing is observed in

the inscriptions6 and the papyri.7  In the N. T. we have several

examples, as ἀργός, --ή (Attic always ἀργός, though Epimenides has

--) in 1 Tim. 5:13;. Tit. 1:12; Jas. 2:20 according to BC. In

Mk. 4:28 αὐτομάτη is not entirely new, for classic writers use it.

In 2 Jo. 13 (and probably also 1) we have ἐκλεκτή.   In Mt. 4:13

the MSS. give παραθαλασσία, but D has –ιον.  However, in Lu.

6:17 παράλιος is the feminine form, though occasionally the LXX

and older Greek had –ία, varying like the other compounds in

ιος. Other adjectives of three endings belong to the third and

 

            1 Cf. Meisterh., Att. Inschr., p. 148. Cf. also αιώνιος, κόσμιος, in Magnesia

Magn. Inschr., p. 140). Aristophanes used βασίλειος, βέβαιος, μακά-

ριος, οὐράνιος, πάτριος with two endings (G. Wirth, De Motione Adjectivorum,

1580, p. 51). This is true also of Euripides (ib., p. 49 f.). For further discus-

sion of adjectives with two endings see Wilhelm, Zur Motion der Adjec. dreier

End. in Griech. etc., p. 23; Wilhelm, Der Sprachgebr. der Lukianos etc., p.

23. Cf. Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 57 f. On the whole the LXX shows the ex-

tension of the fem. so that adjs. which in Attic have two or three terminations

have three in the LXX (ἄγριος, βέβαιος, δίκαιος, ἐλεύθερος, μάταιος). Thack., Gr.,

p. 172.

            2 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 289 f.   3 K.-B1., I, p.    538.

            4 Cf. Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 141; Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 158;

ayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 291.

            5 K.-B1., I, p. 538 f.                              6 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 158.

            7 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 291.

 


274      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

the first declensions, like ὀξύς, ὀξεῖα, ὀξύ; πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν; ἑκών, ἑκοῦσα,

ἑκον; μέλας, μέλαινα, μέλαν; μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα; πλύς, πολλή, πολύ.

Cf. the perfect active participle in –ώς, --υῖα, --ός.  The LXX MSS.

sometimes have πᾶν as indeclinable (πᾶν τὸν τόπον, etc.) like

πλήρης.  Cf. Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 51. Indeclinable πλήρης

is retained by Swete in Sir. 19 : 26. Cf. Helbing, ib. See (f)

below.

          (d) THE ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR. Some adjectives of the third

declension have ν after the analogy of the first declension. See

this chapter, 1, 5, (g), for the discussion in detail. W. H. reject

them all, though in a few cases the testimony is strong.1  They are

ἀσεβῆν (Ro. 4 :5), ἀσφαλῆν (Heb. 6:19), μείζων (Jo. 5:36), συγγενῆν

(Ro. 16:11), ὑγιῆν (Jo. 5:11).  The use of irrational ν with μείζω

(Jo. 5:36 μείζων in ABEGMΔ) is likened by Moulton (Prol., p. 49)

to irrational ν with subjunctive ᾖ (ἦν).   Cf. ch. VI, II (h), p. 220.

          (e) CONTRACTION IN ADJECTIVES. Two points are involved,

the fact of contraction (or the absence of it) and the use of α or

η after ε, ι, ρ.  The uncontracted forms of adjectives are not so

common as is the case with substantives. Cf. this chapter, 1, 6,

(b). The contracted forms are practically confined to forms in

ους, like ἁπλοῦς, διπλοῦς, ἀργυροῦς, πορφυροῦς, σιδηροῦς, χαλκοῦς,

χρυσοῦς. Here again we have a still further limitation, for the

uncontracted forms occur chiefly in the Apocalypse and in א

and in the case of χρυσοῦς.2  Cf. Rev. 4:4; 5:8, where א reads

χρυσέους, –έας.  But in Rev. 2:1 אPB read χρυσῶν, while AC have

χρυσέων.  Χρυσᾶν in Rev. 1:13, though accepted by W. H. and

read by אAC, is rejected by Blass, but admitted by Debrunner

(p. 28), as shown on p. 257. P. Lond. reads χρυσᾶν ἢ ἀργυρᾶν, and

L. P.w (ii/iii A.D.) also has χρυσῆν ἢ ἀργυρῆν.3  In each instance

probably analogy has been at work.4 Thackeray (Gr., p. 172 f.)

gives a very few uncontracted forms in --εος in the LXX. W. H.

accept the genitive βαθέως in Lu. 24:1 and πραέως in 1 Pet. 3:4

instead of the usual form in –ος.  Hort5 considers the variations

in ἥμισυς as "curious," but they find abundant parallel in the

 

            1 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 157 f. For pap. exx. of ὑγιῆν see Mayser, Gr. d.

griech. Pap., p. 295. Thack. (Gr., p. 146) considers it a vulgarism, though it

began as early as iv/B.C. (see Σωκράτην, τριήρην). It is common ii/A.D.

            2 Cf. Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 157; Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 25. Cf. Hel-

bing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 34 f., for LXX.

            3 Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, pp. 35, 435.

            4 Moulton, Prol., p. 48. Cf. τὴν ἱερὴν κεφαλήν on Rom. tomb (Kaibel, Epi-

gram. Graeca, 1878, p. 269).

            5 Notes on Orth., p. 158.

 


                  THE DECLENSIONS (ΚΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                           275

 

papyri as does χρυσέων above.1  In Mk. 6:23 ἡμίσους, not --εος,

is the genitive form, the usual (probably only) form in the pa-

pyri.2  The neuter plural ἡμίσεα has practically no support in Lu.

19:8, though ἡμίση is the Text. Rec. on the authority of late

uncials and cursives.  Τὰ ἡμίσυ has slight support. W. H. read

τὰ ἡμίσια (אBQ 382, L having itacistic —εια) and derive it from a

possible ἡμίσιος.3  But it is possible, if not probable, that ἡμίσεια

was the earlier form changed by itacism to ἡμίσια.4  The plural of

νῆστις is νήστεις (Mk. 8:3; Mt. 15:32), and not νήστις as already

shown.5  For participles in –υία, –υίης see this chapter, p. 256.

As a rule the forms in –υίης and –ρης predominate, but note στείρᾳ,

in Lu. 1:36.6  In the case of ὑγιής, whereas the Attic had accu-

sative ὑγιᾶ (ὑγιῆ in Plato, Phadr. 89 d), the N. T., like the inscrip-

tions, papyri and the LXX, has only ὑγιῆ (Jo. 5:11, 15; 7:23).7

In Jo. 18: 1 χειμάρρου is almost certainly from χείμαρρος instead of

the classical χειμάρροος.8  In 2 Pet. 2:5  ὄγδοον is not contracted,

though sometimes the papyri have ὄγδους, ὄγδουν.9

          (f) INDECLINABLE ADJECTIVES. The papyri have cleared up

two points of much interest here. One is the use of πλήρης in

N. T. MSS. in an oblique case. In Mk. 4:28 Hort (Appendix,

p. 24) suggests πλήρης σῖτον (C* two lectionaries) as probably the

original.  In Ac. 6:5 W. H. put ἄνδρα πλήρης in the margin,

though πλήρη is read only by B among the MSS. of importance.

In Jo. 1:14 all the MSS. (save D 5 followed by Chrys. and

Theoph.) have πλήρης.  Moulton10 indeed suggests that πλήρη was

the original text, which was changed to the vulgar πλήρης. But

the argument can be turned round just as easily. In almost

every N. T. instance of an oblique case of πλήρης good uncials

have the indeclinable form (Moulton, Prol., p. 50). The LXX

also has examples of indeclinable πλήρης (cf. Hort, Appendix, p.

 

            1 Χρυσέῳ is exceedingly common in the pap. (Moulton, Cl. Rev., Dec., 1901,

p. 435).

            2 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 294 f. Cf. also Deiss., B. S., p. 186; Moul-

ton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 34. So also the LXX, Thack., Gr., p. 179.

            3 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 15S. Cf. W.-Sch., p. 87. Cf. Helbing, Gr. d.

Sept., p. 52.

            4 Cf. W.-Sch., p. 87.   Ἡμίσεια occurs in Antoninus Liberalis (ab. 150 A.D.)

and οἰκεῖος is analogous.

            5 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 157.              6 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 25.

            7 Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 35. For adjs. with acc. in —η (and sometimes

ν added, —ην) see Dieterich, Unters., p. 175. Cf. this ch., II, 2, (d).

            8 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 25.  9 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 294.

            10 Prol., p. 50. See Cronert, Mem., p. 179; Turner, Jour. Theol. St., I, pp.

100 ff. Milligan (N. T. Doc. s, p. 65) finds one ex. of indecl. πλήρης B.C.

 


276        A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

24). So Job 21: 24, אABC. The examples of πλήρης so used are

"fairly common" in the papyri1 and come as early as the second

century B.C.2  There seems therefore no reason to refuse to con-

sider πλήρης in Jo. 1:14 as accusative and to accept it as the text

in Mk. 4:28 and Ac. 6:5. The other example of indeclinable

adjectives is found in comparative forms in –ω, like πλείω. Moul-

ton3 points out that in Mt. 26:53 אBD read πλείω δώδεκα λεγιῶνας,

while the later MSS. have mended the grammar with πλείους.

He quotes also Cronert4 who has furnished abundant evidence

from the papyri and literature of such a use of these forms just

like πλήρης.  Cf. Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Papyri, p. 63 f.

          3. Comparison of Adjectives. The comparative is a natural

development in the adjective, as the adjective itself is a growth

on the substantive.

          (a) THE POSITIVE (θετικὸν ὄνομα OR ὄνομα ἁπλοῦν). This is the

oldest form of the adjective, the most common and the most per-

sistent. It is not always true that the comparative and superla-

tive forms represent an actually higher grade than the positive.

The good is sometimes more absolute than better or even best.

See ἀγαθός in Mk. 10:18, for instance. Sometimes indeed the posi-

tive itself is used to suggest comparison as in Mt. 18:8, καλόν σοί

ἐστιν εἰσελθεῖν . . . ἢ δύο χεῖρας, κτλ.  This construction is common

in the LXX, suggested perhaps by the absence of comparison in

Hebrew.5  The tendency of the later Greek is also constantly to

make one of the degrees do duty for two. Cf. Thackeray, Gr.,

p. 181. But this matter belongs rather to the syntax of compari-

son. Participles are, of course, used only in the positive save in

a few cases where the adjective-idea has triumphed wholly over

the verb-conception.6  Verbals in —τος sometimes have comparison,

though μᾶλλον, may be freely used with participles.

          (b) THE COMPARATIVE (συγκριτικὸν ὄνομα). The stem may be

(besides adjective) either a substantive (βασιλεύ-τερος) or an adverb

(πρό-τερος).  Cf. Monro, Homeric Grammar, p. 82. The primary

comparative-ending –ιων, (Sanskrit iyans) is probably kin to the ad-

jective-ending —ιος.7  This form along with the superlative –ιστος is

 

            1 Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 35. For the indecl. πλήρης in Acta Thomae see

Reinhold, De Graec. etc., p. 24. Cf. Sir. 19 : 26. See Helbing, Gr. d. Sept.,

p. 52. It is not till i/A.D. that it is common in the pap. Thack. (Gr., p. 176)

thinks it not genuine in the LXX.

            2 lb., p. 435. But see Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 297.

            3 Prol., p. 50.                4 Philologus, LXI., pp. 161 ff.    5 W.-M., p. 302.

            6 K.-BI., I, p. 553; Schwab, Die Hist. Synt. d. griech. Comparative, 3.

Heft, 1895, pp. 152 ff.               7 Hirt, Handb. etc., p. 290; Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 30,

 


                    THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                            277

 

probably originally qualitative in idea and does not necessarily

imply excess. In the modern Greek these forms are not used at all.1

They have disappeared before the secondary comparative form

τερος, which even in the earlier Greek is far more common. The

ending —τερος does imply excess and appears in various words that

are not usually looked upon as comparatives, as ἕ-τερος (‘one of

two), ἑκά-τερος (‘ each of two'), ἡμέ-τερος (nos-ter), ὑμέ-τερος (vos-ter),

ὕσ-τερος.2  So also δεύ-τερος like πρό-τερος (cf. Latin al-ter, Eng-

lish other) is a comparative form.3  "The comparison-suffixes ιων,

ιστος, τερος belong to the Indo-Germanic ground speech."4  In the

N. T. the forms in —ιων), as in the papyri,5  hold their own only

in the most common words. Schwab (op. cit., p. 5) makes —ατος

older than --τατος.   Ἀμείνων is not used in the N. T. and Βέλ-

τιον only as an adverb once (2 Tim. 1:18).  Ἐλάσσων appears

four times, once about age as opposed to μείζων (Ro. 9:12), once

about rank as opposed to κρείσσων (Heb. 7:7), once about excel-

lence  (Jo. 2:10) as again opposed κρείσων, and once as an

adverb (ἔλασσον, 1 Tim. 5:9) in the sense of less, not μικρότερος

(‘smaller’).   Ἧσσον (neuter only) is found in 1 Cor. 11: 17 as op-

posed to κρεῖσσον, and as an adverb in 2 Cor. 12:15.  Κάλλιον (Ac.

25:10) is an adverb.  Κρείσσων, is confined to Peter, Paul's Epis-

tles and Hebrews (some eighteen examples, ten of them in Heb.).

Μείζων is common (some fifty times), though some of them dis-

place the superlative as we shall see directly. The neuter plural

(μεῖζονα) appears once as μείζω (Jo. 1:50).6  Once also (3 Jo. 4)

the double comparative form μειζότερος occurs, several simi-

tlar examples appearing in the papyri, as μειζότερος, μελαντώτερον, πρεσβυτερωτ<ρα.7  A few other examples in poetry and late Greek

are cited by Winer-Moulton,8 like κρειττότερος, μειζονότερος, μειζό-

 

            1 Cf. Thumb, Handb., p. 73.

            2 Cf. Hirt, Handb. etc., p. 292; Brug., Indoger. Forsch., 1903, pp. 7 ff.

            3 Cf. Ascoli in Curtius' Stud. zur griech. and lat. Gr., 1876, p. 351.

            4 Schwab, Hist. Synt. d. griech. Comp., Heft I, 1893, p. 3.

            5 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 298. He mentions βελτίων, ἐλάσσων,

ἥσσων, πλείων (πλέων). For the inscr., Nachm. (Magn. Inschr., p. 143) adds

ἀμείνων and μείζων.

            6 The pap. have many exx: of the form without ν as in πλείω (ους), etc. See

Mayser,. Gr. d. griech. Pap., pp. 298 ff. But the usage varies greatly. The

LXX MSS. show similar variations. See Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 54 f. As

LXX exx. of uniformity in form of comp. note ἀγαθώτερος and αἰσχρότερος, but

only ἐγγίων(—στος), not ἐγγύτερος (-τατος), C. and S., Sel. fr. LXX, p. 29. Thack.

(Gr., pp. 184 ff.) gives a careful summary of the exx. of –ιων, --ιστος in the LXX.

            7 Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, pp. 35, 435.

            8 P. 81. Cf. also Dieterich, Unters. etc., p. 180, for ὀλιζότερος.

 


278      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

τερος itself, μειότερος, πλειότερος.  Cf. English vernacular " lesser."

Τάχιον (W. H. ειον), not θᾶσσον, is the N. T. form as we read in

the papyri also.1  Cf. Jo. 20:4, etc.  Χείρων is found eleven times

(cf. Mt. 9:16). The ending  --τερος more and more the usual

one. Cf. τομώτερος (Heb. 4:12). Some comparative adjectives

are derived from positive adverbs like ἐξώτερος (Mt. 8:12),

ἐσώτερος (Ac. 16:24), κατώτερος (Eph. 4: 9). These latter adjec-

tives are common in the LXX and the later Greek, not to say

Attic sometimes.2  Διπλότερος (Mt. 23:15) is for the old Attic

διπλούστερος.  So Appian also. Cf. ἁπλότερον, Anthol. Pal., III,

158 (Dieterich, Unters., p. 181). The Ionic already had ὀλιγώτερος

and ταχύτερος (Radermacher, Gr., p. 56). Cf. ἀγαθώτερος (Hermas,

Mand. VIII, 9, 11) and ἀγαθώτατος (Diod., 16, 85). The rules

for the use of —ώτερος and —ότερος apply in the N. T. As μᾶλλον

is often used with the positive in lieu of the comparative ending,

so it is sometimes with the comparative, a double comparative

(μᾶλλον κρεῖσσον, Ph. 1:23; μᾶλλον πεισσότερν, Mk. 7:36), a

construction not unknown to the classic orators of Athens where

emphasis was desired.3 Paul did not perpetrate a barbarism when

he used ἐλαχιστότερος (Eph. 3:8), a comparative on a superlative.

It "is correctly formed according to the rule of the common

language."4  Cf. also such a late form as ἐσχατώτερος.5

          (c) THE SUPERLATIVE (ὑπερθετικὸν ὄνομα).  As with the com-

parative, so with the superlative there are primary and secondary

forms. The primary superlative ending –ιστος (old Indian isthas,

Zend. and Goth. ista)8 did not perhaps represent the true super-

lative so much as the dative (intensive like English "very") super-

lative.7  It was never very widely used and has become extinct in

modern Greek.8 The κοινή inscriptions show only a few examples

like ἄγχιστα, ἔγγιστα, κάλιστος, κράτιστος, μέγιστος, πλεῖστος.9  In

the papyri Mayser10 notes βέλτιστον, ἐλάχιστον (--ίστη also), καλλί-

στη, κάρτιστος, πλεῖστοι, ταχίστην (ιστα), χειρίστην. In the N. T.,

however, the superlative in –ιστος is more common than that in

τατος, though none too frequent in itself. They are besides usu-

ally elative (intensive) and not true superlatives.11 D reads ἔγ-

 

            1 Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 35. Cf. also ἀμεινότερος  in the older language

(Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 34).                         2 W.-M., p. 81; Thack., Gr., p. 183.

            3 Schwab, Hist. Synt. etc., Heft III, p. 65.

            4 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 34.              5 W.-M., p. 81, Jann., p. 147.

            6 K.-B1., I, p. 554; Hirt, Handb. etc., p. 291.

            7 Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 30.                      8 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 144.

            9 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 160; Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 143.

            10 Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 298.                  11 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 33.

 


 

                     THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                        279

 

γιστα in Mk. 6:36.  Ὁ ἐλάχιστος (1 Cor. 15:9) is a true superla-

tive, a thing so rare in the N. T. that Blass1 attributes this ex-

ample either to the literary language or to corruption in the

text.1  But Moulton2 is able to find a parallel in the Tb.P. 24,

ii/B.C. But more about true and elative superlatives in Syntax

(ch. XI;V, xiv). In 2 Cor. 12:9, 15 (D in Ac. 13:8), we have

ἥδιστα.  Κράτιστε (Lu. 1:3, etc.) is "only a title" (Moulton,

p. 78).  Μάλιστα appears a dozen times only, though μᾶλλον is

exceedingly common. Blass3 indeed suggests that a popular sub-

stitute for μάλιστα as for πλεῖστα was found in the use of περισσός.

This is much more true of the use of περισσός as the equivalent of

μᾶλλον or πλείων (cf. Mt. 5:37; 27:23). Paul uses the comparative

adverb περισσοτέρως (Ph. 1:14. Cf. double comparative in Mk.

7:36). In Heb. 7:15 (cf. 2:1; 13:19 —ως) περισσότερον ἔτι κατά-

δηλον we have more than μᾶλλον. Cf. μέγιστος (2 Pet. 1:4) and

πλεῖστος in Mt. 11:20; 21:8; 1 Cor. 14:27.  Τάχιστα (Ac. 17:15)

Blass4 credits again to the literary element in Luke. In ὕψιστος

we have a superlative that occurs thirteen times and always

about God or heaven (as Mk. 5:7; 11:10).

          When we take up the form in —τατος in the N. T. the story is

soon told.  Brugmann5 finds the origin of this ending in forms

like δέκατος (cf. Latin decimus), πρῶτος (cf. Latin primus), ὕπατος,

ὕστατος.  It has no direct parallel in the other languages.6  Hirt7  

suggests —ταμος and —ατος as two forms which finally resulted in

τατος.  It is true that the forms in —ατος faded away as superla-

tives and ἔσχατον became ἐσχατώτατον in the κοινή inscriptions,8

but this is true also of the forms in —τατος.9  The papyri have

"scores" of examples of superlatives in —τατος (chiefly elative).10

The rarity of the —τατος forms in the N T. may be purely acci-

dental (Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1904, p. 154). It is not quite true that

 

            1 Ib.                                                      3 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 33 f.

            2 Prol.,  79.                                           4 Ib., p. 33.

            5 Indog. Forsch., 1903, pp. 7-9. Ascoli (Curtius' Stud., etc., 1876, p. 351)

suggests τρίτος (cf. Hom. τρίτατος) also. Cf. also ἔσχατος.

            6 Hirt, Handb. etc., p. 294.                    7 Ib.

            8 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 161.

            9 This double superl. does not appear in the N. T., but various instances

are noted in the pap. and the later Gk. as ἐλαχιστότατος, μεγιστότατος, πρώτιστα.

So Lat. minissimus, pessimissimus. Cf. W.-M., p. 81; Dieterich, Unters.,

p. 181.

            10 Moulton, Prol., p. 78; Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 297 f. See Helbing,

Gr. d. Sept. pp. 54-57, for corresponding infrequency of the superl. forms in

the LXX. The compar. is driving it out. Cf. also ib., p. vii.

 


280    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

"only one example of the --τατος superlative" (Moulton, Prol.,

p. 78) survives in the N. T. There are three with –τατος, besides

those with –ατοςἁγιώτατος (Ju. 20), ἀκριβέστατος (Acts 26:5), τιμιώ-

τατος (Rev. 18:12; 21:11). Thackeray (Gr., p. 182) finds —τατος

much more common in the LXX, though chiefly in the elative

sense and in the more literary books of the LXX (Wisd., 2-4

Mace.; Prov., Esd.).   Ἀκριβέστατος (Ac. 26:5) Blass again credits

to the literary language.   Ἔσχατος and πρῶτος (ω from =ωρα, Doric

α) are both very frequent in the N. T. See Mt. 19:30 for the

contrasted πρῶτοι ἔσχατι κτλ.  The very great number of times

that πρῶτος (πρῶτον included) is used in the N. T. (some 200) in

contrast to only ten instances of πρότερον and one of προτέρα (Eph.

4:22) deserves comment. This seems in conflict with the ob-

served disuse of the superlative in favour of the comparative. But

a counter-tendency is at work here. The disappearance of dual-

ity before plurality has worked against πρότερον. Luke does not

use πρότερον at all and it appears only once in Grenfell and Hunt's

four volumes of papyri.1  The LXX shows πρῶτος displacing πρότε-

ρος (Thackeray, Gr., p. 183). So in English we say first story of

a house with only two, first edition of a book which had only two,

etc. It is almost an affectation in Greek and English, however

good Latin it may be, to insist on πρότερος. So in Jo. 1:15 (πρῶ-

τος μου), 15:18 (πρῶτον ὑμῶν), Ac. 1:1 (τὸν πρῶτον λόγον) we have

merely first of two and in the two first instances the ablative con-

struction as with the comparative. Winer properly saw this usage

of πρῶτον to be true to the Greek genius.2  In Mt. 27: 64 we have

both ἔσχατος and πρῶτος used of two, ἔσται ἡ ἐσχάτη πλάνη χείρων

τῆς πρώτης.  Πρότερος is indeed used in the sense of the former in

Eph. 4:22, whereas πρότερον in the sense of the first of two does

appear in Heb. 7:27 (πρότερονἔπειτα).3  It is probably a de-

fect in both Latin and Greek that the same forms were used to

express the elative and true superlative sense (so as to compara-

tive also).4 As the dual vanished, so it was inevitable that with

the same principle at work either the comparative or the superla-

tive would. Outside of  ἔσχατος and πρῶτος where the principle

crossed with a different application because πρότερος was dis-

appearing, it is the superlative that goes down, especially the true

superlative as opposed to the dative (intensive). Hermas, though

in the vernacular, still uses the superlative in the elative (inten-

 

            1 Moulton, Prol., p. 79

            2 W.-M., p. 306.

            3 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 34.

            4 Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 30.

 


                THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                     281

 

sive) sense very often.1  In the N. T. then the comparative is

beginning to take the place of the superlative, a usage occasion-

ally found in classical Greek,2 and found now and then in the

papyri.3  See 1 Cor. 13: 13 τὰ τρία ταῦτα μείζων δὲ τούτων ἡ ἀγάπη.

See also ὁ μεῖζων (Mt. 18:4). But this matter will call for more

comment under Syntax (ch. XIV, XIII, (i)).

 

                            III. NUMERALS (  ἈΡΙΘΜΟΙ).

          No great space is demanded for the discussion of the non-

syntactical aspects of the numerals.

          1. The Origin of Numerals. Donaldson4 thinks that seven of

the first ten numerals may be traced to primitive pronominal ele-

ments. Pronouns and numerals belong to the stable elements of

lahguage, and the numerals are rather more stable than the pro-

nouns in the Indo-Germanic tongues.5 See the numerals in sub-

stantial integrity in modern Greek (Thumb, Handb., pp. 80-84).

The system of numeration is originally decimal (cf. fingers and

toes) with occasional crossing of the duodecimal.6 There possibly

were savages who could not count beyond two, but one doubts if

the immediate ancestors of the Indo-Germanic peoples were so

primitive as that.7 See previous discussion in this chapter, I, 3.

Counting is one of the first and easiest things that the child

learns. It is certain that the original Indo-Germanic stock had

numerals up to 100 before it separated.8  The roots are wide-

spread and fairly uniform.

               2. Variety among Numerals.

          (a) DIFFERENT FUNCTIONS. The numerals may be either sub-

stantive, adjective or adverb. So ἡ χιλιάς (Lu. 14:31), χίλιοι

(2 Pet. 3:8), ἑπτάκις (Mt. 18:21).9  Number thus embraces sep-

arate ideas.

          (b) THE CARDINALS (ὀνόματα ἀριθμητικά). They may be either

declinable or indeclinable, and this according to no very well-de-

fined principle. The first four are declinable, possibly from their

frequent use." After 200 (δια-κόσιοι, --αι, --α) they have the regular

 

            1 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 33. He cites the mod. Italian also which makes

no distinction between the comp. and superl.

            2 Schwab, Hist. Synt. d. griech. Comp., II, pp. 172 ff.

            3 Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 439.                                 5 Giles, Man., etc., p. 393.

            4 New Crat., p. 294.                                                      6 Ib.

            7 However, see Moulton, Prol., p. 58. Cf. Taylor, Prim. Cult., I, p. 242 f.

            8 Moulton, Prol., p. 58.

            9 Cf. K.-B1., I, p. 621 f.                                                 10 Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 35.

 


282    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

inflection of adjectives of the second and first declensions. The

history of εἷς, μία, ἕν is very interesting, for which see the compara-

tive grammars.1  Εἷς is exceedingly common in the N. T. as a

cardinal (Mt. 25:15) and as an indefinite pronoun (Mt. 8:19),

approaching the indefinite article. For the use of εἷς in sense

of ordinal see Syntax, ch. XIV, xv, (a), but it may be remarked

here that the papyri have τῇ μιᾷ καὶ εἰκάδι (Moulton, Cl. Rev.,

1901, p. 35). The indeclinable use of εἷς (or adverbial use of κατά)

is common in later Greek. Cf. καθ’ εἷς in Mk. 14:19; (Jo. 8:9);

Ro. 12:5.2  So modern Greek uses ἕνα as neuter with which

Mayser3 compares ἕνα as feminine on an early ostrakon. But the

modern Greek declines ἕνας, μία, ἕνα in all genders (Thumb, Handb.,

p. 81).  Οὐδείς and μηδείς are both very common in the N. T. with

the inflection of εἷς.   Μηθείς occurs only once (Ac. 27:33). W. H.

admit οὐθείς only seven times (all in Luke and Paul, as Ac. 20:33),

and once (Ac. 15:9) οὐδέν is in the margin. Jannaris (Hist. Gk.

Gr., p. 170) calls this form in θ chiefly Alexandrian, rare in Attic,

but Mayser (Gr., p. 180) notes οὐδείς as "Neubildung" while

οὐθείς is good Attic. For history of it see Orthography and Pho-

netics, p. 219. The frequent use of δύο as indeclinable save in the

plural form δυσί in the later Greek has already been commented

on in this chapter (1, 3), as well as the disappearance of ἄμφω be-

fore ἀμφότεροι.  Indeclinable δύο is classical, and after Aristotle δυσί

is the normal dative (Thackeray, Gr., p. 186).  Τρία (possibly also

τρίς) is occasionally indeclinable in the papyri.4 The common use

of τέσσερα in the κοινή and the occasional occurrence of τέσσαρες

as accusative in N. T. MSS. (like Northwest Greek) have been

noticed in chapters VI, 2, (a), and VII, 1, 7, (c).5  Πέντε, ἓξ and ἑπτά  

need not detain us. The originally dual form ὀκτώ is found only

ten times, and five of them with other numerals.   Ἐννέα appears

only five times, while δέκα is nothing like so common as ἑπτά, not

to mention the first five cardinals.   Ἕνδεκα is found six times, but

δώδεκα is quite common, due chiefly to the frequent mention of the

Apostles. From thirteen to nineteen in the N. T., like the pa-

pyri6 and the modern Greek, δέκα comes first, usually without καί,

 

            1 Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 211; Hirt, Handb. etc., p. 311; Giles, Man., p. 394.

On numerals in the LXX see Thack., Gr., pp. 186-190; C. and S., Sel. fr. the

LXX, p. 30 f.                                        2 Cf. W.-M., p. 312. So ἀνὰ εἷς (Rev. 21:21).

            3 Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 312. Perhaps the earliest ex. of indeclinable ἕνα.

For the LXX usage cf. W.-Sch., p. 90.

            4 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 315.

            5 Ib. Cf. also Dittenb., 674. 28.              6 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 316.

 


                   THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                            283

 

as δέκα ὀκτώ (Lu. 13:4), though once with καί (Lu. 13:16). But

unlike the papyri the N. T. never has δεκαδύο.1  But δεκαπέντε (as

Jo. 11:18) and δεκατέσσαρες (as Gal. 2:1) occur several times

each.  Εἴκοσι is a dual form, while τριάκοντα and so on are plural.2

 Ἑκατόν is one hundred like ἅ-παξ. W. H. accent ἑκατοναετής, not

--έτης.  Usually no conjunction is used with these numerals, as

εἴκοσι τέσσαρες (Rev. 19:4), ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι (Ac. 1:15), but τεσσαρά-

κοντα καὶ ἕξ (Jo. 2:20). Cf. Rev. 13:18. In the LXX there is

no fixed order for numbers above the "teens." Thackeray, Gr.,

p. 188. The N. T. uses χίλιοι often and δισχίλιοι once (Mk. 5:13)

and τρισχίλιοι once (Ac. 2:41). The N. T. examples of μυρίος by

reason of case do not distinguish between μύριοι, ‘ten thousand’

(Mt. 18:24) and μυρίοι, 'many thousands' (1 Cor. 4:15). The

N. T. uses μυριάς several times for the latter idea (‘myriads’), some-

times repeated, as  μυριάδες μυριάδων (Rev. 5:11). So also χιλιάς  

is more common in the N. T. than χίλιοι, both appearing chiefly

in Revelation (cf. 5:11). In Rev. 13:18 B and many cursives

have χξς <=ἑξακόσιοι ἑξήκοιντα ἕξ, while the cursive 5 has χις < = ἑξακό-

σιοι δέκα ἕξ.  As a rule in the N. T. MSS. the numbers are spelled

out instead of mere signs being used.

          (c) THE ORDINALS (ὀνόματα τακτικά). They describe rank and

raise the question of order, πόστος.3  They are all adjectives of

three endings and all have the superlative form —τος save πρό-

τερος and δεύ-τερος which are comparative.4  In most cases the

ordinals are made from the same stem as the cardinals.5  But

this is not true of πρῶτος nor indeed of δεύ-τερος (not from δύο, but

from δεύομαι).6  Cf. the English superlative ‘first’ (with suffix -isto).

Πρῶτος has driven πρότερος out of use in the N. T. except as an

adverb (or τὸ πρότερον) save in one instance, προτέραν ἀναστροφήν  

(Eph. 4:22). The disappearance of πρῶτος before the ordinal

use of εἷς belongs to Syntax. In the N. T. as in the papyri5  the

ordinals up to twelve are regular. From 13 to 19 the N. T., like the

vernacular papyri7  (so Ionic and κοινή generally), puts the smaller

 

            1 Δέκα δύο is normal in the pap. of the Ptol. age. Cf. Rec., Ac. 19:7. Cf.

Thack., Gr., p. 188. So also δέκα τρεῖς, and even δέκα μιᾶς once. Always

δέκα τέσσαρες, δέκα πέντε, δέκα ὀκτώ.  Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 35.

            2 Giles, Man., p. 398.

            3 K.-Bl, I, p. 622. Cf. Brug., πόστος, Cl. Philol., 1907, p. 208.

            4 These both have a superl., as πρῶτος and δεύτατος (Horn.). Brug., Gk. Gr.,

p. 212.

            5 Giles, Man., p. 400. Cf. Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 212; Moulton, Prol., p. 95 f.

            6 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 318.

            7 Ib. Cf. Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 35.

 


284      A GRAMMAR OF THE GIMEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

number first and as a compound with καί, only the second half of

the word in the ordinal form. So τεσσαρεσκαιδέκατος (Ac. 27: 27),

not τέταρτος καὶ δέκατος (Attic).1  But the papyri show examples

of the usual Attic method,2 as ἔνατος καὶ εἰκοστός. The distinction

between the decades (like τριακοστός) and the hundreds (like τρια-

κοσιοστός) should be noted. In modern Greek all the ordinals

have disappeared out of the vernacular save πρῶτος, δεύτερος, τρί-

τος, τέταρτος.3  The article with the cardinal is used instead.

          (d) DISTRIBUTIVES IN THE N. T. The multiplicative distrib-

utives (with ending –πλοῦς) occur in the N. T. also.   Ἁπλοῦς as an

adjective is found only twice (Mt. 6:22= Lu. 11:34), both times

about the eye.  Διπλοῦς appears four times (as 1 Tim. 5:17).

Cf. the Latin sim-plex, du-plex, English simple, diplomatic. The

proportional distributives end in –πλασίων.  As examples one

may note ἑκατονταπλασίονα (Lu. 8:8) and πολλαπλασίονα (Lu. 18:

30). Cf. English "two-fold," "three-fold," etc. One of the com-

monest ways of expressing distribution is by repetition of the

numeral as in δύο δύο (Mk. 6:7). Cf. συμπόσια συμπόσια (Mk. 6:

39 f.). In Lu. 10:1 we have ἀνὰ δύο δύο in the text of W. H., a

"mixed distributive" (Moulton, Prol., p. 97). The modern Greek

has either ἀπὸ δυό or δυὸ δυό) (Thumb, Handb., p. 83). It is a

vernacular idiom which was given fresh impetus (Brugmann,

Distributiva, p. 9) from the Hebrew idiom. Deissmann cites τρία  

τρία from 0. P. 121 (iii/A.D.). Moulton (Prol., p. 21) follows

Thumb (Hellen., p. 152) in denying that it is a Hebraism. See

further ch. XIV, xv (d).

          (e) NUMERAL ADVERBS. These are of two kinds, either like

ἅμα (Ac. 24: 26), δίχα, 'in two' (not in the N. T., though see διχάζω

Mt. 10:35), or like ἅπαξ, δίς, τρίς, etc. The one kind answers to

multiplicatives and the other to proportionals.4 The numeral ad-

verbs continue in use in the LXX (Thackeray, Gr., p. 189 f.). The

modern Greek instead of the numeral adverb uses φορά (Thumb,

Handb., p. 83).

 

                        IV. PRONOUNS (  ἈΝΤΩΝΥΜΙΑΙ)

 

          1. Idea of Pronouns. It is not the idea of a subject or object

that is set forth by the pronoun, but the relation of a subject or

object to the speaker.5  Sometimes, to be sure, as in conversation,

 

            1 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 35. So the LXX also. Thack., Gr., p. 188.

            2 Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 35. And even the use of forms like ἓν κιὰ

εἰκοστὸν, Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 318.

            3 Thumb, Handb. d. neugr. Volksspr., p. 56. Cf. Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr.,

p. 175.                          4 Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 36.          5 K.-B1., I, p. 579.


                         THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                         285

 

the pronoun does not strictly stand in the place of a substantive.

When one person addresses another, "I" and "thou" are plain

enough from the nature of the circumstances. The pronoun in-

dicates, but does not name the speaker, etc. In a sense then

language is a sort of drama in which there are three characters,

the speaker, the person addressed and the person spoken of.1  

Hence the first and second personal pronouns have no gender,

while the third person, who may or may not be present, has gen-

der. Giles2 cites the case of Macaulay who repeated the substan-

tive so often as almost to make the pronoun useless, though the

reverse tendency is more common. The right use of pronouns

is a good index of style.

          2. Antiquity of Pronouns. The personal pronouns are prob-

ably the oldest part of the Indo-Germanic declension.3 Pronouns

(and numerals) are the most persistent parts of speech. They are

essential to the very life of a language.4 Strange enough, the

Coptic and the Hebrew, for instance, are only alike in their pro-

nouns and their numerals.5 In Greek as in Sanskrit and English

the pronouns maintain themselves with great tenacity. The pro-

nouns are also closely akin in all the Indo-Germanic tongues. Cf.

Sanskrit aham, Greek ἐγώ(ν), Latin ego, Gothic ik, Anglo-Saxon

ic, German ich, English I, French je. They retain the case-forms

better than any other parts of speech.

          3. Pronominal Roots. Indeed pronouns present an indepen-

dent set of roots parallel to the verbal and nominal roots. As

verb, noun, adjective, adverb, preposition, conjunctions, inten-

sive particles grow up around the old verbal (and nominal) roots,

so pronouns represent a separate history. There are two great

root-stocks then (verbal or nominal and pronominal).6 The pro-

nouns can be resolved into monosyllabic roots.7  One may not fol-

low Donaldson8 (now obsolete), when he calls all the pronouns

originally demonstrative, and yet something can be said for that

idea. In the Sanskrit Whitney9 calls this "very limited set of

roots, the so-called pronominal or demonstrative roots." Monro10

remarks that noun-stems name or describe while pronouns only

 

            1 Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 32. He accents  πρόσωπον (persona) as illustrating

this dramatic aspect.

            2 Giles, Man., p. 238..   3 Ib., p. 297.                  4 Ib., p. 13.

            5 Renan, Hist. des Lang. Semit., p. 84 f.

            6 Cf. Bopp, Uber den Einfl. der Pron. auf die Wortbild., 1832.

            7 Donaldson, New Crat., p. 241.

            8 Ib., p. 245.                                                      9 Sans. Gr., p. 185.

            10 Hom. Gr., p. 57; Bopp, Vergl. Gr., § 105.

 


286    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

point out; the one is predicative, the other demonstrative. The

difference then is fundamental. "Pronouns are found to contain

the same elements as those which furnish the person-endings of

verbs." (Monro, ib.)

          4. Classification. Pronouns are either substantive in signifi-

cation and inflection as ἐγώ, adjective as ἡμέτερος, or adverb as

οὕτως. The other classification is into nine or ten great classes:

personal, intensive, reflexive, possessive, demonstrative, relative,

interrogative, indefinite, distributive.1  The correlative pronouns

can be regarded separately also. These classes will call for spe-

cial comment in detail See also ch. XV, 1.

          (a) THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. In all the Indo-Germanic

tongues the personal pronouns vary a good deal in inflection from

the substantives and adjectives.2 The various Greek dialects

show great variety in the inflection of the personal pronouns.3

The nominative singular has a different stem in the first personal

pronoun from the other cases in all the Indo-Germanic languages.

The N. T. follows current and ancient usage fairly well in the

form of the first and second personal pronouns. The same thing

is true as to the enclitic and the emphatic forms in the oblique

cases. The MSS. vary between μου and ἐμοῦ, etc. Not only do

MSS. give the regular πρός με, but the papyri4 furnish εἴς με,

περί μου, ὑπό μου. The question whether σου or σοῦ should be

read is a very delicate one and rests almost wholly with the

editor. W. H. have, for instance, ἐκ τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ σου and ἐν τῷ

ὀφθαλμῷ σοῦ in the same sentence (Mt. 7:4. Cf. also the next

verse). Nestle here has no such refinement, but σου all through

these verses. The third personal pronoun gave trouble in

Greek as in some other languages. In Attic the old οὗ, οἷ, ἕ  

(without nominative) was chiefly reflexive,5  though not true of

the Ionic. Possibly this pronoun was originally reflexive for

all the persons, but came to be used also as the simple pronoun

of the third person, whereas in Latin it remained reflexive and

was restricted to the third person.6  The N. T. is like the κοινή

 

            1 K.-B1., I, p. 579, have only five.

            2 Hirt, Handb., p. 296. Cf. Thumb, Handb., p. 84, for mod. Gk.

            3 Cf. K.-B1., I, pp. 580 ff. See briefer summary in Giles, Man., p. 298 f.,

and Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 244 f. On the multiplicity of roots in the pers.

pron. see Riem. and Goelzer, Phonet., p. 336.

            4 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p.302 f. Cf. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 165.

            5 Cf. Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 33. He illustrates by the Eng.: "I will lay me

down and sleep." Cf. ὑμῖν in Mt. 6:19 f.

            6 Riem. and Goelzer, Phonet., p. 341.

 


                    THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                        287

 

in the use of αὐτός (common also in Attic) instead of οὗ as the

third personal pronoun. It is used in all three genders and

in all cases save that in the nominative it usually has emphasis

(cf. Mt. 1:21), a matter to be discussed under Syntax. Indeed

αὐτός, whatever its etymology, is originally an intensive pro-

noun (like Latin ipse), not a personal pronoun.1  The "frequent

and almost inordinate use" (Thayer) of αὐτός in the LXX (cf.

Jer. 18:3 f.) and the N. T. is noticeable. So modern Greek

(Thumb, Handb., p. 86)

          (b) THE INTENSIVE PRONOUN. The N. T. has nothing new to

say as to the form of the intensive αὐτός.  It is usually in the

nominative that it is intensive like αὐτὸς μόνος (Jo. 6:15), though

not always (cf. Jo. 14:11). The modern Greek2 uses also a

shorter form τοῦ, etc. (also Pontic ἀτοῦ), as personal pronoun. The

use of ὁ αὐτός may be compared with ὁ ἴδιος. See ch. XV, III, (g).

          (c) REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. The reflexive form is nothing but

the personal pronoun plus the intensive αὐτός. The reflexive is

one use of this intensive in combination with the personal pro-

noun. They were originally separate words.3  So αὐτὸς ἐγώ (Ro.

7:25) which is, of course, not reflexive, but intensive. The Greek

reflexives have no nominative and the English has almost lost

"himself," "myself" as nominative.4 In the N. T. the first and

second persons have a distinct reflexive form only in the singular

(ἐμαυτοῦ, σεαυτοῦ). In 2 Th. 1:4 αὐτοὺς ἡμᾶς is obviously inten-

sive, not reflexive. In 1 Cor. 7:35 ἡμῶν αὐτῶν it is doubtful.5  See

ch. XV, iv, for further discussion. The contracted form σαυτοῦ

is not found in the N. T. It is common in the Kingdom books in

the LXX and occurs in the papyri. See even σατόν in σύ βλέπε

σατὸν ἀπὸ τῶν  Ἰουδαίων, B.G.U. 1079 (A.D. 41). So as to αὐτοῦ.

Cf. Thackeray, Gr., p. 190. The modern Greek uses τοῦ ἐμαυτοῦ,

μου for the reflexive (Thumb, Handb., p. 88). The reflexive for the

third person6 (usually ἑαυτοῦ in the singular, about twenty times

αὑτοῦ, etc., in W. H., as αὑτὸν in Jo. 2:24), while the only reflexive

form for all persons in the plural in the N. T. has no secure place

in the N. T. for the first and second person singular. The pos-

sible reflexive (or demonstrative?) origin of a made this usage

natural. It appears in the papyri7 (τὰ αὑτοῦ, Pet. I. 15, 15) and the

 

            1 Flensberg (Uber Urspr. and Bild. des Pron. αὐτός, 1893, p. 69) denies that

it is from αὖ, but rather from αυα.       Cf. Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 244.

            2 Thumb, Handb., p. 85.                             5 Cf. Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 144.

            3 K.-Bl., I, p. 596.                          6 Cf. Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 33.

            4 Simcox, Lang. of the N. T., p. 62.   7 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 303 f.

 


288      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

late inscriptions1 for the first and second person singular. In the

modern Greek the same thing is true.2 But in the N. T. only late

MSS. read ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ against ἀπὸ σεαυτοῦ (אBCL) in Jo. 18:34. In

Gal. 5:14 and Ro. 13:9 only Syrian uncials have ἑαυτόν for

σεαυτόν.3  This use of ἑαυτῶν for all three persons is fairly common

in classical Attic. Indeed the personal pronoun itself was some-

times so used (δοκῶ μοι, for instance).4

          (d) POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS (κτητικαὶ ἀντωνυμίαι). It is some-

what difficult in the discussion of the pronouns to keep off

syntactical ground, and this is especially true of the possessive

adjectives. For the etymology of these adjectives from the cor-

responding personal pronouns one may consult the compara-

tive grammars.5  But it is the rarity of these adjectives in the

N. T. that one notices at once. The third person possessives (ὅς,

σφέτερος) have entirely disappeared.  Σός is found in only two of

Paul's letters: 1 Cor. and Phil., and these only three times.  Σός

is found about twenty-six times and ὑμέτερος eleven (two doubtful,

Lu. 16:12; 1 Cor. 16:17).   Ὑμέτερος appears in Paul only in

1 and 2 Cor., Gal., Ro.  Ὑμέτερος appears only nine times counting

Lu. 16:12, where W. H. have ὑμέτερον in the margin, and Ac. 24:6

which W. H. reject.  It is only ἐμός that makes any show at all in

the N. T., occurring some seventy-five times, about half of them

(41) in the Gospel of John. Thumb6 and Moulton7 have made a

good deal of the fact that in Pontus and Cappadocia the use of

ἐμός, σός, etc., is still common, while elsewhere the genitive per-

sonal pronoun prevails.8 The point is that the Gospel of John

thus shows Asiatic origin, while Revelation is by another writer.

But one can easily go astray in such an argument. The Gospel

of Luke has ἐμός three times, but Acts not at all. The large

amount of dialogue in the Gospel of John perhaps explains

the frequency of the pronoun there. The possessive ἐμός is

naturally in the mouth of Jesus (or of John his reporter) more

than σός, for Jesus is speaking so much about himself. The

possessive is more formal and more emphatic in the solemn

 

            1 Schweizer, Gr. d. perg. Inschr., p. 161.                        2 Thumb, Handb., p. 88.

            3 Cf. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 167. These last two quote Lev. 19:18.

Cf. Simcox, ib.; Dyroff, Gesch. des Pron. Reflex., 2. Abt., pp. 23 (Hefte 9

and 10 in Schanz's Beitr. etc.).

            4 Cf. Simcox, Lang. of the N. T., p. 63; Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 167.

            5 Giles, Man., p. 301; Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 250; Hirt, Handb. etc., p. 307.

            6 Theol. Literaturzeit., 1893, p. 421.

            7 Prol., p. 40 f. He admits that the other possessives do not tell the same

story.                                                                            8 Cf. Thumb, Handb., p. 89.

 


                   THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                        289

 

words of Jesus in this Gospel.1  This is probably the explanation

coupled with the fact that John was doubtless in Asia also when

he wrote the Gospel and was open to whatever influence in

that direction was there. The discussion of details will come

later, as will the common use of the genitive of the personal pro-

nouns rather than the possessive adjective, not to mention the

article. The reflexive pronoun itself is really possessive when in

he genitive case. But this as well as the common idiom ὁ ἴδιος

need only be mentioned here. The Boeotian inscriptions show

Fίδιος in this sense as early as 150 B.C. (Claflin, Syntax of Boeotian

Inscriptions, p. 42). The line of distinction between the pronouns

is thus not always distinct, as when ἑαυτῶν (αὑτῶν) is used in the

reciprocal sense (Lu. 23:12), a usage known to the ancients.

The necessity in the N. T. of using the genitive of personal pro-

nouns in the third person after the disappearance of ὅς is like

the Latin, which used ejus, suus being reflexive. Farrar (Greek

Syntax, p. 34) recalls the fact that its is modern, his being origi-

nally neuter also.

          (e) DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS (δεικτικαὶ ἀντωνυμίαι). But

deictic must have a special limitation, for all pronouns were pos-

sibly originally deictic (marking an object by its position). The

anaphoric (ἀναφορικαί) pronouns develop out of the deictic by

usage. They refer to or repeat. The true relative is a further

development of the anaphoric, which includes demonstrative in

the narrower sense. In a strict historical method one should be-

gin the discussion of pronouns with the demonstratives in the

larger sense and show how the others developed.2  But here we

must treat the demonstrative pronouns in the narrower sense

as distinct from the original deictic or the later relative. The

demonstrative thus applies both to position and relation. The

declension of the demonstratives is more akin to that of substan-

tives than any of the other pronouns.3    Ὅδε4 occurs only ten times

in. the N. T., and eight of these in the form τάδε, seven of which

come in the formula in Rev. τάδε λέγει (as Rev. 2:1, etc.). The

others are τάδε (Ac. 21:11), τῇδε (Lu. 10:39), τήνδε (Jas. 4:13).5

         

            1 Simcox, Lang. of the N. T., p. 54. Dr. Abbott (Joh. Gr., p. 295) thinks

that John's love of contrast leads him to use ὑμεῖς as often as all the Synoptists.

            2 So Riem. and Goelzer in their Phonet., pp. 316 ff.       3 Ib.

            4 Gildersleeve (Am. Jour. of Phil., 1907, p. 235) considers SSE the pron. of

the first person, οὗτος of the second, ἐκεῖνος of the third.

            5 Cf. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 35 f. For the etymology of the dem. pron.

see Brug., Gk. Gr., p. 242 f.

 


290        A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

The inscriptions and the papyri agree with the N. T. in the great

rarity of ὄδε in the later κοινή.1  But in the LXX it is commoner,

and chiefly here also τάδε λέγει (Thackeray, Gr., p. 191). There

are also many examples of ὅς as a demonstrative, as Ro. 14:5

and also cf. ὁ, ἡ, τό with δέ, as οἱ δέ in Mt. 27:4. This latter de-

monstrative construction is very common.  Αὐτός is beginning to

have a semi-demonstrative sense (common in modern Greek) in

the N. T., as in Lu. 13:1, ἐν αυτῷ καιρῷ. There is little to say

on the non-syntactical side about and ἐκεῖνος and οὗτος save that both

are very common in the N. T., οὗτος extremely so, perhaps four

times as often as ἐκεῖνος which is relatively more frequent in John.2

Blass3 points out the fact that οὑτοσ-ί, does not appear in the

N. T. (nor in the LXX), though the adverb νυν-ί is fairly common

in Paul and twice each in Acts and Hebrews.  Οὐχί is much more

frequent especially in Luke and Paul. Smyth4 compares ἐ-κεῖνος

(κεῖνος in Homer) to Oscan e-tanto. Modern Greek uses both

forms and also ἐ-τοῦτος and τοῦτος in the nominative.5

          Of the correlative demonstratives of quality τοῖος is not found

in the N. T. and τοιόσδε only once (2 Pet. 1: 17) .  Τοιοῦτος (neuter

τοιοῦτο and -ον) occurs fifty-seven times, chiefly in the Gospels

and Paul's earlier Epistles (Gal. 5:21). We find neither τόσος

nor τόσοσδε and τοσοῦτος (the only correlative demonstrative of

quantity) is less frequent than τοιοῦτος (cf. Lu. 7:9). The neuter

is also in --ον and –ο.  Of the correlatives of age τηλικοῦτος alone is

found four times (cf. Jas. 3:4). See also ch. XV,

          (f) RELATIVE PRONOUNS (ἀναφορικαὶ ἀντωνυμίαι). Homer

shows the transition of the demonstrative to the relative, using

five forms (ὁ, ὅ τε, ὅς, ὅς τε, ὅς τις). Attic dropped and ὅ τε as

well as ὅσ τε.  This use of τε with and ὅς may be compared with

the common use of the Latin qui = et is. So the Hebrew זֶה(‘this’)

is sometimes relative. Cf. German der and English that.6  Rela-

tives in the narrower sense grew naturally out of the anaphoric

use of the demonstrative. The weakening of to the article and

the introduction of the longer demonstratives (ὅδε, οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος)

left ὅς more and more for the true relative use.   and ὅς have a

 

            1 See Nachm., Magn. p. 145; Dieterich, Unters., p. 197; Mayser,

Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 308.

            2 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 171.                        3 Ib., p. 35; Thackeray, p. 191.

            4 The Ionic Dial., p. 448.

            5 Cf. Thumb, Handb. d. neugr. Volkspr., p. 64. Cf. Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr.,

p. 161.

            6 Cf. Monro, Hom. Gr., pp. 185 ff.; Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 35.

 


                       THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                        291

 

different etymology. Relative ὅς= Sanskrit yas. There are thus

Only two pure relatives that survive in the N. T., ὅς and ὅστις,

for ὅσπερ and ὁσδήποτε are not found save that the Western and

Syrian classes read ὅνπερ in Mk. 15:6.   Ὁσδήποτε in Jo. 5:4 dis-

appears with the rejection of that verse. Already the papyri1

and the inscriptions2 show the rare occurrence of ὅστις, confined as

a rule to the nominative and gradually disappearing in the mod-

ern Greek before ὁ ὁποῖος and even ποῦ.3  Compare the vulgar

"whar" in "the man whar said that."   Ὅστις is, of course, merely

ὅς plus the indefinite τις in the sense of 'any one' or again of ‘some-

body in particular.’ Both of these senses occur in the N. T. usage.

The N. T. follows the papyri and inscriptions in using only the

nominative of ὅστις save the neuter accusative ὅ τι (Lu. 10:35),

and the genitive in set phrases like ἕως ὅτου (Jo. 9:18). It is

used in both the singular and the plural, however, but is other-

wise nearly indeclinable.   Ὅς γε (Ro. 8:32) is, of course, simply

ὅς plus the intensive particle γε.    Ὅς itself is many times more

common in the N. T. than  ὅστις and raises no questions save many

syntactical ones.  Οἷος, ὁποῖος, ὅσος, ἡλίκος are also relatives of

quality, quantity and age.  Οἷος is found only fourteen times in

the N. T., ten of them in Paul's writings (cf. 2 Cor. 10:11).

 Ὁποῖος can count up only five examples, four in Paul if we credit

to him Ac. 26:29. This is a little strange when one recalls how

common it is in the modern Greek. But the correlatives generally

are weak in the vernacular4 κοινή.  Ὁπόσος is not in the N. T.

nor modern Greek, but ὄσος (1 Cor. 7:39) holds its own. As to

ἡλίκος, it drops to four instances, two of them in the same sentence

(Jas. 3:5).

          (g) INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. Τίς, (τί) is fairly common in

the N. T. both in direct (Mt. 21:31) and indirect questions (Mt.

26:22) like the papyri usage.  Τίς,  τί in the Thessalian Greek

is κίς,5 κί.  So Sanskrit kas, Latin quis, Gothic hwas, English who,

German wer. In Latin and English the relative is formed from

the same root, but not so in the Greek. In modern Greek, how-

ever, τίς has vanished before ποῖος (cf. ὅστις before ὁ ποῖος),6 ac-

cented ποιός, though τί (indeclinable) survives strangely enough

in the sense of "what sort."7  In the N. T. the qualitative cor-

 

            1 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 310.      2 Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 145.

            3 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 167 f. Cf. Thumb, Handb., p. 93.

            4 Mayser, Cr. d. griech. Pap., p. 311; Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 145.

            5 K.-B1., I, p. 613; Hoffmann, Die gr. Dial., Bd. II, p. 558.

            6 Thumb, Handb., p. 94.                                    7 Ib.

 


292   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

relative ποῖος is used fairly often as a direct interrogative (cf. Mk.

11:28) and sometimes as an indirect interrogative (Mt. 24:42).

Ποταπός is used a few times in direct (Mt. 8:27) and indirect

also (Lu. 7:39).  Πόσος is still used as a direct interrogative

(Mt. 12:12) in quantitative questions and a few times in indi-

rect questions (Mk. 15:4).  Πηλίκος occurs only twice (one of

these doubtful, Gal. 6 : 11, W. H. ἡλίκοις margin) and both times

in indirect question (Heb. 7:4). The disappearance of duality

has taken πότερος entirely away, though πότερον occurs once as an

adverb in an indirect question (Jo. 7:17). In the LXX we find

πότερον only once in Job (Thackeray, Gr., p. 192). Modern Greek

does not use πηλίκος, though πόσος survives.

          (h) INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. Like the Latin ali-quis (interrog-

ative quis) the Greek τὶς differs from the interrogative τίς only in

accent. It is very common in the N. T. (as Lu. 1:5), but already

it is giving way to εἷς (Mt. 8:19), a usage not unknown to the

older Greek.1  In the N. T. we have εἷς τις together (Mk. 14:47;

Lu. 22:50). Modern Greek has supplanted τὶς, τὶ  by κανείς (κἄν,

εἷς) and καθείς (cf. καθ’ εἷς in N. T.).2  The negative forms μήτις

and οὔτις do not appear in the N. T. save that μήτι occurs in

questions (Mt. 12:23) and μή τις with ἵνα.  But μηδείς and οὐδείς

are very common. The old δεῖνα meets us only once (Mt. 26:18),

but hangs on in the modern Greek.3   Οὐ πᾶς and μὴ πᾶς belong

wholly to Syntax.

          (i) DISTRIBUTIVE AND RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS. These pro-

nouns have an insecure place in the N. T. with the exception of

ἄλλος, ἀλλήλων, ἕκαστος and ἕτερος.   Ἑκάτερος like πότερος has van-

ished, as implying duality. It is rare in the LXX (Thackeray,

Gr., p. 192).    Ἄμφω is gone, but ἀμφότεροι lingers on in some four-

teen instances (cf. Mt. 9:17).   Ἀλλήλων (composed of ἄλλος, ἄλ-

λος) is naturally only in the oblique cases of the plural, but is

fairly common (cf. Jo. 4:33). It has vanished in the modern

Greek.   Ἕκαστος on the other hand appears only in the singular

except in Ph. 2:4 (probably twice there).  It too has disap-

peared in the modern Greek.   Ἕτερος is beside ἀμφότεροι the only

surviving dual pronoun, and it goes down in the modern Greek

along with ἀμφότεροι.4  It is less common (97 times) in the N. T.

 

            1 Dieterich, Unters., p. 202; Hatz., Einl., p. 207.

            2 Thumb, Handb., p. 95 f.                                 3 Ib., p. 98.

            4 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 179. The pap. (Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap.,

p. 312) show a few examples of ἑκάτερος, μηδέτερος, ὁπότερος. Once (Prov.

24:21) the LXX has μηθέτερος.

 


                     THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                       293

 

than ἄλλος (150), chiefly in Matthew; Luke, Paul, Heb., never in

Revelation, Peter, and only once in Jo. (19:37) and Mk. (16:12)

and this latter in disputed part. It is usually in the singular

(73 times, plural 24). The distinction (not always observed in

the N. T.) between ἄλλος and ἕτερος belongs to Syntax. The use

of εἷς τὸν ἕνα as reciprocal (1 Th. 5:11) and of ἑαυτῶν (1 Cor. 6:7)

along with other uses of ἄλλος and ἕτερος will receive treatment

under Syntax.

 

                       V. ADVERBS ( ἘΠΙΡΡΗΜΑΤΑ)

          1. Neglect of Adverbs. A glance at the average grammar will

show that the grammarians as a rule have not cared much for the

adverb, though there are some honorable exceptions. Winer has

no discussion of the adverb save under Syntax. Still others have

not understood the adverb. For instance, Green1 says that once

in the N. T. "a preposition without change is employed as an

adverb," viz. ὑπερ ἐγώ (2 Cor. 11:23). That is a perfunctory

error which assumes that the preposition is older than the ad-

verb. It is of a piece with the idea that regards some adverbs

as "improper" prepositions. Donaldson2  says that, with com-

pliments to Horne Tooke, "the old grammarian was right, who

said that when we know not what else to call a part of speech,

we may safely call it an adverb." Certainly it is not easy

nor practicable always to distinguish sharply between the ad-

verb and preposition, conjunction, interjections and other

particles.3 But the great part played by the adverb in the

history of the Greek language makes it imperative that justice

shall be done to it. This is essential for the clear understand-

ing of the prepositions, conjunctions and particles as well as

the aldverb itself. Substantive and verb blend at many points

and glide easily into each other in English, for instance. At-

tention has often been called to the use of "but" in English

as adverb, preposition, conjunction, substantive, adjective and

pronoun.4

 

            1 Handb. to the Gr. of the N. T., p. 138.

            2 Gk. Gr., p. 37. Delbruck, Vergl. Synt., I, pp. 535-643, has the most com-

plete treatment of the adv.

            3 Brug., Gk. Gr., p. 250. In the Sans. the line is still less clearly drawn

between the various indeclinable words (Whitney, Sans. Gr., p. 403).

            4 Giles, Man., p. 237 f. Cf. Schroeder, Uber die form. Untersch. der Redet.,

p. 35 f.; Delbruck, Grundr., Bd. III, p. 536 f.

 


294    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

          2. Formation of the Adverb. The name suggests a mere

addendum to the verb, an added word (like the adjective) that is

not necessary. But in actual fact adverbs come out of the heart

of the language, expressions fixed by frequent usage.

          (a) FIXED CASES. A large number1 of words retain the case-

ending in the adverb and often with the same function. Perhaps

the bulk of the adverbs are either the simple case used directly

in an adverbial sense or the formation by analogy. It is just be-

cause adverbs are usually fixed case-forms or remnants of obsolete

case-forms that they deserve to be treated under the head of De-

clensions. They have to be approached from the standpoint of

the cases to understand their history. Leaving analogy for the

moment let us see some examples of the cases that are so used.

The cases most commonly used thus are the ablative, locative,

instrumental and accusative.2 The dative and genitive are sel-

dom employed as adverbs. The vocative never occurs in this

sense, and the nominative (so occasionally in Sanskrit) only in a

phrase like καθ’ εἷς in the addition to John's Gospel (Jo. 8:9), τὸ καθ’

εἷς (Ro. 12:5). Cf. ἀνα-μίξ. Examples of the various cases as used

in the N. T. will be given without attempting to be exhaustive.

The κοινή and the modern Greek illustrate the same general ten-

dencies as to adverbs that we see in the earlier Greek. Here the

N. T. is in close accord with the papyri as to adverbs in use.3

          (1) The Accusative. The most obvious illustration of the ac-

cusative in adverbs is the neuter of adjectives in the positive,

comparative and superlative (singular and plural). In the com-

parative the singular is the rule, in the superlative the plural, but

variations occur.4  In the modern Greek accusative plural is more

common even in the comparative (Thumb, Handb., p. 77). Take

for the positive αὔριον, εὐθύ (ς added later), πολλά, μακράν. The com-

parative may be illustrated by ὕστερον, βέλτιον, and the superlative

by πρῶτον (and πρῶτα) and ἥδιστα.  Cf. also ταχίστην. Sometimes

the article is used with the adjective where the adverbial idea is

encroaching, as τὸ λοιπόν, τὰ πολλά, and note also τὴν ἀρχήν (Jo.

8:25), substantive with article. But the substantive alone has

abundant examples also, as ἀκμήν, ἀρχήν, δωρεάν, πέραν, χάριν.

 

            1 Brug., Griech. Gr., pp. 250                  2 Hirt, Handb. etc., pp. 320 ff.

            3 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., pp. 456 ff.

            4 Cf. Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 251; Hirt, Handb. etc., p. 322. In the Sans.

the acc. also is the case most widely used adverbially (Whitney, Sans. Gr.,

408). Cf. Delbruck, Grundl., pp. 34 ff.

 


                  THE DECLENSIONS (ΚΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                           295

 

Σχεδόν is a specimen of the adverb in –δον, –δα.  Cf. also ὁμοθυμα-

δόν, ῥοιζηδόν.  The accusative in adverbs is specially characteristic

of the κοινή (cf. Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 459; Schmid,

Attic., II, pp. 36 ff.). In the modern Greek the accusative for

the adverbs is almost universal. Cf. Thumb, Handb., p. 77.

          (2) The Ablative. All adverbs in –ως are probably ablatives.

Καλῶς, for instance, is from an original καλῶδ.  The δ (Sanskrit t) is

dropped and a final ς is added.1  Cf. old Latin meritod, facilumed.2

The οὕτως, ὡς of the Greek correspond exactly with the old Sanskrit

ta<d, ya<d.  The ending in –ως comes by analogy to be exceedingly

common. Practically any adjective can by –ως make an adverb

in the positive. Some, like ἀδιαλείπτως, belong to the later Greek

(κοινή).3  Participles also may yield such adverbs as φειδομένως

(2 Cor. 9:6), ὁμολογουμένως (1 Tim. 3:16), ὄντως (Mk. 11:32).

Radermacher (N. T. Gk., p. 54) cites ἀρκούντως, τετολμηκότως

(Diod., XVI, 74. 6), etc. The bulk of the adverbs in –ως are from

adjectives and pronouns. But the examples of –ως are rare in the

modern Greek (Thumb, Handb., p. 77). 

          (3) The Genitive. There are not many adverbs in this case

outside of those ending in –ου, like θὐτοῦ, ὅπου, ποῦ, ὁμοῦ and ῆς

(ἑξῆς).  This use survives in modern Greek. Cf. the local use of

the genitive in  Ἐφέσου (Ac. 19:26). The common use of  ἡμέρας,

νυκτός verges toward the adverb.4  Cf. also τοῦ λοιποῦ (Gal. 6:17).

The genitive is almost never used adverbially in Sanskrit.5

          (4) The Locative. This is a rare use in Sanskrit,6 but more

frequent in Greek. Instance ἐκεῖ, κύκλῳ, οἴκοι, πρωί.  So also ἀεί,

πέρυσι, etc. Hirt7 (but not Brugmann) likewise treats examples

like δημοσίᾳ, ἰδίᾳ, πεζῇ, etc., as locative. Certainly ποῖ is locative,

but it does not appear in the N. T.  Cf. also τῷ ὄντι (article and

participle) in adverbial sense (Ro. 7:23).

          (5) The Instrumental. This case lends itself naturally to the

adverb where the idea of manner (associative) is so common.8 In

the Sanskrit it is very common for adverbs to be in the instrumen-

tal.9  Such adverbs as ἅμα (cf. ablative ὅμως from same root), εἰκῆ,

κρυφῆ(ῇ), λάθρα(ᾳ), μάλα, πάντη(ῃ), πανταχῆ(ῇ), τάχα, etc., are doubt-

 

            1 Giles, Man., p. 240.                2 Hirt, Handb. etc., p. 320.

            3 Cf. Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 457 f., for further exx. Cf. the Lat.

adv. (abl.) raro, quomodo etc., Bopp, Vergleich. Gr., § 183. Cf. also Delbruck,

Grundl., pp. 48 ff.

            4 Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 252.      5 Whitney, Sans. Gr., p. 410.     6 Ib.

            7 Handb. etc., p. 321. Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 252 (dat. ace. to Brug.).

            8 Hirt, Handb., p. 321.               9 Whitney, Sans. Gr., p. 409.

 


296     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

less instrumental. In some cases ι is added to bring it in harmony

with the locative-dative cases with which it blended.1  Brug-

mann2 also puts here such words as ἄνω, κάτω, ἔξω, ἀνωτέρω, ἀνω-

τάτω, οὔ-πω.  --Πω is by ablaut from --πη (so Laconic πή-ποκα).

          (6) The Dative.  As in the Sanskrit,3 so in the Greek the dative

is very rare in adverbs. Indeed Hirt4 is not far wrong when

he says that it is not easy to find any dative adverbs distinct

from the locative, though he accepts παραί χαμαί, κτλ. as dative

(p. 260). Brugmann5 thinks otherwise, and one is slow to dis-

sent from the modern master of comparative grammar. He cites

πάλαι, χαμαί, καταί, παραί, κύκλῳ, σπουδῇ, etc. But Delbruck6  is

against Brugmann here. Besides the dative in its proper sense is

a little difficult to fit into an adverb. But we have given enough

to justify the treatment of adverbs under the declensions.7

          (b) SUFFIXES. Other adverbs are formed by suffixes which

may be relics of lost case-endings that are no longer clear to us.

Here only the main suffixes in use in the N. T. will be mentioned.

For –άκι-ς take πολλάκις and the numeral adverbs like τετράκις, etc.

For αχοῦ note πανταχοῦ.  For --δε take οἴκαδε.  For –δον take ὁμο-

θυμαδόν (Ac. 18:12). For –ης we may note ἐξαίφνης, ἑξῆς, ἐφεξῆς.

Those in –θε(ν) are numerous, like ἄνωθεν, ἔξωθεν, οὐρανόθεν, παιδιό-

θεν, etc.  Αὐτόθι is common in the papyri, but not in the N. T.8

The deictic appears in νυνί and οὐχί.  An example of --ις appears

in μόλις (cf. μόγις Text. Rec. in Lu. 9:39). For –τί note  Ἐβραϊ-

στί,  Ἑλληνιστί, Λυκαονιστί,  Ῥωμαϊστί.  For –κα take ἡνίκα. For –ν

we have νῦν, πάλιν.  For --τε we may mention ὅ-τε, πό-τε.  Then –ν

is added in the case of δίς, τρίς and various other words like ἄχρις,

εὐθύς, χέχρις, οὕτως, τετράκις, χωρίς, etc.  Ἐκεῖσε is an instance of

--σε.  Then -τος appears in ἐκτός, ἐντός, Finally -χα is seen in ἔν-

νυχα. The papyri furnish parallels for practically all these N. T.

examples (and many more).9    Ἅπαξ seems to stand by itself.

          (c) COMPOUND ADVERBS. Some adverbs are due to the blend-

 

            1 Hirt, Handb., p. 321 f.

            2 Griech. Gr., p. 252 f. Cf. Delbruck, Grundr., III, p. 581 f.

            3 Whitney, Sans. Gr., p. 410.     4 Handb., p. 321.

            5 Griech. Gr., p. 252. Cf. also p. 229 f., where he acknowledges the other

point of view as possible.                                  6 Grundr., p. 60 f.

            7 In Lat. adv. are partly remnants of case-forms and partly built by anal-

ogy. Draeger, Hist. Synt., p. 109. For Gk. see also Lutz, Die Casus-Adv.

bei att. Rednern (1891).

            8 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 456.

            9 Ib., pp. 455-459. See also Brug., Griech. Gr., pp. 253-257. Cf. Donald-

son, New Crat., pp. 449-501, for discussion of these adv. suffixes.

 


                    THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                     297

 

ling of several words into one word, perhaps with modification

by analogy. The κοινή is rather rich in these compound ad-

verbs and Paul fairly revels in them. As samples take ἔκπαλαι

(2 Pet. 2:3), κατέναντι (2 Cor. 12:19), κατενώπιον (Eph. 1:4),

παραυτίκα (2 Cor. 4:17), ἀπροσωπολήμπτως (1 Pet. 1:17), παρα-

χρῆμα (Lu. 1:64), ὑπεράνω (Eph. 4:10), ὑπερέκεινα (2 Cor. 10:16), ὑπερεκπερισσοῦ (1 Th. 3:10), ὑπερλίαν (2 Cor. 11:5), ὑπερπερισσῶς

(Mk. 7:37), etc. The intense emotion in 2 Cor. explains the

piling-up and doubling of some of these prepositional phrases.

Occasionally a verbal clause is blended into one word and an ad-

verb made by analogy with --ως.  So (from νοῦν ἔχω) νουνεχῶς (Mk.

12:34), used by Aristotle and Polybius along with another ad-

verb like νουνεχόντως in Isocrates.1  But in Mark it is used without

any other adverb.  Ὑπερβαλλόντως (2 Cor. 11:23) is made from

the participle and is common in Attic (Xen., Plato). There are,

besides, adverbial phrases like ἀπὸ μακρόθεν (Mk. 15:40) ἀπ’ ἄνω-

θεν, ἕως κάτω (Mt. 27:51), etc. Cf. Con. and Stock, Sel. fr. LXX,

p. 47. See chapter V, p. 170, for discussion of the formation of

compound adverbs which are very common in the κοινή. Paul

uses the idiom frequently. For the use of adverbs in the

see Mayser's careful list from the papyri, pp. 455 ff., and Nach-

Manson, Magn. Inschr., p. 138 f. New adverbs are continually

made in the later Greek, though many of the older ones survive

in the modern Greek. Cf. Thumb, Handb., pp. 78ff.  He groups

tillem under place, time, manner and quantity.

          (d) ANALOGY. A word is needed to accent the part played by

analogy in the formation of adverbs, though it has already been

alluded to. The two examples mentioned above, νουνεχῶς and

ὑπερβαλλόντως will serve as good illustrations of the work done by

the principle of analogy. The bulk of the –ως adverbs are abla-

tives made by analogy.2

          (e) THE COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. In general the adverb is

like the adjective save that in the comparative the accusative

singular is used, like τάχιον, and the accusative plural in the super-

lative, like τάχιστα. But, per contra, note πρῶτον and κατωτέρω  

(Mt. 2:16), περισσοτέρως (2 Cor. 1:12), σπουδαιοτέρως (Ph. 2:28),

ἐσχάτως (Mk. 5:23), πορρωτέρω (Lu. 24:28. AB –ρον). Cf. fur-

ther ch. XII, III.

          3. Adverbial Stems.  The derivation of the adverb deserves

a further word, though the facts have already been hinted at.

Brief mention is all that is here called for by way of illustration.

 

            1 Giles, Man., p. 240.                2 Ib.

 


298     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

          (a) SUBSTANTIVES. As N. T. examples of adverbs from sub-

stantives may be mentioned ἀρχήν, δωρεάν, χάριν.

          (b) ADJECTIVES. It was and is always possible to make an

adverb from any Greek adjective by the ablative ending –ως.  Cf.

both ταχύ (accusative) and ταχέως (ablative). Indeed the line be-

tween the adjective and adverb was never sharply drawn, as will

be shown when we come to the study of the syntax of the adjec-

tive (cf. English "looks bad," "feels bad," a different idea from

the adverb, however). In passing note ἑκοῦσα (Ro. 8:20) and

δευτεραῖοι (Ac. 28:13) in strict accordance with the Greek idiom.

The comparison of adverbs is another link between adverb and

adjective. In most cases, however, it is merely the use of the

comparative and superlative forms of the adjective as an adverb.

But in some cases the comparative and superlative adverb is

made without any corresponding adjective, done by analogy

merely. So μᾶλλον, μάλιστα, from μάλα, ἀνώτερον from the adverb

ἄνω. Cf. also ἐγγύτερον (Ro. 13:11) from ἐγγύς, κατωτέρω (Mt.

2:16) from κάτω, and πορρώτερον (Lu. 24:28) from πόρρω. Com-

parative adjectives made from positive adverbs are, on the other

hand, seen in ἐξώτερος (Mt. 8:12), ἐσώτερος (Heb. 6:19), κατώτερος

(Eph. 4:9).  Κατωτέρω, περισσοτέρως (Heb. 2:1, often in Paul;

Gal. 1:14), σπουδαιοτέρως (Ph. 2:28), τολμηροτέρως (Ro. 15:15)

rather than the forms in —τερον are due to analogy of the abla-

tive –ως. Adverbs made from participles can be looked upon as

adjectival or verbal in origin, since the participle is both verb

and adjective.

          (c) NUMERALS. All that is necessary here is to mention such

words as πρῶτον, δίς, ἑπτάκις etc.  In Ac. 11:26 we have πρώτως

instead of πρῶτον.  Blass (Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 58) cites for –ως

Clem., Hom. 9, 4; 16, 20; Polyb. vi, 5. 10; Diod., etc.

          (d) PRONOUNS. The pronominal adverbs are very numerous,

like οὕτως, ὡσαύτως, etc., αὐτοῦ, ποτέ, τότε, ὥδε, etc. As with the

correlative pronouns, so the correlative adverbs are lessening.

Of the indefinite adverbs only ποτέ, πού (a few times), and πως  

(only in εἴπως, μή πως) appear.1  Forms like οἷ, ὅποι, ποῖ have van-

ished before οὗ, ὅπου, ποῦ.  Cf. English,2 "where (rather than

‘whither’) are you going?" Cf. also the accusative τί. (Mk.

10:18) = ‘why.'

          (e) VERBS. Besides such words as νουνεχῶς (verbal phrase) and

participles like ὄντως, ὁμολογουμένως,  φειδομένως, ὑπερβαλλόντως one

should note  Ἐβραϊστί (from  Ἐβραΐζω),   Ἑλληνιστί (from  Ἑλληνίζω),

 

            1 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 59 f,           2 Green, Handb. to N. T. Gk., p. 137.

 


                     THE DECLENSIONS (KAIZEIE)                     299

 

etc. In Jas. 4:13; 5:1 ἄγε is used with the plural as an adverb,

if indeed it is not in reality an interjection. The modern view of

the imperative forms like ἄγε (cf. vocative ἀγέ from ἀγός) is that

it is merely the root without suffix.1  In the case of δεῦρο we

actually have a plural δεῦτε.  Moulton2 illustrates the close con-

nection between interjectional adverb and verb by the English

"Murder!" which could be mere interjection or verbal injunction

according to circumstances.

          4. Use of Adverbs. This is still another way of looking at the

subject, but it is a convenience rather than a scientific principle.

Blass3 in his N. T. Grammar follows this method solely.

          (a) ADVERBS OF MANNER. These are very numerous indeed,

like πνευματικῶς, σπουδαίως, etc.  Ἐσχάτως ἔχει (Mk. 5:23) is not

like the English idiom. The phrase really means that she has it

in the last stages. Cf. βαρέως ἔχουσα (Pap. Brit. M., 42).  Εὖ, so

common in Attic, has nearly gone in the N. T. (only in Mk. 14:7;

Mt. 25:21, 23; Ac. 15:29; Eph. 6:3 quot.).  Ἐσχάτως ἔχει occurs also in

Lu. 19:17 (W. H. text, margin εὖ).  Καλῶς is common.  Βέλτιον, ap-

pears once (2 Tim. 1:18) and κρεῖσσον often (1 Cor. 7:38). The

comparative adverb διπλότερον (Mt. 23:15) is irregular in form

(ἁπλούστερον) and late.4

          (b) ADVERBS OF PLACE. These answer the questions "where"

and "whence." "Whither" is no longer a distinct idea in N. T.

Greek nor the κοινή generally. Even in ancient Greek the distinc-

tion was not always maintained.4  Blass6 carefully illustrates how

"here" and "hither" are both expressed by such words as ἐνθάδε  

(Ac. 16:28; Jo. 4:16), oddly enough never by ἐνταῦθα, though

ὧδε (especially in the Gospels) is the common word (Lu. 9:33,

41). But ἐκεῖ is very common in the sense of ‘there’ and ‘thither’

(here again chiefly in the Gospels) as in Mt. 2:15, 22.   Ἐκεῖσε

(‘thither’) is found only twice, and both times in Acts (21:3; 22:

5), which has a literary element. So οὗ in both senses (Lu. 4:16;

10:1) and ὅπου (very common in John's Gospel, 14:3 f.). The

interrogative ποῦ (Jo. 1:39; 3:8) follows suit. The indefinite

πού is too little used to count (Heb. 2:6) and once without local

idea, rather 'about' (Ro. 4:19).   Ἀλλαχοῦ occurs once (Mk. 1:

38), but πανταχοῦ several times (Lu. 9:6, etc.).   Ὁμοῦ is found

four times only (Jo. 4:36, etc.), and once D adds ὁμόσε (Ac. 20:

 

            1 Moulton, Prol., p. 171.

            2 Ib., p. 171 f. But adv. from verbs are "late and always rare," Giles,

Man., p. 342.

            3 Gr. of N. T. Gr., pp. 58 ff.                   4 Ib.      5  Ib.                6 Ib.

 


300     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

18).  Πανταχῇ(η) likewise is read once (Ac. 21:28), Syrian class

--οῦ.  In Ac. 24:3 πάντη(ῃ) is contrasted with πανταχοῦ. Other

adverbs of place in the N. T. are ἄνω, ἐντός, ἐκτός, ἔσω, ἔξω, κάτω.

A number of adverbs answer to the question "whence." They

are usually words in —θεν.  Ἀλλαχόθεν (Jo. 10:1) is found only

once in the N. T.   Ἄνωθεν (Mk. 15:38) is more frequent, though

never κάτωθεν.   The only pronominal forms that appear in the

N. T. are ἐκεῖθεν (Rev. 22:2, rather common in Matthew), ἔνθεν

(Mt. 17:20), ἐντ ῦθεν (twice in Jo. 19:18, and in contrast with

ἐκεῖθεν Rev. 22:2), πάντοθεν (Mk. 1:45), ὅθεν (Mt. 12:44), πόθεν

(Mt. 21:25).  The last two are fairly frequent. Blass1 notes

how "stereotyped and meaningless" the ending —θεν has become

in many examples, especially with ἔμπροσθεν, (common in Matthew

and Luke) and ὄπσθεν (rare). See both in Rev. 4:6. In some

cases by a little effort the real force of –θεν may be seen, but the

old Greek soon allowed it to become dim in these words. In the

case of ἔσωθεν and ἔξωθεν Blass2 insists on the force of —θεν, only in

Mk. 7:18, 21, 23; Lu. 11:7.  Cf. also κυκλόθεν (Rev. 4:8). The

addition of ἀπό occasionally may be due either to the weakened

sense of —θεν or to a fuller expansion of its true idea. So ἀπ’ ἄνω-

θεν twice (Mt. 27:51, so W. H. against אL ἄνωθεν, Mk. 15:38),

ἀπὸ μακρόθεν (Mk. 5:6; 15:40, etc.), ἐκ παιδιόθεν (Mk. 9:21).

Blass3 observes that both μακρόθεν and παιδιόθεν are late words and

that late writers are fond of using prepositions with —θεν as Ho-

mer had ἀπ’ οὐρανόθεν. But Luke used only οὐρανόθεν in Ac. 14:17.

          (c) ADVERBS OF TIME. The list is not very great, and yet ap-

preciable.  Ἀεί (Ac. 7:51) is not in the Gospels at all and is

largely supplanted by πάντοτε (Jo. 6:34) like the κοινή and modern

Greek.  Ἡνίκα is read twice only (2 Cor. 3:15 f.).   Ἔπεια (1 Cor.

12:28) and εἶτα (Mk. 4:17) are about equally frequent.   Ὅτε

(Mt. 9:25) occurs 101,  ὅταν (Mt. 9:15) 130 times.   Ὁπότε appears

only in the Syrian class in Lu. 6:3 against the neutral and

Western ὅτε (so W. H.).  Πότε (Mt. 17:17) and ποτέ (Lu. 22:32)

are both far less common than ὅτε and ὅταν.  But τότε and

πάλιν amply atone for this scarcity. All the numeral ad-

verbs (ἅπαξ, πρῶτον, δίς, ἑπτάκις etc.) belong here also.

          5. Scope of Adverbs. Here again we are retracing ground and

crossing our steps, but a brief word will be useful to show how

from adverbs grew other parts of speech. The fact has been

stated before. What is here called for is some of the proof and

illustration.

 

            1 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 59,                       2 Ib.                  3 Ib.


          THE DECLENSIONS (KΛΙΣΕΙΣ)                            301

 

          (a) RELATION BETWEEN ADVERBS AND PREPOSITIONS. When

we come to study prepositions (ch. XIII) a fuller discussion

of this matter will be given. Here the principle will be stated.

"The preposition therefore is only an adverb specialized to define

a case-usage."1 That puts the matter in a nutshell. Many of the

older grammars have the matter backwards. The use of prepo-

sitions with verbs is not the original one. In Homer they are

scattered about at will. So with substantives. "Anastrophe is

therefore no exception, but the original type"2 like τίνος ἕνεκα

(Ac. 19:32). To quote Giles3 again, "between adverbs and prep-

ositions no distinct line can be drawn." As samples of cases in

prepositions take  παρ-ός (gen.), παρ-αί (dat.), περ-ί (loc.), παρ-ά

(instr.).  It is unscientific to speak of adverbs which "may be

used like prepositions to govern nouns"4 and then term them

"preposition adverbs" or "spurious prepositions." Preposi-

tions do not "govern" cases, but more clearly define them.

When adverbs do this, they are just as really prepositions as any

others. These will be treated therefore in connection with the

other prepositions. They are words like ἅμα, ἄνευ, ἔξω, ὀπίσω, etc.

          (b) ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS. These are usually of pro-

nominal origin like ὅ-τε (acc. plus τε) οὗ (gen.), ὡς (abl.), ἀλλά

(ace. plural), ἵ-να (instr.), etc. Some conjunctions are so early

as to elude analysis, like δέ, τέ, etc.5  But in most cases the

history can be traced. Blass (Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 60) re-

marks on the poverty of the N. T. Greek in particles, a pov-

erty as early as the   Ἀθνηαίων Πολιτεία of Aristotle, which is

much barer than the N. T. These conjunctions and other par-

ticles in the N. T. are cited by Blass: ἀλλά, ἅμα, ἄρα, ἄραγε, ἆρα, ἆρά

γε, ἄχρι(ς), γάρ, γε, δέ, δή, δήπου, διό διόπερ, ἐάν, ἐάνπερ, εἰ, εἴπερ, εἶτα,

εἶτε, ἐπάν ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, ἑπειδήπερ, ἑπείπερ (only as variation in Ro.

3:30), ἔπειτα, ἕως, ἢ, ἦ  or εἶ μήν, ἤδη, ἡνίκα (ἤπερ only variation in

Jo. 12:43), ἤτοι, ἵνα, καθά, καθάπερ, καθό, καθότι, καθώς, καί, καίπερ,

καίτοι(γε), μέν μενοῦνγε, μέντοι, μέχρι(ς) οὗ (μέχρι[ς] variation for), μή,

μηδέ, μήτε, μήτι, ναί, νή, ὅμως, ὁπότε, ὅπως, ὅταν, ὅτε, ὅτι, οὐ, οὐχι, οὐδέ,

οὐκοῦν, οὖν, οὔτε, περ with other words, πλήν, πρίν τε, τοι,  (in καίτοι,

μέντοι, etc.), τοι-γαρ-οῦν, τοίνυν, ὡς, ὡσάν, ὡσεί ὥσπερ, ὡσπερεί, ὥστε.

Several of these occur only once (δήπου, ἐπειδήπερ, νή, ὁπότε, οὐ-

 

            1 Giles, Man., p. 341. Cf. also Krebs, Die Prapositionsadverbien in der

spateren hist. Grac., Tl. I, 1884.

            2 Giles, ib. On "Nouns used as Prep." see Donaldson, New Crat., pp.

478 ff.                                                                          3 Ib.

            4 Green, Handb., etc., p. 138.                            6 Giles, Man., p. 343.


302        A GREEK GRAMMAR OF THE NEW TESTAMENT

 

κοῦν).  But Blass has not given a complete list. Cf. also διότι,

ὅθεν, οὗ, ὅποι, πότε, etc.  Fifteen other Attic particles are absent

from this N. T. list. The matter will come up again in ch. XXI.

          (c) ADVERBS AND INTENSIVE PARTICLES. Πέρ is an older form

of περ-ί.  Usually, however, as with γε, the origin is obscure.

Others used in the N. T. are δή, δήπου, μέν τοί (with other par-

ticles). See ch. XXI.

          (d) ADVERBS AND INTERJECTIONS. Interjections are often

merely adverbs used in exclamation. So with ἄγε, δεῦρο, δεῦτε, ἔα,

ἴδε, ἰδού, οὔα, οὐαί, ὦ.  Interjections may be mere sounds, but they

are chiefly words with real meaning.   Ἄγε and ἴδε are both verb-

stems and ἰδού is kin to ἴδε.  The origin of the adverbs here used as

interjections is not always clear.  Οὐαί as in Mt. 11:21 (common

in the LXX, N. T. and Epictetus) has the look of a dative, but one

hesitates. As a substantive ἡ οὐαί is probably due to θλίψις or

ταλαιπωρία (Thayer).  Cf. chapters XII, v, and XVI, v, (e), for use

of article with adverb, as τὸ νῦν.  For the adverb like adjective,

as ἡ ὄντως χήρα (1 Tim. 5:5), see p. 547. In Lu. 12:49 τί may

be an exclamatory adverb (accusative case), but that is not

certain.  Δεῦρο sometimes is almost a verb (Mk. 10:21). The rela-

tive adverb ὡς is used as an exclamation in ὡς ὡραῖοι (Ro. 10:15)

and ὡς ἀνεξερεύνητα (Ro. 11:33). The interrogative πῶς is like-

wise so employed, as πῶς δύσκολόν ἐστι (Mk. 10:24), πῶς συνέχομαι

(Lu. 12:50), πῶς ἐφίλει αὐτόν (Jo. 11:36). Cf. Blass, Gr. of N. T.

Gk., p. 258. Thus we see many sorts of adverbs and many ways

of making them.



 

 

 

CHAPTER VIII:   CONJUGATION OF THE VERB ( ῬΗΜΑ)

 

 

          I. Difficulty of the Subject. The discussion of the verb gives

greater difficulty than that of the noun for two reasons especially.

For one thing the declension (κλίσις) of nouns is more stable than

the conjugation (συζυγία) of the verb. This difficulty applies to

both the forms and the syntax of the verb.1  There is besides spe-

cial difficulty in the Greek verb due to the ease and number of new

verbal formations.2  Sanskrit and Greek can be compared with

more ease than Greek and Latin. Giles3 indeed calls the Latin

verb-system "only a mutilated fragment" of the original parent

stock, so that "a curious medley of forms" is the result, while in

the syntax of the verb no two Indo-Germanic languages are fur-

ther apart than Greek and Latin. Both noun and verb have

suffered greatly in the ravages of time in inflection. It is in de-

clension (cases) and conjugation (personal endings) that noun and 

verb mainly differ.4  "These suffixes [used for the present tense],

however, are exactly parallel to the suffixes in the substantive,

and in many instances can be identified with them."5

               II. Nature of the Verb.

          (a) VERB AND NOUN. In itself verbum is merely 'word,' any

word, and so includes noun also. As a matter of fact that was

probably true originally. In isolating languages only position and

the context can determine a verb from a noun, and that is often

true in English to-day. But in inflected tongues the case-endings

and the personal endings mark off noun and verb. But in simple

truth we do not know which is actually older, noun or verb; both

probably grew up together from the same or similar roots.6

Schoemann,7 however, is much more positive that "the first word

 

            1 Giles, Man., p. 403 f.  2 Hirt, Handb., p. 332.   3 Man., p. 404.

            4 Steinthal, Zeitschr. fur Volkerpsych. etc., p. 351. Cf. Schleicher, Unter-

scheidung von Nomen und Verbum etc., 4. Bd. der Abh. d. phil. etc., 1865,

p. 509.                                                  5 Giles, Man., p. 424.

            6 Schroeder, Uber die form. Untersch. d. Redet. im Griech. und Lat., 1874,

pp. 10 ff.                                              7 Die Lehre von den Redet. etc., 1864, p. 31.

 

                                        303


304     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

which man spoke was essentially much more a verb than a noun."

But, whether the verb is the first word or not, it is undoubtedly

the main one and often in the inflected tongue forms a sentence in

itself, since the stem expresses the predicate and the ending the

subject.1 It is worth noting also that by the verb-root and the

pronominal root (personal endings) the verb unites the two ulti-

mate parts of speech. The verb and noun suffixes, as already

said, are often identical (Giles, Manual, etc., p. 424). In all

sentences the verb is the main part of speech (the word par

excellence) save in the copula (ἐστί) where the predicate is com-

pleted by substantive or adjective or adverb (another link be-

tween verb and noun). "A noun is a word that designates and

a verb a word that asserts" (Whitney, Am. Jour. of Philol., xiii,

p. 275). A man who does not see that "has no real bottom to his

grammatical science."

          (b) MEANING OF THE VERB. Scholars have found much diffi-

culty in defining the verb as distinct from the noun. Indeed there

is no inherent difference between nouns and verbs as to action,

since both may express that.2  The chief difference lies in the idea

of affirmation. The verb affirms, a thing not done by a noun ex-

cept by suggested predication. Verbs indicate affirmation by the

personal endings. Affirmation includes negative assertions also.3

Farrar4 cites also the German "abstract conception of existence"

(Humboldt) and action (Tütigkeitswort), but they do not fit the

facts. Curiously enough many ancient grammarians found time

to be the main idea in the verb.

          (c) PURE AND HYBRID VERBS. The close kinship between

nouns and verbs appears in the verbal nouns which partake of

both. The infinitive is a verbal substantive, and the participle is

a verbal adjective. There is also the verbal in —τος and –τέος

Some of the properties of both verb and noun belong to each.

They are thus hybrids. They are generally called non-finite

 

            1 Monro, Hom. Gr., p. 1. In the Sans. it is to be noted that the noun had

an earlier and a more rapid development than the verb. The case-endings

appear first in the Sans., the verb-conjugation in the Gk., though the personal

endings are more distinct in the Sans.               2 Cf. Garnett, Philol. Ess.

            3 Cf. Gr. Gen. of Port Royal; Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 38.

            4 Ib. He considers the verb later than the noun because of its complex

idea. Cf. Schramm, Uber die Bedeutung der Formen des Verbums (1884);

Curtius, Die Bildung der Tempora und Modi im Griech. und Lat. (1846);

Junius, Evolution of the Greek Verb from Primary Elements (1843); Lauten-

sach, Verbalflexion der att. Inschr. (1887); Hogue, Irregular Verbs of Attic

Prose (1889).


 

          CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)              305

 

verbs, because they do not make affirmation. They have no per-

sonal endings. They fall short of being mere verbs, but they are

more than the noun. The pure verb has personal endings and is

thus finite (limited). The two must be kept distinct in mind,

though they run together sometimes in treatment. The finite

verb has person and number expressed in the personal ending.1

The verbum finitum has modes while the verbum infinitum, (in-

finitive and participle) has no modes.

          III. The Building of the Verb. This is not the place for a full

presentation of the phenomena concerning verb-structure. The

essential facts as to paradigms must be assumed. But attention

can be called to the fact that the Greek verb is built up by means

of suffixes and affixes around the verb-root. So it was originally,

and a number of such examples survive. Afterwards analogy, of

course, played the main part. The oldest verbs are those which

have the simple root without a thematic vowel like φη-μί or ἔ-βη-ν.

This root is the ground floor, so to speak, of the Greek verb. On

this root the aorist and present-tense systems were built by merely

adding the personal endings. This was the simplest form of the

verb. There is no essential difference in form between ἔ-φη-ν and

ἔ-στη-ν. We call one imperfect indicative and the other second

aorist indicative, but they are originally the same form.2  The

term second aorist is itself a misnomer, for it is older than

the so-called first aorist —σα or —α. The thematic stem (vowel

added to root) is seen in verbs like —λιπ-ο/ε.  On this model the

rest of the verb is built. So all Greek root-verbs are either non-

thematic or thematic. The denominative verbs like τιμά-ω are

all thematic. On roots or stems then all the verbs (simple or

compound) are built. The modes, the voices, the tenses all con-

tribute their special part to the whole. The personal endings

have to carry a heavy burden. They express not only person

and number, but also voice. There are mode-signs and tense-suf-

fixes, but no separate voice suffixes apart from the personal

endings. The personal pronouns thus used with the verb-root

antedate the mode and tense suffixes. The Sanskrit preserves

the person-endings more clearly than the Greek, though the Greek

has a more fully developed system of modes and tenses than

the later classical Sanskrit.3  It seems certain that these pro-

 

            1 Cf. Brug., Grundr., Bd. II, pp. 2, 837. On difference between finite and

non-finite verbs see Curtius, Das Verbum d. griech. Spr., p. 1 f.

            2 Hirt, Handb., p. 363 f. Cf. also Giles, Man., pp. 425

            3 Donaldson, New Crat., pp. 570


306    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

nominal suffixes, like --μι, —σι, --τι, are not in the nominative, but

an oblique case1 connected with the stem: με, σε, τι (cf. demon-

strative τό). But the subject of personal endings is a very exten-

sive and obscure one, for treatment of which see the comparative

grammars.2 There is a constant tendency to syncretism in

the use of these personal endings. Homer has fewer than the

Sanskrit, but more than Plato. The dual is gone in the N. T.

and other endings drop away gradually. The nominative pro-

noun has to be expressed more and more, like modern English.

               IV. The Survival of --μι Verbs.

          (a) A CROSS DIVISION. Before we take up modes, voices,

tenses, we are confronted with a double method of inflection that

cuts across the modes, voices and tenses. One is called the —μι,

inflection from the immediate attachment of the personal endings

to the stem. The other is the –ω inflection and has the the-

matic vowel added to the stem. But the difference of inflection

is not general throughout any verb, only in the second aorist and

the present-tense systems (and a few second perfects), and even so

the --μι conjugation is confined to four very common verbs ( ἵημι,

ἴστημι, δίδωμι, τίθημι), except that a number have it either in the

present system, like δίκ-νυ-μι. (with νυ inserted here), or the aorist,

like ἔ-βη-ν.3  The dialects differed much in the use of non-thematic

and thematic verbs (cf. Buck, "The Interrelations of the Greek

Dialects," Classical Philology, July, 1907, p. 724).

          (b) THE OLDEST VERBS. This fact is a commonplace in Greek

grammar. It is probable that originally all verbs were –μι verbs.

This inflection is preserved in optative forms like λύοιμι, and in

Homer the subjunctive4  ἐθέλωμι, ἴδωμι, etc. The simplest roots

with the most elementary ideas have the —μι form.5  Hence the

conclusion is obvious that the —μι conjugation that survives in

some verbs in the second aorist and present systems (one or

both) is the original. It was in the beginning λέγ-ο-μι with the-

matic as well as φη-μί with non-thematic verbs.6

          (c) GRADUAL DISAPPEARANCE. In Latin the –μι, ending is

seen only in inquam and sum, though Latin has many athematic

stems. In English we see it in am. Even in Homer the —μι

 

            1 Donaldson, New Crat., pp. 570            Cf. Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 39.

            2 Cf. Hirt, Handb., pp. 355 ff.; Giles, Man., pp. 413 ff.

            3 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 232 f.

            4 Monro, Hom. Gr., p. 51.                                  5 Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 46.

            6 Monro, Hom. Gr., p. 2. Cf. Clyde, Gk. Synt., 5th ed., 1876, p. 54; Riem.

and Goelzer, Phonet., pp. 347


              CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)           307

 

forms are vanishing before the –ω conjugation. Jannaris (Hist.

Gk. Gr., p. 234) has an excellent brief sketch of the gradual

vanishing of the –μι forms which flourished chiefly in pre-Attic

Greek. The LXX MSS. show the same tendency towards the

disappearance of –μι forms so noticeable in the N. T., the

papyri and other representatives of the κοινή.  See numerous

parallel illustrations in Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., pp. 104-110. In

the LXX the transition to –ω verbs is less advanced than in the

N. T. (Thackeray, Gr., p. 244) and the middle –μι forms held on

longest. In the κοινή this process kept on till in modern Greek

vernacular εἶμαι is the only remnant left. In the Attic δείκνυμι,

for instance, is side by side with δεικνύω.  In the N. T. we find

such forms as διδῶ (Rev. 3:9), ἱστῶ (Ro. 3:31, EKL), συνιστῶ (2

Cor. 3:1, BD).

          (d) N. T. USAGE AS TO --μι VERBS. The –μι verbs in the

N. T. as in the papyri are badly broken, but still in use.

          1.  The Second Aorists (active and middle). We take first the

so-called second aorists (athematic) because they come first save

where the present is practically identical. In some verbs only

the second aorist is athematic, the stem of the verb having dropped

the -μι inflection. A new view1 makes the second aorist some-

times "a reduced root," but this does not show that in the parent

stock the old aorist was not the mere root. Analogy worked here

as elsewhere. Kaegi2 properly calls the old aorists of verbs like

βάλλω (ἔ-βλη-το instead of the thematic and later ἐ-βάλ-ε-το) "prim-

itive aorists." In the early Epic the root-aorists and strong

thematic aorists outnumber the σ or weak aorists by three to one.3  

The important N. T. –μι verbs will now be considered.

          Βαίνω. Only in composition in N. T. (ἀνα--, προσ-ανα--, συν--

ανα--, ἀπο--, δια--, ἐκ--, ἐμ--, κατα--, μετα--, παρα--, προ--, συμ--).  In the

LXX it is rare in simplex. The papyri use it freely with nine

prepositions.4 Note the common forms like ἀνέβη (Mt. 5:1) . The

"contract" forms are in the imperative as in the Attic poets

(εἴσβα, κατάβα).5  Mayser6 gives no examples from the papyri, nor

does the LXX have any (LXX only ἀνάβηθι, κατάβηθι, --βητε,--βήτω,

--βήτωσαν).7  So ἀνάβα (Rev. 4:1), ἀνάβατε (Rev. 11:12), κατάβα

(Syrian class in Mk. 15:30), καταβάτω (Mt. 24:17; 27:42. Cf.

 

            1 Cf. King and Cookson, Prin. of Sound and Inflexion, 1888, pp. 225

            2 Gk. Gr., 1893, p. 245.

            3 Thompson, Hom. Gr., 1890, p. 127.    5 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 50.

            4 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 389.      6 Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 364 f.

            7 W.-Sch., p. 115. Cf. Veitch, Gk. Verb, p. 110.


308     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

also Mk. 13:15; 15:32; Lu. 17:31), μετάβα (Mt. 17:20). On

the other hand note the usual κατάβηθι (Mt. 27:40, etc.), μετά-

βηθι (Jo. 7:3), προσανάβηθι (Lu. 14:10). The forms in –άτω, --ατε,

--άτωσαν are like the Doric.

          Γινώσκω. This verb in the Ionic and κοινή γιν. form is very

common in John's Gospel and the First Epistle. It is used in com-

position with ἀνα--, δια--, ἐπι--, κατα--, προ--, the papyri adding still

other compounds.1 The N. T. shows the usual second aorist forms

like ἔγνων (Lu. 16:4). What calls for remark is the second aorist

subjunctive γνοῖ instead of γνῷ.  W. F. Moulton's view2 on this

point is confirmed by the papyri3 parallel in ἀποδοῖ and accepted

by W. H. and Nestle. Analogy seems to have worked here to

make γνοῖ like δοῖ.  But Winer-Schmiedel (p. 115) cite γνοῖ from

Hernias, Mand. IV, 1, 5 א. It is in accordance with the contrac-

tion of –οω verbs when we find forms like γνοῖ, δοῖ, etc., όῃ= οῖ in-

stead of όῃ.  For γνοῖ see Mk. 5:43; 9:30; Lu. 19:15. But

see also γνῷ in Jo. 7:51; 11:57 (D has γνοῖ); 14:31; Ac. 22:24

(ἐπι--).  But the MSS. vary in each passage. In the LXX the

regular γνῷ occurs save in Judith 14:5, where B has ἐπιγνοῖ.

            Δίδωμι.   This very common verb is frequently compounded

(ἀνα--, ἀντ--, ἀπο--, δια--, ἐκ--, ἐπι--, μετα--, παρα--, προ--) as in the

papyri.4 The old indicative active appears only in παρεδοσαν in

the literary preface to Luke's Gospel (1:2).5  Elsewhere the first  

aorist forms in --κα (like ἧκα, ἔθηκα) sweep the field for both singu-

lar and plural. These κ forms for the plural appear in the Attic

inscriptions in the fourth century B.C.6 and rapidly grow. In the

papyri Mayser7 finds only the  κ aorists. The other modes go

regularly δός, δῶ, etc. The indicative middle occasionally, as        

the imperfect, has ε for ο of the root. This is possibly due to  

proportional analogy (ἐξέδετο:  ἐξεδόμην=ἐλύετο: ἐλυόμην).8  These

forms are ἀπέδετο (Heb. 12:16), ἐξέδετο (Mk. 12:1; Mt. 21:33;

Lu. 20:9). The usual form ἀπέδοσθε, etc., appears in Ac. 5:8;  23)

7:9. The subjunctive active third singular shows great varia-

tion between δοῖ, δῷ (cf. γνοῖ above), and δώῃ (especially in

Paul's Epistles).9 The LXX MSS. occasionally give --δοῖ and

 

            1 Mayser, Or. d. griech. Pap., p. 391. 2 W.-M., p. 360 note.

            3 Moulton, Prol., p. 55. Cf. Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., pp. 137, 325,

for ὅπως δοῖ.. Cf. Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, pp. 37, 436.

            4 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 392.      6 Meisterh., Att. Inschr., p. 188 f.

            5 Blass, Gr. of N. T.. Gk., p. 49.             7 Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 367 f.

            8 So W.-H., Notes on Orth., p. 167 f. Cf. W.-Seh., p. 121. For pap. exx.

see Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 37.                    9 Cf. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 49.


                CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)            309

 

even δῇ by assimilation (Thackeray, Gr., p. 255 f.). For papyri

examples see references under γινώσκω.  Mark four times (all the

examples) has also δοῖ according to the best MSS. (4:29; 8:37;

14:10 f.) and John one out of three (13:2). Tisch. (not W. H.)

reads ἀποδοῖ in 1 Th. 5:15, but all MSS. have ἀποδῷ in Mt.

18:30. W. H. accept δῷ in Jo. 15:16; Eph. 3:16; 1 Th. 5:

15 (ἀπο--).  Most MSS. read δώῃ in Eph. 1:17 and 2 Tim. 2:

25, in both of which places W. H. put δῴη (opt. for δοίη) in

the text and δώῃ in the margin. The opt. δῴη appears in the

LXX (Jer. 9:2) in the text of Swete. Con. and Stock, Sel. from

LXX, p. 45, give δῴη twenty-nine times in LXX and δοίη three

times as variant. They give an interesting list of other forms of

δίδωμι and its compounds in the LXX.  Hort1 is doubtful about

such a subjunctive in δώῃ except in the epic poets. Blass2  is

willing to take δώῃ, and Moulton3 cites Boeotian and Delphian

inscriptions which preserve this Homeric form. He adds that the

subjunctive seems "a syntactical necessity" in Eph. 1:17 and

2 Tim. 2:25. The opt. δῴη= δοίη (cf. subjunctive δόῃ= δῷ) is with-

out variant in 2 Th. 3:16; 2 Tim. 1:16, 18.4  Blass5 scouts

the idea of a possible first aorist active ἔδωσα from ἵνα δώσῃ

(Jo. 17:2 אcAC), δώσωμεν (Mk. 6:37, אD), on the ground that

and ει, ο and ω so often blend in sound in the κοινή. The so-called

future subjunctive will be discussed later (ch. XIX).

          Ἵημι.  Not in simplex in N. T. (see p. 314 for details), but

ἀφίημι is quite common (especially in the Gospels), and συνίημι

less so. Besides a few examples occur also of ἀνίημι, καθίημι

παρίημι.  The papyri6 use the various prepositions freely in com-

position with ἴημι.  The common μι second aorists, like ἄφες (Mt.

3:15), ἀφῇ (Mk. 12:19), ἀνέντες (Ac. 27:40), are found. In the

indicative active, however, the form in –κα is used alone in both

singular and plural, as ἀφήκαμεν (Mt. 19:27), ἀφήκατε (Mt. 23:

23), ἀφῆκαν (Mk. 11:6).  This is true of all the compounds of

ἵημι in the N. T. as in LXX (Thackeray, Gr., p. 252). The

form ἀφῆκες (Rev. 2:4) is on a par with the second person sin-

gular perfect active indicative as accepted by W. H. in κεκοπίακες

(Rev. 2:3), πέπτωκες (Rev. 2:5), εἴληφες (Rev. 11:17).7   Ἀφήκαεμν  

is aorist in Mk. 10:28 as well as in its parallel Mt. 19:27

 

            1 Notes on Orth., p. 168. Cf. also W.-Sch., p. 121.

            2 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 48 f.                     3 Prol., p. 55. Cf. Dittenb., Syll., 462. 17, etc.

            4 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 168.              5 Gr. of N. T. Gk., pp. 49, 212.

            6 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 398.

            7 Cf. Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 166. The evidence is "nowhere free from


310     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

( = Lu. 18 : 28).  So also as to συνήκατε in Mt. 13:51. The per-

fect in –εῖκα does not, however, occur in the N. T. nor in the LXX

(cf. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 51), though the papyri have it

(Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 331).

          Ἵστημι.  This verb is used freely by itself, especially in the

Gospels, and occurs in twenty prepositional combinations ac-

cording to Thayer (ἀν--, ἐπ-αν--, ἐξ-αν--, ἀνθ--, ἀφ--, δι--, ἐν--, ἐξ--, ἐπ--,

ἐφ--, κατ-εφ--, συν-εφ--, καθ--, ἀντι-καθ--, ἀπο-,αθ--, μεθ--, παρ--, περι--, προ--,

συν--), going quite beyond the papyri in richness of expression.1  The

second aorist active indicative ἔστη (ἀπέστη, etc.) is common and is

intransitive as in Attic, just like ἐστάθη (cf. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk.,

p. 50). The other forms are regular (στῶ, στῆθι, etc.) save that

ἀνάστα(like ἀνάβα) is read in a few places (Ac. 9:11; 12:7; Eph.

5:14), but στῆθι, ἀνάστηθι (Ac. 9:6, 34), ἐπίστηθι, στῆτε, ἁντίστητε,

ἀπόστητε, ἀποστήτω.2  Winer3 cites ἀπόστα, παράστα also from late

writers and a few earlier authors for ἀνάστα. The LXX shows a

few examples also.4

          Ὀνίνημι. This classic word (not given in the papyri, according

to Mayser's Grammatik) is found only once in the N. T., the sec-

ond aorist opt. middle ὀναίμην (Phil. 20).

          Τίθημι.  The compounds of τίθημι in the N. T. (ἀνα--, προσ-ανα--,

ἀπο--, δια--, ἀντι-δια--, ἐκ--, ἐπι--, συν-επι--, κατα--, συν-κατα--, μετα--, πα-

ρα--, περι--, προ--, προσ--, συν--, ὑπο—) vie with those of ἵστημι and

equal the papyri use.5  The first aorist active in –κα alone ap-

pears (so LXX) in the indicative singular and plural as ἔθηκαν

(Mk. 6:29), but the subjunctive in –θῶ (Mt. 22:44), imperative

πρόσθες (Lu. 17:5). The middle has the regular second aorist

ἔθετο (Ac. 19:21 and often).

          Φημί.   If one is surprised to see this verb put under the list of

second aorist, he can turn to Blass,6  who says that it is "at once

 

doubt," some MSS. read ἔδωκες (Jo. 17:7 f.) and ἀφήκετε (Mt. 23:23), not to

say ἑώρακες (Jo. 8:57), ἐλήλυθες (Ac. 21:22, B also). Moulton (Prol., p. 52)

considers -ες a "mark of imperfect Gk." For further exx. of this -ες ending in

the LXX and κοινή see Buresch, Rhein. Mus. etc., 1891, p. 222 f. For ἵημι  

and its compounds in the LXX see C. and S., Sel. fr. LXX, p. 45 f., showing

numerous --ω forms, αφῆκαν (Xen. ἦκαν), etc.

            1 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 398.      is :

            2 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 168.  a W.-M., p. 94.

            4 Thack., Gr., p. 254. Cf. W.-Sch., p. 122 f. On ἱστάναι and its compounds

in the LXX see interesting list in C. and S., Sel. fr. LXX, p. 43 f., giving

-ω forms, transitive ἕστακα, etc.                      5 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 411.     

            6 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 50. The verb is mentioned here to impress the fact

that it is aorist as well as imperfect.      


              CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)          311

 

imperfect and aorist." It is common in the N. T. as aorist (Mt.

4:7, for instance, ἔφη.  It is not always possible to decide.

          2. Some —μι Presents. It is difficult to group these verbs ac-

cording to any rational system, though one or two small groups

(like those in –νυμι, –ημι) appear. The presents are more com-

mon in the N. T. than the aorists. The list is based on the un-

compounded forms.

          Δείκ-νυ-μι. Already in the Attic δεικνύω is common, but Blass1

observes that in the N. T. the middle-passive –μι forms are still

rather common. It is compounded with ἀνα--, ἀπο--, ἐν--, ἐπι--, ὑπο--,

No presents (or imperfects) occur with ἀνα-- and  ὐπο--. The word

itself is not used very extensively. The form δείκνυμι is found

once (1 Cor. 12:31), –ύω not at all. So on the other hand δείκ-

νύεις occurs once (Jo. 2:18), –υς not at all.  Δείκνυσιν is read by

the best MSS. (Mt. 4:8; Jo. 5:20). The middle ἐνδείκνυνται ap-

pears in Ro. 2:15.  The –μι participle active is found in Ac. 18:

28 (ἐπιδεινύς) and 2 Th. 2:4 (ἀποδεικνύντα). The middle –μι par-

ticiple is seen in Ac. 9:39; Tit. 2:10; 3:2 (–ύμενος, etc.). In

Heb. 6:11 the infinitive ἐνδείκνυσθαι is read, but δεικνύειν (Mt. 16:

21 B –ύναι).2 The other N. T. verbs in –υμι (ἀπόλλυμι, ζώννυμι, ὑπο-

ζώννυμι, ὄμνυμι, σβέννυμι, στρώννυμι, ὑποστρώννυμι, κτλ.) will be dis-

cussed in alphabetical order of the simplex. The inscriptions show

these forms still in use (Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 178). The

verbs in --νυμι were the first to succumb to the –ω inflection. In

the LXX the —μι forms are universal in the middle, but in the

active the –ω forms are more usual (Thack., Gr., p. 245).

            Δίδωμι. See under (d), 1, for list of compounds in the N. T.

Attic Greek had numerous examples from the form διδό-ω (δίδου,

ἐδίδουν, –ους, –ου). This usage is extended in the N. T. as in the

papyri3 to διδῶ (Rev. 3:9), though even here BP have δίδωμι.  In

Wisd. of Sol. 12:19 διδοῖς occurs, but Lu. 22:48 has the regular

παραδίδως.  Δίδωσι is common (in LXX, Ps. 37:21, διδοῖ appears)

and διδόασιν in Rev. 17:13. The uniform imperfect ἐδίδου (Mt.

15:36) is like the Attic. Hort observes that Mk. (15:23) and

Ac. (4:33; 27:1) prefer ἐδίδουν. Jo. (19:3) has, however, ἐδίδο-

σαν and Acts once also (16:4).  Δίδου (Attic present imperative)

is read by Syrian MSS. in Mt. 5:42 for δός.  In Rev. 22:2 the

 

            1 Ib., p. 48.

            2 In the pap. both —υμι and –ύω but only —υμαι.  Mayser, Gr. d. griech.

Pap., p. 392.

            3 Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 37. Cf. Deiss., B. S., p. 192. Mod. Gk. has

δίδω.


312    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

text has participle ἀποδίδοῦν, for —όν (marg. —ούς), while παραδι-

δῶν is read by א in Mt. 26:46 and D in Mk. 14:42, etc.1  The

middle-passive forms in —ετο (imperfect) from a present δίδω are

like the aorist forms, which see above. So διεδίδετο (Ac. 4:35) and

παρεδίδετο (1 Cor. 11:23). So also subjunctive παραδιδοῖ is found

only once (1 Cor. 15:24) and is probably to be rejected (BG),

though the papyri amply support it.2  In the imperfect ἐδίδοσαν  

holds its place in the LXX, while in the present the forms

generally prevail (Thackeray, Gr., p. 250). The LXX is quite

behind the N. T. in the transition from --μι to —ω forms.

          Δύναμαι.  The use of δύνῃ (Mk. 9:22; Lu. 16:2; Rev. 2:2) in-

stead of δύνασαι argues for the thematic δύνομαι.  Elsewhere δύνασαι

(Lu. 6:42, etc.). This use of δύνῃ is found in the poets and from

Polybius on in prose (Thayer), as shown by inscriptions3 and

papyri.4  Hort5 calls it a "tragic" form retained in the κοινή. It

is not surprising therefore to find B reading δύνομαι (also όμεθα,

--όμενος) in Mk. 10:39; Mt. 19:12; 26:53; Ac. 4:20; 27:15;

Is. 28:20 (so א in Is. 59:15). The papyri6 give plenty of illus-

trations also. MSS. in the LXX give δύνομαι and δύνῃ.

          Εἰμί.   The compounds are with ἀπ--, ἐν--, ἑʼξ-- (only ἔξεστιν, ἐξόν),

παρ--, συν--, συν-παρ--.  The papyri7 show a much more extended use

of prepositions. This very common verb has not undergone many

changes, though a few call for notice. In the present indicative

there is nothing for remark. The imperfect shows the middle

ἤμην, ἤμεθα regularly (as Mt. 25:43; 23:30), as modern Greek

uniformly has the middle present εἶμαι, etc., as well as imperfect

middle. Cf. already in ancient Greek the future middle ἔσομαι.

The use of seen in the papyri8 and inscriptions9 also, served

to mark it off from the third singular ἦν.  But examples of ἦμεν

still survive (Ro. 7:5, etc.). Moulton10 quotes from Ramsay11

a Phrygian inscription of εἶμαι for early fourth century A.D. He

cites also the Delphian middle forms ἦται, ἔωται, Messenian ἦνται,

 

            1 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 167. Cf. also W.-Sch., p. 121.

            2 Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 37.                       3 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 177.

            4 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 355; Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 36. Cf.

also Dieterich, Untersuch., p. 222; Schmid, Atticismus, IV, p. 597; Deiss.,

B. S., p. 193.

            5 Notes on Orth., p. 168. Cf. Lobeck, Phryn., p. 359 f.

            6 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 355; Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 36.

            7 Mayser, ib., p. 394.

            8 Ib., p. 356.                              9 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 178.

            10 Prol., p. 56. D (M. shows) alone has ἦν in Ac. 20:18.

            11 Cities and Bish. of Phrygia, II, 565.


                CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                  313

 

Lesbian ἔσσο, as early instances of this tendency, not to mention

the Northwest Greek.1  The peculiar classical second person ἦσθα

is found in Mk. 14:67; Mt. 26:69, but elsewhere is (Jo. 11:21,

32, etc.), the common form in the κοινή.2   Ἦτε (Ro. 6:20, for in-

stance) is regular.  So with the imperative (Mt. 2:13, etc.).

 Ἤτω (as 1 Cor. 16:22) is less common3 than the usual ἔστω (Gal.

1:8).   Ἔστωσαν (never ὄντων nor ἔστων), as in Lu. 12:35, is a

form found in Attic inscriptions since 200 B.C.4  Some of the pa-

pyri even have ἤτωσαν.5 Mention has already (Orthography) been

made of the irrational ν with the subjunctive in the papyri,6 as

in ὅταν ἦνδηλώσω. The use of ἔνι=ἔνεστι (as 1 Cor. 6:5; Gal.

3:28, etc.) an old idiom.   Ἔνι=ἐν and in modern Greek has

supplanted  ἐστί in the form εἶνε or εἶναι (so for εἰσί, also).7 Cf.

Sir. 37:2. N. T. has no example of imperative ἔστε.

          Εἶμι.  Only in compounds (ἀπ--, εἰς--, ἐξ--, ἐπ--, συν--). The pa-

pyri8 and the inscriptions9 show only the compound forms.

Blass10 indeed denies that even the compound appears in the

popular κοινή, but this is an overstatement. The Attic em-

ployed ἔρχομαι for the present indicative and kept εἶμι for the fu-

ture indicative. The κοινή followed the Ionic (and Epic) in the

use of ἔρχομαι for all the tenses to the neglect of εἶμι. In the

N. T. only Luke and the writer of Hebrews (once) use these com-

pound forms of εἶμι and that very rarely.   Ἄπειμι, only occurs in

the imperfect indicative (Ac. 17:10, ἀπῄεσαν).  Εἴσειμι appears

four times, two in the present indicative (Ac. 3:3; Heb. 9:6),

two in the imperfect indicative (Ac. 21:18, 26), while εἰσέρχομαι,

appears over two hundred times.   Ἔξειμι also occurs four times,

all in Acts (13:42; 17:15; 20:7; 27:43), against a host of instances

of ἐξέρχομαι.   Ἔπειμι is read five times in Acts and all of them in

the participle τῇ ἐπιούσῃ (Ac. 7:26, etc.).  Σύνειμι is found only in

Lu. 8:4. B reads εἴσιθι in Ac. 9:6, not εἴσελθε. Blass11 rather

 

            1 Prol., p. 37.

            2 W.-Sch., p.,117:

            3 Cf. Moulton, Prol., p. 56. Both forms in pap. and inscr. On ἤμην, ἦς,

ἤμεθα, ἤτω, ἔστωσαν in the LXX see C. and S., Sel. fr. LXX, p. 31 f. Thack.,

Gr., P. 256 f. Beyond this the LXX goes very little.

            4 Meisterh., Att. Inschr., p. 191.

            5 Moulton, Rev., 1901, p. 436.

            6 Ib., p. 38.  Cf. Gen. 6:17 E, according to Moulton, Prol., p. 49.

            7 Cf. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 51 f.; Thack., p. 257.

            8 Mayser, GrF d. griech. Pap., p. 355.

            9 Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 157.                       10 Gr. of N. T. Gk., pp. 52, 54.

            11 Ib., p. 52.


314     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

needlessly construes ἐξιόντων (Ac. 13:42) in the aoristic sense (so

as to 17:10, 15; 21:18, 26).  Εἶμι is nearly gone from the LXX

(Thackeray, Gr., p. 257).

          Ἐπίσταμαι. This verb occurs fifteen times in the N. T., chiefly

in Acts (10:28, etc.) and always in the present tense.1

          Ζεύγνυμι.  Only in the compound συ-ζεύγνυμι and in the aorist

active alone,  συνέζευξεν (Mk. 10:9 =Mt. 19:6).

          Ζώννυμι.  The compounds are with ἀνα--, δια--, περι--, ὑπο--.

Curiously enough the verb does not appear in Mayser, Nach-

manson nor Schweizer, though Mayser (p. 397) does mention

ζεύγνυμι  which on the other hand the N. T. does not give save

the one form above. But the uncompounded form is read in the

N. T. only three times, one aorist indicative (Ac. 12:8), one future

indicative (Jo. 21:18), and one imperfect (Jo. 21:18, ἐζώννυες, a

form in –ύω, not –υμι). There is only one instance of the compound

with ἀνα-- and that an aorist participle (1 Pet. 1:13). The three

examples of διαζ., all in Jo. (13:4, etc.), yield no presents nor im-

perfects. The same thing is true of the half-dozen instances of

περιζ., as Lu. 12:35, The LXX has περιζώννυται (Thackeray,

Gr., p. 269). The one instance of ὑποζ. is in Ac. 27:17 and shows

the form in –υμι, ὑποζωννύντες.

           Ἧμαι.  It is only in the compound form κάθημαι that this verb

is seen in the N. T. and thus very frequently, twice with συν-

prefixed (Mk. 14:54; Ac. 26:30). It is usually the participle

καθήμενος that one meets in the N. T. (as Mt. 9:9). The imper-

fect is regularly ἐκάθητο, etc. (as Mt. 13:1), the future καθήσομαι,

(as Mt. 19:28). No –ω forms appear in the present, though κάθῃ

(Ac. 23:3) is a contract form like δύνῃ for κάθησο (already in Hy-

perides).2 The short imperative κάθου for κάθησαι (as Jas. 2:3)

is already in the LXX (cf. Mt. 22:44 from Ps. 110:1) and

indeed in the late Attic (Blass, ib.), though chiefly postclassical.3

            Ἵημι.  Like εἶμι this verb only appears in the N. T. in the

compounded form (ἀν–, ἀφ--, καθ--, παρ--, συν--). The same thing

appears to be true of the papyri as given by Mayser,4 though fif-

teen combinations greet us in the papyri. But the papyri and

the κοινή inscriptions have not yet furnished us with the –ω

formation with ἵημι compounds which we find in ἀφ-- and συνίημι

 

            1 Just so the pap., Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 395.

            2 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 52. Cf. also for pap., Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901,

p. 38. For LXX see Thackeray, p. 272.

            3 W.-Sch., p. 118; Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 177; Reinhold, De Graec.,

p. 89.                                                                4 Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 398.


         CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)               315

 

in the N. T.1 and the LXX.2 But Philo3 and the N. T. Apoc-

rypha and early Christian writers4 follow the LXX and the

N. T.   Ἀνίημι indeed has only ἀνιέντες (Eph. 6:9) in the present

stem. So also καθίημι shows only καθιέμενον (--μένην) in Ac. 10:11;

11:5, while παρίημι has no present, but only an aorist (Lu. 11:

42) and a perfect passive (Heb. 12:12).   Ἀφίημι is the form of

the verb that is common in the N. T. In Rev. 2:20 ἀφεῖς is

probably a present from ἀφέω.5  But Blass (p. 51, of N. T. Gram-

mar) compares the Attic ἀφίεις and τίθεις. Only ἀφίημι (Jo. 14:

27) and ἀφίησι (Mt. 3:15) occur, but in Lu. 11:4 ἀφίομεν, is from

the Ionic ἀφίω (cf. δίδω).  So also in Rev. 11:9  ἀφίουσιν and in

Jo. 20:23 marg. W. H. have ἀφίονται.  Elsewhere ἀφίενται (Mt.

9:2, etc.). In the imperfect ἤφιεν from αφίω is read in Mk. 1:34;

11:16.   Ἀφέωνται (Lu. 5:20, 23, etc.) is a perfect passive (Doric

Arcadian, Ionic).6  Cf. Ionic ἔωκα.  Simcox (Language of the

N. T., p. 38) quotes also ἀνέωνται from Herodotus. With συνίημι

the task is much simpler. Blass7 sums it up in a word. In Ac.

7:25 συνιέναι, gives us the only undisputed instance of a –μι form.

All the others are –ω forms or have –ω variations. However

συνιέντος is correct in Mt. 13:19 and συνιέναι in Lu. 24:45. There

is a good deal of fluctuation in the MSS. in most cases. W. H.

read συνίουσιν (Mt. 13:13), συνίωσιν, (Mk. 4:12), συνίων (Ro. 3 :

11). In 2 Cor. 10:12 W. H. read συνιᾶσιν after B. In the LXX

only the compounded verb occurs, and usually the –μι forms save

with συνίημι (Thackeray, Gr., p. 250 f.).

           Ἵστημι.  Cf. also ἐπ-ίσταμαι. (see above) and στήκω (from ἕσ-

τηκα, imperfect ἔστηκε in Rev. 12:4, στέκω in modern Greek).

For the list of compounds8 see list of aorists (1). But the essen-

tial facts can be briefly set forth. The –μι form in the present

stem has disappeared in the active voice save in καθίστησιν, (Heb.

7:28; 2 Pet. 1:8), συνίστημι (Ro. 16:1) and συνίστησι (2 Cor.

10:18; Ro. 3:5; 5: 8).9  The middle (passive) forms retain the

μι inflection regularly with ἵστημι and its compounds (ἀν--, ἀφ--,

αὐθ--, ἐξ--, ἐφ--, προ--, συν--), as καθίστατι (Heb. 5:1), περίιστασο

 

            1 Mayser, ib., p. 354; Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 167.

            2 W.-Sch p. 123. Herod. is cited for the use of ἐξίει and μετίει as –ω presents.

            3 Ib.                                                      4 Reinhold, De Graec., p. 94.

            5 So Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 167; W.-Sch., p. 123; Hatz., Einl., pp. 309, 334.

            6 Moulton, Prol., p. 38 f.

            7 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 51. He gives the MS. variations and parallels in

Hermas and Barn. See further A. Buttmann, Gr., p. 48.

            8 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 398.

            9 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 168; Blass, Gr. of N. T., p. 48.


316    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

(2 Tim. 2:16).1 Two --ω forms supplant the --μι conjugation of

ἵστημι and its compounds, that in –άω and that in –άνω, though

usually the MSS. vary greatly between the two.2  In 1 Cor. 13:2

אBDEFG read μεθιστάναι, though W. H. follow ACKL in μεθι-

στάνειν.3  The form in –άω is found in various MSS. for ἱστάω (as

ἱστῶμεν Ro. 3:31), ἀποκαθ-- (Mk. 9:12 Rec.),  ἐξιστάω, καθιστάω,

μεθιστάω, συνιστάω, but is nowhere accepted in the W. H. text,

though Hort4 prefers συνιστᾷν to συνιστάνειν in 2 Cor. 3:1. In

2 Cor. 4:2 a threefold division occurs in the evidence. For συνι-

στάνοντες we have ABP (so W. H. and Nestle), for συνιστάντες

אCD*FG, for συνιστῶτες DcEKL.5  The form in –άνω is uniformly

given by W. H., though the form in –άω comes from Herodotus

on and is frequent in the LXX.6  But the --μι forms hold their

own pretty well in the LXX (Thackeray, Gr., p. 247). The form

in –άνω, may be compared with the Cretan στανύειν and is found

in the late Attic inscriptions.7 Instances of the form in –άνω in

the W. H. text are Ac. 1:6; 8:9; 17:15; 1 Cor. 13:2; 2 Cor.

3:1; 5:12; 6:4; 10:12, 18; Gal. 2:18; Ro. 3:31; 6:13, 16). In

Mk. 9:12 W. H. (not so Nestle) accept the form ἀποκατιστάνει after

B, while אD read ἀποκαταστάνει (cf. Cretan στανύω). D has this

form also in Ac. 1:6 and 17:15.

          Κεῖμα.  This defective verb is only used in the present and

imperfect in the N. T. as in the papyri,8 and with a number of

prepositions in composition like the papyri also. The prepositions

are ἀνα--, συν-ανα--, ἀντι--, ἀπο--, ἐπι--, κατα--, παρα--, περι--, προ--. The

regular --μι forms are always used, and sometimes as the passive

of τίθημι, as περίκειμαι (Ac. 28:20; Heb. 5:2). For ἀνάκειμαι only

the participle ἀνακείμενος appears (so Mt. 9:10) save once ἀνέκειτο

(Mt. 26:20) and twice with σύν (Mt. 9:10 Mk. 2:15). In

Lu. 23: 53 ἦν κείμενος follows the Attic, but אB have ἦν τεθειμέ-

νος in Jo. 19:41.9  So in the LXX τίθημι partially replaces κεῖμαι

(Thackeray, Gr., pp. 255, 272).

          Κρέμαμαι.  This verb is used as the middle of the active κρεμάν-

νυμι (this form not in N. T.) and does not appear in Mayser's list

 

            1 Blass, Gr. of N. T., p. 49.

            2 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 168; Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 49.

            3 Here Hort (Notes, etc., p. 168) differs from Westcott and prefers –άναι.

            4 Ib.                                                      5 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 48.

            6 Ib. W.-Sch., p. 122.

            7 Meisterh., Att. Inschr., p. 177. For many --νω verbs in mod. Gk. see

Thumb, Handb., p. 133 f.

            8 Mayser, Or. d. griech. Pap., pp. 354, 399. For the Byz. and mod. Gk.

usage see Dieterich, Unters., p. 223.      9 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 51.


            CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                317

 

for the papyri. The form1 κρέμαται is read in Mt. 22:40 and the

participle κρεμάμενος(ν) in Gal. 3:13; Ac. 28:4. In Lu. 19:48 אB

(so W. H. anq Nestle) read ἐξεκρέμετο, an –ω form and the only

compound form of the verb in the N. T. The other forms are

aorists which come from an active present κρεμάννυμι, ---αννύω, --άω

or άζω.  They are κρεμάσαντες (Ac. 5:30) and κρεμασθῇ (Mt. 18:

6). But none of these presents occurs in the N. T. Cf. Veitch,

Greek Verbs, p. 343 f., for examples of the active and the middle.

So also no present of κεράννυμι, (compound συν--) is found in the

N. T., but only the perfect passive (Rev. 14:10) and the aorist

active (Rev. 18:6).

          Μίγνυμι. The only —μι form is the compound συν-ανα-μίγνυσθαι

(1 Cor. 5:9, 11) and so 2 Th. 3:14 according to W. H., instead of

συν-ανα-μίγνυσθε.  Elsewhere, as in the papyri,2 the N. T. has only

the perfect passive (Mt. 27:34) and the aorist active (Lu. 13:1).

            Οἴγνυμι.  This verb does not appear in the N. T. in the simple

form, but always compounded with ἀν– or δι-αν--.  Besides it is

always an –ω verb as in the papyri3 and the LXX.4  It is worth

mentioning here to mark the decline of the –μι forms.

           Ὄλλυμι.   Only in the common ἀπ-- and once with συν-απ-- (Heb.

11:31). In the active only the –ω forms are found as ἀπολλύει

(Jo. 12:25), ἀπόλλυε (Ro. 14:15). But in the middle (passive)

only the –μι, forms5 meet us, as ἀπόλλυται (1 Cor. 8:11), ἀπώλλυντο

(1 Cor. 10:9). So the LXX.

            Ὄμνυμι.  A half-dozen examples of the present tense of this

verb occur in the N. T. All but one (ὀμνύναι, Mk. 14:71) belong

to the –ω inflection, as ὀμνύει. (Mt. 23:21 f.). The Ptolemaic pa-

pyri also have one example of ὄμνυμι, the rest from ὀμνύω.6 The

LXX sometimes has the –μι form in the active and always in the

middle (Thackeray, Gr., p. 279). Neither πήγνυμι. (aorist Heb.

8:2) nor προσπήγνυμι (aorist Ac. 2:23) appears in the present in

the N. T.

          Πίμπλημι.  No present tense in the N. T., though a good many

aorists, save the compound participle ἐμπιπλῶν, from the –ω verb

--άω.  Mayser7 gives no papyri examples. LXX has –ω form

usually.

 

            1 In the LXX the active goes over to the —ω class. Thack., Gr., p. 273.

            2 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 403.

            3 Ib., p. 404. And indeed the old Attic ἀνοίγω, Meisterh., p. 191.

            4 Thack., Gr., p. 277.

            5 So the pap. Mayser, Gr., p. 352; Thackeray, p. 246.

            6 Mayser, ib., pp. 351 f., 404.

            7 lb., p. 406.


318    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

            Πίμπρημι.  The simple verb occurs once only, πίμπρασθαι. (Ac.

28:6) according to W. H.1  This is the only instance where a

present occurs at all in the N. T. The papyri give no light as yet.

No simplex in the LXX, but ἐνεπίμπρων in 2 Macc. 8:6 (Thack-

eray, Gr., p. 249).

          Ῥήγνυμι.  The compounds are with δια--, περι--, προσ--.  No pres-

ents appear save in the simple verb and διαρ--.  With διαρ. only the

ω forms are used as διερήσσετο (Lu. 5:6), διαρήσσων (Lu. 8:29).

But we have ῥήγνυνται (Mt. 9:17) and ῥήσσει (Mk. 9:18). May-

ser gives no papyri examples of the present.

          Ῥώννυμι has no presents at all in the N. T., but only the, per-

fect passive imperative ἔρρωσθε (Ac. 15:29).

          Σβέννυμι.  This verb has only three presents in the N. T.

and all of the form, one active σβέννυτε (1 Th. 5:19, Tisch.

ζβενν), two middle σβέννυται (Mk. 9:48) and σβέννυνται (Mt. 25:

8). The LXX has only --μι forms and in the more literary books

(Thackeray, Gr., p. 284).

          Στρώννυμι.  The compounds are with κατα--, ὑπο--.  There are

only two present stems used in the N. T., ἐστρώννυον (Mt. 21:8)

and ὑποστ. (Lu. 19:36). Thus the —μι form is wholly dropped as

in the papyri2 and the LXX.3

          Τίθημι.  For the list of compounds see Aorist (1). This verb has

preferred the —μι form of the present stem as a rule in the κοινή.

The inscriptions4 do so uniformly and the papyri5 use the –ω in-

flection far less than is true of δίδωμι.  In the present indicative D

has τίθι (τίθει) for τίθησι6 (Lu. 8:16). In the imperfect ἐτίθει is read

twice (Ac. 2:47; 2 Cor. 3:13) from τιθέω, as already in the Attic.

So likewise ἐτίθουν (as in Attic) twice (Ac. 3:2; 4:35), but the best

MSS. have ἐτίθεσαν in Mk. 6:56 (אBLΔ) and Ac. 8:17 (אAC,

though B has –οσαν and C –εισαν).7  The reading of B in Ac. 8:17

(ἐτίθοσαν) calls for a present τίθω which the papyri supply against

the idea of Winer-Schmiedel,8 as παρατιθόμενος (BM 239), παρα-

κατατίθομαι (B.0 326).9  Good cursives show that the late language

used τιθέω in the present (Mk. 10:16; 15:17). Cf. ὑποτιθοῦσα in

second century papyrus (B.U. 350).10  In the LXX forms pre-

vail in the present and imperfect (Thackeray, Gr., p. 250).

 

            1 Tisch. reads ἐμπιπρᾶσθαι from πιπράω.  Nestle agrees with W. H.

            3 Thack., Gr., p. 286.

            2 Mayser, Gr., p. 352.

            4 Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 156; Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 176.

            5 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 352 f.   7 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 167.

            6 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 49.              8 P. 121.

            9 Deiss., B. S., p. 192 f.; Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 37.

            10  Ib. Mod. Gk. has θέτω.


             CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)               319

 

          Φημί.  The only N. T. compound is with συν–, none in the pa-

pyri according to Mayser.1  In the papyri φάσκω (lengthened

form) is usually employed for the participle and infinitive2 of

φημί.  The participle is so used in the N. T. (Ac. 24:9; Ro. 1:

22).  Σύνφημι appears only once (Ro. 7:16). The —μι inflection

is uniform in φημί both in the present and the imperfect (aorist).

The only forms in the N. T. are φημί (1 Cor. 7:29), φησίν (Mt.

13:29), φασίν (Ro. 3:8), and the common ἔφη (Mt. 4:7). It is

regular –μι in the LXX.

          Χρή.  This impersonal verb had a poetic infinitive χρῆναι of the

--μι inflection, but Veitch (p. 627) and L. and S. get it from χράω.

At any rate χρή is found only once in the N. T. (Jas. 3:10), δεῖ

having supplanted it. Mayser does not find it in the papyri nor

Nachmanson. and Schweizer in the inscriptions.

          3. Some —μι Perfects. There are only three verbs that show the

active perfects without (κ)α in the N. T. (mere root, athematic).

          θνήσκω.  The compounds are ἀπο-- (very common), συν-απο--

(rare). The uncompounded verb occurs nine times and forms

the perfect regularly as an –ω verb (τέθνηκα), save that in Ac. 14:

19 DEHLP read τεθνάναι instead of τεθνηκέναι, but the –μι form

is not accepted by W. H. The N. T. has always τεθνηκώς, never

τενθνεώς.  In the LXX these shorter second perfect forms occur a

few times in the more literary books (Thackeray, Gr., pp. 253, 270).

They show “a partial analogy to verbs in –μι," (Blass, Gr., p. 50).

          Οἶδα  is a —μι perfect in a few forms (ἴσμεν, ἴστε) from root ιδ– (cf.

Latin vid-eo Greek εἶδον). The word is very common in the N. T.

and σύνοιδα is found twice (Ac. 5:2; 1 Cor. 4:4). The present per-

fect indicative like the papyri3 usually has οἶδα, οἶδας, οἶδε, οἴδαμεν,

ατε, --ασιν, which was the Ionic inflection and so naturally pre-

vailed in the κοινή.  Three times indeed the literary Attic ἴστε ap-

pears (Jas. 1:19; Eph. 5:5; Heb. 12:17). The passage in James

may be imperative instead of indicative.  In Ac. 26:4 ἴσασιν (lit-

erary Attic also) is read. The imperfect also runs ᾔδειν, ᾔδεις, etc.

 Ἤιδεισαν (Mk. 1:34; 14:40) is like ἱστήκεισαν (Rev. 7:11).4  The

other modes go regularly εἰδῶ (Mt. 9:6), εἰδέναι (1 Th. 5:12),

εἰδώς (Mt. 12:25). The LXX usage is in accord with the N. T.

Cf. Thackeray, Gr., p. 278.

          Ἵστημι.  See Aorist (1) for compounds. The second perfect is

in the N.T.    the infinitive ἑστάναι (Lu. 13:25; Ac. 12:14;

 

            1 Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 355.      2 Ib. So inscr., Nachm., p. 157

            3 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 372.

            4 Cf. W.-Sch., p. 114 f. Neither οἶσθα nor ᾔδεισθα appears in the N. T.


320        A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

1 Cor. 10:12) and the participle ἑστώς (Mt. 20:3, 6, etc.) though

ἑστηκώς (—ω form) also sometimes (Mk. 13:14; 15:35, etc.), ἑστῶσα

(1 Cor. 7:26; 2 Pet. 3:5), ἑστός (Mt. 24:15; Rev. 14:1) although

ἑστηκός also (Rev. 5:6 text, W. H. marg. –ώς). The same variation

occurs in the papyri. Curiously enough the earlier LXX books

show less of the short perfect than the later ones and the N. T.

Thackeray (Gr., p. 253) suggests an "Atticistic reversion" for a

while. The form ἕστακα (papyri also) belongs to the –ω  form as

well as the late present στήκω from the perfect stem. These —μι

perfects of  ἵστημι in are always intransitive, while ἕστηκα is intransi-

tive and ἕστακα is transitive.2  This in brief is the story of the —μι

verbs in the N. T.3  The new transitive perfect ἕστακα is common

in the κοινή from second century B.C. onwards. Cf. Schweizer,

Perg. Inschr., p. 185; Mayser, Gr., p. 371.

          V. The Modes (ἐγκλίσεις). The meaning and use of the modes

or moods belongs to syntax. We have here to deal briefly with

any special items that concern the differentiation of the modes

from each other by means of mode-signs. There is no clearly

proper method of approaching the study of the verb. One can

begin with tense, voice and then mode or vice versa. The first is

probably the historical order to a certain extent, for the matter is

complicated. Some tenses are later than others; the passive voice

is more recent than the other two, the imperative as a complete

system is a late growth. Since no purely historical treatment is

possible by reason of this complicated development, a practical

treatment is best. There are reasons of this nature for taking

up modes first which do not apply to syntax. The two main

ideas in a verb are action and affirmation. The state of the action

is set forth by the tense, the relation of the action to the subject

by voice, the affirmation by mode. Tense and voice thus have

to do with action and mode with affirmation. Mode deals only

with the manner of the affirmation. The same personal endings

used for voice limit the action (hence finite verbs) in person and

number.

          (a) THE NUMBER OF THE MOODS OR MODES (Modi). This is

not so simple a matter as it would at first appear. Modern gram-

marians generally agree in declining to call infinitives, participles

and the verbal adjectives in —τός and —τέος moods. Some refuse

to call the indicative a mood, reserving the term for the variations

 

            1 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 370 f.               2 Ib. Cf. W.-Sch., p. 119.

            3 See Hoffmann, Die griech. Dial., Bd. II, pp. 572 ff., for —μι verbs in North

Achaia. For the "strong" perfects, like γέγονα, see VII, (g), 2.


              CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)            321

 

from the indicative as the normal verb by means of mode-signs.

Thus Clyde1 thinks of "only two moods, viz. the subjunctive

and the optative, because, these only possess, in combination with

the personal endings, a purely modal element." There is point

in that, and yet the indicative and imperative can hardly be

denied the use of the term. Jannaris2 admits three moods; in-

dicative, subjunctive and imperative. He follows Donaldson3 in

treating the subjunctive and optative as one mood. Others, like

Monro,4 find the three in the subjunctive, optative and impera-

tive. Once again five moods are seen in early Greek by Riemann

and Goelzer5: the indicative, injunctive, subjunctive, optative,

imperative. On the injunctive see Brugmann, Griechische Gram-

matik, p. 332, though he does not apply the term mode to the

indicative. So Hirt, Handbuch, p. 421 f. Moulton6 admits this

primitive division, though declining to call the indicative a mode

save when it is a "modus irrealis." The injunctive is no longer

regarded as a separate mood, and yet it contributed so much to

the forms of the imperative that it has to be considered in an his-

torical review. The indicative can only be ruled out when it is

regarded as the standard verb and the moods as variations. Cer-

tainly it is best to let the indicative go in also. The modern

Greek, having no optative, has a special conditional mode (ὑποθε-

τική). Cf. Sanskrit. Indeed, the future indicative is considered

by some grammarians as a separate mode. Cf. Thompson,

Syntax of Attic Greek, p. 494; Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 151.

Thumb accepts the four modes in modern Greek (Handbook,

p. 115).

          (b) THE DISTINCTIONS BETWEEN THE MOODS. These are not

absolute, as will be seen, either in form or in syntax. The indica-

tive and the imperative blend in some forms, the subjunctive

and the indicative are alike in others, the injunctive is largely

merged into the imperative and subjunctive, while the subjunc-

tive and optative are closely akin and in Latin blend into one.

Greek held on to the optative with separate values to each

mood.7  Moulton8 indeed despairs of our being able to give the

primitive root-idea of each mood. That subject belongs to

 

            1 Gk. Synt., p. 62. Cf. Hirt, Handb. etc., p. 417.

            2 Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 179.                          4 Hom. Gr., p. 49.

            3 New Crat., p. 617 f.                            5 Phonet., p. 455.

            6 Prol., p. 164 f. Farrar (Gk. Synt., p. 45) refers to Protagoras as the one

who first distinguished the moods.

            7 Giles, Man., p. 459.                            8 Prol., p. 164,


322   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

syntax, but the history of the mode-forms is in harmony with

this position. As with the cases so with the moods: each mood

has fared differently in its development and long history. Not

only does each mood perform more functions than one, but

the same function may sometimes be expressed by several1

moods. The names themselves do not cover the whole ground

of each mood. The indicative is not the only mood that indi-

cates, though it does it more clearly than the others and it is

used in questions also. The subjunctive not merely subjoins, but

is used in independent sentences also. The optative is not merely

a wish, but was once really a sort of past subjunctive. The im-

perative has the best name of any, though we have to explain

some forms as "permissive" imperatives, and the indicative and

subjunctive, not to say injunctive, invade the territory of the im-

perative."  It is probable, but not demonstrable, that the indica-

tive was the original verb-form, from which the, others were

evolved by morphological changes" (Thompson, Syntax of Attic

Greek, p. 494). The origin of the mode-signs cannot yet be ex-

plained.

          (c) THE INDICATIVE (ὁριστικὴ ἔγκλισις). There is indeed little

to say as to the form of the indicative since it has no mode-sign.

It is the mode that is used in all the Indo-Germanic languages

unless there is a special reason to use one of the others. In fact

it is the normal mode in speech. It is probably the earliest

and the one from which the others are derived. Per contra it

may be argued that emotion precedes passionless intellection.

The indicative continues always to be the most frequent and per-

sists when others, like the injunctive and optative, die. It is the

only mode that uses all the tenses in Sanskrit and Greek. In the

Sanskrit, for instance, the future is found only in the indicative (as

in Greek save in the optative in indirect discourse to represent

a future indicative of the direct) and the perfect appears only in

the indicative and participle, barring many examples of the other

modes in the early Sanskrit (Vedas). In the Sanskrit the modes are

commonest with the aorist and the present.2 And in Greek the

imperfect and past perfect never got beyond the indicative. The

future barely did so, never in the subjunctive till the Byzantine

period. The perfect subjunctive and optative, not to say impera-

tive, were always a rarity outside of the periphrastic forms and

 

            1 Clyde, Gk. Synt., p. 62. Cf. Kohlmann, Uber die Modi des griech. and

des lat. Verbums (1883).

            2 Whitney, Sans. Gr., p. 201.

 


           CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                  323

 

in the κοινή have practically vanished.1  Thus we can clearly see

the gradual growth of the modes. In modern English we have

almost dropped the subjunctive and use instead the indicative.

In the modern Greek the indicative survives with as much vigor

as ever. The N. T. peculiarities of the indicative can best be

treated under Syntax. It may be here remarked, however, that

besides the regular indicative forms a periphrastic conjugation

for all the tenses of the indicative appears in the N. T. The

present is thus found as ἐστὶν προσαναπληροῦσα (2 Cor. 9:12), the

perfect as ἐστὶν πεπραγμένον (Ac. 26:26), the imperfect as ἦν διδά-

σκων (Lu. 5:17), the past perfect as ἦσαν προεωρακότες (Ac. 21:29),

even the aorist as ἦν βληθείς (Lu. 23:19), the future as ἔσεσθε λα-

λοῦντες (1 Cor. 14:9), the future perfect as ἔσομαι πεποιθώς (Heb.

2:13). This widening of the range of the periphrastic conjuga-

tion is seen also in the LXX. Cf. Thackeray, Gr., p. 195.

          (d) THE SUBJUNCTIVE (ὑποτακτική). The function of the sub-

junctive as of the other modes will be discussed under Syntax.

Changes come in function as in form. Each form originally had

one function which varied with the course of time. But the bond

between form and function is always to be noted.2  The German

grammarians (Blass, Hirt, Brugmann, etc.) call this the conjunc-

tive mode.  Neither conjunctive nor subjunctive is wholly good,

for the indicative and the optative both fall often under that

technical category.3 It is in the Greek that mode-building reaches

its perfection as in no other tongue.4 But even in the Greek sub-

junctive we practically deal only with the aorist and present

tenses, and in the Sanskrit the subjunctive rapidly dies out save

in the first person as an imperative.5  In Homer ἴμεν is indicative6

and ἴομεν is subjunctive so that non-thematic stems make the

subjunctive with the thematic vowel o/ε.  Thematic stems made

the subjunctive with a lengthened form of it ω/η.  Cf. in the Ionic,

Lesbian, Cretan inscriptions7 forms like ἀμείψεται.  The same thing

appears in Homer also in the transition period.8  Jannaris9 in-

deed calls the aorist subjunctive a future subjunctive because he

 

            1 See discussion bet. Profs. Harry and Sonnenschein in Cl. Rev., 1905-6.

Cf. also La Roche, Beitr. zur griech. Gr., 1893; Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 197.

            2 For contrary view see Burton, N. T. Moods and Tenses, p. I.

            3 Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 45 f.

            4 Bd. II, p. 40.                           5 Giles, Man., p. 458 f.

            6 Ib., p. 459. In the Boeotian dial. the subj. does not appear in simple

sentences (Claflin, Synt. of Bmotian, etc., p. 73)

            7 Riem. and Goelzer, Phonet., p. 456 f.

            8 Monro, Hom. Gr., p. 49.                     9 Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 179.


324    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

conceives of the aorist as essentially past, a mistaken idea. The

subjunctive does occur more freely in Homer than in the later

Greek, partly perhaps because of the fact that the line of dis-

tinction between it and the indicative (especially the aorist sub-

junctive and the future indicative) had not been sharply drawn.1

Add to this the fact that ποιήσῃ and ποιήσει came to be pronounced

exactly alike and one can see how the confusion would come again.

Cf. ἵνα δώσει (δώσῃ) in the N. T. MSS.2  On the short vocal ending

of the subjunctive and its connection with the indicative one may

recall ἔδομαι, πίομαι, φάγομαι, in the N. T., futures which have a

strange likeness to the Homeric subjunctive ἴομεν. They are really

subjunctives in origin. It is still a mooted question whether the

future indicative is always derived from the aorist subjunctive

or in part corresponds to the Sanskrit sya.3 The only aorist

subjunctives that call for special comment in the N. T. are the

forms γνοῖ and δοῖ, for which see this chapter, iv, (d), 1.4  There are

parallels in the papyri as is there shown. The form ὄψησθε in Lu.

13:28 (supported by AL, etc., against ὄψεσθε, BD) is probably a

late aorist form like ἔδωσα (δώσῃ) rather than the Byzantine future

subjunctive.5 As already pointed out, the examples in N. T. MSS.

of the Byzantine future subjunctive are probably due to the

blending of o with ω, ει with , ε with η, etc.  N. T. MSS., for in-

stance, show examples of ἀρκεσθησώμεθα (1 Tim. 6:8), γνώσωνται

(Ac. 21:24), γενήσησθε (Jo. 15:8), δώσωσιν (Lu. 20:10; Rev. 4:

9), εὑρήσωσιν (Rev. 9:6), ζήσηται (Mk. 5:23), ἥξωσιν (Rev. 3:9),

καυθήσωμαι (1 Cor. 13:3), κερδηθήσωνται (1 Pet. 3:1) , πορέσωμαι

(Ro. 15:24), σωθήσηται (Ro. 11:26), etc. It is to be admitted,

however, that the Byzantine future subjunctive was in use at the

age of our oldest Greek N. T. MSS. Cf. Winer-Schmiedel, p. 107.

Hort dismisses them all (Appendix, "Notes on Orthography,"

p. 172). The present subjunctive διδοῖ, is parallel to δοῖ.  No ex-

 

            1 Sterrett, Hom. II., Dial. of Homer, p. 27 (1907). Cf. Moulton, The Suffix

of the Subj. (Am. Jour. of Philol., 10, 185 f.); La Roche, Die conj. and opt.

Formen des Perfects (Beitr. I, pp. 161 ff.).

            2 Cf. already in the Attic inscr. the spelling of the subj. in –ει. Meisterh.,

Att. Inscr., p. 166. For this phenomenon in the pap. see Mayser, Gr. d.

griech. Pap., p. 324.

            3 Cf. Henry, Comp. Gr. of Gk. and Lat., Elliott's transi., 1890, p. 115 f. and

note; Giles, Comp. Philol., p. 459.

            4 Cf. Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 37, and 1904, p. 111, for subjs. ἀποδοῖ,

ἐπιγνοῖ in the pap.

            5 Cf. ἀρξησθε in Lu. 13:25, but ἄρξεσθε (BEG, etc.) and ἄρξησθε (אAD, etc.)

in verse 26.


             CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)           325

 

ample of the periphrastic present subjunctive appears in the

N. T. In Gal. 4 :17 (ἵνα ζηλοῦτε) the contraction of οη is like that of

the indicative οε,1 unless indeed, as is more probable, we have here

(cf. also 1 Cor. 4:6, φυσιοῦσθε) the present indicative used with is

as in 1 Jo. 5:20 (γινώσκομεν).  In Gal. 6:12 ACFGKLP read ἵνα μὴ

διώκονται. Cf. Ro. 14:19. Cf. Homer. The perfect subjunctive

does not exist in the N. T. save in the second perfect εἰδῶ (ἵνα

εἰδῶμεν, 1 Cor. 2:12) and the periphrastic form as ᾖ πεποιηκώς (Jas.

5:15. Cf. πεποιθότες ὦμεν, 2 Cor. 1:9) and usually in the passive

as ᾖ πεπληρωμένη (Jo. 16:24). In Lu. 19:40 Rec. with most MSS.

read κεκράξονται (LXX). In the papyri ἦν sometimes is subjunctive

=ἦι. Cf. Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 38, 1904, p. 108; Prolegom-

ena, pp. 49, 468. He cites ὅσα ἐὰν ἦν in Gen. 6:17E. But the

modern Greek constantly uses ἐάν with the indicative, and we find

it in the N. T. and papyri (Deissmann, Bible Studies, pp. 203 ff.).

Some of the papyri examples may be merely the indicative with

ἐάν, but others undoubtedly give the irrational ν. In the LXX the

subjunctive shows signs of shrinkage before the indicative with

ἐάν, ὅταν, ἵνα  (Thackeray, Gr., p. 194).

          (e) THE OPTATIVE (εὐκτική).  Like the subjunctive the opta-

tive is poorly named, as it is much more than the wishing mood.

As Giles2 remarks, difference of formation is more easily discerned

in these two moods than difference of meaning. In the Sanskrit

the subjunctive (save in first person) gave way before the

optative, as in Latin the optative largely (sim originally op-

tative) disappeared before the subjunctive.3 The Greek, as

already stated, is the only language that preserved both the

subjunctive and the optative,4 and finally in the modern

Greek the optative has vanished,  μὴ γένοιτο being merely "the

coffin of the dead optative."5 It is doubtful if the optative was

ever used much in conversation even in Athens (Farrar, Greek

Syntax, p. 142), and the unlearned scribes of the late Greek blun-

 

            1 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 48. But in 1 Cor. 16 : 2 we have regularly εὐο-

δῶται (marg. εὐοδωθῇ). Hort (Notes on Orth., pp. 167, 172) is uncertain whether

εὐοδῶται is perf. ind. or subj. (pres. or perf.). He cites παραζηλοῦμεν (1 Cor.

10:22) and διαβεβαιοῦνται (1 Tim. 1:7) as possible pres. subjs.

            2 Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 458. Cf. Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 337, for list

of works on optative.

            3 Whitney, Sans. Gr., p. 202. Giles, Comp. Philol., p. 503 f.

            4 Giles, ib., p. 459. On the blending of subj. and opt. in Ital., Germ. and

Balto-Slav. tongues see Brug., Kurze vergl. Gr., 2. Tl., p. 585. Cf. the Byz.

Gk. mingling of subj. and ind. in Hatz., Einl., p. 216 f.

            5 Clyde, Gk. Synt., p. 84.


326     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

dered greatly when they did use it (Jannaris, Hist. Gk. Gr., p.

204). Moulton (Prol., p. 240) agrees with Thumb that the opta-

tive was doomed from the very birth of the κοινή and its disappear-

ance was not due to itacism between οι, and , which was late.

Clyde,1  however, suggests that the blending of sound between οι  

and had much to do with the disappearance of the optative.

But apart from this fact the distinction was never absolutely

rigid, for in Homer both moods are used in much the same way.2

And even in the N. T., as in Homer and occasionally later, we

find an instance of the optative after a present indicative, οὐ παύο-

μαι εὐχαριστῶν ἵνα δῴη (Eph. 1:17, text of W. H., subj. δώῃ or δῷ

in marg., question of editing). Jannaris3 calls the Greek optative

the subjunctive of the past or the secondary subjunctive (cf. Latin).

Like the indicative (and originally the subjunctive) the non-the-

matic and thematic stems have a different history. The non-the-

matic stems use ιη (ιε) and the thematic οι (composed of ο and ι).

The σ aorist has α+ι besides the form in —εια. This two-fold

affix for the optative goes back to the earlier Indo-Germanic

tongues4 (Sanskrit ya and i).  The optative was never common in

the language of the people, as is shown by its rarity in the Attic

inscriptions.5 The Boeotian dialect inscriptions show no optative

in simple sentences, and Dr. Edith Claflin reports only two ex-

amples in subordinate clauses.6 The optative is rare also in the

inscriptions of Pergamum.7 The same thing is true of the pa-

pyri.8 In the N. T. the future optative no longer appears, nor does

the perfect. The classic idiom usually had the perfect subjunctive

and optative in the periphrastic forms.9  Examples of the peri-

phrastic perfect optative survive in the papyri,10 but not in the

N. T. There are only sixty-seven examples of the optative in the

N. T. Luke has twenty-eight and Paul thirty-one (not including

Eph. 1:17), whereas John, Matthew and James do not use it at all.

Mark and Hebrews show it only once each, Jude twice and Peter

four times. The non-thematic aorist appears in the N. T. some-

times, as δῴη (perhaps by analogy). So W. H. read without reser-

vation in 2 Th. 3:16; Ro. 15:5; 2 Tim. 1:16, 18. This is the

 

            1 Gr. S., p. 85.   2 Monro, Hom. Gr., p. 219.       3 Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 179.

            4 Riem. and Goelzer, Phonet.,p. 461. Cf. K.-BI., Bd. II, p.40 f.; Brug., Gk.

Gr., pp. 337 ff.                                                              5 Meisterh., Att. Inschr., p. 166.

            6 Synt. of Bceot. Dial. Inscr., pp. 77, 81.

            7 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 191.

            8 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 326.                  9 K.-B1., Bd. II, p. 99.

            10 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 327.


             CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                  327

 

preferred text in Eph. 1:17; 2 Tim. 2:25, but in Jo. 15:16; Eph.

3:16, W. H. read δῷ (subjunctive).  In Eph. 1:17 the margin has

δώῃ (subjunctive) also.1  The inscriptions2 and the papyri3 show

the same form (--ῴην instead of —οίην). In Eph. 1:17 Moulton4

considers δώῃ (subjunctive) absolutely necessary in spite of the

evidence, for δῳη (optative).  But see above. The aorist optative

in —αι is the usual form, as κατευθύναι (1 Th. 3:11), πλεονάσαι καὶ

περισσεύσαι (1 Th. 3:12), καταρτίσαι (Heb. 13:21), etc., not the

AEolic-Attic —ειε.  So also ποιήσαιεν (Lu. 6:11), but ψηλαφήσειαν

(Ac. 17:27) according to the best MSS. (B, etc.).5  Blass6 com-

ments on the fact that only one example of the present optative

appears in the simple sentence, viz. εἴη (Ac. 8:20), but more

occur in dependent clauses, as πάσχοιτε (1 Pet. 3:14). The opta-

tive is rare in the LXX save for wishes. Thackeray, Gr., p. 193.

          (f) THE IMPERATIVE (προστακτική).  The imperative is a later

development, in language and is in a sense a makeshift like the

passive voice. It has no mode-sign (cf. indicative) and uses only

personal suffixes.7  These suffixes have a varied and interesting

history.

          1. The Non-Thematic Stem. An early imperative was just

the non-thematic present stem.8 In the imperative the aorist is

a later growth, as will be shown directly. Forms like ἵστη, δείκνυ

are pertinent.

          2. The Thematic Stem. Cf. ἄγε, λέγε.  This is merely an in-

terjection (cf. vocative λόγε).9  This is the root pure and simple

with the thematic vowel which is here regarded as part of the

stem as in the vocative λόγε.  The accent εἰπέ, ἐλθέ, εὑρέ, ἰδέ, λαβέ

was probably the accent of all such primitive imperatives at the

beginning of a sentence.10 We use exclamations as verbs or nouns.11

 

            1 Hort, Intr. to N. T. Gk., p. 168. Cf. LXX.

            2 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 191.

            3 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 326 f.; Cronert, Mem. Gr. Hercul., p. 215 f.;

Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1904, p. 111 f. Δοῖ also appears in pap. as opt. as well as

subj.

            4 Prol., p. 55. Cf. Blass' hesitation, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 49 f.

            5 Cf. W.-Sch., p. 114. In the LXX the form in —ειε is very rare. Cf. Hel-

bing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 68 f. The LXX has also —οισαν, --αισαν 3d plu. Cf.

Thack., Gr., p. 215. Opt. is common in 4 Macc.

            6 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p 220.                       8 Giles, Comp. Philol., p. 464.

            7 K.-B1., Bd. II, p. 41.                           9 Ib., p. 269.

            10 Ib., p. 464. Cf. Brug., Grundr., II, § 958; Riem. and Goelzer, Phonet.,

p. 359. It is coming more and more to be the custom to regard the thematic

vowel as part of the root. Giles, Comp. Philol., p. 415.

            11 Moulton, Prol., p. 171 f.


328     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

In Jas. 4:13 we have ἄγε νῦν οἱ λέγοντες, an example that will il-

lustrate the origin of ἄγε.  Note the common interjectional use

of ἴδε (so N. T.).  Cf. also accent of λάβε.  The adverb δεῦρο (Jo.

11:43,  Λάζαρε δεῦρο ἔξω) has a plural like the imperative in —τε

(Mt. 11:28, δεῦτε πρός με πάντες οἱ κοπιῶντες).

          3. The Suffix –θι.  The non-thematic stems also used the suf-

fix –θι (cf. Sanskrit dhi, possibly an adverb; cf. "you there!"). So

γνῶθι for second aorist active, ἴσθι for present active, φάνηθι, λύ-

θητι for second and first aorist passive.1  In the N. T. sometimes

this –θι is dropped and the mere root used as in ἀνάβα (Rev. 4:

1),  μετάβα (Mt. 17:20), ἀνὰστα (Eph. 5:14; Ac. 12:7) according

to the best MSS.2  The plural ἀνάβατε (Rev. 11:12) instead of

ἀνάβητε is to be noted also. The LXX MSS. exhibit these short

forms (ἀνάστα, ἀπόστα, but not ἀνάβα) also. Cf. Helbing, Gr. d.

Sept., p. 70; Con. and Stock, Sel. from LXX, p. 46. See ἔμβα,

κατάβα, etc., in Attic drama. But ἀνάστηθι (Ac. 8:26), ἐπίστηθι

2 Tim. 4:2), μετάβηθι (Jo. 7:3), κατάβηθι (Lu. 19:5), προσανάβηθι

(Lu. 14:10) occur as usual. In the papyri –θι has practically

disappeared save in ἴσθι.3

          4. The Suffix –τω.  It is probably the ablative of the demon-

strative pronoun (Sanskrit tad). It is used with non-thematic

(ἔστω) and thematic stems (λεγέ-τω). The Latin4 uses this form for

the second person also (agito). In the case of ἔστω (Jas. 1:19)

the N. T. has also ἤτω (Jas. 5:12).5  The form καταβάτω (Mt. 24:

17) has the unlengthened stem, but ἐλθάτω is like the first aorist

ἐπιστρεψάτω.  The N. T. like the κοινή generally6 has the plural only

in τωσαν which is made by the addition of σαν to τω.  Cf. ἔστωσαν  

(Lu. 12:35). The middle σθω (of uncertain origin)7 likewise has

the plural in the N. T. in σθωσαν.  So προσευξάσθωσαν (Jas. 5:14).

This is true of the plural of both present and aorist as in papyri

and inscriptions. So the LXX cf. Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 69 f.

          5. The Old Injunctive Mood. It is responsible for more of the

imperative forms than any other single source. "The injunctive

 

            1 Cf. Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 341.             2 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 168.

            3 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 327.

            4 Giles, Comp. Philol., p. 466. Cf. Brug., Gk. Gr., p. 341.

            5 So pap. and late inscr., Moulton, Prol., p. 56.

            6 Cf. for pap. Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 327. Cf. Brug., Griech. Gr.,

p. 343. It is after iii/B.C. that –τωσαν completely supplants —ντων. Cf.

Meisterh., Att. Inschr., p. 167. Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 149. Schweizer,

Perg. Inschr., p. 167.

            7 Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 343 (he cfs. ἑπέσθω with ἑπέσθαι); Hirt, Handb. etc., p.

430. Giles (Comp. Philol., p. 467 f.) gets it from τω by analogy of τε and σθε.


                 CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                329

 

was simply an imperfect or aorist indicative without the aug-

ment."1  So λαβοῦ corresponds to ἐ-λάβεσο, λάβεσθε was ἐ-λάβεσθε,

λήφθητε was ἐ-λήφθητε, λάβετε was ἐ-λάβετε.2  So σχές (ἔ-σχες) may

be compared with ἔ-λυες (θίγες with ἔθιγες), but δός, ἕς, θές Brug-

mann considers of uncertain origin, possibly subjunctive.3 Forms

like λυέτε may be injunctive (ἐ-λύετε)4 or merely the indicative.5  

Note the difficulty of deciding on imperative and indicative in

forms like ἐραυνᾶτε (Jo. 5:39), πιστεύετε (Jo. 14:1) ἴστε (Jas. 1:

19). But in these cases, except Jo. 5:39, we probably have the

imperative. In the case of ἴστε the N. T. indicative would be

οἴδατε.6  In the N. T. κάθου (Jas. 2:3) is the shorter form of

κάθησο, though not by phonetic processes. The injunctive survives

to some extent in the Sanskrit and borders on the subjunctive

and the imperative and was specially common in prohibitions.7  

It consists of the bare stem with the personal endings.

          6. Forms in –σαι.   These, like βάπτισαι (Ac. 22:16), are prob-

ably just the infinitive sigmatic aorist.8  Cf. δεῖξαι. Cf. also Latin

legimini with the Homeric infinitive λεγέμεναι.9  The infinitive is

common in the Greek inscriptions in the sense of an imperative.10

In the N. T. as in the papyri this use is not infrequent. So

χαίρειν (Jas. 1:1), στοιχεῖν (Ph. 3:16), μὴ συναναμίγνυσθαι (2 Th.

3:14). In modern Greek instead of the imperative in —σαι the

form λύσου occurs with the sense of λύθητι.11

          7. The Form in —σον (λῦσον).  It is difficult of explanation. It

may be injunctive or a verbal substantive.12 The N. T. has εἰπον  

(Mt. 4:3) rather than εἰπέ (Mt. 8:8) in about half the instances

in W. H.13  This is merely in keeping with the common κοινή cus-

tom of using first aorist endings with second aorist stems. The

form εἰπόν is traced to the Syracusan dialect.14

          8. First Person. The Sanskrit used the first person subjunctive

as imperative of the first person. Cf. English "charge we the foe."

The Greek continued this idiom. But already in the N. T. the

use of the imperative ἄφες (Cf. modern Greek as and third person

subjunctive) is creeping in as a sort of particle with the subjunc-

tive. So ἄφες, ἐκβάλω (Mt. 7:4). Cf. English "let" with infini-

 

            1 Moulton, Prol., p. 165.            2 Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 332.      3 Ib.     4 Ib.

            5 Hirt, Handb., p. 429 f. 6 W.-Sch.,p. 119.          7 Moulton, Prol., p.165.

            8 Riem. and Goelzer, Phonet., p. 372. Cf. Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 345.

            9 Giles, Comp. Philol., p. 468; Hirt, Handb., p. 430; Wright, Comp. Gk.

Gr., p. 334.                                           10 Moulton, Prol., p. 179 f.

            11 V. and D., Handb., p. 81. Cf. Dieterich, Unters., p. 205.

            12 Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 345; Hirt, Handb., p. 427.

            13 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 164.             14 K.-B1., Bd. II, p. 45.


330    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

tive. Cf. An δεῦτε ἀποκτείνωμεν in Mt. 21:38.  Besides ἄγε, δεῦτε we

may have ὅρα with the subjunctive (Mt. 8:4), βλέπετε with future

indicative (Heb. 3:12).

          9. Prohibitions. Here the aorist subjunctive with μή held its

own against the aorist imperative quite successfully. In the

Sanskrit Veda the negative ma is never found with the impera-

tive, but only with the subjunctive.1 Later the Sanskrit uses the

present imperative with ma, but not the aorist. This piece of

history in the Greek2 is interesting as showing how the impera-

tive is later than the other modes and how the aorist imperative

never won its full way into prohibitions. However, in the N. T.

as in the inscriptions and papyri, we occasionally find the aorist

imperative with μή in 3d person. So μὴ καταβάτω (Mt. 24:17).

          10. Perfect Imperative. In the Sanskrit the imperative is

nearly confined to the present tense. The perfect imperative is

very rare in the N. T. (only the two verbs cited) as in all Greek.

We find ἔρρωσθε (Ac. 15:29; in 23:30 W. H. reject ἔρρωσο) and

περίμωσο (Mk. 4:39). The perfect imperative also occurs in the

periphrastic form as ἔστωσαν περιεζωμέναι, (Lu. 12:35).

          11. Periphrastic Presents. Other periphrastic forms of the im-

perative are ἴσθι εὐνοῶν (Mt. 5:25), ἴσθι ἔχων (Lu. 19:17), μὴ γίνεσθε

ἑτεροζυγοῦντες (2 Cor. 6:14) and even ἴστε γινώσκοντες (Eph. 5:5).

          12. Circumlocutions. But even so other devices (see Syntax)

are used instead of the imperative, as the future indicative (ἀγα-

πήσεις, Mt. 5:43);  ἵνα and the subjunctive (Eph. 5:33); a ques-

tion of impatience like οὐ παύσῃ διαστρέφων (Ac. 13:10), etc.

               VI. The Voices (διαθέσεις).

          (a) TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE. The point is that "tran-

sitive" is not synonymous with "active." Transitive verbs may

belong to any voice, and intransitive verbs to any voice. Take

ἐδίδαξα, ἐδιδαξάμην, ἐδιδάχθην, which may be transitive in each voice.

On the other hand εἰμί γίνομαι, ἐλύθην, are intransitive. The same

verb may be transitive or intransitive in the same voice, as ἄγω.

A verb may be transitive in Greek while intransitive in English,

as with καταγελάω and vice versa.  This matter properly belongs

to syntax, but it seems necessary to clear it up at once before we

proceed to discuss voice. Per se the question of transitiveness

belongs to the idea of the verb itself, not to that of voice. We

 

            1 Monro, Hom. Cr., p. 240.

            2 Ib.; cf. also Delbruck, Synt. Forsch., IV, p. 120. Hence Delbruck argues

that the aorist imper. did not come into use until after the pres. imper. The

imper. was originally only positive, not negative.


          CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                         331

 

actually find Green1 making four voices, putting a neuter (οὐδέ-

τερον) voice (using active and middle endings) on a par with the

others! The Stoic. grammarians2 did speak of a neuter voice as

neither active (κατηγόρημα ὀρθόν) nor passive (ὕπτιον), meaning the

middle (μέση).  Jannaris3 confounds transitiveness with voice,

though he properly says (p. 356) that "the active voice is usually

transitive," i.e. verbs in the active voice, not the voice itself.

Even Whitney4 speaks of the antithesis between transitive and

reflexive action being effaced in Sanskrit. Was that antithesis

ever present? Farrar5 speaks of verbs with an "active meaning,

but only a passive or middle form," where by "active" he means

transitive. Even the active uses verbs which are either transi-

give (ἀλλοπαθής) or intransitive (αὐτοπαθής). So may the other

voices. If we clearly grasp this point, we shall have less difficulty

with voice which does not deal primarily with the transitive idea.

That belongs rather to the verb itself apart from voice.6 On

transitive and intransitive verbs in modern Greek see Thumb,

Handb., p. 112.

          (b) THE NAMES OF THE VOICES. They are by no means good.

The active (ἐνεργετική) is not distinctive, since the other voices ex-

press action also. This voice represents the subject as merely act-

ing. The Hindu grammarians called the active parasmai padam

(‘a word for another,') and the middle (μέση) atmane padam (‘a

word for one's self’).7  There is very little point in the term mid-

dle since it does not come in between the active and the passive.

Indeed reflexive is a better designation of the middle voice if

direct reflexive is not meant. That is rare. The middle voice

stresses the interest of the agent. Cf. Moulton, Prolegomena,

p. 155 f. In truth we have no good name for this voice. Passive

(παθητική) is the best term of all, for here the subject does experi-

ence the action even when the passive verb is transitive, as in

ἐδιδάχθην. But this point encroaches upon syntax.

 

            1 Handb. to the Gk. of N. T., p. 55.

            2 Cf. Dion. Thr., p. 886. Cf. Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 40.

            3 Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 179.

            4 Sans. Gr., p. 200.

            5 Gk. Synt., p. 41. Cf. Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 467 f.

            6 Giles, Comp. Philol., p. 476: "The distinction between the transitive and

intransitive meanings of the active voice depends upon the nature of the root

in each case."

            7 Whitney, Sans. Gr., p. 200. Cf. also Brug., Kurze vergl. Gr., II, p. 492.

See also Clark, Comp. Gr., p. 182, for the meaningless term "middle." It is

as active as the "active" voice. Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 119.


332         A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

          (c) THE RELATIVE AGE OF THE VOICES. It is a matter of doubt

as between the active and middle. The passive is known to be a

later development. The Sanskrit passive is the ya class.1  In

Homer the passive has not reached its full development. The pas-

sive future occurs there only twice. The aorist middle is often used

in passive sense (βλῆτο, for instance).2 That is to say, in Homer

the passive uses all the tenses of the middle with no distinct forms

save sometimes in the aorist. In later Greek the future middle (as

τιμήσομαι) continued to be used occasionally in the passive sense.

The aorist passive in fact used the active endings and the future

passive the middle, the passive contributing a special addition in

each case (η, θη, ησ, θησ). Some languages never developed a

passive (Coptic and Lithuanian, for instance), and in modern

English we can only form the passive by means of auxiliary verbs.

Each language makes the passive in its own way. In Latin no

distinction in form exists between the middle and the passive,

though the middle exists as in potior, utor, plangor, etc. Giles3

thinks that the causative middle (like διδάσκομαι, 'get taught') is

the explanation of the origin of the Greek passive. Cf. βάπτισαι

(Ac. 22:16). It is all speculation as between the active and mid-

dle. An old theory makes the middle a mere doubling of the active

(as μα-μι=μαι).4  Another view is that the middle is the original

and the active a shortening due to less stress in accent, or rather

(as in τίθεμαι and τίθημι) the middle puts the stress on the reflexive

ending while the active puts it on the stem.5  But Brugmann6  

considers the whole question about the relation between the per-

sonal suffixes uncertain. Of one thing we may be sure, and that

is that both the active and the middle are very old and long

antedate the passive.

          (d) THE SO-CALLED "DEPONENT " VERBS. These call for a

word (cf. ch. XVII, (k)) at the risk of trespassing on syntax.

Moulton7 is certainly right in saying that the term should be ap-

plied to all three voices if to any. The truth is that it should not

be used at all. As in the Sanskrit8 so in the Greek some verbs

were used in both active and middle in all tenses (like λύω); some

verbs in some tenses in one and some in the other (like βαίνω,

 

            1 Whitney, Sans. Gr., p. 275; Thumb, Handbuch d. Skt., pp. 394ff.

            2 Sterrett, Hom. Il., Dial. of Hom., p. 27.                       4 Clyde, Gk. Syn., p. 55.

            3 Comp. Philol., p. 477.                                     5 Moulton, Prol., p. 152.

            6 Griech. Gr., p. 346. Cf. Kurze vergl. Gr., II, p. 599. Cf. Giles, Comp.

Philol., p. 419.

            7 Prol., p. 153,                                       8 Whitney, Sans. Gr., p. 200.


               CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                      333

 

βήσομαι); some on one voice only (like κεῖμαι). As concerns voice

these verbs were defective rather than deponent.1 Note also the

common use of the second perfect active with middle verbs (ίνομαι

γέγονα).2  A number of verbs sometimes have the future in the

active in the N. T. which usually had it in the middle in the older

Greek. These are: ἀκούσω (Jo. 5:25, 28, etc., but ἀκούσομαι, Ac.

17:32), ἁμαρτήσω (Mt. 18:21), ἀπαντήσω (Mk. 14:13), ἁρπάσω

(Jo. 10:28), βλέψω (Ac. 28:26), γελάσω (Lu. 6:21), διώξω (Mt.

23:34), ζήσω (Jo. 5:25), ἐπιορκήσω (Mt. 5:33, LXX), κλαύσω (Lu.

6:25), κράξω (Lu. 19:40), παίξω (Mk. 10:34), ῥεύσω (Jo. 7:38),

σιωπήσω (Lu. 19:40), σπουδάσω (2 Pet. 1:15), συναντήσω (Lu. 22:

10). But still note ἀποθανοῦμαι, ἔσομαι, ζήσομαι, θαυμάσομαι, λήμψο-

μαι, ὄψομαι, πεσοῦμαι, πίομαι, τέξομαι, φάγομαι, φεύξομαι, etc. Cf.

Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 42 f.; Winer-Schmiedel, p. 107; Moul-

ton, Prol., p. 155. See Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 89 f.; Thackeray,

pp. 231 ff., for illustrations in the LXX. The term "deponent"

arose from the idea that these verbs had dropped the active

voice. Verbs do vary in the use of the voices in different stages

of the language.

          (e) THE PASSIVE SUPPLANTING THE MIDDLE. In Latin the

middle and passive have completely blended and the grammars

speak no more of the Latin middle. Greek indeed is the only

European speech which retains the original middle form and

usage.3 In fact, when we consider other tongues, it is not strange

that the passive made inroads on the middle, but rather that

there was any distinction preserved at all.4 In most modern lan-

guages the middle is represented only by the use of the reflexive

pronoun. The Greek itself constantly uses the active with re-

flexive pronoun and even the middle. Jannaris5 has an interest-

ing sketch of the history of the aorist and future middle and

passive forms, the only forms where the two voices differ. As

already remarked, the old Greek as in Homer6 did not distinguish

sharply between these forms. In Homer the middle is much

more common than in later Greek,7 for the passive has no distinct

form in the future and not always in the aorist. In the modern

Greek the middle has no distinctive form save λύσου (cf. λῦσαι)

 

            1 Brug., Furze vergl. Gr., p. 598; Moulton, Prol., p. 153.

            2 Hirt, Handb., p. 334; Moulton, Prol., p. 154.

            3 Delbrtick, Synt. Forsch., Bd. IV, p. 69.

            4 Clyde, Gk. Synt., p. 55.                      5 Hist. Gk. Gr., pp. 362 ff.

            6 Sterrett, Horn. II., Hom. Dial., p. 27.

            7 Monro, Hom. Gr., p. 7.


334     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

and this is used as passive imperative second singular.1  Else-

where in the aorist and future the passive forms have driven out

the middle. These passive forms are, however, used sometimes

in the middle sense, as was true of ἀπεκρίθη, for instance, in the

N. T. The passive forms maintain the field in modern Greek and

appropriate the meaning of the middle. We see this tendency at

work in the N. T. and the κοινή generally. Since the passive used

the middle forms in all the other tenses, it was natural that in

these two there should come uniformity also.2 The result of this

struggle between the middle and passive in the aorist and future

was an increasing number of passive forms without the distinc-

tive passive idea.3  So in Mt. 10:26 (μὴ φοβηθῆτε αὐτούς) the pas-

sive is used substantially as a middle. Cf. the continued use of

τιμήσομαι as future passive in the earlier Greek as a tendency the

other way. The history of this matter thus makes intelligible

what would be otherwise a veritable puzzle in language. Here is

a list of the chief passive aorists in the N. T. without the passive

idea, the so-called "deponent" passives: ἀπεκρίθην (Mt. 25:9 and

often, as John, Luke chiefly having Attic ἀπεκρίνατο also, Ac.

3:12), διεκρίθην (Ro. 4:20), συνυπεκρίθην (Gal. 2:13), ἀπελογήθην (Lu.

21:14, but see 12:11), ἠγαλλιάθην (Jo. 5:35), ἐγενήθην (Mt. 6:10,

but also ἐγενόμην often, as Ac. 20:18); cf. γέγονα and γεγένημαι,

ἐδεήθην (Lu. 5:12); ἠγέρθην (Lu. 24:34), ἠδυνάσθην (Mk. 7:24,

as New Ionic and LXX) and ἠδυνήθην (Mt. 17:16), διελέχθην (Mk.

9:34), ἐθαυμάσθην (Rev. 13:3, but passive sense in 2 Th. 1:10),

ἐθαμβήθην (Mk. 1:27), ἐνθυμηθείς (Mt. 1:20), μετεμελήθην (Mt. 21:

32), ἐφοβήθην (Mt. 21:46), εὐλαβηθείς (Heb. 11:7), etc. For the

LXX usage see Thackeray, p. 238. The future passives without

certain passive sense are illustrated by the following: ἀνακλιθήσο-

μαι (Mt. 8:11), ἀποκριθήσομαι (Mt. 25:37), ἐπαναπαήσεται (Lu.

10:6), θαυμασθήσομαι (Rev. 17:8), κοιμηθήσομαι (1 Cor. 15:51),

ἐντραπήσονται (Mk. 12:6), μεταμεληθήσομαι (Heb. 7:21), φανήσομαι

(Mt. 24:30), φοβηθήσομαι, (Heb. 13:6).  But we have γενήσομαι,

δυνήσομαι, ἐπιμελήσομαι, πορεύσομαι. Cf. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gr., p.

44 f.; Winer-Schmiedel, p. 108. For the rapid development of this

tendency in later Greek see Hatzidakis, Einl., p. 192 f. See Hel-

bing, Gr. d. Sept., pp. 97-100, and Thackeray, p. 240 f., for simi-

lar phenomena in the LXX. These so-called deponents appear

in modern Greek (Thumb, Handb., p. 113). Cf. ch. XVII, iv, (e) .

 

            1 Thumb, Handb., p. 111. So mod. Gk. has only two voices; V. and D.,

Handb., to Mod. Gk., p. 81.                               2 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 362.

            3 Ib. κοινή exx. are numerous, like ᾑδέσθην, ἐνεθυμήθην, ἐπορεύθην, ἐφοβήθην, etc.


                CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                  335

 

          (f) THE PERSONAL ENDINGS. They are probably pronominal,1

though Brugmann2 does not consider the matter as clear in all

respects. One point to note is the heavy burden that is placed

upon these endings. They have to express voice, person and num-

ber, everything in truth that has to do with the subject. Mode

and tense are indicated otherwise. There was a constant ten-

dency to slough off these personal endings and get back to the

mode and tense-stems. Hence δίδωμι becomes δίδω (papyri) in

late Greek.  Λέγω was originally λέγομι.3

          (g) CROSS-DIVISIONS. These personal endings have two

cross-divisions. The active and middle have a separate list, the

passive having none of its own. Then there is another cleavage

on the line of primary and secondary tenses in the indicative, i.e.

the unaugmented and the augmented tenses. The subjunctive

mode falls in with the primary endings and the optative uses the

secondary endings. But the first person active singular of the

optative has one primary ending (as λύοιμι).4  But may it not be

a reminiscence of the time when there was no distinction between

subjunctive and optative? The imperative has no regular set of

endings, as has already been shown, and does not fall in with

this development, but pursues a line of its own. As a matter of

fact the imperative always refers to the future.

          (h) THE ACTIVE ENDINGS. They have received some modifica-

tion in the N. T. Greek. The imperative can be passed by as

already sufficiently discussed. The disappearance of the  --μι

forms in favour of the –ω inflection has been carefully treated

also, as ἀφίομεν (Lu. 11:4). The subjunctive δοῖ and optative δῴη

have likewise received discussion as well as the optative —αι and

ειε. But some interesting points remain.

          The use of —οσαν instead of –ον is very common in the LXX (as

Jer. 5:23, 26) and was once thought to be purely an Alexandrian

peculiarity (Simcox, Language of the N. T., p. 37). For the

LXX phenomena see Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., pp. 65-67; Con. and

Stock, Sel. from the LXX, p. 32 f. The LXX is the principal

witness to the —οσαν forms (Thackeray, Gr., p. 195), where they

 

            1 Clyde, Gk. Synt., p. 53.                      2 Gk. Gr., p. 346.

            3 Cf. Clyde, Gk. Synt., p. 54. The same thing has happened in Eng.

where the loss is nearly complete save 2d and 3d pers. sing.

            4 It is not worth while here to take time to make a careful discussion of each

of these endings. For the hist. treatment of them see Brug., Griech. Gr.,

pp. 345 ff.; Giles, Comp. Philol., pp. 413 ff.; Riem. and Goelzer, Phonet., pp.

348 ff.


336     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

are exceedingly frequent (ib., pp. 212 ff.). It is not so abundant

outside of the LXX, but the Boeotians used it for the imperfect

and optative.1  Mayser2 has found more examples of it in the

Tebtunis Papyri, both aorist and imperfect, than Moulton3 had

discovered. The inscriptions also show it.4  In the N. T. the con-

tract verb ἐδολιοῦσαν (Ro. 3:13) is a quotation from the LXX.

In Jo. 15:22, 24, the imperfect εἴχοσαν has to be admitted. In

2 Th. 3:6  παρελάβοσαν is read by אAD and W. H. put it in

the margin. The text παρελάβετε is supported by BFG. This

use of the —μι inflection may be compared with the use of τω-σαν

in the imperative. In the modern Greek it is common with con-

tract verbs (cf. LXX) like ἐδολιοῦσαν above. The modern Greek

ἐρωτοῦσα is a new formation (Thumb, Handb., p. 171) modelled

after it.

          Blass5 needlessly hesitates to accept –αν in the present perfect

instead of the usual —ασι, and even Moulton6 is reluctant to ad-

mit it for Paul and Luke, preferring to regard it "a vulgarism

due to the occasional lapse of an early scribe." It is certainly

not a mere Alexandrianism as Buresch7 supposed. The ending

αντι in the Doric usually dropped ν and became —ασι in Attic, but

the later Cretan inscriptions show –αν after the analogy of the

aorist.8  The Alexandrian κοινή followed the Cretan. The papyri

examples are very numerous9 and it is in the inscriptions of Per-

gamum10 also.  Hort (Notes on Orthography, p. 166) considers it

"curious," but has to admit it in various cases, though there is

always some MS. evidence for –ασι.  Thackeray (Gr., pp. 195,

212) thinks that in some instances --αν with the perfect is gen-

uine in the LXX. The earliest examples are from Lydia, παρεί-

λαφαν (246 B.C.) and ἀπέσταλκαν (193 B.C.).  Cf. Dieterich, Unters.,

p. 235 f. The N. T. examples are ἀπέσταλκαν (Ac. 16:36), γέγο-

 

            1 Moulton, Prol., p. 33. Cf. Dieterich, Unters., p. 242.

            2 Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 323.

            3 Prol., p. 52; Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 36, 1904, p. 110.

            4 Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 148; Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p.166. See fur-

ther Dieterich, Unters., p. 242 f. Cf. Deiss., B. S., p. 191; W.-Sch., p. 112 f.

            5 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 46.                       6 Prol., p. 52.

            7 Γέγοναν and anderes Vulgargriechisch, Rhein. Mus., 1891, pp. 193 ff. Cf.

Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 36.             8 K.-B1., Bd. II, p. 48 f.

            9 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 323 f. "A fair show in the papyri,"

Moulton, Prol., p. 52.

            10 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 167. Thumb (Hellen., p. 170) rightly denies

that it is merely Alexandrian. For LXX exx. (ἑώρακαν, πέπρακαν, etc.) see Hel-

bing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 67.


            CONJUGATION OF TIIE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                 337

 

ναν (Ro. 16:7; Rev. 21:6), ἔγνωκαν (Jo. 17:7), εἴρηκαν (Rev. 19:

3), εἰσελήλυθαν (Jas. 5:4), ἑώρακαν (Lu. 9:36; Col. 2:1), πέπτωκαν

(Rev. 18:3), τετήρηκαν (Jo. 17:6). On the other hand the Western

class of documents (אADN Syr. Sin.) read ἥκασιν in Mk. 8:3

instead of εἰσίν.  But it is in the LXX (Jer. 4:16), and Moulton1  

finds ἥκαμεν in the papyri. The form of ἥκω is present, but the

sense is perfect and the κ lends itself to the perfect ending by an-

alogy.

          Another ending that calls for explanation is the use of –ες in-

stead of –ας in the present perfect and the first aorist (in —κα es-

pecially). Hort considers the MS. evidence "scanty" save in

Revelation. The papyri give some confirmation. Moulton2

cites ἀφῆκες, ἔγραψες, etc., from "uneducated scribes" and thinks

that in Revelation it is a mark of "imperfect Greek." Deiss-

mann3 finds the phenomenon common in a "badly written private

letter" from Fayum.  Mayser4 confirms the rarity of its occur-

rence in the papyri. In the inscriptions Dieterich5 finds it rather

more frequent and in widely separated sections. In Mt. 23:23

B has ἀφήκετε; in Jo. 8:57 B has ἑώρακες; in Jo. 17:7 and in

17:8 B has ἔδωκες; once more in Ac. 21:22 B gives ἐλήλυθες.6  It

will hardly be possible to call B illiterate, nor Luke, whatever

one may think of John. D has ἀπεκάλυψες in Mt. 11:25.7  W. H.

accept it in Rev. 2:3 (κεκοπίακες), 2:4 (ἀφῆκες), 2:5 (πέπτωκες)

11:17 (εἴληφες), all perfects save ἀφῆκες.  It is rare in the LXX

(Thackeray, Gr., p. 215); found in A (Ex. 5:22, ἀπέσταλκες) and

in ἔδωκες (Ezek. 16:21; Neh. 9:10). The modern Greek has it

as in ἔδεσα, --ες (Thumb, Handb., p. 152).

          We have both ἦσθα (Mt. 26:69) and is (Mt. 25:21). The form

in –θα is vanishing (Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 166). Cf. also

Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 321. The papyri have (acts, as

N. T., and ἔφης.  But see –μι Verbs.

          Much more common is the use of the first aorist endings –α,

ας, etc., with the second aorist stem and even with the imperfect.

This change occurs in the indicative middle as well as active.

This matter more technically belongs to the treatment of the

 

            1 Prol. p. 53. Cf. Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 169. The N. T. does not follow

illiterate pap. in putting —ασι to aorist stems (Moulton, Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 36).

            2 Ib.; Prol., p. 52.

            3 B. S., p. 192.                          4 Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 321.

            5 Unters. etc., p. 239. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 46, cites Apoll., Synt.,

I, 10, p 37, as saying that εἴρηκες, ἔγραψες, γραψέτω, etc., gave the grammarians

trouble.                         6 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 46.              7 Cf. W.-Sch., p. 113.


338    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

aorist tense, as the -α is part of the tense-stem, but it is also con-

veniently discussed here. The Attic already had εἶπα, ἔπεσα, ἤνεγκα.

The Attic inscriptions indeed show ἔσχα, εὑράμην and even the

imperfects ἤλπιζα, ἔφερα.1  This tendency towards uniformity

spread in the κοινή somewhat extensively.2  Moulton3  finds the

strong aorists with --α chiefly in "uneducated writing" in the

papyri, but common in general. This process of assimilation of

the strong with the weak aorist was not yet complete.4  Blass5

thinks it an "intermediate" form already in the ancient Greek

which spread in the κοινή.  Cf. the liquid form ἤγγειλα. But both

the strong and the weak aorists appear in the N. T. Thackeray

(Cr., p. 195; cf. also pp. 210 ff.) notes that the --αν termination

was finally extended to all past tenses, though in the LXX the

imperfect forms are due to later copyists. In the modern Greek

we note it regularly with κατέλαβα, ἤθελα, εἶχα, etc. (Thumb,

Handb., pp. 152, 160, etc.). Hort6 has a detailed discussion of the

matter in the N. T. This mixture of usage is shown in εἶπα and

εἶπον. The -α form is uniform with endings in τ (εἴπατε, εἰπάτω,

εἰπάτωσαν).  Both εἰπόν and εἰπέ occur.  We have ἀπειπάμεθα (2

Cor. 4:2) and προείπαμεν (1 Th. 4:6). The participle is usu-

ally –ών, but sometimes εἴπας.  Both εἶπας and εἶπες, εἶπον and

εἴπαν meet us. We always have the ἤνεγκα inflection save in the

infinitive and the imperative. And even here we once have ἀνε-

νέγκαι (1 Pet. 2:5) and once also προσένεγκον (Mt. 8:4 BC). So

also with ἔπεσα we have the weak or first aorist inflection in the

indicative and imperative plural πέσατε (Lu. 23:30; Rev. 6:16).

But in these two examples Hort7 (against W. 1-1.) favours πέσετε

on MS. grounds (אABD, אBC). In Lu. 14:10; 17:7 ἀνάπεσε is

correct. The other forms that are accepted by W. H. are ἔβαλαν

 

            1 Meisterh., Att. Inschr., p. 183 f.

            2 Dieterich, Unters., p. 237 f. For the inscr. see Schweizer, Perg. Inschr.,

p. 181 f.; Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 166 f.

            3 Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 36. Cf. Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 368 f.

            4 Ib. Cf. Deiss., B. S:, p. 190 f.  2

            5 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 45. The LXX is in harmony with this tendency also.

Is it Cilician according to Heraclides? W.-Sch., p. 111 note. Cf. in Hom.

forms like ἤξοντο, ἐβήσετο, where the sec. aorist endings go with the first aorist

stern (Sterrett, Hom. 11., N. 42).          

            6 Notes on Orth., p. 164 f. See also Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 45; W.-Sch.,

p. 111 f. The LXX MSS. tally with the N. T. in the use of –α. Cf. Helbing,       

Gr. d. Sept., pp. 62-65; C. and S., Sel. fr. LXX, p. 35 f.

            7 Notes on Orth., p. 164. Moulton (Prol., p. 51) speaks of "the functionally

useless difference of ending between the strong and the weak aorist."


                CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                      339

 

once (Ac. 16:37); ἐπέβαλαν twice (Mk. 14:46; Ac. 21:27); εἶδαν,

εἴδαμεν in a few places (Mt. 13:17; Lu. 10:24; Mt. 25:37, etc.);

the indicatives ἀνεῖλαν (Ac. 10:39), ἀνείλατε (Ac. 2:23), ἀνείλατο

(Ac. 7:21), εἵλατο (2 Th. 2:13), ἑξειλάμην (Ac. 23:27), ἐξείλατο

(Ac. 7:10; 12:11); εὗραν once (Lu. 8:35, or ἀνεῦραν, εὕραμεν once

(Lu. 23:2), and εὑράμενος once (Heb. 9:12); the imperatives ἔλ-

θατε, ἐλθάτω uniformly; both ἦλθαν and ἦλθον, once ἀπῆλθα (Rev.

10:9), regularly ἤλθαμεν (Ac. 21:8). There are many other ex-

amples in various MSS. which W. H. are not willing to accept,

but which illustrate this general movement, such as ἀπέθαναν (Mt.

8:32, etc.), ἔλαβαν (Jo. 1:12), ἐλάβαμεν (Lu. 5:5), ἐλάβατε (1 Jo.

2:27), ἐξέβαλαν (Mk. 12:8), ἔπιαν (1 Cor. 10:4 D), ἔφυγαν (Lu. 8:

34 D), κατέφαγαν (Mk. 4:4 D), συνέσχαν (Ac. 7:57 D), γενάμενος

(Lu. 22:41 א), etc. But let these suffice. Moulton1 is doubtful

about allowing this –α in the imperfect. But the papyri support

it as Deissmann2 shows, and the modern Greek3 reinforces it also

as we have just seen. W. H. receive εἶχαν in Mk. 8:7; Ac. 28:2

(παρεῖχαν); Rev. 9:8; εἴχαμεν, in 2 Jo. 5.  But D has εἶχαν in Jo.

15:22, 24; אhas ἔλεγαν in Jo. 9:10; 11:36, etc. There is a dis-

tinct increase in the use of the sigmatic aorist as in ἡμάρτησα

(Mt. 18:15), ὄψησθε (Lu. 13:28). It appears already in the LXX

(Thackeray, Gr., p. 235). But see further under vii, (d).

          The past perfect has the –ειν forms exclusively as uniformly in

the κοίνη.4  So εἱστήκεισαν (Rev. 7:11), ᾔδεισαν (Mk. 14:40), πε-

ποιήκεισαν (Mk. 15:7).  So the LXX. Cf. Helbing, Gr. d. Sept.,

p. 68. But the imperfect ἐξῄεσαν (Ac. 17:15) is to be observed.

          (i) THE MIDDLE ENDINGS. These call for less remark. βού-

λει (Lu. 22:42) is the only second singular middle form in —ει, for

ὄψῃ (Mt. 27:4) displaces ὄψει.  The inscriptions5 sometimes show

βούλῃ.  Blass6  regards βούλει a remnant of literary style in Luke,

 

            1 Prol., p. 52. So Buresch, Rhein. Mus., 46, 224. Hort (Notes on Orth.,

p. 165) needlessly considers ἐκχέετε (Rev. 16:1) a second aorist upper. instead

of the present. Cf. ἐξέχεαν (usual form in Rev. 16:6). Cf. WT.-Sch., p. 111.

But κατέχεεν (Mk. 14:3) is the usual Attic aorist. Cf. Moulton, Prol., p. 55.

            2 B. S., p. 191, ἔλεγας, etc.

            3 Cf. Simcox, Lang. of the N. T., p. 36; Geldart's Guide to Mod. Gk., p.

272 note.

            4 With rare variations in the inscr. and pap. Moulton, Prol., p. 53. Cf.

Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., pp. 320

            5 Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 168. Cf. also Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p.

328. The pap. do not show οἴει and ὄψει, but only βούλει.

            6 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 47. For οἴῃ, ὄψῃ, and βούλῃ in LXX MSS. see Helbing,

Gr. d. Sept., p. 60 f.; C. and S., Sel. fr. LXX, p. 33 f. B in the LXX shows a

fondness for —ει forms (itacism). Cf. Thack., Gr., p. 217.


340     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

but the papyri also have βούλει.  The occasional use of δύνῃ (Mk.

9:22 f.) has been discussed under –μι.   Verbs. It appears only

once in the LXX, but the "poetic and apparently Ionic" ἐπίστῃ

is more frequent (Thackeray, Gr., p. 217). Cf. also κάθου (Jas. 2:3)

as LXX and κάθῃ (Ac. 23:3). On the other hand we have φάγεσαι

and πίεσαι (Lu. 17:8). This revival of the use of –σαι parallel with

μαι, –ται in the perfect of vowel verbs in the vernacular amounts

to a "new formation" in the view of Blass.1  So Moulton, Prol.,

p. 54 f. To call this revival a "survival" is "antediluvian philol-

ogy." In the LXX πίεσαι is universal and φάγεσαι outside of the

Pentateuch where φάγῃ holds on (Thackeray, p. 218). The –σαι

form is universal in modern Greek. The love of uniformity made

it triumph. But see Contract Verbs for further discussion. The

middle form ἤμην (Mt. 25:35) and ἤμεθα (Mt. 23:30) is like the

κοινή generally and the modern Greek εἶμαι. Cf. also ἔσομαι.  For

ἐξέδετο (Mt. 21:33) with loss of root o and ω inflection (thematic

ε) see –μι Verbs. Cf. also ἐξεκρέμετο (Lu. 19:48). The LXX has

--εντο for –οντο (Thackeray, p. 216).

          (j) PASSIVE ENDINGS. As already observed, the passive voice

has no distinctive endings of its own. The second aorist passive,

like ἐ-φάνη-ν, is really an active form like ἔ-βη-ν (ἐ-φάνη-ν, is the

proper division).2 Cf. Latin tace-re. So ἐ-χάρη-ν from χαιρέω. The

first aorist in –θην seems to have developed by analogy out of

the old secondary middle ending in –θης (ἐ-δό-θης) parallel with

σο (Sanskrit thas).3 The future passive is a late development

and merely adds the usual σο/ε and uses the middle endings.

The ending in –θην is sometimes transitive in Archilochus,4 as

the middle often is, and perhaps helps to understand how in the

κοινή these forms (first aorist passive) are so often transitive ("de-

ponents") as in ἀπεκρίθην, ἐφοβήθην, etc. The second aorist passive

as noticed above is really an active form. So the passive forms

have a decidedly mixed origin and history. There is nothing

special to note about these passive endings in the N. T. save the

increased use of them when even the passive idea does not exist.

In some verbs σ is inserted contrary to Attic practice. So κέκ-

λεισται (Lu. 11:7), λέλουσμαι (Heb. 10:22). It is a common

usage in the LXX (Thackeray, Gr., pp. 219 ff.). See also VII,

 

            1 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 47. Cf. Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 328.

            2 Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., pp. 410, 427.

            3 Ib., pp. 411, 422. On "Passive Formations" see Hadley, Ess. Phil. and

Crit., p. 199. On the strong passive forms in LXX see C. and S., Sel. fr. LXX,

p.41.                                         4 Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 411.


             CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)              341

 

(g), 9. In Rev. 8:12; 18:23, W. H. print φάνῃ (first aorist

active, cf.  ἐπιφᾶναι in Lu. 1:79) rather than the passive φανῇ.

Note ἐκφύῃ (Mt. 24:32, but Rec. ἐκφυῇ, though ἐκφύῃ in Mk.

13:28), συνφυεῖσαι (Lu. 8:7) and παρεισεδύησαν (Ju. 4) for ἔδυν

(Rec. Mk. 1:32) which the LXX retains (Thackeray, Gr., p.

235). In the LXX, when a verb had both first and second aorist

passive forms, the first disappeared (ib., p. 237). But see (d),

for further discussion.

          (k) CONTRACT VERBS. The use of –σαι was mentioned above.

It appears1 in καυχᾶσαι (1 Cor. 4:7; Ro. 2:17, etc.) and ὀδυνᾶσαι

(Lu. 16:25) where αε regularly contracts into α. See χαρίεσαι

(=–εῖσαι) P. Oxy. 292 (A.D. 25).

          Verbs in –αω. The confusion with verbs in —εω is already seen

in the Ionic (Herodotus). The LXX in general preserves the dis-

tinction between –αω and —εω verbs, but אAB occasionally have

the confusion (Thackeray, Gr., p. 241). In the modern Greek the

blending is complete. One conjugation is made up, some forms

from –αω, some from –εω (Thumb, Handb., p. 169 f.). The N. T.

MSS. vary. W. H. receive ἠρώτουν in Mt. 15:23 (אBCD), but

ἠρώτων in Mk. 4:10 though –ουν, is here supported by אC and by

single MSS. elsewhere. Hatzidakis (Einl. in d. Neug., p. 128 f.)

considers ἠρώτουν due to Ionic influence. In Mt. 6:28 we have

κοπιοῦσιν, LP in B 33, but W. H. reject2 it, as they do νικοῦντι in Rev.

2:7, 17; 15:2, and κατεγέλουν (Lu. 8:53).  In Mk. 14:5 W. H.

read ἐνεβριμῶντο (אC –οῦντο) and in Jo. 11:38 ἐμβριμώμενος (אA

ούμενος). So there is a variation as to ἡττῶνται (2 Pet. 2:20)

from ἡττάομαι and ἡσσώθητε (2 Cor. 12:13) from ἑσσόω after the

analogy of ἐλασσόω.3  W. H. print ζῇν (Ro. 8:12). This is a

matter of much dispute with the editors, but it is more than

doubtful if W. H. are correct. On the other side see Winer-

Schmiedel4 and Moulton.5  But both –ζάω (Ro. 8:12) and χράο-

μαι (1 Tim. 1:8) have the 17 contraction rather than α (--ηω

verbs, Moulton, Prol., p. 54). In Ro. 7:9 B even has ἔζην for

ἔζων.  But the κοινή uses χρᾶσθαι, though not in the N. T.6  Paul

 

            1 Cf. Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 328, for χαριεῖσαι. The LXX (1 Ki. 14 :

6 A) shows ἀπεξενοῦσαι. The only certain instance in the LXX is κτᾶσαι. (Sir.

6:7). See Thack., p. 218. Cf. further Hatz., Einl., p. 188.

            2 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 166.

            3 Ib. Moulton (Cl. Rev., 1901, p. 36) cites ἐνίκει and τιμοῦντες from pap.

            4 Pp. 42, 116 note.

            5 Prol., p. 54. Cf. Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 61. The pap. support ζῆν, not ζῇν.

Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 347. So in general the pap. are in harmony

with N. T. usage here, Mayser, pp. 346 ff.         6 Moulton, Prol., p. 54.


342   A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

has χρῆται (pres. subj.) in 1 Tim. 1:8. Elsewhere also the α

forms prevail in the κοινή as in διψᾶν and πεινᾶν.  So πεινᾷ (1 Cor.

11:21), πεινᾶν (Ph. 4:12), διψᾷ, (Ro. 12:20) as subjunctive (so

πεινᾷ same verse). The LXX keeps Attic ζῆν and χρῆσθαι, but

διψᾶν and πεινᾶν (Thackeray, Gr., p. 242).1

          Verbs in -εω sometimes show forms in –αω.  So ἐλλόγα in Phil.

18, ἐλλογᾶται in Ro. 5:13, ἐλεᾶτε in Ju. 22, 23, and ἐλεῶντος in

Ro. 9:16, but ἐλεεῖ in Ro. 9:18. LXX has both forms. The

κοινή usually has the –εινˆ forms.2  For further examples of this

confusion between –αω and –εω in LXX and isolated N. T. MSS.

see Winer-Schmiedel.3  In 1 Cor. 11:6 all editors print ξυρᾶσθαι

(cf. κείρασθαι just before), though in 1 Cor. 11:5 ἐξυρημένη and ξυρή-

σονται (Ac. 21:24) probably come from ξυρέω.4  Cf. ἐάω, ἐάσω.5

          Contraction does not always take place with εε in verbs in –εω.

In Lu. 8:38 W. H. follow BL in giving ἐδεῖτο but Hort6 admits

that it is not free from doubt. Blass7 and Moulton8 consider

ἐδέετο correct and the contraction a mere correction, and it is sup-

ported by the LXX and papyri. AP even have ἐδεῖτο.  In Rev.

16:1 ἐκχέετε is undoubtedly right and ἐξέχεεν, in 16:2, but note

ἐκχεῖται (Mt. 9:17). In Mk. 14:3 κατέχεεν is to be noticed also

(cf. Attic aorist). On the other hand in Jo. 3:8 note πνεῖ, ἐξέπλει

(Ac. 18:18), πλεῖν, ἀποπλεῖν (Ac. 27:1 f.).  In the LXX these

words appear now one way, now the other.9  Δέω (‘to bind’), ῥέω  

have no εε forms in the N. T. W. H. accept in text only ἐξουθενέω

in all the dozen examples in the N. T. (as Lu. 18:9, ἐξουθενοῦντας),

but in Mk. 9:12 they have δ instead of θ.10  Observe also ἀφέων-

ται (Lu. 5:20, etc.) instead of ἀφῶνται or the regular ἀφεῖνται.  In

the N. T., W. H. give ἐρρέθη (Gal. 3:16; Mt. 5:21, etc.), but

Hort11 thinks the Attic ἐρρήθη should appear always in Matthew.

          Verbs in –οω have two knotty problems. In Gal. 4:17 ζηλοῦτε

and 1 Cor. 4:6 φυσιοῦσθε are regular if indicative. But if they are

subjunctive, the contraction οη is like the indicative οε (cf. indica-

 

            1 W.-Sch., p. 116 note. Cf. κατηραμένος (Mt. 25:41).

            2 Hatz., Einl., p. 128 f. Moulton (Cl. Rev., 1904, p. 110) cites φρονῶντες and per contra ἀγαποῦντες from pap.                        3 P. 117 note.

            4 Hort (Notes on Orth., p. 166) prefers ξύρασθαι after Plut. and Lucian.

            5 Cf. W.-Sch., p. 116 f. See further on this mixing of contract verbs, Mayser,

Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 349. The LXX MSS. show much the same situation as

to contract verbs that we find in the N. T. and the pap. Helbing (Gr. d. Sept.,

pp. 110-112) gives the facts in detail.

            6 Notes on Orth., p. 166.           9 Cf. Thack., Gr., pp. 242ff.; W.-Sch., p.115 note.

            7 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 47.           10 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 166.

            8 Prol., p. 54.                            11 Ib. BD always have it.


          CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                  343

 

tive and subjunctive of —οω verbs). So Blass1 and Moulton.2

Hort3 doubts the indicative here. If εὐδῶται (1 Cor. 16:2) be

regarded as a present subjunctive no problem in contraction is

raised.4  But in Col. 4:17 we have the subjunctive in ἵνα πλη-

ροῖς as in Attic for both indicative and subjunctive. In Ro.

3:13 ἐδολιοῦσαν is the common LXX form in —οσαν.  The other

point is the infinitive in —οῦν, or —οῖν.  W. H. give —οῖν for

this infinitive everywhere except πληροῦν in Lu. 9:31.5  Cf.

and —ῇν in W. H. Blass6 considers the —οῖν termination "hardly

established for the N. T." since even in the N. T. the evidence is

"small," though "of good quality " Hort contends.7  In Mt. 13:

32 κατασκηνοῖν is supported by BD (in Mk. 4:32 by B), in 1 Pet.

2:15 φιμοῖν has א, and in Heb. 7:5 ἀποδεκατοῖν has BD. Moul-

ton8 finds no support earlier in date than B save one inscription

cited in Hatzitiakis (Einl., p. 193) and one papyrus of second cen-

tury A.D. Mayser9 likewise finds no infinitive in —οῖν till after

first century and gives some references for this late infinitive

form. It looks as if the case will go against W. H. on this point.

The form is probably due to some late grammarian's refinement

and is linguistically unintelligible.

          Πιεῖν, is often contracted (sounded finally ιι, then ι) into πεῖν

(so W. H., Jo. 4:7, 9, etc.) and in some MSS. (א 8/9 times) into

πῖν.  But πιεῖν is the Syrian reading (Mt. 20:22, etc.).10  Con-

traction in —αω, --εω, --οω verbs, of course, takes place only in the

present, imperfect and present participle.

               VII. The Tenses (χρόνοι).

          (a) THE TERM TENSE. It is from the French word temps,

‘time,’ and is a misnomer and a hindrance to the understanding

of this aspect of the verb-form. Time does come finally to enter

relatively into the indicative and in a limited way affects the op-

tative, infinitive and participle. But it is not the original nor the

general idea of what we call tense.11  Indeed it cannot be shown of

 

            1 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 48. Cf. K.-B1., Bd. II, p. 587.

            2 Prol., p. 54.                                        3 Notes on Orth., p. 171 f.

            4 Moulton, Prol., p. 54. Cf. Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 167.

            5 Hort, ib., p. 166.                                 6 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 48.

            7 Notes on Orth., p.166.

            8 Prol., p. 53. Cf. Nestle (Am. Jour. of Theol., July, 1909, p. 448) for

μαστιγγοῖν, in Coptic.                         9 Cr. d. griech. Pap., p. 349; Raderm., p. 74.

            10 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 170.

            11 Cf. Delbruck, Grundl. d. griech. Synt., Bd. IV, p. 80; Brug., Griech. Gr., p.

469 f.; Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 481 f. See Swete, 0. T. in Gk., p. 305,

for remarks about tenses in the LXX.


344    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

any verb-form that it had originally any reference to time. We

must therefore dismiss time from our minds in the study of the

forms of the tenses as well as in the matter of syntax. It is too

late to get a new name, however.

          (b) CONFUSION IN NAMES. The greatest confusion prevails in

the names given to the various tenses. The time idea appears in

the names present, past perfect and future. The state of the ac-

tion rules in the names aorist, imperfect and perfect. Thus it is

clear that the time idea did not prevail with all the names that

the grammarians used. In the indicative, indeed, in the past three

tenses appear, in the present two, in the future one (sometimes

two). In the other modes as a rule only three tenses are found;

in truth, in the subjunctive, optative and imperative practically

only two are in common usage, the aorist and the present.

          As a matter of fact there are nine possible tenses for each

voice in the indicative: the aorist present, the imperfect pres-

ent, the perfect present, the aorist past, the imperfect past, the

perfect past; the aorist future, the imperfect future, the perfect

future. These ideas do occur. In the past the distinction is

clear cut. In the present no sharp line is drawn between the

aorist and durative (unfinished or imperfect) save when the peri-

phrastic conjugation is used or when Aktionsart comes in to

help out the word itself. In the future, as a rule, no distinction

at all is made between the three ideas. But here again the peri-

phrastic conjugation can be employed. As a rule the future is

aoristic anyhow. For further discussion see Jannaris, Hist. Gk.

Gr., p. 180; Farrar, Greek Syntax, p. 120, and the references there

to Harris' Hermes, Harper's Powers of the Greek Tenses, and

H. Schmidt's Doctrina Temporum Verbi Graeci et Latini. The

modern Greek preserves as distinct forms the aorist, present, im-

perfect; the future, the perfect and past perfect using periphrastic

forms. Mr. Dan Crawford reports 32 tenses for Bantu.

          (c) THE VERB-ROOT. There were originally two types of verb-

roots, the punctiliar and the durative. The tense called aorist

(ἀόριστος, 'undefined action') is due to the use of the punctiliar

verbs (the idea of a point on a line). The present tense comes

out of the durative verb-root. But it is worth repeating that

tenses are a later development in the use of the verb.1

          Hence it was natural that some verbs never developed a pres-

ent tense, like εἶδον, and some made no aorist, like ὁράω.  The de-

fective verbs thus throw much light on the history of the tenses.

 

            1 Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 482 f.


          CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                 345

 

Out of these two ideas grew all the tenses. Each language had its

own development. Some aorists in Sanskrit had no presents, like

the Greek εἶπον. Each tense in the Greek pursued its own way.

It is a complex development as will be seen. The idea of com-

paring the aorist to a point and the present to a line is due to

Curtius, but it has since been worked out at length.1  Instead of

saying "irregular" verbs, Delbruck (Vergl. Syntax, Tl. II, p. 256)

speaks of "several roots united to one verb."

          This Aktionsart or kind of action belongs more specifically to

syntax.2 But it is not possible to make a modern study of the

tense formations without having clearly in mind this important

matter. It will come out at every turn. Along with the various

tense-suffixes which came to be used to express the tense-distinc-

tions as they were developed there remains also the meaning of

the verb-root itself. This is never to be left out of sight. Prepo-

sitions also enter into the problem and give a touch much like a

suffix (perfective). So θνήσκειν is ‘to be dying’ while ἀποθανεῖν is ‘to

die’ and ἀποτεθνηκέναι is 'to be dead.' Cf. ἔχει, and ἀπέχει, ἔφαγον

and κατέφαγον.  But more of this in Syntax. The point here is

simply to get the matter in mind.

          (d) THE AORIST TENSE (ἀόριστος χρόνος). It is not true that

this tense was always the oldest or the original form of the verb.

As seen above, sometimes a durative root never made an aorist

or punctiliar stem. But the punctiliar idea is the simplest idea

of the verb-root, with many verbs was the original form, and logic-

ally precedes the others. Hence it can best be treated first. This

is clearer if we dismiss for the moment the so-called first aorists and

think only of the second aorists of the --μι form, the oldest aorists.

It is here that we see the rise of the aorist. Henry3 has put this

matter tersely: "The ordinary grammars have been very unfortu-

nate in their nomenclature; the so-called second perfects are much

more simple and primitive than those called first perfects; the same

is the case with the second aorists passive as contrasted with the

first aorists," etc. The same remark applies to second aorists active

and middle. The non-thematic second aorists represent, of course,

 

            1 Cf. Mutzbauer, Grundl. der Tempuslehre (1893); Delbruck, Grundl. d.

grieeh. Synt., II, pp. 13 ff.; Brug., Griech. Gr., pp. 470 ff.; Giles, Man. of Comp.

Philol., p. 480 f.; Moulton, Prol., pp. 108 ff.

            2 Thumb (Handb., p. 123) likewise feels the necessity of a word about

Aktionsart under Morphology.

            3 Comp. Gr. of the Gk. and Lat., Elliott's transl., 1890, p. 105 f. note. Cf.

Leo Meyer, Griech. Aoriste, 1879, p. 5 f.


346    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

the most primitive form. The survivals of these forms in the

N. T. have been discussed under —μι Verbs. The difference between

the strong aorist (both thematic and non-thematic) and similar

presents is syntactical and not formal.1  The point is that the

strong aorists and the corresponding presents represent the simple

stem of the verb. Brugmann2 indeed treats them together. It

is not possible to make an etymological distinction between the

imperfects ἔφην, ἔγραφον and the aorists ἔστην, ἔφυγον.  The im-

perfect, of course, differs from the present only in the augment

and secondary endings.3 The kinship between the aorist and

present stems is further shown in reduplication. Reduplication

in the aorist, as ἤγαγον, is supposed to be originally causative.4

Cf. the use of it with inceptive presents like γι(γ)νώσκω.  The

aorist was quite common in the older Sanskrit, but is rare in the

later language.5  Cf. the blending of the aorist and the present

perfect forms in Latin. The strong aorist (both non-thematic

and thematic) is far more common in Homer than in the later

Greek.6  Indeed in the modern Greek the strong aorist has well-

nigh vanished before the weak aorist.7

          As often, the grammars have it backwards. The so-called sec-

ond is the old aorist, and the so-called first is the late form of the

verb. This weak form of the aorist has a distinct tense-sign, σ,

the sigmatic aorist. The σ (—σα) was not always used, as with

liquid verbs,8 like ἔστειλα. This sigmatic aorist appears also

in the Sanskrit.9  The distinction was not always observed be-

tween the two forms, and mixed aorists of both kinds occur in

Homer, like ἤξοντο, ἤνεικα.10  No wonder therefore that uniformity

gradually prevailed at the expense of the strong aorist in two

ways, the disuse of the strong aorist (so ἦξα) and the putting of

first aorist endings to the second aorist stems, as εἶπα, ἔσχα.

          The κ aorists in the indicative (ἔδωκα, ἔθηκα, ἧκα) continued to

hold their own and to be used usually in the plural also. An ex-

 

            1 Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 268.

            2 Ib. Cf. also Riem. and Goelzer, Phonet., pp. 396, 410, 414. So K.-B1., II,

p. 92 f.                                     3 Cf. Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 453 f.

            4 So Whitney, Sans. Gr., p. 308. Cf. Hirt, Handb. etc., p. 371. Cf. K.-B1.,

II, p. 30 f., for list.                                5 Whitney, Sans. Gr., p. 298.

            6 See interesting lists in Sterrett's II., N. 38 ff.

            7 V. and D., Handb. etc., p. 79 f.

            8 K.-B1., II, p. 102 f. Cf. Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 313; Delbruck, Grundl.,

etc., IV, pp. 75 ff. Hartmann (De aoristo secundo, 1881, p. 21) makes too

much distinction between the second and first aorists.

            9 Whitney, Sans. Gr., p. 313.     10 Sterrett, Hom. Il., N. 42.


              CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                  347

 

tension of this usage (after the analogy of the perfect) is seen in

the Byzantine and modern Greek1 form ἐλύθηκα for ἐλύθην.

          There is one more aorist form, the aorist passive. As already

shown, the so-called second aorist passive (--ην), like ἐφάνην, ἐχάρην,

is merely the second aorist active.2  The so-called first aorist

passive in --θην is a Greek creation after the analogy of the old

Indo-Germanic.3  Homer makes little use of either of these pas-

sive aorists, but the second is the more frequent with him and the

form in --θην is very rare.4

          If this emphasis upon the aorist forms seem unusual to modern

students, they may be reminded that in English we have only

two tenses (apart from the periphrastic conjugation) and that they

are usually punctiliar, as "I sing," "I sang." One is a present

aorist, the other a past aorist.5 We do not here enter into the

Aktionsart of the aorist (whether ingressive, constative or effec-

tive).6  That belongs to syntax.

          The inscriptions agree with the development shown above in

the aorist and support the N. T. phenomena.7  Mayser8 gives a

careful discussion of the papyri development. In brief it is in

harmony with what has already been observed. The non-the-

matic strong aorist is confined to a few verbs like βῆναι, γνῶναι,

δοῦναι, δῦναι, θεῖναι, πρίασθαι, στῆναιThe κ aorists are used ex-

clusively in both singular and plural. The thematic strong aorist

is disappearing before the weak sigmatic aorist.

          In the N. T. the κ aorists ἔδωκα, ἔθηκα, ἀφῆκα occur always ex-

cept that Luke (1:2 in the literary introduction) has παρέδοσαν.

Elsewhere ἐδωκατε (Mt. 25:35), ἔθηκαν (Mk. 6:29), ἀφήκατε (Mt.

23:23), etc., and quite frequently.9  The LXX also nearly

always has κ with these aorists in the plural.10

          The non-thematic aorists in the N. T. are not numerous. The

list is found in the discussion of –μι verbs and includes ἀνέβην,

ἔγνων, ἔστην, ἔφην, ὠνάμην, and all the forms of δοῦναι, εἷναι and

θεῖναι save the indicative active.

 

            1 V. and D. Handb., etc., p. 81, but in particular Thumb, Handb., p. 144.

            2 Cf. K.-B1., II, p. 93 f.             3 Hirt, Handb. etc., p. 399 f.

            4 Sterrett, Hom. IL, N. 42 f.

            5 Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 126. Cf. Monro, Hom. Gr., p. 45.

            6 Munro, ib., p. 47.

            7 Cf. Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., pp. 180 ff.; Nachm., Magn. Inschr., pp.

162 ff.; Meisterh,, Att. Inschr., pp. 181, 185, 187.

            8 Gr. d. griech. Pap., pp. 358-370.                      9 Cf. W.-Sch., p. 119.

            10 See Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p.94 f., for similar exx. in the LXX, and Thack.,

Gr., p. 255.


348    A GRAMMAR OF TIE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

          The thematic strong aorist in the N. T. shows the two develop-

ments noted above. The use of –α instead of –ον with the strong

aorist-stem is very common. See this chapter, vi, (h), for N. T. list

like ἔβαλαν, etc.  The MSS. vary much in the matter.1  The other

change is the increased use of the sigmatic aorist. Here again

Blass2 has a careful presentation of the facts.   Ἐβίωσα (1 Pet.

4:2) is a case in point instead of the old Attic ἐβίων.  So is ἐβλά-

στησα (Mt. 13:26; Heb. 9:4; Jas. 5:18) rather than ἔβλαστον.

Both ἐγάμησα (Mt. 5:32) and ἔγνμα (Mt. 22:25) occur. Cf. Hel-

bing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 93 f., and Thackeray, Gr., pp. 233 ff., for

LXX illustrations.

           Ἦξα occurs a few times instead of the common ἤγαγον, as ἐπάξας

(2 Pet. 2:5), ἐπισυνάξαι (Lu. 13:34).  Blass justifies it as appear-

ing at least in dialects, LXX and late writers.3  It is part of the

tendency towards the sigmatic aorist.  Likewise ἁμαρτήσω is slip-

ping in beside ἁμάρτω (Mt. 18:15; Ro. 5:14, 16, cf. verse 12).

Blass finds it in Emped., LXX, Lob., Phryn., 732. W. H. accept

ἔδυσεν (Mk. 1:32 on the authority of BD (אA, etc., ἔδυ).  Luke in

Ac. 24:21 has the reduplicated aorist ἐκέκραξα like the LXX, but

usually the N. T. has the late form ἔκραξα as in Mt. 8:29 (ἔκραξαν),

though once the Attic ἀνέκραγον appears (Lu. 23:18). Once Luke

(Ac. 6:2) has καταλείψαντας, a form that Blass4 finds in Herm.,

Vis. VIII, 3. 5, and Mayser5 observes ἀντειλῆψαι in the papyri.

            Ὄψησθε (Lu. 13:28) finds a parallel in an old Homeric aorist

ὠψάμην (Winer-Schmiedel, p. 109). In Rev. 18:14 the Text. Rec.

(without any known authority) has an aorist form εὕρησα.  So in

Jas. 4:13 some MSS. have ἐμπορευσώμεθα.  Indeed some verbs have

dropped the strong aorist form entirely like βιόω, βλαστάνω, ἐγείρο-

μαι, κτείνω.  See careful discussion of Winer-Schmieclel, p. 109 f.

MSS. frequently read δώσῃ, δώσωμεν, etc., as if from an aorist ἔδωσα,

as Jo. 17:2; Rev. 4:9.  Cf. Winer-Schmiedel, p. 120. Cf. Hel-

bing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 90 f., for LXX examples that further parallel

these illustrations.

          Conversely is to be noted a new strong aorist ἀνέθαλον (Ph. 4:

10) which Blass6 takes in a causative sense (ἀνεθάλετε τὸ ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ

φρονεῖν).

          Verbs in --ζω make the aorist both in σ and ξ.   Most of these

 

            1 Cf. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 45 f.                  2 Ib., p. 43.

            3 Ib. Mayser (Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 369) finds it in the pap. as well as

ἀγαγῆσαι.

            4 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 43. Cf. καταλείψῃ Mk. 12:19 א.

            5 Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 370.      6 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 43.


                CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)           349

 

verbs have dental stems in Attic, but some have guttural. Hence

the σ forms prevail till to-day. The LXX agrees with the N. T.

(Thackeray, Gr., p. 222 f.). So ἐνύσταξαν (Mt. 25:5), ἐμπαῖξαι,

(Mt. 20:19), ἐπεστήριξαν (Ac. 15:32); but on the other hand

ἐστήρισεν (Lu. 9:51), ἥρπασεν (Ac. 8:39), ἡρμοσάμην, (2 Cor. 11:2),

σλαπίσῃς (Mt. 6:2).1  The tendency in the papyri and the in-

scriptions on the whole is towards the use of σ and not ξ with

the verbs in --ζω.2  Cf. βαπτίζω, λογίζομαι, νομίζω, etc.

          Like καλέω and τελέω3 we have ε in ἐφορέσαμεν (1 Cor. 15:49) and

ἐρρέθη (Mt. 5:21), but εὐφόρησα (Lu. 12:16), ῥηθέν (Mt. 1:22) and

ἐπεπόθησα (1 Pet. 2:2). Cf. also ᾔνεσα, ἤρκεσε, ἐμέσαι. Cf. ἐπείνασα

(Mt. 4:2), but διψήσω, though D has —α— in Jo. 6:35 and א in Rev.

          The liquid verbs in —αίνω and —αίρω generally retain a even when

not preceded by ε or ι as in Attic.  So ἐβάσκανα (Gal. 3:1); once κερ-

δανῶ (1 Cor. 9:21), elsewhere —ησα; ἐξεκάθαρα (1 Cor. 5:7); ἐλεύκαναν

(Rev. 7:14); ἐσήμανα (Rev. 1:1); ἐπιφᾶναι (Lu. 1:79). In Rev. 8:12

and 18:23 note φάνῃ, not φανῇ.  The κοινή begins to use —ανα and

--αρα with all verbs, and it is well-nigh universal in modern Greek.

The LXX agrees with the N. T. (Thackeray, Gr., p. 223). A few

--νηα forms survive in modern Greek (Thumb, Handb., p. 140 f.).

          The second aorist passive has a few late developments of its

own. This substitution of the second aorist passive for the first

is a favorite idiom in the N. T.4 The κοινή shows likewise fond-

ness for the —ην formations.5 This is true of the inscriptions' and

the papyri.7  This development is directly the opposite of that in

the case of the second and first aorist active and middle. It has

already been observed that in Homer the passive aorist is very

rare. Perhaps the increase in the use of --ην forms is partly due

to the general encroachment of aorist passive forms on the middle,

and this is the simplest one. The Attic, of course, had many such

forms also. Here are the chief N. T. examples: ἠγγέλην (ἀπ--,

ἀν--, δι--, κατ--, Lu. 8:20, etc.) is in the LXX and the papyri;

ἠνοίγην (Mk. 7:35, etc.), but ἠνοίχθησαν also (Rev. 20:12); ἡρ-

πάγην (2 Cor. 12:2, 4), but the Attic ἡρπάσθη (Rev. 12:5); διο-

ρυγῆναι is read by some MSS. in Mt. 24:43; διετάγην (Gal. 3:19),

ὑπετάγην (Ro. 8:20, etc.), but the Attic διαταχθέντα (Lu. 17:9 f.);

 

            1 Cf. W.-Sch., p. 105.

            2 Cf. Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., pp. 360 ff., for careful discussion and

references for further research.

            3 So πονέω and φορέω(ε) in the LXX. Cf. W.-Sch., p. 105.

            4 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 43.  5 Cf. Schmid, Atticismus, IV, p. 594 f.

            6 Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 171; Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 190 f.

            7 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 381 f. Cf. Reinhold, De Graac., p. 76 f.


350    A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

κατεκάην (Rev. 8:7; 1 Cor. 3:15), but Attic ἐξεκαύθησαν (Ro. 1:

27); κατενύγην (Ac. 2:37); ἐκρύβην (Jo. 8:59). So also ἐφύην in-

stead of ἔφυν follows the analogy of ἐρρύην (Heb. 2:1) and ἐχάρην

(Lu. 22:5). Thus we have ἐκφυῇ (Mk. 13:28)1 and συμφυεῖσαι

(Lu. 8:6-8). Forms like ἐπλήγην (Rev. 8:12) and ἐφάνην (Mt.

1:20) are Attic. On the other hand the poetical ἐκλίθην (Mt.

14:19 ἀνακλιθῆναι) has displaced the Attic ἐκλίνην.   Ἀπεκτάνθην oc-

casionally appears (as in Mk. 8:31 and Rev, six times) where the

Attic would have ἀπέθανον, and ἐτέχθην (Lu. 2:11) when the Attic

would usually have ἐγενόμην. Both ἐγενήθην (Mt. 6:10 and often

in 1 Th.) and ἐγενόμην (Mt. 7:28) are common, as ἠδυνήθην (Mt.

17:16) and ἠδυνάσθην (Mk. 7:24). The many aorist passives in

the deponent sense have already been noticed under VI, (e).

          (e) THE PRESENT TENSE (ὁ ἐνεστὼς χρόνος). The present

indicative, from the nature of the case, is the most frequent in

actual use and hence shows the greatest diversity of develop-

ment. Brugmann2 finds thirty-two distinct ways of forming the

present tense in the Indo-Germanic tongues and thirty of them

in the Greek. But some of these represent very few verbs

and for practical purposes a much simpler classification is suf-

ficient.3  Unfortunately the grammars by no means agree on the

simplification. As samples see Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., p.

425 f.; Hadley and Allen, p. 122 f.; Monro, Homeric Grammar,

p. 9; Riemann and Goelzer, Phonetique, pp. 394 ff.; Kuhner-Blass,

II, pp. 88 ff. In simple truth the facts are so varied that they

lend themselves to many combinations more or less artificial.

One of the most satisfactory is that of Monro, who has the his-

torical instinct at least in his arrangement.

          1. The Root Class. This is the simple non-thematic present

like φημί. This is the logical one to put first, as with the aorist

like ἔ-βη-ν.  This class is disappearing in the N. T. though δυνα-

μαι, εἰμί, εἶμι in composition (εισ--, ἐξ--), κάθ-η-μαι, κεῖ-μαι, κρέμα-μαι

appear.

          2. The Non-Thematic Reduplicated Present. So δί-δω-μι, ἵ-η-

μι, ἵ-στη-μι, κί-χρη-μι,  ὀνίνη-μι, πίμ-πλη-μι, τί-θη-μι. It was never a

very large class, but holds on in the N. T. And –ω forms are

common with these verbs.

 

            1 Cf. W.-Sch., p. 110, for exx. in Jos. and LXX. Cf. also Helbing, Gr. d.

Sept., p. 95 f. MSS. simply read –φυη.

            2 Grundr., II, pp. 836-1330. In Hom. the same root will form a present in

several ways, as ἔχω, ἴσω, ἰσχω, ἰσχάνω. Cf. Monro, Hom. Gr., p. 40.

            3 Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 423.


              CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                  351

 

          3. The Non-Thematic Present with —να— and —νυ—. So in the

N. T. ἀμφι-έ-ννυ-μι, ἀπ-όλ-λυ-μι, δείκ-νυ-μι, ζεύγ-νυ-μι, ζών-νυ-μι, κατ-

άγ-νυ-μι, κερά-ννυ-μι, κορέ0ννυ-μι, κρε-μά-ννυ-μι, μίγ-νυ-μι, ὄμ--νυ-μι, πήγ-

νυ-μι, ῥήγ-νυ-μι, σβέννυ-μι, στρώννυ-μι, but these all have more

commonly the -ω forms.1

          4. The Simple Thematic Present. So λέγω, λύω. This was a

constantly increasing class at the expense of the --μι verbs. It

had several branches also including root-verbs like ἄγω, γράφω,

a strengthened vowel like πείθ-ω (πιθ), λείπ-ω (λιπ), φεύγ-ω (φυγ),

σήπω, τήκω, τρώγω, θλίβω, πνίγω, etc., Hadley and Allen's "strong

vowel class,"2 and the many contract denominative verbs like

τιμά-ω, φιλέ-ω, ἀξιό-ω.  But see the ι. Class for these contract verbs.

New verbs were added to this list from nouns and some also from

verb-stems, γρηγορέ-ω from the old perfect ἐγρήγορα (this tense

never in the N. T.),3 στήκ-ω (Mk. 11: 25) from ἕστηκα (modern

Greek στέκω).4  In Lu. 1:24 περιέκρυβεν is probably imperfect,

not aorist, from κρύβω (κρύπτω).  Cf. ἐκρύβην.5  The LXX shows

these new presents from perfect stems (Thackeray, Gr., p. 224 f.).

          5. The Reduplicated Thematic Present. So  γίνομαι, (γίγν-ο-μαι,

*γι-γένομαι), πίπτ-ω (*πι-πέτ-ω), τίκτ-ω (*τι-τέκ-ω), --γν---, --πτ--, --κτ--,

being weak forms of –γεν--, --πετ--, --τεκ--.  The N. T. has also

ἰσχύ-ω from ἴσχω (*σι-σέχ-ω).

          6. The Thematic Present with a Suffix. There are five (—ι, —ν,

--σκτ, --θ).  Each of these divisions furnishes a number of verbs.

          (a) The ι class. It is very large. This suffix is used to make

verbs from roots and substantives. It is probable6 that originally

the suffix was —γι.  It is thought that contract verbs in –αω, --εω,

--οω, etc., originally had this ι as j or y which was dropped.7  It

is thus the chief way of forming denominative verbs and is pre-

eminently a secondary suffix.8  Some of these verbs are causative,

some intensive, some desiderative.9  The special Greek desidera-

tive in --σείω does not appear in the N. T., but forms like κοπιάω

are found. In particular, forms in -ιζω become so common that

they no longer have an intensive, iterative or causative force,10

 

            1 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 48. 2 Gr., p. 122.

            3 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 40.

            4 Ib., p. 41. The LXX MSS. show both γρηγορέω and στήκω. Cf. Helbing,

Gr. d. Sept., p. 82.

            5 Cf. Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 41.

            6 Cf. Monro, Hom. Gr., p. 34; Hirt, Handb. etc., p. 380.

            7 Hirt, ib., p. 383 f.        8 Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 440.

            9 Ib., pp. 445 ff. On the whole subject of contract verbs see Jann., Hist.

Gk. Gr., pp. 207 ff.                                           10 Jann., ib., p. 222.


352     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

but are used side by side with the older form, as βάπτω, βαπτίζω;

ῥαίνω, ῥαντίζω, etc. In all the --ζω forms the ι has united with a

palatal (guttural) or lingual (dental), a matter determined by the

aorist or future. So φυλάσ-σω is from φυλάκ-jω, φράζω from φράδ-

jω.  Other familiar combinations are ι and λ, as βάλ-jω=βάλλω, ι

with ν by transposition, as φάν-jω=φαίνω, ι with ρ likewise, as

ἄρ-jω=αἴρω.  In καίω and κλαίω the υ has dropped between α and ι.

In the N. T. verbs in –αίνω, -αίρω have –ανα, --αρα in the first aorist

active as already shown under the aorist tense (d).  Ἀμφιάζω (Lu.

12:28) is an example of a new present for ἀφιέννυμι. Cf. also

ἀποκτεννοντων (Mt. 10:28) in some MSS. for the older ἀποκτείνω,

-ννω, -νjω).  See Blass1  for the variations in the MSS. at many

places in the N. T. with this word. So ἐκχύννω (Mt. 26:28, etc.)

in the best MSS. for ἐκχέω. Only in Mt. 9:17 we have ἐκχεῖται

from ἐκχέω and in Rev. 16:1 ἐκχέατε2 in some MSS.

          (β) The ν class is also well represented in the N. T. with the-

matic stems. It takes various forms. There is the ν alone, as

κάμ-νω, --αν as ἁμαρτ-άνω, --νε as ἀφ-ικ-νέο-μαι. Sometimes the ν is

repeated in the root, as λαμβάνω (λαβ), μανθάνω (μαθ), τυγχάνω (τυχ).

In the κοινή (so LXX. and N. T.) this inserted ν (μ) is retained

in the aorist and future of λαμβάνω (ἐλήμφθην, λήμψομαι) contrary

to literary Attic. So the papyri.

          (γ) The σκ class. It is commonly called Inceptive,3 but Del-

bruck4 considers these verbs originally terminative in idea, while

Monro5 calls attention to the iterative idea common in Homer

with the suffix —σκε, --σκο.  The verbs with σκ may be either with-

out reduplication, as βό-σκω, θην<-σκω, ἱλά-σκομαι, φά-σκω, or with

reduplication as γι(γ)νώ-σκω, δι-δά-σκω (for δι-δάχ-σκω), μι-μνή-σκω,

πά-σχω (for πάθ-σκω).  Cf. ἀρέ-σκω, γαμ-ίσκω, γηρά-σκω, εὑρ-ίσκω,

μεθύ-σκω. Reduplication is thus a feature with root-verbs (non-

thematic) like δί-δω-μι and thematic like γί(γ)νο-μαι as well as

the σκ class. For reduplication in the aorist and the perfect

see (h). The iterative idea of some of these σκ verbs suits well the

reduplication.

          (δ) The τ class. It is not a very numerous one (about 18

verbs), though some of the verbs are common. The verb has

 

            1 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 41. The LXX has these new presents. Thack., p.225.

            2 Blass, ib. The LXX MSS. illustrate most of these peculiarities of verbs

in the present tense. Cf. Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., pp. 82-84;

            3 Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 436.

            4 Grundr., IV, p. 59. Cf. Brug., Grundr., II, § 669.

            5 Hom. Gr., p. 34.


                   CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                     353

 

always a labial stem like ἅπ-τω, βάπ-τω, τύπ-τω.  The root may end

in β as in καλύπ-τω, π as in τύπ-τω, or φ as in βάπ-τω.  It is even

possible that πτ may represent an original πj (cf. iota class).

          (ε) The θ class. Cf. ἀλή-θω, ἔσ-θω, κνή-θω, νή-θω in the present.

The modern Greek has developed many new presents on the

basis of the aorist or the perfect (Thumb, Handb., p. 143).

          (f) THE FUTURE TENSE (ὁ μέλλων χρόνος). The origin of this

tense has given rise to much discussion and some confusion.

Vincent and Dickson1 even say that the first aorist is derived

from the σ future! Like the other tenses there has been a de-

velopment along several lines. No general remark can be made

that will cover all the facts. As already remarked, the future

tense is fundamentally aoristic or punctiliar in idea and not dura-

tive or linear. The linear idea can be accented by the periphrastic

form, as ἔσεσθε λαλοῦντες (1 Cor. 14: 9). Cf. also Mt. 24:9; Lu.

1:20; 5:10; Mk. 13:25. But as a rule no such distinction is

drawn. The truth is that the future tense is a late development

in language. In the Sanskrit it is practically confined to the in-

dicative and the participle, as in the Greek to the indicative, in-

finitive and participle (optative only in indirect discourse, and

rarely then, not at all in N. T.). And in the Rigveda the sya

form occurs only some seventeen times.2 The Teutonic tongues

have no future form at all apart from the periphrastic, which ex-

isted in the Sanskrit also.3 In the modern Greek again the future

as a distinct form has practically vanished and instead there

occurs θά and the subjunctive or θέλω and the remnant of the in-

finitive, like our English "shall" or "will."4  Giles5 thinks it un-

certain how far the old Indo-Germanic peoples had developed a

future.

          Probably the earliest use of the future was one that still sur-

vives in most languages. It is just the present in a vivid, lively

sense projected into the future. So we say "I go a-fishing" as

Simon Peter did, ὑπάγω ἁλιεύειν (Jo. 21:3). The other disciples

respond ἐρχόμεθα καὶ ἡμεῖς σὺν σοί. This usage belongs to the realm

of syntax and yet it throws light on the origin of the future tense.

So Jesus used (Jo. 14:3) the present and future side by side (ἔρχο-

 

            1 Handb. of Mod. Gk., p. 82.

            2 Hirt, Handb. etc., p. 401.

            3 Giles, Comp. Philol., p. 446; Whitney, Sans. Gr., p. 333 f.

            4 Thumb, Handb., pp. 161 f., 173.

            5 Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 446. On the whole subject of "Indo-European

Futures" see Hadley, Ess. Phil. and Crit., pp. 184 ff.


354       A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

μαι καὶ παραλήμψομαι). We have seen already that a number of

aorists and presents like φη-μί had identically the same root and

with no original distinction. That is, the durative idea was not

distinguished from the aoristic or punctiliar. It is not strange,

therefore, to see a number of these roots with primary endings (cf.

subj. and opt. aorists) used as futures without any tense-suffix at

all. Some were originally either present or future in sense (cf.

ἔρχομαι above), others came to be used only as future. These

verbs appear in Homer naturally, as βίομαι, ἔδομαι, εἶμι, πίομαι, etc.1

Cf. N. T. φάγομαι.  It is possible that those with variable vowel

like ἔδομαι may really be the same form as the Homeric subjunc-

tive (like ἴομεν as opposed to ἴμεν).2  Πίομαι is common in Attic.

(N. T.) and is from aorist root (ἔ-πι-ον).  The form φάγομαι (LXX

and N. T.) is analogous (aorist, ἔφαγον).  The Attic used χέω as

future also, but LXX and N. T. have χεῶ (Blass, Gr. of N. T.

Gk., p. 42). Cf. Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 88, for LXX illustra-

tions to the same effect. The LXX has the classic ἔδομαι; not in

the N. T. (Thackeray, p. 231).

          It used to be said that the a future was merely a variation of

the Sanskrit sya, the y or j sound disappearing in the Greek.

This gave a simple explanation of the σ futures. But a rival the-

ory has been advanced which derives the σ future from the a

aorist.3 The frequency of the aorist subjunctive in Homer with

κέ (ἄν) in principal clauses much like the future indicative in Attic,

and the absence of a future passive, not to say future optative, in

Homer give some colour to this contention.4 Thus δείξω and the

Latin dixo would be identical in form and meaning.5  But Brug-

mann6 has perhaps solved the problem by the suggestion that

both explanations are true. Thus γράψω he derives from the

aorist subjunctive γράψω, a mixed tense with a double origin.

The use of —σιο/ε in the Doric lends weight to the derivation of

these verbs at least from the sya (Sanskrit) type.7  Hirt8 re-

gards σεο/ε (Doric) as a combination of the σ future and the ε

future (liquid verbs, for instance) and considers it a new Greek

formation. This Doric future therefore may be as old as any,

 

            1 Sterrett, Hom. IL, N. 38.

            2 Giles, Man., p. 447. Cf. Moulton, Prol., p. 184; Riern. and Goelzer,

Phonet., p. 438.

            3 Ib., p. 446. Cf. also Hirt, Handb. etc., p. 401 f.

            4 Sterrett, Hom. Il., N. 27.                     5 Giles, Man., p. 446.

            6 Griech. Gr., p. 320. This position is accepted by          p. 105.

            7 Ib., p. 105 f.                           8 Handb. etc., p. 403 f.


              CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)               355

 

if not the oldest suffix, in fact the really distinctively future

suffix. In the N. T. this Doric form survives in πεσοῦμαι1 (Mt.

10:29).  Ῥέω has ῥεύσω (Jo. 7:38), κλαίω has κλαύσω (Lu. 6:25),

while φεύγω has φεύξομαι (Jo. 10:5). The other forms common

in Attic have no future in the N. T. This mixed2  origin of the

future (partly aorist subj., partly Indo-Germ. sio) shows itself

in the Aktionsart of the tense. So Moulton notes προάξω (Mk.

14:28) as durative, but ἄξει (1 Th. 4:14) as aoristic. Cf.

Thumb, Handb., p. 123.

          Thus we may gain further light3 on the Ionic-Attic future of

verbs in –ιζω.  It is like the Doric —σεο/ε.  So we have –ισέω, drop-

ping σ we get –ιέω---ιῶ.  These verbs in are very common in

the later Greek. In the N. T. the usage varies between this form

of the future and the aoristic form in —σο/ε.  The LXX, like the

Ptolemaic papyri (Thackeray, p. 228), has usually –ιῶ in first sin-

gular and so μετοικιῶ (Ac. 7:43) and παροργιῶ (Ro. 10:19), both

quotations. Elsewhere W. H.4 prefer the forms in —ίσω, and Blass5

thinks that in the original passages of the N. T. the —ίσω forms

are genuine. So the forms in —ίσει (like βαπτίσει) are uniform in

the N. T. (Lu. 3:16) save καθαριεῖ (Heb. 9:14) and διακαθαριεῖ,

(Mt. 3:12).6  MSS. vary between ἀφοριεῖ and ίσει, φωτιεῖ and

ίσει, χρονιεῖ, and –ίσει.  Cf. Blass.7  So in Eph. 6:8; Col. 3:25,

the MSS. vary between κομιεῖται and κομίσεται.  Some MSS. read

κομιούμενοι in 2 Pet. 2:13.8  All editors9 accept κομιεῖσθε in 1 Pet.

5:4.  The active plural W. H.10 print as –ιοῦσι always (as μακα-

ριοῦσιν, Lu. 1:48) save in γνωρίσουσιν (Col. 4:9).

          The syncopated futures11 from the dropping of σ do not survive

in the N. T. in καλέσω, τελέσω which always retain the σ.12  So even

ἀπολέσω (Mt. 21:41), though ἀπολῶ is common in the LXX and

 

            1 And this πεσοῦμαι is possibly not from πετ-σοῦμαι, but a change of τ to σ.

Cf. K.-B1., II, p. 107; Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 322; Hirt. Handb., p. 404.

Henry (Comp. Gr. of Gk. and Lat., p. 116) considers the Doric future to be the

affix of the future twice over, as σεσο, σεο.

            2 Moulton, Prol., p. 149.                        3 Cf. K.-B1., II, p. 106 f.

            4  Notes on Orth., p. 163. Cf. Mayser, Gr., p. 356.

            5 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 42.

            6 Ib. But Blass (ib.) prefers ἐγγιεῖ (Jas. 4:8) .

            7 Ib. See Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., pp. 84 f., 87 f., for the LXX exx. of verbs

in –ζω.

            8 Ib.                                                                  10 Ib.

            9 Notes on Orth., p. 163.                                   11 Giles, Man., p. 446 f.

            12 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 41 f. Brug. (Griech. Gr., p. 321) considers this

a new formation after the aor. subj. suffix. The LXX keeps σ. Cf. Helbing,

Gr. d. Sept., p. 86; Thack., Gr., p. 230.


356     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

is quoted once in the N. T. (1 Cor. 1:19). However, the middle

ἀπολοῦμαι is the N. T. form (Lu. 5:37) like ἀποθανοῦμαι.  Ἐλαύνω

has no future in the N. T. The N. T., like the LXX, has a future

form ἀφέλῶ (Rev. 22:19) from the aorist εἶλον of αἰρέω.

          The liquid verbs in λ, ν, ρ present few problems. They belong

to the aorist subjunctive type of formation.1 Here again we have

syncopation of the σ.  Verbs like βάλλω (βαλῶ), μένω (μενῶ), αἴρω

(ἀρῶ) form the future with the variable vowel ο/ε added to the

stem without a in the N. T. as in the earlier Greek.

          Blass2 has shown that in the N. T. the future active has largely

displaced the future middle with verbs that were defective in the

active voice. These futures are as follows:  ἁμαρτήσω (Mt. 18:21),

ἀπαντήσω (Mk. 14:13), ἁρπάσω (Jo. 10:28), βλέψω (Ac. 28:26),

γελάσω (Lu. 6:21), διώξω (Mt. 23:34), κλαύσω (Lu. 6:25), κράζω  

(Lu. 19:40 אBL), παίξω (Mk. 10:34), ῥεύσω (Jo. 7:38), σπουδάσω  

(2 Pet. 1:15), συναντήσω (Lu. 22:10). We see this tendency al-

ready in the LXX (Thackeray, Gr., p. 231 f.). On the other

hand the future middle alone occurs with ἀποθανοῦμαι (Jo. 8:24),

γνώσομαι (1 Cor. 4: 19), λήμψομαι (Mt. 10:41), ὄψομαι (Mt. 24:30),

πεσοῦμαι (Doric, Mt. 10:29), πίομαι (Mk. 10:39), φάγομαι (Lu. 14:

15), φεύξομαι (Jo. 10:5).  Χαρήσομαι (Lu. 1:14) Blass3 regards as

Attic future from the aorist (ἐχάρην) as compared with the future

χαιρήσω from the present. Both ἀκούσω (Jo. 5:25) and ἀκούσομαι,

(Ac. 21:22, chiefly in the Acts) are found, and ζήσω (Jo. 5:25)

and ζήσομαι (Jo. 11:25).

          The so-called second future passive as seen in the case of χαρήσο-

μαι above is really just the middle ending with σ put to the aorist

active stem. There is no difference in form or sense between

βή-σο-μαι and σταλ-ή-σο-μαι save the η-- which was really a part

of the active stem of these verbs.4 The point is that fundamentally

these so-called second future passives are really future middles

corresponding to active aorists like the future middles and pres-

ents above (λήμψομαι, for instance). This point is made clearer

by the fact that the Doric5 used only active endings like ἀναγρα-

φησεῖ (not -εται). Homer, besides, only has one second future pas-

sive (μιγήσομαι, really middle) and none in -θησ--.6  Instead he uses

the middle future as later Greek continued to do with verbs like

τιμήσομαι.  Cf. γενήσομαι from ἐ-γεν-όμην. Some verbs indeed used

both this second future passive like φανήσομαι (Mt. 24:30) which

 

            1 Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 321.                  4 Giles, Man., pp. 410, 427.

            2 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 42.                       5 Ib., p. 447.

            3 Ib., p. 43.                                           6 K.-B1., II, p. 111.

 

    


         CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                357

 

is punctiliar and φανοῦμαι (1 Pet. 4:18) which may be durative

like the Attic as Moulton1 argues.  So παύσονται (1 Cor. 13:8)

and ἐπαναπαήσεται (Lu. 10:6). Cf. also ἀνοιγήσομαι (Mt. 7:7),

ἁρπαγήσομαι (1 Th. 4:17), φανήσομαι (Mt. 24:30), ὑποταγήσομαι

(1 Cor. 15:28), ψυγήσομαι (Mt. 24:12), χαρήσομαι (Lu. 1:14, see

above).

          The first future passive so-called is built upon the distinctively2

Greek aorist in –θη–.  It is unknown to Homer, as stated above,

and, like the second aorist passive, is aorist in origin and idea.

Here again the Doric used the active endings3 like συναχθησοῦντι.

This later form in –θησ-- grew continually in usage over the merely

middle form like τιμήσομαι. But the passive future did not always

have the passive sense, as has been shown in the case of ἀνακιθή-

σομαι (Mt. 8:11), ἀποκριθήσομαι (Mt. 25:37), etc.4    Ἀνοιχθήσομαι

also appears in Lu. 11:9 f. in some MSS.  As an example of the

usual forms in the N. T. take γνωσθήσομαι (1 Cor. 14:7). Only

μνησθήσομαι (not μεμνήσομαι) and σταθήσομαι (not ἑστήξω) appear in

the N. T.5

          For a periphrastic future passive expressing continuance see

ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι (Mt. 10:22).6  This is naturally not a very com-

mon idiom for this tense, though the active periphrastic future

is less infrequent as already shown.

               (g) THE PERFECT TENSES (τέλειοι χρόνοι).

          1. The Name.  It does fairly well if we do not think of time in

connection with the tense, a mistake that Clyde makes.7  The

completed state does not of itself have reference to present

time. That comes later and by usage in the indicative alone in con-

trast to past and future. Originally the perfect was merely an in-

tensive or iterative tense like the repetition of the aoristic present.8

          2. The Original Perfect. The Greek perfect is an inheritance

from the Indo-Germanic original and in its oldest form had no

reduplication, but merely a vowel-change in the singular.9 Indeed

191:6a (Sanskrit veda, Latin vidi, English wot) has never had re-

duplication.10  It illustrates also the ablaut from ιδ-- to οιδ-- in the

singular, seen in Sanskrit and Gothic also.11  Cf. Latin capio,

cepi (a to e).  Note also κεῖ-μαι in the sense of τέ-θει-μαι.

 

            1 Prol., p. 150.                                       7 Gk. Synt., p. 71.

            2 Giles, Man., pp. 420, 447.                   8 Giles, Man., p. 449.

            3 Ib., p. 447.                                          9 Hirt, Handb. etc., pp. 406, 410.

            4 See VI, (e), in this chapter.                 10 Giles, Man., p. 449.

            5 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 36.              11 Hirt, Handb. etc., p. 410.

            6 Ib p. 204.


358      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

          But the vowel-change characteristic of the original perfects is

seen in other verbs which did use reduplication. Reduplication

will receive separate treatment a little later, as it pertains to the

present and aorist tenses also. It may be here remarked that the

reduplicated form of some iterative presents doubtless had some

influence in fastening reduplication upon the perfect tense. Note

the English "mur-mur " (Greek γογ-γύζω, ἀρ-αρ-ίσκω), where the

syllable is doubled in the repetition. It was a natural process.

A number of these reduplicated forms with the mere change in the

vowel appear in the N. T. This so-called second perfect, like the

second aorist, is a misnomer and is the oldest form.1  In Homer

indeed it is the usual form of the perfect.2  These old root-perfects,

old inherited perfect forms according to Brugmann,3 persist in

the κοινή and are reasonably common in the papyri,4 the inscrip-

tions5 and the N. T. They are of two classes: (1) real μι per-

fects without any perfect suffix, like ἑστάναι (Ac. 12:14); (2)

second perfects in —α, like γέγονα, λέλοιπα. As N. T. examples

may be mentioned ἀκήκοα (Ac. 6:11), γέγονα (1 Cor. 13:1)), εἴωθα

(Lu. 4:16), γέγραθα (Jo. 19:22), οἶδα (Jo. 10:4), ὄλωλα (ἀπ--,

Mt. 10:6), etc. These forms are found in the LXX. Cf. Hel-

bing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 103; Thackeray, Gr., p. 252 f. But the κοινή

gave up the shorter (without –α) forms of the plural indicative

active perfect of  ἵστημι (ἕσταμεν, ἕστατε, ἑστᾶσιν). See this chapter,

iv, (d), 3, for details.

          3. The κ Perfect.  This is a new type created by the Greek lan-

guage of which no adequate explanation has yet been offered. The

Attic inscriptions already had the κ form (Meisterhans, p. 189 f.).

It is apparently at first in the singular, as in ἕστηκα (pl. ἕσταμεν), etc.6

One might think that just as ἥκω has a perfect sense like κεῖμαι and

finally had a few perfect forms7 (like ἥκασιν), so by analogy some

κ verbs became the type and analogy did the rest. But Giles8 ob-

serves that the stems of the twelve or fourteen κ perfects in Homer

all end in a vowel, a liquid or a nasal, not one in κ. And then the

 

            1 Riem. and Goelzer, Phonet., p. 445.

            2 Sterrett, Hom. II., N. 43. So γέγονα, εἴωθα, λέλοιπα, πέποιθα, etc.

            3 Gk. Gr., p. 323.

            4 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., pp. 372 ff.

            5 Nachm., Magn. Inschr., p. 159 f.

            6 Hirt, Handb. etc., p. 412 f.

            7 In the LXX ἥκαμεν, ἥκατε, ἥκασιν occur. The pap. add καθηκυίας, ἡκότων,

ἡκέναι. Wackern., Theol. Literaturzeit., 1908, p. 38. Cf. Helbing, Gr. d. Sept.,

p. 103 f.; Thack., Gr., p. 269. The pap. show the perfect forms in the plural.

Mayser, p. 372.                                     8 Man., p. 450.


           CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                     359

 

three κ aorists (ἔδωκα, ἔθηκα, ἧκα) call for explanation. But per

contra there are some perfects in Homer which have κ stems like δέ-

δορκα, ἔοικα, τέτηκα, etc. So that after all analogy may be the true

explanation of the κ perfects which came, after Homer's time, to

be the dominant type in Greek. But the —κα perfects are rare in

Homer. The examples are so common (δέδωκα, etc.), in the κοινή

as in the classic Greek, as to need no list. Note ἕστηκα intransi-

tive and ἕστακα transitive.

          4. The Aspirated Perfects. They are made from labials and

palatals (φ, χ) and are absent from Homer. Even in the early

classical period they are confined to πέπομφα and τέτροφα.1  Ho-

mer did use this aspirate in the peculiar middle form like τετρα-

φαται.2  He has indeed τέτροφα from τρέφω3 and probably just here,

we may see the explanation by analogy of τέτροφα from τρέπω

and so of all the aspirated forms.4  An important factor was the

fact that κ, γ, χ were not distinguished in the middle perfect

forms. As a N. T. example of this later aspirated perfect take

προσενήνοχα (Heb. 11:17). Cf. also εἴληφα, πέπραχα, τέταχα.

          5. Middle and Passive Forms. It is only in the active that

the perfect used the κ or the aspirated form (φ, χ). We have

seen already that in the κοινή some active perfect forms drop the

distinctive endings and we find forms like ἑώρακαν and ἑώρακες.

Helbing (Gr. d. Sept., pp. 101-103) gives LXX examples of root-

perfects like ἔρρωγα, κ perfects like τέθεικα, ἕστηκα and transitive

ἕστακα, aspirated perfects like ἔρρηχα.  The middle and passive

perfects did use the reduplication, but the endings were added

directly to this reduplicated stem as in λέ-λυ-μαι. On the history

of the ending —κα see Pfordten, Zur Geschichte des griechischen

Perfectums, 1882, p. 29.

          6. The Decay of the Perfect Forms. In the Sanskrit the per-

fect appears in half the roots of the language, but in the later

Sanskrit it tends more and more to be confused with the mere

past tenses of the indicative (aorist and imperf.) and grows less

common also.5 In the Latin, as is well known, the perfect and

the aorist tenses blended. In vidi and dedi we see preserved6  

the old perfect and in dixi we see the old aorist. The Greek

of the Byzantine period shows a great confusion between the per-

fect and the aorist, partly due to the Latin influence.7  Finally

 

            1 Giles, Man., p. 451.                5 Whitney, Sans. Gr., pp. 279, 295 f.

            2 Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 325.      6 Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 451.

            3 Sterrett, Hom. IL, N. 43.         7 Moulton, Prol., p. 142.

            4 Giles, Man., p. 451.


360     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

in the modern Greek vernacular the perfect form is lost save in

the perfect passive participle like κεκλημένος. The perfect active

is now made with ἔχω and the passive participle (ἔχω δεμένο)

or with ἔχω and a root similar to the third singular aorist sub-

junctive (ἔχω δέσει or δέσῃ).  Cf. Thumb, Handb., p. 161. The

only κ perfect in modern Greek is εὕρηκα, "the only certain rem-

nant of the ancient perfect" (ib., p. 148). Cf. ἔχε με παρῃτημένον

(Lu. 14:18). Cf. also πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν (Mk.

8 : 17). This is much like the English perfect in reality, not like

the Greek ἔχω and aorist participle (like ἔχω ἀκούσας). Cf. Sonnen-

schein, Greek Grammar, Syntax, 1894, p. 284. The perfect pas-

sive in modern Greek vernacular is formed like ἔχω λυθῆ (—ει) or

λελυμένος εἶμαι.1  But we are in no position to throw stones at the

Greeks, for we in English have never had a perfect save the peri-

phrastic form. How far the perfect and the aorist may have be-

come confused in the N. T. in sense is a matter of syntax to be

discussed later.2

          7. The Perfect in the Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative. Hence

the perfect is practically3 confined to the indicative. No example

of the perfect optative occurs even in the periphrastic form. The

subjunctive perfect, except the form εἰδῶ (εἰδῆτε, 1 Jo. 5 : 13), ap-

pears only in the periphrastic conjugation, of which a few examples

remain. So the active, as ᾖ πεποιηκώς (Jas. 5:15), πεποιθότες ὦμεν

(2 Cor. 1:9), and the passive, as ὦσιν τετελειωμένοι (Jo. 17:23),

κεκλημένος (Lu. 14:8), ᾖ πεπληρωμένη (Jo. 16:24).  So also Jo. 17:

19, 1 Cor. 1:10, etc. The imperative makes a little worse show-

ing. We still have ἴστε (Jas. 1:19; Eph. 5:5; Heb. 12:17 all pos-

sible indicatives), πεφίμωσο (Mk. 4:39) and ἔρρωσθε (Ac. 15:29).

The periphrastic imperative perfect is also found as ἕστωσαν

περιεζωσμέναι (Lu. 12:35). In simple truth, as previously re-

marked (see proof in Prof. Harry's articles), the perfect sub-

junctive, optative and imperative never had any considerable

vogue in Greek, not as much as in Sanskrit. In Homer the per-

fect subjunctive active is more common than in later Greek, but

it is rare in Homer.4

          8. The Perfect Indicative. It is to the indicative that we turn

 

            1 Thumb., Handb., p. 165. Certainly the aorists in -κα are very common in

the mod. Gk. (Thumb, Handb., pp. 140, 146 ff.).

            2 Cf. Moulton, Prol., p. 143 f.

            3 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 200 f. Cf. discussion between Prof. Harry and

Prof. Sonnenschein in Cl. Rev., 1906, and La Roche, Beitr. z. griech. Gr., 1893.

            4 Sterrett, Hom. Il., N. 43.


          CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                 361

 

for the real development of the perfect. Here the perfect was for

long very frequent indeed, and the time element comes in also.

The ancients did not agree in the names for the three tenses of per-

fect action in the indicative. The Stoics1 called the present perfect

συντελικὸς (or τέλειος) χρόνος ἐνεστώς, the past perfect συντελικὸς (τέ-

λειος) χρόνος παρῳχημένος, the future perfect συντελικὸς (τέλειος) χρόνος

μέλλων.  Sometimes the present perfect was called merely ὁ παρα-

κείμενος χρόνος, the past perfect ὁ ὑπερσυντελικὸς χρόνος, and the future

perfect ὁ μετ’ ὀλίγον μέλλων χρόνος (futurum exactum).  The name

plu-perfect is not a good one. The tense occurs in the N. T.

with 22 verbs and 15 have the augment (H. Scott). Thus τεθεμε-

λίωτο (Mt. 7:25) and ἐληλύθει (Jo. 6:17), but ἐβέβλητο (Lu. 16:20)

and περιεδέδετο (Jo. 11:44). Cf. εἶχον ἀποκειμένην (Lu. 19:20) in the

light of modern Greek. In the N. T. the past perfect is not very

frequent, nor was it ever as abundant as in the Latin.2 It goes

down as a distinct form with the present perfect in modern Greek.

Hirt3 calls attention to the fact that Homer knows the past per-

fect only in the dual and the plural, not the singular, and that the

singular ending is a new formation, a contraction of --εα into

η.  In the N. T., however, only –ειν is used. It is not certain

whether the past perfect is an original Indo-Germanic form. The

future perfect was always a very rare tense with only two ac-

tive forms of any frequency, ἑστήξω and τεθνήξω.  The middle and

passive could make a better showing. In Heb. 8:11 εἰδήσουσιν, is

probably future active (from LXX),4 and in Lu. 19:40 some

MSS., but not אBL (rejected by W. H.), give κεκράξονται (cf. LXX).

In Heb. 2:13 (another quotation from the LXX) we have the

periphrastic form ἔσομαι πεποιθώς. The future perfect passive occurs

in the N. T. only in the periphrastic form in such examples as

ἔσται δεδεμένον (Mt. 16:19), ἔσται λελυμένα (Mt. 18:18), ἔσοτναι

διαμεμερισμένοι (Lu. 12 : 52). Cf. ἔσῃ κατ[α]τεθειμ[]νο(σ)  B.G.U. 596

(A.D. 84). In the nature of the case the future perfect would not

often be needed. This periphrastic future perfect is found as

early as Homer.5  The papyri likewise show some examples.6

 

            1 K.-B1., II, p. 2 f.

            2 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 201. Brug. calls the past perf. a "neue Bildung."

            3 Handb. etc., p. 415 f.

            4 So Hirt follows Wackern. in seeing a new stem here εἰδη--. Cf. ib., p. 416.

B in Deut. 8:3 has εἴδησαν like the aorist εἴδησα from Arist. onwards. Cf.

Mayser, Gr., p. 370; Thack., Gr., p. 278.

            5 Sterrett, Hom. Il., N. 27.

            6 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 377. In the Boeotian inscr. the past perf.

and the fut. perf. are both absent.


362       A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

The present perfect and the past perfect also have the periphrastic

conjugation. So we find with comparative indifference1  ἔστιν

γεγραμμένα (Jo. 20:30) and in the next verse γέγραπται.  So also

ἦν γεγραμμένον (Jo. 19:19) and ἐπεγέγραπτο (Ac. 17:23). Cf. also

Lu. 2:26. The active has some examples also, though not so

many, as ἑστώς εἰμι (Ac. 25:10), and ἦσαν προεωρακότες (Ac. 21:29).

          9. Σ in Perfect Middle and Passive and Aorist Passive. It may

be due to a variety of causes. Some of these verbs had an original

σ in the present stem, like τελέσ)ω, ἀκού(σ)ω.  Hence τετέλεσμαι,

ἤκουσμαι (ἠκούσθην) etc.2  Others are dental stems like πείθ-ω, πέ-

πεισμαι. Others again are ν stems which in Attic (apparently

analogical) changed to σ, as φαίνω, πέφασμαι, but in the N. T. this

ν assimilates to the μ as in ἐξηραμμένος (Mk. 11:20) from ξηραίνω, μεμιαμμένος (Tit. 1:15) from μιαίνω.  Then again some verbs take

the σ by analogy merely, as in the case of ἔγνωσμαι, ἐγνώσθην

(1 Cor. 13:12), κέκλεισμαι (Lu. 11:7), λέλουσμαι (Heb. 10:22).

               (h) REDUPLICATION (διπλασιασμός or ἀναδίπλωσις).

          1. Primitive. Now this primitive repetition of the root belongs

to many languages and has a much wider range than merely the

perfect tense. Hence it calls for separate treatment. It is older,

this repetition or intensifying of a word, than either the inflection

of nouns or the conjugation of verbs.3 Root reduplication ex-

isted in the parent language.4

          2. Both Nouns and Verbs. Among nouns note ἀγ-ωγός, βάρ-

βαρος, βέ-βηλος, etc. But it was among verbs that reduplication

found its chief development.5

          3. In Three Tenses in Verbs. It is in the aorist, the present

and the perfect. This is precisely the case with the Sanskrit,

where very many aorists, some presents and nearly all perfects

have reduplication.6  In Homer7  the reduplication of the second

 

            1 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 202 f.; Brug. (Griech. Gr., p. 330 f.) points

out how in prehistoric times the periphrastic form alone existed in the subj.

and opt. middle and passive, as indeed was practically true always for all

the voices.

            2 Ib., p. 326. Cf. Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., p. 100 f.; Thack., pp. 219 ff., for

LXX illustr. of both σ and ν (μ).

            3 Brug., Comp. Gr. (transl.), vol. IV, p. 10. See note there for books on

Reduplication. Add Lautensach, Gr. Stud. (1899).

            4 Ib., p. 11. Cf. K.-B1., II, p. 8.

            5 Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 176. Fritzsche (Ques. de redupl. graeca; Curtius,

Stud. zu griech. and lat. Gr., pp. 279 ff.) considers the doubling of the syl-

lable (iteration) the origin of all reduplication like ἀρ-αρ-ίσκω, βι-βά-ζω.

            6 Whitney, Sans. Gr., p. 222.                 7 Sterrett, Hom. Il., N. 32.


              CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)              363

 

aorist is much more frequent than in later Greek, but forms like

ἤγαγον, ἤνεγκον, εἶπον, persist in N. T. Greek and the κοινή gener-

ally. Cf. ἐκέκραξα in Ac. 24 : 21. The Greek present shows

reduplication in three classes of presents, viz. the root class

(like δί-δωμι, ἵ-η-μι, ἵ-στημι, etc.), the thematic presents (like

γί-γνο-μαι, πι-<πτω, etc.), inceptive verbs (like γι-γνώ-σκω, etc.).

The most common reduplication in Greek is, of course, that in

the perfect tense, where it is not like augment, mode-sign or per-

sonal endings. It is an integral part of the tense in all modes,

voices and persons, until we see its disappearance (p. 365) in the

later Greek. In the vernacular the extinction is nearly complete.1

Even presents2 like γνώσκω occur in modern Greek. Dieterich3

gives numerous examples of dropped reduplicatiion in inscriptions

and papyri. It is absent in the modern Greek vernacular, even

in the participle.4

          4. Three Methods in Reduplication. Perhaps the oldest is the

doubling of the whole syllable, chiefly in presents and aorists, like

γογ-γύζω, ἀρ-αρίσκω, ἤγ-αγ-ον, etc. This is the oldest form of re-

duplication5 and is more common in Greek than in Latin.6  The

later grammarians called it Attic reduplication because it was less

common in their day,7 though, as a matter of fact, Homer used it

much more than did the Attic writers.8  But perfects have this

form also, as ἀκήκοα, ἐλήλυθα, etc. But the reduplication by ι is

confined to presents like δί-δωμι, γί-γνομαι, γι-γνώσκω, etc. And

most perfects form the reduplication with ε and the repetition of

the first letter of the verb as λέ-κυκα. But Homer had πέπιθον and

other such aorists.  Εἶπον is really an example of such an aorist.

          5. Reduplication in the Perfect. The history is probably as

follows in the main. Originally there were some perfects without

reduplication,9 a remnant of which we see in οἶδα. The doubling

of the whole syllable was the next step like ἀκ-ήκοα, ἐ-γρή-γορ-α,

ἐλ-ήλυθα, ἀπόλωλα, etc., like the present and aorist usage.10  Then

comes the ε with repetition of the initial letter of a consonant-

 

            1 See Jann., Hist. Gr., p. 190 f., for exx. like ἔτακτο even in Polyb., and later

γραμμένος, etc.

            2 Ib. Cf. Thumb, Handb., p. 148 f.

            3 Unters. etc., p. 215.                            6 Giles, Comp. Philol., p. 409.

            4 Thumb, Handb., p. 148 f.                    7 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 190.

            5 Hirt, Handb. etc., p. 369.                    8 Sterrett, Hom. Il., N. 32.

            9 Cf. Brug., Comp. Gr. (transl.), IV, p. 384. Cf. also Hirt, Handb. etc.

p. 407; Brug., Griech. Gr., p. 259.

            10 Ib., Helbing, Gr. d. Sept., pp. 70-82, treats together augment and redu-

plication, not a very satisfactory method.


364     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

stem like λε-λοιπα. But here some further modifications crept in.

The aspirates did not repeat, but we have τέ-θεικα. Those with a

did not repeat it, but instead used the rough breathing as ἕστηκα

or the smooth like ἔ-σχηκα. This was all for euphony. But forms   

like ἔ-σχηκα, ἔ-σπασμαι fall under another line also, for, if the verb         

begins with a double consonant, the consonant need not be used.

So ἔ-γνωκα, but βέ-βληκα, γέ-γραφα.  The Cretan dialect has in-

deed ἔγρατται=γέ-γραπται.1  So far the N. T. phenomena are in

harmony with the general Greek history, as indeed is the case with

the papyri2 and the inscriptions.3  In Lu. 1:27 and 2:5, we have

ἐ-μνηστευμένη, not μεμν. (cf. μέμνημαι). Just as σ verbs did not repeat,

so with verbs sometimes. So ἐριμμένοι (Mt. 9:36), ἔρρωσθε (Ac.

15:29), etc. But in Rev. 19:13 W. H. read ῤεραντισμένον, though

Hort4 advocates ῤαραμμένον.  D has ῤεριμμένοι in Mt. 9:36 above.

This reduplication of initial is contrary to Attic rule. For the

LXX see Thackeray, Gr., p. 204 f. This use of ε begins to spread

in the κοινή and is seen in LXX MSS., as in A ἐπέγραπτο (Deut.

9:10). For similar forms in Ionic and late writers see Winer-

Schmiede1.5 Once more several verbs that begin with a liquid

have ει as the reduplication in the Attic and Ionic, though not in

all dialects. Perhaps euphony and analogy entered to some ex-

tent in the case of εἴ-ληφα (λαμβάνω), εἴρηκα (cf. ἐρρήθην). Note

also εἴληχα and εἴλοχα.  With verbs beginning with a vowel there

was sometimes the doubling of the syllable as ἀκήκοα, or the mere

lengthening of the vowel as ἤκουσμαι, or the addition of ε alone

with contraction as εἰθισμένος, or uncontracted as ἔοικα (from εἴκω).

Cf. εἴωθα.  In Jo. 3:21 (so 1 Pet. 4:3) we have εἴργασμαι as in

Attic and εἰλκωμένος in Lu. 16:20. In ὁραω we have ἑορακα in

Paul's Epistles (1 Cor. 9:1) and sometimes a sort of double

reduplication (like εἴωθα) as ἑώρακα (Jo. 1:18). So Attic. See

Additional Note. In Col. 2:1 the form ἑόρακαν calls for notice

both for its reduplication and its ending (cf. ἑώρακαν Lu. 9: 36).

So also ἀνέῳγεν (1 Cor. 16:9; א ἠνεῳγώς, Jo. 1 : 51) and ἀνεῳγμένη

(2 Cor. 2:12). Indeed in this last verb the preposition may re-

additional reduplication (treble therefore), as in ἠνεῳγμένη

(Rev. five times). See also ἠμφιεσμένον (Mt. 11:8 = Lu. 7:25) from

ἀμφιέννυμι.  But as a rule with compound verbs in the N. T. re-

 

            1 Hirt, Handb. etc., p. 408.

            2 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., pp. 338

            3 Nachm., p. 150 f.; Schweizer, Perg. Inschr., p. 171.

            4 Notes on Orth., p. 170.

            5 F. 103. Cf. also K.-B1., II, p. 23, and Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 38.


             CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)            365

 

duplication comes only between the prepositions and the verb.

Sometimes the reduplication is not used, as in εὐαρεστηκέναι (Heb.,

11:5), but אDEP have εὐηρ--.  We have ᾠκοκόμητο (Lu. 4:29),

but οἰκοδομῆσθαι (Lu. 6:48).1  Cf. οἰκοδομήθη  (Jo. 2:20) for ab-

sence of augment. Reduplication in the perfect has disappeared

from the modern Greek (Thumb, Handb., p. 119) and is showing

signs of decay in the κοινή. For suppression of reduplication in

papyri see Mayser, p. 341.

               (i) AUGMENT (αὔξησις).

          1. The Origin of Augment. It has never been explained. It is

generally conceded to be an independent word, an adverb, added

to the verb, which is an enclitic after the augment like ἔ-λιπε.2  We

have mere conjectures for the origin of the adverb, possibly a

locative of the pronoun-stem. In Sanskrit it is a.

          2. Where Found. It is found in Sanskrit, Iranian, Armenian

and Greek, and only in the past tenses of the indicative. But in

Mt. 12:20 we actually have κατεάξει. (fut. ind. of κατάγνυμι, and

in Jo. 19:31 κατεαρῶσιν) (aor. pass. subj.), probably to distinguish

these forms from κατάγω).  So Winer-Schmiedel, p. 98. This

"false augment" is very common in later Greek (Hatzidakis, Einl.,

p. 64). Augment persists in modern Greek (Thumb, p. 117).

          3. The Purpose of Augment.  It denotes past time. The sec-

ondary endings do that also and with sufficient clearness at first.

More than half of the past tenses of the Sanskrit do not have the

augment.3 In Homer some verbs like ὁράω never had augment,

and often for metrical reasons the augment is not found in Ho-

mer. He used much freedom in the matter.4  Jannaris5 is prob-

ably right in the opinion that this freedom is due to the original

fulness of the verb-endings. Augment won a firm foothold in

prose before it did in poetry,6 but never was everywhere essential.

It varied greatly in its history as will be shown.

          4. The Syllabic Augment (αὔξησις συλλαβική). Its use with the

past tenses of the indicative was not exactly uniform, being less

constant with the past perfect than with the aorist and imperfect.

The syllabic augment occurs also with some initial vowel verbs

due to original digamma F, σ in the anlaut. So εἴασεν (Ac. 28:4),

 

            1 Moulton (Cl. Rev., Feb., 1901, p. 36) cites ἀπαιτῆσθαι, ἑτοιμάκαμεν from the

pap.

            2 Brug., Comp. Gr. (transl.), IV, p. 25. Jann. (Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 185) thinks

it is an archaic form of the imperf. of εἰμί (ε, εν).

            3 Whitney, Sans. Gr., p. 221.                 5 Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 185.

            4 Sterrett, Hom. Il., N. 30 f.                   6 Brug., Comp. Gr. (transl.), IV, p. 32.


366        A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

εἴδομεν (Mt. 2:2), εἶπεν (Mt. 2:8), εἵλατο (2 Th. 2:13), etc.

Cf. Thackeray, Gr., p. 200 f. In the N. T. it is absent from the

past perfect more frequently than it is present, as is true of the

papyri1 and late Greek generally.2  So, for instance, τεθεμελίωτο  

(Mt. 7:25), πεποιήκεισαν (Mk. 15:7), παραδεδώκωισαν (Mk. 15:10),

ἐληλύθει. (Jo. 6:17), etc. On the other hand the augment does

appear in such examples as ἐπεποίθει (Lu. 11:22), ἐβέβλητο (Lu.

16:20), ἐγεγόνει (Jo. 6:17), συνετέθειντο (Jo. 9:22), περιεδέδετο (Jo.

11:44), etc. It was only in the past perfect that both augment

and reduplication appeared. The κοινή strove to destroy the dis-

tinction between reduplication and augment so that ultimately

reduplication vanished (Thumb, Hellenismus, p. 170). But first

the augment vanished in the past perfect. The Attic sometimes

had ἑστήκειν (Winer-Schmiedel, p. 100). Hort (Notes on Orthog-

raphy, p. 162) contends for ἱστήκειν uniformly in the N. T. as

more than mere itacism for εἱστήκειν, for even B has ι five times

in spite of its fondness for ει.  So W. H. uniformly, as Rev. 7:11

and even in Jo. 1:35 and Lu. 23:49.  Cf. similar itacism between

εἶδον and ἴδον in the MSS. (Hort, Notes on Orthography, p. 162).

On augment in the LXX see Conybeare and Stock, Sel. from

LXX, pp. 36 ff.; Swete, Intr. to 0. T., p. 305; Thackeray, Gr.,

pp. 195 ff. Syllabic augment was much more tenacious with

the aorist and imperfect than the temporal.

          5. The Temporal Augment (αὔξησις χρονκή). The simplicity of

the syllabic and the resulting confusion of the temporal had un-

doubtedly something to do with the non-use of the temporal aug-

ment in many cases.3  The κοινή shows this tendency.4 Even the

Attic was not uniform in the use of the temporal augment. At

bottom there is no real distinction between the temporal and syl-

labic augment. Both express time and both make use of the syl-

labic ε. The difference is more one of the eye and ear than of

fact. What we call the temporal augment is the result of the con-

traction of this ε with the initial vowel of the verb.5 As remarked

above, this very confusion of result, difficult to keep clear as the

vowel-sounds tended to blend more and more, led to the disuse

of this ε and contraction with initial vowel verbs, especially with

diphthongs.6  Hence in the N. T. we meet such examples as the

 

            1 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 333.                  2 W.-Sch., p. 99.

            3 See good discussion in Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 186.

            4 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 336.                 5 Jann., Hist. Gk. Gr., p. 185.

            6 Ib., p. 186. Hence in mod. Gk. temporal augment is nearly gone. Al-

ready in the LXX the movement toward the loss of the temporal augment is


             CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                     367

 

following: of αι, ἐπαισχύνθη (2 Tim. 1:16); of ευ, εὐλόγησεν (Mt.

14:19), εὐδόκησα (Mt. 17:5), εὐνούχισαν (Mt. 19:12), εὐκαίρουν

(Mk. 6:31), εὐφραίνοντο (Ac. 7:41), εὐπορεῖτο (Ac. 11:29), εὐθυ-

δρομήσαμεν, (Ac. 16:11), εὐχαρίστησεν (Ac. 27:35).1  But on the

other hand we have ηὕρισκον (Mk. 14:55), προσηύξαντο (Ac. 8:15),

ηὐχόμην (Ro. 9:3), ηὐδόκησαν (Ro. 15:26); of οι, οἰκοδομήθη (Jo.

2:20), etc., but ᾠκοδόμησεν (Lu. 7:5), etc.; of ει, εἴξαμεν (Gal. 2:

5) just like Attic; of ε, διερμήνυσεν (Lu. 24:27), διεγείρετο (Jo. 6:

18), ἀνέθη (Ac. 16:26), ἀφέθησαν (Ro. 4:7, Ps. 32:1); of ο, προ-

ορώμην (Ac. 2:25; Ps. 16:8), and some MSS. in Lu. 13:13 (ἀνορ-

θώθη) and Ro. 9:29 (ὁμοιώθημεν); of ι, ἴσχυσεν (Lu. 8:43), ἱκάνωσεν,

(2 Cor. 3:6) and ἰᾶτο (Lu. 9:11); of ω, ὠνέομαι has no augment,

ὠνήσατο (Ac. 7:16), and the same, thing is true of ὠθέω, as ἀπώ-

σατο (Ac. 7:27), ἐξώσεν (Ac. 7:45).  Ἐργάζομαι has η, not ει, as

its augment according to W. H. So ἠργάζοντο (Ac. 18:3), but

always εἴχον.

          6. Compound Verbs (παρασύνθετα). The language varied in the

way it regarded compound verbs, though usually a verb derived

from a compound is treated as a unit. So ἐθηριομάχησα, ἐλιθο-

βόλησαν, ἐμοσχοποίησαν (Ac. 7:41), ἐναυάγησα, ἐπροφήτευσεν (Mk. 7:

6), ἐπαρρησιάσατο (Ac. 9:27), ἐσυκοφάντησα, but εὐηγγελίσατο (Ac.

8:35) in late Greek and προευγγελίσατο (Gal. 3:8). If the com-

pound embraces a preposition, the augment as in Attic usually

follows the preposition like ἀπήντησαν (Lu. 17:12). Some verbs

derived from nouns already compounded are augmented like verbs

compounded with a preposition, as διηκόνει (Mt. 8 : 15) unlike At-

tic. As further examples note ἀπεδήμησεν (Mt. 21:33), ἐπεθύμησαν

(Mt. 13:17), κατηγρόρουν (Mk. 15:3), ἐπεχείρησαν (Lu. 1:1), ἀπε-

λογεῖτο (Ac. 26:1), συνήργει (Jas. 2:22). Cf. Winer-Schmiedel,

p. 102.  But in Mt. 7:22 and 11:13 the Syrian class of MSS.

have προεφητεύσαμεν and -σαν.  Sometimes the preposition itself is

treated as a part of the verb when put directly to the verb, as

ἤφιεν (Mk. 1:34), ἤνοιξεν (Rev. 6:1), διήνοιγεν (Lu. 24:32), ἐκά-

θευδον (Mt. 25:5), ἐκάθητο (Mt. 13:1), ἐκάθισεν (Jo. 19:13), ἐκα-

θεζετο (Jo. 4:6).  In Mt. 13:15 ἐκάμμυσαν (from Is. 6:10) is

assimilation of καταμύω.  Verbs beginning with εὐ-- vary in aug-

mented tenses between εὐ-- and ηὐ--, but when followed by a vowel,

the verb is treated as a compound like εὐηγγελίσατο above.

          7. Double Augment. It is fairly common in the N. T. In the

 

seen (Thack., Gr., pp. 196, 199 f.). The pap. often have –ειρέθην for --ῃρέθην

(Mayser, pp. 127, 335).

            1 See W.-Sch., p. 100 f. Cf. Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 162 f.


368     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

case of ἤγαγον and εἶπον the augment is added to the aoristic re-

duplication. But in ἑώρων (Jo. 6:2 in Tischendorf's text, W. H.

ἐθεώρουν) there is a clear case of double augment like the double

reduplication in ἑώρακα.  So also the N. T. regularly ἠδυνήθην (Mt.

17:16) and even ἠδυνάσθη (Mk. 7:24). Both ἐδύνατο (Mk. 6:5)

and ἠδύνατο (Mk. 14:5) appear and the MSS. vary much. This

η (analogy to ἤθελον) first arises in the Attic in 300 B.C.1 With

μέλλω, ἤμελλον is the usual form (Jo. 4:47), though ἔμελλον occurs

also (Jo. 7:39). Βούλομαι in the N. T. never has η, though the

Text. Rec. has it in 2 Jo. 12. On the other hand θέλω always has η

(Gal. 4:20, ἤθελον) even after the initial ε was dropped.  Ἀποκα-

θίστημι has always a double augment, one with each preposition.

So ἀπεκατέστη (Mk. 8:25) and ἀπεκατεστάθη (Mk. 3:5).2  So LXX

and later Greek.3  But in Heb. 12:4 ἀντικατέστητε is the true

text.4   Ἀνοίγω has a peculiar history. It now has single augment

on the preposition, as ἤνοιξεν (Rev. 6:3), now double augment of

the verb, as ἀνέῳξεν (Jo. 9:14), now a triple augment on verb and

preposition, as ἠνεῴχθησαν (Mt. 9:30).   Ἀνεχομαι, on the other

hand, has only one augment, as ἀνεσχόμην (Ac. 18:14) and ἀνείχεσθε

(2 Cor. 11:1). For double augment in the LXX see Thackeray,

Gr., pp. 202 ff.

          VIII. The Infinitive (ἡ ἀπαρέμφατος ἔγκλισις).  The most

striking development of the infinitive in the κοινή belongs to

syntax, and not accidence.5  Hence a brief discussion will here

suffice. Blass, for instance, in his Grammar of N. T. Greek, has

no discussion of the infinitive under "Accidence," nor has

Moulton in his Prolegomena. But the infinitive has a very in-

teresting history on its morphological side.

          1. No Terminology at First. Originally it was a mere noun of

action (nomen actionis). Not all nouns of action developed into

infinitives. Brugmann6 quotes from Plato τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ δόσιν ὑμῖν

where a noun of action (δόσις) is used with the dative. This is, of

course, not an infinitive. The older Sanskrit shows quite a variety

of nouns of action used in a "quasi-infinitive sense,"7 governing

cases like the verb, but having no tense nor voice.

          2. Fixed Case-Forms. The first stage in the development was

reached when these nouns of action were regarded as fixed ease-

 

            1 Meist erh., Att. Inschr., p. 169.                       4 Hort, Notes on Orth., p. 163.

            2 So inscr. Letronne, Rec. II, p. 463.      5 Dieterich, Unters., p. 209.

            3 W.-Sch., p. 103.                                 6 Comp. Gr. (transl.), II, p. 471.

            7 Whitney, Sans. Gr., p. 203. On these infs. in posse see Brug., Comp. Gr.,

IV, p. 599.


           CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)              369

 

forms. That stage was obtained in the Sanskrit. At first the da-

tive was the most common case so used along with the accusative,

genitive, ablative and sometimes the locative. In the later San-

skrit the accusative supplanted the rest (tum or itum). Cf. the

Latin supine.1  But the Sanskrit infinitive, while governing cases,

never developed tense nor voice, and so remained essentially a

substantive.

          3. With Voice and Tense. But the second stage appears in the

Greek and Latin where it had its most characteristic develop-

ment.2 The infinitive becomes a real verbal substantive. Here

voice and tense are firmly established. But while, by analogy, the

Greek infinitive comes to be formed on the various tense and

voice stems, that is an after-thought and not an inherent part of

the infinitive. There was originally no voice, so that it is even

a debatable question if τιμῆ-σαι, for instance, and haberi are not

formed exactly alike.3 The active and the passive ideas are both

capable of development from δυνατὸς θαυμάσαι, ‘capable for won-

dering.’4  The passive infinitive had only sporadic development

in single languages.5  The middle is explained in the same way as

active and passive. The tense-development is more complete in

Greek than in Latin, the future infinitive being peculiar to Greek.

The Latin missed also the distinctive aorist infinitive. But here

also analogy has played a large part and we are not to think of

λῦσαι, for instance, as having at bottom more kinship with ἔλυσα

than with λύσις.6  Indeed the perfect and future infinitives are

both very rare in the N. T. as in the κοινή generally.7  This weak-

ening of the future infinitive is general8 in the κοινή, even with

μέλλω as well as in indirect discourse.  In Jo. 21:25 late MSS.

have χωρῆσαι instead of χωρήσειν. Indeed the papyri in the later

κοινή show a hybrid infinitive form, a sort of mixture of aorist and

 

            1 Whitney, ib., p. 347. Cf. ger. of Lat. For special treatises on the inf. see

Brug., Comp. Gr. (transl.), IV, pp. 595 ff.; Griech. Gr., p. 359. Cf. also Grune-

wald, Der freie formelhafte Inf. der Limitation im Griech. (1888); Birklein,

Entwickelungsgesch. des substant. Inf. (1888); Votaw, The Use of the Inf. in

Bibl. Gk. (1896); Allen, The Inf. in Polyb. compared with Bibl. Gk. (1907).

Jann. (Hist. Gk. Gr., pp. 480 ff., 568 ff.) has a very good sketch of the history

of the inf. in Gk. On p. 572 f. he discusses John's use of the inf. with verbs

(129 exx.). Cf. Jolly, Gesch. des Inf. im Indog. (1873); Gildersleeve, Contrib.

to the Hist. of the Articular Inf. (Transl. Am. Phil. Ass., 1878, A. J. P., vol. III,

pp. 193 ff.; vol. VIII, pp. 329 ff.; vol. XXVII, p. 105 f.).

            2 Brug., Comp. Gr. (transl.), II, p. 471.

            3 Hirt, Handb. etc., p. 433.                    6 Moulton, Prol., p. 204.

            4 Moulton, Prol., p. 203.                                    7 Votaw, Use of the Inf. in Bibl. Gk., p. 59.

            6 Hirt, Handb., p. 431.                           8 Moulton, Prol., p. 204.


370      A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

future like ἐπελεύσασθαι (even in early papyri).1  In the LXX we

find τεύξασθαι (2 Macc. 15:7) and ἐκφεύξασθαι in 2 Macc. 9:22.

In other cases the two are used side by side. It is only in the

state of the action that the infinitive has any true tense-action

developed save in indirect discourse where the infinitive tense

represents the time of the direct discourse. The infinitive thus

is like a verb in that it expresses action, governs cases, has voice

and tense.2

          4. No Personal Endings. The infinitive never developed per-

sonal endings and remained undefined, unlimited. The infinitive

and the participle are thus both infinitives in this sense, that they

are the unlimited verb so far as personal endings are concerned.

They are both participles in that they participate in both noun

and verb. The terms have no inherent distinction, but serve

merely as a convenience.3 In the nature of the case neither can

have a subject in any literal sense. But it is to be admitted even

here that the line between the finite and the infinite verb is not

absolute.4 Cf. the forms φέρε and φέρειν, for instance. But the

cases used with the infinitive will be discussed in Syntax.

          5. Dative and Locative in Form. The infinitive continued a

substantive after the voice and tense-development. At first the

case-idea of the form was observed, but gradually that disap-

peared, though the form remained. The Greek infinitives are

always either datives or locatives, "dead datives or locatives"

usually.5 All infinitives in —αι are datives. Thus all those in –ναι,

σαι, ---έναι, --μεναι (Homer), –σθαι, (–θαι). Those in --σθαι alone give

any trouble. It is probably a compound (σ, θαι), but its precise

origin is not clear.6  The locative is seen in –ειν, and Homeric –μεν,

but the origin of –ειν is again doubtful.7  But no distinction re-

mains between the two cases in actual usage.8  In Homer9 the

dative sense as well as form remain extremely common, as in-

deed is true of all Greek where the infinitive remains. The very

common infinitive of purpose, like ἦλθον ἀγοράσαι, is a true dative.

(Cf. Mt. 2:2.) But the very essence of the infinitive as a com-

plete development is that this dative or locative form could be

 

            1 Mayser, Gr. d. griech. Pap., p. 385. Cf. Moulton, Cl. Rev., Feb., 1901,

p. 36 f. Cf. Hatz., Einl., p. 190.

            2 Brug., Comp. Gr. (transl.), IV, p. 7.    4 Brug., Comp. Gr. (transl.), p.7.

            3 K.-B1., II, p. 4.                                   6 Clyde, Gk. Synt., p. 90.

            6 Cf. Giles, Man. of Comp. Philol., p. 469 f.; Brug., Grundr., II, § 1093. 8.

            7 Hirt, Handb., p. 432; Giles, Man., p. 470.

            8 Moulton, Prol., p. 202.                                    9 Monro, Horn. Gr., p. 154.


                  CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                 371

 

used in any case like any other substantive without inflection, an

indeclinable substantive in a fixed case-form.

          6. The Presence of the Article. After Homer's day it was com-

mon and chiefly in the Attic,1 but this is a matter to be treated fur-

ther in Syntax. The point to observe here is that the article did

not make a substantive of the infinitive. It was that before voice

and tense were used with it. But it is true that even in Homer

the verbal aspect is more prominent than the substantival. In

the vernacular the article was never much used with the infini-

tive; perhaps for convenience it was not so employed.

          7. The Disappearance of the Infinitive. The old forms in —ειν

and —ναι remain longest (Thackey, Gr., pp. 210, 257). The

causes for the, disappearance of the infinitive in later Greek till in

the modern Greek vernacular it is (outside of the Pontic dialect)

dead and gone, lie largely in the region of syntax. The infinitive

as a whole disappears before ὅτι and ἵνα (modern Greek νά).  Far-

rar2 calls attention to the absence of the infinitive in Arabic. It

was always a matter of discretion with a Greek writer whether in

certain clauses he would use the infinitive or an object-clause

(ὅτι, ὅπως, ἵνα).3  Cf. Latin. The English infinitive has an inter-

esting history also as the mutilated form of the dative of a ge-

rund.4

          8. Some N. T. Forms. Not many N. T. forms call for special

remark and those have been explained already, such as —οῖν (Mt.

13:32; Heb. 7:5), πεῖν and even πῖν for πιεῖν (Jo. 4:9). In Lu.

1:79 ἐπιφᾶναι instead of the Attic ἐπιφῆναι is noticeable. In Ph.

4:12 we have πεινᾶν, not –ῆν.  The Coptic has the infinitive pa-

στιγγοῖν (cf. W. H. κατασκηνοῖν, Mt. 13:32 = Mk. 4:32, and ἀποδε-

κατοῖν in Heb. 7:5). In 1 Cor. 11:6 we find both κείρασθαι and

ξυρᾶσθαι.  In Mk. 14:71 ὀμνύναι is the regular –μι form. In Heb.

11:5 εὐαρεστηκέναι is without reduplication in AKL. In Lu. 9:

18 (11:1) a periphrastic infinitive appears, ἐν τῷ εἶναι αὐτὸν προ-

σευχόμενον. The augment occurs with ἀνεῳχθῆναι. in Lu. 3:21. Cf.

ἔσομαι διδόναι in Tob. 5:15 B.

               IX. The Participle  (ἡ μετοχή).

          1. The Name. This does not really distinguish this verbal ad-

jective from the verbal substantive, the infinitive. Both are par-

 

            1 Moulton, Prol., p. 213 f.

            2 Gk. Synt., p. 164.

            3 Blass, Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 221. Thumb (Handb. of Mod. Gk.) has no

discussion of the infinitive.

            4 Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 169. Cf. Donaldson, New Crat., p. 603.


372     A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

ticiples and both are infinitives. Voss1 calls the participles

"mules" because they partake of both noun and verb, but the

infinitives are hybrid in exactly the same sense. Like the infini-

tive, the Greek participle has voice, tense, and governs cases, and

may use the article. Unlike the infinitive the participle has reg-

ular inflection like other adjectives. Clyde2 would include parti-

ciples in the infinitive. So Kuhner-Blass.3  Dionysius Thrax4

puts the participle right: Μετοχή ἐστι λέξις μετέχουσα τῆς τῶν ῥη-

μάτων καὶ τῆς τῶν ὀνομάτων ἰδίοτητος.

          2. Verbal Adjectives. As a matter of fact no absolutely clear

line can be drawn between verbal adjectives and other adjec-

tives.5 An adjective may not only be used with a case like κενός  

with the ablative, but may even take on a verbal, nature in cer-

tain connections.6  Some, like κλυτός, were always purely adjec-

tival.7  Most of the forms in –τος in Greek are adjectival, but

many of them have a verbal idea developed also, either that of

completion, as ἀγαπητός (‘beloved,’ Mt. 3:17) , or of possibility or

capability, as παθητός (‘liable to suffering,’ Ac. 26:23) . In Greek

these verbals in –τος never became a part of the verb as in Latin

perfect passive participle.8  Moulton9 shows how amatus est and

"he is loved" represent different tenses, but scriptum est and

"it is written" agree. But there was no reason why the –τος

should not have had a further verbal development in Greek. For

the structure of this verbal adjective see the chapter on Forma-

tion of Words, where a list of the chief examples is given. Moul-

ton10 points out the wavering between the active and passive idea

when the true verbal exists in the N. T., by the example of ἀδύ-

νατος, in Ro. 8:3. Is it 'incapable' as in Ro. 15:1 or 'impos-

sible' as is usual? Blass11 indeed denies the verbal character of the

τος form in the N. T. to any examples except παθητός (Ac. 26:23).

But this is too extreme, as Moulton12 clearly proves.   Ἀσύνετος is

active in Ro. 1:31 while ἀσύνθετος is middle (συντίθεμαι). With

the forms in –τος therefore two points have to be watched: first, if

they are verbal at all, and then, if they are active, middle or pas-

sive. There is no doubt as to the verbal character of the form in

τέος, which expresses the idea of necessity. This is in fact a ge-

 

            1 Farrar, Gk. Synt., p. 169.                    7 Giles, Comp. Philol., p. 474.

            2 Gk. Synt., p. 94.                                 8 Ib.

            3 II, p. 4.                                               9 Prol., 221.

            4 § 19.                                                  10 Ib.

            5 Brug., Comp. Gr., IV, p. 605.             11 Gr. of N. T. Gk., p. 37.

            6 Ib., II, p. 456,                                      12 Prol., p. 222.


             CONJUGATION OF THE VERB (  ῬΗΜΑ)                373

 

rundive and is closely allied to the –τος form.1  It has both a per-

sonal construction and the impersonal, and governs cases like the

verb. It is not in Homer2 (though —τος is common), and the first

example in Greek is in Hesiod.3  The N. T. shows only one ex-

ample, βλητέον (Lu. 5:38), impersonal and governing the accusa-

tive. It appears in a few MSS. in the parallel passage in Mk. 2:

22. One further remark is to be made about the verbals, which

is that some participles lose their verbal force and drop back to

the purely adjectival function. So ἑκών, μέλλων in the sense of

‘future.’  Cf. eloquens and sapiens in Latin.4  In general, just

as the infinitive and the gerind were surrounded by many other

verbal substantives, so the participle and the gerundive come out

of many other verbal adjectives. In the Sanskrit, as one would

expect, the division-line between the participle and ordinary ad-

jectives is less sharply drawn.5

          3. True Participles. These have tense and also voice.  Brug-

mann6 indeed shows that the Greek participle endings go back

to the proethnic participle. Already in the Sanskrit the present,

perfect and future tenses (and in the Veda the aorist) have parti-

ciples in two voices (active and middle),7 thus showing an earlier

development than the infinitive. The endings of the Greek parti-

ciples are practically the same as those of the Sanskrit. The

Latin, unlike the Sanskrit and the Greek, had no aorist and no

perfect active participle, and the future participle like acturus

may have come from the infinitive.8  The Greek has, however, two

endings for the active, —ντ for all tenses save the perfect, just like

the Sanskrit. The perfect ending (wes, –wos, –us, Greek —ως, —οτ,

ω) is difficult of explanation, but is likewise parallel with the San-

skrit.9 The perfect participle is more common in Homer than any

other form of the perfect (Sterrett, Homer's Iliad, N. 44). The

middle ending –μενο is uniform and is like the Sanskrit. The Greek

aorist passive participle ending (--θεντ) is peculiar to the Greek and

is made by analogy from the old active form like φαν-έντ-ς (φαν-είς),

 

            1 Brug., Comp. Gr., IV, p. 605.  2 Sterrett, Hom. Il., N. 28.

            3 Hirt, Handb., p. 438. Moulton (Cl. Rev., Mar., 1904, p. 112) finds one

ex. of —τέος in the pap. and "the —τος participle is common in neg. forms."

Note that he calls it a participle.

            4 Brug., Comp. Gr., II, p. 457.

            5 Whitney, Sans. Gr., p. 347.

            6 Indog. Forsch., V, pp. 89 ff. Cf. Moulton, Prol., p. 221.

            7 Whitney, Sans. Gr., p. 202.

            8 Giles, Comp. Philol., p. 474.

            9 Hirt, Handb., p. 436 f.


374 A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

 

like Latin, manens.1 The participles survive in modern Greek,

though the active, like the third declension, takes on the form

γράφοντας (γράφων).2

          The modern Greek uses chiefly the present active, the past

passive participle (Dieterich, Unters., p. 206), and some middle

or passive participles in –ούμενος or –άμενος (Thumb, Handb., p.

167). The use of the aorist and perfect active participles gave

Greek a great superiority over the Latin, which had such a usage

only in deponent verbs like sequor, secutus. But Greek used the

other participles far more than the Latin. English alone is a rival

for the Greek in the use of the participle. One of the grammarians

calls the Greeks φιλομέτοχοι because they were a participle-loving

people.3  The use of the tenses of the participle belongs to syntax.

One may merely remark here that the future participle is very

rare in the N. T. as in the papyri and κοινή generally (cf. Infinitive).

The LXX has it seldom (Thackeray, Gr., p. 194). It is found

chiefly in Luke in the N. T., as Lu. 22:49; Ac. 8:27; 20:22;

22:5; 24:11, 17.4  The N. T. itself presents no special peculiari-

ties as to the forms of the participle. In Rev. 19:13 ῥεραμμένον

has been cited under the question of reduplication.   Ἑστώς is

more frequent than ἑστηκώς.  Other perfects like ἀπολωλώς call

for no comment.

          4. In Periphrastic Use. The participle is common in the N. T.

in the periphrastic tenses. These have been given in detail under

the various tenses, but a summary at this point is desirable.

This use of the participle with various forms of the verb "to be"

is so common in all languages, ancient and modern, as hardly to

require justification. Modern English